JP2019202086A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A slot machine 10 may set an advantageous section including an attack mode or the like capable of reporting pressing order of a pressing order bell or a pressing order replay, may hold a shift lottery or the like to the advantageous section on the basis of a lottery result of each game. After shifting to the advantageous section, display of a section indicator is started based on satisfaction of a subsequent start condition, the display of a section indicator is completed when the advantageous section is completed, and up to completion of the advantageous section after satisfaction of the start condition can be grasped by display of the section indicator. The advantageous section may be completed forcibly when the number of execution times reaches the upper-limit number of times of games, and means for grasping the number of execution times of a prior state until satisfaction of the start condition after a shift to the advantageous section is provided.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

  Specifically, when a start lever is operated while a medal as a game medium is bet on a slot machine, an internal lottery is performed and rotation of the reel is started and stopped while the reel is rotating. When the switch is operated, the reel stops rotating. When the reel stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295707 A

  Here, in the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of games.

The present invention
A plurality of circling bodies provided with a plurality of patterns in the circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the orbiting bodies;
Start operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
Based on the operation of the starting operation means, lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, Payout means capable of executing payout of a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is likely to be more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state are provided,
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state in the normal gaming state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state;
Based on the fact that the game state is shifted to the specific game state and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the specific notification means is turned on to start in-state notification, and the specific game state ends. Specific gaming state notifying means for terminating the notification during the state by setting the specific notifying means to an extinguished state,
First grasping means for grasping the number of executions of the specific gaming state;
Specific ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the fact that the execution number grasped by the first grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number;
Second grasping means for grasping the number of executions of the prior state until the start condition is satisfied after the transition to the specific gaming state;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of games.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state where the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state where the front door is opened. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing | casing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the symbol which can be visually recognized from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the symbol which can be visually recognized from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a main controller. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process by a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. It is a flowchart which shows a reel control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation sequence of a stop button, and the winning aspect established. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop control of a reel. It is a flowchart which shows RT state process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation sequence of a stop button, and the winning aspect established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd RT state lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows a bonus state process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation sequence of a stop button, and the winning aspect established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relationship of each state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of display mode. It is a flowchart which shows a lottery result corresponding | compatible process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st specific combination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd specific combination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 3rd specific combination process. It is a figure which shows an example of a precursor game number table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode transfer alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the push order alerting | reporting effect performed in an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a flowchart which shows a pushing order combination process. It is a flowchart which shows a winning result corresponding | compatible process. It is a flowchart which shows a game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows an end determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special zones. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process by the display control apparatus of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process at the time of a bet. It is a flowchart which shows a start time effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notification of a pushing order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a figure which shows an example of an alerting | reporting timing table. It is a flowchart which shows each stop operation time effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between alerting | reporting timing and an additional effect. It is a flowchart which shows all stop time effect setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process during bonus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for specific role alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous production | presentation setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of a continuous production. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the transfer lottery probability of a display mode, and a setting difference. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of an instruction | indication monitor and an area indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the area display 1st process. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start aspect table of an area indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the area display 2nd process. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the start game and end game of an advantageous area, and the display of an area indicator. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the kind of advantageous area, and the display mode of an area indicator. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the display start aspect table of the area indicator in the modification 1. FIG. In the modified example 2, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the specific state process. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start aspect table of the area indicator for specific states. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start aspect table of the area indicator in the modification 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the area display 1st process. (A) is a flowchart which shows a part of reel control process, (b) is a flowchart which shows a section display 3rd process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between the kind of advantageous area, and the display start timing of an area indicator. In the modification 4, it is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between the kind of advantageous area, and the display start timing of an area indicator. In the modification 5, it is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between the kind of advantageous area, and the display start timing of an area indicator. 22 is a front view of a slot machine in Modification 6. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start aspect table of an area indicator. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start aspect table of the area indicator in the modification 7. FIG. In the modification 8, (a) is a figure which shows a part of lottery table for normal game states and the 1st RT state, (b) is a flowchart which shows a start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the area display 1st process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the display start timing of an area indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the area display 1st process in the modification 9. It is a figure for demonstrating the display end aspect table of an area indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the area display 2nd process. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a special RT state process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT states. It is a flowchart which shows a bonus state process. It is a flowchart which shows RT state process. It is a flowchart which shows the area display 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the area display 4th process. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between a special RT state, an instruction | indication monitor, and a section display. It is a figure which shows the winning aspect of the various regame results for special RT states, and the relationship of main stop appearances. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation sequence of a stop button, and the winning aspect established. It is a flowchart which shows a pushing order combination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notification of a pushing order. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process for special RT. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the alerting | reporting content at the time of special replay, and an instruction | indication monitor, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the stop appearance at the time of special replay, and the kind of advantageous area. It is. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT states in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT states. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation sequence of a stop button, and the winning aspect established. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the alerting | reporting content at the time of specific role winning, and a pressing location. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process for special RT. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the alerting | reporting content at the time of special replay winning, and a pressing location. 10 is a flowchart showing a specific combination notification process in Modification 2. (A) is a flowchart which shows the process for alert | report cancellation | release, (b) is a figure for demonstrating an example of a cancellation | release table. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process for special RT. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the specific role in special RT, and the alerting | reporting content at the time of special replay. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the winning combination and RT state of a transfer destination in the modification 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a special RT state process. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the winning combination and RT state of a transfer destination in the modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege provided in the modification 5. It is a flowchart which shows RT state process. It is a flowchart which shows a special RT state process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT states in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the winning aspect of the various regame results for special RT states, and the relationship of main stop appearances. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation sequence of a stop button, and the winning aspect established. It is a flowchart which shows the special RT command reception process by a display control apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating an alerting | reporting scenario table. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process for special RT. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the special replay winning a prize by a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st specific combination process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the area display 2nd process. It is a flowchart which shows remaining game number management processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the number of games of an advantageous area. It is a flowchart which shows a game number addition lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows an addition game number lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition game number lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows a game number addition process. It is a figure showing an example of the 1st special information lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special alerting | reporting setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. (A), (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part, (c) is a figure which shows an example of a 1st special alerting | reporting kind table. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the number of games of an advantageous area, and special alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the various mode lottery process in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows a winning result corresponding | compatible process. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode lottery table. It is a figure showing an example of the 2nd special information lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special alerting | reporting setting process. (A), (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part, (c) is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd special alerting | reporting kind table. In the modified example 2, (a) is a flowchart showing the number-of-games lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the number-of-games lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows a game number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an addition command. (A) is a figure showing an example of the 3rd special information lottery table, (b) is a figure showing an example of the 3rd special information kind table. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an add command setting process in Modification 3. It is a figure showing an example of the 3rd special information lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the area display 2nd process in the modification 4. 16 is a flowchart showing a second section display process in Modification 5. It is a figure showing an example of the 4th special information lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of attack mode completion | finish effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. (A) is a figure showing an example of the 4th special information lottery table in modification 6, (b) is a figure showing an example of the 4th special information lottery table in modification 7. In the modification 8, it is a figure which shows an example of the 4th special alert | report type table 1 and the 4th special alert | report type table 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the area display 2nd process in the modification 9. It is a figure for demonstrating the various areas in RAM of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a data initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows a special area setting process. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a special area table, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order alerting | reporting lottery table at the time of special replay winning. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. (A) is a flowchart which shows a game number management process, (b) is a flowchart which shows a pressing order combination process. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process for special replays. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number table in the modification 10. 21 is a flowchart showing an addition process for the number of games in Modification 11. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd special alerting | reporting setting process in the modification 12. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. In Modification 13, it is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of remaining games in the actual advantageous section and the number of remaining games on the display. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flowchart which shows a backstage effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special alerting | reporting setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo addition game number lottery process in the modification 14. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-addition game number table for setting value suggestion, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the number of pseudo-addition games and suggestion content. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd specific combination process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a 3rd specific combination process. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for special zone transfer lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode transfer alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows a pushing order combination process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by a lottery result and an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a flowchart which shows the special zone addition process. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition alerting | reporting timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of special zone end production. It is a flowchart which shows in-zone zone addition lottery processing in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows an example of the special addition notification timing table. In the modification 2, (a) is a flowchart which shows a lottery process after a zone, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of various addition notification timing tables. It is a flowchart which shows the post-in-zone lottery process in the modification 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional alerting | reporting timing table in the modification 3-5. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the addition effect in the modification 6. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of attack mode completion | finish effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for a mobile terminal in Modification 7. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an attack mode end effect setting process in Modification 8. FIG. In 6th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flowchart which shows the production | generation setting process at the time of the 1st stop ON. It is a flowchart which shows the process for superposition | reporting at the time of all stops. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a post-production effect. It is a flowchart which shows the production | generation setting process at the time of the 1st stop ON in the modification 1. In the modified example 2, (a) is a flowchart showing an effect setting process at the time of normal replay, and (b) is a flowchart showing a selected counter process. It is a flowchart which shows the production | generation setting process at the time of the 1st stop ON. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an alerting | reporting at the time of all stops in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the process for correction. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. In 7th Embodiment, it is a timing chart for demonstrating the completion conditions of an advantageous area. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the completion conditions of an advantageous area. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning probability of each combination according to a state. It is a figure for demonstrating the expected net increase number according to a state. It is a flowchart which shows the area display 2nd process. It is a flowchart which shows remaining game number management processing. It is a flowchart which shows a remaining number management process. It is a flowchart which shows a game number addition process. It is a figure showing an example of the 5th special information lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a 5th special alerting | reporting kind table. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that the 1st excess flag is set. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that the 2nd excess flag is set. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between each excess flag and 5th special alerting | reporting. In Modification 1, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining game number management process, (b) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number management process, and (c) and (b) are the fifth. It is a figure which shows an example of a special alerting | reporting kind table. In Modification 2, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining game number management process, (b) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number management process, and (c) is a fifth special notification type table. It is a figure which shows an example. 14 is a flowchart showing a section display second process in Modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 6th special alerting | reporting. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a 6th special alert | report lottery table, (b) is a figure which shows an example of a 6th special alert | report type table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 6th special alert | report in the modification 4. It is a figure which shows an example of each 6th special alert | report lottery table. (A) is a figure which shows a part of 6th special alerting | reporting process in the modification 5, (b) is a figure which shows a part of 6th special alerting | reporting process in the modification 6, (c) and (D) is a figure for demonstrating the alerting | reporting example that the excess flag was set. It is a flowchart which shows a part of 6th special alerting | reporting process in the modification 7. It is a flowchart which shows the special area setting process in the modification 8. It is a figure which shows an example of a special area table. It is a flowchart which shows a part of game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of attack mode completion | finish effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. In modification 9, it is a figure for demonstrating a mode in case an advantageous area increase / decrease number is less than expected. It is a flowchart which shows a reallocation process. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-games addition process in the modification 10. (A) is a flowchart which shows a deletion game number movement process, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the various counter areas in RAM of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 6th special alerting | reporting process in the modification 11. It is a flowchart which shows the press order alerting | reporting process for CB in the modification 12. In modification 13, it is a figure for demonstrating a mode when there are more advantageous area increase / decrease numbers than expected. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 7th special alerting | reporting. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a 7th special alert | report lottery table, (b) is a figure which shows an example of a 7th special alert | report type table. It is a flowchart which shows the special area setting process in the modification 14. (A) is a flowchart which shows a part of game number management process, (b) is a flowchart which shows a part of pushing order process. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order alerting | reporting table at the time of special replay winning. In the modified example 15, (a) is a flowchart which shows a part of remaining number management process, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure showing an example of the 7th special information lottery table. 21 is a flowchart showing remaining number management processing in Modification 16. In the modified example 17, (a) is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states, (b) is a figure which shows the mode of a change of medal increase / decrease. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an addition command setting process in Modification 18. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st adjustment process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd adjustment process. It is a flowchart which shows a 3rd adjustment process. It is a figure for demonstrating a mode that correction of an estimated number of sheets is performed. 24 is a flowchart showing remaining sheet number management processing in Modification 19. In modification 20, it is a figure for demonstrating the mode at the time of winning a bonus near the end of an advantageous section. It is a flowchart which shows the precursor setting process at the time of bonus winning. It is a figure for demonstrating a mode that the number of adjustment games is added to the number of precursor games. In modification 21, it is a figure for demonstrating a mode at the time of winning a bonus near the end of challenge mode. It is a flowchart which shows the precursor setting process at the time of CM duplication object combination winning. It is a figure for demonstrating a mode that the extension process of challenge mode is performed. 24 is a flowchart showing a precursor setting process at the time of a CM overlapping target combination winning in Modification 22. (A) is a figure for demonstrating a mode that the extension process of 2nd challenge mode is performed, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the difference of the advantage of 1st challenge mode and 2nd challenge mode. . In modification 23, it is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the lighting start timing at the time of changing the lighting start condition of an area indicator, and a forced end condition. It is a flowchart which shows the area display 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the area display 2nd process. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode of a prior area and an object area. In the modification 24, it is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between a prior interval and an upper limit increase number. (A) is a flowchart which shows the area display 2nd process, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the difference of the advantage of 1st challenge mode and 2nd challenge mode.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment in the case of application to a spinning cylinder type gaming machine which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the door 12, and FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed in a box shape having an open front as a whole, and is attached by, for example, driving nails against a so-called island facility when installed in the game hall.

  A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 has a bearing portion 14a at a position corresponding to each support shaft 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates about an opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. The front door 12 can be opened and closed by rotating the front door 12 so as to be movable. Further, the front door 12 is brought into a locked state that cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 that is integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right side of the front door 12, and is configured such that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

  A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided above the center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 is formed with three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into a single display window.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are disposed on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on a one-to-one basis. . Accordingly, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are projected as if moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

  Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

  Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be individually rotated, that is, independently driven by the driving of each stepping motor. . For example, the stepping motor is set to rotate once by applying a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is determined by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. In the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the reel index sensor detects that the reel has made one rotation, a detection signal is output to the main controller 101 described later each time the reel is detected. Therefore, main controller 101 determines the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

  On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction). More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch the symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (= 504 pulses / 21 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps the symbols visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, or displays the display window. It is possible to perform control to stop a predetermined symbol at a position where it can be visually recognized from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

  Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

  FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, numbers from 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. These numbers are symbols that are visible to the main controller 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Is a number for recognizing and not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number is used for explanation.

  As a symbol, a “red bell” symbol (for example, the seventh of the left reel 32L), a “white bell” symbol (for example, the twentieth of the left reel 32L), a “first replay” symbol (for example, 19 of the left reel 32L) ), “Second replay” symbol (eg, sixth of left reel 32L), “red 7” symbol (eg, tenth of left reel 32L), “watermelon” symbol (eg, eighth of left reel 32L) , “Cherry” symbol (for example, fourth of left reel 32L), “Black BAR” symbol (for example, eighteenth of left reel 32L), “White BAR” symbol (for example, seventeenth of left reel 32L), “LUCKY There are 11 types of symbols (for example, the fifth of the left reel 32L) and “youth” symbols (for example, the zeroth of the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely different.

  Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that there are three symbols from which the entire symbol can be visually recognized out of the twenty-one symbols attached to the corresponding reel. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

  In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified using a combination of three symbols, one for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the symbols that can be viewed. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible as described above, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are connected as combinations of these three symbols. The combination of symbols stopped on the upper line L1, the combination of symbols stopped on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. There are combinations of symbols that stop at the lower line L3. In addition, a combination of symbols that stop at the lower right line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M There are combinations of symbols that stop on the right rising line L5 connecting the symbols and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. In addition, there are combinations of symbols that stop at the bent line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that are straight when the symbols are arranged, and the bent line L6 is a line that is bent in the middle when the symbols are arranged. Note that there are combinations other than the bent line L6 as combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, but the description thereof is omitted here.

  Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated and a line that is not activated are set according to the bet number of medals, and when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the activated line As a winning establishment, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of medals as game media is given, or a privilege for changing the gaming state is given. On the other hand, when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on a line that is not activated, no winning is established and the above-mentioned privilege is not granted.

  In the present slot machine 10, only the right-down line L4 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 8A, and the two lines of the lower line L3 and the right-down line L4 as shown in FIG. 8B. There are a case where the combination line is an effective line and a case where only the bent line L6 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 8C. More specifically, when three medals are bet and the game is started, only the lower right line L4 is an effective line, and when two medals are bet and the game is started, The line L3 and the lower right line L4 are effective lines. When one game is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is an effective line. The three combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the right rising line L5 are not regarded as effective lines. In the following, a game started with 3 medals bet is a 3 bet game, a game started with 2 medals bet is a 2 bet game, and a game started with 1 medals bet Also called a one-bet game.

  9 to 11 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols for winning and a privilege given when winning.

  As the small role winning in which medals are paid out, there are a first small role winning to a 32nd small role winning.

  The “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the right reel 32R are on the active line. When it stops, it becomes the first small role winning. When the first small role winning is achieved, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  Although the combination of the symbols for winning the second small role to the 26th small role is different, in the 3-bet game, the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M “White BAR” design, “Red 7” design, “Cherry” design, “White Bell” design or “LUCKY” design, “White BAR” design, “Youth” design, “White Bell” design on the right reel 32R, The “red 7” symbol or the “second replay” symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the “bell” symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L stops at the top, the “cherry” symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle, and the “white BAR” symbol of the right reel 32R stops at the bottom. If it does, it will be the 8th small role prize. As shown in FIG. 6, the “reel” symbol is arranged on the middle reel 32M on the “cherry” symbol (No. 11) and the upstream side adjacent position (No. 12), and the right reel 32R includes A “red bell” symbol is arranged at a position (No. 20) one symbol separated upstream from the “White BAR” symbol (No. 18). For this reason, when the eighth small winning combination is established on the lower right line L4, the “red bell” or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the right The “red bell” symbol of the reel 32R stops on the upper line L1. When the second small part winning to the 26th small part winning are established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The 27th small part is a part in which whether or not to win is determined by a stop symbol of the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, the “cherry” of the left reel 32L is determined. The 27th small role winning is established when the symbol stops at the upper or lower level. In this case, the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 32L is upper or stopped, that is, the “cherry” symbol or the “second replay” symbol is on the active line. The 27th small role winning is established by stopping. When the 27th small role winning is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The 28th small role winning is a winning mode in which the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower level, and the “cherry” symbol may stop at the right downward line L4. More specifically, the left reel 32L has a “cherry” symbol or “second replay” symbol, the middle reel 32M has a “red bell” symbol, a “white bell” symbol or “cherry” symbol, the right reel 32R has a “cherry” symbol, When the “first replay” symbol or the “second replay” symbol stops, the 28th small role prize is awarded. When the 29th small role winning is achieved, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  In addition, the relationship between the 27th small role and the 28th small role will be supplementarily explained. When the “cherry” symbol or the “second replay” symbol of the left reel 32L is stopped, regardless of the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. Although the 27th small role winning is established, depending on the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the 28th small role winning may be achieved instead of the 27th small winning combination. In other words, although the winning mode for winning the 27th small role includes the winning mode for winning the 28th small role, the 27th small role winning and the 28th small role winning are clearly distinguished from each other. Is done.

  The 29th small role winning is a winning mode in which the “watermelon” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “watermelon” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line. In other words, when the lower right line L4 is the effective line, the “watermelon” symbol stops in line with the lower right, and the 29th small winning combination is established. When the 29th small role winning is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The 30th small role winning is a winning mode in which the “watermelon” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “watermelon” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the upper line L1. More specifically, when the “watermelon” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “red bell” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the effective line, It becomes a role prize. When the 30th small role winning is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  “Black BAR” design, “Young” design, “Watermelon” design, “First replay” design on the left reel 32L, “Red bell” design on the middle reel 32M, and “Red bell” design on the right reel 32R or “White” If the “Bell” symbol stops on the active line, it is the 31st small role winning prize. When the 31st small role winning is achieved, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  When the 32nd small role prize to the 35th small role prize are established in the 3-bet game, 3 medals are paid out, and in the 2-bet game, 14 medals are paid out.

  For example, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the “watermelon” symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M or the left reel 32L. The “watermelon” symbol of the right reel 32R stops on the effective line, while the “watermelon” symbol of the remaining reels does not stop on the effective line, which is a so-called stoppage of the so-called watermelon tempering stoppage. When the 36th small role winning is achieved, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  “Red Bell” or “White Bell” design on the left reel 32L, “Black BAR” design, “Watermelon” design, “Cherry” design on the middle reel 32M, and “Red Bell” design on the right reel 32R, “White” If the “Bell” symbol and the “Youth” symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small role prize is awarded. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol (No. 7) and the “second replay” symbol are arranged at the downstream adjacent position (No. 6). The “first replay” symbol is arranged in the “bell” symbol (No. 3, 12, 15, 20) and the downstream adjacent location (No. 2, 11, 14, 19). On the right reel 32R, the main “red bell” symbol (No. 2, No. 5, No. 12, No. 20) and the position adjacent to the upstream side (No. 3, No. 6, No. 16, No. 0) are set to “No. The “replay” symbol or the “second replay” symbol is arranged, and the “white bell” symbol (No. 10) and the “first replay” symbol are arranged at positions adjacent to the upstream side (No. 11). For this reason, when the 37th small role winning is established on the lower right line L4, the “bell” symbol and the “replay” symbol are mainly tempered on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M The “bell” symbol and the “replay” symbol do not stop. When the 37th small role winning is achieved, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  “White BAR” design, “Youth” design, “Watermelon” design, “First replay” design of the left reel 32L, “Red bell” design of the middle reel 32M, and “First replay” design of the right reel 32R, When the “watermelon” symbol and the “black BAR” symbol stop on the active line, the 38th small role prize is awarded. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the 4th “cherry” symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper to lower stages, The “red bell” symbol of the reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “red bell” symbol or the “white bell” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the middle line L2. When the 38th small role winning is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “black BAR” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line, It becomes the 39th small role prize. Although details will be described later, the 39th small role winning is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. When the 39th small role winning is established, nine medals are paid out.

  When the “red bell” or “white bell” design of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” design of the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” design of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line, It becomes the 40th small role winning prize. Although details will be described later, the 40th small role winning is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. When the 40th small winning combination is established, nine medals are paid out.

  If the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “black BAR” symbol or the “cherry” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line, the 41st small It becomes a role prize. When the 41st small role winning is achieved, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  As a prize to be given a re-game privilege that allows a player to play the next game without inserting a medal, there are a first re-game prize to an eighth re-game prize. Further, when the second regame winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third regame winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth replaying is achieved. When a winning or fifth re-game winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. The first re-game win to the eighth re-game win are winning modes that are established only in the 3-bet game.

  State transition winnings in which only the game state transition is performed include a first BB winning, a second BB winning, and a CB winning.

  When the “red 7” symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, it becomes the first BB winning, and the “white BAR” symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line. Will win the 2nd BB. When these BB winnings are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Also, the “red bell” or “white bell” design of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” design of the middle reel 32M, the “watermelon” design, the “first replay” design, and the “black BAR” of the right reel 32R. If the symbol stops on the active line, a CB win is awarded. When the CB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

  In addition, although it is different from winning, there is a stop appearance in which the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “white BAR” symbol, the “LUCKY” symbol, the “red 7” symbol, the “white bell” symbol, “ When the “cherry” symbol, the “watermelon” symbol of the right reel 32R, and the “first replay” symbol stop on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Also, the “red bell” or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M, the “white BAR” symbol, the “young” symbol, and the “white bell” symbol of the right reel 32R. , “Red 7” symbol and “Second Replay” symbol also stop on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Below, the combination of each said symbol is called a transition outcome.

  On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 that is operated to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated while a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

  On the right side of the start lever 41, button-like stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is disposed immediately below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped.

  Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and a main control device 101 to be described later are connected. And main controller 101 grasps that operation of stop switches 42-44 was performed based on the detection signal from stop detection sensors 42a-44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, a detection signal of a LOW signal is output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, The detection signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 grasps the switching of the signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. When it is determined that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 performs control so as to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

  That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  On the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. If attention is paid to the point that the medal insertion slot 45 is directly inserted by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

  The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal path switching solenoid 46a. When the medal path switching solenoid 46a is not excited, the medal is guided to the discharge path 48, and when the medal path switching solenoid 46a is excited, the medal is selected. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

  The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to a player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medal to the opening 48 a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medal to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, a reserve tank 54 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 51 to avoid storing a predetermined amount or more of medals in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored more than the height at which the guide plate 52 a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank 54.

  A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 is jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically operated so that the medal jammed in the selector 46 becomes a medal. It is returned from the discharge port 49.

  On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, there is provided a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitutes input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. It should be noted that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an operation of directly inserting a medal by the player, whereas each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is only accompanied by an operation of inserting a virtual medal based on the storage memory. In other words, it can be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media.

  Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, an effect switch 66 that is operated when an effect occurs is provided. That is, a first credit insertion switch 56 and a third credit insertion switch 58 are provided on the left side of the effect switch 66, and a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the right side of the effect switch 66. Yes.

  A settlement switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. In other words, the slot machine 10 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored and stored condition, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal discharge port 49 as an actual medal. In this case, if paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the checkout switch 59 constitutes a checkout operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

  Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25, a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals credited, and a remaining payout number that displays the number of remaining medals to be paid out before the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display parts 60-62 are comprised by the 7 segment display, it is naturally possible to substitute by a liquid crystal display etc. FIG.

  In the gaming panel 25, below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, on the right side of the payout number display section 62, a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the operation order are notified. Is provided with a section indicator for indicating an advantageous section, which is a section in which the winning rate of the small role is changed and the game can proceed in a situation advantageous to the player, and an instruction monitor 68 having the section display. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

  The upper part of the front door 12 has an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right sounds that produce various sound effects as the game progresses and inform the player of the gaming state. Speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and it can be considered that the game by each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is caused by the main display unit. This is referred to as an auxiliary display unit 65. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is provided on the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65.

  A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 accommodates a power supply device 91 therein, and includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hole manager or the like to adjust the appearance of medals. That is, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when the error state is reset but also when the winning probability of the slot machine 10 is changed.

  Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that manages and manages games is attached to the housing 11.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described based on the block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13.

  The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centering on a CPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave with a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

  On the input side of the main controller 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects an operation of the start lever 41 are provided. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, a inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects a medal inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal paid out from the hopper device 51. The payout detection sensor 51a, the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the third credit. The operation of the input switch 58 is detected individually. 3 credit insertion detection sensor 58 a, payment detection sensor 59 a that detects the operation of the payment switch 59, reset detection sensor 72 a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73 a for detecting the above are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104.

  A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91 a that supplies driving power to the electronic devices of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91 b, and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power-off state and generates a power failure signal not only at the time of power failure but also when the power switch 71 powers off. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 VDC in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been shut off when this drive voltage drops below, for example, 10 volts. Power outage signal is output. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104. The CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal and executes a power failure process described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81.

  The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts that is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101 even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. As a time for outputting the stabilization voltage, a sufficient time for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101 is secured.

  On the output side of the main controller 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), a medal path switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a display control device 81, an external concentration terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. Connected.

  The CPU 102 described above includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 102 and fixed value data, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for assuring, as is well known, various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission / reception circuit, a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage unit, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

  The RAM 106 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power to the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing a lottery result of a combination, and stop information used when stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the game information, the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

  The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like (including power shutdown by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before power-off based on the backup area information. . Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is shut off by a power failure process (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

  Further, a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power is shut off, an NMI interrupt process as a power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centering on a CPU 181 which is arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 181 and fixed value data, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

  The display control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the output side. Yes. The upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main controller 101. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-base for executing auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 which is a main base for managing and managing the game. In other words, the sub-base is provided for voice, lamp, and display related to indirect games, thereby reducing the burden on the main base.

  An effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects an operation of the effect switch 66) is connected to the input side of the display control device 81. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control apparatus 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in a cycle of 1.49 msec in the present embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. NMI interrupt processing that is activated in response to the input of. In the following, a process related to the progress of the game among these processes, that is, a timer interrupt process and a normal process performed in the main process will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main control apparatus 101. A timer interrupt is generated, for example, every 1.49 msec by the CPU 102 of the main control apparatus 101.

  First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure flag is set. If the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, and a power failure process is executed.

  Here, an outline of the power failure process will be described.

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106.

  In the power failure process, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed. If the transmission is not completed, the present process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process to terminate the command transmission. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is stored in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal when the power failure is eliminated is stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of, for example, the case where the power failure flag is set erroneously due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been recovered. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power outage signal is continuously output, the infinite loop is entered. Incidentally, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure signal is output even under an infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is not output, the main processing is performed.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

  That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor that is a respective rotating drum driving motor is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether or not the read result is normal. A sensor monitoring process for monitoring the above is performed. In step S108, timer calculation processing for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S109, a counter process for outputting the result of counting the number of medals bet and the number of payouts to the external concentration terminal board 121 is performed.

  In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command to be described later to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, a segment data setting process for setting segment data displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting processing is supplied to the display units 60 to 62 to display corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 is returned to the corresponding register in the CPU 102, respectively. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

  Next, normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 and the like finish initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

  As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random value used in the previous game) is cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

  In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any re-game winning is established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings has been established, an automatic insertion process for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Specifically, when a re-game prize is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting three virtual medals is performed. When a re-game prize is established in a one-bet game, one virtual medal is obtained. A process for automatically inserting medals is performed. By the way, in this embodiment, the re-game winning is not established in the 2-bet game, but if it is modified so that the re-game winning is also established in the 2-bet game, two cards are obtained in this automatic insertion process. It is recommended to set the virtual medal to be automatically inserted.

  In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any re-game winning is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game winnings have been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to confirm whether an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interruption process, If an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the sensor reading result is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process for paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal I do.

  After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets or the like is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended as it is.

  After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the bet number of medals has reached a specified number. In the slot machine 10, “2” is set as the specified number in the CB state, and a gaming state other than the CB state (specifically, a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, BB) “1” and “3” are set as the prescribed numbers in the state). That is, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is “2”, and on the condition other than the CB state, the bet number is “1” or “3”. In step S205, an affirmative determination is made. In other words, in a gaming state other than the CB state, if no medal is bet or if the bet number is “2” even if the bet is bet, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

  If the bet number has reached the specified number, the mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. The transition notification process will be described in detail later.

  After performing the process of step S206, the bet command including the information of the process result of step S206 and the information of the bet number determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the display control apparatus 81 as the control apparatus on the sub side. Set as output target. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received the bet command will be described in detail later.

  After performing the process of step S207, it is determined whether the start lever 41 was operated in step S208. When the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed among the processes.

  On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a prescribed number of medals are betted. Means that a command has occurred. In such a case, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed in step S209. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the lower right line L4 is set as an effective line, and in the 2-bet game, the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 are set as active lines. In the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as an active line. In step S210, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process in step S211, the reel control process in step S212, the medal payout process in step S213, the RT state process in step S214, and the bonus state process in step S215 are executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

  Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

  After acquiring the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for determining whether or not the winning combination is selected is selected. The slot machine 10 is roughly divided into six game states: a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. It is set for each gaming state.

  That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the gaming state is selected. . For example, if the bet number is “3” and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the lottery table for the normal gaming state is displayed. select. Further, in this slot machine 10, a six-stage winning probability from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation is performed. Thus, it is possible to set which winning probability is to execute the internal processing. In step S302, the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected when the setting state is “setting 1”, and the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected when it is “setting 6”.

  Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the processing related to the setting of the winning probability.

  The winning probability setting process is executed in a main process activated by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned ON, and the power is turned on. It is started after the initialization process. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 every time the start lever 41 is operated. For example, every time the start lever 41 is operated, “setting 1” → “setting 2” The setting value is updated so that “setting 3” → “setting 4” → “setting 5” → “setting 6” → “setting 1”. Each set value is displayed on the credit display unit 60, for example, and the display is updated every time the set value is updated. Then, based on the fact that the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 is also ended. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored setting value.

  The lottery table will be briefly described. FIG. 17 is a normal game state lottery table selected in the normal game state of “setting 3”. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV.

  After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and a determination value DV used for determining whether or not the winning combination is determined is set in subsequent step S304. In the determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is set as the current determination value DV, and a new point value PV corresponding to 1 as the current index value IV is added to the random value. The determination value is DV.

  Thereafter, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. In the combination determination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If 65535 is exceeded, it is determined in step S306 whether one of the first BB, the second BB, and the CB is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an affirmative determination is made in step S305 with an index value IV (IV = 32 to 48) including any of the first BB, the second BB, and the CB. If an affirmative determination is made in step S306, a corresponding bonus winning flag (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S307. When a negative determination is made in step S306, or after the processing of step S307, the winning flag of each small role corresponding to the index value IV determined positive in step S305 is displayed in the winning flag storage area in step S308. The process set in 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 32, the first BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th small role winning flag, the 33rd small winning symbol, Set the 35 small role winning flag. If the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 15, a winning flag indicating that the 30th and 41st small roles have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

  By the way, if the set winning flag is not the winning flag (first BB winning flag) indicating that the first BB has been won or the winning flag (second BB winning flag) indicating that the second BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a is displayed. The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set (see S203 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset as one of the conditions that the corresponding winning is established. In other words, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

  In step S306 to step S308 in the state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, if the winning combination other than the first BB, second BB, and CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the first BB, If the winning combination other than the second BB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

  That is, for example, in the state where the 1BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 32, the 1BB winning flag is not set and the 28th small role winning flag is set. , The 33rd small role winning flag and the 35th small role winning flag are set. Further, in the state where the first BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 33, the second BB winning flag is not set, the 28th small role winning flag, the 33rd The small role winning flag and the 35th small role winning flag are set.

  In addition, a lottery table in a state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over is prepared separately, and in the state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, a lottery process is performed using the separately prepared lottery table. It is good also as composition which performs. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so that the first BB, the second BB, and the CB are not won.

  If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, 1 is added to the index value IV in step S309, and in the subsequent step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined whether or not, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of whether or not the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for determining whether or not the previous winning combination is a new determination value DV. In step S305, whether or not a winning combination is made is determined based on the determination value DV. By the way, when the winning / failing determination of the combination is performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 17, the probability of winning in the normal replay (the probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 / 7.3, strong cherry The probability of winning a prize (the probability of winning when IV = 13) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (the probability of winning when IV = 14) is about 1/183. is there. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (the probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/300, the probability of winning a weak watermelon (the probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 218 minutes 1. Probability of winning chance A (probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1/252, probability of winning chance B (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 252 A fraction. The probability of winning the middle bell (the probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 1/32800, the probability of winning the unquestioned bell (the probability of winning when IV = 20) is about 65500 minutes 1. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch bell 1, pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 21-24) is about 43.7, respectively. The probability of winning 1 (1) middle pressed bell 2, 2 right pressed bell, and 2 right pressed bell (probability of winning when IV = 25 to 28) is about 12.8. The probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1770, the probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is The probability of winning about 1/6803, weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is about 1/280, the probability of winning weak cherry overlap 2 (when IV = 35) The probability of winning is about 6550. The probability of winning strong watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 1/280, and the probability of winning strong watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is About 1/550. The probability of winning a weak watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1/100, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is About 1/550. The chances of winning chance A overlap 1, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 1, chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 40 to 43) are about 1/280, respectively. The probability of winning the middle bell duplication 1 and the middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 44, 45) is about 1/2620. The probability of winning the first BB and the second BB independently (probability of winning when IV = 46, 47) is about 1/65500. The probability of winning a CB (the probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 19.9. In addition, the probability of losing no winning combination is about 1.96.

  In the normal gaming state lottery table, 0 is set for the point values PV of IV = 2 to 12, 29 to 31, 49 to 52. For this reason, in the normal gaming state, these index values IV are not won.

  After the winning flag is set in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the winning combination determination has ended. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and freeze lottery processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

  In subsequent step S312, a lottery result handling process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S311 and a process for notifying the pressing order are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

  After executing the process of step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the combination determination. However, in the normal process, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 81. The command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

  In step S314, stop information setting processing for setting a stopable symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R based on the lottery result of the current game is executed. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to a winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when a strong cherry is won (winned when IV = 13) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, symbols corresponding to the 28th small role, 32nd small role to 35th small role winning are displayed on each reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R, stop symbol information is set so that it can be stopped. In addition, when the strong cherry duplication 1 is won (winning when IV = 32) and the strong cherry winning flag and the first BB winning flag are set, the 28th small role, the 33rd small role, the 35th small role and the 1st Stop symbol information is set so that the symbol corresponding to the 1BB winning can be stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

  In subsequent step S315, when a plurality of symbols that can be stopped are set in step S314, priority setting processing for setting the priority order is executed. For example, in the case where a plurality of role types are selected among the small role, replay, and bonus types, the following priority order is set. When winning a small role and a bonus, the priority order is set so that a bonus winning is established when the small winnings cannot be established, so that the small winnings are preferentially established. When replays and bonuses are won, priority is set so that replay wins are established with priority.

  For example, when the strong cherry duplication 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th small role, the 33rd small role, the 35th small role, and the first BB winning is set, the 28th than the first BB winning is set. The priority order is set so that the small combination, the 33rd small combination, and the 35th small combination winning are established with priority. In addition, for example, when the first BB winning is carried over, and when the normal replay is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the first BB winning and the first replay winning is set, the first BB winning is more than the first BB winning. A priority order is set so that one regame winning is established with priority.

  After performing the process of step S315, after performing the area display 1st process in step S316, a lottery process is complete | finished. The section display first process is a process related to the display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this process will be described in detail later.

  Next, the reel control processing in step S212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In the reel control process, first, a rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using the reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

  In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started to rotate in the previous game. Wait until When the wait time has elapsed, a wait time for the next game is reset, and a motor control initialization process for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, stepping motor acceleration processing is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. For this reason, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the process waits until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant rotation speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the rotation start process ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting up a lamp (not shown) of each stop switch 42 to 44. Is notified to a player or the like.

  Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. When none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, the process waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404 to determine whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been issued. To do. If no stop command has been issued, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command is generated, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

  In step S406, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base point position (lower in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol reaching the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reels to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, a stop mode for stopping the reaching symbol reaching the base position as it is is supported. Stop mode for stopping the reel to be slid after one symbol, Stop mode for stopping after sliding for two symbols, Stop mode for stopping after sliding for three symbols, Stop after sliding for four symbols There are prepared five patterns of stop modes. Therefore, in step S407, based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b, one of 0 to 4 is calculated as the number of slips. Thereafter, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reaching symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. If they are equal, a reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. Do. Thereafter, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412 and the process returns to step S403.

  Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop appearance of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when IV = 24 to 31 is won, that is, forward-pressing bell 1, forward-pressing bell 2, pinching-pressing bell 1, pinching-pressing bell 2, center-pressing bell 1, center-pressing bell 2, right When the push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “push order bell”) are won (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that have generated stop commands are selected. A stop information second setting process is performed to change the winning mode established according to the operation order.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the second small role winning, the seventh small winning or the ninth small winning is achieved when the left stop switch 42 is operated first. Then, stop information is set so that the first small role winning is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the first time, the second small winning combination is obtained. Stop information is set so that a winning combination or a ninth small winning combination is established. However, even if stop information is set in this way, a corresponding winning may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, after the reels 32 </ b> L, 32 </ b> M, and 32 </ b> R are slid by a maximum of 4 symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state in the normal game mode. It can be stopped, and only the right downward line L4 is set as an effective line. For this reason, when the same symbols are arranged on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at intervals of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol is effective when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on line. On the other hand, with respect to the symbols arranged so that a section separated by 5 symbols or more is formed, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the active line.

  An example will be described in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 43, and the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop so as to establish the second small winning combination, the seventh small winning combination, or the ninth small winning combination.

  The second small role symbols on the left reel 32L are the “red bell” symbol and the “white bell” symbol. Further, the “red bell” symbol and the “white bell” symbol also have a function as a seventh small role symbol, and also have a function as a ninth small role symbol. On the left reel 32L, the second small role symbols (seventh small role symbols, ninth small role) are arranged so that the interval between them becomes four symbols or less. For this reason, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the “red bell” symbol or the “white bell” symbol stops at the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 4th “cherry” symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage, as shown in FIG. 20A, the 7th “red bell” The symbol stops at the top. As a result, there remains room for the second small part winning, the seventh small winning, or the ninth small winning on the right-down line L4.

  The second small role symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “white BAR” symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the “white BAR” symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. The seventh small symbol of the middle reel 32M is the “red 7” symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the “red 7” symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. The ninth small symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “cherry” symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the “cherry” symbol is arranged only at the 11th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small role symbol, the seventh small role symbol or the ninth small role symbol stops on the active line, or the second small role symbol, the seventh small role symbol, None of the ninth small role symbols stop on the active line.

  Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at a timing when any one of the 13th “first replay” symbol to the 17th “first replay” symbol reaches the lower stage, the second small role The symbol “white BAR” stops in the middle. As a result, there remains room for the second small role winning on the right-down line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at a timing when any of the 9th “second replay” symbol to the 13th “first replay” symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. The “red 7” symbol, which is the seventh small role symbol, stops in the middle. As a result, there remains room for the seventh small role winning on the right-down line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any of the 6th “white bell” design to the 10th “youth” design has reached the lower stage, the 9th small role design, the “cherry” design, To stop. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, the second small role symbol, the seventh small role symbol, and the ninth small role symbol are displayed even if the middle reel 32M is slid for four symbols and then stopped. It cannot be stopped in the middle. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the second “LUCKY” symbol or the sixth “white bell” symbol stops in the middle.

  When the seventh small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the seventh small role winning can be established.

  The seventh small role symbol of the right reel 32R is a “white bell” symbol. On the right reel 32R, the “white bell” symbol is arranged only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh small role symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the “first replay” symbol No. 10 to the “white bell” symbol No. 10 reaches the lower stage, FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the “white bell” symbol as the seventh small role symbol stops at the lower stage. As a result, a seventh small winning combination is established on the right-down line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the “watermelon” symbol or the “first replay” symbol stops at the lower stage. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the third “second replay” symbol reaches the lower stage, the fourth “watermelon” symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. Stop at the bottom. From the left, the combination of the “white bell” symbol, “red 7” symbol, and “watermelon” symbol is a transitional outcome as shown in FIG.

  When the 9th small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, the stop information is changed so that the 9th small role winning can be established in the stop information second setting process.

  The ninth small role symbol of the right reel 32R is the “youth” symbol. On the right reel 32R, the “youth” symbol is arranged at the 15th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth small role symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when any of the 11th “first replay” design to the 15th “young” design reaches the lower stage, it is the 9th small role design. The “Youth” design stops at the bottom. As a result, the ninth small winning combination is established on the right-down line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the “watermelon” symbol or the “first replay” symbol stops at the lower stage. From the left, the combination of the “white bell” symbol (“red bell” symbol), the “cherry” symbol, and the “watermelon” symbol (“first replay” symbol) is a transitional outcome as shown in FIG.

  When the second small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the second small role winning can be established.

  The second small role symbol of the right reel 32R is a “white BAR” symbol. On the right reel 32R, the “white BAR” symbol is arranged at the 18th position. For this reason, the second small role symbol may or may not stop on the active line depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 14th “watermelon” design to the 18th “white BAR” design reaches the lower stage, The “White BAR” symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the right-down line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the “watermelon” symbol or the “first replay” symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of the “white bell” symbol (“red bell” symbol), the “white BAR” symbol, and the “watermelon” symbol (“first replay” symbol) from the left is a transitional outcome as shown in FIG.

  When the second small role symbol, the seventh small role symbol and the ninth small role symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle stage, that is, the “LUCKY” symbol or the “white bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage. In this case, in the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed so that the “watermelon” symbol or the “first replay” symbol stops at the lower stage.

  On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol are arranged so that the interval between the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" is 4 symbols or less. For this reason, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the “watermelon” symbol or the “first replay” symbol stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of the “white bell” symbol (“red bell” symbol), “LUCKY” symbol (“white bell” symbol), and “watermelon” symbol (“first replay” symbol) is transferred as shown in FIG. It is a dice.

  As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the second small winning combination is established and the seventh small combination is achieved. One of a case where a winning is achieved, a case where a ninth small role winning is established, and a case where the transitional outcome is stopped.

  Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in order to establish the first small winning combination.

  On the middle reel 32M, the “red bell” symbols as the first small role symbols are arranged such that the interval between the “red bell” symbols is 4 symbols or less. For this reason, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the “red bell” symbol stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

  On the left reel 32L, a “red bell” symbol and a “white bell” symbol, which are the first small role symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the first small role symbols is 4 symbols or less. For this reason, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the second time, the “red bell” symbol or the “white bell” symbol stops at the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

  On the right reel 32R, the “red bell” symbol and the “white bell” symbol which are the first small role symbols are arranged so that the interval between the first small role symbols is 4 symbols or less. For this reason, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the “red bell” symbol or the “white bell” symbol stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

  As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing.

  If the push order bell is won, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operation sequences, the first small role winning is established regardless of the operation timing. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, a small winning combination is established or the transition outcome is stopped on the active line depending on the operation timing. By the way, when winning the middle bell, the 38th small role winning is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing, and when winning the unquestionable bell, the operation is performed regardless of the operation order and operation timing. One small role winning is established.

  Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the payout number of medals as one of the conditions that the combination of winning symbols is arranged on the active line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning is achieved on the effective line. judge. If a winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination is associated with the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed while the slot machine 10 is set in an error state. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

  After performing the payout determination process, a winning result handling process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

  After performing the winning result handling process, the section display second process is executed in step S415. The second section display process is a process related to the display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this process will be described in detail later. Thereafter, in step S416, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can recognize the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

  Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

  In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the payout number set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a small winning combination has not been established. In this case, based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process, it is determined whether or not any of the first re-game winning to the eighth re-game winning is achieved. If none of the re-game winnings have been established, the medal payout process is terminated, and if any of the re-game winnings have been established, a re-game setting process is performed for changing the gaming state to the re-gaming state. Then, the medal payout process is terminated. In the start waiting process described above (step S204), the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the current gaming state is the re-gaming state.

  On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals are paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, when the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the payout number is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. In addition, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the payout number, the medal payout rotating plate is driven and the medal is discharged from the hopper device 51. It pays out to the medal tray 50 through the exit 49. In the medal payout process, a process of changing the payout number displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the medal payout is also performed. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the payout number is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the remaining payout number displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. .

  Next, the RT state process in step S214 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition outcome has stopped on the active line. If the transition is stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. Thereafter, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S501 that the transition outcome is not stopped on the active line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second re-game winning is determined based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. It is determined whether or not it is established. When the second re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. Thereafter, this process is terminated. In addition, when the game is stopped on the active line in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and in step S503. Then, the first RT setting flag is set, and this process is terminated.

  If the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. In step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the first RT setting flag being set in the state information storage area 106c, and the first RT state lottery table is selected. To do.

  FIG. 22 is a first RT state lottery table selected in the first RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the normal gaming state lottery table (see FIG. 17), the first RT state lottery table is different in the point values PV of IV = 1 to 5, and the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. For this reason, when the winning / failing determination is made using such a lottery table, the probability of winning in the case of IV = 6 to 52 is equal to the winning probability in the normal gaming state, and winning in the case of IV = 1. The probability of winning will be about 17.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2-5 will be about 12.8. The probability of losing none of the roles is about 1.94.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if the winning is made when IV = 1, the normal replay is won, and if the winning is made when IV = 2, the first promoted replay 1 is won. If it is elected at the time of = 3, it will be elected to the first promotion replay 2; if it is elected at the time of IV = 4, it will be elected to the first promotion replay 3; If this happens, the first promotion replay 4 will be won. The probability of winning in any of IV = 1 to 5 is about 7.30. The normal replay winning probability under the normal gaming state is also approximately 1 / 7.30. In other words, when the gaming state transitions to the first RT state, a winning mode in which each of the small role, replaying, and bonus types is won with the same probability as the normal gaming state, while a replaying privilege is given. Changes to something different from the normal gaming state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, only the first re-game prize that does not shift the gaming state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game prize, there is a third re-game prize that shifts to the second RT state. To establish.

  In the stop information second setting process (step S409), a stop command is issued not only when the above-mentioned push order bell is won but also when the first promoted replay 1 to the first promoted replay 4 are won. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established according to the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won, unlike the case where the push order bell is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay prize or The third replay prize will be established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third regame is associated with one of the six operation sequences, and the first regame corresponds to the other operation sequences. It is attached.

  In the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also assigned as the winning combination. However, none of the six operation sequences is associated with the sixth to eighth games. Therefore, even if the 6th replay to the 8th regame are elected to the first promotion replays 2 to 4, no winning is made regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is assigned to the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is assigned to the first replay and the first replay. In addition to the 3 replays, the 6th replay is assigned, and in the 1st promotion replay 3, the 7th regame is assigned in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and the 1st promotion replay 4 is Although the 8th regame is assigned in addition to the 1st regame and the 3rd regame, the replay to win in any of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 is the 1st regame and the 3rd regame. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations in which the third replay prize is established. That is, for example, if there is only one type of first promotion replay, the operation order corresponding to the third replay winning will also be one type, and the third replay winning will be intentionally established when the first promotion replay is won. This can be possible. Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other duplicate roles.

  Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second re-game winning is not established, the process proceeds to step S506, on the basis of the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determining process, It is determined whether or not a third replay prize has been established. When the third replay winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and this process is terminated. To do.

  If the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. In step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the second RT setting flag being set in the state information storage area 106c, and the second RT state lottery table is selected. To do.

  FIG. 24 is a second RT state lottery table selected in the second RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the first RT state lottery table (see FIG. 22), the second RT state lottery table is different in the point values PV of IV = 1 to 10, and the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning / failing determination is made using such a lottery table, the probability of winning in the case of IV = 11 to 52 is equal to the winning probability in the first RT state, and the winning in the case of IV = 1. The probability of being won is about 13.2 and not winning when IV = 2-5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6-8 is about 10.5, IV = 9, respectively. , 10, the probability of winning is about 1/00. The probability of losing no winning combination is about 1/150. That is, when transitioning to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal gaming state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game prize that does not shift the gaming state, the second re-game prize that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth re-game prize that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth re-game prize Winning is established.

  In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 described above are won, the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3, the second promotion replay 1, the first Even when the 2 promotion replay 2 is won, stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that have generated the stop command.

  FIG. 23B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first regame prize or the second regame prize is always established. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first regame prize, the fourth regame prize, and the fifth regame prize is surely established. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first regame prize or the fourth regame prize is always established.

  In addition, the number attached | subjected to the 4th regame in a figure respond | corresponds with the symbol combination at the time of the 4th regame winning a prize being established. “1” corresponds to a symbol combination that becomes a disjointed pattern, and “2” corresponds to a symbol combination that stops the middle stage of red 7, red 7, and black BAR (see FIG. 11). For example, when the left stop switch 42 is first operated when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that becomes a disparity stops and the fourth re-game winning is established, or red 7 -The symbol combination that stops the middle stage of red 7 / black BAR stops and the fourth regame prize is established.

  Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third regame winning is not established, the process proceeds to step S509, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether the fourth regame prize or the fifth regame prize is established. If the fourth regame prize and the fifth regame prize are not established, the present process is terminated as it is. If the fourth regame prize or the fifth regame prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. Then, this process ends.

  If the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. In step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the setting of the third RT setting flag in the state information storage area 106c, and the third RT state lottery table is selected. To do.

  FIG. 25 is a third RT state lottery table selected in the third RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the second RT state lottery table (see FIG. 24), the third RT state lottery table is different in the point values PV of IV = 9 to 12, and the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. For this reason, when the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed using the lottery table, the probability of winning in the case of IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 52 is equal to the winning probability in the second RT state, and IV = 9, 10 In the case of IV = 11, 12, the probability of winning is about 1 / 7.0. The probability of losing no winning combination is about 1/150. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the third RT state, the winning mode is such that each of the small role, replaying, and bonus types is won with the same probability as the second RT state, and a regaming privilege is given. Changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the third RT state, in addition to the first re-game prize that does not shift the gaming state and the second re-game prize that shifts to the first RT state, the sixth re-game prize that does not shift the gaming state, A 7 re-game prize, an 8th re-game prize, and a third re-game prize that shifts to the second RT state are established.

  In the stop information second setting process (step S409), even when the BAR replay 1 and the BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode is changed according to the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command. Set stop information as much as possible.

  FIG. 23C is an explanatory diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When BAR Replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first re-game prize, the sixth re-game prize, the seventh re-game prize, and the third re-game prize Is always true. When BAR Replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first re-game prize, the sixth re-game prize, the eighth re-game prize, and the third re-game prize Is always true.

  Next, the bonus state process of step S215 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

  In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether any of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set. If any of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not a CB winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a CB winning is established, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in the remaining payout counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out in the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

  Here, the CB and the CB state will be briefly described.

  The “red bell” or “white bell” design of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” design of the middle reel 32M, the “watermelon” design, the “first replay” design or the “black BAR” design of the right reel 32R When, stops on the active line, a CB winning is obtained. The CB symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R so that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 symbols or less. For this reason, when CB is won, CB winning is established regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  The main control device 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. In step S205 of the normal process, it is determined whether or not the bet number of medals has reached “2” instead of “3”. In the effective line setting process (step S209), the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 are determined. Is set as the active line.

  In step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the CB state lottery table is omitted, in the CB state lottery table, “0” is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 48, and “16384” is set as the point value of IV = 49 to 52. Is set (see FIG. 17 etc. for the correspondence between IV and winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning the CB small role 1 (the probability of winning when IV = 49) is about 4.00, and the probability of winning the CB small role 2 (IV = 50). (Probability of winning at the time of winning) is about 4.00, the probability of winning CB SME 3 (probability of winning when IV = 51) is about 4.00, and CB The probability of winning the small and medium role 4 (the probability of winning when IV = 52) is about 4.00. No deviating event occurs.

  FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, no matter which CB medium role 1 to CB medium role 4 is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, some small role winning It must be true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, 15 medals are awarded when the first small role winning, the 27th small role winning, the 31st small role winning, the 36th small role winning through the 38th small role winning is achieved. When a payout is made and a second small part prize to a 26th small part prize, a 28th small part prize to a 30th small part prize, a 32nd small part prize to a 35th small part prize is established, 14 pieces are awarded. Medals are paid out. That is, when the CB state is entered, 14 or 15 medal payouts are always made.

  In addition, in place of or in addition to the CB as the winning combination and the CB state as the gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that enables execution of one game (JAC game) as the winning combination, and the single bonus winning (winning) SB state that shifts based on

  Returning to the description of the bonus state process, if it is determined in step S603 that a CB winning is not established, it means that a bonus winning flag other than the CB is set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether the first BB winning or the second BB winning is established.

  If any BB winning is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and BB is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. The flag is set. Thereafter, in step S612, 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and a process of displaying 216 on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is performed. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the upper limit payout number in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals having been paid out in the BB state have been paid out.

  By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. In step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the BB setting flag being set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding lottery table for the BB state is selected. .

  FIG. 28 is a BB state lottery table selected in the BB state that is shifted in the first BB or the second BB. In the lottery table for the BB state, “0” is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 28, 32 to 52, and “21845” is set as the point value of IV = 29 to 31. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the BB medium role 1 (the probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1 / 3.00, and the probability of winning the BB small role 2 (IV = 33). (Probability of winning at the time of winning) is about 1 / 3.00, and the probability of winning BB small and medium role 3 (winning probability at IV = 34) is about 1 / 3.00. The probability of losing no winning combination is about 1/65500.

  FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. As described above, the first small role winning is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first small role winning prize, Either the 39th small role winning or the 40th small role winning is always established. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, nine medals are paid out when the first small role winning, the 39th small winning combination, and the 40th small winning combination are established. Since the probability of losing in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a gaming state in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

  If a negative determination is made in step S609 and any BB winning is established, processing for setting a carryover command is performed in step S613. The carry-over command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp that the bonus winning is not established in the bonus winning game and has become a so-called carry-over state. Is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110).

  Here, in this embodiment, in a game played in a carry-over state, winning of other bonuses is restricted. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal gaming state (FIG. 17), when a winning combination with a bonus of IV = 32 to 48 (first BB, second BB, CB) is won, these bonuses are dealt with. The winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, if a winning combination with each of the small combinations of IV = 32 to 45 is won, the winning flag for each of these small combinations is set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is not set, and the small combination Only winnings are valid. That is, it can be said that the carry-over state is a state where bonus lottery is restricted.

  If the gaming state has shifted to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining payout number counter has become 0. When the value has become 0, a process of clearing the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is performed. In the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game is set. The end determination process will be described in detail later.

  As shown in steps S602 to S614, when a CB is won and a CB winning is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. For this reason, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state when the CB winning is established is returned. For example, when a CB winning is achieved under the normal gaming state, the game returns to the normal gaming state after the CB state ends, and when a CB winning is achieved under the third RT state, the third RT state is completed after the CB state ends. Return to. On the other hand, when the first BB and the second BB are won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB winning is established. For this reason, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state is ended, even if the first BB winning is established under the second RT state, the state shifts to the normal gaming state. By the way, when transitioning to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (= 15-2) or 25 (= 14-2 + 15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When transitioning to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of about 144 (= 9 × 24−3 × 24) medals until the end of the BB state.

  When none of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set (when step S602 is NO), the first BB winning, the second BB winning, and the CB winning are not established and carry over When a command is set (when the process of step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout number counter at steps S605 and S612, when an end determination process is performed at step S614, In step S606, the status command is set. Here, the state command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the gaming state at the end of the game (that is, the gaming state of the next game). In step S606, the state information storage area A status command corresponding to the setting flag set in 106c is set. After setting the status command, in step S607, external signal setting processing for setting an external signal to be output from the external concentrated terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

<Overview of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the illustration of the CB state is omitted.

  When the gaming state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out in the BB state reaches 216, and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state by stopping the transition outcome on the active line, and when the BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. The transition is stopped on the active line when a game is won in the push order bell and a missing game occurs. In the lottery process using the normal gaming state lottery table, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state and the second promoted replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the normal gaming state does not shift to the second RT state and the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

  When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. The third replay winning prize is established when one of the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23A). . In the lottery process using the first RT state lottery table, the second promoted replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the first RT state does not shift to the third RT state.

  Further, when the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When a corresponding BB winning is established in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. From the first RT state, there is no transition to the third RT state.

  When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is established. In addition, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state when the second re-game winning is established and when the transition outcome is stopped on the active line. The fourth regame winning and the fifth replay winning are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (FIG. 23B). )reference). The second regame winning is established when one of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 23B). The transition is stopped on the active line when a game is won in the push order bell and a missing game occurs. In addition, when the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag When the corresponding BB winning is established in the game in which is set, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

  When the gaming state is the third RT state, the gaming state is shifted to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state when the second re-game winning is established and when the transition outcome is stopped on the active line. The third replay winning is established when BAR replay 1 or BAR replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23C). The second regame winning is established when one of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 23B). The transition is stopped on the active line when a game is won in the push order bell and a missing game occurs. In addition, when the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is When a corresponding BB winning is established in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

  In the slot machine 10, the main control device 101 manages six kinds of game states of a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state, and is roughly divided into a normal mode and a challenge mode. , The main control device 101 manages five display modes: an attack mode (including an extra special zone), a VB mode (including an extra special zone), and a BB mode.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating transition of each display mode.

  The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB winning or the second BB winning is established and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

  When transitioning from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the BB mode, in the BB mode, a transition lottery to the challenge mode and a lottery to transition to the attack mode are performed. When winning the lottery for shifting to the attack mode, the mode shifts to the attack mode after the end of the BB mode, and when winning the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode, the mode shifts to the challenge mode after the end of the BB mode. If none of the transition lotteries is won, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the mode is changed from the attack mode to the BB mode, the mode returns to the attack mode after the end of the BB mode. When transitioning from the VB mode to the BB mode, the mode returns to the VB mode after the BB mode ends.

  The normal mode means that the push order bell is won, the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3, the second promotion replay 1, the second promotion replay 2, the BAR replay 1, and the BAR replay. 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “push order replay”). This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for shifting to the challenge mode and a lottery for shifting to the attack mode are performed. When the lottery for the transition to the challenge mode is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the challenge mode, and when the lottery for the transition to the attack mode is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the attack mode. From the normal mode, the mode does not shift to the VB mode.

  The normal mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the normal mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of pushing order bell winning and at the time of pushing order replay winning, it is rare to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state, This corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 1.59 per game, and the gaming state at that time will be the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 every time one game is played.

  Like the normal mode, the challenge mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of pushing order bell winning and at the time of pushing order replay winning. In the challenge mode, a lottery for shifting to the attack mode is performed. However, the winning probability of the lottery transition to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the winning probability of the lottery transition to the attack mode in the normal mode. That is, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which the operation order is not easily notified as in the normal mode, but the mode is easily shifted to the attack mode. When winning the lottery for shifting to the attack mode, the mode shifts from the challenge mode to the attack mode. When a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 times) are played without winning the above-mentioned transfer lottery, the mode is changed from the challenge mode to the normal mode. From challenge mode, it does not shift to VB mode.

  The challenge mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the challenge mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order replay is won, so it is rare to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state, and almost corresponds to the normal gaming state or the first RT state. Will be. In the challenge mode, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 1.59 per game, and the gaming state at that time will be the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 every time one game is played.

  The attack mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both of the push order bell win and the push order replay win. The attack mode is composed of four attack modes, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, which have different transition probabilities to the VB mode. In any attack mode, the attack mode is changed to the VB mode compared to the normal mode. The transition probability is high. When the lottery for the transition to the VB mode is won, the mode is shifted from the attack mode to the VB mode. When a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 times) are played without winning the lottery for the transition to the VB mode, the mode is shifted from the attack mode to the normal mode.

  The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set so that the probabilities of winning the lottery for the transition to the VB mode are different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for the transition to the VB mode is set such that the fourth attack mode is the highest and the first attack mode is the lowest, and the first attack mode and the second attack mode are set. The probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode in the order of the third attack mode and the fourth attack mode is set.

  The attack mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the attack mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of the notice given to the player. When .about.44 is operated, it corresponds to the second RT state. In the attack mode, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for every game played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, when shifting to the attack mode, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals.

  Similar to the attack mode, the VB mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both in the push order bell win and in the push order replay win. The difference between the VB mode and the attack mode is that, when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, the operation order for establishing the first replay prize is notified in the attack mode. In the VB mode, the operation order for establishing the fourth regame prize or the fifth regame prize is notified (see FIG. 23B).

  The VB mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the push order bell win and the push order replay win, and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 wins. In such a case, the operation order for establishing the fourth regame prize or the fifth regame prize is notified. For this reason, the VB mode substantially corresponds to the third RT state when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order notified by the player. In the VB mode, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 every time one game is played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for every game played. In the VB mode, since at least 25 games are continued after the gaming state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

  The transition of the display mode when the number of medals owned by the player increases will be explained. The general flow is that the mode is changed from the normal mode to the challenge mode, the challenge mode is changed to the attack mode, and the attack mode is returned to the normal mode. . In the attack mode, a lottery for the transition to the VB mode is performed. Therefore, when a loop occurs in which the transition is made from the attack mode to the VB mode and the mode returns from the VB mode to the attack mode, the player expects an increase in the number of owned medals. it can.

  As described above, when compared between the normal mode and the challenge mode, the probability that the winning lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won is set higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone in which a transition to the attack mode is expected.

  The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set in the attack mode, and the winning probabilities of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode are different in each attack mode. When shifting from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, the mode basically shifts to the first attack mode. In the first attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the second attack mode is performed. When winning the lottery for shifting to the second attack mode, the player shifts to the second attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases. In the second attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the third attack mode is performed. When the lottery for shifting to the third attack mode is won, the player shifts to the third attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases. In the third attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed and a lottery for shifting to the fourth attack mode is performed. When the lottery for shifting to the fourth attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the fourth attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased.

  Therefore, when the mode is changed to the attack mode, the first attack mode → the second attack mode → the third attack mode → the fourth attack mode and the attack mode are promoted, so that the probability of transition to the VB mode is increased and the attack is performed. A loop between the mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

  As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured such that the player increases the number of owned medals in each display mode of the attack mode, the VB mode, and the BB mode. Then, in conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state come and go by the winning of each replay or the stoppage of the transition and the like. As described above, the corresponding re-game winning is established or the transition outcome is stopped depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 at the time of pushing order replay winning or at the time of pushing order bell winning. Further, in the attack mode and the VB mode, an increase in the number of owned medals can be expected by notifying the operation order that allows the first small role winning to be established at the time of pushing order bell winning.

  Hereinafter, a configuration related to the display mode will be described.

  The configuration related to the display mode can be broadly divided into (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) based on the winning result. There is a process for shifting the display mode, and (4) a process related to the sub notification effect. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in order.

<Processing for display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
The process relating to the display mode transition lottery in (1) is performed in the lottery result handling process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main control device 101. The lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S701, as the current lottery result, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, B and middle bell, strong cherry overlap 1, 2, weak cherry overlap 1, 2, strong watermelon overlap 1, 2 , Weak watermelon overlap 1, 2, chance A overlap 1, 2, chance B overlap 1, 2, middle bell overlap 1, 2 (for example, see FIG. 17, IV = 13-19, 32-45, hereinafter these roles Are collectively referred to as “specific roles”). If the lottery result is a specific combination, it is determined in step S702 whether any one of the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag has already been set.

  In the processing of step S702, the case where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is already set indicates that the carry-over state is not included, and the game won for the first BB or the second BB is not included. That is, in the case where it is determined in step S702 that the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is not already set, the case where the first BB or the second BB is not a specific winning combination that is a duplicate winning combination with the first BB or the second BB The case where a specific combination winning combination that overlaps with the second BB is also included. In other words, in the case where the specific combination that becomes the winning combination with the first BB or the second BB is won in the carryover state, an affirmative determination is made in step S702.

  When a negative determination is made in step S702, display mode transition processing based on the specific combination in steps S703 to S709 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that it is not a specific combination winning, or if a bonus winning flag is set in step S702, processing for transition to a display mode or the like is performed in steps S710 to S713.

  Specifically, if it is determined in step S701 that the specific combination is won, and if it is determined in step S702 that the bonus winning flag is not set, in step S703, the current gaming state is determined. It is determined whether or not the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined in step S704 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning in the attack mode shift lottery and cleared when shifting to the attack mode. If a negative determination is made in step S704, the first specific combination process is executed in step S705.

<First Specific Role Processing>
The first specific combination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, the case where the first specific combination process is performed is a normal gaming state or a first RT state and a state where the attack mode is not won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first specific combination process, a transition lottery for determining whether to shift the display mode to the challenge mode is performed, and a transition lottery for determining whether to shift to the attack mode is performed. In the first specific combination process, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is performed.

  That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the challenge mode. When not in the challenge mode, it means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal time table is acquired as a table for attack mode lottery from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 in step S802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a challenge mode table is acquired as a table for attack mode lottery from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 in step S803. In the normal time table and the challenge mode table, the probability of transition to the attack mode is set according to the type of specific role. For example, in strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of transition to the attack mode than the weak cherries. Also, the normal mode table and the challenge mode table generally have different transition probability to the attack mode, and the challenge mode table has a higher probability of transition to the attack mode than the normal time table. Is set to

  After acquiring the attack mode lottery table in step S802 or step S803, the attack mode lottery process is executed in step S804. In this process, a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is performed by comparing with the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803.

  In step S805, based on the processing result in step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to the attack mode has been won. If the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, it is determined in step S806 whether or not the currently selected attack mode is the super attack mode. The super attack mode is an attack mode that starts after passing through the specialization zone. For example, assuming that the initial number of games in the normal attack mode is 50, the attack mode is started in the super attack mode by adding the number of games added in the additional specialization zone to the initial number of games 50. The Therefore, the normal attack mode and the super attack mode have different advantages for the player, and the super attack mode is more advantageous for the player than the attack mode. The super attack mode is set to win in a part (for example, 1%) when winning the attack mode in the attack mode lottery process in step S804.

  Note that the winning probability of the super attack mode may be set differently when the normal time table is acquired (step S802) and when the challenge mode table is acquired (step S803). If the winning probability of the super attack mode is higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode, the superiority of the challenge mode is secured. In addition, the probability of winning in the attack mode is lower in the normal mode than in the challenge mode, but the ratio of the super attack mode in the winning mode may be set to be larger. Furthermore, the winning probability of the super attack mode and the ratio of the super attack mode at the time of winning the attack mode may be varied according to the type of the specific combination.

  If it is determined in step S806 that the super attack mode is won, processing for setting a special zone winning flag is executed in step S807.

  When a negative determination is made in step S806, or after the processing of step S807 is executed, processing for setting an attack mode winning flag is performed in step S808. That is, when the attack mode is won, the attack mode winning flag is set, and the special zone winning flag is set (in the case of winning the super attack mode) in some of them.

  After performing the process of step S808, the process for setting the precursor mode is performed in steps S809 to S812. The sign mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that suggests winning in the attack mode or challenge mode is likely to occur, and after winning the attack mode or challenge mode, etc. after each game in the sign mode Will be announced. The precursor mode continues from 0 to 32 games, and the number of continuous games in the precursor mode is set differently depending on the type of attack mode or challenge mode that has been won and whether or not the bonus has been won simultaneously. ing. If the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. are selected at the same time as the bonus, the bonus will be notified after the sign mode, and after the bonus state is completed, the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. will be won. Notification of what was happening is performed. When the number of precursor games is set as 0 game, the winning notification is performed without going through the precursor mode.

  Specifically, in step S809, first, a process of acquiring a precursor game number table from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. As shown in FIG. 35, in the precursor game number table, the number of precursor games to be selected is set to be different depending on whether or not the current display mode (normal mode or challenge mode) and the bonus have been won simultaneously. . Specifically, when the current display mode is the normal mode, and when the attack mode is won and the bonus is not won at the same time, 1 to 5 games are selected at 80%, 6 Games 10 to 10 are selected at 20%. On the other hand, even if the current display mode is the normal mode, if the attack mode and the bonus are simultaneously won, 1 to 5 games are selected at 10%, and 6 to 10 games are 20 11 games to 20 games are selected at 50%, and 21 games to 32 games are selected at 20%. That is, when the display mode is the normal mode, it is easier to select the number of precursor games when the bonus is won simultaneously than when the bonus is not won simultaneously. In other words, when the bonus is not won simultaneously, the attack mode win is notified with a relatively short number of games from the attack mode win game. On the other hand, when the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 game is selected as the number of precursor games regardless of whether or not bonus simultaneous winning is performed. That is, in this case, the winning mode notification is performed in the next game after the winning game without being set to the precursor mode.

  In addition, when winning the super attack mode, which is an attack mode with an additional special zone, if the bonus is not won simultaneously, 1 to 5 games are selected at 70%, and 6 to 10 games are 30. Selected in%. On the other hand, if the bonus is selected at the time of winning the attack mode, 1 to 5 games are not selected, 6 to 10 games are selected at 20%, and 11 to 20 games are selected at 30%. 21 games to 32 games are selected at 50%. In other words, even when winning the Super Attack mode, it is easier to select the number of precursor games when the bonus is selected simultaneously than when the bonus is not selected, and the bonus is not selected simultaneously. In this case, the super attack mode winning is notified with a relatively short number of games from the super attack mode winning game. Even in the case of winning the super attack mode, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 game is selected as the number of precursor games regardless of whether or not bonus simultaneous winning is performed. That is, in this case, the winning mode notification is performed in the next game after the winning game, without being set to the precursor mode.

  In step S810, the number of games in the current precursor mode is drawn based on the precursor game number table acquired in step S809 and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S811, processing for inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The sign counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game. When the sign counter reaches 0, the sign mode is terminated, and a winning notification that the winning lottery such as the attack mode has been won is performed.

  In step S812, processing for setting the precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81 which is the sub-side control device is executed. The precursor command includes information on the lottery result (the display mode that shifts after the precursor mode, the BB mode and the attack mode in the case of step S812), and the number of precursor games that triggered the precursor mode. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the precursor command will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S812, the first specific combination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for shifting to the attack mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, challenge mode lottery processing is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, a challenge mode lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105 a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. In the challenge mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the challenge mode is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in strong cherries and weak cherries, strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of transition to challenge mode than weak cherries.

  Although the case where the display mode is the challenge mode is included as a case where step S813 is implemented, the challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S813 in this case as well, and the lottery table is common to the normal mode and the challenge mode. With a table. Note that, as in steps S801 to S803, the lottery table may be varied depending on whether or not the challenge mode is being performed.

  In step S814, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode is won based on the processing result of step S813. If it is determined that the challenge mode is won, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, in step S816, processing for setting a challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is executed.

  After performing the process of step S816, the setting process for the precursor mode is performed in steps S817 to S820 in the same manner as in steps S809 to S812. That is, after obtaining a precursor game number table in step S817, performing a lottery process for the number of precursor games in step S818, setting the number of precursor games in step S819, and setting a precursor command in step S820, The first specific combination process is terminated.

  In the precursor game number table acquired in step S817, as shown in FIG. 35, when the challenge mode alone is won, 1 game to 5 games are selected at 90%, and 6 games to 10 games are 10 games. Selected in%. On the other hand, when the challenge mode is a bonus and simultaneous winning, 1 to 5 games are selected at 20%, 6 to 10 games are selected at 30%, and 11 to 20 games are selected at 50%. Is done. In other words, even when the challenge mode is won, it is easier to select the number of precursors when the bonus is won simultaneously than when the bonus is not won simultaneously. The challenge mode win is notified by a relatively short number of games from the challenge mode win game.

  In addition to the number of precursor games, regardless of whether or not bonuses are won at the same time, it is easier to select the number of precursor games in the attack mode than in the challenge mode, and the precursor game in the super attack mode is longer than the attack mode. The number is easy to select, and if a winning display mode is won, it is easy to select a long precursor game number. In addition, when the bonus is not won simultaneously, the number of precursor games of 10 games or less is selected, and if the precursor mode continues for 11 games or more, it is confirmed that the bonus is simultaneously won. To do. In addition, even when a bonus is won simultaneously with the bonus, the number of precursor games of 20 games or less is selected in the simultaneous winning of the challenge mode and the bonus, while the bonus mode is different from the attack mode or the super attack mode. In the simultaneous winning, the number of precursor games of 21 games or more is selected, and when the precursor mode continues for 21 games or more, it is determined that the bonus + attack mode or the super attack mode is established. Thus, the pleasure of predicting the winning contents in relation to the number of precursor games is added.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a specific combination is won, there is a case where the attack mode, the challenge mode, or the like is not won and the mode is shifted to the pseudo precursor mode. Although this process will be described later, the number of games set as the pseudo precursor mode is any one of 1 game to 20 games. Therefore, when the winning suggestion effect frequently occurs over 21 games or more, it is determined that the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode that has shifted to the specific combination opportunity is the precursor mode.

  If it is determined in step S815 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, processing for adding the challenge mode continuation game is performed in steps S821 to S825. That is, in step S821, it is determined whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S822, and a lottery process for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is executed.

  Here, adding up means adding the number of continuing games in challenge mode or attack mode, and the number of adding up games corresponds to a value added to the number of continuing games. In step S822, a value to be added to the number of continuing games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

  Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of extra games, a table for challenge mode extra game number lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105 a of the ROM 105 and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. The challenge mode extra game number lottery table is set so that the extra game number increases according to the type of the specific role. For example, in the strong cherry, the challenge mode of 30 games is added with a probability of 80%, and the 50 games are added with a probability of 20%. In addition, in the weak cherry, 5 games are added with a probability of 80%, and 20 games are added with a probability of 20%.

  In step S823, a challenge mode game number addition process is performed. In such processing, a value corresponding to the number of added games selected in step S822 is added to a counter (more specifically, a challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) that manages the number of continuation games in the challenge mode. Perform the addition process. In step S824, a process for setting the addition command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the first specific combination process is terminated. The addition command includes information on the occurrence of the addition, the number of additional games, and the target to be added (challenge mode or attack mode). The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the addition command will be described in detail later, but the display control device 81 adds information as a notification of information included in the addition command based on the reception of the addition command. Announcement (addition effect) is performed.

  If the bonus winning flag is set in step S821, the process proceeds to step S825. In step S825, the challenge mode additional flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first specific combination process is terminated. The challenge mode extra flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the extra condition for the number of games in the challenge mode is satisfied. Although details will be described later, when the bonus is ended in a situation where the challenge mode additional flag is set, the challenge mode is added at the end of the bonus. In other words, the game for which the additional notification is performed is set differently depending on whether or not the bonus simultaneous winning is performed.

  Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if a negative determination is made in step S703 or an affirmative determination is made in step S704, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second RT state. If it is in the second RT state, it is determined in step S707 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning in the VB mode transition lottery and cleared when shifting to the VB mode. If a negative determination is made in step S707, the second specific combination process is executed in step S708. If a negative determination is made in step S706, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the third specific combination process is executed in step S709.

<Second specific role processing>
The second specific combination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, the case where the second specific combination process is performed is a state in which the second RT state is set and the VB mode is not won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the attack mode. In the second specific combination process, a transfer lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift the display mode to the VB mode. Further, in the second specific combination process, the rank in the attack mode is promoted and the process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

  That is, in step S901, processing for determining the rank of the attack mode is performed. As already described, in the present embodiment, four attack mode ranks of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are provided, and the transition probability to the VB mode is different in each rank. Therefore, step S901 determines whether the current attack mode rank is the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode.

  In step S902, a VB mode lottery table corresponding to the rank of the attack mode grasped in step S901 is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the transition probability to the VB mode is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in the strong cherry 1 and the weak cherry, the strong cherry 1 is set to have a higher transition probability to the VB mode than the weak cherry. In addition, in the VB mode lottery table for each rank, the transition probability to the VB mode is totally different, and the transition probability to the VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. As described above, the third attack mode is higher in the VB mode than the third attack mode so that the transition probability to the VB mode is higher in the third attack mode than in the second attack mode. The transition probability is set to be high.

  In step S903, a transition lottery in the VB mode is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to the VB mode winning.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, processing for setting a VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S905. Thereafter, in step S906 to step S909, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, the number of precursor games is acquired in step S906, the number of precursor games is drawn in step S907, the number of precursor games is set in step S908, and the precursor command is set in step S909. The combination process is terminated. However, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, the VB mode winning in the attack mode is set so that the number of precursor games is zero. Therefore, if the VB mode is won during the attack mode, the winning notification is performed in the next game.

  If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not the VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processing for promoting the rank of the attack mode.

  In step S910, attack mode promotion lottery processing is performed. In this process, a table for promotion lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105 a of the ROM 105 and a counter for lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. A plurality of promotion lottery tables are provided according to the rank of the attack mode. Specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, a table for the third attack mode, There are three (the promotion lottery is not performed in the situation of staying in the fourth attack mode). In each table, the winning probability of the promotion lottery is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of winning the promotion lottery than the weak cherries. Further, in each attack mode table, the second attack mode table is lower than the second attack mode table so that the promotion probability is lower in the second attack mode table than in the first attack mode table. The attack mode table is set so that the promotion probability is lower, and the attack mode rank is set so that it is less likely to be promoted to the next rank as the rank of the attack mode is promoted.

  In step S911, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S910 is a promotion win. If it is a promotion win, attack mode promotion processing is performed in step S912. In this process, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten from the rank flag corresponding to the current attack mode rank to the rank flag one level higher. Thereafter, in step S913, processing for setting the promotion command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. The promotion command includes information on the attack mode of the promotion destination. The display control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to produce an effect for the attack mode of the rank of the promotion destination. As an effect for the attack mode in the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, an effect of a different background color is set according to the rank of the attack mode. When the display control device 81 receives the promotion command, the attack mode In addition to notifying that the rank has been promoted, control is performed so as to produce an attack mode effect with a background color corresponding to the rank of the promoted destination.

  If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the processing of step S913 is executed, processing for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed in steps S915 to S920.

  That is, in step S914, a lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In this extra lottery process, an attack mode extra lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105 a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. The attack mode extra lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the extra lottery differs according to the type of the specific combination. For example, a strong cherry wins an extra lottery with a probability of 80%, and a weak cherry wins an extra lottery with a probability of 20%. The winning probabilities may be varied according to the rank of the attack mode. In step S915, it is determined whether or not the extra lottery is won. If it is determined that the extra lottery is not won, the second specific combination process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined that the bonus lottery is won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S917 to perform a lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode. In the extra game number lottery process, an attack mode extra game number lottery table is obtained from the various table storage areas 105 a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. The attack mode extra game number lottery table is set so that the extra game number varies depending on the type of the specific combination. For example, in strong cherry, an attack mode of 20 games is added with a probability of 90%, and 80 games are added with a probability of 10%. In addition, for a weak cherry, 5 games are added with a probability of 95%, and 100 games are added with a probability of 5%.

  In step S918, the number of games in the attack mode is added. In this process, a counter (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) for managing the number of continued games in the attack mode is set to a value corresponding to the number of added games drawn in step S917. Perform the addition process. In step S919, a process for setting the addition command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the second specific combination process is terminated.

  If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S920. In step S920, an attack mode additional flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific combination process is terminated. The attack mode additional flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the additional condition for the number of games in the attack mode is satisfied. Although details will be described later, when the bonus ends in a situation where the attack mode additional flag is set, the attack mode is added at the end of the bonus. That is, similarly to the extra number of games in the challenge mode, the game in which the extra information is performed is set differently depending on whether or not the bonus simultaneous winning is performed.

<Third specific role processing>
Next, the third specific combination process executed in step S709 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The case where the third specific combination process is performed is a state where the player is in the third RT state, or is in the second RT state and is in the VB mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to the attack mode or the VB mode. In the third specific combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

  That is, in step S1001, lottery processing is performed by adding the number of games in the attack mode. Such processing is similar to the processing in step S914. Note that the winning probability of the extra lottery may be different between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1001.

  In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1001 is an extra winning result. If it is determined that the extra lottery is won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1004, and a lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1005, an attack mode game number adding process is performed, and in step S1006, an adding command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the third specific combination process is terminated. The processing from step S1003 to step S1006 is the same as the processing from step S916 to step S919. Note that the number of added games may be different between the lottery process in step S916 and the lottery process in step S1004.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the third specific combination process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the third specific combination process is terminated after setting the attack mode extra flag in step S1007. The attack mode extra flag is as described above.

  Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if it is determined in step S701 that the result of the current lottery process is not a specific winning combination, or even if it is a specific winning combination, a bonus winning flag is set in step S702. If it is determined that it has been set, whether or not the result of the current lottery process is a push order replay or push order bell (hereinafter collectively referred to as “push order”) is won in step S710. Determine. If it is determined that the push order is won, a push order process is executed in step S711. The push order process will be described later in detail.

  After executing any of the processes in step S705, step S708, step S709, and step S711, or after making a negative determination in step S710, the process proceeds to step S712. In step S712, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the special zone added to the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is set. The special zone flag is a flag that is set based on the fact that the seventh replay winning is established. Indicates a state that occurs with probability. If the special zone flag is set in step S712, special zone processing is executed in step S713. The special zone flag, special zone, and special zone processing will be described later in detail. When a negative determination is made in step S712, or after the process of step S713 is executed, the lottery result handling process ends.

  As described above, in the lottery result handling process, when it is determined that the specific combination is won, it is determined that the player is not in the carry-over state, and the challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode transition lottery, challenge mode or attack Processing for adding the number of continuous games in the mode is performed. In other words, even if it is a specific role win, during the carryover state, the transition lottery of challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode, processing for adding the number of continuous games in challenge mode or attack mode, etc. are not performed, Its implementation is limited. In the case of winning the transition lottery to the challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode, after the sign game, the fact that the transition lottery has been won is notified. Therefore, processing for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Processing for transitioning gaming state based on display mode transition lottery result>
(2) In the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the process for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for shifting the gaming state are performed. And processing for performing. Therefore, first, a process related to notification that the transfer lottery has been won will be described.

<Mode transition notification processing>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is a process that is performed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is a specified number). Hereinafter, the mode transition notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. The number of precursor games is counted in a winning result handling process to be described later, and the number of precursor games is decremented by one each time one game is consumed. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is.

  If the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1102 whether a bonus winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current sign mode is a sign mode triggered by bonus winning. If the bonus winning flag is set, the bonus winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1103, and then the mode transition notification processing is terminated. Upon receiving the bonus winning notification command, the display control device 81 displays, for example, “Bonus confirmed!” On the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify that the bonus has been won. In addition, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports together the kind (either 1BB or 2BB) of the selected bonus.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the bonus, the attack mode, the challenge mode, and the like are won simultaneously, the winning notification such as the attack mode is performed at the end of the bonus notified in step S1103. The process related to the winning notification will be described in detail later. However, when performing the winning notification such as the attack mode in accordance with the bonus winning notification, the winning notification such as the attack mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1103. It may be configured to set commands.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current sign mode is a sign mode triggered by the challenge mode winning. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1105. In step S1106, a challenge mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1107, a challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like that the challenge mode is started. This notification will be described in detail later.

  Thereafter, in step S1108, counting of the challenge mode continuation number is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continued games in the challenge mode is set in a challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1108, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1109 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current sign mode is a sign mode triggered by the attack mode winning. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1110. In step S1111, an attack notification flag is set in various flag storage areas 106 d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state when winning the attack mode lottery. Thereafter, the attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1112. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like that the attack mode winning lottery has been won. This notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1112, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the winning notification mode in the super attack mode is different from the winning notification mode in the attack mode. Therefore, in step S1112, it is good to set it as the structure which sets an attack mode winning notification command so that the information of whether it is a super attack mode is included. The mode of winning notification in the attack mode and the mode of winning notification in the super attack mode may be different from each other as long as they can be identified by the player. It is preferable that the mode is a flashy mode than the mode of winning notification in the attack mode.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which makes the aspect of the alerting | reporting alert | report of these attack modes and super attack modes common. By doing so, it is possible to make it look as if the winning content has been promoted from the attack mode to the super attack mode between the attack mode winning notification game and the start notification game. The delay due to the difference between the notification game and the start notification game can be eliminated.

  If it is determined in step S1109 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1113 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current sign mode is a sign mode triggered by the VB mode winning. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1114. In step S1115, a VB notification flag is set in various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for transitioning the gaming state to the third RT state when the VB mode transition lottery is won. Thereafter, the VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1116. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode win notification command notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like that the VB mode shift lottery has been won. This notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1116, the mode transition notification process is terminated. If it is determined in step S1113 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is.

  That is, among the challenge mode, attack mode, and VB mode that shifts through the precursor mode, the challenge mode is started based on the betting operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes zero. On the other hand, for the attack mode and the VB mode, only the notification that the attack mode transition lottery or the VB mode transition lottery has been won is performed based on the betting operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes zero. Even if the number of games becomes 0, the attack mode and the VB mode are not started. This is because the challenge mode as the display mode is not accompanied by the transition of the gaming state, while the attack mode and the VB mode are accompanied by the transition of the gaming state, specifically, the attack mode is shifted to the second RT state. This is due to the difference that the VB mode is started by entering the third RT state.

  As already explained, the second RT state is the case where the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay winning is established, and the third RT state is changed to the second promotion replays 1 and 2. Is transferred to the case where the fourth and fifth re-game winnings are established. And when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay prize is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are elected and the fourth and fifth regame prizes are established, This is a case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third regame winning award or the like. Therefore, when winning the lottery to shift to the attack mode or VB mode, after that, in the game that won the role that will shift the gaming state, notify the operation order of the stop switches 42-44, The game state can be changed. It should be noted that from the notification that the winning lottery of the attack mode or the VB mode is won until the attack mode or the VB mode is started (until the game state shifts), a notification as a preparation state (for example, “ Notification in progress) is performed.

<Explanation regarding display mode transition>
The notification process for shifting the gaming state is performed in the push order process (step S711) in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to the description of the push order processing, an outline when the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG.

<Outline of push order notification effect>
The notification of the operation order at the time of pushing order winning (pressing order notification, pressing order notification effect, order notification) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the instruction monitor 68. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described by taking as an example a case where the operation order to be notified this time is winning in the push order when the middle → right → left is selected. The push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 will be described later in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first among the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 (the middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is attached to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43, and is displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). Accordingly, the player can recognize that the winning combination in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the auxiliary display section 65, the right button display shows a numeric value so that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the numeral 3 added.

  When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65 as shown in FIG. The button display is displayed larger. Thus, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

  When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 37C, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears in the auxiliary display unit 65. The button display is displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

  The execution timing of the push order notification will be described. During the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period, the push order notification is performed. Is set to run. As described above, the push order notification is executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, so that the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized after the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized. Therefore, it is possible to make the game progress with a good tempo.

<Push order processing>
Next, the pushing order process executed in step S711 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1201, it is determined whether the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 is a case where the first regame or the third regame wins according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As already described, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery for entering the attack mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 36). is there.

  If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1203, the third replay push order notification process is executed. Specifically, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game win among the first re-game and the third re-game is notified (see FIG. 23A). Thereafter, in step S1204, a process of setting the push order notification command as an output target to the display control apparatus 81 as the sub-side control apparatus is performed, and then the regular push order process is terminated. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the push order notification command will be described in detail later.

  Note that when the notification of the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is made in step S1203, basically, winning in the lottery for shifting to the attack mode and winning in the attack mode through the precursor mode are performed. It is assumed that it is after the break and before the transition to the attack mode. That is, in the lottery table in the second RT state or the third RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the first RT state. However, even during the attack mode, the gaming state may fall from the second RT state to the first RT state due to an erroneous operation or the like, and even in such a case, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won. By doing so, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the fall replays 1 to 3. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1205 is a case where the first regame or the second regame wins according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1206, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1207, the first replay push order notification processing is executed. Specifically, an operation order corresponding to the first regame winning is notified from among the first regame and the second regame (see FIG. 23B). Thereafter, in step S1208, a process for setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the full push order process is terminated.

  In this manner, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the situation where the lottery for the transition to the attack mode is won, the operation state corresponding to the third replay prize is notified, so that the gaming state is changed to the first. It is possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the push order process is terminated without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, the first regame winning is established, and the third regame winning is established. There is.

  In addition, when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won in a situation where the attack notification flag is set, the game state is shifted to the first RT state by notification of the operation order corresponding to the first replay winning prize. It is possible not to let it. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, the push order process is terminated without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends, the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay prize may be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state. Shifts from the second RT state to the first RT state.

  In addition, for example, in the first RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the third regame win, and the third replay win is established. Even if it is a case (even if it is a case where it transfers to the 2nd RT state), the 2nd re-game winning prize may be established by winning of fall fall replays 1-3. Therefore, as described above, even if it happens to shift to the second RT state without winning the attack mode, it immediately shifts to the first RT state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1209 whether the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1209 is a case where the first regame, the fourth regame, or the fifth regame wins according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1211 whether or not the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 36). is there.

  If the VB notification flag is set, the fourth regame or fifth regame push order notification processing is executed in step S1212. Specifically, among the first regame, the fourth regame, and the fifth regame, the operation order corresponding to the fourth regame prize or the fifth regame prize is notified (see FIG. 23B). Thereafter, in step S1213, a process for setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the full push order process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the push order process is terminated without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1211, the first replay push order notification process is executed in step S1207, and the push order notification command is set in step S1208. The book push order process is terminated. Therefore, when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won without winning the VB mode, a push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay prize is performed if the attack mode is in progress, and must be in the attack mode. In this case, the push order notification effect is not performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1214 whether the current lottery result is one of BAR replays 1 and 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1214 is a case where one of the first re-game, the third re-game, and the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1216 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, in step S1217, processing for notification of the pressing order of sixth to eighth regames is executed. Specifically, among the first regame, the third regame, and the sixth regame to the eighth regame, the operation order corresponding to the sixth regame win to the eighth regame win is notified (FIG. 23 ( c)). Thereafter, in step S1218, a process for setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the full push order process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1215, the push order process is terminated without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, the first replay push order notification process is executed in step S1207 and the push order notification command is set in step S1208. The regular push forward processing is terminated. Therefore, when the BAR replays 1 and 2 are won without winning in the VB mode, a push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay prize is performed if the attack mode is in effect, and if not in the attack mode No order announcement effect is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1214, it is determined in step S1219 whether or not the current lottery result is a push-bell winning. If it is a push-bell winning, it is determined in step S1220 whether the current display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode. If it is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, a push order notification process for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first small role winning is executed in step S1221 (see FIG. 19). Thereafter, in step S1222, a process for setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the full push order process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1219 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1220, the full-pressing order process is terminated without performing the pressing-order notification process.

<Process for shifting the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for winning results>
Next, as a result of the notification for shifting the gaming state as described above, a process when a winning combination corresponding to shifting the gaming state is won will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result handling process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). Hereinafter, the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1301, a game number management process is executed. Although details will be described later, in this game number management process, the number of continuation games in the challenge mode, the attack mode, the VB mode, and the specialized zone is counted in addition to the number of omens in the omen mode.

  In the subsequent step S1302, it is determined whether or not the result of the current stop is that a third re-game winning is established. As described above, when the third re-game winning is established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. The case where the attack notification flag is not set is a case where the third re-game winning is established without satisfying the condition for shifting to the attack mode. In this case, without performing the process for starting the attack mode, The winning result handling process is terminated as it is. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1304 whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an attack mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, as a flag for specifying the display mode, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided in addition to the attack mode flag. In the present embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to an RT state higher than the attack mode (VB mode, additional specialized zone), the attack mode flag is a flag corresponding to the mode (VB mode flag, (Specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1304, the case where it is determined that the attack mode flag is set includes not only the case of the attack mode but also the case of the VB mode or the special zone. .

  If the attack mode flag is set in step S1304, since the display mode is already the attack mode, the main winning result corresponding process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, the process for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

  That is, in step S1305, the attack mode flag is set. In a succeeding step S1306, an attack mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode start command notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like that the attack mode is started from the next game. This notification will be described in detail later. Thereafter, in step S1307, counting of the number of continued attack modes is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continued games in the attack mode is set in the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106.

  After performing step S1307, it is determined in step S1308 whether the specialized zone flag is set. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1308 means that the attack mode won this time is the super attack mode. In this case, after the special zone win flag is cleared in step S1309, the additional special zone is started. Process (steps S1318 to S1320). The process for starting the additional specialization zone will be described later. If a negative determination is made in step S1308, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1302 that the third re-game winning is not established, the process proceeds to step S1310. In step S1310, it is determined whether the fourth and fifth regame winnings are established as the current stop result. As described above, when the fourth and fifth re-game winnings are established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1311, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the VB notification flag is not set, the VB mode transition lottery is not won and the fourth and fifth re-game winnings are established. In this case, the processing of the VB mode start threat is not performed. Then, the winning result handling process is terminated. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1312 whether the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, since the display mode is already the VB mode, the present winning result corresponding process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1313 to S1315.

  That is, in step S1313, processing for setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d. This is a mode in which the VB mode shifts through the attack mode and always shifts to the attack mode after the VB mode ends.

  Thereafter, a VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1314. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like that the VB mode is started from the next game. This notification will be described in detail later. In step S1315, counting of the VB mode continuation number is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 60) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in the VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1315, the main winning result corresponding process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1310 that the fourth and fifth regame winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1316. In step S1316, it is determined whether or not a seventh re-game winning is established as the current stop result. In the present embodiment, when the seventh re-game winning is established, that is, the “black BAR” symbol in the middle stage of the left reel 32L, the “black BAR” symbol in the middle part of the middle reel 32M, and the “black BAR” symbol in the middle part of the right reel 32R. When the “black BAR” symbol is stopped and the “black BAR” symbol is stopped in the middle combination line, a transition is made to the specialization zone. In the additional specialization zone, not only the specific combination but all the combinations that can be won (push order, specific combination and bonus) are added to the number of continued games in the attack mode. The case where the seventh regame winning is established is a case where the BAR replay 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the seventh regame winning (FIG. 23). (C)) In addition, it is a case where the 7th regame of the 1st, 6th and 7th regames is won for winning, for example, 20 minutes when winning BAR Replay 1 Win a lottery to win the 7th replay with a probability of 1.

  If the seventh regame winning is established, it is determined in step S1317 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is set, specialized zone start processing is performed in steps S1318 to S1320. Note that, as already described, the processing of step S1318 to step S1320 is also performed when the determination in step S1308 is affirmative and the processing of step S1309 is performed at the start of the super attack mode.

  Specifically, in step S1318, processing for setting a specialized zone flag in various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The special zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the above-described special zone, and the count of the number of continued games in the VB mode is stopped by setting the special zone flag. . In this case, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialized zone flag coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d.

  Thereafter, the specialized zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1319. The display control device 81 that has received the special zone start command notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like that the special zone is started from the next game. This notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1320, the counting of the number of continued special zones is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continued games in the specialized zone is set in a specialized zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1320, the main winning result corresponding process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1316 or step S1317, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, based on the winning of the combination (third to fifth replays) corresponding to the transition of the game state, the process for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state process (FIG. 21). Do. This is to prevent the attack mode or the like from being started based on the fact that the winning combination corresponding to the transition of the gaming state happens to be won even though the display mode transition lottery is not won. It is.

  Also, when changing the display mode, among those accompanied by a transition of the game state, the transition to the higher mode, that is, when shifting from the normal mode or challenge mode to the attack mode, or when shifting from the attack mode to the VB mode, Alternatively, when shifting from the VB mode to the specialized zone, the shift is made based on the winning result of the corresponding winning combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the gaming state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of transition to the lower mode, the display mode is not transitioned when the game state transitions due to, for example, the second regame winning as a fall replay or the stop of the transitional turn. When shifting to a lower mode, the gaming state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when transitioning to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the gaming state and the transition of the display mode are performed in different games.

<Game number management process>
The game number management process executed in step S1301 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continuing games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted, and the number of continuing games in these display modes is 0. Based on this, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

  In the game number management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the bet number is a specific number. As already described, in the present embodiment, each game can be executed with the number of bets 1 to 3, and in step S1401, it is determined whether or not there are 3 bets as a specific number. If it is not 3 bets, the game number management process is terminated. That is, in a 1-bet or 2-bet game, the number of games in the precursor mode and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode are not counted.

  If the game to be ended this time is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set or whether the bonus state is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, the process for clearing each display mode flag of the challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag is performed in step S1403, and then the present game number management process is terminated. To do. That is, when the bonus winning flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games such as the attack mode is not counted. If each flag is not set in step S1403, the state is maintained.

  Incidentally, in step S1403, while the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag are cleared, the attack notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after completion of the bonus, after passing through a preparation state such as an attack mode, it is possible to perform a push order notification for shifting the gaming state by these flags and return to the gaming state before the bonus. On the other hand, when a bonus is won during the challenge mode or the special zone, the challenge mode or the special zone is terminated by the bonus win.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1404 whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. If not 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1405. When the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1404 (not in the precursor mode), or after executing the processing of step S1405, the number of continuing games in each mode is counted in steps S1406 to S1428. .

  That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1407, and the challenge mode continuation counter is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the challenge mode continuation counter. In step S1408, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is zero. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and a challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1410. In the display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like notify the end of the challenge mode in the current game. After performing the process of step S1410, the game number management process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1406 that the current mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether the current display mode is the attack mode. If it is the attack mode, the process advances to step S1412 to determine whether or not it is a specialized zone in the attack mode. That is, in the case of shifting to the specialized zone at the start of the attack mode as in the super attack mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1412. If it is in the special zone, the game number management process for the special zone is performed in steps S1425 to S1428. These processes will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S1412 that the zone is not a specialized zone, the attack mode continuation game number is subtracted in step S1413 by performing a process of subtracting one from the attack mode continuation counter. In step S1414, it is determined whether or not the attack mode continuation counter is zero. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1415, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1416. Thereafter, an attack mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1417. In the display control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies the end of the attack mode in the current game. This notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1417, the game number management process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1411 that the attack mode is not selected, the process advances to step S1418. In step S1418, it is determined whether the current display mode is the VB mode. In the case of the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S1419, and it is determined whether or not it is an extra special zone. If it is not the added special zone, the VB mode continuation counter is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the VB mode continuation counter in step S1420. In step S1421, it is determined whether the VB mode continuation counter is zero. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1422, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1423. Thereafter, the VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1424. In the display control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies the end of the VB mode in the current game. This notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1424, the game number management process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1419 that the zone is an additional specialization zone, the process proceeds to step S1425. As already described, when it is determined in step S1412 that the zone is the specialized zone in the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1425. In step S1425, the number of specialized zone continuation games is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the specialized zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1426, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone continuation counter is zero. If it is 0, the special zone flag is cleared in step S1427, and a special zone end command is set as an output target to the display controller 81 in step S1428. In the display control device 81 that has received the special zone end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the special zone is over in the current game. As this notification, for example, the number of games successfully added in total in the current special zone is notified. After performing the process of step S1428, the game number management process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1418 or step S1426, the game number management process is terminated as it is.

<End determination process>
Next, as a process at the end of the bonus, an end determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the end determination process is a process performed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the end determination process, the success / failure condition of the bonus end condition is determined, and when the bonus is ended, the process of notifying the winning such as an attack mode overlapping with the bonus is performed, and the attack mode overlapping the bonus and overlapping is performed. The process for adding the number of games such as is performed.

  That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been established. As already described, during the bonus, the first small combination (BB medium / small combination 1) is established with high probability (FIG. 28). In addition, when winning in BB small and medium role 2 (IV = 30), stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 39th small role winning (FIG. 27B), and the first The 39th small role winning is established when the 39th small role out of the small role and the 39th small winning combination is won. In the present embodiment, for example, when the BB medium / small combination 2 is won, the 39th small combination wins with a probability of 1/100. In the case of winning in the BB medium and small role 3 (IV = 31), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 40th small role winning (FIG. 27 (b)). And when the 40th small combination of the 40th small combination wins the lottery for winning, the 40th small combination winning is established. In the present embodiment, for example, when a winning combination with a BAR in BB is won, the winning combination of the 40th small winning combination is won with a probability of 1/200. In addition, it is good also as a structure which adjusts the probability that the 39th small winning combination winning and the 40th small winning combination will be established by adjusting the winning probability of the BB small winning combination 2 and the BB small winning combination 3. More specifically, the point value PV is allocated so that the BB medium role 2 is won with a probability of about 1/100 of the above configuration, and the BB small role 3 is won with a probability of about 200 times of the above configuration. Allocate point value PV. Then, if a stop operation is performed aiming at a small role (the 39th small role or the 40th small role) corresponding to the winning of the BB small role 2, or the BB small role 3, it is possible to establish the corresponding small role winning. It is good also as a structure.

  If it is determined in step S1501 that a small role winning has been established, in step S1502, a process of subtracting the number of payouts of the current game from the number of remaining payouts is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, or after the processing of step S1502, the remaining payout number is determined to be 0 in step S1503. If it is not 0, the end determination process is ended as it is. In the case of 0, after setting a bonus end command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1504, in steps S1505 to S1518, processing for winning notification such as an attack mode, attack mode, etc. The process for adding the number of continued games is performed.

  That is, in step S1505, it is determined whether the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the number of precursor games is selected in step S1506, the number of precursor games is set in step S1507, and the precursor command is set in step S1508. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the lottery process for the number of precursor games in step S1506, a lottery in which the number of precursor games becomes 0 with a probability of 100% is performed. That is, in step S1507, the number of precursor games of 0 game is always set, and the winning notification such as the attack mode is performed in the next game after the bonus end game. After executing the process of step S1508, the end determination process ends.

  If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1505, it is determined in step S1509 whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the end determination process is ended after the process for the precursor mode in steps S1506 to S1508 is performed. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1509, it is determined in step S1510 whether the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the end determination process is ended after the process for the precursor mode in steps S1506 to S1508 is performed. That is, when the bonus is ended in the situation where the challenge mode or the VB mode is also won, after the bonus is over, the winning notification of the challenge mode or the VB mode is performed through the precursor game.

  In addition, when the attack mode winning flag or challenge mode winning flag is set, the bonus is ended when the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. and the bonus are won at the same time, or when the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. are won. This is a case where a bonus is won during the precursor mode. On the other hand, when the VB mode winning flag is set, the bonus ends when the VB mode and the bonus are simultaneously won in the attack mode, or during the predictive mode of the VB mode winning notification (in this case, This is a case where the bonus game is won in the next game that has been won in the VB mode because the 0 game precursor mode is selected.

  If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1510, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, it is determined whether the attack mode extra flag is set. If the attack mode extra flag is set, an attack mode extra game number lottery process is performed in step S1512, an attack mode game number extra process is performed in step S1513, and an extra command is set in step S1514. . The processes in steps S1512 to S1514 are the same as the processes in steps S917 to S919. After executing the process of step S1514, the end determination process ends.

  If the attack mode extra flag is not set in step S1511, it is determined in step S1515 whether or not the challenge mode extra flag is set. If the challenge mode extra flag is set, challenge mode extra game number lottery processing is performed in step S1516, challenge mode game number extra processing is performed in step S1517, and an extra command is set in step S1518. . The processes in steps S1516 to S1518 are the same as the processes in steps S822 to S824. When a negative determination is made in step S1515, or after the process of step S1518 is executed, the end determination process ends.

<Specialized zone processing>
Next, the special zone process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The specialized zone process is a process executed in step S713 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). As already described, the game moves to the special zone during the VB mode, and during the special zone, the number of continuous games in each game and attack mode is added.

  That is, in the specialized zone process, first, in step S1601, the result of the current lottery process is grasped. In the subsequent step S1602, an extra game number lottery process is performed in the attack mode. In the subsequent step S1603, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In step S1604, an additional command is set, and then the specialized zone processing is terminated. The processing from step S1602 to step S1604 is the same as the processing from step S917 to step S919. However, the number of selected games is larger in the additional game number lottery process in step S1602 than in the additional game number lottery process in step S917.

<Processing on sub-side notification effect>
Next, (4) various types of notification processing performed in the sub-side display control device 81 will be described as processing related to the sub-side notification effect. As various notification processes, an effect setting process is provided that is executed at a predetermined cycle (a 1.49 msec cycle). Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the effect setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control apparatus 101. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1702. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of storing a plurality of commands individually and reading from the previously stored command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the processing of step S1702 is executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command is a bet time command. The bet time command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation performed. In addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal process, the mode transition notification process (see FIG. 36), a challenge mode start command, an attack mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, a bonus winning notification command, and the like. If these are betting commands, betting effect setting processing is executed in step S1704.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or after the processing of step S1704 is executed, it is determined in step S1705 whether the newly received command is a start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, the first to first commands There are a precursor command and an extra command set in the third specific combination process (FIGS. 32 to 34), a push order notification command set in the push order combination process (FIG. 38), and the like. If these are the start time commands, the start time effect setting process is executed in step S1706.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or after the processing of step S1706 has been executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether the newly received command is a command for each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on each stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and is step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). This is a stop command command set at. If it is a stop command command as each stop operation time command, each stop operation time effect setting process is executed in step S1708.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or after the processing in step S1708 is executed, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the newly received command is a command for all stoppages. The all stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and the winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to the command, the attack mode start command, VB mode start command, special zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, specialization set in the winning result handling process (FIG. 39) There is a zone end command. In the case of these all-stop commands, the all-stop effect setting process is executed in step S1710.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1709, or after the process of step S1710 is executed, the other settings are executed in step S1711, and the effect setting process ends. In step S 1711, an effect is set based on a command from the main control device 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, an effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), or connected without using the main control device 101. An effect setting based on a signal from an effected sensor (such as an effect switch detection sensor) and an error notification setting are performed.

  Hereinafter, the betting time effect setting process, the start time effect setting process, each stop operation effect setting process, and the all stop effect setting process will be described. In addition, description of each effect setting process demonstrates, referring the schematic diagram of the display effect of FIGS.

<Bet effect setting process>
The betting time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1801, it is determined whether a challenge mode start command is included as the currently received bet time command. If a challenge mode start command is included, processing for setting a challenge mode start effect is performed in step S1802. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text “Challenge mode start” and the display mode to be shifted is easy to win the attack mode shift lottery. A display (for example, a predetermined character display) suggesting the chance mode is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “grab the attack mode!” With a thick male voice) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1801, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the attack mode winning notification command is included as the currently received bet time command. If an attack mode winning notification command is included, a process for setting an attack mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1804. In the attack mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 performs a character display of “attack mode confirmation”. In addition, in the attack mode winning notification effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “attack number one!” With a female high voice) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1803, it is determined in step S1805 whether the VB mode winning notification command is included as the currently received bet time command. If the VB mode winning notification command is included, in step S1806, processing for setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 performs a character display of “PICTUREBONUS confirmation”. In addition, in the VB mode winning notification effect, control is performed such that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Victory!” In male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S1805, it is determined in step S1807 whether or not the bonus winning notification command is included as a command received this time. If a bonus winning notification command is included, processing for setting a bonus winning notification effect is performed in step S1808. In the bonus winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 performs a character display of “Yataze Bonus Confirmation”. In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, control is performed such that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Yay!

  After executing any of the processing of step S1802, step S1804, step S1806, and step S1808, or when a negative determination is made in step S1807, after setting other betting effects in step S1809, The effect setting process ends. In the process of step S1809, for example, in response to the reception of a bet command, a process for notifying that the operation is accepted by turning off the lamps around (or inside) the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 corresponding to the number of bets. Or, for example, a process for returning from the demo mode in which a game is not performed for a predetermined time is returned to one condition, or a lamp around the start lever 41 is turned on to notify that the operation has become effective. Perform processing.

<Starting production setting process>
Next, the start time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1901, display mode setting processing is performed. In such processing, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is the normal mode, the challenge mode, the attack mode, the VB mode, or the specialized zone, and the corresponding display mode is used. The display effect of the auxiliary display unit 65 is set to be performed. Specifically, a challenge mode flag, an attack mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag are set as flags for grasping the display mode also in various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side. An area is provided, a corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode, and a corresponding flag is cleared at the end. For example, in the challenge mode start effect setting process in step S1802, the challenge mode flag is set. In step S1901, by grasping these various mode correspondence flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, the upper lamp 63, and the like are controlled so that the corresponding effects are performed.

  In a succeeding step S1902, it is determined based on the received lottery result command whether the lottery result of the game started this time is a push forward winning combination. If it is a push order winning combination, a push order notification process is performed in step S1903. Here, the push order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2001, it is determined whether or not a push order notification command is included as the start command received this time. If the push order notification command is not included, the regular push order notification process is terminated. If a push order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S2002.

  In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is the first promotion replays 1 to 4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2003, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to notify the push order in which the third regame winning is established, and then the push order notification process. Exit.

  If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current lottery result is the fall replays 1 to 3. In the case of the fall replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2005, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification that the first regame winning is established, and then the push order notification process is terminated. To do.

  If it is determined in step S2004 that it is not the fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the current lottery result is the second promotion replays 1 and 2. In the case of the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when the VB mode winning notification effect is set in step S1806, a notification completion flag indicating that notification of VB winning has been performed is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The notification flag is cleared based on the transition to the VB mode. And it is good to set it as the structure which determines the presence or absence of the said notification completion flag in step S2007. If the winning notification in the VB mode has been completed, in step S2008, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to notify the pushing order in which the fourth and fifth regame winnings are established, and then the pushing order is notified. The process is terminated. If the winning notification in the VB mode has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S2005, the push order notification for the first regame winning is performed, and then the push order notification processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2006 that it is not the second promoted replay 1, 2, it is determined in step S2009 whether the current lottery result is BAR replay 1, 2. In the case of BAR replays 1 and 2, in step S2010, the mode correspondence flag is checked to determine whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. If in the VB mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to notify the push order in which the sixth to eighth regame winnings are established in step S2011, and then the push order notification process is terminated. To do. If it is not in the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S2005, the push order notification for the first regame winning is performed, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2009 that it is not BAR replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not the current lottery result is a bell. In the case of the bell winning, in step S2013, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to notify the pushing order in which the bell winning is established as the first small role, and then the pushing order notifying process is ended. . If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the push order notification process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 45), if it is determined in step S1902 that it is not a push forward winning combination, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not a specific winning combination is won. If it is a special combination winning, a specific combination notification process is performed in step S1905. The specific combination notification process will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1904, or after the processing of step S1903 or step S1905 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether an add command is received as the current start command. If an additional command has been received, in step S1907, processing for setting the additional effect in advance is performed so that the additional effect of the number of games corresponding to the additional command is executed when stopped. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59B, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games as “+10”. In addition, in the extra effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Cucucucucuen!”) Is emitted from the speaker 64.

  Details of the setting process of the added effect in step S1907 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2101, a process of grasping the number of added games is performed based on the added command received this time. In a succeeding step S2102, a notification timing lottery process is executed. The notification timing lottery process is a process of lottery at which timing in the game the extra effect is performed on the premise that an extra effect will be performed in the current game.

  The extra effect is set so that the execution timing differs depending on the number of extra games. Specifically, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. 48, as the execution timing of the extra effect in the current game, the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel are arranged in the order of stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Then, a stop time of the first reel, a stop operation of the second reel, and a stop operation time of the third reel are set. And the timing at which the stop ON operation that the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed among the stop operations of each reel is performed, the timing that the stop OFF operation that the said pressing operation is finished is performed, Is set.

  Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the operation modes of the stop switches 42 to 44. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from an initial position arranged on the near side to an operation position arranged on the far side. In the situation where it is arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in the LOW state, and the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are generated by operating from the initial position to the operation position. The LOW signal is switched to the HI signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that a stop ON operation has been performed on the assumption that the pressing operation of stop switches 42 to 44 has been performed based on the detection signal switching from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

  Further, the stop switches 42 to 44 are urged toward the initial position by a spring or the like. For this reason, when the operation force (pressing force) pushed toward the operation position is not applied by releasing the stop switches 42 to 44, the stop switches 42 to 44 are moved to the initial position by the biasing force of the spring or the like. Return to. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that a stop-off operation has been performed on the basis that the pressing operation of stop switches 42 to 44 has been completed based on the detection signal switching from the HI signal to the LOW signal.

  The extra effect is set so that the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 can be generated either during the stop ON operation or during the stop OFF operation. That is, in a game in which an extra effect is generated, the extra effect can be generated not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation is finished.

  In the execution timing table of the extra effect, the timing at which the first reel stop ON operation is performed is selected as 5% when, for example, an extra game of 5 to 10 games occurs as a relatively small number of extra games. The timing at which the first reel stop OFF operation is performed is 10%, the second reel stop ON operation is 15%, the second reel stop OFF operation is 20%, the third reel stop ON operation is 20%, The third reel stop-off operation (when all reels are stopped) is 30% and is selected. In this case, it is easier to select the operation at the stop OFF operation and the operation at the rear side than the operation at the stop ON operation of each reel.

  On the other hand, when the number of added games is relatively large, for example, when an increase of 100 games or more occurs, the timing at which the first reel stop ON operation is performed is selected at 5%, and the first reel stop OFF operation is selected. Is performed at 10%, second reel stop ON operation is 5%, second reel stop OFF operation is 30%, third reel stop ON operation is 5%, third reel stop OFF operation ( When all reels are stopped), 45% is selected. Also in this case, the reel OFF operation is easier to select than the stop ON operation, and the rear operation is relatively easier to select.

  That is, in the present embodiment, it is set so that an additional effect is more likely to occur during the stop-off operation than during the stop-on operation of each reel. Further, when comparing the first to third reels, the third reel stop operation (ON operation, OFF operation) is most easily selected, the second reel stop operation is most easily selected, and the first reel is stopped. It is set so that it is most easily selected during operation.

  Returning to the description of the setting process of the extra effect, after performing the notification timing lottery process in step S2102, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S2102 is when any of the reels is stopped ON. judge. If it is at the time of stop ON, in step S2104, the target reel that generates the additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to be generated when the target reel is stopped ON. Specifically, a process for setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is performed. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of occurrence of the added effect. Further, in step S2104, the effect data of the added effect corresponding to the number of added games generated at the time of the stop ON operation is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 recognizes that an extra effect is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation time flag, the CPU 181 reads the effect data temporarily stored in the effect data setting area and causes the extra effect to be performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the first reel or the second reel has been turned OFF. If it is during the stop-off operation of these reels, in step S2106, a target reel that generates an extra effect is set, and an additional effect is generated when the stop-off operation of the target reel is performed. Specifically, processing for setting either the first reel stop OFF operation time flag or the second reel stop OFF operation time flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is performed. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of occurrence of the added effect. Also in step S2106, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of added games is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2105, in step S2107, a setting is made so that the current addition effect is generated when all reels are stopped (when the third reel is stopped OFF). Specifically, processing for setting a flag at the time of third reel stop OFF operation is performed in various flag storage areas 183a. Also in step S2107, temporary storage processing of effect data for an extra effect corresponding to the number of extra games is performed. After executing the process of step S2104, step S2106, or step S2107, the setting process for the added effect is ended.

  Returning to the description of the start-time effect setting process, if no additional command has been received in step S1906, or after executing the process in step S1907, the bonus effect setting process is executed in step S1908, and the process proceeds to step S1909. In step S1910, after setting other start-time effects, the start-time effect setting process is terminated. The bonus effect production setting process and the continuous production setting process will be described later in detail. In the process of step S1910, for example, an effect that suggests a lottery result is set in correspondence with the start of the game, or a lamp around the start lever 41 is turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Direction setting process during each stop operation>
Next, each stop operation effect setting process executed in step S1708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2201, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command that is output from the main controller 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed among the stop operations of each reel.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202, and it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs at the time of reel stop ON operation is set as an effect of the current game. If it is not set, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is set, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is a stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect at the time of the set stop ON operation. If the target reel is not a stop-ON operation, the present setting process is terminated as it is. If it is a stop-on operation of the target reel, in step S2204, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that an effect at the time of the stop-on operation is performed.

  For example, when an extra effect is set as the current stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. 50A, the auxiliary display unit 65 is at the timing of pressing the stop switches 42 to 44 (ON operation). An additional effect is generated. In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64.

  For example, if the current game is a push order winning selection and a push order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel is stopped based on each stop ON operation, so that the push order notification effect is the next operation target. It changes to the production which shows the reel which becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, a display for the first reel shown in FIG. . Then, when the corresponding reel (the middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the reel (right reel 32R in the figure) to be operated next is shown in FIG. Changes to production. In addition, if the two reels are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, the second reel shown in FIG. 37 (b) is displayed as a stop target, and the second is displayed by the stop ON operation. Based on the fact that the reels are stopped, the display changes to the display in which the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 37 (c)).

  When a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2205, and it is determined whether or not each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command that is output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations of each reel is completed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2206, and it is determined whether or not an effect generated at the time of reel stop OFF operation is set as an effect of the current game. If it is not set, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is set, in step S2207, it is determined whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is a stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect at the set stop OFF operation. If it is not a stop-off operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is a stop-off operation of the target reel, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that an effect at the time of the stop-off operation is performed in step S2208, and then this setting process is ended.

  For example, when an additional effect is set as the current stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the hand is released, a supplementary effect is generated in the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the effect setting process is terminated as it is.

<All stop production setting process>
Next, the all-stop production setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether a challenge mode end command is included as a stop command received this time. If a challenge mode end command is included, in step S2302, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that a challenge mode end effect is performed. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters “end of challenge mode”. In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, control is performed so that a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, a man's daring voice “I want to improve more!”) Is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2301, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not an attack mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. If an attack mode start command is included, processing for setting an attack mode start effect is performed in step S2304. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "Attack mode! Ver.1". In addition, in the attack mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “attack mode start!” With a female high voice) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  Incidentally, the display of “Ver. 1” in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. That is, the display indicates that the attack mode started this time is the first attack mode. When the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when a promotion command is received), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “Attack mode! Ver. 2” as a promotion effect. When the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the third attack mode, the text “Attack mode! Ver.3” is displayed. When the rank is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the letters “Attack mode! Ver.4” are displayed. Display is performed.

  If an attack mode start command is not included in step S2303, it is determined in step S2305 whether or not an attack mode end command is included as the currently received stop command. If an attack mode end command is included, processing for setting an attack mode end effect is performed in step S2306. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “Attack mode END” and includes the current attack mode (including the VB mode and the specialized zone). ) And the total number of payouts in the current attack mode (including the VB mode, the special zone, and the bonus). In addition, in the attack mode end effect, control is performed such that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “seeking” with a high voice of a woman) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2305, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. If a VB mode start command is included, processing for setting a VB mode start effect is performed in step S2308. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters “777 Victory!”. In addition, in the VB mode start effect, control is performed such that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Victory bonus start” with male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2307, it is determined in step S2311 whether the VB mode end command is included as the currently received stop command. If a VB mode end command is included, in step S2312, processing for setting a VB mode end effect is performed. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “PICTURE BONUS END” and the number of continued games in the attack mode at the end of the current VB mode. The number of continued games (including the VB mode and the special zone) is displayed, and the total payout number of the attack mode (including the VB mode, the special zone and the bonus) at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “it will continue still” with male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2311, it is determined in step S2313 whether or not the specialized zone start command is included as the currently received stop command. If a specialized zone start command is included, processing for setting a specialized zone start effect is performed in step S2314. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “addition challenge!” And a special mode in which an attack mode is likely to occur. The character that suggests is displayed. In addition, in the special zone start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “goes” with a boy's voice) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If a specialized zone start command is not included in step S2313, it is determined in step S2315 whether or not a specialized zone end command is included as the currently received stop command. If a special zone end command is included, in step S2316, processing for setting a special zone end effect is performed. In the special zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of games added in the current special zone. In addition, in the special zone end effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Cucucucucuen!” With an electronic sound) is emitted from the speaker 64. The display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker 64 may be varied according to the total number of added games.

  If the special zone end command is not included in step S2315, it is determined in step S2317 whether or not a bonus end command is included as the currently received stop command. If a bonus end command is included, processing for setting a bonus end effect is performed in step S2318. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts acquired during the current bonus, and the attack mode (VB mode, attack mode ( The total number of payouts (including VB mode, specialized zone, bonus) is displayed. In addition, in the bonus end effect, an effect is given by a character or the like that suggests these contents according to whether the attack mode is successful, whether the challenge mode is successful, and the number of added games.

  After executing any of the processes of step S2302, step S2304, step S2306, step S2308, step S2312, step S2314, step S2316, and step S2318, or after making a negative determination in step S2317, the process proceeds to step S2309 and step S2319. move on. In steps S2309 and S2319, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As already described, the setting of the extra effect is performed in step S1907 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, in the setting process of the added effect (FIG. 47), when the generation timing of the added effect is set at the time of all stops, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), all the reels 32L and 32M are displayed. , 32R is stopped at the timing when the auxiliary display unit 65 adds an effect. In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64.

  Thereafter, in step S2310 and step S2320, other stop-time effects are set, and then the effect setting process ends. In step S2310 and step S2320, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, or control is performed so that a sound effect corresponding to the number of winning combinations is emitted from the speaker 64. The sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet at the time of replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

  As described above, based on various commands from the main control device 101, various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode are performed on the display control device 81 side, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, processing for effects during various games is performed in addition to the notification of the transition of the display mode.

<Processing for production during various games>
In the present embodiment, continuous effects and bonus effects are provided as effects during various games. The continuous performance is an effect that expects a result advantageous to the player (a bonus, an attack mode, a challenge mode, a VB mode, etc.), and is a game that is performed a plurality of times (four times in this embodiment). It is an effect that can be continued over a period of time, and is an effect in which notification is made as to whether or not the advantageous result has been obtained in the final game. The bonus effect is an effect performed in each game in the bonus state that shifts based on the first BB or the second BB winning.

  The outline of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 60 (a), at the start of the first game in which a continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of times of continuous effect is displayed (in the figure, four stages are made corresponding to the continuous effect of four games). Shows a nodama drop production). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is provided to notify the presence / absence of continuation of the continuous effect (in the figure, the effect that the first stage daruma drop has been successful is shown, Indicating that the continuous production will continue). When the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game for which the continuous effect is set, an effect is provided to notify that the continuous effect ends in the middle (for example, an effect in which the first stage drama drop fails) ). The effects relating to the continuation of the continuous effects are the same for each game in the continuous effects.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), at the start of the second game in which a continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining three stages of daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is shown (in the figure, the effect that the second stage daruma drop has been successful is shown, and the continuous effect is continued) Is shown).

  As shown in FIG. 60 (c), at the start of the third game in which a continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining two stages of daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect that informs whether or not the continuous effect is continued is shown (in the figure, the effect that the third stage daruma drop has been successful is shown, and the continuous effect continues. Is shown).

  As shown in FIG. 60D, at the start of the final game of the continuous effect (fourth game), a display indicating that it is the final game of the continuous effect is displayed (in the figure, a one-stage daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is made as to whether or not the result is advantageous to the player (the drawing shows an effect that the last stage daruma drop was successful).

  As described above, in the continuous production, the production of the next game is set by taking over the production of the previous game, and the production of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize how many games the current game is from the start of the continuous production (how many games are there until the end of the continuous production).

  Here, in each continuous effect game, whether or not the continuous effect continues until the next game is set such that the continuation rate increases as the continuous effect game progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous effect, the possibility of being notified of the discontinuation of the continuous effect is the highest. Therefore, in the continuous production, the player's level of interest differs greatly depending on how many games the current game is in the continuous production, and the higher the interest will be as the game progresses from the start game to the end game. .

  Hereinafter, as processing related to the above-described continuous effects and bonus effects, the bonus effect setting process (step S1908), the specific combination notification process (step S1905), and the continuous effect setting process (step S1909) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 45). ) Will be described respectively.

<Direction processing during bonus>
First, the bonus effect processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the bonus effect production setting process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to a game from the next game winning the first BB or the second BB to the end of the bonus. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S2401 is a case where the first BB or the second BB winning is established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2402, the bonus effect game number is set in the bonus effect counter in the various counter areas 183b in the RAM 183. The bonus effect counter is a counter for executing an effect set for each game in accordance with the progress of the bonus game, and an effect corresponding to the counter is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

  As already explained, in this embodiment, in the bonus game of the first BB and the second BB, a winning combination in which 9 medals are paid out every game is won, and the bonus ends when 216 medals are paid out. In other words, the bonus game of the first BB or the second BB ends with 24 games. The effects in the bonus game are set so as to be executed over 24 games, and the above-described bonus effect counter is a counter for grasping which game effect of the 24 games should be performed. It is. In step S2402, 24 is set in the bonus effect counter as the number of bonus effect games. After performing the process of step S2402, in step S2403, a bonus effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The bonus effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the bonus effect is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or after executing the process of step S2403, the bonus effect production setting process is terminated.

<Specific role notification process>
Next, the specific combination notification process executed in step S1905 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included as the current start command. If no precursor command is included, it is determined in step S2502 whether an additional command is included as the current start command. If no additional command is included, it is determined in step S2503 whether a bonus has been won. If you have not won the bonus, that is, if you have won the specified role as the lottery result, you have not won the lottery to enter the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode or the number of continuing games, If the bonus has not been won, lottery processing in the pseudo precursor mode is executed in step S2504. While the pseudo precursor mode is visually difficult to distinguish from the precursor mode, in the precursor mode, an advantageous result (winning of the challenge mode, etc.) is notified to the player based on the end of the number of precursor games, The pseudo precursor mode is a mode that ends without notifying a result advantageous to the player based on the end of the number of pseudo precursor games.

  In step S2504, a table for pseudo precursor mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 183b to determine whether to execute the pseudo precursor mode. Do. The table for pseudo-signature mode lottery is set so that the probability of winning the pseudo-predictor mode lottery varies depending on the type of the specific role that has been won, for example, strong cherry is more simulated than weak cherry The probability of winning the lottery in the sign mode is set to be high.

  In step S2505, based on the processing result in step S2504, it is determined whether or not the lottery in the pseudo precursor mode is won. If the game is won, a lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode is performed in step S2506. This process corresponds to step S810 on the main control apparatus 101 side, and the number of pseudo precursor games among 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. In the subsequent step S2507, a process of setting the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2506 to a continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is performed. The continuous performance counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result notification, and is decremented by 1 for each game. For example, in a configuration in which four games are continuously produced, a continuous production is started in a game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and a result is notified in a game in which the continuous production counter is 0. In the present embodiment, when the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is set, the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode ends after the continuous performance. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo-predictor games to the continuous effect counter in step S2507, the continuous effect is started when the remaining number of games in the pseudo-signature mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (the remaining four games). It will be.

  In step S2508, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating that it is the pseudo precursor mode in various flag storage areas 183a is executed. In a succeeding step S2509, a continuous effect flag is set. Thereafter, the specific combination notification process is terminated. In addition, when an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2501 to S2503, or when a negative determination is made in step S2505, the specific combination notification process is terminated.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S1909 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 45) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2601, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included as the start command received this time. If a precursor command is included, in step S2602, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode included in the precursor command is input to the continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the sign mode becomes the one corresponding to the start of the continuous effect (the remaining four games), the continuous effect is started. When the number of precursor games of 1 to 3 games is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2602, the continuous effect is started from the middle. For example, if 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2602, the continuous effect is started from the current game, and is performed from the third effect of the continuous effect in FIG. 60 (c). Further, when 0 is input to the continuous effect counter, that is, when the winning notification such as the attack mode is performed without going through the precursor mode, the continuous effect is not executed. After performing the process of step S2602, a continuous effect flag is set in step S2603.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or after executing the process of step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, it is determined whether the continuous performance flag is set. If the continuous performance flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous performance counter is performed in step S2605. In step S2606, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. If the continuous effect counter is a number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S2608 to acquire the sign indication effect table from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2609, the corresponding effect data of the continuous effect is specified from the sign effect table and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is obtained. Process to set as. As the production data of the continuous production specified from the production table for the sign, if the continuous production counter is 1 to 3, the production data indicates that the continuous production continues until the next game. If it is 0, it is production data indicating that the current continuous production ends successfully.

  If it is determined in step S2607 that the pseudo flag is set, the process advances to step S2610. In step S2610, a pseudo-prediction effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. In step S2611, the corresponding effect data of the continuous effect is specified from the pseudo-signature effect table and the continuous effect counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182. Process to set as. As the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the pseudo-prediction effect table, if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game, or the effect data indicating that the effect is not continued If the continuous production counter is 0, the production data indicates that the current continuous production ends due to failure.

  In addition, when the continuous production counter is 1 to 3, the production data specified from the pseudo-signature production table includes those for which no continuous production is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, continuous effect data is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicates that the continuous effect continues until the next game in FIG. When the effect data for the effect 1 game is set and the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data for the second effect of the continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect is not continued until the next game in FIG. 60B is set. By doing in this way, it is possible to set an effect in which a continuous effect is interrupted in the middle of a game in which the number of pseudo precursor games in the pseudo precursor mode is zero.

  After performing the processing of step S2609 or step S2611, it is determined in step S2612 whether or not the continuous effect counter is zero. When the continuous effect counter is 0, processing for clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S2613. When the pseudo flag is not set, the state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S2606 or step S2612, or after the process of step S2613 is performed, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2604 that the continuous performance flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2614. In step S2614, it is determined whether the bonus effect flag is set. If it has been set, a bonus bonus counter is subtracted in step S2615. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from the bonus effect counter is performed. In a succeeding step S2616, a bonus effect table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. In step S2617, the corresponding bonus effect data is specified from the bonus effect table and the bonus effect counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b. Process to set as. In step S2618, it is determined whether or not the bonus effect counter is zero. If the bonus effect counter is 0, processing for clearing the bonus effect flag is performed in step S2619. Then, this continuous effect setting process is complete | finished.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, lottery processing on the main controller 101 side is performed based on the insertion of medals as game media and the start operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R When the rotation is started and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the combination of symbols stopped on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, it corresponds. In the configuration in which the privilege is given, a plurality of RT states having different replay probabilities as a result of the lottery process are provided, and the RT state shifts when a corresponding promotion replay or fall replay winning is established. Whether or not the corresponding replay can be won is determined by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the result of the success / failure lottery, and the notification of the operation order is performed according to the result of the lottery process. It is done by winning the lottery. As a result of the lottery process, a push order bell is provided, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to establish the push order bell winning and obtain a medal. Then, the game state that improves the replay probability is shifted to the second RT state or the third RT state, and is shifted to the display mode in which the operation order is notified. An order bell prize can be established, and a large amount of medals can be obtained.

  Transition events for display modes that trigger the acquisition of a large number of medals, the number of continuous games such as attack mode, etc. Occurs when winning a specific role such as watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, B, middle bell. That is, as the specific combination, a small combination (single combination) or duplicate combination of IV = 13 to 19, 32 to 45 is set, and when these specific combination is won, An extra lottery will be held, or a lottery will be won in the bonus winning / losing lottery. The specific combination is a combination that is won with a relatively low probability than a bell or replay, and is also called a rare combination. Therefore, the player plays a game in each game while expecting the occurrence of such a relatively low probability event.

  Here, the display mode transition lottery based on the specific combination and the bonus winning / losing lottery will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating the relationship among the lottery table for the normal gaming state, the display mode transition lottery, and the set value.

  As already described, as the specific combination, a single combination such as a strong cherry with IV = 13 to 19 and an overlapping combination with a bonus with IV = 32 to 45 are set.

  The bonuses for the first BB and the second BB are the winning flags corresponding to the bonus winnings (the first flag when the winning combination with the bonus of IV = 32 to 45 is won, and when the bonus winning combination of IV = 46, 47 is won) 1BB winning flag, second BB winning flag) are set. On the other hand, if a single role winning of IV = 13-19 is won, the bonus is not duplicated. That is, in step S305 of the lottery process in FIG. 16, if it is determined that IV = 13-19 is won, the winning flag (strong cherry winning) of the small role corresponding to IV = 13-19 in step S308 is determined. Although a flag, a weak cherry winning flag, a strong watermelon winning flag, a weak watermelon winning flag, a chance A winning flag, a chance B winning flag, and a middle bell winning flag are set, in step S307, a bonus winning flag (first BB winning flag, first flag 2BB winning flag) is not set. That is, the trigger event as a bonus win occurs in a game won with IV = 32 to 45, and does not occur in a game won with IV = 13 to 19.

  The triggering event as a bonus winning may have a different probability of occurrence depending on a set value that causes a change in the payout rate. That is, among IV = 32 to 45, the duplicate winning combination with the first BB has the same winning probability regardless of the set value, and the occurrence probability is the same, while the overlapping winning combination with the second BB differs depending on the set value. The probability of winning is different and the probability of occurrence is different. More specifically, strong cherry overlap 1 (IV = 32), weak cherry overlap 1 (IV = 34), strong watermelon overlap 1 (IV = 36), weak watermelon overlap 1 (IV = 38), chance A overlap 1 (IV = 40), the probability of winning the chance B overlap 1 (IV = 42) and the middle bell overlap 1 (IV = 44) is set to be the same probability regardless of the set value, while the strong cherry overlap 2 (IV = 33), weak cherry overlap 2 (IV = 35), strong watermelon overlap 2 (IV = 37), weak watermelon overlap 2 (IV = 39), chance A overlap 2 (IV = 41), chance B overlap 2 (IV = 43), the probability of winning the middle bell overlap 2 (IV = 45) is set to be different depending on the set value. The probability of winning the first BB and the second BB independently is set to be the same winning probability regardless of the set value. Therefore, the first BB is set to have the same occurrence probability regardless of the set value, while the second BB is set to have a different occurrence probability depending on the set value.

  The display mode transition lottery is performed when a winning combination is set to have the same probability of occurrence according to the set value among the independent roles of IV = 13 to 19 and the overlapping roles of IV = 32 to 45. On the other hand, it is not carried out when winning a duplicated role set to have a different occurrence probability depending on the set value among the duplicated roles with IV = 32 to 45 (or so that the winning probability of being implemented is 0) Set to). In other words, regardless of whether or not there is an overlap with the bonus, the winning combination of the winning combination with the same winning probability is set according to the setting value, while the lottery of the display mode is not performed at the time of winning the winning combination having the winning probability depending on the setting value. Sometimes the display mode transition lottery is performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, unlike the trigger event as the bonus winning, it can be said that the trigger event related to the display mode is determined so that the occurrence probability does not differ depending on the set value. Regarding the triggering events related to the display mode, regardless of only the display mode transition lottery, the performance varies depending on the setting value for the number of consecutive games in the attack mode and challenge mode, and the number of additional games in the lottery. It is determined not to be.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the first advantageous state as a bonus state that becomes advantageous for the player by changing the probability of lottery winning / failing lottery (lottery table) and the notification of the operation order of the push forward combination When compared with the second advantageous state such as an attack mode that becomes advantageous for the player by being performed, the winning probability (transition probability) differs depending on the set value for the first advantageous state, and the second advantageous state Is determined so that the winning probability (transition probability) does not vary depending on the set value.

  The best part of the so-called slot machine game is that each game is selected by winning / raising a role, and the reels are stopped according to the result. There is also an idea that the second advantageous state to be obtained is a secondary game. From this point of view, it is not preferable that the winning probabilities differ even with respect to the second advantageous state of the secondary game, even though it is acceptable that the winning probability of the first advantageous state differs depending on the set value. Conceivable. If the winning probabilities vary depending on the set value even for the above secondary games, the difference in the winning rate due to the winning probability of each role that is the main game becomes small, and as a result, the master and slave of the game are reversed. This is because there is a possibility that it may occur.

  Therefore, by adjusting the payout rate according to the first advantageous state as described above, and considering the second advantageous state as a secondary game to the last, these first advantageous features can be obtained without eradicating the original gaming characteristics of the slot machine. It is possible to realize gameability by cooperation between the state and the second advantageous state.

  With regard to the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, both advantageous states are implemented separately, and are set so that the two states do not overlap. In other words, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, when the first BB or the second BB is elected and the bonus state (BB state) is entered, such a bonus state is maintained until a specified number of payouts are made, and the RT state or the like is changed. There is no migration. Further, the display mode also shifts to the BB mode, and the BB mode is maintained until the bonus state is ended (the shift to the attack mode or the like does not occur). If the first BB or the second BB is won during the attack mode, the display mode is shifted to the BB mode, and the attack mode is resumed after the BB mode is ended (FIG. 40).

  On the other hand, the configuration is such that the trigger event of the other advantageous state can occur during one advantageous state. More specifically, while the first advantageous state, which is the main game, is a secondary game and no trigger event related to the second advantageous state (such as attack mode transition lottery or extra lottery, etc.) occurs, in the second advantageous state, An event (bonus winning) relating to the first advantageous state can occur. Specifically, in each small role (IV = 29 to 31) in the bonus state as the first advantageous state, the attack mode transition lottery, the extra lottery, etc. are not performed, and the trigger event relating to the second advantageous state does not occur. . On the other hand, during the attack mode or the VB mode as the second advantageous state, an overlapping event of IV = 32 to 45 can be won, so that an event related to the first advantageous state can occur. In this way, while restricting the repeated execution of both advantageous states, the other triggering event can occur, so that the chain of both advantageous states is likely to occur, and the interest is improved.

  Here, when the operation order of the push order is performed in the second advantageous state, in addition to the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 in FIG. 37 (the push order notification effect by the display control device 81), The push monitor is also notified on the instruction monitor 68 connected to the main controller 101. The configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 62A is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 62B is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

  As shown in FIG. 62A, the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by turning on and off the individual light sources, only one arbitrary display segment can be turned on, Any combination of display segments can be lit. Thereby, on the instruction monitor 68, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed. Since each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

  Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers “1” to “6” can be displayed. Further, the eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged on the side of the lower right portion of the region where the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least “1” to “6”, “1.” to “6.”, and “.”.

  As long as it is possible to individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols on the instruction monitor 68, the shape and arrangement of the display segments N1 to N8 are arbitrary, and 7 instead of 8 segments. A configuration using nine segments, nine segments, or the like may be used. Moreover, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 may be appropriately changed. Moreover, the structure which controls lighting or extinction of each display segment N1-N8 by carrying out on-off control of a light source is not essential, and if display control can be performed in each display segment N1-N8 individually, A segment indicator may be constituted by a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Furthermore, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, a dot matrix, and the like.

  The first display segment N <b> 1 to the seventh display segment N <b> 7 are display segments used for notifying the operation order of the push order. For example, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), a winning mode that is advantageous to the player by performing a stop operation in the order of “left” → “middle” → “right” as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit on and “1” is displayed. When the stop operation is performed in the order of “right” → “left” → “middle” as the operation sequence of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and displayed as “5”. That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win in a manner advantageous to the player.

  The eighth display segment N8 is won in the attack mode, super attack mode, challenge mode lottery when the display mode is the normal mode, or in the attack mode, super attack mode, challenge mode at the same time. Lights when the bonus to be obtained (1st BB) is won. Further, the light is turned off when the attack mode, the super attack mode, the challenge mode, or the first BB is finished and the mode is changed to the normal mode (except when the mode is changed to the attack mode again after passing through the precursor mode).

  That is, the navigation state (attack mode, super attack mode, high-frequency mode) that makes it easy for the player to win a prize by making it easier to notify the operation order of the push order bell and the push order replay, and the navigation state Chance state (challenge mode, first BB, high probability mode) that makes it easy to win a lottery transition lottery, or a winning lottery that has won a navigation lottery or chance state lottery, but has not transitioned to these navigation states or chance states By setting the section including the state (winning mode) as the advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), the eighth display segment N8 is turned on during the advantageous section and is turned off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means) for clearly indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section.

  The eighth display segment N8 is a game in which a game result (a specific role such as strong cherry) that is triggered by an advantageous section such as a navigation state, a chance state, or a winning state is won and the game result is established. In the next game after the start game, lighting is started as a notification that an advantageous section is reached at a timing before the player's gaming operation is permitted. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the game result winning game is determined regardless of whether or not a game result winning that is an opportunity of the advantageous section is established, that is, whether or not a missed game occurs. As the start game, the eighth display segment N8 is lit at a timing before the bet operation is permitted as a game operation by the player in the next game. That is, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on before the start of the game next to the game won in the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section.

  As already described, the indication monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is the number of payouts in the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62. That is, the instruction monitor 68 is disposed above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like are provided. Is not placed on the makeup panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is suppressed from being hidden by a hand or the like operating the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily see. Moreover, it can be said that the oversight by the player is suppressed even if it is arranged near the payout number display portion 62 that is easy for the player to advance the game with the aim of acquiring medals.

  Further, in the instruction monitor 68, in particular, the eighth display segment N8 has a lightness higher than the lightness of surrounding display parts (for example, the payout number display part 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice that of the surrounding display section. Therefore, even when the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are both controlled to emit light (when they are in a lit state), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. As for the illuminance directed toward the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance directed toward the front of the gaming machine is higher in the eighth display segment N8 than in the surrounding display unit (more specifically, the illuminance of the surrounding display unit is 2 The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled. Also from such a configuration, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and oversight when the eighth display segment N8 is in a lit state is suppressed.

  Hereinafter, the section display first process and the section display second process will be described as the processes related to turning on / off the eighth display segment N8.

<First section display process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16). The lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery result is determined based on the lottery result. This is performed after a display mode transition lottery or the like (lottery result handling process) is performed.

  In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, when the eighth display segment N8 is being lit, as an advantageous section, a state in which a lottery for shifting to the attack mode, the super attack mode, or the challenge mode is won, or in these modes It shows a case. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S2702.

  In step S2702, it is determined whether either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. When the eighth display segment N8 is turned off and either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, in the current lottery process, the lottery for entering the challenge mode or the attack mode This is a case where a lottery for transition to the super attack mode is won. As already explained, in the first specific combination process (FIG. 32), when winning the lottery to shift to the challenge mode, the challenge mode winning flag is set and the lottery to shift to the attack mode or super attack mode is won. In this case, the attack mode winning flag is set. If any flag is not set in step S2702, the first section display first process is terminated.

  If either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, the process advances to step S2703 to execute display start mode lottery processing. In the display start mode lottery process, the display start mode table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the lighting mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery when shifting to the advantageous section. In the display start mode table in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is set to be different depending on the contents of the advantageous section.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is as follows: when the start lever 41 is operated, when the first reel is turned on, when the first reel is turned off, The reel stop ON operation, the second reel stop OFF operation, the third reel stop ON operation, the third reel stop OFF operation, and the medal payout completion based on winning are set. In this case, the section display first process is one of the lottery processes performed based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the operation time of the start lever 41 in the lighting start timing is the lottery process. When the start lever 41 is operated as an opportunity, the lighting is started immediately after the first section display process. The first reel, the second reel, and the third reel are the first reel among the three stop switches 42 to 44 that is stopped first, and the reel that is stopped next is the first reel. The reel that was the second reel and was last stopped is the third reel. The stop ON operation and the stop OFF operation are as described above, and the operation of pushing the stop switches 42 to 44 from the initial position arranged on the near side to the operation position arranged on the far side is the stop ON operation. An operation for returning from the operation position to the initial position by releasing the switches 42 to 44 is a stop OFF operation. In addition, when a medal payout is completed, if a winning is not achieved due to a missed out, lighting is started without going through a payout process.

  When shifting to the challenge mode (when the challenge mode winning flag is set), the start lever 41 is operated at 5%, the first reel is turned on at 10%, and the first reel is turned off. 55%, 5% during the second reel stop ON operation, 15% during the second reel stop OFF operation, 3% during the third reel stop ON operation, and the third reel stop OFF operation. 6% is selected at the rate of 1% when the medal payout is completed. In addition, when shifting to the attack mode (when the attack mode winning flag is set), the start lever 41 is operated at 3%, the first reel is stopped at 3%, and the first reel is stopped. 6% during OFF operation, 10% during stop ON operation of second reel, 55% during stop OFF operation of second reel, 5% during stop ON operation of third reel, stop OFF operation of third reel The time is selected at a rate of 15% and the completion of medal payout at a rate of 3%. When shifting to the super attack mode (when the attack mode winning flag is set and the special zone flag is set), the start lever 41 is operated at 1% and the first reel is stopped. 2% during the ON operation, 4% during the first reel stop OFF operation, 8% during the second reel stop ON operation, 20% during the second reel stop OFF operation, third reel stop ON operation The time is selected at a rate of 8%, when the third reel is stopped and turned off, 50%, and when the medal payout is completed is 7%.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the case of shifting to the advantageous section, the section indicator (eighth) selected by the transition to the challenge mode, the transition to the attack mode, and the transition to the super attack mode. The display start timing of the display segment N8) is set so as to be different. In the challenge mode, the first reel is most easily selected when the stop is turned off. In the attack mode, the second reel is turned off when the stop is turned off. In the super attack mode, it is most easily selected when the third reel is turned off. The challenge mode is a so-called chance zone that makes it easy to shift to the attack mode, the attack mode is a navigation state in which the push order notification is easy to be performed, and the super attack mode is a navigation state in which the transition to the attack mode is made through the additional special zone The attack mode has a higher advantage for the player than the challenge mode, and the super attack mode has a higher advantage for the player than the attack mode. That is, when the eighth display segment N8 is lit and the transition to the advantageous section is made, it can be said that the advantage for the player greatly varies depending on the contents of the advantageous section. Since the display start mode is such that the contents and the degree of advantage of such an advantageous section are associated with the eighth display seg surface and N8, the eighth display segment N8 is selected in the game selected in the lottery for shifting to these modes. It becomes possible to make a great interest in the timing of starting lighting.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the later the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is, the easier it is to shift to the advantageous section of the mode that is advantageous to the player. For this reason, a device has been devised so that the throbbing feeling of whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is lit is gradually obtained.

  Moreover, any display start timing can be selected in any mode win, while giving superiority or inferiority to the selection rate of the display start timing in each mode. That is, for example, when the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started when the start lever 41 is operated, it is most likely that the player has won the challenge mode lottery, and the player can win the super attack mode lottery. Although it is set to have the lowest possibility, the possibility is not zero with respect to the super attack mode with the lowest possibility. In this way, even when the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started at a timing different from the timing desired by the player, it is possible not to give up until the mode notification is made. it can.

  Here, as already described, the notification that the challenge mode has been won (challenge mode start effect, step S1802) and the notification that the attack mode has been won (attack mode win notification effect, step S1804) After that, it is performed at the time of betting operation of the next game where the number of precursor games becomes zero. On the other hand, in the eighth display segment N8 as the section display, a game in which a game result that is a trigger for the transition lottery such as the challenge mode is set as a start game, and a bet operation of the next game is permitted. Lighting starts at a timing before That is, even if the sign mode is set to 0 game, when the winning notification effect of each mode transition and the notification of the advantageous section by the section display are compared, the notification of the advantageous section by the section display is performed first. In such a relationship, when the section indicator lighting starts, it is configured not to be able to completely specify which mode is won, so each mode transitions after the section indicator lighting starts It is also possible to provide a feeling of pounding during the period in which the winning notification effect is performed.

  Further, when viewing the stop operation of each reel, the configuration is such that the stop OFF operation is more easily selected than the stop ON operation. Therefore, in a situation where there is no confirmation whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is lit, it is considered that the operation is performed with a sense of expectation of lighting during the stop OFF operation rather than during the stop ON operation. . In this case, it is highly likely that the corresponding reel is stopped by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 to stop, and that the corresponding reel is stopped when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop OFF. Therefore, in the situation where the corresponding reel is stopped than in the situation before the corresponding reel is stopped, the stop switch 42 has a high expectation that the eighth display segment N8 is lit. It is thought that ~ 44 operations are performed.

  For example, when the weak cherry win of the 27th small role is compared with the strong cherry win of the 28th small role, the reels 32L and 32M in the 27th small role win and the 28th small role win are compared. , 32R aiming at the “cherry” symbol, the stop appearance of the left reel 32L is the same, and the “cherry” symbol stops at the upper or lower stage of the left reel 32L. . In this case, by stopping the middle reel 32M, it is determined whether the winning is the 27th small winning combination or the 28th small winning combination. And in this embodiment, it is set as the structure which may win the transfer lottery to an advantageous area about both the 27th small combination and the 28th small combination. That is, if the left display 32L is stopped and the eighth display segment N8 is not lit, (1) the game result of the current game is a weak cherry win and the eighth display segment N8 is still Case where lighting timing has not been reached, (2) Case where the game result of this game is a weak cherry win, and a lottery to any advantageous section is not won, (3) Game of this game Case where the result is a strong cherry win and the lighting timing of the eighth display segment N8 has not yet reached (4) The game result of this game is a strong cherry win and the transition to any advantageous section There may be cases where the lottery was not won. Then, by stopping the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R as the second reel, it is determined whether the case is (1) or (2), or (3) or (4). And, since it is easier to win the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section than when the weak cherry is won, as a player, than the case of (1) or (2) ( It is considered that the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are stopped while expecting the case of 3) or (4). That is, since the “cherry” symbol is also stopped at a predetermined position on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, it is determined that the case is (3) or (4), and therefore the “cherry” symbol is stopped. It is thought that the stop operation is performed while hoping for this. In this situation, the stop-off operation is an operation for determining whether the case is the case (3) or the case (4). Does the section indicator light up more purely? You can entertain or not. In other words, since the eighth display segment N8 is difficult to turn on when the stop-on operation is performed while wishing to stop the “cherry” symbol, the “cherry” symbol is more purely displayed during the stop-on operation. "You can entertain the game that stops the symbol." In this way, by dividing the parts that would be of interest to the player in stages so that they do not overlap easily, the player's attention will be distracted and it will be less likely that an event where the player cannot enjoy the game will occur. Is possible.

  Returning to the description of the section display first process, after the display start mode lottery process is executed in step S2703, in step S2704, a process of setting the display start mode is performed based on the lottery result in step S2703. In this case, a process of setting a flag corresponding to the timing determined by lottery is performed. Then, in a display start process (not shown) that is individually activated as a display start process of the section display (eighth display segment N8), a process for determining whether or not it is the timing corresponding to these flags, respectively. If it is a corresponding timing, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to that timing is set. If it is set, display of the eighth display segment N8 as a section display is started. . For example, if it is determined in step S2703 that the first stop OFF operation is being performed, a flag corresponding to the first stop OFF operation is set. In the display start process, each determination process is performed, such as whether it is the operation timing of the start lever 41, whether it is the first stop ON operation timing, or whether it is the first stop OFF operation timing. The display of the eighth display segment N8 is started on the condition that it is determined that it is the first stop OFF operation timing and that the flag corresponding to the first stop OFF operation is set as described above (lights off). Switch from state to light). The display start process is configured as a periodic process that is activated every predetermined period (for example, 1.49 msec period), and is activated as one process of a timer interrupt process, for example.

  In addition, when the main control device 101 starts display with the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator turned on, a predetermined sound effect (for example, “Gago!” As a mechanical sound) is output from the speaker 64. A sound output command is output to the display control device 81 so that the sound is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 based on the sound output command so that the predetermined sound effect is emitted. In addition, when the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started, an effect may be generated in the auxiliary display unit 65 or another display unit. In this case, a corresponding command is output to the display control device 81, and The display control device 81 may be configured to control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so that a corresponding effect is performed.

  After executing the process of step S2704, in step S2705, the process of starting the measurement of the number of continuing games in the advantageous section is executed, and then the section display first process is ended. The number of continuous games in the advantageous section is determined by measuring the advantageous section game number AG provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S2705, the advantageous section game number AG is set to an initial value of 0. I do. The advantageous segment game number AG is incremented by one for each game in the advantageous segment.

  If it is determined in step S2701 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, the process of continuing display in the advantageous section is performed in step S2706, and then the first section display first process is performed. Exit. Specifically, in step S2706, a process for continuing the situation where the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is performed.

<Second section display process>
Next, the section display second process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the section display second process is a process executed in step S415 of the reel control process, and at the end of one game, the medal payout (payout determination process) and the game state transition based on the winning result Etc. (winning result handling process) are performed.

  In step S2801, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed as a section display. If it is off (not lit, not displayed), the second section display second process is terminated. If it is lit, the process proceeds to step S2802. In step S2802, a process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the advantageous section game number AG is performed. The advantageous section game number AG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the advantageous section, and the number of games executed in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is lit is measured.

  After executing the process of step S2802, it is determined in step S2803 whether or not the advantageous segment game number AG has reached the upper limit “1500”. If “1500” has been reached, the advantageous section game number AG is cleared to 0 in step S2804, and then the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished as the display end processing of the section display in step S2805. To perform the process. Then, after the data initialization process is performed in step S2806, the section display second process is ended.

  The data initialization process is a process for returning the flags and counters set during the transition to the current advantageous section, and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section to the initial values. For example, the challenge mode winning flag, attack mode winning flag, etc. may be set during the transition to the advantageous section, or the VB mode winning flag may be set during the attack mode, and the flag remains set until this initialization process. If this is the case, these winning flags are cleared. In the initialization process, if an attack notification flag, an attack mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, or the like is set, these flags are also cleared. In addition, if the predecessor counter, the counter for the number of continuing games such as the attack mode, etc. are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. That is, in the initialization process, all variables or parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification. It is a process to perform.

  If it is determined in step S2803 that the advantageous segment game number AG has not reached the upper limit value, the process advances to step S2807 to determine whether or not the advantageous segment has ended. That is, in step S2807, it is determined whether neither the challenge mode winning flag nor the attack mode winning flag is set. In step S2808, neither the challenge mode flag nor the attack mode flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is in a state. The case where an affirmative determination is made in either step S2807 or step S2808 means that the advantageous section has ended before reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. In this case, the advantageous section game number AG is set in step S2809. In addition to clearing to 0, the section display second process is terminated after the section display end processing is performed in step S2810. If a negative determination is made in either step S2807 or step S2808, it is determined that the advantageous section is still in effect, and the section display second process is terminated as it is. In this case, the lighting display of the section display (eighth display segment N8) is continued.

<About the display of push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG.

  In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 66, in the normal section that is not the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is turned off (not lit). In this normal section, the push order notification effect is not performed. That is, it can be said that the normal section is a section not having the instruction function in contrast to the advantageous section having the performance related to the instruction function such as push order notification. The situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

  In the normal section, for example, when winning a lottery to the advantageous section such as challenge mode or attack mode by winning a weak watermelon role, etc., the game in which the game result that becomes the winning opportunity is established is set as the start game, and the start game At a timing before the player's betting operation is permitted in the next game, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is turned on, and the notification of the advantageous section is started.

  In this case, in the game in which the weak watermelon role is won as described above, the game is in the state before the transition to the advantageous section and is included in the normal section. Then, with respect to the eighth display segment N8 as the section display indicating the advantageous section, the timing at which the notification that the advantageous section is concerned allows the betting operation of the game next to the starting game that has won the weak watermelon role In other words, if the game in which the advantageous section is started is considered to be performed at a timing when the game can be performed, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on in the weak watermelon winning game (start game) as described above. The notification can be said to be a prior notification that is performed before the notification of the advantageous section (in-state notification, in-mode notification). As described above, the present embodiment is configured to suggest the content or the degree of advantage of the advantageous section in the case where the prior notification is made by the prior notification.

  Thereafter, in a situation where the notification that it is an advantageous section has been made, a push order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 occurs. In this case, as described above, the push order information (“1” to “6”) is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7, and based on the push order information, the player pushes You can grasp the order. In the push order notification, the display of the push order information is started when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display is ended when the third reel stop is turned on in the game. When such a game is not the last game in the advantageous section, only the display of the pressing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is ended and the eighth display is performed at the time of the third reel stop ON operation. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the winning combination is won again after the next game, the pressing order information corresponding to the pressing order is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

  When the number of continuing games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, for example, the final game in the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also turned off, and the notification of the advantageous section is ended. The number of games in the advantageous section is counted in the game in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. Specifically, the game after the start game is the first game, and the eighth display segment N8 is turned off. The number of games in the advantageous section is up to the game.

  In the present embodiment, in the last game of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the medal payout ends (by the section display second process that is a process after the payout determination process). If the medal payout is not performed in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. Thereby, the player can clearly grasp that the game is the last game in the advantageous section.

  In this way, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on when it is in the advantageous section, and the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the advantageous section ends. The eighth display segment N8 is not only lit on the basis of the transition to the challenge mode or the attack mode, but also based on the fact that the eighth lottery is selected for the transition to the challenge mode or the attack mode. Lighting starts. That is, whether or not the transition lottery is won is confirmed by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is lit even if the notification is not made in the game won for the transition lottery to these modes. It can be clearly understood. By doing so, it is advantageous for a player who finishes the game without knowing it and a succeeding player who sits afterward, despite having won the lottery to shift to these modes. It is possible to prevent a difference in degree.

  In addition, the slot machine 10 is configured such that there is no difference in the degree of advantage due to the set value with respect to the gameability in which the degree of advantage is changed by a push order notification such as a challenge mode or an attack mode. Therefore, by making the gameability by push order notification uniform for each game stand (setting value) and each game (situation), the advantage / disadvantage among players is eliminated, and a bonus is aimed at the pattern. It is possible to obtain a well-balanced gaming machine by relevance to the gaming nature by the accompanying push order notification while enjoying the original gaming nature of the slot machine 10 to obtain the game.

  On the other hand, in the gameability by push order notification, whether or not to win the lottery to shift to the challenge mode, attack mode, etc., and whether these modes continue are the players' interest. The fact that it becomes clear at a glance by lighting / non-lighting of the 8-display segment N8 may be advantageous in terms of ensuring equality among players, but may be disadvantageous in terms of gaming properties and production effects. . Therefore, in this embodiment, in the section display first process, the lighting start timing (display start mode) of the eighth display segment N8 is made different depending on the contents of the advantageous section that is shifted by lighting.

  FIG. 67 shows the relationship between the lighting timing of the eighth display segment N8 and the contents of the advantageous section to be notified (transferred) afterward when the weak watermelon combination is won as the specific combination in the normal section. ing.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), it is assumed that when the weak watermelon combination is won, the eighth display segment N8 starts to be lit when the first reel is turned off. As the player has started lighting the eighth display segment N8, it is possible to know that the lottery for the advantageous section has been won, and the first reel has been turned on when the stop-off operation is performed. Therefore, it is predicted that the current advantageous section is the challenge mode (see FIG. 64). Then, the player confirms that the current advantageous section is the challenge mode by generating a challenge mode start effect as a notification game through the precursor mode. As described above, the measurement of the advantageous section is started after the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started, that is, the advantageous section is also in the precursor mode.

  FIG. 67 (b) shows a case where the eighth display segment N8 starts to light when the second reel is stopped OFF when the weak watermelon combination is won. In this case, the player predicts that the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section has been won and that the current advantageous section is in the attack mode (see FIG. 64). Then, through the precursor mode, when an attack mode finalizing effect is generated as a notification game, it is confirmed that the current advantageous section is the attack mode.

  FIG. 68 (c) shows a case where the eighth display segment N8 starts to light when the third reel is stopped OFF when the weak watermelon combination is won. In this case, the player predicts that the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section is won and that the current advantageous section is in the super attack mode (see FIG. 64). Then, through the precursor mode, an additional special zone confirmation effect is generated as a notification game, so that it is confirmed that the current advantageous section is a super attack mode with an additional special zone.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the configuration in which it is clearly indicated that the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is turned on when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on, and that the eighth display segment N8 is turned off so that it is not the preferred section. By differentiating the lighting start mode of the display segment N8, it is possible to improve the presentation effect by the section display (eighth display segment N8) while ensuring the notification function of whether or not it is an advantageous section.

  By changing the lighting start mode of the eighth display segment N8 depending on the contents of the advantageous section, the player can draw lots to move to the advantageous section by starting the lighting of the eighth display segment N8. It is possible not only to grasp that the player has won the game, but also to predict the content thereof, and the degree of attention when the eighth display segment N8 is lit can be greatly improved.

  In particular, since the lighting start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery according to the contents of the advantageous section, the lighting start mode and the contents of the advantageous section do not have a one-to-one relationship, and the player is temporarily Even if it is a case where lighting is started in an unfavorable manner, it is possible to advance the game while maintaining a sense of expectation to a mode to shift to thereafter.

  In addition, on the premise that the eighth display segment N8 starts to be lit before the next game of the start game, after the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started, notification of a challenge mode and an attack mode to be transferred (challenge Mode start notification effect, attack mode winning notification effect, etc.) are configured to occur after several games after the sign mode, so the content of the advantageous section is predicted at the start of lighting, and whether the prediction content is correct during the sign mode It is possible to play a game that predicts the content of the eighth display segment N8 even after the confirmation notification while the eighth display segment N8 is a so-called confirmation notification, such as enjoying a sense of thrill.

  Further, as described above, since the eighth display segment N8 starts to be lit before the game after the start game, the end of the lighting start timing is determined in advance. In such an effect in which the end of the occurrence is determined, the contents of the advantageous section when the lighting is started before the end is performed in the eighth display segment N8. It is possible to dramatically increase the degree of attention to the notification effect. That is, in the first place, for the player who is interested in whether or not the lottery to the advantageous section is won, whether or not the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started is of great interest. Since the end of the display start timing is determined, it can be said that the timing at which the player should be interested in the eighth display segment N8 is collected. Under such a premise, if it is configured to notify the contents of the advantageous section in the eighth display segment N8, it is overwhelming as compared with the contents notification of the advantageous section performed at other timings and other display means. It is possible to make a notice that collects the attention level.

  Since the eighth display segment N8 is configured to light mainly when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, a sense of expectation for lighting is given in a game that may light (a game when a specific role is won). However, it is possible to perform a stop operation while strengthening the impression of lighting by the player's own operation, compared to the configuration of lighting regardless of the player's operation.

  In addition, since the light can be turned on based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to determine whether or not the light is turned on from the relevance to the stop point where the operated reel stops. Specifically, for example, when a strong cherry is won or a weak cherry is won, the winning lottery for the challenge mode or the attack mode can be won. The winning probability is higher than the weak cherry. Therefore, it is considered that the player will operate the stop switches 42 to 44 while expecting that the lottery result of this game is not a weak cherry but a strong cherry, and the eighth display segment N8 The stop operation can be performed while predicting whether the cherry is a strong cherry or a weak cherry in relation to the lighting timing.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery according to the contents of the advantageous section, and even if it is started in any display start mode, the challenge The mode, the attack mode, and the super attack mode may be used. However, the display start mode and the content of the advantageous section may be associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. Moreover, it is good also as a structure with which the display start aspect matched by 1 to 1 and the display start aspect which is not matched (it is possible also in any mode) exist.

  For example, FIG. 68A shows an example of a display start mode table in which the contents of the advantageous section and the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 are associated one-to-one. That is, in this example, when the content of the current advantageous section is the challenge mode, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light based on the stop operation of the first reel, and the current advantageous section When the content is in the attack mode, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light based on the stop operation of the second reel, and when the content of the current advantageous section is in the super attack mode, the third reel The eighth display segment N8 starts to be turned on based on the stop operation. By doing in this way, based on the lighting start mode, it is possible to clearly grasp the contents of the current advantageous section. In particular, the eighth display segment N8 is smaller than other informing units such as the auxiliary display unit 65, and is easily recognized only by the player who is playing the game, depending on the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8. There is a high possibility that the contents of the advantageous section can be grasped only by a player who is playing the gaming machine. Then, for example, a player who has grasped that the super attack mode is in the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is immersed in a sense of superiority that he / she knows information that other players do not know. It is also possible to wait for the attack mode winning notification effect.

  Also in this example, the shift to an advantageous section is advantageous when the stop operation of the second reel is more advantageous than the stop operation of the first reel, and during the stop operation of the third reel than during the stop operation of the second reel. It is set so that it is more advantageous when the display is started at the time of the rear side operation, such as shifting to an advantageous section where is more advantageous. By doing this, a game that enjoys a balance between the desire to start display early and confirm the transition to the advantageous section and the desire to start display on the rear side and move to the advantageous section Can be realized. For example, if the first reel or the second reel is stopped and the role that can be expected in the super attack mode from the stoppage (for example, the middle bell role) is predicted / understood, the first reel Or the second reel will be operated in the hope that the display will not start at the time of OFF operation, and even if the first reel is stopped and the challenge mode is low, the role that is not likely to win (for example, a weak cherry role) must be won If it is predicted / understood, it is considered that the operation is performed in the hope that the display is started at the time of the stop-off operation of the first reel. That is, even in a configuration in which the display start mode and the content of the advantageous section are associated one-to-one, the ratio of the selection rate between the stop ON operation and the stop OFF operation is set as described above to stop It is possible to entertain whether or not the display is started in relation to the outcome.

  FIG. 68B shows a display start mode table in which the contents of the advantageous section and the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 are correlated one-to-one and those that are not correlated. An example is shown. In this example, in addition to the correspondence between the stop operation of each reel in the table of FIG. 68 (a) and the contents of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 may start displaying at the end of the payout. At the end of the payout, it can be selected regardless of the contents of the advantageous section. In this way, when the stop operation to the second reel is completed, it is determined that either the super attack mode winning or the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section has been eliminated is shown in FIG. 68 (a). Compared with the example, you can enjoy the throbbing feeling to the end.

<Modification 2>
In the present embodiment, a specific state (specific situation) that affects the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is provided as the game state (game state). In this modification, the specific state does not change the normal gaming state and the lottery table as in each RT state and bonus state, and does not change the performance related to the push order notification as in the challenge mode and attack mode. Although there is no difference in the advantage for the player depending on whether or not it is in the specific state, the display start mode table when winning the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section differs depending on whether or not it is in the specific state.

  FIG. 69A shows a part of the lottery process (FIG. 16) in the present modification. That is, in the present modification, after the priority setting process is performed in step S315, the specific state process is performed in step S2901, and then the section display first process in step S316 is performed.

  In the specific state process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69B, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed (lighted). If it is being displayed (turned on), the specific state process is terminated as it is. If it is not displayed (turned off), it is determined in step S3002 as a result of the current lottery process whether the game result of the current game is a specific winning combination. If it is not a special combination winning, the specific state process is terminated as it is. If it is a specific combination winning, the process proceeds to step S3003.

  In step S3003, it is determined whether or not a specific state flag is set in various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The specific state flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp whether or not the specific state is present. If the specific state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3004, and it is determined whether any one of the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, in step S3004, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section shift lottery is won in the current game. In the case of winning, the specific state process is terminated as it is. If not won, the process proceeds to step S3005 to execute a specific state lottery process. The specific state lottery process is a process for determining whether or not to shift to the specific state by lottery. For example, the lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 and the lottery is selected from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Get counter for. In this case, the winning probability of the transition lottery may vary depending on the type of the specific role.For example, the winning probability of the strong cherry is higher than the weak cherry as in the transition lottery to the challenge mode etc. Alternatively, the winning probability may be higher for weak cherries than for strong cherries. Ease of winning the lottery for the challenge mode etc. By making the harder winning combination easier to win the transition lottery to the specific state), it becomes possible to make the player's interest even for the harder winning combination in the challenge mode or the like.

  After performing the specific state lottery process in step S3005, it is determined in step S3006 whether or not the result of step S3005 is a winning result. If it is not won, the specific state process is terminated as it is, and if it is won, the process proceeds to step S3007. In step S3007, a process of inputting “3” as a predetermined value to the state counter K provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The state counter K is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the continuation condition in the specific state, and is decremented by 1 for each specific combination winning. In the subsequent step S3008, the specific state flag is set, and then the specific state process is terminated. When the specific state flag is set in step S3008, an affirmative determination can be made in step S3003.

  If it is determined in step S3003 that the specific state flag is set, the process advances to step S3009. In step S3009, as in step S3004, it is determined whether or not either of the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag is set, so that whether or not the advantageous section transition lottery is won in this game. Determine whether. If the transition lottery is not won, a process of subtracting 1 from the state counter K is performed in step S3010, and it is determined whether or not the state counter K has become 0 in step S3011. If the state counter K is not 0, the process for the specific state is terminated as it is, and if the state counter K is 0, the specific state flag is cleared in step S3012 and then the process for the specific state is terminated. To do. Also, if it is determined in step S3009 that the advantageous section transition lottery has been won, the state counter K is cleared to 0 in step S3013, and then the specific state flag is cleared in step S3012. The process is terminated.

  As described above, in this modification, the specific state is a normal section, and in the game where the specific combination is won, the transition is made in part when the lottery to the advantageous section is not won, and then the specific combination is made. The game is continued until a predetermined number of times a game that has been won and has not been won in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section occurs. That is, the specific state is a state in which a transition is made based on the occurrence of an unfavorable event for the player in terms of a transition lottery to an advantageous section.

  In the first section display process in the present modification, in the display start mode lottery process (step S2703), a different display start mode table is acquired depending on whether or not the specific state is set. That is, when it is not in the specific state, the display start mode table of FIG. 64 or the like is acquired and the display start mode is selected, and when it is in the specific state, the display start mode table for the specific state of FIG. 70 is acquired. Then, the lottery of the display start mode is performed. The display start mode table for a specific state is different from the display start mode table for a normal time (for a state that is not a specific state).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70, the selection rate of the display start mode differs depending on the setting value that changes the medal increase / decrease rate as well as the contents of the advantageous section.

  For example, when the lottery for the transition to the challenge mode is won, the operation time of the start lever 41, the first reel stop OFF operation, the third reel stop OFF operation, and the payout end are selected. Although obtained, the selection rate of each timing differs depending on the set value. Specifically, when the challenge mode is won, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started when the start lever 41 is operated is higher than the setting 1, the setting 3 and the setting 5, the setting 2, the setting 4 and the setting 6 Is higher, and the even setting is more easily selected than the odd setting. That is, if the eighth display segment N8 is lit when the start lever 41 is operated and then the mode is changed to the challenge mode, the setting value of the gaming machine is more likely to be an even setting than an odd setting. Further, when the challenge mode is won, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started at the end of payout is higher in setting 5 than setting 4, higher in setting 6 than setting 5, and lower than setting 3 0. Therefore, when the payout is completed, the eighth display segment N8 is lit, and thereafter, when the mode is shifted to the challenge mode, it is determined that the setting is 4 or more. Further, when the challenge mode is won, setting 3 does not select when the third reel is turned off. Therefore, when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on when the third reel is stopped and turned off, and then the mode is shifted to the challenge mode, it is determined that the setting is 2 or more.

  On the other hand, when the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the operation of the start lever 41, the second reel stop OFF operation, the third reel stop OFF operation, and the payout end time are selected. The selection rate at each timing differs depending on the set value. Specifically, when the attack mode is won, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started when the start lever 41 is operated is higher than the setting 2, the setting 4 and the setting 6, the setting 1, the setting 3 and the setting 5 Is higher, and the odd setting is easier to select than the even setting. That is, it is set so as to have a reverse relationship to that in the challenge mode, and when the start lever 41 is operated, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on, and after that, when the mode is changed to the attack mode, the setting value of this gaming machine Is more likely to be an odd setting than an even setting, and when a transition is made to the challenge mode, there is a higher possibility that the setting value of the gaming machine is an even setting than an odd setting. When the attack mode is won, setting 1 does not select the payout end time. In other words, when the payout ends, the eighth display segment N8 is lit, and thereafter, when the mode is shifted to the challenge mode, it is determined that the setting is 4 or more as described above, but when the mode is shifted to the attack mode, the setting 2 is set. It is determined that this is the case. Therefore, assuming that a high setting value is preferable for the player, when the eighth display segment N8 is lit at the end of payout, it is preferable for the player to shift to the challenge mode rather than the attack mode, The advantage of the content of the advantageous section and the preference for the player are reversed. When the challenge mode is won, the third reel stop-off operation is not selected if the setting is 3 or less. Therefore, when the third display stop N8 is turned on, the eighth display segment N8 is lit, and thereafter, when the mode is shifted to the challenge mode, it is determined that the setting is 4 or more. That is, when the third display stop-off operation is turned on, the eighth display segment N8 is lit, and then when the mode is shifted to the challenge mode, as described above, it is determined that the setting is 2 or more, but the mode is shifted to the attack mode. If so, it is confirmed that the setting is 4 or more. Therefore, when the eighth display segment N8 is lit when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF, it is preferable for the player to shift to the attack mode rather than the challenge mode, and the advantage of the contents of the advantageous section and the player Preference matches.

  In the display start mode table for the specific state, when the lottery for shifting to the super attack mode is won, the end of payout is selected regardless of the set value. In other words, if the winning lottery for the advantageous section is won in a specific state, if the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started at a timing before the end of the payout, any set value can be estimated and the payout is completed. Even if it is time, if the advantageous section to be transferred is the challenge mode or the attack mode, the set value can be estimated, but if the lighting start of the eighth display segment N8 is at the end of the payout and the super attack mode, The setting value cannot be estimated. By doing in this way, it can be set as an entertaining game using the desire to shift to the super attack mode from the advantage of the super attack mode and the desire to make a setting guess.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, as the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8, a plurality of display start modes with different elapsed times from the event that is the start trigger are set.

  As shown in FIG. 71, in the display start mode table in the present modification, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light after the third reel stop ON operation or at the end of payout, regardless of the contents of the advantageous section. . The elapsed time from the stop ON operation after the third reel stop ON operation is set to be different, and after 0 sec from the third reel stop ON operation (that is, at the third reel stop ON operation), 5 seconds after the third reel stop ON operation, 10 seconds after the third reel stop ON operation, and 15 seconds after the third reel stop ON operation can be set. For example, when winning the challenge mode, it is most likely to be selected 5 seconds after the third reel stop ON operation, and when winning the attack mode, it is most likely to be selected 10 seconds after the third reel stop ON operation. In some cases, 15 seconds after the stop-on operation of the third reel is most easily selected. That is, as the lighting timing of the eighth display segment N8 is delayed from the third reel stop ON operation, the advantageous section that is more advantageous to the player is shifted to.

  In the section display first process in the present modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72, in steps S3101 to S3103, the same processes as in steps S2701 to S2703 are performed. However, in the lottery process in step S3103, the lottery is performed based on the display start mode table of FIG. In step S3104, based on the processing result of step S3103, processing for storing the display start timing according to the lottery result is performed. In this case, for example, a flag or the like that can determine the determined display start timing (that is, how many seconds after the third reel stop ON operation or at the end of payout) is set, and the display is subsequently started by the flag. The timing can be determined. In step S3105, processing for setting a display start game flag in various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The display start game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started in the current game.

  After the process of step S3105 is executed, measurement of the advantageous section game number AG is started in step S3106, and then the section display first process is ended. The process of step S3106 is the same as the process of step S2705. If it is determined in step S3101 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, display continuation processing is performed in step S3107, and then the section display first processing is terminated. The process in step S3107 is the same as the process in step S2706.

  In the reel control process (FIG. 18) in this modification, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), after determining that all reels are stopped in step S411, the section display third process is performed in step S3201. After performing the process of step S3201, a payout determination process is performed in step S413, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414, a section display second process is performed in step S415, and a winning result command is processed in step S416. The reel control process is terminated after setting. The processes in steps S413 to S416 are as described above.

  The section display third process in step S3201 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S3301, it is determined whether a display start game flag is set. As already described, the display start game flag is a flag set in the section display first process. If it is not set, the third section display third process is terminated as it is. If set, in step S3302, a process for clearing the display start game flag is performed. In step S3303, freeze setting processing is performed. The freeze setting process is a process for generating a so-called freeze effect that temporarily restricts the process based on the operation by the player and the progress of the game when the eighth display segment N8 is lit in the present modification.

  Specifically, in step S3303, one of 1 sec, 6 sec, 11 sec, and 16 sec is set as the freeze period. Here, the timing at which the section display third process is performed is the timing at which all the reels are stopped, and is the timing at which the stop ON operation of the third reel is performed. The freeze period set in step S3303 is a period obtained by adding 1 sec as a predetermined period to each period when the eighth display segment N8 is displayed after the third reel stop ON operation in this modification. They are 0 sec + 1 sec after the third reel stop ON operation, 5 sec + 1 sec after the third reel stop ON operation, 10 sec + 1 sec after the third reel stop ON operation, and 15 sec + 1 sec after the third reel stop ON operation. In step S3303, the display start mode of the current eighth display segment N8 is grasped, and a freeze period is set according to the grasped start mode. That is, if the start mode is 0 sec after the third reel stop ON operation, the freeze period is 1 sec. If the start mode is 5 sec after the third reel stop ON operation, the freeze period is 6 sec. After the third reel stop ON operation, 10 sec. If this is the case, the freeze period is 11 seconds, and if the third reel is 15 seconds after the stop-ON operation, the freeze period is 16 seconds. Further, if the current start mode is the end of payout, 16 sec, which is the longest freeze period when the start mode is after the third reel stop operation, is set as the current freeze period. For setting the freeze period, for example, a value corresponding to the length of the freeze period is input to a timer counter that is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined period, and updating of the timer counter is started. It is assumed that the freeze state continues until the timer counter reaches the initial value (0), and the CPU 102 refers to the value of the timer counter and determines whether or not to proceed to the next process (payout determination process in step S413). That is, it waits in the section display third process until the timer counter reaches the initial value.

  After performing the process of step S3304, a process of setting a display start timing is performed in step S3305. That is, based on the display start timing information that can be determined later in step S3104 of the section display first process, a process of synchronizing with the freeze period information set in step S3305 is performed. Specifically, when the display start timing is set to 0 sec after the third reel stop ON operation, the display is set so that the display of the eighth display segment N8 starts at 0 sec after the start of freeze. If 5 sec after the stop ON operation is set, display is set so that the display segment N8 starts to be displayed 5 sec after the freeze starts. If 10 sec after the stop ON operation is set as the display start timing, the freeze is set. 8th display segment N8 is set to start display 10 seconds after the start, and if the display start timing is set to 15 seconds after the stop ON operation, the display of the eighth display segment N8 starts 15 seconds after the freeze starts Set to be. Further, when the payout end time is set as the display start timing, the display is started so that the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started at the end of payout after the end of the current freeze period. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that display is to be started at the end of payout is set, and whether or not to start display during the freeze period is determined by determining the presence or absence of such flag, and whether to start display at the end of payout It may be configured to determine whether or not.

  After the processing of step S3305, the display start command is output to the display control device 81 as the sub-side control device in step S3306, and then the section display third processing is ended. In the display control device 81 that has received the display start command, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so that a freeze effect (for example, a blackout effect) corresponding to the freeze period is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a corresponding effect is also provided. The speaker 64 is controlled so that a sound (for example, a “push” sound as if the machine is broken) is emitted. In this case, the freeze effect and the sound effect thereof may be different depending on the length of the freeze period.

  In the present modification, the relationship between the timing at which the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started and the contents of the advantageous section will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 74 (a) shows a case where 6 sec is set as the freeze period during which the operation by the player and the processing based on the operation are invalidated. When the third reel is stopped at the timing ta1 and is in a freeze state over the period from the timing ta3 to the timing ta3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at timing ta2 slightly earlier than the timing ta3. . In this case, the period TB1 from the start of the freeze in the freeze period to the eighth display segment N8 is 5 sec, and the period from the start of display at the timing ta2 to the release of the freeze at the timing ta3 Is 1 sec. When the freeze is released at the timing ta3, the medal payout occurs, and the medal payout process is performed over a period TA until the timing ta4. In this case, the advantageous interval to be started is likely to be the challenge mode. When the medal payout process is completed at the timing ta4, the next game operation (bet operation) is allowed.

  FIG. 74B shows a case where the freeze period is set as 11 sec. When the third reel stops at the timing of tb1 and enters a freeze state over the period from the timing to tb3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at a timing of tb2 slightly earlier than the timing of tb3. . In this case, the period TB2 from the start of the freeze in the freeze period to the eighth display segment N8 is 10 sec, which is longer than in the case of FIG. 74 (a), but after the display is started at the timing tb2. The period until the freeze is released at the timing of tb3 is 1 sec, which is the same length as in the case of FIG. When the freeze is released at the timing tb3, the medal payout occurs, and the medal payout process is performed over the period TA until the timing tb4. If the winning result of the game is the same as in the case of FIG. 74 (a), the length of the medal payout process is also the same, and the period TA from tb3 to tb4 is the same as the case of FIG. 74 (a). . In this case, the advantageous section to be started is likely to be the attack mode. When the medal payout process is completed at timing tb4, the next game operation (bet operation) is allowed. That is, in the case of FIG. 74 (b), the timing at which the operation of the next game is allowed is later than in the case of FIG.

  FIG. 74 (c) shows a case where the freeze period is set to 16 sec. When the third reel stops at the timing of tc1 and enters a freeze state over the period from the timing to the timing of tc3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of tc2 slightly earlier than the timing of tc3. . In this case, the period TB3 from the start of the freeze in the freeze period to the eighth display segment N8 is 15 sec, which is longer than in the case of FIG. The period until the freeze is released at the timing of tc3 is 1 sec, which is the same length as in the case of FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b). When the freeze is released at the timing of tc3, medals are paid out and the medal payout process is performed over a period TA until the timing of tc4. If the winning result of the game is the same as in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b), the length of the period TA is the same as in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b). It is. In this case, the advantageous section to be started is likely to be in the super attack mode. When the medal payout process is completed at the timing of tc4, the next game operation (bet operation) is allowed. That is, in the case of FIG. 74 (c), the timing at which the operation of the next game is allowed is later than in the case of FIG. 74 (a) or 74 (b).

  As described above, in the start game for starting the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display, by setting the freeze state (freeze period, invalid period) for limiting the game progress process, In the display start effect of the eighth display segment N8 for which the end period is determined, it is possible to secure a period for performing the display start effect and to diversify the display start effect.

  Moreover, by associating the length of the period of the freeze state with the contents of the advantageous section, it is not only necessary that the freeze state occurs, but it is also possible to give interest to the length of the period. It becomes.

  In particular, since the period from the start of the freeze state to the display start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is associated with the contents of the advantageous section, interest in the eighth display segment N8 after the freeze state is reached. It will be overwhelmingly increased, and it will be possible to expect a great effect while simply producing the eighth display segment N8 from the unlit state to the lit state.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, the freeze state occurs not when the reels are stopped but during the rotation of the reels.

  That is, for example, when 6 sec is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the period from ta5 when any reel is rotating to ta7 after 6 sec is in the freeze state, For example, stop drive control is not executed even if a player operates stop switches 42 to 44 to stop a rotating reel. The eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at a timing ta6 slightly earlier than ta7. That is, the display of the section display is started after the TA1 period (5 sec) has elapsed since the freeze state. All reels stop at the timing ta8, the medal payout process is performed at the timing ta9 to ta10, and the next game operation is allowed at the timing ta10.

  When 11 sec is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the period from the timing tb5 during which any reel is rotating to tb7 after 11 sec is in the freeze state. The eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at a timing tb6 slightly earlier than tb7. That is, the display on the section display is started after the TA2 period (10 sec) has elapsed since the freeze state. All reels stop at the timing of tb8, the medal payout process is performed at the timing of tb9 to tb10, and the operation of the next game is permitted at the timing of tb10.

  When 16 sec is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), the period from tc5 when one of the reels is rotating to tc7 after 16 sec is frozen, for example, a player However, even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop the rotating reel, stop drive control is not executed. The eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at a timing tc6 slightly earlier than tc7. That is, the display on the section display is started after the TA3 period (15 sec) has elapsed since the freeze state. All reels stop at the timing of tc8, the medal payout process is performed at the timing of tc9 to tc10, and the next game operation is permitted at the timing of tc10.

  In this way, the period of time for the freeze state in the start game can be set at an arbitrary timing as long as the timing at which the operation of the next game is allowed is associated with the contents of the advantageous section.

  In particular, the player's operation (stop operation in the above example) is restricted by entering the freeze state, so that the player can be notified that the freeze state has been restricted. Can be recognized. Then, as compared to the freeze state in which the execution of processing unilaterally performed on the gaming machine side, such as the payout processing, is limited as in the third modification, the start timing of the freeze state becomes difficult to understand. Therefore, since the start timing becomes difficult to understand, the length of the freeze state becomes difficult to understand, and even if the set freeze state length is not preferable for the player, the interval is maintained while maintaining the expectation. It is possible to entertain the content suggestion of the advantageous section by the display start of the display.

  Further, by setting the freeze state in which the player's operation is restricted as described above, it becomes difficult to understand the end of the freeze state. That is, as described above, if a freeze state is generated while the reel is rotating, it is necessary to stop the rotating reel by a player's operation after the release of the freeze state. From the viewpoint that the timing of the stop operation depends on the player, in a configuration in which a freeze state occurs during reel rotation, the timing at which the operation of the next game is allowed is not only the length of the freeze state, but also the game The user's operation timing will also be affected. By doing as described above, it is possible to entertain the content notification of the advantageous section while making the expectation more than the length of the set freeze state, and the end timing of the display start timing by the section indicator Advantages such as delay can be generated.

<Modification 5>
In the present modification, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started at a timing different from that during the freeze period. That is, in the present modification, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started at the end of payout, the freeze state is generated in the start game, and the length of the freeze period is associated with the contents of the advantageous section. I am doing so.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76A, when the challenge mode is won, a freeze state occurs over a period (6 sec, TC1) from ta11 to ta12. The reel stops at the timing of ta13, and a medal payout process is performed in a period (TA) from ta14 to ta15. When the medal payout ends at the timing ta15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the attack mode is won, a freeze state occurs over a period (11 sec, TC2) from tb11 to tb12. The reel stops at the timing of tb13, and a medal payout process is performed in a period (TA) from tb14 to tb15. When the medal payout ends at the timing of tb15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the super attack mode is won, a freeze state occurs over a period (16 sec, TC3) from tc11 to tc12. The reel stops at the timing of tc13, and a medal payout process is performed in a period (TA) from tc14 to tc15. When the medal payout ends at the timing of tc15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

  In this way, even if the display of the section indicator is not started during the freeze state, it is sufficient that the length of the period in which the freeze state is set is associated with the contents of the advantageous section. It is also possible to play a game that predicts the content of the section. By doing as described above, it is possible to overwhelmingly improve the degree of freedom of timing for generating the freeze state.

<Modification 6>
In this modification, the mode of the section indicator is different. FIG. 77 is a front view of the slot machine 10 in the present modification.

  In the present modification, a ninth display unit N9 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine as a section display. Specifically, in the gaming panel 25 on the front side of the gaming machine, a ninth display portion N9 is provided next to the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R (next to the left of the display window 26L in front view). The ninth display portion N9 is a light emitting portion whose front panel is formed of a light-transmissive resin member, and the front panel is integrally formed with the game panel 25. In the ninth display portion N9, an LED (not shown) is disposed behind the front panel. The LED is connected to the main control device 101, and the LED is controlled to emit light by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101. The LED can emit light in a plurality of colors, and can emit light in, for example, four colors of blue, green, red, and white. Note that the present modification also includes the eighth display segment N8, but the ninth display unit N9 may be provided in place of the eighth display segment N8.

  Incidentally, when the LED of the ninth display unit N9 is controlled to emit light, the brightness and the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine are the brightness of the surrounding display unit and the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine (for example, the back of the gaming panel 25). Light is emitted so as to be higher than the brightness or illuminance of the light or the brightness or illuminance of the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, when the ninth display portion N9 is controlled to emit light, it becomes more conspicuous than the peripheral display portions, and an oversight of the player is prevented.

  In addition, each light emission color in the ninth display portion N9 is set to a color that is conspicuous in relation to the other display portions (game panel 25, etc.), and any color may be emitted. The function as a section indicator that clearly indicates that it is an advantageous section is secured.

  FIG. 78 shows a display start mode table in this modification.

  In this modification, the display start timing is unified at the end of payout in the start game in the display start mode of the ninth display unit N9 as the section display. On the other hand, among the display start modes, the light emission color of the LED of the ninth display unit N9 is varied according to the contents of the advantageous section. Specifically, in the challenge mode, blue is easily selected from among blue, green, and red. In the attack mode, green is easy to select. In the super attack mode, red is selected. It is easy to be done. Therefore, when the display of the ninth display portion N9 is started in the start game, the content of the advantageous section in which the emission color is selected in the order of red, green, and blue tends to be advantageous. By doing in this way, the production effect by a section indicator can be heightened and the attention degree to a section indicator can be raised.

  The ninth display unit N9 as the section display emits light in one of red, green, and blue according to the contents of the advantageous section at the start of display, but from the next game of the start game, that is, In the advantageous section, the emission color is unified to white. That is, the game of predicting the content of the advantageous section from the display color of the ninth display unit N9 is limited to the start game, and the timing to be watched is integrated, so that the production effect is enhanced.

  In addition, as described above, any of the emission colors that are emitted at the start of display is set to be more conspicuous than the emission of white in the advantageous section. Also from this point of view, it is possible to easily attract high interest in the display color at the start of display of the ninth display unit N9.

  As described above, in suggesting the contents of the advantageous section by changing the start mode of the section display, the difference in the start mode is not limited to the difference in display start timing, but in the section display at the start of display. It is good also as a structure which suggests the content of an advantageous area from the difference in production content (color).

  In particular, in each luminescent color, even if any luminescent color is emitted, a configuration that is easily noticeable (easier to recognize) in relation to other display units can be lit during an advantageous interval and is usually Even a section display device with a relatively low production element that is turned off during the section can expect a production element while ensuring the function of clearly indicating the advantageous section.

<Modification 7>
In the present modification, in the configuration in which the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 serving as the section display is made different, the display start mode is made different according to the game result that triggered the lottery to enter the advantageous section. FIG. 79 shows an example of a display start mode table in this modification.

  For example, FIG. 79 (a) shows that the game result that triggered the lottery to enter the advantageous section, that is, the game result in the game in which the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set is strong cherry. The display start mode table in the case of being present is shown. That is, when the challenge mode is won based on the strong cherry win, the third reel stop OFF operation is selected as the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8. When the attack mode is won based on the strong cherry win, the second reel stop OFF operation is selected, and when the super attack mode is won, the first reel stop OFF operation is selected.

  On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the lottery to enter the advantageous section is a weak cherry, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the challenge mode is won, the first reel stop OFF operation may occur. When the selected attack mode is won, the second reel stop-off operation is selected, and when the super-attack mode is won, the third reel stop-off operation is selected.

  For the strong watermelon and the weak watermelon, the display start mode is determined by the common display start mode table. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79 (c), when the challenge mode is selected, the third reel stop ON operation time is selected, and when the attack mode is selected, the third reel stop OFF operation time is selected, and the super attack mode is selected. If so, the end of payout is selected.

  For other specific combinations, the display start mode is determined by the display start mode table of FIG. 79 (d). In this case, when the challenge mode is selected, the time when the start lever 41 is operated is selected, when the attack mode is selected, the time when the first reel is turned off is selected, and when the super attack mode is selected, the time when the payout is finished is selected.

  By having such a configuration, it is possible to perform a game such as predicting the presence or absence of the transition to the advantageous section and the contents of the advantageous section when the transition is made from the game result and the display start mode of the section indicator. Can do. Specifically, for example, when the “cherry” symbol stops at the lower or upper stage of the left reel 32L, the current game result is a strong cherry or a weak cherry. In this case, if the left reel 32L is stopped first and the left reel 32L is the first reel, the challenge mode or super attack is performed when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on by operating the left reel 32L to stop. It is confirmed that the lottery for entering the mode has been won. In other words, it is determined that it is not the attack mode. Whether the cherry is strong or weak can be determined by stopping the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, and the "cherry" symbols are aligned and stopped on the effective lines of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. When it becomes, it is a strong cherry, and when it does not stop all together, it becomes a weak cherry. For example, if the second reel or the third reel is stopped and it is determined that the cherry is weak, the eighth display segment N8 is lit when the first reel is turned off. Then, it is determined that the content of the current advantageous section is the super attack mode. On the other hand, when the second reel or the third reel is stopped and it is determined that it is a strong cherry, in this case, it is determined that the content of the advantageous section is the challenge mode. In other words, from the standpoint of the probability of winning the challenge mode, attack mode, etc., a strong cherry is preferable to a player over a weak cherry, but in the above situation, a weak cherry is more preferable than a strong cherry. This is preferable for the game result.

  In addition, when the “cherry” symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the eighth display segment N8 is not lit, the strong cherry winning and challenge mode or attack mode winning, the weak cherry winning and attack mode or the super attack mode are performed. Winning, strong cherry or weak cherry winning and non-winning in the lottery to the advantageous section. In this case, when the eighth display segment N8 is lit during the stop-off operation of the second reel, it is determined that the current advantageous section is the attack mode for either the strong cherry or the weak cherry. On the other hand, if the eighth display segment N8 is not lit when the second reel is turned OFF, strong cherry win and challenge mode win, weak cherry win and super attack mode win, strong cherry or weak cherry win and advantageous section It will be either non-winning for the transfer lottery. If strong cherry and weak cherry can be discriminated from the stoppage of the second reel, if it is determined that it is strong cherry, it is not won in the lottery to the advantageous section or it is in the challenge mode Either. However, in the case of strong cherries, there is a high possibility of winning the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section in the first place, and in this case, the possibility of winning in the challenge mode is high. On the other hand, if it is determined that the cherry is weak, it is either not won in the lottery to the advantageous section, or it is won in the super attack mode, and the advantage for the player is the most different Situation. However, in the case of a weak cherry, it is unlikely that the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section will be won in the first place, and in this case, the possibility that the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section is not won is increased.

  As described above, by associating the game result, that is, the stop appearance and the display start mode of the section indicator, the slot machine can narrow down the winning combination as the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. It is possible to play a game such as predicting the contents of an advantageous section based on the relationship with ten game characteristics.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example, in a predetermined replay of replays (replay results), a lottery for shifting to a challenge mode, an attack mode, and a super attack mode is performed. FIG. 80A shows a part of the success / failure lottery table for the normal gaming state and the first RT state in the present modification.

  In this variation, in the winning / raft lottery table in the normal gaming state and the first RT state, winning is established by winning at the index value IV = 53 and winning the first or seventh regame as a kind of replay role. The winning replay role to be set is set. The winning replay combination has the same winning probability regardless of the set value. Specifically, the winning replay combination is won with a probability of about 1/2000. As described above, when the winning of the winning replay role is established, a re-game is given and the next game can be played without requiring a new medal.

  In this modified example, the winning replay combination is handled as a specific combination like the strong cherry combination. Therefore, for example, in step S701 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if the winning replay combination is won, an affirmative determination is made as the specific combination winning, and the process proceeds to the first specific combination process (step S705) and the like. And in the 1st specific combination process in this modification, the transition lottery of the challenge mode based on a winning replay combination, an attack mode, and a super attack mode is also performed.

  The winning probabilities of the transition lottery to challenge mode, attack mode, and super attack mode based on the winning replay are the same regardless of the set value. Specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for entering the challenge mode is 0% regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the lottery for entering the attack mode is 50% regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the transition lottery to is 50% regardless of the set value. That is, in the normal gaming state or the first RT state, when the winning replay is won while the display mode is the normal mode, the attack mode or the super attack mode is won, and the ratio is 1: 1. In the present modification, when winning winning replay is won during the challenge mode, the super attack mode is won with a probability of 100%.

  As described above, when a winning replay winning combination is established, a replay is awarded in the same manner as other replay winning combinations. However, as compared with other replay combinations, the configuration of the bet process upon giving a replay is different. FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing the start waiting process in this modification. The start waiting process is a process started in step S204 in the normal process (FIG. 15), and is a process mainly for setting the bet number (bet) of the game.

  In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the previous game was any replay winning. If it is a replay winning, the processing of steps S3402 to S3404 for granting a replay is performed. In this case, in this modification, in step S3402, it is determined whether or not the replay won in the previous game was a winning replay. If it is not a winning replay, an automatic bet process is performed in step S3403. The automatic bet process is a process of determining the bet number of the previous game and setting the same number of bets as the bet number. For example, if the previous game is 3 bets, a process of setting 3 bets is performed in step S3403. If the previous game is 1 bet, 1 bet is set in step S3403. After executing the process of step S3403, the start waiting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S3402 that the previous game was a winning replay winning combination, an operation bet flag is set in various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 in step S3404. The operation bet flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current game is a game to which replay is given and that a replay has not been given yet. In this modification, when the operation bet flag is set, the bet number of the previous game is temporarily stored in a register or the like. However, an operation bet flag that differs depending on the bet number of the previous game is set. It is good also as a structure to provide.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3401, or after the process of step S3404 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3405. In step S3405, it is determined whether or not a betting operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been operated. If it is not operated, the process waits as it is, and any one of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is operated, so that an affirmative determination is made in step S3405. If a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 during the standby in step S3405, a bet process based on the medal insertion is performed, but the description of the configuration is omitted.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the process proceeds to step S3406, in which it is determined whether or not the operation bet flag is set. If the operation bet flag is not set, the number of betting processes corresponding to the operated credit insertion switch (bet switch) is performed in step S3407. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 3 bets are set, and when the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated, 1 bet is set, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is operated. In this case, 2 bets are set. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3406 that the operation bet flag is set, in step S3408, the same number of bets as the previous game bet are set as the re-game. For example, if the previous game is 3 bets, 3 bets are set in step S3408, and if the game is 1 bet, 1 bet is set in step S3408. After executing the process of step S3408, the operation bet flag is cleared in step S3409. And after performing the process of step S3407 or step S3409, a start waiting process is complete | finished.

  As described above, the winning replay and the other replays have different bet processing configurations when a replay is awarded. For other replays, the same number of bets as the previous game bet are automatically set. For the winning replay, the bet number of the previous game is triggered by the operation of any of the credit insertion switches 56-58. The same number of bets are set. When the previous game is not a replay winning, the automatic bet processing is not performed, and any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is operated to advance the current game. If the winning replay is won, the credit insertion switch From the viewpoint of the presence or absence of operations 56 to 58, the operation for advancing the game is common to the case of game results other than replay.

  FIG. 81 shows the section display first process in the present modification.

  In step S3501, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If not, the process proceeds to step S3502, and it is determined whether or not any of the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag is set. If no winning flag is set, the section display first process is ended as it is. If any winning flag is set, the process advances to step S3503.

  In step S3503, the winning opportunity of the winning flag determined in step S3502 is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the specific combination that has been a winning opportunity of the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is a winning replay. Note that, as described above, since the challenge mode is not won in the winning replay, the affirmative determination in step S3503 is a case where the attack mode winning flag is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3503, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery in steps S3504 and S3505, and processing for setting it is performed. The processes in steps S3504 and S3505 are the same as the processes in steps S2703 and S2704.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3503 that the winning opportunity is winning replay, the current display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is set in the next game betting operation in step S3506.

  After performing the process of step S3505 or step S3506, in step S3507, the process of starting the measurement of the advantageous section game number AG is performed, and then the section display first process is ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, the section display first process is terminated after performing the process of continuing the section display in step S3508. The processes in steps S3507 and S3508 are the same as the processes in steps S2705 and S2706.

  The difference in the final timing at which the display on the section indicator is started due to the difference in the winning section of the advantageous section will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 82 (a) shows a case where the winning opportunity of the advantageous section is a specific combination other than the winning replay. All reels stop at the timing of ta16, and medals are paid out at the timing of ta17 to ta18. When the medal payout of the current game (start game) ends at the timing ta18 and the betting operation of the next game becomes valid at the timing ta19, the timing of the ta19 indicates the timing for displaying the section indicator. Among them, it is the latest timing.

  In this way, the section indicator is configured to be displayed before the next game operation is permitted in the start game, so that it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the next game. In other words, when deciding whether or not to end the game at the end of the start game, the display of the section indicator has been started, and despite having won the advantageous section, Ending the game is prevented. Note that, as already described, in the display start mode table of the section display device, the display start mode that is the latest among the set display start modes is when ta18 is paid out.

  The bet operation becomes effective at the timing of ta19. For example, when the bet operation is performed before the timing of ta20, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts based on the start operation of the timing of ta21 (operation of the start lever 41). Is done.

  On the other hand, when the previous game is a winning replay, the latest timing for displaying the section indicator is different as shown in FIG. Specifically, when the reel stops at the timing of tb16, a re-game is given instead of not paying out medals. However, since the current replay is a winning replay, an operation bet flag is set in the start waiting process in the normal process (FIG. 80B), and replay is given by a bet operation instead of an automatic bet. .

  In this case, if the bet operation is performed at the timing of tb18 from the time when the bet operation is activated at the timing of tb17 to the timing of tb19 which is the effective period, the re-game is given and the number of bets in the previous game And the same number of bets are set, and the display of the section display is started. Then, when the start operation is performed at the timing of tb20, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started.

  As described above, when the display of the section display is started based on the winning replay, the display of the section display is started at the time of the betting operation after winning the winning replay. Here, the betting operation after winning the winning replay is an operation for obtaining a replay obtained in the starting game, and can be said to be an operation accompanying the starting game. That is, even if it is the said structure, the effect by displaying an area indicator in a start game is ensured.

  Further, if the betting operation after winning the winning replay as described above is an operation accompanying the starting game won in the winning replay, the next game of the starting game is performed from the operation of the start lever 41. Then, when the display of the section indicator is started based on the winning replay, the latest display start timing is the timing of tb20 which is the start operation of the next game.

  As described above, when a small role other than replay (special role, payout role) is an opportunity for winning an advantageous section, the section display starts to be displayed until the next game bet operation, and a predetermined replay (winning replay) is performed. In the case of an advantageous section winning opportunity, the section display is configured to start displaying before the start lever 41 of the next game is operated. In this way, by changing the final timing for starting the display of the section display, the display start mode of the section display can be greatly diversified.

  In addition, in the case of winning replay, the bet operation is an opportunity for granting a replay based on the winning replay. That is, it is possible to extend the start game by setting the game in which the winning replay is continued until the player performs a bet operation.

  When the winning replay is an opportunity for winning the advantageous section, the section indicator is displayed based on the betting operation that triggers the replay. If it is normal (if other small roles etc. are winning opportunities), if the assumption that the display of the section indicator is started before the betting operation, the re-game granting opportunity based on the winning replay The bet operation is considered to be a situation where it has already given up that the display of the section indicator has not started, and if the display of the section indicator is started in such a situation, the player can be surprised, It is possible to exert a dramatic effect.

  The winning outcome of the winning replay may be as follows. Specifically, when the combination of symbols set as the winning mode of the winning replay is stopped on the active line, a small role accompanied by another medal payout (especially, a specific role that becomes a lottery opportunity for transition to an advantageous section, for example, The combination of symbols set as the winning mode of the strong watermelon) stops on a line different from the active line. By doing so, it can be expected that the effect that makes it seem as if a small prize winning with the other medal payout has been established, and the display of the section indicator has not started by the time of the betting operation. Through this, it is possible to increase the effect of making the transition lottery to the advantageous section non-winning based on the small prize winning accompanied with the other medal payout. As a result, it becomes easier to give up the winning of the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section, and it is possible to further expect an effect that will surprise the player.

<Modification 9>
In this modified example, when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number and ends, the display end mode of the section indicator is changed. FIG. 83 shows the section display first process in this modification.

  In step S3601, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not displayed, the same processing as in steps S2702 to S2705 is performed in steps S3602 to S3605. If the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, the process advances to step S3606 to add an advantageous section game number AG. In other words, in this modification, the management of the advantageous section game number AG is not the section display second process started at the end of the game (in the reel control process) but the section started at the start of the game (in the lottery process). This is performed in the first display process. In step S3607, it is determined whether or not the advantageous segment game number AG has reached the upper limit “1500”. If the upper limit has not been reached, in step S3608, the process of continuing to display the eighth display segment N8 is performed, and then the section display first process ends.

  If it is determined in step S3607 that the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit value, that is, if it is determined that the forced termination condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied in the current game, the process proceeds to step S3609. In step S3609, the advantageous section game number AG is reset to the initial value (0). In step S3610, a process for setting a forced end flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The forced termination flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the forced termination condition is satisfied.

  In step S3611, a display end mode lottery process is performed. In the lottery process, the display end mode table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the display end mode of the section display when the advantageous section is ended is determined by lottery. In the display end mode table, as shown in FIG. 84, the display end mode (display end timing) is set differently depending on the contents of the advantageous section when the forced end condition is satisfied and the set value.

  That is, in step S3611, the contents of the display mode in the game in which the forced termination condition is satisfied (the game in the case of performing the process in step S3611) are grasped, and if the display mode is the challenge mode or the attack mode, the section indicator As the display end mode, the payout end time is set. On the other hand, when the display mode of this game is the VB mode or the specialization zone, the first reel stop OFF operation, the second reel stop OFF operation, the third reel stop OFF operation, and One of the payout ends is determined from the set value.

  Specifically, when the current game is in the VB mode, when the first reel is turned OFF, it is selected with setting 2 or more, and is not selected with setting 1. When the third reel is stopped and turned off, it is selected with setting 4 or more, and is not selected with setting 3 or less. In addition, when the second reel is turned OFF, setting 2, setting 4, and setting 6 are more easily selected than setting 1, setting 3, and setting 5.

  When the current game is a specialized zone, the selection is made at setting 4 or higher at the time of the second reel stop OFF operation, and is not selected at setting 3 or lower. When the third reel is turned OFF, it is selected only with setting 6. In addition, when the first reel is turned off, setting 1, setting 3, and setting 5 are more easily selected than setting 2, setting 4, and setting 6.

  That is, the display end mode table is defined so that the setting value can be narrowed down more easily so that the situation (display mode) at the time when the forced end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is more advantageous to the player. In other words, it is a situation that is advantageous for the player, and if there is no upper limit to the number of continuous games in the advantageous section, if the forced termination condition is met in a situation where the number of additional continuous games can be expected, set instead It is possible to make a game for which a value is estimated, and to compensate for a sense of loss when the advantageous section ends in the situation of the future.

  After the display end mode lottery process is performed in step S3611, the display end mode corresponding to the lottery result is set as the end mode of the current section display in step S3612, and then the section display first process ends. To do. In this case, for example, if the time of the first reel stop OFF operation is set, the CPU 102 controls to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 based on the stop OFF operation. If the payout end time is set, the CPU 102 controls to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 based on the medal payout end.

  In the second section display process in this modification, as shown in FIG. 85, it is determined in step S3701 whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, the section display second process is terminated as it is, and if it is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S3702. In step S3702, it is determined whether or not the forcible end flag is set. If it is set, data initialization processing is performed in step S3703, and then the section display second processing is ended. Note that the display of the eighth display segment N8 ends in the end mode set by the processing in steps S3611 and S3612. Therefore, when the forced end flag is set, the second section display second processing is performed. Then, only data initialization is performed.

  If it is determined in step S3702 that the forced termination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3704. The processing from step S3704 to step S3707 is the same as the processing from step S2807 to step S2810.

  As described above, in the section indicator such that the display is started when the transition to the advantageous section that is advantageous for the player due to the improvement of the performance related to the push order notification, and the display is terminated when the advantageous section ends. By making the display end mode different depending on the situation at the end, it is possible to grasp the situation at the end from the section display and to immerse it in the remnant of the situation at the end.

  In particular, when a forced termination condition for an advantageous section is established in a situation that is advantageous to the player and the advantageous section ends, a setting value can be estimated as a kind of information that can be beneficial to the player. . In this way, it is possible to reduce the feeling of loss at the time of forced termination, and it becomes easier to guess the set value as the forced termination condition is satisfied in a situation advantageous to the player. It is possible to achieve a gameability that balances the sense of loss at the time of forced termination and the ease of obtaining information that can be useful.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the winning chance of the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section is an overlapping role with the bonus, the contents of the advantageous section are suggested in the game from the game winning the overlapping role to the bonus winning. Here, the change point about the display mode of the section indicator in this embodiment is explained first.

  As described above, the transfer lottery to the advantageous section is performed based on the fact that a special combination such as strong cherry or strong watermelon is won. The lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is also performed based on the fact that the winning combination of bonuses and strong cherries is won (particularly, the overlapping combination with the first BB). In the present embodiment, the display start mode of the section indicator is made different depending on whether or not the winning lottery for the transition to the advantageous section is an overlapping role with the first BB. Specifically, when the winning chance of the transfer lottery is not a duplicate role with the first BB, as in the first embodiment, the game that has won the specified role that is the winning opportunity is designated as the specified role. The game is established as the start game, and the display of the section display is started before the operation of the next game is permitted.

  On the other hand, when the winning chance of the transition lottery is a duplicate role with the first BB, the game in which the first BB winning is established among the specific roles that are the winning chance is set as the game in which the specific role is established, Before the next game operation is allowed, the section display starts.

  As already described, the first BB has a so-called missed symbol combination set as a winning mode, and if no winning is achieved in the winning game, the first BB winning flag is carried over. Therefore, when winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section triggered by the overlapping role with the first BB, the game won for the overlapping role may be different from the game that is established as the first BB winning prize. And if the winning combination for the transition to the advantageous section is won by the overlapping role with the first BB, the display of the section indicator is not started in the game in which the winning combination is won, and the first BB winning is established. Until that time, the display start of the section indicator is carried over.

  In the present embodiment, the game is realized using the presence / absence of carry-over of the display start of such a section indicator. Hereinafter, a processing configuration relating to the game playability will be described.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the reel control process in this embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, in steps S3801 to S3816, processing similar to that in steps S401 to S416 is performed. In step S3817, a special RT state process is performed, and then the reel control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, when the first BB or the second BB is won, a transition is made to a special RT state that is different from the first RT state to the third RT state, which is shifted by the promotion replay, the fall replay, or the like. In the special RT state, the winning probability of the predetermined replay becomes a winning probability different from the normal gaming state, and specifically, becomes higher than the normal gaming state. The special RT state that shifts based on the first BB or the second BB winning is completed when the first BB or the second BB winning the transition is established. In addition, in the present embodiment, a special RT state is also provided in which a transition is made based on the first BB or the second BB winning. The special RT state process is a process for controlling the special RT state.

  In the special RT state process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If it is in the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it is determined in step S3902 whether or not the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the first BB or the second BB is won in the normal gaming state or the first RT state.

  If any BB is won, it is determined in step S3903 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, it is determined in step S3904 whether the specialized zone winning flag is set. When the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and when the attack mode winning flag and the special zone winning flag are set, a special RT command with a super attack mode is displayed and controlled in step S3905. 81 is set as an output target. The special RT state command with the super attack mode is used for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the state is the transition to the RT state based on the first BB or the second BB winning and that the super attack mode is won. It is a command. More specifically, the special RT state command with the super attack mode is elected to shift to the special RT state based on the first BB winning, and to win the lottery for transition to the super attack mode, and before the transition to the super attack mode. This is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp this. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received such a special RT command will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set and the attack mode winning flag is set but the specialized zone flag is not set, the attack mode is set in step S3906. A special RT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The special RT command with an attack mode is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that it is in the state of winning the attack mode and shifting to the RT state based on the first BB or the second BB winning. . More specifically, the special RT state command with the attack mode indicates that the transition to the special RT state is made based on the first BB winning, the winning lottery to the attack mode is won, and the state is before the transition to the attack mode. This is a command for causing the control device 81 to grasp. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received such a special RT command will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S3903 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S3907. In step S3907, it is determined whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, processing for setting a special RT state command with challenge mode as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S3908. The special RT state command with a challenge mode is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that it is a state in which the transition to the RT state is made based on the first BB or the second BB winning and the challenge mode is won. is there. More specifically, the special RT state command with a challenge mode indicates that a transition to the special RT state is made based on the first BB winning, and that a lottery for the transition to the challenge mode is won and the state is before the transition to the challenge mode. This is a command for causing the control device 81 to grasp. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received such a special RT command will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S3907 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, a special RT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S3909. The special RT state command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the state shifts to the RT state based on the first BB or the second BB winning. More specifically, the special RT state command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the transition to the special RT state is made based on the first BB winning and that the transition lottery such as the attack mode is not won. . The processing of the display control device 81 that has received the special RT state command will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S3902 that neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3910. In step S3910, it is determined whether or not a specific combination is won in the current game. If it is determined that the specific combination has been won, it is determined in step S3911 whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. If it is determined in step S3910 that the specified combination is not won, or if it is determined that any winning flag is set in step S3911 even if the specified combination is won, The special RT state process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the specific role is won and neither the challenge mode nor the attack mode is won, the special RT counter in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is set to the special RT state in step S3912. A process of inputting “5” as the number of continuing games is executed. The special RT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of continuing games in the special RT state that shifts without being based on the first BB or the second BB winning. Note that the number of continuing games in the special RT state is arbitrary, and may be less than 5 or more than 5. However, the number of continuing games in the special RT state may be set in relation to the winning probability of special replay described later.

  In a succeeding step S3913, the fake special RT state command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The fake special RT state command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the state shifts to the RT state without being based on the first BB or the second BB winning. More specifically, the fake special RT state command causes the display control device 81 to grasp that the transition to the special RT state is not based on the first BB or the second BB winning, and that the transition lottery such as the attack mode is not won. It is a command for. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received the special RT state command will be described later.

  After executing any of the processes of step S3905, step S3906, step S3908, step S3909, and step S3913, the process proceeds to step S3914. In step S3914, processing for storing the current gaming state is executed. Specifically, the current gaming state (normal gaming state or first RT state) is grasped, and if it is the first RT state, the RT setting flag (first RT setting flag) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 106. I do. The RT setting flag stored in the storage area can be read later. For example, the RT setting flag read from the storage area after the end of the first BB or the second BB or after the end of the special RT state. The RT state can be set based on the above.

  In step S3915, the stored RT setting flag is cleared. In step S3916, the fourth RT setting flag is set, and then the special RT state process is terminated. The fourth RT setting flag corresponds to the special RT state. By the processing of step S3915 and step S3916, the gaming state shifts to the fourth RT state as the special RT state.

  Here, the success / failure lottery table in the fourth RT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88 shows a success / failure lottery table for the fourth RT state that is shifted based on the first BB or the second BB winner, and FIG. 89 is a success / failure lottery table for the fourth RT state that is shifted without being based on the first BB or second BB winner. Is shown.

  In any winning / no-win lottery table for the fourth RT state, the winning combination probability of the index combination IV = 13 to 20, 32 to 45 and the pushing order bell of IV = 21 to 28 is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. The winning probability is the same. However, in the fourth RT state that shifts based on the first BB or the second BB winning, even if the specific combination with the index value IV = 32 to 45 is won, the first BB or the second BB is not won. In other words, in a situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set, it is avoided that the first BB and the second BB are newly won (the bonus is won repeatedly). For the same reason, in the fourth RT state based on the first BB or the second BB winning, various bonuses with index values IV = 46 to 48 are not won. On the other hand, in the fourth RT state that is not based on the first BB or the second BB, if the winning is performed with the index value IV = 32 to 45, the first BB or the second BB is duplicated, and the index value IV = 46 to 48. You can also win various bonuses.

  In the fourth RT state, as the replay, the winning probability of the normal replay with the index value IV = 1 and the winning probability of the special replay with the index values IV = 53 and 54 are higher than those in the normal gaming state and the first RT state. More specifically, the special replay of the index value IV = 53, 54 is a replay that is won only in the fourth RT state, and the winning probability in other game states is zero. In addition, even if it is another game state, it is good also as a structure which is elected partially (with low probability). Further, in the fourth RT state, 0 is set for the point value PV of the index value IV = 2 to 12, and the push order replay corresponding to these index values is not won.

  When the special replay 1 with the index value IV = 53 is won, the first replay, the ninth regame, the eleventh regame to the fifteenth regame are won. When the special replay 2 with the index value IV = 54 is won, the first replay, the eleventh replay to the fifteenth replay are overlapped.

  In the fourth RT state, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 1 is about one-third, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 53 is about one-fourth, and the index value IV The probability of winning at = 54 is about 43.7. Therefore, in the fourth RT state, the total replay probability is higher than in the normal gaming state and the first RT state, and the probability of being a losing result is reduced.

  By the way, the replay probability in the fourth RT state is lower than that in the second RT state or the third RT state, and the probability of a detachment result is high. Therefore, even when reel control is performed in which a replay winning is given priority over a BB winning, it is possible to make a BB winning relatively smoothly.

  Returning to the description of the special RT state process, if it is determined in step S3901 that the game state is not the normal gaming state or the first RT state, the process proceeds to step S3917. In step S3917, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a special RT state by determining whether or not the fourth RT setting flag is set. If it is not in the special RT state, the special RT state process is terminated as it is. If it is in the special RT state, the process proceeds to step S3918.

  In step S3918, it is determined whether any of the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag is set. That is, if the special RT state has shifted based on the first BB or the second BB winning, or has shifted without being based on the first BB or the second BB winning, but subsequently won the first BB or the second BB, it remains as it is. The special RT state process is terminated. If it is determined in step S3918 that no BB winning flag is set, a special RT counter is subtracted in step S3919. That is, the special RT counter set in step S3912 is subtracted by 1 when the game is digested.

  In step S3920, it is determined whether or not the special RT counter has become “0” based on the processing result in step S3919. If it is determined that it is not “0”, it is determined in step S3921 whether or not any one of the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag is set. The case of affirmative determination in step S3921 means that the current special RT state is shifted to the special RT state without being based on the first BB or the second BB, but in the current game in the special RT state, the first BB or the second BB It means that the challenge mode or the attack mode (super attack mode) is won by a specific role that is not a duplicate role. As already described, when the winning combination is a specific combination that is not an overlapping combination with the first BB or the second BB, the section indicator starts displaying the game as a start game.

  If it is determined in step S3920 that the special RT counter is “0”, or if display of the section indicator is started with the current game as a start game in step S3921, the process proceeds to step S3922, and the above step S3914 is performed. To read the stored RT setting flag. In the case of the normal gaming state in step S3914, the RT setting flag is not stored, and in step S3914, the RT setting flag is not stored in the storage area of the RT setting flag. Is determined to be in the normal gaming state. In step S3923, based on the result of the reading process in step S3922, a process for returning to the gaming state before the transition to the special RT state is performed. After performing the process of step S3923, the special RT state process is terminated.

  In addition, when shifting to the special RT state, the game state before the transition may not be stored, and a transition may be made to a uniform gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) at the end of the special RT state. In particular, the special RT state is configured not to shift during the second RT state to the third RT state. However, there is not much difference in the advantage between the normal gaming state and the first RT state, and any gaming state can be restored. It is considered that the player suffers a small loss.

  Next, bonus state processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S4001 whether or not the bonus state is set, and if not in the bonus state, it is determined whether or not a bonus winning flag is set in step S4002. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, it is determined in step S4003 whether or not a CB winning has been established. If established, a CB setting flag is set in step S4004 and the remaining in step S4005. The number of payouts is “15”. Thereafter, a state command is set in step S4006, and after the external signal setting process is performed in step S4007, the bonus state process is terminated. The processes in steps S4001 to S4007 are the same as the processes in steps S601 to S607.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4003, it is determined in step S4008 whether the first BB or the second BB winning has been established. If any of the BB winnings is established, the process proceeds to step S4009 to perform processing for clearing the current RT setting flag. In step S4010, processing for clearing the BB winning flag is performed, and in step S4011, processing for setting the BB setting flag is performed. In step S4012, “216” is set as the remaining payout amount. Thereafter, in step S4013, a section display fourth process is performed. The section display fourth process is a process related to the display of the section indicator, and details thereof will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S4008 that no BB winning has been established, a carryover command is set in step S4014. If it is determined in step S4001 that the bonus state is being established, end determination processing is performed in step S4015. After executing the process of step S4013, step S4014 or step S4015, the process proceeds to step S4006 in the same manner as after executing the process of step S4005, and after performing the state command setting process and the external signal setting process, the bonus state The process ends.

  Next, RT state processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S4101 whether the fourth RT setting flag is set. If the fourth RT setting flag is set, the RT state process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S4101 that the fourth RT setting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4102, and the same processes as in steps S501 to S511 are performed in steps S4102 to S4112.

  That is, the fourth RT setting flag is set, and during the special RT state, the transition to the RT state does not occur until the BB winning or the number of continuing games in the special RT state becomes zero. Specifically, even if the transition outcome is stopped, the transition to the first RT state is not performed, and other promotion replays and fall replays (second replay to fifth replay) are not won. It should be noted that when the transition outcome stops during the special RT state (fourth RT state), a process of resetting to the fourth RT state may be performed. In this case, the special RT counter may be configured to set the initial value (5) again.

  Next, the section display first process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S4201, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If not displayed, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not a standby period flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The waiting period flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the display start of the section indicator is also carried over with the carry-over of the BB winning though the winning lottery for the advantageous section is won. . If the standby period flag is set, the section display first process is terminated as it is. That is, in the situation where the standby period flag is set, the process for starting the display of the section display is not performed in the section display first process.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4202, it is determined in step S4203 whether one of the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag is set. If no winning flag is set, the section display first process is terminated as it is. If any winning flag is set, the process advances to step S4204 to determine whether or not the first BB winning flag is set. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S4204 means that a winning lottery for a transition to an advantageous section is won in the current game, and the winning opportunity is an overlapping role with the first BB.

  Note that, as described above, since the duplicate combination with the second BB and the single combination of the second BB (IV = 47) are not won in the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section, only the presence / absence of the first BB winning flag is determined in step S4204. Determine. In a case where a duplicate combination with the second BB or a single combination of the second BB can be won in the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section, it is preferable that the presence or absence of the second BB winning flag is also determined in step S4204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4204 and the winning opportunity is not a duplicate role, in step S4205 to step S4207, the display start mode of the section display is set and the advantageous section is continued as in steps S2703 to S2705. After performing the process of starting the game number measurement, the first section display first process is terminated.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S4204 and the winning opportunity is a duplicate combination, the standby period flag is set in step S4208, and then the first section display first process is terminated. With this process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4202 after the next game.

  If it is determined in step S4201 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, the process of continuing such display is performed in step S4209, and then the section display first process ends. The process of step S4209 is the same as the process of step S2706.

  Next, the section display fourth process performed in step S4013 of the bonus state process (FIG. 90) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S4301, it is determined whether the standby period flag is set. The case where the waiting period flag is not set is, for example, the case where the first BB or the second BB is won while the section indicator is being displayed (during the advantageous section), or the case where the current bonus is the second BB. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S4301, and the section display fourth process is ended as it is. If the standby period flag is set, the process advances to step S4302 to clear the standby period flag.

  In step S4303, the display of the section display is started. That is, when the waiting period flag is set, the section display is started in the section display fourth process performed based on the first BB winning, and the section display is performed until the first BB winning is established. The display start of the vessel is carried over. In step S4304, an AG measurement start process for the number of advantageous section games is performed. Such processing is the same as in step S4207. That is, when the waiting period flag is set, the measurement start of the number of continued games in the advantageous section is carried over until the first BB winning is established. After performing the process of step S4304, the section display fourth process ends.

  The flow of the special RT state will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the normal section, for example, when a stop turn that results in a weak watermelon winning combination appears, (1) the current game is a specific part that is not an overlapping part with the BB (the first BB or the second BB) and the transition to the advantageous part (2) Case where the current game is a specific role that is not an overlapping role with the BB (first BB or second BB) and is not won for the lottery to move to the advantageous section, (3) This time The game is a duplicate role with the BB (first BB) and the winning lottery for the transition to the advantageous section, (4) the current game is a duplicate role with the BB (first BB or second BB) and There may be a plurality of cases in which the lottery to the advantageous section is not won.

  In the case of the above (1), the game in which the stop turn that becomes the weak watermelon winning prize appears is the start game, and the display on the section display is started. On the other hand, in the cases (2) to (4), the display of the section indicator is not started in the game in which the stop roll that becomes the weak watermelon winning combination appears. In the cases (2) to (4), the state shifts to the special RT state. However, in the cases of (3) and (4), it is a special RT state in which BB winning is the end condition, and in the case of (2), the digestion of the number of games with the continuation upper limit number of 5 is the end condition. This is a special RT state. In any case, during the special RT state, the display of the section indicator is not started, the replay winning probability is higher than that, and the expectation for the BB winning and the advantageous section winning is maintained.

  In the lottery process of each game in the special RT state, if any index value is not won and a result is a losing result, it is possible to establish a winning BB winning. In this case, when the display of the section display is started together with the BB winning, it is determined that the case is (3) above, and when the display of the section display is not started together with the BB winning, the case of (4) is performed. Is determined. On the other hand, in the case of (2) above, the special RT state ends when the upper limit number of games is consumed in the special RT state. In this case, the display of the section display is not started.

  When the special RT state is entered as described above, the replay probability increases. Most of the replays that are won during the special RT state are normal replays, and rarely, special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won. As already described, the special replay 1 is an overlapping role of the first replay, the ninth regame, and the eleventh regame to the fifteenth replay, and the special replay 2 is the first regame and the tenth replay. This is a duplicate of 15th regame.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the ninth re-game and the fifteenth re-game are all given a re-game as a privilege, but their stop appearances are different. In the following description, the winning mode is described on the premise that the right-down line L4 is set as an active line in the 3-bet game.

  Specifically, the ninth replay includes a “first replay” symbol or a “second replay” symbol on the left reel 32L, a “first replay” symbol or a “second replay” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R. A winning mode is established in which a winning is established when the “first replay” symbol or the “second replay” symbol stops at the active line. The tenth replay includes a “red bell” symbol or a “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, a “first replay” symbol or a “second replay” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a “red bell” symbol on the right reel 32R or A winning mode is set in which a winning is established when the “white bell” symbol stops on the active line. In the eleventh replay, the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “black BAR” symbol of the middle reel 32M, the “first replay” symbol or the “second replay” symbol of the right reel 32R are displayed. A winning mode is established in which winning is achieved by stopping on the active line. The twelfth replay consists of a “first replay” symbol or “second replay” symbol on the left reel 32L, a “first replay” symbol or “second replay” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a “black BAR” on the right reel 32R. A winning mode is set in which a winning is established when the symbol stops on the active line. In these 9th to 12th regames, even if the “black BAR” symbol is aimed at each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the “black BAR” symbol does not stop on any reel, or even if it stops, the straight line The “black BAR” symbol on the line is a replay where a replay win is established at a stop event that does not stop at all, and a win is achieved at a stop event that is out of the black BAR template.

  More specifically, for example, in the ninth replay, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the 19th “first replay” symbol of the left reel 32L is stopped at the upper stage. Then, the 18th “black BAR” symbol stops in the middle. Further, when the ninth “second replay” symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped at the middle stage, the eighth “black BAR” symbol is stopped at the lower stage. Then, when the sixth “first replay” symbol of the right reel 32R is stopped at the lower stage, the seventh “black BAR” symbol is stopped at the middle stage. In this case, the “black BAR” design stops from the left reel 32L to the middle, lower, and middle stages, and the “black BAR” design is displayed on the middle line L2 between the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, and the middle reel 32M. The “black BAR” symbol does not stop on the tempering line, and it becomes a stop-out point (left / right middle tempering detachment).

  In addition, in the 10th replay, if the stop operation is aimed at the “black BAR” symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the 19th “first replay” symbol of the left reel 32L is stopped at the upper stage, so that the 18th The “black BAR” symbol stops at the middle. Further, when the seventh “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped at the middle stage, the eighth “black BAR” symbol is stopped at the upper stage. Then, when the fifth “red bell” symbol of the right reel 32R is stopped at the lower stage, the seventh “black BAR” symbol is stopped at the upper stage. In this case, the “black BAR” symbol stops from the left reel 32L to the middle, upper, and upper tiers, and the “black BAR” symbol on the upper line L1 between the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R and the left reel 32L. The “black BAR” symbol does not stop on the tempering line, and the tempering outage (out of the middle / upper right tempering) is made.

  In the eleventh replay, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the 20th “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L is stopped at the upper stage, the 18th “black” The “BAR” symbol stops at the bottom. In the middle reel 32M, the eighth “black BAR” symbol stops in the middle stage. When the sixth “first replay” symbol of the right reel 32R is stopped at the lower stage, the seventh “black BAR” symbol is stopped at the middle stage. In this case, the “black BAR” symbol stops from the left reel 32L to the lower, middle and middle stages, and the “black BAR” symbol is tempered on the middle line L2 between the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, and the left reel 32L. The “black BAR” symbol does not stop on the tempering line, and the tempering is out of the tempering (middle / right middle tempering off).

  In the twelfth replay, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the nineteenth “first replay” symbol of the left reel 32L is stopped at the upper stage, and the eighteenth “ The “black BAR” symbol stops in the middle. When the ninth “second replay” of the middle reel 32M is stopped at the middle stage, the eighth “black BAR” symbol is stopped at the lower stage. In the right reel 32R, the seventh or ninth “black BAR” symbol stops at the lower stage. In this case, the “black BAR” symbol stops from the left reel 32L to the middle, lower, and lower (upper), the “black BAR” symbol appears on the lower line L3 between the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, and In the left reel 32L, the “black BAR” symbol does not stop on the tempering line and becomes a stopping point (middle / lower right tempering detachment).

  In the thirteenth replay, the “black BAR” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “black BAR” symbol of the middle reel 32M, the “first replay” symbol or the “second replay” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line. The winning mode in which winning is established is set. In particular, the winning mode of the thirteenth replay is that when the stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the “black BAR” symbol is stopped at the upper and lower stages of the left reel 32L. Although the “black BAR” symbol stops in the middle of the reel 32M, the “black BAR” symbol does not stop on the right reel 32R, and the “black BAR” symbol appears on the lower right line L4 and the upper right line L5. A stop result that is out of the black BAR double temper is set as a winning mode.

  In the 14th regame, the “black BAR” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “black BAR” symbol on the middle reel 32M, the “red bell” symbol on the right reel 32R, or the “white bell” symbol stops at the active line. A winning mode in which is established is set. In particular, in the winning mode of the 14th replay, when the stop operation is aimed at the “black BAR” symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the “black BAR” symbols stop at the upper and lower stages of the left reel 32L, and the middle The “black BAR” symbol stops in the middle of the reel 32M, the “black BAR” symbol stops in the upper part of the right reel 32R, and the “black BAR” symbol does not stop in the lower part of the reel 32M. The stop appearance that the black BAR single line is stopped is set as the winning mode.

  The fifteenth replay has a winning mode in which a winning is achieved when the “black BAR” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “black BAR” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “black BAR” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line. Is set. In particular, the winning mode of the fifteenth replay is that when the stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the “black BAR” symbol is stopped at the upper and lower stages of the left reel 32L. The “black BAR” symbol stops at the middle of the reel 32M, the “black BAR” symbol also stops at the upper and lower stages of the right reel 32R, and the “black BAR” symbol is aligned at the right-down line L4 and the right-up line L5. The stop appearance that stops after the black BAR tempering is set as the winning mode.

  Incidentally, both the special replay 1 and the special replay 2 include the first replay as a winning combination. As already described (as shown in FIG. 11), the first replay is performed by the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “first replay” symbol or the “second replay” of the middle reel 32M. A winning mode is established in which a winning is established when the symbol, the “red bell” symbol, the “white bell” symbol, or the “young man” symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the active line. In this case, in the first replay, when the stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the 20th “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L is stopped at the upper stage. The second “black BAR” symbol stops at the bottom. When the ninth “second replay” of the middle reel 32M is stopped at the middle stage, the eighth “black BAR” symbol is stopped at the lower stage. Then, when the fifth “red bell” symbol of the right reel 32R is stopped at the lower stage, the seventh “black BAR” symbol is stopped at the upper stage. In this case, the “black BAR” symbol stops from the left reel 32L to the lower, lower, and upper stages, and the “black BAR” symbol appears on the lower line L3 between the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. The “black BAR” symbol does not stop on the tempering line, and it becomes a stop-out point (left / middle lower tempering detachment).

  The special replay 1 and the special replay 2 are push orders in which the winning combinations are different depending on the stop order. However, even if any winning combination is awarded, the privilege granted is a replay, and the player's advantage is not different. In other words, the profits obtained by the player do not increase or decrease, although the stop appearance differs depending on the stop order.

  FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning mode established.

  If the special replay 1 is won and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the first stop order of “left” → “middle” → “right”, the first replay prize is established, In this case, the stop event is stopped when the “replay” symbols are aligned on the right downward line L4. Further, even if the stop is performed in the second stop order of “left” → “right” → “middle”, the first regame winning is established, and the “replay” symbols are aligned and stopped on the right downward line L4. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped for the “black BAR” symbol, as described above, the winning is achieved at the stop point that is out of the left, middle, and lower tiers.

  On the other hand, when stopping in the third stop order of “middle” → “left” → “right”, a winning of any one of the ninth re-game, the eleventh re-game, and the thirteenth re-game is established. In this case, when a stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, any one of the ninth replay, the eleventh replay, and the thirteenth replay is out of the black BAR temper (black A winning will be established at the stop event that is a BAR double temper. More specifically, when the “black BAR” symbol stops in the middle stage in the middle reel 32M to be stopped first, the eleventh regame or the thirteenth regame can be won, but the ninth regame win is not established. In this case, in the left reel 32L, when the “black BAR” symbol is stopped at the lower stage, the eleventh regame prize can be established, but the thirteenth regame prize is not established, and the “black BAR” symbol is arranged in the middle part of the right reel 32R. Stops and the eleventh re-game win is established, the middle / right middle temper will come off. When the “black BAR” symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M and the “black BAR” symbol is stopped at the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the eleventh regame prize is established although the thirteenth regame prize can be established. When the “black BAR” symbol is stopped in the middle of the right reel 32R and the thirteenth regame winning is established, the black BAR double tempering of the lower right line L4 (and the upper right line L5) is stopped. In the middle reel 32M to be stopped first, if the “black BAR” symbol does not stop in the middle and the “black BAR” symbol stops in the lower, the ninth regame prize may be established, The thirteenth regame prize will not be established. In this case, even if the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R are stopped for the “black BAR” symbol, the stop turn will be out of the left / right middle stage. That is, no matter which replay prize is established, even if the “black BAR” design is stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the “black BAR” design does not stop on the straight line. , It will be a stop appearance that will be out of the black BAR Tempe. In other words, in this case, by performing a stop operation with the aim of the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to make a stop turn that appears to be out of the black BAR double template, and to display the black BAR template. If it is possible to make a stop appearance that will come off and the eye-pressing operation is accurate, a replay winning will be established at the stop outcome that will be out of the black BAR double template.

  In the special replay 1, when stopping in the fourth stop order of “middle” → “right” → “left”, one of the tenth regame, the eleventh regame, and the fourteenth regame is won. In this case, if a stop operation is performed with the aim of the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the “black BAR” symbol is aligned and stopped on the left rising line L5 on the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. And, as the 14th regame prize, it will be the stop appearance of black BAR single match.

  When stopping in the fifth stop order of “right” → “left” → “middle”, a winning of any one of the ninth regame, the twelfth regame, and the thirteenth regame is established. In this case as well, as in the case of the third stop order, if the stop operation is performed with the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the black BAR temper will be stopped. When stopping in the sixth stop order of “right” → “middle” → “left”, one of the ninth regame, the twelfth regame, and the fifteenth regame is won. In this case, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a black BAR double-matched stoppage will be made as the 15th replay prize.

  In the case of the special replay 2, in the first stop order and the second stop order, the first regame winning is established, and the “replay” symbols are aligned and stopped on the right downward line L4 as in the special replay 1. Also in this case, when the stop operation is performed with the aim of the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a winning is established when the black BAR tempering is stopped. In the case of the third stop order, unlike the special replay 1, a winning of any one of the tenth replay, the eleventh replay, and the fourteenth replay is established, and “black BAR” is set in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol, the black BAR single-match stoppage will be made as the 14th replay prize. In the case of the fourth stop order, unlike the special replay 1, one of the tenth replay, the eleventh regame, and the thirteenth regame is established. However, also in this case, if the stop operation is aimed at the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the black BAR double temper will come off.

  In the case of the fifth stop order, unlike the special replay 1, any one of the tenth replay, the twelfth regame, and the fifteenth regame is won, and “black BAR” is set in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol, the black BAR double-matched stoppage will be made as the 15th replay prize. In the case of the sixth stop order, unlike the special replay 1, a winning of any one of the tenth replay, the twelfth replay, and the thirteenth replay is established, and “black BAR” is set in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. "If you stop for the symbol, the black BAR double temper will come off.

  In the present embodiment, the contents of the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section are suggested by using the difference of the stop appearance according to the stop order of the special replays 1 and 2 to be won in such a special RT state. FIG. 97 shows the push order processing in this embodiment. As already described, the push order combination process is a process (FIG. 37) performed in step S <b> 711 of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31) in the main control device 101.

  The push order process in this embodiment is substantially the same as the push order process in the first embodiment, and the difference is that the current push order is special replay 1 or 2 wins. It is processing. That is, the processing of step S4401 to step S4422 is the same as the processing of step S1201 to step S1222, and depending on the relationship between the winning push order and the display mode (whether or not the push order notification condition is satisfied), It is determined whether or not the push order notification is performed. When the push order notification is performed, the push order notification is performed by the instruction monitor 68 and a push order notification command is output to the display control device 81. In addition, the process of step S4401-step S4422 is a process which can produce a change in the advantage for a player by a press order alerting | reporting.

  In the push order combination process in the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S4419 that it is not various promotion replays or the like and is not a push order bell, the process proceeds to step S4423. In step S4423, it is determined whether or not the special replay 1 or 2 is selected. If neither of the special replays 1 and 2 is selected, the push forward process is terminated. If it is one of the special replays 1 and 2, the push order notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4424, and then the push order combination process is terminated.

  That is, the notification of the push order when the special replays 1 and 2 are selected is executed regardless of the relationship with the display mode (whether or not the push order notice condition is satisfied), but by the instruction monitor 68 connected to the main control device 101. The push order notification is not performed, and only the push order notification by the display control device 81 is performed.

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the push order notification process in this embodiment. As already described, the push order notification process is a process (FIG. 45) performed in step S 1903 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 44) in the sub display control device 81.

  The push order notification process is also substantially the same as the push order notification process of the first embodiment. The difference is that the current push order is special replay 1 or 2 wins. It is. Specifically, in steps S4501 to S4513, as in the above-described steps S2001 to S2013, depending on the relationship between the winning push winning combination and the display mode (whether or not the push order notification condition is met), It is determined whether or not the order notification is performed, and when the push order notification is performed, the push display notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 is performed.

  In the push order notification process in the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S4512 that it is not various promotion replays or the like and is not a push order bell, the process proceeds to step S4514. In step S4514, it is determined whether or not the special replay 1 or 2 is selected. If it is neither special replay 1 nor 2, the push order notification process is terminated. If it is one of the special replays 1 and 2, the special RT notification process is executed in step S4515, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

  The special RT notification process in step S4515 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S4601, it is determined whether a special RT command with a super attack mode has been received. As already described, when the display control device 81 receives a new command in step S1701 of the effect setting process (FIG. 42), the received command is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 183 in step S1702. Process. In step S4601, it is possible to determine whether or not the above-described special RT state command has been received by checking the command storage area. In the following processing, the command storage area is also confirmed in the same manner as the determination processing of whether or not the predetermined command has been received.

  As already described, the special RT command with super attack mode is a command whose output is set in step S3905 in the special RT state process (FIG. 87). Such a command is a command indicating a transition to the special RT state based on the first BB winning, and a state before winning the transition to the super attack mode and before the transition.

  If it is determined in step S4601 that the command has been received, in step S4602, a push order notification effect that results in black BAR double alignment is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, if the current game result is special replay 1, the sixth stop order of “right” → “middle” → “left” is notified. If the current game result is special replay 2, the fifth stop order of “right” → “left” → “middle” is notified. After performing the process of step S4602, the special RT notification process is terminated.

  In this case, as a push order notification effect, a notification that the “black BAR” is stopped and aimed at each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed together with the notification of each stop order. For example, as shown in FIG. 100 (a), in the auxiliary display section 65, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is associated with the positional relationship of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and numbers are assigned. In addition, the symbols to be aimed at are displayed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In FIG. 100 (a), the number “3” and the character “black BAR” are displayed on the left side, the number “1” and the character “black BAR” are displayed in the middle, and the number “2” is displayed on the right side. And “Black BAR” character are displayed, and the stop operation of this time should be “middle” → “right” → “left”, and “black BAR” is applied to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Indicates that the design should be aimed. In addition, the middle number and the “black BAR” character are highlighted by the boy, and it is easy to grasp that the first stop operation should be performed.

  Incidentally, in this case, although the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 is performed, the push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 is not performed. This indicates that the current push order notification effect is not a push order notification effect for causing a change in the player's advantage. In other words, the push order notification is always generated by the instruction monitor 68 in the case of the push order notification effect for causing a change in the player's advantage.

  If it is determined in step S4601 that the special RT command with super attack mode has not been received, the process advances to step S4603. In step S4603, it is determined whether a special RT state command with an attack mode is received.

  As described above, the special RT command with an attack mode is a command whose output is set in step S3906 in the special RT state process (FIG. 87). Such a command is a command indicating that a transition to the special RT state is made based on the first BB winning, and that the state is the state before winning the transition and winning the attack mode.

  If it is determined in step S4603 that the command has been received, in step S4604, a push order notification effect that results in black BAR single alignment is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, if the current game result is special replay 1, a fourth stop order of “middle” → “right” → “left” is notified. If the current game result is special replay 2, the third stop order of “middle” → “left” → “right” is notified. After performing the process of step S4604, the special RT notification process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4603 that a special RT command with an attack mode has not been received, the process advances to step S4605. In step S4605, it is determined whether a special RT state command with a challenge mode is received.

  As already described, the special RT command with challenge mode is a command that is output and set in step S3908 in the special RT state process (FIG. 87). Such a command is a command indicating that a transition to the special RT state is made based on the first BB winning, and that the challenge mode is won and the state is before the transition.

  If it is determined in step S4605 that the command has been received, notification lottery processing 1 is executed in step S4606. The notice lottery process 1 is a lottery process for drawing whether or not the push order notice effect is to be executed when the special replay 1 or the special replay 2 is won, and the winning probability is set to the first probability (80%). It is. In this case, the lottery table having the first probability is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 and the lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 to perform the lottery process.

  If it is determined in step S4605 that a special RT command with challenge mode has not been received, the process advances to step S4607. In step S4607, it is determined whether a special RT command has been received.

  As already described, the special RT command is a command whose output is set in step S3909 in the special RT state process (FIG. 87). Such a command is a command indicating that the transition to the special RT state is made based on the first BB or the second BB winning, and that the transition lottery to the attack mode or the like is not won.

  If it is determined in step S4607 that the command has been received, notification lottery processing 2 is executed in step S4608. The notice lottery process 2 is a lottery process for drawing whether or not to execute the push order notice effect at the time of winning the special replay 1 or the special replay 2, and the second probability (20%) whose winning probability is lower than the first probability. ). In this case, a lottery table having the second probability is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 to perform a lottery process.

  The case where it is determined in step S4607 that the command has not been received is a case where the current special RT has shifted without being based on the first BB or the second BB, and a fake special RT command has been received. When the fake special command is received, the notification lottery process 3 is executed in step S4609. The notice lottery process 3 is a lottery process for drawing whether or not the push order notice effect is executed at the time of winning the special replay 1 or the special replay 2, and the winning probability is lower than the first probability and the second probability. This is a process set to a probability (5%). In this case, a lottery table having the third probability is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 to perform a lottery process.

  After executing any of the processes of step S4606, step S4608, and step S4609, it is determined in step S4610 whether or not a winning is made in each of the notification lottery processes. If the winning lottery process is not won, the special RT notification process is terminated. In this case, even if the special replay 1 or the special replay 2 is won, the push order notification effect is not performed. For example, if a stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, the first replay prize is established. Then, even in the special replay 1 and the special replay 2, it cannot be distinguished from the normal replay having the index value IV = 1.

  If it is determined in step S4610 that the winning lottery process has been selected, a push order notification effect that is out of the black BAR double template is performed in step S4611. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, if the current game result is special replay 1, the third stop order of “middle” → “left” → “right” or “right” → “left” → Informs the fifth stop order of “medium”. If the current game result is special replay 2, the fourth stop order of “middle” → “right” → “left” or the sixth stop order of “right” → “middle” → “left” Inform. After performing the process of step S4611, the special RT notification process is terminated.

  The relationship between the push order notification effect when the special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won and the contents of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIG.

  As a result of the stop operation aiming at the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the push order notification effect, the replay winning (special replay 1 or special replay 2) If any one of the winnings is established, it is determined that the current special RT state is a special RT state based on the first BB, and that the transition to the super attack mode is made after the first BB. As shown in FIG. 61, the combination with the second BB is set not to be won in the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section, and the situation in which the special RT command with super attack mode is set to be output in step S3905. This is a case where the overlapping role with the first BB is a winning opportunity for the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section. Therefore, when the black BAR double alignment is stopped by operating in the stop order according to the push order notification effect, it is a special RT state based on the first BB winning of the first BB and the second BB, and the super attack mode. It shows that the lottery to win is also won.

  As a result of the stop operation aiming at the “black BAR” symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the push order notification effect, the replay winning (special replay 1 or special replay 2) If any one of the winnings is established, it is determined that the current special RT state is a special RT state based on the first BB, and that the mode shifts to the attack mode after the first BB. Similarly to the above, in the first BB and the second BB, the combination with the second BB does not win the lottery for the transition to the attack mode. Therefore, the situation in which the special RT command with an attack mode is set to be output in step S3906 is a case where the overlapping role with the first BB is a winning lottery for the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

  As a result of the stop operation aiming at the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in accordance with the push order notification effect, the replay winning (special replay 1 or special replay 2) is made at the stop point that is out of the black BAR double template. If any one of (1) is established, the special RT state of this time is (1) a special RT state based on the first BB and a transition to the challenge mode after the first BB, (2) a special RT based on the first BB A case that is in a state and has not been won in the lottery to the advantageous section, (3) a special RT state based on the second BB, (4) a special RT state that is not based on the first BB or the second BB win, One of them.

  However, from the difference in the winning probabilities of the above-mentioned notification lottery processes, when a replay winning is achieved at the stoppage point that is out of the black BAR double temper, the push order notification effect is performed through the notification lottery process 1, that is, ( The possibility of the case 1) is the highest, and the possibility that the push order notification effect is performed through the notification lottery process 2, that is, the case (2) or (3) is the second highest.

  Furthermore, it is possible to predict which case it is from the game stoppage that triggered the transition to the special RT state. For example, when a stop-out that becomes a middle bell prize appears and the state shifts to a special RT state, the middle bell of the index value IV = 19, the middle bell duplication 1 or the middle bell duplication 2 of the index value IV = 44,45 Based on either one, the state has shifted to the special RT state. In the case of an index bell overlap of 1 in the middle of the index value IV = 44, the challenge mode is won with a 90% probability, the super attack mode is won with a 10% probability, the attack mode is not won, and either mode is entered. There will be no event of not winning. Further, in the case of the middle bell overlap 2 of the index value IV = 45, no transition is won in any mode. For this reason, when a stop-out that becomes the middle bell win appears and the state shifts to the special RT state, the push order notification effect that is a black BAR single line suggesting that the attack mode is won will not occur.

  In addition, when a stop-out that becomes a middle bell prize appears and the state shifts to the special RT state, if the index value IV = 44, a special RT command with a challenge mode is received with a probability of 90%, and the special RT Does not receive commands. If the index value IV = 44, only the special RT command is received. When the index value IV = 19, the fake special RT command is received.

  Then, when a stop-out that becomes a middle bell prize appears and shifts to a special RT state, when the “black BAR” symbol is aimed according to the push order notification effect and the stop-out is out of black BAR temper, 1) The case where the first BB and the challenge mode are won at the index value IV = 44, (2) The case where the second BB is won at the index value IV = 45, or (3) neither is won The case is based on a fake special RT command. However, in these cases (1) to (3), the probability of winning the notification lottery is 80%, 20%, and 5%, respectively, and it can be predicted that the case (1) is most likely. it can. In addition, since the case of (3) is based on the premise that no transition to any mode occurring in 10% of the middle bell wins will be won, even if the notification lottery is won, the index value IV = The chance of winning 19 is 0.5%, and the possibility is extremely low.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the carry-over state of the first BB and the second BB, the execution lottery to the advantageous zone such as the attack mode is limited, and the game result triggered by the carry-over state is used to enter the advantageous zone. When the transfer lottery is won, the display start of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is delayed until the bonus winning. In this way, in the configuration in which the transition lottery to the advantageous section is performed by the combination of the bonus and the small part, even if the display of the eighth display segment N8 is not started in the winning game, the transition lottery is performed. You can sustain the expectation of winning.

  However, by doing the above, there are more opportunities to restrict the lottery to the advantageous section.For example, even if the specified lottery is won during the carryover state, the carryover state is not performed. It can also be said that the expectation for the advantageous section is lowered, and it can be said that the situation is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the above embodiment, the details of the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section that has been implemented based on the game result that has caused the transition to the carry-over state are notified by using the special replay stop event in the carry-over state. The configuration suggested. By doing in this way, even in the carry-over state, it becomes possible to play a game with a sense of expectation for an advantageous section, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  In addition, the carry-over state is basically a state in which a transition is made based on a bonus winning, and when winning a lottery to an advantageous section with a specific role that does not overlap with the bonus winning, The display of the eighth display segment N8 is started. Therefore, for example, if a stop appearance that becomes a special winning combination such as strong watermelon appears, if the display of the section indicator is not started, it is a small role that is not overlapping with the bonus and is not won in the transition lottery Either it is a duplicate with a bonus and the transition lottery is not won, or it is a duplicate with a bonus and the transition lottery is won. In this way, with the bonus overlapping role and the bonus non-overlapping role, in any case, the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section is made, and whether the display start timing of the section indicator is the bonus overlapping as described above. If different configurations are used, the patterns of the winning combination and the presence / absence of display start of the section display unit are diversified, and it is possible to greatly improve the game playability.

  In particular, for example, the strong watermelon duplication 1 that is a duplicate role with a bonus and the strong watermelon that is a small role that is not a duplicate role with a bonus have the same stopping appearance. It is difficult to determine which result is in the winning game. As a result, it is possible to determine not only whether or not the carryover state is set, but also the result including the start of display of the section display.

  As a lottery transfer to an advantageous section, for example, when comparing a strong watermelon and a weak watermelon, regardless of whether there is an overlap with the first BB, a strong watermelon has a winning probability of a lottery transition to an advantageous section than a weak watermelon High (Figure 61). Therefore, comparing the case where the strong watermelon stop appearance appears and the section indicator does not start displaying, and the case where the weak watermelon stop appearance appears and the section indicator does not start display, the former However, it can be determined that there is a high possibility of being in a carry-over state.

  For example, regarding the strong watermelon and the weak watermelon, the ratio of whether or not it overlaps with the first BB is higher in the strong watermelon than in the weak watermelon (FIG. 61). Specifically, when a stop appearance of a strong watermelon appears, about a quarter overlaps with the first BB, whereas when a stop appearance of a weak watermelon appears, about 30 minutes. 1 overlaps with the first BB. Therefore, even if the case where the strong watermelon stop appearance appears and the section indicator does not start displaying is compared with the case where the weak watermelon stop appearance appears and the section indicator does not start displaying, the former It can be determined that there is a high possibility that the person is in a carry-over state.

  In the carry-over state, the special replays 1 and 2 can be won, and the contents of the advantageous section are notified and suggested when the special replays 1 and 2 stop. Specifically, when the special replay 1 and 2 wins, if a stop order push notification effect of black BAR double alignment is performed, it is informed that the lottery for the transition to the super attack mode is won, and black When the stop order push order notification effect of the BAR single uniform is performed, it is notified that the lottery to shift to the attack mode is won, and when the stop order push order notification effect of the black BAR temper is out It is suggested that you have won the lottery to enter the challenge mode. In this way, in the carry-over state where the display of the section indicator has not started, it is assumed that there is a sense of expectation for the transition lottery to the advantageous section, the transition lottery of the player's interest If the content is performed by the push order notification effect, the degree of attention to the push order notification effect can be suitably increased.

  Even if these black BAR push order notification effects occur, the corresponding stop appearance does not appear unless the stop operation is aimed at the “black BAR” symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, when trying to grasp and predict the contents of the advantageous section from the relationship with the stop appearance, it is necessary to challenge the “black BAR” symbol, and the gameability is improved. In other words, because the “black BAR” design was stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the “black BAR” design was stopped at the desired position, the lottery for the transition to the attack mode or the like was won. It is possible to give an impression of this, and even from such an impression (impression that if it is not aimed, it will not win the transition lottery), it is possible to expect active participation in the game.

  Although the special replays 1 and 2 have different stopping appearances depending on the stopping order, the benefits obtained are replaying regardless of the stopping order, and it can be said that the push order notification effect does not relate to the player's profit. Therefore, consistency with performing the push order notification effect is ensured in a section in which the execution of the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section where the advantage is changed by the push order notification such as the push order bell is restricted.

  The special replays 1 and 2 are replays that are not involved in the transition of the RT state, such as other promoted replays. Therefore, in addition to the benefits of replays that are granted, the advantage of the subsequent gaming state does not cause a change, and it is more consistent with the fact that the lottery to the advantageous section is limited. Secured.

  When the special replays 1 and 2 push order notification effect is performed, the push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side is not performed, and only the effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 on the sub side is set. In other words, when the push order notification related to the profit of the player is performed, the push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side is always performed. This makes it clear that, for example, if a game hall manager or the like wants to monitor the relationship between the stop order and the privileges granted, the instruction monitor 68 may be monitored. In addition, the degree of freedom in producing the push order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 side is overwhelmingly improved.

  The special replays 1 and 2 that can generate the push order notification effect are game results that do not trigger the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to purely enjoy the push order notification effect without giving a negative image that the transition lottery is restricted in the carry-over state.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the configuration of special replays that can be won during the special RT state is different. FIG. 101 is a special RT state success / failure lottery table that shifts based on the first BB or second BB winning in the present modification, and FIG. 102 is a special RT success / failure transition that does not depend on the first BB or second BB winning. It is a lottery table.

  In this modification, as the special replay, the index value IV = 53, the special replay 3 including the first replay and the ninth replay to the thirteenth replay, and the index value IV = 54, the first replay, Special replay 4 consisting of 9 replays to 12th replay and 14th replay and special replay consisting of 1st replay, 9th replay to 12th replay and 15th replay with index value IV = 55 5 is set.

  The winning modes of the first regame and the ninth regame to the fifteenth regame are as described above. In the first regame, a winning is established mainly at the stop turning that becomes a right-down replay. In the game to the twelfth regame, a win is established at the stop event that is out of the black BAR tempe, and in the thirteenth regame, a win is established at the stop event that is out of the black BAR double temper, and the 14th regame is A winning is established at the stop event where the black BAR singles are aligned, and the 15th replay is achieved at the stop event where the black BAR doubles are aligned. In addition, the winning probabilities of special replays 3 to 5 are about 1/6 each.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the special replays 3 to 5 can win corresponding replays regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. That is, for example, in the situation where the special replay 5 is won, regardless of the stop order, if the stop operation is aimed at the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop becomes a black BAR double alignment. The fifteenth regame prize is established on the occasion. Even if the special replay 5 is won, if the stop operation is performed without aiming at the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, most of the replays are directed downward to the right regardless of the stop order. The first re-game prize is established at the stoppage that becomes.

  By the way, the special replay 3 is not associated with the 14th replay or the 15th replay, so even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are operated to stop the “black BAR” pattern, Regardless of the stop order, the 14th regame and the 15th regame are not won, and the stop appearance that becomes a black BAR single line or a black BAR double line does not appear. In addition, since the special replay 4 is not associated with the thirteenth replay or the fifteenth regame, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are aimed at the “black BAR” symbol at the time of winning, Regardless of the stopping order, the 13th replay and the 15th replay are not won, and the black BAR double tempered out or the black BAR double aligned stop appearance does not appear. Similarly, since the special replay 5 is not associated with the thirteenth replay or the fourteenth replay, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped by aiming at the “black BAR” symbol when winning, Regardless of the stop order, the thirteenth regame and the fourteenth replay are not won, and the blackout of the black BAR double tempered or the black BAR single uniform does not appear.

  Here, in the slot machine 10, a game mode recommended for establishing a winning combination for each small role including a specific role will be described.

  Among the winning combinations that can be won in each game, strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, and weak watermelons are set as the small roles that cause so-called missing that cannot be won depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. . In more detail, as already explained, the strong cherry and the strong cherry overlaps 1 and 2 are those in which any of the 28th small role, the 32nd small role to the 35th small role can win, The 28th small role symbol, the 32nd small role symbol to the 35th small role symbol are the “cherry” symbol and the “second replay” symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed when the 20th “white bell” symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L from the 7th “red bell” symbol, Neither the 28 small role symbol, the 32nd small role symbol to the 35th small role symbol, the “cherry” symbol or the “second replay” symbol can be stopped on the active line. For this reason, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a strong cherry role is missed.

  In addition, the weak cherry is a role in which any one of the 27th small role, the 32nd small role to the 35th small role can be won, and the 27th small role symbol, the 32nd small role symbol to the second reel about the left reel 32L. The 35 small role symbols are a “cherry” symbol and a “second replay” symbol. Also in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the 20th “white bell” symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L from the seventh “red bell” symbol, Any of the “cherry” symbol and the “second replay” symbol as the 27th small role symbol, the 32nd small role symbol to the 35th small role symbol cannot be stopped on the active line. For this reason, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a weak cherry combination is missed.

  Strong watermelon and strong watermelon overlap 1 and 2 are roles in which either the 30th small role or the 41st small role can win, and the 30th small role symbol and the 41st small role symbol for the left reel 32L are: “Watermelon” design. In this case, in the 3-bet game, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed when the third “white bell” symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L from the ninth “red 7” symbol, The small role symbol and the “watermelon” symbol which is the 41st small role symbol cannot be stopped on the active line. For this reason, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a strong watermelon role is missed.

  The weak watermelon is a role that can win either the 29th small role or the 41st small role, and the 29th small role symbol and the 41st small role symbol for the left reel 32L are “watermelon” symbols. Also in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the third “white bell” symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L from the ninth “red 7” symbol, The “watermelon” symbol, which is the 29th small role symbol and the 41st small role symbol, cannot be stopped on the active line. For this reason, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a weak watermelon role is missed.

  Then, when the left reel 32L is stopped while leaving the possibility of winning for any of the roles that can be missed, the 6th “second replay” symbol from the 4th “cherry” symbol to the left reel 32L It is necessary to stop the operation when it reaches the upper stage. In the following description, the operation mode of the left reel 32L is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause overshooting, and each operation mode in which the above overshooting occurs is a non-specific operation. Also referred to as a mode (second operation mode).

  Furthermore, in each game, a chance notification effect may be generated as an effect in a game that has a high possibility of winning a specific combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters “chance!”, And characters with surprise marks are displayed on the reels 32L, 32M, Each of them is displayed corresponding to 32R. In addition, in the chance notification effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “cuy” with an electronic sound) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  In the chance notification effect, although it is suggested that the current winning combination is one of the specific combinations, the specific combination is set so that it cannot be determined or is difficult to determine. In other words, when a chance notification effect is performed, the winning combination of this game is likely to be one of strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc., but either strong cherry or weak cherry It is impossible to determine whether there is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, or whether it is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the player can use the above-mentioned specific operation mode to prevent the left reel 32L from being lost even if any of the specific roles is won. The operation will be performed.

  Here, the occurrence rate of the chance notification effect varies depending on whether or not it is in the special RT state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (c), the chance notification effect is generated in 80% of the time when the specific role is won except in the special RT state, whereas in the special RT state, the specific notification is generated. A chance notification effect occurs at 5% of the winning times. This is due to the following reason. That is, in the present embodiment, the special RT state is provided mainly for the purpose of extending the expectation of winning the first BB or the second BB, but the first BB or the second BB winning is carried over. During carry-over, duplicate winning of the first BB and the second BB does not occur, and furthermore, execution of a lottery drawing for a new advantageous section is also restricted. In other words, even if a specific role is newly won in a game that is performed in a situation where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, the overlapping winning with the first BB or the second BB does not occur, and the advantageous section Since the winning lottery is not won, the specific role winning is basically not preferable for the player from the viewpoint of winning timing. Therefore, in the special RT state that brings a sense of expectation to the fact that it is being carried over, even if it is a specific role winning, the chance rate effect occurrence rate is made lower than the occurrence rate other than in the special RT state, so In order not to make it difficult to notice, or to create a flashy production, it has been devised to prevent the player from feeling reluctant.

  However, even if a specific role is won in the carry-over state, even if there is no expectation for winning a new bonus duplication or moving to an advantageous section, the loss of the specific role itself is from the standpoint of medal loss. It is not preferable for the player. Therefore, it is considered that the player operates the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode so that the player does not miss it, particularly during the special RT state, regardless of whether or not he / she is a specific combination. .

  As already explained, even if the special replays 3 to 5 are won in the special RT state, the 13th regame to the 15th regame prize will not be established unless the “black BAR” symbol is stopped. There will be no BAR double tempering off, black BAR singles or black BAR doubles. In other words, when the operation of the left reel 32L will be performed in the specific operation mode, these stop appearances do not appear.

  The special RT notification process in this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special RT notification process is a process (FIG. 99) performed in step S4515 in the push order notification process (FIG. 98) by the display control device 81.

  In this modification, it is determined in step S4701 whether or not the special replay 5 has been won. If it is elected, it is determined in step S4702 whether or not a special RT command with a super attack mode has been received with reference to the command storage area. If such a command is received, in step S4703, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that a black BAR eye-press notification effect is performed.

  In the black BAR press notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an image in which the hub character and the mongoose character are battling each other. In addition to the image of the battle between the hub and the mongoose, a display image for pushing the “black BAR” to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is also displayed. In addition, in the black BAR eye-pressing notification effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “aimed” in a male voice) is emitted from the speaker 64. In this case, for example, when the player makes a stop operation from the left reel 32L aiming at the “black BAR” symbol, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the “black BAR” symbol is placed on the upper stage of the left reel 32L, and the “white” symbol is placed on the middle stage. Since the “BAR” symbol and the “Black BAR” symbol stop at the bottom, there is a sense of expectation that stop appearances will appear, such as black BAR double alignment and black BAR single alignment.

  If the player performs a stop operation aiming at the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the black BAR eye-notifying effect in step S4703, in this case, the stop appearance is a black BAR double alignment. The 15th regame prize is established. On the other hand, if the special RT command with the super attack mode is not received in step S4702, the special RT notification process is terminated without generating the black BAR press notification effect. In this case, it is considered that the player performs the stop operation in the specific operation mode as described above in order to prevent the specific combination from being missed. As a result, even if the special replay 5 is won, the stop roll that becomes a black BAR double line is unlikely to appear, and the first replay and the ninth replay to the twelfth regame win are likely to be established.

  If it is determined in step S4701 that the special replay 5 is not won, it is determined in step S4704 whether the special replay 4 is won. If the special replay 4 is won, it is determined in step S4705 whether or not a special RT command with an attack mode has been received. If received, in step S4706, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the black BAR press notification effect is generated. In this case, when the player performs a stop operation aiming at the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the 14th re-game winning prize is established at the stop event where the black BAR singles are aligned. On the other hand, if a special RT command with an attack mode has not been received in step S4705, the special RT notification process is terminated without generating a black BAR press notification effect. In this case, it is considered that the player performs the stop operation in the specific operation mode as described above. As a result, even if the special replay 4 is won, the stop roll that is a black BAR single line is unlikely to appear, and the first replay and the ninth replay to the twelfth regame win are likely to be established.

  If it is determined in step S4704 that the special replay 4 is not won, it is determined in step S4707 whether the special replay 3 is won. If the special replay 3 is won, it is determined in step S4708 whether a special RT command with a challenge mode is received. If it has been received, notification lottery processing 1 is executed in step S4709. The notification lottery process 1 is substantially the same as step S4608 described above, and a lottery to win the notification with the first probability (80%) is performed. If no special RT command with a challenge mode has been received, it is determined in step S4710 whether a special RT command has been received. If the special RT command is received, the notice lottery process 2 is executed in step S4711, and if the special RT command is not received, the notice lottery process 3 is executed in step S4712. The notice lottery process 2 and the notice lottery process 3 are substantially the same as the processes in step S4608 and step S4609, and the notice lottery process 2 wins the notice with a second probability (20%) lower than the first probability, and the notice lottery. Process 3 is a lottery in which a notification is won with a third probability (5%) lower than the second probability.

  After executing the processing of step S4709, step S4711, or step S4712, it is determined whether or not the winning in the notification lottery processing is performed in step S4713. In the case of winning, in step S4714, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute a black BAR eye-press notification effect. In this case, when the player performs a stop operation aiming at the “black BAR” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the thirteenth regame prize is established at the stop point that is out of the black BAR double template. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4713 that the information lottery process has not been won, the special RT notification process is terminated without generating a black BAR target notification effect. In this case, it is considered that the player performs the stop operation in the specific operation mode as described above. As a result, even if the special replay 3 is won, a stop event that is out of the black BAR double temper is unlikely to appear, and the first replay or the ninth replay to the twelfth regame win is likely to be established.

  If it is determined in step S4707 that the special replay 3 is not won, the special RT notification process is terminated. That is, the black BAR target announcement effect does not occur during normal replay winning or other small role winning.

  By doing as described above, it is possible to make different the stopping appearance at the time of winning the special replay while not using the push order notification effect. Therefore, with respect to the advantageous section that changes the degree of advantage by pushing order notification such as a push order bell, the advantageous section in the carry-over state while more strictly guaranteeing the significance of restricting the lottery to the advantageous section in the carry-over state It is possible to realize the game performance for performing the notification.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, when a special combination is won in a special RT state, a predetermined notification release lottery is performed, and when a special replay is won in a state where the notification release lottery is won, a push order notification for aligning the “black BAR” symbols is performed. Produce a production. In this modification, a special RT state that can be won by the special replay 1 and the special replay 2 in the second embodiment is set, and the stop appearance may differ depending on the stop order.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the specific combination notification process in the present modification. As already described, the specific combination notification process is a process (FIG. 52) performed in step S1905 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 44) in the display control device 81, and is a process performed when the specific combination is won. is there.

  In the specific combination notification process in the present modification, the notification canceling process is performed in step S4801 before performing the process of setting the pseudo precursor mode (steps S4802 to S4810) as in the processes of steps S2501 to S2509.

  In the notification canceling process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 108A, first, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not the special RT state is in effect. If it is not in the special RT state, the notification canceling process is terminated as it is. If it is in the special RT state, it is determined in step S4902 whether or not the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag is set. If no winning flag is set, the notification canceling process is terminated as it is. If any winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S4903.

  In step S4903, the release lottery table in which the release rate corresponding to the specific combination is set is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182. In the release lottery table, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), for example, strong cherries are released with a probability of 40%, and weak cherries are released with a probability of 5%, which is lower than that of strong cherries. Also, strong watermelons will be elected with a probability of 80% higher than strong cherries, and weak watermelons will be elected with a probability of 20%.

  In step S4904, a release lottery process is performed based on the release lottery table acquired in step S4903. In step S4905, it is determined whether or not the release lottery has been won. If the cancellation lottery is not won, the notification cancellation process is terminated. If the release lottery is won, in step S4906, a process of setting a release flag in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 is performed, and then the notification release process is terminated.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing special RT notification processing in the present modification.

  In this modification, it is determined in step S5001 whether or not the release flag is set. If the release flag has not been set, processing for obtaining a notification table for the non-release state from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 is performed in step S5002. If the release flag is set, in step S5003, processing for acquiring a notification table for the release state from the various table storage areas 182a is performed. These notification tables show the winning probability of notification lottery for whether or not to notify the stop order of black BAR double alignment, black BAR single alignment, and black BAR double tempering when special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won. The notification table for the release state has a higher probability of winning the notification lottery than the notification table for the non-release state.

  After performing the process of step S5002 or step S5003, it is determined in step S5004 whether or not a special RT command with a super attack mode has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S5005, and the notification lottery process 1 is executed. The notification lottery process 1 is a lottery process for determining whether or not the stop order push order notification effect for black BAR double alignment is executed, and the lottery process is performed based on the notification table acquired in step S5002 or step S5003. Do. In this modification, in the notification lottery process 1 in the non-released state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 10%, and in the notification lottery process 1 in the released state, the notification lottery is performed with a probability of 80% higher than that in the non-released state. Win.

  In step S5006, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won based on the processing result in step S5005. If the notification lottery has not been won, the special RT notification processing is terminated. If the notification lottery is won, in step S5007, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to generate the stop order push notification effect of black BAR double alignment, and the special RT notification is performed. The process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5004, it is determined in step S5008 whether a special RT command with an attack mode has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S5009 to execute the notification lottery process 2. The notification lottery process 2 is a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a stop order push notification effect for black BAR singles, and the lottery process is performed based on the notification table acquired in step S5002 or step S5003. Do. In this modification, in the notification lottery process 2 in the non-released state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 10%, and in the notification lottery process 2 in the released state, the notification lottery is performed with a probability of 80% higher than that in the non-released state. Win.

  In step S5010, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won based on the processing result in step S5009. If the notification lottery has not been won, the special RT notification processing is terminated. If the information lottery is won, in step S5011, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to generate a push order notification effect in the stop order that results in a single black BAR uniform, and notification for special RT is performed. The process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5008, it is determined in step S5012 whether a special RT command with challenge mode has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S5013, and the notification lottery process 3 is executed. The notification lottery process 3 is a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the push order notification effect of the stop order that is out of the black BAR double temper, and based on the notification table acquired in step S5002 or step S5003, the lottery process I do. In this modification, in the notification lottery process 3 in the non-released state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 30%, and in the notification lottery process 3 in the released state, the notification lottery has a higher probability of 80% than in the non-released state. Win.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5012, it is determined in step S5014 whether a special RT command has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S5015, and the notification lottery process 4 is executed. If it has not been received, the process proceeds to step S5016 to execute the notification lottery process 5. The notice lottery process 4 and the notice lottery process 5 are also lottery processes for determining whether or not to execute the push order notice effect in the stop order that is out of the black BAR double template. The notice table acquired in step S5002 or step S5003 is used in the lottery process. The lottery process is performed based on this. In this modification, in the notification lottery process 4 in the non-released state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 10%, and in the notification lottery process 4 in the released state, the notification lottery is won with the same 10% probability as in the non-released state. To do. Further, in the notification lottery process 5 in the non-released state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 5%, and in the notification lottery process 5 in the released state, the notification lottery is won with the same probability of 5% as in the non-released state.

  After executing the process of step S5013, step S5015, or step S5016, the process proceeds to step S5017. In step S5017, it is determined whether or not the information lottery has been won based on the processing results of the notification lottery processes 3 to 5, and if the information lottery has not been won, the special RT notification process is terminated. If the notification lottery is won, in step S5018, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to generate a push order notification effect in the stop order that is out of the black BAR double template. The notification process is terminated.

  The state at the time of special replay winning in the special RT state of this modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  For example, it is assumed that a stop turn that becomes a weak watermelon role appears and the state shifts to the special RT state. In the example of FIG. 110, a case where a transition is made to a special RT state with a super attack mode is shown. As already described, in the special RT state, replay wins are frequently made.

  When a special combination such as a weak watermelon combination is won during the special RT state, for example, the notification canceling process (FIG. 108) is performed. Then, when the release lottery process of the notification release process is performed, the notification table acquired when the special replays 1 and 2 are subsequently won is different (step S5002, step S5003), and the release lottery is won. However, it becomes easy to win the notification lottery. When the special replay 1, 2 winning lottery notification (step S5005) is won, a push order notification effect of the stop order resulting in a double black BAR occurs, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have “ When the stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol, the 15th re-game winning prize is established at the stop event where the black BAR doubles.

  On the other hand, if a special role such as a weak watermelon role is not won in the special RT state, or if it is not won in the release lottery process even if the specific role is won, the special replay 1 and 2 will be informed lottery at the time of winning The probability of winning is reduced. As a result, when the special replays 1 and 2 are selected, the first replay prize is established at the stop turn that becomes a right-down replay.

  By doing as described above, gameability in the case where a specific combination is won during the special RT state is improved. As already described, in the situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set, no new bonus winning occurs, and no transfer lottery to the advantageous section is performed. For this reason, even though the specific combination is won, the benefits obtained can be reduced compared to the situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set. In that respect, as described above, if the configuration for performing the notification release lottery based on the specific role winning is made, there is a merit that a game for predicting the contents of the subsequent advantageous section is generated, and the bonus lottery and the advantage based on the specific role winning are generated It becomes possible to provide an alternative to the lottery.

  In particular, by allowing the appearance of a stop-out that suggests the contents of the advantageous section based on the specified role winning in the special RT state, it is as if the lottery to move to the advantageous section based on the specified role winning in the special RT state You can make the player think as if they were elected. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the lottery for the advantageous section is not performed in a situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set.

  Further, during the special RT state, even if the winning lottery based on the special role winning is not won, the notification lottery can be won. It is easy to make a judgment on whether to win or to win an advantageous section triggered by a specific role won after moving to a special RT state. It is possible to entertain.

  According to the configuration in which the contents of the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section can be notified based on the specified combination winning in the carryover state (in the special RT state) as in the above modification, based on the specified winning combination in the carryover state Thus, it is possible to realize a new gameability in which the contents of the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section that has already been executed are notified. That is, in the carry-over state, the execution of the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section based on the specific winning combination is restricted, so it can be said that the specific winning combination is not preferable for the player. In that respect, according to the above configuration, since the contents of the executed migration lottery are notified, it can be shown as if the migration lottery was performed based on the specific winning combination, and the transition is made during the carryover state. It will also be possible not to realize that the lottery will be restricted.

  As already described, in the winning game of the game result that becomes a trigger for the transition to the carryover state, the result of the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section is not necessarily notified, and the notification may be limited. Specifically, even if the winning mode is won, the fact that the winning mode has been won is notified through the warning mode. Depending on the number of games set in the warning mode, the result of the lottery for the advantageous section Is notified in a game after the game in which the transition lottery is performed. Therefore, as described above, if a lottery for a transition to an advantageous section is performed with an overlapping role with a bonus that triggered the carryover state, the contents of the lottery will remain unreported in the carryover state. There is a high possibility. With such a configuration, it is difficult to cause an event that there is no unreported content in the configuration in which the unreported content can be notified in response to the specific role winning as described above.

  In addition, in the carry-over state, instead of notifying the unreported content in the specified role winning game, the non-notified content is notified in a game after the specified role winning game. The notification content can be notified in more various games.

  And, in the game after the specific role winning game, the configuration in which the unrecognized content is notified in the game that has been won by the special replay has left room for not being notified if the special replay winning is not achieved. Even if the transition lottery is not won, the expectation can be maintained.

  On the other hand, the unreported content is notified by whether or not the section indicator is lit when the carryover state ends, that is, when a bonus is won. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that unreported content is not reported endlessly.

<Modification 3>
In the present modification, a plurality of special RT states are set, and the type of special replay to be won differs depending on each special RT state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state are set as the special RT state, and the types of special replays to be won in each RT state are different. In the 5th RT state, a normal replay consisting of the first replay and a special replay 5 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the twelfth replay and the fifteenth replay are set as replays that can be won. Yes. The winning probability of each replay is about one-third for normal replay, about one-half for 21.8 for special replay, and about one-fourth for the total replay probability.

  In the 6th RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay and the special replay 4 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the twelfth replay and the fourteenth replay are set as replays that can be won. Yes. The winning probability of each replay is about 5.3 times that of normal replay, about 21.8 times of special replay 4, and about 4.3 times of the total replay probability.

  In the seventh RT state, a normal replay consisting of the first replay and a special replay 3 consisting of the first replay and the ninth replay to the thirteenth replay are set as replays that can be won. The winning probability of each replay is about one-third for normal replay, about one-for-two for special replay 3, and about one-fourth for the total replay probability.

  In the 8th RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay is set as a replay that can be won, and the special replays 3 to 5 are not won. Since the normal replay is about 4.3 times, the total replay probability is about 4.3 times.

  In this modification, different RT states are set at the time of transition to the special RT state. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing special RT state processing in the present modification.

  In step S5101, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If it is in the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it is determined in step S5102 whether the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. If any BB winning flag is set, it is determined in step S5103 whether the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, it is determined in step S5104 whether the specialized zone winning flag is set.

  When the special zone winning flag is set and the lottery for shifting to the super attack mode is selected, processing for setting the special RT command with the super attack mode as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S5105. Do. In step S5106, the current RT setting flag is stored in a predetermined storage area, and in step S5107, the current RT setting flag is cleared. Thereafter, in step S5108, a process for setting a fifth RT setting flag is performed, and then the special RT state process is terminated. Note that the processing in steps S5106 to S5108 is basically the same as the processing in steps S3914 to S3916, although there is a difference in the type of RT setting flag to be set. In the following description, details of each processing will be described. Omitted.

  With the above processing, the gaming state shifts to the fifth RT state in the special RT state. In other words, if the current special RT state is the special RT state based on the first BB winning and the lottery for shifting to the super attack mode is won, the state shifts to the fifth RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, an RT state in which special replay 5 can be established is established, and if a stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol, a black BAR double-match replay winning will be established.

  If it is determined in step S5104 that the super attack mode winning flag is not set, a special RT command with an attack mode is set as an output target in step S5109, and then the sixth RT state is set in steps S5110 to S5112. After performing the process for shifting, the special RT state process is terminated.

  With the above processing, the gaming state shifts to the sixth RT state in the special RT state. In other words, if the current special RT state is the special RT state based on the first BB winning and the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the state shifts to the sixth RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, an RT state in which the special replay 4 can be established is achieved, and if the stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol, the replay winning of the black BAR single match will be established.

  If it is determined in step S5103 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S5113 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, a special RT command with challenge mode is set as an output target in step S5114. Then, after performing the process for shifting to the seventh RT state in steps S5115 to S5117, the special RT state process is terminated.

  With the above processing, the gaming state shifts to the seventh RT state in the special RT state. That is, when the current special RT state is a special RT state based on the first BB winning and the lottery for entering the challenge mode is won, the state shifts to the seventh RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the RT state where the special replay 3 can be established is reached, and if the stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol, a replay winning out of the black BAR temper will be established.

  If it is determined in step S5113 that the challenge mode win flag is not set, a special RT command is set as an output target in step S5118. Thereafter, in step S5119 to step S5121, processing for shifting to the eighth RT state is performed, and then the special RT state processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S5102 that neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S5122. The processing in steps S5122 to S5125 is the same as the processing in steps S3910 to S3913. After the output setting of the fake special RT command is performed in step S5125, processing for shifting to the eighth RT state is performed in steps S5126 to S5128, and then the special RT state processing is terminated.

  By the above process, the gaming state shifts to the eighth RT state in the special RT state. In other words, if the current special RT state is a special RT state based on the first BB or the second BB win and is not won in the lottery for transition to the super attack mode, the attack mode, or the challenge mode, or the first BB or the second BB If neither the attack mode nor the attack mode is won, the state shifts to the 8th RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, normal replays are frequently established, and special replays 3 to 5 are not achieved, and even if a stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol, the black BAR double alignment or black There will be no replay prizes for BAR singles and black BAR double tempers.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5101, the process proceeds to step S5129. Since the process of step S5129-step S5135 is the same as the process of said step S3917-step S3923, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Incidentally, in the special RT notification process in the present embodiment, a black BAR press notification effect is generated when a special replay is won regardless of the contents of the advantageous section. In other words, if the RT state is the fifth RT state, the black BAR double-notification effect appears by operating in accordance with the black BAR eye-notification effect, and if it is the sixth RT state, the black BAR eye-notification effect is produced. If the operation is performed in accordance with, a stop event that becomes a black BAR single appearance appears, and if it is in the seventh RT state, a stop event that causes a black BAR double tempering failure appears by operating according to the black BAR press notification effect. To do. Since the special replay is not won in the 8th RT state, the black BAR eye-press notification effect does not occur.

  By doing as described above, the winning probability of special replays 3 to 5 is different in each RT state, so there is no need to perform a lottery or the like regarding the notification at the time of special replay winning, and the advantageous section from the stop appearance of various black BARs A game that predicts the content of the game can be performed.

  Note that, in the configuration in which the transitioned RT state differs according to the contents of the advantageous section as in the above modification, the game result may be set in association with the RT state and the contents of the advantageous section. Specifically, for example, the strong cherry overlap 1 (IV = 32) can be won in the super attack mode, but is not won in the attack mode or the challenge mode, and the special RT that moves based on the strong cherry overlap 1 is used. The state is the fifth RT state. Although the weak cherry overlap 1 (IV = 34) can be won in the attack mode, it is not won in the super attack mode or the challenge mode, and the special RT state that shifts based on the weak cherry overlap 1 is changed to the sixth RT. State. Strong watermelon duplication 1 (IV = 36) and weak watermelon duplication 1 (IV = 38) can be won in the challenge mode, but do not win in the super attack mode and attack mode, and these strong watermelon duplication 1 and weak watermelon duplication The special RT state that shifts based on 1 is the seventh RT state. In other overlapping roles (chance A duplication 1 with IV = 40, chance B duplication 1 with IV = 42, middle bell duplication 1 with IV = 44), do not win any of the super attack mode, attack mode, or challenge mode. Then, the special RT state that shifts based on these overlapping roles is set as the eighth RT state. By doing in this way, the game result used as the transition opportunity to each RT state is matched, and the transparency of a game is ensured.

  And in each RT state, depending on whether you have won the lottery transition to super attack mode, attack mode, challenge mode or not, by changing the notification lottery probability at the time of special replay winning, The pleasure of predicting whether or not the winner has been won can be secured.

  In the configuration in which the RT state and the game result are associated with each other as described above, the content of the advantageous section that can be won in the transition lottery may be changed even if the number of bonuses is increased. For example, a third BB and a fourth BB are provided in addition to the first BB and the second BB. Then, in the strong cherry overlap A, which is the winning combination of the first BB and the strong cherry, the transition RT state is set to the fifth RT state, assuming that only the super attack mode can be won. On the other hand, in the strong cherry overlap B, which is a winning combination of the third BB and the strong cherry, the transition RT state is set to the sixth RT state, assuming that only the attack mode can be won. Then, in the strong cherry overlap C, which is the winning combination of the fourth BB and the strong cherry, the transition RT state is set to the seventh RT state, assuming that only the challenge mode can be won. By doing in this way, it is not possible to grasp the contents of the advantageous section that can be transferred from the stoppage of the specific combination that has become the trigger for the transition to the RT state (stopout that becomes a strong cherry winning in the above example) It becomes possible to entertain more the game which predicts the contents of the advantageous section from the stop appearance at the time of subsequent special replay winning.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, as in the above modified example 3, the special RT state to be shifted is changed according to the contents of the advantageous section, and the winning probability of a predetermined special replay in each special RT state is varied.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, in the fifth RT state, which is the special RT state elected in the super attack mode, the normal replay consisting of the first replay, the first replay, the ninth replay, and so on. Special replays 5 consisting of the twelfth regame and the fifteenth regame are set as replays that can be won. The winning probability of each replay is about one-third for normal replay, about one-half for 21.8 for special replay, and about one-fourth for the total replay probability.

  In the sixth RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay and the special replay 5 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the twelfth replay and the fifteenth replay are set as replays that can be won. The type of replay to win is the same as in the fifth RT state. However, the winning probability of each replay is different, the normal replay is about 1 / 5.0, and the winning probability is higher than that of the fifth RT state, and the special replay 5 is about 1 / 2.8. And the winning probability lower than that in the fifth RT state is set.

  The 7th RT state is also set as a replay in which a normal replay consisting of the first replay and a special replay 5 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the twelfth replay and the fifteenth replay can be won. The type of replay to be won is the same as in the fifth RT state and the sixth RT state. However, the winning probability of each replay is different, the normal replay is about one-sixth, which is a higher winning probability than that of the fifth RT state and the sixth RT state, and the special replay 5 is about 65. A winning probability that is 1/5 and lower than that of the fifth RT state or the sixth RT state is set.

  In the 8th RT state, a normal replay consisting of the first replay is set as a replay that can be won, and each special replay 5 is not won. Since the normal replay is about 4.3 times, the total replay probability is about 4.3 times.

  Incidentally, in the special RT notification process in the present embodiment, the black BAR eye-press notification effect is generated when the special replay 5 is won regardless of the contents of the advantageous section. In other words, regardless of the type of RT state, a stop appearance that becomes a black BAR double line-up appears based on the special replay 5 winning.

  As described above, by changing the type of the special RT state to be shifted according to the contents of the advantageous section, and by making the winning probability of the special replay 5 different depending on the type of the special RT state, the advantageous section according to the winning probability of the special replay 5 A game such as predicting the contents of the game can be performed. Therefore, it is not necessary to vary the winning probability of the lottery process for determining whether or not to generate the black BAR eye-notifying effect at the time of special replay 5 winning, and the configuration can be simplified. In addition, if the above is performed, a black BAR double-stamped stop appearance such as a black BAR double line does not appear even if the “black BAR” symbol is pressed in a situation where the black BAR target notification effect has not occurred. It is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling that the stop appearance such as black BAR double alignment sometimes appears.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, a configuration example in which the transition to the special RT state is performed by re-game winning will be described.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a winning mode and a privilege to be granted in the present modification.

  In this modification, while setting a replay as a privilege given at the time of winning each winning combination (27th small role to 38th small role) in each of the above embodiments and modifications, the replaying At the same time, it is configured to shift to the fourth RT state, that is, the special RT state. That is, for example, when a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon or the like is won and the winning combination is established, a re-game is given and the state shifts to the fourth RT state. In addition, for the duplicate roles (strong cherry overlap 1, 2 and strong watermelon overlap 1, 2, etc.) of each of these combinations and bonuses, if the duplicate combination is won, a corresponding winning combination is established and a replay is given. And shift to the fourth RT state.

  It should be noted that regarding the re-game where a winning is established at the time of the stoppage of the strong cherry or the like, it may be configured so as not to be missed, for example, by overlapping with the first re-game. In other words, when it is not possible to stop a stop event such as a strong cherry, it is preferable that a winning is established at another stop event, a re-game is given, and the state shifts to the fourth RT state.

  In this modification, each combination to be given the replay and the fourth RT state is designated as a specific combination (hereinafter also referred to as a specific replay), and the transition of the advantageous section is based on the specific replay winning. Make a lottery. More specifically, for example, in step S701 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), when these specific replays are won, an affirmative determination is made and the first specific combination process to the third specific combination process are performed. To do.

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing RT state processing in the present modification.

  In step S5201, it is determined whether or not the transfer outcome has stopped. If it has stopped, it is determined in step S5202 whether or not either the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. To do. That is, the process of step S5202 mainly shows a case where the transition to the fourth RT state is made based on the result of overlapping winning with the first BB and the second BB among the results to which the replay is given. ing. If the determination in step S5202 is affirmative, the RT state process is terminated as it is. That is, in this case, the transition to the RT state is not performed even if the stop event stops.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5202, it is determined in step S5203 whether or not it is a normal gaming state, and if it is a normal gaming state, a process of setting the first RT state in step S5204 is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S5205, it is determined in step S5205 whether or not a second regame prize has been established. After the RT setting flag is cleared in S5206, processing for setting the first RT state is performed in Step S5204. The processes in steps S5204 to S5206 are the same as the processes in steps S503 to S505.

  If the second regame winning is not established in step S5205, the RT state corresponding to the winning regame is set in steps S5207 to S5212, similar to the processing in steps S506 to S511. Perform the process.

  If it is determined in step S5210 that the fourth regame prize or the fifth regame prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S5213. In step S5213, it is determined whether a specific re-game winning is established. If the winning is not established, the RT state process is terminated as it is. If the winning is established, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S5214, the fourth RT setting flag is set in step S5215, and the gaming state is shifted to the fourth RT state. Exit. In this modification as well, the RT state before the transition may be stored when the transition to the fourth RT state is performed.

  FIG. 116 shows special RT state processing in this modification.

  In the special RT state process of this modification, since the transition process to the fourth RT state is performed in the RT state process as described above, the transition process to the fourth RT state in the special RT state process is performed. Absent. Specifically, in steps S5301 to S5309, processing for setting various special RT commands based on a specific replay winning that is a duplicate winning with the first BB and the second BB is performed in the same manner as in steps S3901 to S3909. After that, the special RT state process is terminated without performing the transition process to the fourth RT state in steps S3914 to S3916.

  If it is determined in step S5302 that the winning combination with the first BB or the second BB is not the same, in step S5310, it is determined whether or not it is a specific replay winning. On condition that the attack mode or the challenge mode is not won (step S5311: NO), the process for setting the fake special RT command is performed in step S5312, and then the special RT state process is terminated.

  In this modification, if it is determined in step S5301 that the game state is not the normal game state or the first RT state, the special RT process is not performed without performing the process for ending the fourth RT state (steps S3917 to S3923). End RT state processing.

  With the above-described configuration, the transition condition to the special RT state can be matched with the condition in the case where various replay winnings that are the transition conditions to other RT states are established.

  In the above configuration, the special RT state that has been transferred without passing through the first BB or the second BB winning is configured to be terminated on the condition that the transfer outcome stops, so that the number of continuous games in the special RT state is reduced. Diversified games to guess the subsequent advantage (whether or not BB wins or wins an advantageous section) during the special RT state until bells are lost (until the transition is stopped) Can be entertained.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the special replay in the special RT state is used to indicate that not only the advantageous section but also the first BB and the second BB are won. In the present embodiment, as in Modification 5 in the second embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, strong cherry overlap 1, 2, Weak Cherry Duplication 1, 2, Strong Watermelon Duplication 1, 2, Weak Watermelon Duplication 1, 2, Chance A Duplication 1, 2, Chance B Duplication 1, 2, Middle Bell Duplication 1, 2 It is assumed that the fourth RT state is given at the same time.

  FIG. 117 shows a part of the success / failure lottery table in the special RT state in the present embodiment. As described above, during the special RT state, the winning probability of the replay does not change and the winning probability of the replay changes. FIG. 117 shows the winning combination and the winning probability only for the replay in which the winning probability changes. Even in this embodiment, during the special RT state, the normal replay with the index value IV = 1 is mainly won, and in rare cases, the special replay 6 to the special replay 11 are won. The special replay 6 to the special replay 11 are duplicate roles of any of the 16th replay to the 24th replay.

  As shown in FIG. 118, each of the 16th to 24th regames is given a regame as a privilege, but the stoppage is different, and in particular, in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, “black” The number of stops of the “BAR” symbol is different. In the following description, the winning mode is explained on the premise that the right-down line L4 is set as the active line in the 3-bet game.

  In the sixteenth replay, the “black BAR” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “first replay” symbol or the “second replay” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red bell” symbol or the “white bell” symbol on the right reel 32R A winning mode is established in which winning is achieved by stopping on the active line. In the 17th regame, the “black BAR” design on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” design or “white bell” design on the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” design or “black BAR” design on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. A winning mode in which winning is established by stopping is set. In the 16th replay and the 17th regame, even if each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is operated aiming at the “black BAR” symbol, the “black BAR” symbol is arranged in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Is a winning mode that does not stop.

  In the 18th replay, the “white BAR” design of the left reel 32L, the “first replay” design or “second replay” design of the middle reel 32M, the “red bell” design or the “white bell” design of the right reel 32R A winning mode is established in which winning is achieved by stopping on the active line. In the 19th re-game, the “Black BAR” design of the left reel 32L, the “Black BAR” design of the middle reel 32M, the “Red Bell” design or the “White Bell” design of the right reel 32R is stopped by the active line. A winning mode in which is established is set. In the twentieth replay, the “black BAR” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “first replay” symbol or the “second replay” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line. The winning mode in which winning is established is set. In these 18th to 20th regames, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are operated with the aim of the “black BAR” symbol, the middle stage of any one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R This is a winning mode in which one “black BAR” symbol stops.

  In the 21st re-game, the “white BAR” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “black BAR” symbol on the middle reel 32M, the “red bell” symbol on the right reel 32R, or the “white bell” symbol stops at the active line. A winning mode in which is established is set. In the 22nd regame, the “white BAR” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “first replay” symbol or the “second replay” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line. The winning mode in which winning is established is set. The 23rd replay has a winning mode in which a winning is established when the “black BAR” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “black BAR” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the effective line. Is set. In any of these 21st to 23rd replays, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are operated with the aim of the “black BAR” symbol, the middle stage of any one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R This is a winning mode in which two “Black BAR” symbols are stopped.

  The 24th replay has a winning mode in which a winning is established when the “white BAR” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “black BAR” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the effective line. Is set. In the winning mode of the 24th replay, when the stop operation is aimed at the “black BAR” symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the “black BAR” symbols are aligned and stopped at the middle stage of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The number of stops in the “black BAR” symbol in the middle row is a winning mode in which the number is 3.

  The special replay 6 to the special replay 11 are push orders that have different winning combinations depending on the stop order. However, even if any winning combination is awarded, the privilege granted is a replay, and the player's advantage is not different. That is, the special replay 6 to the special replay 11 are roles in which the degree of advantage does not change, although the stop-out result in which a winning is established differs depending on the stop order.

  FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning mode established.

  The special replay 6 is an overlapping role of the 16th regame, the 18th regame, and the 20th regame. If the special replay 6 is won and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the first stop order of “left” → “middle” → “right”, the 16th replay or the 18th replay In this case, when the stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol in the middle stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the 18th regame winning of the 16th regame and the 18th regame is established. The “black BAR” symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L. When stopping in the second stop order of “left” → “right” → “middle”, the 16th re-game winning prize is established. In this case, even if the stop operation is aimed at the “black BAR” symbol in the middle stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the “black BAR” symbol does not stop in the middle stage in any reel. When stopped in the third stop sequence of “middle” → “left” → “right”, the 16th regame or the 19th regame win is established. In this case, “black” is placed in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. When the stop operation is aimed at the “BAR” symbol, a nineteenth re-game winning is established among the sixteenth re-game and the nineteenth re-game, and the “black BAR” symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. When stopped in the fourth stop order of “middle” → “right” → “left”, the 16th re-game win is established, and the “black BAR” symbol does not stop in the middle of any reel. When stopped in the fifth stop order of “right” → “left” → “middle”, the 16th regame or the 20th regame win is established. In this case, “black” is placed in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the “BAR” symbol, the 20th regame winning is established among the 16th regame and the 20th regame, and the “black BAR” symbol is stopped in the middle of the right reel 32R. When stopped in the sixth stop order of “right” → “middle” → “left”, the 16th re-game winning is established, and the “black BAR” symbol is not stopped in the middle of any reel. In addition, even if the stop operation is aimed at the “black BAR” symbol in the middle stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with respect to the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order, the operation is “black BAR” in the middle stage. In any case where the symbol cannot be stopped, the 16th re-game winning prize is established.

  The special replay 7 is an overlapping role of the 17th replay to the 20th replay. As in the case of the special replay 6, when the stop operation is aimed at the “black BAR” symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order In any case, the 17th re-game winning is established, and the “black BAR” symbol does not stop in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, in the second stop order, the 18th re-game winning is established, and the “black BAR” symbol stops in the middle stage of the left reel 32L. In the fourth stop order, the 19th re-game win is established, and the “black BAR” symbol stops in the middle of the middle reel 32M. And if it is the 6th stop order, the 20th re-game winning prize will be established, and the “black BAR” symbol will stop in the middle of the right reel 32R. Regarding the second stop order, the fourth stop order, and the sixth stop order, even if the stop operation is aimed at the “black BAR” symbol in the middle stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is “black BAR” symbol in the middle stage. If the timing cannot be stopped, the 17th re-game winning is established.

  The special replay 8 is an overlapping role of the 16th replay and the 18th replay to the 22nd replay. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped with the aim of the “black BAR” symbol, the 16th re-game prize is awarded in any of the second stop order, the fourth stop order, and the sixth stop order. The “black BAR” symbol does not stop in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, in the first stop order or the third stop order, the 21st re-game winning is established, and the “black BAR” symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. Then, in the fifth stop order, the 22nd re-game win is established, and the “black BAR” symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R. Regarding the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order, even if the stop operation is aimed at the “black BAR” symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is “black BAR” symbol in the middle If it is the timing that cannot be stopped, the 16th re-game prize and the 18th re-game prize will be established.

  The special replay 9 is an overlapping role of the 17th regame, the 18th regame to the 20th regame, the 22nd regame, and the 23rd regame. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped with the aim of the “black BAR” symbol, if the first stop order, the third stop order, or the fifth stop order is selected, the 17th regame prize is awarded. The “black BAR” symbol does not stop in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, in the second stop order, the 22nd re-game winning is established, and the “black BAR” symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R. And if it is the 4th stop order or the 6th stop order, the 23rd re-game winning a prize will be established, and the “black BAR” symbol will stop at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. Regarding the twelfth stop order, the fourth stop order, and the sixth stop order, even if the stop operation is aimed at the “black BAR” symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is “black BAR” symbol in the middle If it is the timing that cannot be stopped, the 17th regame prize to the 20th regame prize are established.

  The special replay 10 is a duplication of the 16th regame, the 18th regame to the 20th regame, and the 24th regame. Then, in any of the second stop order, the fourth stop order, and the sixth stop order, the 16th re-game winning prize is established, and the “black BAR” symbol is stopped in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. do not do. In addition, in any of the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order, the 24th re-game winning prize is established, and “black BAR” symbols are aligned and stopped in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. . Regarding the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order, even if the stop operation is aimed at the “black BAR” symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is “black BAR” symbol in the middle If it is the timing that cannot be stopped, the 16th regame prize and the 18th regame prize to the 22nd regame prize are established.

  The special replay 11 is an overlapping role of the 17th regame, the 18th regame to the 20th regame, and the 22nd regame to the 24th regame. In any of the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order, the 17th re-game winning is established, and the “black BAR” symbol is stopped in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. do not do. In addition, in any of the second stop order, the fourth stop order, and the sixth stop order, the 24th re-game winning prize is established, and “black BAR” symbols are aligned and stopped in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. . Regarding the second stop order, the fourth stop order, and the sixth stop order, even if the stop operation is aimed at the “black BAR” symbol in the middle stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is “black BAR” symbol in the middle stage. If the timing cannot be stopped, the 17th regame prize, the 20th regame prize, the 22nd regame prize, and the 23rd regame prize are established.

  As described above, various special RT commands are output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 based on the specific winning combination (BB winning or BB non-winning). As already described, when receiving a command from the main control device 101, the display control device 81 performs processing such as storing the received command in a predetermined area in the command storage processing.

  Here, the special RT command reception processing that is activated when the various special RT commands are received in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the special RT command reception process, a process for setting an effect pattern in the current special RT state is performed according to the type of the received command.

  Specifically, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a special RT command with a super attack mode. If it is a special RT command with a super attack mode, in step S5402, the notification scenario table stored in the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 is referred to, and the notification scenario A is selected as an effect pattern in the current special RT state. After performing the setting process, the special RT command reception process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 121, in the notification scenario table in the present embodiment, the winning probability of the black BAR stop push order notification effect lottery according to the value of the black BAR stop counter is set to be different depending on the type of the notification scenario. ing. The black BAR stop counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to know the number of times that the “black BAR” symbol has stopped in any one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R during this special RT state. It is provided in the counter area 183b. Further, the push order notification effect lottery for stopping the black BAR is executed when any special replay is won. For example, in the notification scenario A, if the black BAR stop counter is 0, the push order notification lottery is won with a probability of 80%, and if the black BAR stop counter is 5, the push order notification lottery is performed with a probability of 30%. Win.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5401, it is determined in step S5403 whether or not the command received this time is a special RT command with an attack mode. If it is a special RT command with an attack mode, in step S5404, the notification scenario B is set from the notification scenario table as an effect pattern in the current special RT state. Thereafter, in step S5405, 5 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter in the current effect pattern, and then the special RT command reception process is terminated.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 121, in each notification scenario, when the black BAR stop counter reaches a predetermined value or more, the upper limit value is determined so that the push order notification effect lottery is not won. For example, in the notification scenario B that is set when the special RT command with the attack mode is received, a black BAR stop counter value of 0 to 4 can win the push order notification effect lottery, but the counter value is 5 Then, the push order notification effect lottery will not be won.

  In the present embodiment, in the special RT state, the subsequent game content is suggested by the number of “black BAR” symbols stopped in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. For example, when the number of stops of “black BAR” symbols in the special RT state becomes three or more in total, it is determined that the transition to the first BB or second BB bonus state is performed thereafter. In addition, when the number of stops of the “black BAR” symbol in the special RT state becomes four or more in total, it is determined that the mode further shifts to the challenge mode after the first BB or second BB bonus state. Then, when the number of stops for the “Black BAR” symbol is 5 or more, it is determined that a transition to the attack mode is made after the bonus state of the first BB or the second BB, and when the number of stops is 6 or more, the bonus state Later, it is determined that the mode will further shift to the super attack mode.

  That is, the more the “black BAR” symbol stops in the middle stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R during the special RT state, the easier it is to shift to a state advantageous to the player after the special RT state. Therefore, as a player, it is possible to estimate the subsequent state from the number of stops of the “black BAR” symbol.

  Further, during the special RT state, a state effect in which the display on the auxiliary display unit 65 corresponds to the special RT state is performed. The state effect is set to change depending on the number of stops of the “black BAR” symbol. Specifically, as the cumulative number of stops for the “black BAR” symbol increases from 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6, the background color of the state effect is white → blue → yellow → green → red → Change from gold to rainbow. In other words, by stopping the “black BAR” symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the background color of the state effect indicating the special RT state changes, and the state can be shifted to an advantageous state after the special RT state. Be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the “black BAR” symbol has been stopped in the middle stage during the special RT state, and that it has shifted to an advantageous state. Is significantly improved.

  Returning to the description of the special RT command reception process (FIG. 120), if a negative determination is made in step S5403, it is determined in step S5406 whether or not the command received this time is a special RT command with a challenge mode. If it is a special RT command with a challenge mode, in step S5407, the notification scenario C is set as an effect pattern in the current special RT state from the notification scenario table. Thereafter, in step S5408, 4 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter in the current effect pattern, and then the special RT command reception process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5406, it is determined in step S5409 whether the command received this time is a special RT command. If it is a special RT command, in step S5410, processing for setting a notification scenario D as an effect pattern in the current special RT state is performed from the notification scenario table. Thereafter, in step S5411, 3 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter in the current effect pattern, and then the special RT command reception process is terminated.

  The case where a negative determination is made in step S5409 means that the command received this time is a fake special RT command. As already described, the fake special RT command is a case where a special combination that is not a duplicate of the first BB or the second BB is won and any of challenge mode, attack mode, and super attack mode is triggered by the specific combination This command is output from the main control device 101 when the transition is not won. When the fake special RT command is output / received, the state shifts to a special RT state that continues until the transition point stops. As described in the second embodiment, the transition to the normal RT state or the first RT state ends when the transition event stops and the special RT state ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5409, a notification scenario lottery process is executed in step S5412. In the notification scenario lottery process, it is determined by lottery which of notification scenario E to notification scenario G is set as an effect pattern in the current special RT state from the notification scenario table. The notification scenario E to the notification scenario G are set so that the winning probability of the push notification effect lottery varies depending on the value of the black BAR stop counter. For example, when the value of the black BAR stop counter is 0, the winning probability of the push order notification effect lottery is 80% in the notification scenario E, 60% in the notification scenario F, and 50% in the notification scenario G. . Which one of the notification scenario E to the notification scenario G is set depends on the type of the specific combination triggered by the fake special RT command. For example, the notification scenario E has a high probability of winning when a fake special RT command is output / received with strong cherry or strong watermelon as a specific role, and the notification scenario F has a weak cherry or weak watermelon as a specific role. As described above, the probability of winning when the fake special RT command is output / received is high, and the notification scenario G has a high probability of winning when the fake special RT command is output / received when triggered by another specific role.

  After the notification scenario lottery process is performed in step S5412, a notification scenario is set in accordance with the lottery result in step S5413. In step S5414, 2 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter in the present production pattern, and then the special RT command reception process is terminated.

  Next, the special RT notification process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the special RT notification process is a process performed in step S4515 of the push order notification process (FIG. 97) in the display control device 81 when the special replay is won.

  In step S5501, processing for grasping the notification scenario set in the special RT command reception processing is performed. In step S5502, a process for grasping the value of the current black BAR stop counter is performed. In a succeeding step S5503, processing for grasping the type of special replay of the current game is performed. That is, it is determined which of the special replays 6-11.

  In step S5504, it is determined whether or not there is an empty black BAR stop counter from the relationship between the upper limit set in the special RT command reception process and the current special replay. That is, for example, when the current black BAR stop counter value is 2 and the upper limit value is set as 3 (when the notification scenario D is set), the current special replay shows “ In the case of the special replay 6 or the special replay 7 in which only one “black BAR” symbol can be stopped, more specifically, “black BAR” in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in this game. Even if the symbol is stopped, if there is no contradiction in relation to the notification content (the content of the state after the special RT state), it is determined that there is an empty value in the black BAR stop counter. On the other hand, even when the current black BAR stop counter value is 2 and the upper limit value is set to 3 (when the notification scenario D is set), as the current special replay, “black” In the case of the special replay 8 to the special replay 11 in which two or more “BAR” symbols can be stopped, more specifically, the “black BAR” symbol is placed in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in this game. Is stopped, it is determined that there is no space in the black BAR stop counter when there is a contradiction in relation to the notification content (the content of the state after the special RT state). Even if the current black BAR stop counter value is 2, if the upper limit is set to 2 (when notification scenario E to notification scenario G are set), special replay Regardless of the type, it is determined that there is no space in the black BAR stop counter.

  If it is determined in step S5504 that the black BAR stop counter value is empty, a notification lottery process is executed in step S5505. Specifically, the winning probability of the notification lottery is grasped from the current notification scenario and the black BAR stop counter, and a push order notification lottery is performed using a lottery counter or the like. In step S5506, the result of the lottery process in step S5505 is determined. If it is determined that the result is a winning result, in step S5507, the push order for stopping the black BAR is used as the current push order notification effect. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the notification effect is performed. Specifically, for example, if the current special replay is the special replay 6, as shown in FIG. 119, the pressing order of any of the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order is notified. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled. Further, for example, if the current special replay is the special replay 11, as shown in FIG. 119, the auxiliary display is made so as to notify the pressing order of any of the second stop order, the fourth stop order, and the sixth stop order. The unit 65 and the like are controlled. Which push order is to be notified may be determined randomly by lottery or the like. In step S5508, a notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the special RT notification processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S5504 that the black BAR stop counter is not empty, or if it is determined in step S5506 that it is not won in the notification lottery even if there is an empty space, in step S5509, the current push order As the notification effect, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the push order notification effect for black BAR non-stop is performed. Specifically, for example, if the current special replay is the special replay 6, as shown in FIG. 119, the pressing order of any one of the second stop order, the fourth stop order, and the sixth stop order is notified. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled. Further, for example, if the current special replay is the special replay 11, as shown in FIG. 119, the auxiliary display is performed so as to notify the pressing order of any of the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order. The unit 65 and the like are controlled. Which push order is to be notified may be determined randomly by lottery or the like. Thereafter, the special RT notification process is terminated.

  Next, the special replay winning process performed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 when the special replay is won will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special replay winning time process is performed as one of the all-stop effect setting process (step S1710) in the effect setting process (FIG. 42).

  First, in step S5601, it is determined whether or not the “black BAR” symbol is stopped in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from the stoppage of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. If it has stopped, it is determined in step S5602 whether the notification flag is set. If the “black BAR” symbol stops at the middle level in the situation where the notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S5603, and the number of “black BAR” symbols stopped at the middle level is determined. In step S5604, the black BAR stop counter is added with the number obtained in step S5603. For example, if one “black BAR” symbol is stopped in the middle row, the black BAR stop counter is incremented by one, and three “black BAR” symbols are stopped in the middle row, so that it is a stop event that matches the middle black BAR. If this is the case, add 3 to the black BAR stop counter.

  In the subsequent step S5605, an addition notification effect is set. Specifically, a process of changing the background color of the state effect for the special RT state so as to correspond to the value of the black BAR stop counter after the addition is performed. Then, in the subsequent step S5606, after performing a process of clearing the notification flag, the special replay winning process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S5601 that the “black BAR” symbol is not stopped in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, or the “black BAR” symbol is stopped in step S5602, the notification flag is set. If it is determined that it has not been set, the process proceeds to step S5606, the process of clearing the notification flag is performed, and the special replay winning process is terminated. In step S5606, if the notification flag is not set, the state is maintained.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the first BB or the second BB is won, a transition to the special RT state is made, and the indication of whether or not the first BB or the second BB is won at the time of the special replay win in the special RT state is notified in a push order. The configuration is based on production. By doing in this way, it is possible to make the stop appearance different using the result (special replay) won in the special RT state, and it is possible to realize the suggestion effect using the stop appearance.

  Here, a plurality of stop events are provided for one result, and which stop event is made to appear depends on the stop order, so that the stop results can be made without complicating the lottery result. On the other hand, in the special RT state where the first BB or the second BB is carried over, the execution of the advantage lottery lottery is limited. If a push order notification is made about a game result whose advantage may differ depending on the stop order, such as push order bell or push order replay, it may be contrary to the purpose of restricting the execution of the advantage lottery lottery. . In other words, if the push order notification is performed in such a carry-over state, the push order notification may be performed without limitation by an act of intentionally delaying the bonus winning. In that respect, according to the above embodiment, as a push order notification effect that does not cause a change in the advantage for the player, the push order notification effect at the time of special replay is performed, so that the transition lottery can be performed during the carryover state. It is possible to realize an effect using the difference of the stop appearance within a range that does not contradict the purpose of restricting execution.

  The suggestion effect using the stop appearance is configured to be performed according to the cumulative stop count of the “black BAR” symbol. In this way, it becomes difficult to judge the suggested content from the suggestion of one game, in other words, it is configured to predict the content by suggestion over multiple games, and it is possible to enjoy the suggestion effect longer It becomes.

  In this case, in the various special replays, the stop order in which no “black BAR” symbol is stopped in the middle stage is set, so that the cumulative stop count has already reached the upper limit of the suggested content. Even in this case, it is possible to generate a push order notification effect (generate a push order notification effect that stops zero), and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of a race due to the absence of the effect.

  In the special RT state, the notification effect at the time of winning the special replay is configured to be executed according to the notification scenario set when transitioning to the special RT state, so that the suggestion effect that can be executed over a plurality of games as described above. It is possible to easily carry out without using a configuration in which matching with the previous suggestion content is performed at the time of winning the special replay.

  At the time of special replay winning, even if the stop order happens to coincide with the stop order corresponding to the black BAR stop in a situation where the push order notification effect has not occurred, the black BAR stop counter addition process or the addition time notification effect The configuration was not performed. In addition, even if a push order notification effect is generated at the time of winning the special replay, if the black BAR symbol fails to be pressed, the 16th replay or the 17th replay in which the black BAR symbol does not stop. Game wins. Also in this case, the addition process of the black BAR stop counter is not performed, the notification effect at the time of addition is not performed, and the background color does not change. By doing in this way, in the special RT state, first, a sense of expectation is given to the occurrence of the push order notification effect, and when the push order notification effect occurs, the push corresponding to the black BAR stop is performed. It can be expected to be a forward notification effect. Moreover, in order to change the background color, it is not only necessary to match the pressing order, but it is also necessary to stop operation aiming at the “black BAR” design, and the production change that leads to the improvement of expectation after the special RT state And the player's operation are closely related. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the degree of expectation after the special RT state has been changed according to the skill of his / her stop operation, and the fun of the game operation can be further improved.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a configuration relating to the addition of the number of continued games in the advantageous section and the upper limit number of games (1500) in the advantageous section will be described in detail.

  First, the first specific combination process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As already described, the first specific combination process is a process performed mainly when the game lottery result becomes a specific combination in a situation where the display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode.

  As a change in the present embodiment, the challenge mode lottery process (step S813) is performed regardless of whether or not the challenge mode is in each of the above embodiments, and the challenge mode is selected when the challenge mode is won again during the challenge mode. The configuration in which the number of games is added is different depending on whether or not the challenge mode is in effect, whether the mode transition lottery or the extra lottery is different.

  That is, the process related to the lottery for shifting to the attack mode in steps S6001 to S6012 is the same process as in steps S801 to S812. If a negative determination is made in step S6005 and it is determined that the attack mode is not won, the process proceeds to step S6013. In step S6013, it is determined whether the challenge mode is being performed. If not in the challenge mode, a challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S6014. The process of step S6014 is a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift the display mode from the normal mode to the challenge mode, and is a transition lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section.

  In step S6015, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S6014 has been won. If not won, the first specific combination process is terminated as it is. If it has been won, the process proceeds to step S6016 to set a challenge mode winning flag. The processing from step S6016 to step S6020 is the same as the processing from step S816 to step S820.

  If it is determined in step S6013 that the current mode is the challenge mode, in the present embodiment, as described above, the lottery process is executed in step S6021 in which the number of games in the challenge mode is added. In step S6022, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S6021 has been won, that is, whether or not an additional number of games in the challenge mode will occur. It is determined whether or not the combination with the bonus. The processing from step S6023 to step S6027 is the same as the processing from step S821 to step S825. If it is determined in step S6022 that no extra is occurring, the first specific combination process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the section display second process in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As a change in this embodiment, after adding the advantageous section game number AG, a process of grasping and managing the number of remaining games that can be added in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section (remaining game number management) Processing, step S6103) is performed.

  That is, in step S6101, it is determined whether or not the section indicator is being displayed as in step S2801, and if it is being displayed, in step S6102, the advantageous section game number AG is determined in the same manner as in step S2802. The addition process is executed. In step S6103, a remaining game number management process is executed. The processing from step S6104 to step S6111 is the same as the processing from step S2803 to step S2810.

  A supplementary description will be given of the data initialization processing in step S6107.

  As described above, by performing the initialization process, various counters and various flags used in the advantageous section are cleared. For example, even if the number of continuations in the challenge mode or the number of continuations in the attack mode remains, it is forcibly set to 0, and a flag for display mode transition such as an attack notification flag or an attack mode flag (for push order notification) Since the above flag is also cleared, the attack mode and the like are forcibly terminated.

  In this case, since the number of continuations of the attack mode and the like is forcibly set to 0 as described above, in the game number management process (FIG. 40), for example, the number of continuations of the attack mode becomes 0 (in step S1414). Based on this determination, an attack mode end command is output to the display control device 81. In addition, when forcibly ending during the VB mode or specialized zone, a VB mode termination command is output based on the fact that the VB mode continuation number is forced to 0, or the specialized zone continuation number is forced The special zone end command is output based on the fact that it becomes 0, but the display control device 81 has received the attack mode end command when these various end commands are received in duplicate. The processing based on the above (processing for performing the attack mode end effect) is preferentially performed. As a result, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to perform the attack mode end effect based on the reception of the attack mode end command (step S2306).

  As described above, even when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the display effect for the normal mode is not suddenly generated, and an attack mode end effect or the like is generated as the display effect. This makes it possible to avoid misunderstanding. In addition, when forcibly ending, it may be configured to set an effect different from the normal attack mode end effect so that it is possible to more clearly grasp the fact that it has been forcibly ended. Further, when the forced termination is in the VB mode or the like, the main control device 101 may output only the attack mode end command without outputting the VB mode end command or the like.

<Remaining game number management processing>
The remaining game number management process will be described with reference to FIG. In the remaining game number management process, the number of remaining continuous games in various modes scheduled to be executed in the advantageous section can be grasped and added from the total number of remaining continuous games and the number of games in the advantageous section already executed. The number of free games (number of remaining games) is calculated.

  That is, in step S6201, the number of precursor games G1 is grasped. For example, when the current state is the precursor mode in the advantageous section, the number of precursor games G1 represents the number of games in the remaining precursor mode, and is subtracted by one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). . In step S6202, the challenge mode continuation number G2 is determined. The challenge mode continuation number G2 represents the number of games in the remaining challenge mode, for example, when the current state is the challenge mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). . In step S6203, the attack mode continuation number G3 is determined. The attack mode continuation number G3 indicates, for example, the number of games in the remaining attack mode when the current state is the attack mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). . In step S6204, the VB mode continuation number G4 is determined. For example, when the current state is the VB mode in the advantageous section, the VB mode continuation number G4 represents the number of games in the remaining VB mode, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). . In step S6205, the specialized zone continuation number G5 is grasped. The special zone continuation number G5 represents, for example, the number of games in the remaining special zones when the current state is a special zone in the advantageous section, and one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). Subtracted. In step S6206, the remaining BB game number G6 is grasped. For example, when the current state is the BB mode (bonus state) in the advantageous section, the BB remaining game number G6 represents the number of games in the remaining BB mode, and each time the game number management process (FIG. 40) is activated. In addition, one subtraction is performed in a subtraction process (not shown) on the condition that the BB mode is in effect.

  Here, as for the continuation numbers G1 to G6, a value of 0 or more may be input even when the current state is not a corresponding mode or zone. Specifically, for example, in the situation where the lottery for the transition to the VB mode has been won but the transition to the VB mode is still in progress, the current mode is the attack mode and the VB mode continuation number G4 is the continuation of the VB mode. The initial value of the number of games “60” is still input. In addition, in the situation where the lottery for the transition to the super attack mode was won during the challenge mode, but still before the transition to the super attack mode, the current mode is the challenge mode and the special zone continuation number G5 is special. The initial value “5”, which is the initial value of the number of continued games in the activation zone, is still input, and “50”, which is the initial value of the number of continued games in the attack mode, is also input to the attack mode continuation number G3. It becomes.

  In step S6207, a process of calculating the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section is performed by accumulating G1 to G6 grasped in the processes of steps S6201 to S6206. By performing such processing, it becomes possible to know how many games the advantageous section will continue later. In the subsequent step S6208, the total advantageous section game number SG is calculated by adding the number of games in the advantageous section (advantageous section game number AG) and the remaining game number ZG executed so far. Then, in step S6209, the number of empty games (the number of empty games that can be added, the number of remaining games) FG is calculated by subtracting the total advantageous interval game number SG from 1500G that is the upper limit game number of advantageous intervals. Process.

  After performing the process of step S6209, in step S6210, it is determined whether or not the number of free games FG is greater than 0, that is, whether or not there is a number of free games and can be added. If the number of free games FG is larger than 0, the remaining game number management process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the free game number FG is 0 or less, the process for setting the excess flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S6211, and then the remaining game number management process is terminated. The excess flag indicates that the number of continued games in the advantageous section cannot be added. More specifically, the CPU 102 grasps that even if the number of added games is added, the game for the added amount is not executed due to forced termination at the time of 1500 games. It is a flag to do.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), when the advantageous section is started by setting the challenge mode winning flag in the ta1 game, the measurement of the advantageous section game number AG is started from the game. Thereafter, ta1 to ta2 are in challenge mode, ta2 to ta3 are in attack mode, ta3 to ta4 are in VB mode, ta4 to ta5 are in attack mode, The number of games up to ta5 is grasped by the advantageous section game number AG. Further, at the time of ta5, the number of continuations of the remaining attack mode and the like is grasped by the advantageous section remaining game number ZG (accumulation of G1 to G6), and it is determined that the advantageous section continues to ta6 at the time of ta5. doing. In FIG. 127 (a), ta6 is a game before ta7 that is 1500 games from ta1, and ta6 to ta7 correspond to the number of free games FG that can be added at the time of ta5. That is, the excess flag is not set in FIG. 127 (a).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the advantageous period starting from tb1 is passed through the challenge mode from tb1 to tb2, the attack mode from tb2 to tb3 and tb4 to tb5, the VB mode from tb3 to tb4 and from tb5 to tb6. Assume that the attack mode continues until tb7. In this case, the advantageous segment game number AG is the number of games from tb1 to tb7, and when the advantageous segment remaining game number ZG at the time tb7 is added to the advantageous segment game number AG, it exceeds 1500. That is, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated at the time tb8 without using all the remaining advantageous section remaining game numbers ZG at the time tb7. In this case, an excess flag is set.

  In the situation where the excess flag is set as described above, that is, in the game of the remaining advantageous game number ZG from tb7 to tb8, even if the special mode is won and the attack mode is added, Since the game is forcibly terminated at tb8, the game from tb7 to tb8 can be a so-called digest game, and the player's interest in the game may be greatly reduced.

  FIG. 127 (c) shows an example in which a large number of games are added in the specialized zone. For example, in the challenge mode started from tc1, it is assumed that the super attack mode is won, and the specialized zone is executed from tc2 to tc3. In such a specialized zone, a large number of continued games in the attack mode occurred, and even when the attack mode started from tc3 was digested to tc4, the remaining number of games ZG still remains in the advantageous section And If the advantageous zone remaining game number ZG at time tc4 exceeds 1500 when added to the advantageous zone game number AG from tc1 to tc4, the advantageous zone remaining game number ZG remaining at the time of tc4 is large. Everything is a digestion game as described above. Then, not only will the game's interest greatly decline, but it may cause a reduction in the degree of attention, despite the fact that it caused a large amount of addition, However, there may be concerns about a decline in interest. In addition, the more advantageous sections that can be used in such a digest game, the more likely the additional game will be generated, and the more times the additional game may be generated. There is also a high possibility that the player will be discouraged by the occurrence of a meaningful extra opportunity.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in such a situation that even if the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less and the number of games is added, it can be meaningless, a measure is taken so as not to discourage the player. . Hereinafter, with regard to such a configuration, after the description of the processing when the number of free games FG is greater than 0, that is, when the additional opportunity does not become meaningless, the processing when the number of free games FG is 0 or less will be described. explain.

<When the number of free games FG is greater than 0>
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for adding the number of games in the challenge mode or the attack mode. For example, the challenge mode extra lottery process is performed in step S6021 of the first specific combination process (FIG. 124). The lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed in step S914 (FIG. 33) in the second specific combination process or in step S1001 (FIG. 34) in the third specific combination process. The game number addition lottery process in any case basically has the same processing configuration, and therefore, the case where it is executed during the challenge mode, the case where it is executed during the attack mode, and the like will be collectively described below.

  In step S6301, it is determined whether the above excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set and the number of free games FG is greater than 0, the process advances to step S6302 to perform processing for grasping the type of the specific combination at this time. Then, in step S6303, after performing the process of acquiring the extra lottery table, the extra lottery is executed in step S6304, and then the extra number of games is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the extra lottery table is set so that the extra winning rate is different depending on the type of the specific combination and the mode at the time of the specific combination winning (mode to be added).

  In the challenge mode game number extra lottery, for example, a 15% chance of winning a strong cherry is won and an extra 5% chance of winning a weak watermelon. In the overlapping role with the first BB, it is possible to win for the extra combination, with the strong cherry duplication 1 winning with the probability of 5%, and with the weak watermelon duplication 1 winning with the probability of 15%. In other words, even with the same strong cherry or weak watermelon, the extra winning probability differs depending on whether or not there is overlap with the first BB, and there are a mixture of those with higher and lower winning probabilities when duplicated.

  In the extra lottery for the number of games in the attack mode or the VB mode, for example, the player wins the extra with a probability of 15% for the strong cherry and the winner with the probability of 5% for the weak watermelon. On the other hand, in strong cherry duplication 1 and weak watermelon duplication 1, if the winning combination is won with 100% probability and it is a duplicate role with 1BB, the number of games in attack mode with high probability (both with 100% probability) It is set to generate an extra.

  In addition to the number of games in the attack mode in the special zone, the lottery is set to win with a high probability (with a probability of 100%) regardless of the type of specific role. It is set to win by pushing order replay and various pushing order bells. Therefore, the flowchart of the special zone process (FIG. 42) shows a process configuration in which the number of games is added and the lottery process is omitted.

  If the winning combination is determined by the game number adding lottery process of FIG. 128, an affirmative determination is made in the determination process (step S6022, step S915, step S1002) performed after the game number adding lottery process, and the additional game number lottery process (step S6024, Steps S917 and S1004) are performed. Note that the extra game number lottery process may also be performed at the end of the bonus (FIG. 41, step S1512, step S1516) or during the specialization zone (FIG. 42, step S1602). It has a processing configuration. The added game number lottery process will be described together with reference to FIG.

  In step S6401, it is determined whether the excess flag is set. In this case (when adding and winning), since the excess flag is not set, a negative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S6402. In step S6402, a process for grasping the type of the specific combination is performed. Then, in step S6403, a process for acquiring an additional game number lottery table is performed, and after a game number lottery is executed in step S6404, the additional game number lottery process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 131, the added game number lottery table is set so that the number of added games differs depending on the type of the specific combination and the mode at the time of winning the specific combination (mode to be added).

  In the challenge mode extra game number lottery, for example, in the strong cherry, an extra game number of 2 to 20 games occurs, and the average value is 15 games. Moreover, in weak watermelon, the addition of the game number in any one of 5 games-15 games generate | occur | produces, the average value is 6 games, and not only the addition average game number depending on the kind of specific role, The width is set to be different.

  In the extra game number lottery that occurs during the attack mode or the VB mode, for example, in the strong cherry, one of 20 games to 200 games is added, and the average value is 30 games. An additional number of games can be generated in the challenge mode. In addition, for weak watermelons, an additional number of games among 50 games to 150 games occurs, and the average value thereof is 60 games. The width is set so that the number of games can be larger than that in the challenge mode.

  In the attack mode extra game lottery that occurs during the specialization zone, for example, in the case of strong cherry, an extra game number of 20 games to 200 games occurs, and it is equivalent to that in the attack mode etc. Although the average value is 50 games, the number of games can be increased more than that in the attack mode or the like. Also, the weak watermelon has an additional number of games out of 50 games to 150 games, and the average value is 70 games although it is the same width as that in the attack mode. In any specific combination, the number of games is set so that a larger number of games can be easily selected than in the case where it occurs during an attack mode or the like.

  After the extra game number lottery process is executed, the extra game number process is performed in step S6025, step S918, step S1005, step S1513, step S1517, step S1603, and the like. Since any game number addition process has the same process configuration, the process will be collectively described below with reference to FIG.

  In step S6501, it is determined whether an excess flag is set. Since the excess flag is not set this time, a negative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S6502. In step S6502, a process of grasping the number of added games is performed based on the processing result of the added game number lottery process. Thereafter, in step S6503, a process for adding the number of additional games to the target number of continuous games is performed, and then the process for adding the number of games ends.

  As a result, an additional number of continuous games in the challenge mode and attack mode occurs. As described above, when an extra is generated, an additional effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 is generated. And a player grasps | ascertains that it became possible to add the number of games of the alert | reported by the said addition production, and to implement an advantageous area.

<When the number of free games FG is 0 or less>
Next, processing when the number of free games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set will be described.

  Since the excess flag is set, in the number-of-games extra lottery process of FIG. 128, an affirmative determination is made in step S6301 and the process proceeds to step S6305 instead of the extra lottery process in step S6302. In other words, even if a specific combination that becomes an opportunity to be added in the situation where the excess flag is set, the execution of the extra lottery process is limited, and the extra lottery process is not executed.

  In step S6305, a process for grasping the type of the specific combination this time is performed. In step S6306, after executing the process of acquiring the first special notification lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, the first special notification lottery for determining whether or not to execute the first special notification in step S6307. Execute the process.

  As shown in FIG. 133, the first special notification lottery table is set so that the winning probabilities of executing the first special notification differ depending on the type of the specific combination and the mode when the specific combination is won. That is, the first special notification lottery table is equivalent to the extra lottery table, and the determination process of the presence or absence of the excess flag at the time of the specific role winning is performed by adding the lottery table to be referred to and the first special notification lottery table. It can be said that the process is different.

  In the present embodiment, the first special notification is a notification that presents information that may be useful to the player. Specifically, the first special notification is a notification that suggests a set value set in the slot machine 10. Has been. In other words, in a situation where the excess flag is set, a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the first special notification as a suggested suggestion of the set value is performed instead of performing the lottery with the number of games in the advantageous section when the specific combination is won. Do.

  Specifically, in the first special notification lottery table, the first special notification lottery in the attack mode or the VB mode and the first special notification lottery in the special zone have a higher probability in the special zone. The winning probability for each specific combination is set so that one special notification lottery can be won. For example, a strong cherry that is not an overlapping role with the first BB wins the first special notification lottery with a probability of 15% in the attack mode or the VB mode, while having a probability of 100% in the special zone. Win one special notification lottery. In addition, for weak watermelons that are not duplicated with the first BB, the first special notification lottery is won with a probability of 5% in the attack mode or the VB mode, while the probability is 100% in the special zone. Win one special notification lottery.

  As already explained, it is easier to win a lottery in the special zone than in the attack mode or VB mode, and it is easier to win a lottery than in the attack mode or VB mode. It is assumed that a larger number of games can be expected in the case of winning in the extra lottery. In the first special notice lottery table, the winning probability of the first special notice lottery is set according to the difference in the winning probability of the extra lottery and the expected value of the number of extra games at the time of winning. The first special notice lottery executed instead of the easy lottery, and the first special notice lottery executed instead of the extra lottery that can be expected to increase the number of games is given to the player as the first special notice. Information that can be useful, that is, a setting value suggestion effect is easily performed.

  In the first special notification lottery process in the challenge mode, the first special notification lottery is won with high probability (with a probability of 100%) for specific roles such as strong cherries and weak cherries that do not overlap with the first BB. Is set. For this reason, in the challenge mode, when a specific combination is won in a situation where the excess flag is set, the setting value is suggested with a high probability (with a probability of 100%). On the other hand, the strong cherry duplication 1 and the weak cherry duplication 1 that are overlapping roles with the first BB are set to win the first special notification lottery with a lower probability (with a probability of 30%) than in the case of non-overlap. Yes. For this reason, if a stop appearance that wins a strong cherry or the like appears as a specific role in the situation where the excess flag is set in the challenge mode, the setting value is suggested with high probability unless it overlaps with the first BB. If an effect occurs and overlaps with the first BB, a setting value suggestion effect occurs with a lower probability.

  In the first special notification lottery process during the attack mode or the VB mode, a specific role such as strong cherry or weak cherry that is not overlapped with the first BB has a high probability (with a probability of 100%). It is set to win. For this reason, when the specific combination is won in the situation where the excess flag is set in these modes, the setting value is suggested with a high probability (with a probability of 100%). On the other hand, the strong cherry duplication 1 and the weak cherry duplication 1 that are overlapping roles with the first BB are set to win the first special notification lottery with a lower probability (with a probability of 30%) than in the case of non-overlap. Yes. Therefore, in the situation where the excess flag is set in these modes, if a stop appearance that wins a strong cherry or the like appears as a specific role as a specific role, the set value is not likely to overlap with the first BB. If the suggestion effect is generated and overlaps with the first BB, the suggestion effect of the set value is generated with a lower probability.

  Here, the slot machine 10 is configured such that once the challenge mode is shifted to the attack mode or the like, even if the attack mode ends, the challenge mode is not restored (FIG. 30). Therefore, in the challenge mode with the excess flag set, the challenge mode will not win the lottery to move to the attack mode, etc., and the upper limit of the advantageous section as a result of repeated addition and bonus winning etc. The situation when the number of games is reached can be considered, and it can be said that it can hardly occur in practice. However, if such a situation occurs, it is a case in which the lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the like continues, so the first special notification is generated with a high probability in order to follow the hard work. . The reason why the occurrence rate of the first special notification is lower when the duplication with the first BB occurs is that when the duplication with the first BB, the benefit from at least the first BB winning can be obtained. This is to ensure a balance with this.

  When comparing with the extra lottery, focusing on the presence or absence of overlap with the first BB, for example, in the extra lottery, 10% for weak cherries that are not duplicated with the first BB in the attack mode or VB mode. Winning with probability, the weak cherry duplication 1 that is a duplicate role with the first BB wins with a probability of 100%, and the duplicate role with the first BB is added with a 10 times probability to win the lottery. On the other hand, in the first special notification lottery, in the attack mode or the VB mode, a weak cherry that is not a duplicate of the first BB wins with a probability of 10%, and a weak cherry duplicate that is a duplicate of the first BB is 1 The winning combination with the probability of 30% is a ratio lower than the ratio in the case of the extra lottery although the winning combination of the first BB has a higher winning probability of the first special notification lottery.

  In addition, in the extra lottery in the specialized zone, a weak cherry that is not a duplicate of the first BB and a weak cherry overlap that is a duplicate of the first BB are both won with a probability of 100%. On the other hand, in the first special notification lottery in the specialization zone, it is won with a probability of 100% for weak cherries that are not duplicates with the first BB, and with a probability of 30% for weak cherries overlap 1 that is a duplicate with the first BB. The winning combination is lower for the combination with the first BB.

  That is, in the extra lottery, those who overlap with the first BB are more likely to win the extra lottery, and in the first special notification lottery, the one that overlaps with the first BB wins the first special announcement lottery. The ratio is set to be lower than the ratio in the case of extra lottery. In other words, in the event that an extra lottery appears as a special winning combination, if an extra lottery is performed, the one overlapping with the first BB can be expected to win the extra lottery, When the extra lottery is not performed and the first special notification lottery is performed, even if it overlaps with the first BB, the extra lottery cannot be expected to win the notification lottery.

  Here, when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number and the advantageous section forced termination processing (steps S6105 to S6107) is performed, various counters and various flags relating to the display mode and the push order notification are initialized. On the other hand, information relating to the gaming state (for example, an RT setting flag and a bonus winning flag) is held without being initialized. In other words, if a game for which forced termination processing is performed is in a bonus state or a carry-over state in which a bonus winning flag is set, the bonus state or carry-over state is not erased and is retained. . As already described, in the bonus state, regardless of the presence / absence of the push order notification, it is possible to win bonus medium / small combination 1 to bonus medium / small combination 3 and increase the number of medals. In other words, if the forced termination process is performed during the bonus state, it does not return to the attack mode or the like after the bonus ends, but does not affect the expected medal acquisition value during the bonus state.

  Then, if the winning combination is won with the first BB in the situation where the excess flag is set, the extra lottery will not be performed, but at least the benefits based on the first BB winning can be enjoyed. Thus, it can be said that the result is more favorable for the player than when the first BB does not overlap. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if it is a duplicate combination with the first BB, the winning probability of the first special notification lottery is set low, and the balance with the benefits due to the first BB winning is secured.

  After the first special notification lottery is executed in step S6307, it is determined whether or not the first special notification lottery is won in step S6308. If the notification lottery is won, the process for setting the first special notification execution command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S6309. If the notification lottery is not won, the step In S6310, processing for setting the first special notification non-execution command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. The first special notification execution command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to know that the first special notification lottery has been performed and that the notification lottery has been won, and the first special notification non-execution command is This is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the first special notice lottery has been performed and that the notice lottery has not been won. After executing the process of step S6309 or step S6310, the number of games is added and the lottery process is terminated.

  Here, in the extra number lottery process, when each process for the first special notification is performed because the excess flag is set, a determination process (step S6022, step S915, In step S1002 and the like, a positive determination is made. More specifically, the determination process of whether or not it is an extra winning is configured such that an affirmative determination is made when an extra lottery is won and when an excess flag is set.

  If the excess flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S6401 of the extra game number lottery process in FIG. 130, and the extra game number lottery process is terminated without performing the extra game number lottery or the like. Also, in the game number addition process of FIG. 132, an affirmative determination is made in step S6501, and the game number addition process is terminated without performing the game number addition process or the like. That is, when the number of free games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set, the additional game number lottery process or the game number addition process is substantially not processed.

  On the other hand, an additional command setting process (step S6026, step S919, step S1006, step S1514, step S1518, step S1604), which is performed after the additional game number lottery process or the game number additional process without performing these substantial processes. Then, regardless of the presence or absence of the excess flag, a process for setting an extra command is performed. By doing in this way, even in a situation where the excess flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S1906 of the start time effect setting process (FIG. 45) on the display control device 81 side, and the setting process for the added effect is started. It will be.

<Additional effect setting processing>
Next, the processing of the display control device 81 when the first special notification execution command or the first special notification non-execution command is received will be described with reference to FIG. As already described, the setting process of the extra effect is a process performed in step S1907 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 45).

  In step S6601, it is determined whether one of the first special notification execution command and the first special notification non-execution command is received. The case where no command is received is a case where only the addition command is received without setting the excess flag in the main control device 101. In this case, the process proceeds to step S6602, and a process of grasping the number of additional games is performed based on the received additional command. The processes in steps S6602 to S6608 are the same as the processes in steps S2101 to S2107.

  In this case, for example, when a specific role is won in the attack mode or the like, as shown in FIG. 136 (a), a chance notification effect is generated, and the game result is an opportunity to add this game. The operation prompts the establishment of such a game result prize. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), it is possible to recognize that an additional notification effect corresponding to the number of additional games this time has occurred, and that an additional number of continuous games such as the attack mode has occurred.

  If it is determined in step S6601 that any of the first special notification commands has been received, the process proceeds to step S6609. In step S6609, a first special notification setting process is performed. After performing the first special notification setting process, the setting process of the extra effect is ended.

  In the first special notification setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 135, it is determined whether or not the first special notification command received this time in step S6701 is a first special notification execution command. If it is not the first special notification execution command but the first special notification non-execution command, the first special notification setting process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, the first special notification non-execution command recognizes to the display control device 81 that an extra opportunity has occurred, and that no extra effect or first special notice has been generated when the extra opportunity has occurred. It can be said that it is a command for

  If it is determined in step S6701 that the command is the first special notification execution command, the process advances to step S6702 to execute processing for grasping the current set value. When the winning probability setting process is performed in the main process of the main control apparatus 101, a set value command including information of the corresponding set value is output from the main control apparatus 101 to the display control apparatus 81. The display control device 81 can grasp the current set value by storing such a set value command in a predetermined area.

  In step S6703, a first special notification type lottery process is executed. The first special notification type lottery process is a process of drawing the type of the first special notification, and either the first special notification A shown in FIG. 137 (a) or the first special notification B shown in FIG. 137 (b). It is the process which determines by lottery whether 1st special alerting | reporting is performed. In the first special notification A, for example, an image of a soldier who is a main character is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and more specifically, an image of the soldier holding a weapon is displayed. Further, in the first special notification A, an image of the winning combination corresponding character corresponding to the type of the current game result is displayed. And when the 1st special alerting | reporting A is performed, the words "I will win and survive!" Are emitted from the speaker 64 by the loud voice of a man, for example as the sound effect. In the first special notification B, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays, for example, an image in which the main character screams with a weapon in one hand. In the first special notification B, an image of the winning combination corresponding character is displayed. And when the 1st special alerting | reporting B is performed, the male scream of "Uooo!" Is emitted from the speaker 64 as the sound effect, for example. That is, the difference between the first special notification A and the first special notification B can be clearly understood by the player based on the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect from the speaker 64.

  Which of the first special notification A and the first special notification B is selected has a different probability depending on the set value. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (c), if the set value is “1”, the first special notification A is selected with a probability of 100%, and the first special notification B is not selected. If the set value is “2”, the first special notification A is selected with a probability of 75% and the first special notification B is selected with a probability of 25%. If the set value is “3”, both the first special notification A and the first special notification B are selected with a probability of 50%. If the set value is “4”, the first special notification A is selected with a probability of 25% and the first special notification B is selected with a probability of 75%. If the set value is “5” or “6”, the first special notification B is selected with a probability of 100%, and the first special notification A is not selected.

  That is, in the first special notification type table in the above example, the possibility that the setting value is low is increased when the first special notification A is performed, and the setting value is highly likely when the first special notification B is performed. Become. More specifically, when the first special notification B is performed, it is determined that the setting value is “2” or more, and when the first special notification A is performed, the setting value is “4” or less. Is confirmed.

  In this way, the current set value can be predicted from the type of the first special notification that can be executed when the specific combination is won. Further, if the set value is “2” to “4”, “2” to “4” are calculated from the ratio of the first special notification A and the first special notification B when the first special notification is generated a plurality of times. It is also possible to narrow down which of these.

  After performing the first special notification type lottery process in step S6703, it is determined in step S6704 whether or not the result of the lottery process is the first special notification A. In step S6705, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute the first special notification A, and then the first special notification setting process is ended. If it is determined in step S6704 that it is not the first special notification A, the first special notification setting is performed after controlling the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so as to execute the first special notification B in step S6706. End the process.

  FIG. 138 shows the difference in the contents of the notification in the example of FIG. 127 when the specific combination win is achieved while the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section is exhausted.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), when the number of free games FG is larger than 0, or when a specific winning combination is won while the remaining number of games ZG is consumed, an extra lottery is executed. When the extra lottery is won, a lottery for the number of additional games is performed, the corresponding number of games is added, and an additional notification effect for the corresponding number of games is generated.

  Here, in a situation where the number of free games FG is larger than 0, the lottery table for the extra lottery and the lottery table for the number of extra games are configured to use a common table regardless of the value of the number of free games FG. . That is, if the number of vacant games FG is greater than 0, for example, if a strong cherry duplication 1 is won as a specific role, the lottery is won with a 100% probability (FIG. 129). Then, regardless of the value of the number of free games FG, a lottery of the number of extra games of 10G to 200G (average 30G) is performed, and an extra according to the lottery result occurs (FIG. 131). Therefore, an additional game number larger than the free game number FG can occur. For example, although the free game number FG is 5, an additional effect of 200 games is generated. obtain.

  By doing in this way, not only simplification of the configuration regarding the extra lottery is achieved, but also the following effects can be expected. In other words, if it is assumed that the upper limit of the advantageous section is defined, there is a possibility that as the number of free games FG decreases, even if a specific role that becomes an additional lottery opportunity is won, interest in the number of additional games may not be drawn. high. On the other hand, if it is assumed that additional information exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous section occurs, that is, if the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less, information useful to the player can be presented, the number of free games It is rather preferable that FG is 0 or less in a situation where the number of free games FG is near 0. In addition, if the impression that it is preferable for the player to exceed the upper limit of the advantageous section as described above is made, it is more advantageous than the case where the upper limit greatly exceeds the upper limit of the advantageous section. It is thought that it is easy to expect that a new event will occur. Therefore, as described above, if the number of free games FG is greater than 0, the number of additional games is determined regardless of the value, so that the advantages and disadvantages actually differ depending on the number of additional games when the upper limit is exceeded. Without making it possible, it is possible to realize the gameability as if there is an effect on disadvantages by using the impression that the player can feel.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b), in a situation where the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less, if a specific combination is won while the remaining number of games ZG is consumed, the first special notification may be executed. In this case, since the setting value can be narrowed down according to the type of the first special notification, the specific role winning during the digestion is preferable without giving a so-called defeat impression, and is advantageous. It becomes possible to use the motivation to continue the game after the end of the section or to determine whether to continue or not.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (c), when the number of free games FG becomes less than or equal to 0 early in the advantageous section due to a large amount of addition in the specialized zone, etc., the remaining number of games ZG is consumed for a long time. Over the years. On the other hand, in the first special notification type table, since the setting value can be narrowed down by the occurrence of the first special notification multiple times, the game itself for narrowing down the setting value ends quickly. Occurrence of the event is suppressed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 138 (c), even when it takes a long time to digest the remaining number of games ZG, it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When a specific role is won as an additional opportunity when the number of free games FG in the advantageous section is less than or equal to 0, the first special notification is executed as a suggested setting value effect instead of adding the number of games in the advantageous section It was set as the structure which can do. By doing in this way, it can be a relief against the fact that it can be meaningless even if an extra based on the specific role winning occurs, and to a game that can be a digest game in the situation where the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less Can be avoided.

  In particular, when the number of vacant games FG is less than or equal to 0, if a specific role win is made, the waiting time for the specific section is won in the advantageous section without waiting for the forced end of the advantageous section. By making it possible to execute 1 special notification, it is possible to secure the significance of a lottery result of each game that can be a so-called digest game, in particular, to become a specific role, and to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game. Become.

  In the situation where the number of vacant games in the advantageous section FG is less than or equal to 0, when the specific role as an additional opportunity is won, the specific role as the additional opportunity as described above in the configuration in which the setting value is suggested The winning probability is the same regardless of the set value, and the winning probability and the number of added games in the extra lottery at the time of the specific role winning are the same regardless of the set value. In other words, the specific combination that triggers the occurrence of the suggestion of the set value has the same winning probability regardless of the set value, and the chance of occurrence of the suggestion is generated equally regardless of the set value. Therefore, for example, the probability that the occurrence of the suggested effect of the set value varies depending on the set value, and compared to a configuration in which the occurrence probability is low at a low setting, an event that even the suggested effect cannot be enjoyed due to the low setting Therefore, it is possible to provide a set value suggestion effect, that is, a chance to entertain the first special notification equally regardless of the set value.

  In this case, it is easier to understand that a specific role with a higher winning probability of extra lottery has a higher probability of generating a set value suggestive effect, and that an implied effect will be generated instead of adding the number of games. It is possible to easily increase the degree of attention to the suggestion by adding the fact that the suggestion is likely to occur and making it easy to predict from the probability of the lottery and by preparing the mind for the occurrence of the suggestion Become.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, a mode transition lottery during an advantageous section that occurs when the number of free games FG is 0 or less will be described. The mode transition lottery during the advantageous section includes an attack mode (super attack mode) lottery during the challenge mode, a VB mode transition lottery during the attack mode, and a specialized zone transition lottery during the VB mode. If you win the lottery to move to the attack mode, you will move to the attack mode with the initial number of games of 50 games. Therefore, winning the lottery to move to the attack mode means adding 50 games in the advantageous section. It can be said that. In addition, when winning the lottery for the transition to the VB mode, the transition to the VB mode with the initial number of games of 60 games is made, so winning for the lottery for transitioning to the VB mode means adding 60 games in the advantageous section. It can be said that is performed. And if you win the lottery for the special zone, you will go to the special zone for 5 games, so winning the lottery for the special zone means adding 5 games in the advantageous zone. It can be said that.

  That is, even if each of these mode transition lotteries is won, the remaining game number ZG of the advantageous section will be added, and even if the mode transition lottery is won in a situation where the number of free games FG is 0 or less, Can be meaningless to the person. Therefore, in this modified example, special notification can be executed even when the mode transition lottery is won.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing a lottery process in the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the VB mode in this modification. The challenge mode lottery process is a process performed in step S6014 in the first specific combination process (FIG. 124), and the attack mode lottery process is performed in step S6004 in the first specific combination process (FIG. 124). The VB mode lottery process is a process performed in step S903 in the second specific combination process (FIG. 33). Since these processes have almost the same processing configuration, they will be described together below.

  That is, in these mode lottery processes, in step S6801, the type of specific combination is grasped, and in step S6802, a process of acquiring a mode lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed. In step S6803, a mode transition lottery is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 141, the mode lottery table is set so that the probability of winning each mode transition lottery differs depending on the current display mode and the type of the specific combination that becomes the lottery trigger. For example, in the challenge mode, the probability of winning the attack mode lottery is 90% for strong cherries, 30% for weak cherries, and strong cherries are weaker than weak cherries. Probability of winning the transition lottery is high. On the other hand, as a probability of winning the transition to the attack mode in the same challenge mode, the strong cherry duplication 1 that is a duplicate role with the first BB wins with a probability of 30%, while the weak cherry duplication 1 is 40%. Winning with probability, weak cherry duplication 1 is more likely to win the transition lottery than strong cherry duplication 1.

  The probability of winning the transition lottery to the VB mode during the attack mode varies depending on the rank of the attack mode. For example, in the transition lottery to the VB mode based on strong cherry, if the rank of the attack mode is 1, it is won with a probability of 15%, and if the rank of the attack mode is 4, it is won with a probability of 60%. The higher the probability is, the higher the probability of winning the transition lottery to the VB mode. On the other hand, in the transfer lottery to the VB mode, the winning probabilities are set so that each specific combination that is a duplicate of the first BB is difficult to win (not win) in the transfer lottery. However, the extra lottery is set so that it is easier to win in the case of duplication than in the case of non-overlap (FIG. 129), and when a stop appearance corresponding to a specific role appears, it is called 1BB plus extra It is possible to play a game while looking forward to whether the benefit or the benefit of the VB mode can be enjoyed.

  In the various mode lottery processes of FIG. 139, after the mode transition lottery is performed in step S6803, it is determined in step S6804 whether the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, the mode lottery process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the excess flag is set, the process advances to step S6805.

  In step S6805, processing for grasping the type of specific combination is executed. And the process which acquires a 2nd special information lottery table is performed in step S6806, and a 2nd special information lottery process is performed in step S6807.

  In the second special notification lottery table, as shown in FIG. 142, in the second special notification lottery performed in place of the attack mode shift lottery in the challenge mode, the second special notification lottery is performed with high probability (100% probability). Is set to win. As already explained, the challenge mode in the situation where the number of free games FG is 0 or less is a case where the challenge mode continues for a long time without winning the attack mode or the like during the challenge mode. Is a situation that can hardly occur. For this reason, if such a situation occurs, the second special notification is generated with a high probability as a price for the hard work so far, that is, so as to avoid the hard work.

  On the other hand, in the second special notification lottery performed instead of the VB mode transition lottery in the attack mode, the winning probability of the second special notification execution lottery is set to be different depending on the type of the specific combination. As already described, when the specific combination is won in the situation in the attack mode in which the excess flag is set, the execution lottery of the first special notification is performed instead of the extra lottery. In other words, when the specific combination is won in the situation in the attack mode in which the excess flag is set, the second special notification execution lottery is performed together with the first special notification execution lottery. The mode transition lottery and the extra lottery are a processing system in which the mode transition lottery is performed first and then the extra lottery is performed. The execution lottery of the second special notification is more effective than the execution lottery of the first special notification. Done first. And in this modification, although detailed description by a figure is abbreviate | omitted, if it wins the execution lottery of the 2nd special alert | report, it is set as the structure which does not win the execution lottery of the 1st special alert | report. That is, the first special notification and the second special notification are not performed repeatedly in the same game.

  In the second special notification lottery executed instead of the lottery for shifting from the attack mode to the VB mode, it is set to win the second special notification lottery with the same probability as the winning probability in the first special notification lottery ( FIG. 133). In other words, in this modification, when a specific combination is won during the attack mode, the second special notification execution lottery is performed, and the first special notification execution lottery is performed, and the winning probability is determined in any execution lottery. It is common. Therefore, the lottery table can be shared in both execution lotteries, and the configuration is simplified.

  In this case, the winning probability is set so as not to exceed 50% for any specific combination, and the winning probability is 30% or less. Therefore, an event that is not won in the execution lottery of the second special notification and is not won in the execution lottery of the first special notification occurs in about half (49%) at the time of the specific role winning. In this way, by suppressing the probability of occurrence of special notification, the rarity of special notification can be ensured in a configuration in which both special notifications can be performed, and the degree of attention when special notification occurs can be suitably increased. It becomes.

  After the second special notification lottery is executed in step S6807 in the various mode lottery processes, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery is won in step S6808. If the information lottery is won, the process of setting the second special notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S6809, and then the mode lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6808 that the notification lottery has not been won, the mode lottery process is terminated. The processing of the display control device 81 when receiving the second special notification command will be described later.

  Next, the special zone lottery in the VB mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 shows a part of the winning result handling process.

  As described above, the VB mode is basically executed in the third RT state, and the lottery process for each game is performed with reference to the third RT state lottery table (FIG. 25). And it shifts to a specialization zone based on the 7th re-game win which wins with a probability of 5% at the time of winning BAR replay 1 (IV = 11). In other words, if the BAR Replay 1 win is the trigger for the transition lottery to the special zone, the win probability of the special zone transfer lottery with the BAR Replay 1 as an opportunity is 5%, and other game results ( In response to the other specific role), the special zone transfer lottery is not won (FIG. 142).

  In the winning result handling process, if a negative determination is made in step S1310, it is determined in step S6901 whether or not a seventh regame winning has been established. If the seventh regame winning is established, it is determined in step S6902 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current seventh re-game winning has occurred during the VB mode. If it is the seventh regame winning in the VB mode, it is determined that the condition for shifting to the specialized zone is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S6903. If a negative determination is made in step S6901 or step S6902, it is determined that the condition for shifting to the specialized zone has not been established, and the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

  In step S6903, a process for setting a special zone flag is executed. In step S6904, a process for setting a special zone start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. In step S6905, a special zone is continued. Start counting the number. The processing from step S6903 to step S6905 is the same as the processing from step S1318 to step S1320.

  In a succeeding step S6906, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, the winning result handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the excess flag is set, the process advances to step S6907. In step S6907, a process for obtaining a second special notification lottery table is executed, and in a subsequent step S6908, a second special notification lottery is executed.

  In the second special notification lottery executed instead of the special lottery drawing in the VB mode, as shown in FIG. 142, the second special notification lottery table has a probability of 100% at the time of the seventh replay winning prize. The winning probability is determined so that the second special notification is executed. In the second special notification lottery executed in place of the special zone, the winning probability is determined so that the second special notification is not executed in other game results (other specific combinations). That is, the execution condition of the second special notification is set as the same condition as the transition condition to the specialized zone.

  After executing the second special notice lottery of step S6908, it is determined whether or not the notice lottery is won in step S6909. If the notification lottery is won, the process for setting the second special notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S6910, and then the winning result corresponding process is terminated. If it is determined that the notification lottery is not won, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

  The second special notification setting process of the display control device 81 when the second special notification command is received will be described with reference to FIG. The second special notification setting process is executed as one of the other processes (step S1711) of the effect setting process (FIG. 43) in the display control device 81.

  First, in step S7001, it is determined whether a second special notification command has been received. If it has not been received, the second special notification setting process is terminated as it is. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S7002, where 1 is added to the second special notification counter TH. The second special notification counter TH is a counter for grasping the number of times the second special notification is performed. In the subsequent step S7003, processing for grasping the set value is performed. And after performing the process which acquires a 2nd special alert | report type table in step S7004, a 2nd special alert | report type lottery process is performed in step S7005.

  In the second special notification type table, the type of the second special notification counter is set to be different depending on the value of the second special notification counter TH and the set value. Specifically, a second special notification A shown in FIG. 144 (a) and a second special notification B shown in FIG. 144 (b) are provided as the second special notification. In the second special notification A, for example, a snake hub character is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a sound when the snake "Sher!" . In the second special notification B, for example, a mongoose character is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and “woofer” and mongoose cry are emitted from the speaker 64 as its sound effect. That is, the difference between the second special notification A and the second special notification B can be clearly understood by the player based on the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect from the speaker 64.

  As shown in FIG. 144 (c), the second special notification type table is set so that the selected second special notification is different between the setting values 1, 3, 5 and the setting values 2, 4, 6. Yes. Specifically, if the second special notification counter TH is 1, at the setting values 1, 3, and 5, the second special notification A is selected at 60%, and the second special notification B is selected at 40%. On the other hand, even if the second special notification counter TH is 1, the second separate notification A is selected at 40% and the second special notification B is selected at 60% with the setting values 2, 4, and 6. If the second special notification counter TH is 2 to 5, with the setting values 1, 3 and 5, the second special notification A is selected at 80% and the second special notification B is selected at 20%. On the other hand, even if the second special notification counter TH is 2 to 5, with the setting values 2, 4 and 6, the second separate notification A is selected at 20% and the second special notification B is selected at 80%. If the second special notification counter TH is 6 or more, the second special notification A is selected at 100% with the setting values 1, 3, and 5, and the second special notification B is not selected. On the other hand, when the second special notification counter TH is 6 or more, the second separate notification B is selected at the setting values 2, 4 and 6 at 100%, and the second special notification A cannot be selected.

  That is, in the second special notification, the even / odd number of set values can be narrowed depending on the type thereof, and the number of executions of the second special notification increases as the value of the second special notification counter TH increases. The ease of narrowing down the even number / odd number is improved.

  As already described, in the configuration in which the lottery for the second special notification and the lottery for the first special notification can be performed in duplicate, if the winning lottery for the second special notification is won, It is configured not to win the lottery. That is, the second special notification is easier to execute than the first special notification.

  This is a setting value suggestion that allows the second special notification to narrow down even / odd setting values, while the first special notification suggests a setting value that can narrow the setting values high and low. While the second special notification is a set value suggestion that can be narrowed down by a plurality of executions, the first special notification is a set value suggestion that may be narrowed down by a single execution. This is due to the difference. That is, because of the difference as described above, the second special notification can gradually narrow down the set value and can enjoy the game for narrowing down the set value for a long time. If it is set as the structure which gives priority and performs 2 special alerting | reporting, the game which performs the said narrowing down can be implement | achieved suitably.

  After executing the second special notification type lottery process in step S7005, the process proceeds to step S7006 to determine whether or not the result of the type lottery process is the second special notification A. If it is the second special notification A, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the second special notification A is performed in step S7007, and then the second special notification setting process is terminated. If not the second special notification A, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the second special notification B is performed in step S7008, and then the second special notification setting process is terminated.

  As described above, even if it is not an increase in the number of games, even if the mode transition lottery is such that the mode transition as a result of the lottery may not affect the number of continuing games in the advantageous section If the configuration is such that the second special notification as the setting value suggestion is performed, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the mode transition lottery is performed in a situation where the excess flag is set.

  When the mode transition lottery is performed, the second special notification is not performed instead of the mode transition lottery, but the second special notification is performed together with the mode transition lottery. For example, an excess flag is set. In some situations, a transition to VB mode can occur and a transition to a specialized zone can also occur. In particular, the specialized zone is a zone where it is easy to win the extra lottery, and in a situation where the excess flag is set, it can be said that the first special notification is easily performed. In other words, especially for specialized zones, instead of performing the transfer lottery, the setting value suggestion is not performed, but the setting value suggestion is performed together with the transfer lottery, thereby allowing a transition to a zone where setting value suggestion is easy to perform. However, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a set value suggestion as a price for the addition of the number of games (addition of five games) accompanying the transition to the specialization zone is performed.

  Since the second special notification is a setting value suggestion in which the ease of narrowing down the set value differs depending on the number of executions thereof, it becomes easier to narrow down the set value when the excess flag is set earlier. . By doing so, it is possible to provide enjoyment when the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less relatively early.

<Modification 2>
In the present modification, a value corresponding to the number of additional games is stored in a predetermined area based on an additional opportunity that occurs in the situation where the excess flag is set. First, changes in the number-of-games extra lottery process and the extra number-of-games lottery process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the game number extra lottery process in this modification, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), a process for grasping the type of the specific combination is executed in step S7101, an extra lottery table is acquired in step S7102, and step S7103 is obtained. After the lottery is executed, the lottery process is completed by adding the number of games. That is, in this modified example, the extra lottery is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the excess flag.

  In addition game number lottery processing in this modification, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), processing for grasping the type of specific role is executed in step S7111, and an additional game number lottery table is acquired in step S7112. Then, after the number-of-games lottery is executed in step S7113, the added-on number-of-games lottery process is terminated. That is, in this modification, the lottery for the number of added games is also executed regardless of the presence or absence of the excess flag.

  With reference to FIG. 146, the process for adding the number of games in this modification will be described.

  First, in step S7201, it is determined whether an excess flag is set. If the excess flag is set, an additional game number addition process is performed in steps S7202 and S7203, and then this game number addition process is terminated. These steps S7202 and S7203 are the same processes as steps S6502 and S6503.

  If it is determined in step S7201 that the excess flag is set, the process advances to step S7204. In step S7204, a process of grasping the processing result of the extra game number lottery process, that is, a process of grasping the extra game number is performed. In step S7205, a process of adding the number of added games grasped in step S7204 to the number of annihilated games EG provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. After executing the process of step S7205, the process for adding the number of games is completed.

  In other words, in this modification, even if an extra opportunity occurs in the situation where the number of free games FG in the advantageous section is 0 or less and the excess flag is set, a lottery to determine whether or not to carry out the extra Or a lottery for the number of games to be added. Then, the result of the game number lottery is not added to the corresponding continuation number of the advantageous section, but is added to the separately provided disappearance game number EG.

  Next, the addition command setting process in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. The set command setting process includes step S6026 of the first specific combination process (FIG. 124), step S919 of the second specific combination process (FIG. 33), step S1006 of the third specific combination process (FIG. 34), and end determination process ( This process is performed in steps S1514 and S1518 of FIG. 41), step S1604 of the special zone processing (FIG. 42), and the like.

  In step S7301, it is determined whether an excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, processing for setting the target addition command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S7302, and then the setting processing for the addition command is terminated. In this case, the display control device 81 performs an extra notification effect.

  If it is determined in step S7301 that the excess flag has been set, the process advances to step S7303 to execute processing for grasping the number of annihilated games EG. And the process which acquires a 3rd special information lottery table is performed in step S7304, and a 3rd special information lottery is performed in step S7305.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (a), the third special notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the third special notification lottery differs according to the value of the number of annihilated games EG. The larger the is, the easier it is to win. More specifically, when the number of annihilated games EG is 0, that is, when the winning number is not added and won in the current game number adding lottery, the third special notification lottery is not won. When the number of annihilated games EG is 1 to 50, that is, when the number of games of 1 to 50 games is selected as the number of additional games this time, the third special notification lottery is won with a probability of 10%. When the number of disappearing games EG is 51 to 100 and the number of games of 51 to 100 games is selected as the number of additional games this time, the third special notification lottery is won with a probability of 30%. If the number of disappearing games EG is 101 to 200, and the number of games of 101 games to 200 games is selected as the number of additional games this time, the third special notification lottery is won with a probability of 50%. When the number of annihilated games EG is 201 or more and the number of games of 201 games or more is selected as the number of additional games this time, the third special notification lottery is won with a probability of 80%. That is, it is set so that the third special notification lottery is more likely to be won as the increase in the number of games should occur.

  After the third special notification lottery is executed in step S7305, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery is won in step S7306. In the case of winning, the third special notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S7307. If a negative determination is made in step S7306, or after the process of step S7307 is executed, the process of clearing the number of erasured games EG to the initial value (0) is executed in step S7308, and then the setting process of the addition command is completed. To do.

  The display control device 81 performs a process for executing the third special notification based on the reception of the third special notification command. Since the processing configuration of this process is substantially the same as the first special notification setting process and the second special notification setting process, the figure is omitted, but the set value is grasped and the third special notification type table is acquired. After performing the third special notification type lottery, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute the corresponding type of third special notification.

  For example, the third special notification A, the third special notification B, the third special notification C, the third special notification D, the third special notification E, and the third special notification F are set as the types of the third special notification. In addition, the display contents of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect of the speaker 64 are set to be different from each other, so that the player can grasp which type of third special notification.

  In the third special notification type table, as shown in FIG. 148 (b), the third special notification type selected according to the set value is set to be different. For example, if the set value is 1, the third special notification A is selected with a probability of 100%, and the other third special notification B to third special notification F are not selected. If the set value is 2, the third special notification B is selected with a probability of 60%, the third special notification C is selected with a probability of 40%, and the other third special notifications are not selected. If the set value is 3, the third special notification A is selected with a probability of 55%, the third special notification C is selected with a probability of 45%, and the other third special notifications are not selected. If the set value is 4, the third special notification B is selected with a probability of 50%, the third special notification C is selected with a probability of 45%, and the third special notification D is selected with a probability of 5%, Other third special notifications are not selected. If the setting value is 5, the third special notification A is selected with a probability of 45%, the third special notification C is selected with a probability of 45%, the third special notification D is selected with a probability of 8%, The third special notification E is selected with a probability of 2%, and other third special notifications are not selected. If the set value is 6, the third special notification B is selected with a probability of 40%, the third special notification C is selected with a probability of 45%, and the third special notification D is selected with a probability of 11%, The third special notification E is selected with a probability of 1%, the third special notification F is selected with a probability of 3%, and the third special notification A is not selected.

  That is, when the third special notification A is selected, it is determined that the set value is any one of 1, 3 and 5, and when the third special notification B is selected, the set value is 2, 4, 6 It is determined that When the third special notification C is selected, it is determined that the set value is 2 or more. When the third special notification D is selected, it is determined that the set value is 4 or more. It is determined that the set value is 5 or more in the 3 special notification E, and that the set value is 6 in the third special notification F. Therefore, the set value can be narrowed down by combining the types of the third special notification.

  As described above, the number of games that should have been added is temporarily stored in the number of annihilated games EG, and then the third special notification execution lottery is performed according to the value of the number of annihilated games EG. It becomes possible to adjust the profit and loss with the privilege (the number of games) that the player was supposed to obtain according to the ease of execution of the third special notification.

<Modification 3>
In the present modification, in the second modification, a third special notification lottery is performed based on the set value together with the value of the number of disappearing games EG. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the addition command in the present modification.

  In this modification, if it is determined in step S7401 that the excess flag is set, the number of annihilated games EG is determined in step S7403 and then the set value is determined in step S7404. And after performing the process which acquires a 3rd special information lottery table in step S7405, a 3rd special information lottery is performed in step S7406.

  As shown in FIG. 150, the third special notification lottery table in the present modification is set so that the winning probabilities of the third special notification lottery are different, using the value of the number of annihilated games EG and the set value as parameters. Yes. For example, if the number of annihilated games EG is 50 or less, if the set value is 1, it is won with a probability of 1/256, and if the set value is 6, it is won with 6/256. Even if it is the number of disappearing games EG, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the third special notification lottery. Further, the same setting value is set so that the winning probability of the third special notification lottery increases as the value of the number of annihilated games EG increases.

  In the addition command setting process, the processes in step S7402 and steps S7407 to S7409 are the same as the processes in step S7302 and steps S7306 to S7308, and the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, by using not only the value of the number of annihilated games EG but also the set value as the parameter of the third special notification lottery itself, the number of prediction branches for the set value when various third special notifications are performed is increased. The game that predicts the set value from the third special notification can be made heavy.

  More specifically, when any third special notification is performed, it means that the third special notification lottery is won regardless of the set value, in other words, the number of free games FG is 0. The case where the third special announcement was not made in spite of the fact that the special role was won in the following circumstances means the case where the extra lottery was not won or the number of extra games that were won in the extra lottery In addition to the case where there are few, there are cases where the set value is low. That is, in any third special notification, the fact that the third special notification is performed can be a weight for predicting that the set value is high. Then, assuming that the player desires that the setting value is high, even if the type of the third special notification may suggest a low setting that is not desirable for the player, the third special notification is Due to the fact that it is being performed, it is determined that the setting is not the low setting but the high setting, and the determination becomes dull, and the enjoyment of the game for predicting the set value increases.

<Modification 4>
In the second and third modified examples, the third special notification is performed every time when a specific combination is won (when an extra character is generated). However, in the present modified example, the third special notification is performed when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. . FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the second section display process in the present modification.

  In step S7501, it is determined whether the section display is being displayed. If not, the second section display second process is terminated. If it is being displayed, an advantageous segment game number AG is added in step S7502, and a remaining game management process is executed in step S7503. In step S7504, it is determined whether or not the advantageous segment game number AG has reached the upper limit (1500). If the upper limit has been reached, in step S7505, processing is performed to grasp the total number of extinguished games TEG provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The total number of annihilated games TEG corresponds to the number of annihilated games EG in the third modification, and is a counter to which a value corresponding to the number of games corresponding to the extra winning is added.

  In other words, in the present modified example, the number of annihilated games EG is determined in the process (step S7205) of adding the number of added games to the number of erazed games EG in the game number adding process (FIG. 146). Instead, a process of adding the number of games to the total number of extinguished games TEG is performed. Further, in this modification, when it is determined that the excess flag is set in the addition command setting process (steps S7301 and S7401), the output setting of the target addition command is not performed. It is assumed that each process (step S7303 to step S7308, step S7403 to step S7409) related to the third special notification is not performed.

  After grasping the total number of erasure games TEG in step S7505, a third special notification lottery table is acquired in step S7506, and a third special notification lottery is performed in step S7507. In the third special notification lottery table, for example, the parameter referred to in the table of FIG. 148 (a) is replaced from the number of annihilated games EG to the total number of annihilated games TEG. That is, the larger the total number of annihilated games TEG, the easier it is to win the third special notification lottery.

  After the third special notification lottery is executed in step S7507, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery is won in step S7508. If the lottery is selected, a third special notification command is issued in step S7509. Perform the output setting process. If it is determined in step S7508 that the game has not been won, or after the process of step S7509 is executed, a process of clearing the total number of extinguished games TEG to the initial value (0) is performed in step S7510.

  Each process for the end of steps S7511 to S7513 is the same as the process of steps S6105 to S6107. Further, in this modified example, when both the positive determination is made in step S7514 and step S7515 and the advantageous section is ended before reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to steps S7511 to S7513. It is configured. In other words, the data initialization process (step S7513) is performed even when the advantageous section is ended before reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to clarify distinction with an advantageous area and a normal area.

  In the case where the third special notification is executed when the advantageous section is forcibly ended as described above, for example, the third special notification may be executed as the end effect of the attack mode, or from the end effect of the attack mode. Alternatively, the third special notification may be executed before or after, that is, separately from the end effect.

  By doing as described above, even if the number of single additional games is small, the third special notification is likely to be executed if an additional opportunity occurs. Therefore, for example, even if a specific role winning with a small average number of added games such as weak cherries can be given the meaning of winning, and the playability after the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less. Can be improved.

  In addition, the longer the number of games after the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less, the more likely the extra opportunity will be generated, so the third special notification is easily performed in the above configuration. Therefore, even if the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less early after the transition to the advantageous section, it is possible to fully enjoy the game after the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less. it can.

  In the above configuration, the third special notification lottery table is basically configured to use the numerical value of the table using the number of annihilated games EG. However, a table having the total number of annihilated games TEG as a parameter is separately provided. Also good. The total number of annihilated games TEG corresponds to the integrated value of the number of added games after the vacant game number FG becomes 0 or less, so it can be said that the value tends to be larger than the number of annihilated games EG. For example, it is assumed that the winning probability of the third special notification lottery differs depending on whether the value of the total number of annihilated games TEG exceeds the upper limit value of one additional game (300 games in the above example) or not. Further, it is possible to further secure the significance of being an added value obtained by adding a plurality of times.

  In addition, the third special notification is performed based on the total number of annihilated games TEG when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, and the third special notification is also performed based on the number of annihilated games EG when an additional opportunity occurs in the advantageous section. Good. In this case, the third special notification based on the total number of annihilated games TEG and the third special notification based on the number of annihilated games EG may have different contents, different lottery tables, or different types of tables.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, in a configuration that presents information that can be beneficial to the player by suggesting a set value as a price for providing the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, the game situation of the day when the upper limit number of games is reached is taken into account. Information that can be useful. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the second section display process in the present modification.

  In step S7601, it is determined whether or not the section display is being displayed. If not, the section display second process is terminated as it is. If it is being displayed, an advantageous section game number AG addition process is performed in step S7602, and a remaining game number management process is performed in step S7603. In step S7604, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit value (1500).

  If the upper limit value has been reached, processing for grasping the set value is executed in step S7605. In step S7606, by confirming the total number of games TG provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, processing for grasping the total number of games of the day is executed. The total number of games TG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of digested games on the day (total number of games). The counter is cleared to an initial value (0) based on, for example, a winning probability setting process, that is, a RAM clear process being performed, and the game number management process (FIG. 40) is activated once. Each time, it is increased by 1 in an increase process (not shown) regardless of the number of bets and the gaming state.

  In subsequent step S7607, a fourth special notification lottery table is acquired, and in step S7608, the fourth special notification lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 153, the fourth special notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the fourth special notification is different depending on the value of the total number of games TG and the set value. Specifically, the fourth special notification lottery is more likely to be won as the total game number TG is larger, and the fourth special notification lottery is more likely to be greater as the set value is higher. For example, when the total number of games TG is 2000 or less, if the set value is 1, the player wins with a probability of 1/256, and if the set value is 6, the player wins with a probability of 6/256. . If the total number of games TG is 4001 to 6000, if the set value is 1, it is won with a probability of 4/256, and if the set value is 6, it is won with a probability of 256/256. To do.

  After the fourth special notification lottery is executed in step S7608, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery is won in step S7609. If the notification lottery is won, a process of setting the fourth special notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S7610. If it is determined in step S7609 that the notification lottery has not been won, or after the process of step S7610 is executed, the section display second process is performed after the process for ending the advantageous section is performed in steps S7611 to S7613. Exit. If a negative determination is made in step S7604, whether or not the end conditions in steps S7614 and S7615 are satisfied is determined. If the advantageous section is to be ended, the processes in steps S7611 to S7613 are performed. The processing in steps S7611 to S7615 is the same as the processing in steps S7510 to S7514.

  Next, an attack mode end effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The attack mode end effect setting process is a process performed in step S2306 in the all stop effect setting process (FIG. 51), and is performed based on the reception of the attack mode end command. As described above, the attack mode end command is output in the game number management process and the attack mode end effect is performed based on the initialization process in step S7614 and the like. .

  In step S7701, the total payout number of medals in the advantageous section is grasped. The total payout number can be grasped by referring to the total payout number counter in the various counter areas 183b. The total payout number counter is a counter that is incremented according to the number of medals paid out as a game result in the advantageous section and is initialized when the advantageous section ends. In addition, it is good also as a structure which grasps | ascertains the number of sheets | corresponding to the number of acquisitions obtained by subtracting the number of insertions from the number of payouts by using a counter that performs a subtraction process in accordance with the number of bets placed at the start of each game.

  In a succeeding step S7702, a process for grasping the number of continued games in the advantageous section is performed. In step S7703, it is determined whether a fourth special notification command has been received. If not received, the process for setting the normal end effect is performed in step S7704, and then the setting process for the attack mode end effect is ended. As the normal end effect, as shown in FIGS. 155 (a) and 57 (b), the attack mode ends, and the number of continued games and the total number of payouts are displayed.

  If it is determined in step S7703 that the fourth special notification command has been received, a process for acquiring a fourth special notification type table is executed in step S7705, and a fourth special notification type lottery process is executed in step S7706. To do. Although a detailed description with reference to the figure is omitted for the fourth special notification type table, for example, even if the setting value suggests an even / odd number as in the second special notification type table of FIG. 144 (c). Good. As the fourth special notification, for example, a fourth special notification A illustrated in FIG. 155 (b) and a fourth special notification B illustrated in FIG. 155 (c) are provided. For example, the fourth special notification A and the fourth special notification B are configured to display the number of continued games and the total number of payouts in place of the winning correspondence character in the display contents of the first special notification A and the first special notification B. It is good.

  After the fourth special notification type lottery process is executed in step S7706, it is determined in step S7707 whether or not it is the fourth special notification A. If it is the fourth special notification A, the fourth special notification type is determined in step S7708. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute the notification A. If it is the fourth special notification B, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute the fourth special notification B in step S7709. After performing the process of step S7708 or step S7709, the setting process of the attack mode end effect is ended.

  By doing as described above, when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and is forcibly terminated, it becomes possible to suggest a set value in accordance with the game situation of the day.

  Here, if the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the player who thinks that it should have continued even more, will be motivated by the forced termination, and there is a high possibility that the game will end as it is Is also possible. In that respect, as shown in the present embodiment, if the number of empty games FG is 0 or less and a forced termination occurs, a setting value is suggested, for example, a high setting is predicted, etc. As described above, even in a situation where the willingness to play a game can be lifted, it can be used as a boost to the decision to continue the game. In particular, when forced termination occurs, it is assumed that a large number of medals have been acquired, and even if a player who has seen such a large number of medals estimates the set value, he or she is biased toward the high setting side. It is thought that it is easy to make the guess. In other words, it can be said that by giving a trigger for estimating the set value in accordance with forced termination, it is possible to inspire the feeling of continuing the game rather than a configuration in which only forced termination is performed.

  On the other hand, for example, when a forced termination occurs at a stage shortly after the opening of the game hall, etc., if a suggestion effect that suggests a high setting or a high setting is confirmed occurs, Although it is a boost for the game player to continue the game, the other person who sees the suggestion effect side by side may predict that the setting value of the other game table is low in relation to the game table. In other words, in a stage or situation shortly after the opening of the game hall, if a suggestive effect suggesting a high setting occurs, it can be said that the entire game hall is not preferable. On the other hand, it is considered that it is preferable for the sales strategy of the game hall to generate a suggestive effect that suggests a setting as high as possible at the end of the business hours of the game hall.

  Therefore, when suggesting a set value based on forced termination, a configuration that suggests the set value in consideration of the game situation of the day is a disadvantage (high) It is possible to suppress as much as possible the operation rate of other game machines is reduced due to the suggestion of setting, the operation rate of the game machine is reduced due to the suggestion of low setting, and the like.

  In particular, in this modified example, the total number of games TG is used to take into account the game situation of the day, so the conventional configuration is used as the configuration of the gaming machine, and the information is reflected in the suggestion of the set value. can do. In addition, the total number of games TG is not only managed on the gaming machine side, but the player can also grasp the data by using a data display installed in the game hall, and can be obtained from the data display. After weighting the information, it is possible to play a game for predicting the set value based on the suggestion notification of the set value, and the enjoyment of the game for predicting the set value is increased.

  Further, the total number of games TG is configured to be cleared to the initial value based on the winning probability setting process being performed, and is not cleared to the initial value simply by turning on / off the gaming machine. It is said. Therefore, when the game hall is opened or closed, the set value is not changed or updated, and if the winning probability setting process is not performed, the total number of games TG of the previous day is taken over. In this way, when the set value is predicted, it is possible to make the prediction in accordance with whether or not the set value is changed, and the enjoyment of the game to be predicted is further enhanced.

<Modification 6>
The fourth special notification lottery table may be changed as follows.

  FIG. 156 (a) shows a fourth special notification lottery table using not only the total number of games TG at the time of forced termination but also the time at the time of forced termination as a parameter. Specifically, not only when the total number of games TG is 2000 or less, but also when the time is before 13:00, if the set value is 1, the player wins with a probability of 1/256 and the set value is If it is 6, it will be won with a probability of 6/256. Further, not only when the total number of games TG is 4001 or more and 6000 or less, but when the time is before 19:00, if the set value is 1, the player is elected with a probability of 4/256 and the set value is 6 If so, it is won with a probability of 256/256.

  By doing as described above, for example, when the start of operation of this gaming machine is not after the opening in the morning but after the afternoon or after the evening, the forced termination condition is satisfied with a small total number of games. Even if it exists, when the time when the forced termination condition is satisfied is late, the fourth special notification as the setting value suggestion is easily performed. Therefore, it can be set value suggestion according to the business form and operation status in the hall.

  When referring to the fourth special notification lottery table, the time when forced termination is preferably determined from a predetermined internal clock or the like provided in the gaming machine.

<Modification 7>
FIG. 156 (b) shows a fourth special notification lottery table in which the fourth special notification as the setting value suggestion is more easily executed when the forced end condition is satisfied at a smaller number of games or earlier time. . That is, when the total number of games TG is 2000 or less, or when the time is before 13:00, if the set value is 1, it is won with a probability of 128/256, and if the set value is 6, it is 256 minutes. Wins with a probability of 4. On the other hand, if the total number of games TG is 2001 or more and 4000 or less, or if the time is before 16:00, if the set value is 1, it is won with a probability of 2/256 and the set value is 6. Win with a probability of 12/256.

  By doing as described above, when the forced termination occurs relatively early, it is likely to be determined that the setting is high, and the occurrence rate of the low setting suggestion notification is adjusted. Can do. In other words, as described above, even if a low setting value suggestion occurs in a situation where it is easily determined that the setting is high from the number of digested games and the number of medals, the impression that the setting is already high is received. As a player, it is considered that the game is likely to be continued without taking up the suggestion of the set value. Therefore, by generating a low setpoint suggestion in such a situation, among the total setpoint suggestion occurrence probabilities, only the low setpoint suggestion occurrence probability is less likely to occur. be able to.

<Modification 8>
In this modification, the fourth special notification lottery type table is made different according to the total number of games at the time when the forced termination condition is satisfied. Specifically, when the fourth special notification type table is acquired in step S7705, the total number of games is grasped by grasping the counter corresponding to the total number of games TG on the main control device 101 side. The fourth special notification type table to be acquired differs depending on whether the number is 2000 games or less and 2001 games or more.

  FIG. 157 (a) shows a fourth special notification type table acquired when the total number of games is 2000 games or less, and FIG. 157 (b) shows a case where the total number of games is 2001 games or more. The 4th special alerting | reporting kind table acquired is shown. In this modification, the fourth special notification A, the fourth special notification B, the fourth special notification C, the fourth special notification D, the fourth special notification E, and the fourth special notification F are set as the fourth special notification. The contents of the production are set so that they can be distinguished from each other. The fourth special notification A to the fourth special notification F correspond to the third special notification A to the third special notification F in FIG. 148 (b). That is, the fourth special notification A indicates an odd setting, and the fourth special notification B indicates an even setting. Further, the fourth special notification C indicates a set value 2 or more, the fourth special notification D indicates a set value 4 or more, the fourth special notification E indicates a set value 5 or more, and the fourth special notification F indicates a set value 6. Is.

  In the type table of FIG. 157 (a), the fourth special notification A to the fourth special notification C are easily selected, and the fourth special notification D to the fourth special notification F are not selected. That is, when the forced termination condition for the advantageous section is satisfied in a situation where the total number of games is small, even / odd setting value suggestion is easily selected.

  On the other hand, in the type table of FIG. 157 (b), not only the fourth special notification A and the fourth special notification B but also the fourth special notification C to the fourth special notification F can be selected. That is, if the total number of games is not small, it is easier to narrow down the set values based on the fact that the advantageous section forced termination condition is satisfied than in the case where the total number of games is small.

  By doing so, it becomes easier to narrow down the set values gradually by advancing the game (increasing the total number of games), and estimating the set values while advancing the game and aiming for medal acquisition Can provide fun to do.

  In particular, by adopting a configuration in which the type table is changed depending on the game situation, for example, it is possible to realize a completely different suggestion effect depending on the game situation, such as making the type table different in the morning and afternoon. The game can be kept motivated throughout the day, and the game can be motivated to continue.

<Modification 9>
In this modified example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the special section is set in the normal section after the advantageous section is ended by using the total number of annihilated games TEG. First, the section display second process in this modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  The processing from step S7801 to step S7807 is the same as the processing from step S6101 to step S6107 described above. Based on the fact that the forced termination condition for the advantageous section is satisfied, the process for terminating the display of the section indicator and the data initialization are performed. Process.

  The data initialization process in step S7807 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160.

  As already described, the data initialization process executed when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated is a process of initializing various counters, various flags, and the like related to the game that changes the advantageous degree by the push order notification. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 159, in the RAM 106 of the main controller 101, in addition to the winning flag storage area 106a, the stop information storage area 106b, the status information storage area 106c, various flag storage areas 106d and various counter areas 106e. Is provided. In each of these areas 106a to 106e, an area for storing various information (advantage information, specific information) used in the advantageous section and an area for storing various information (normal information) also used in the normal section, respectively. And are provided separately. More specifically, an area for storing various information used in the advantageous section and an area for storing various information used in the normal section are provided separately as areas that do not overlap each other.

  Specifically, the winning flag storage area 106a is provided with an advantageous section corresponding winning flag storing area 201 and a normal section corresponding winning flag storing area 202. The stop information storage area 106b is provided with an advantageous section corresponding stop information storage area 203 and a normal section corresponding stop information storage area 204. In the state information storage area 106c, an advantageous section corresponding state information storage area 205 and a normal section corresponding state information storage area 206 are provided. Various flag storage areas 106d are provided with various flag storage areas 207 corresponding to advantageous sections and various flag storage areas 208 corresponding to normal sections. The various counter areas 106e are provided with various counter areas 209 corresponding to advantageous sections and various counter areas 210 corresponding to normal sections.

  Of these, flags for grasping that the additional conditions have been established, such as an area for storing flags for grasping various display modes such as a challenge mode flag and an attack mode flag, and a challenge mode extra flag and an attack mode extra flag. And an area for storing an excess flag are provided in the advantageous section corresponding various flag storage area 207. On the other hand, an area for storing a bet number flag for grasping the bet number of each game, an area for storing a freeze effect flag for grasping that a condition for generating a freeze effect is satisfied, and payout processing are performed. An area for storing a paying-out flag for grasping that it is in progress is provided in various flag storage areas 208 corresponding to the normal section.

  Also, an area for storing the number of precursor games G1, an area for storing the challenge mode continuation number G2, an area for storing the attack mode continuation number G3, an area for storing the advantageous section game number AG, and an area for storing the number of free games FG Etc. are provided in various counter areas 209 corresponding to advantageous sections. On the other hand, the area for storing the total number of games TG, the area for storing the BB game number counter for counting the number of games between bonuses, the area for storing the paid-out medal counter for counting the number of paid-out medals, etc. These are provided in various counter areas 210 corresponding to normal sections.

  In the data initialization process in the present modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 160, a process for initializing the advantageous section corresponding winning flag storage area 201 is performed in step S7901. In a succeeding step S7902, a process for initializing the advantageous section corresponding stop information storage area 203 is performed. In the subsequent step S7903, processing for initializing the advantageous section corresponding state information storage area 205 is performed. In a succeeding step S7904, a process for initializing the advantageous section corresponding various flag storage area 207 is performed. In a succeeding step S7905, processing for initializing various counter areas corresponding to the advantageous section 209 is performed. In step S7906, information or parameters relating to other advantageous sections are initialized, and the data initialization process is terminated.

  That is, in the data initialization process executed based on the fact that the favorable section end condition is satisfied, the various areas 201, 203, 205, 207, and 209 related to the advantageous section are initialized, while the data related to the advantageous section is related. No initialization processing is performed for the various areas 202, 204, 206, 208, and 210 that are not used or are distinguished without distinguishing between the normal section and the advantageous section. As described above, the various areas related to these advantageous sections and the various areas not related to the advantageous sections or used without distinguishing between the normal section and the advantageous sections are provided as separate areas so as not to overlap. Therefore, when the initialization process as described above is performed, an error that the area that should be initialized is not initialized or an area that should not be initialized is generated. Is suitably suppressed.

  Returning to the description of the second section display process, after the data initialization process is performed in step S7807, the special section setting process is performed in step S7808, and then the second section display process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S7804, it is determined in step S7809 or step S7810 whether an advantageous section end condition is satisfied. If the end condition is satisfied, steps S7805 to S7808 are performed. After performing the above process, the section display second process is terminated. If the end condition is not satisfied, the section display second process is ended without performing the processes in steps S7805 to S7808. Note that the processing in step S7809 and step S7810 is the same as the processing in step S6108 and step S6109.

  The special section setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S8001, a process of grasping the total number of extinguished games TEG is performed. Here, the total number of annihilated games TEG is stored in the normal section corresponding counter area 210 in the RAM 106, as shown in FIG. For this reason, even if the data initialization process is performed, the total number of disappeared games TEG is not initialized. In other words, when the number-of-games addition process is performed in the situation where the number of free games FG is 0 or less, the number of additions is added to the counters of the various continuation numbers in the various counter areas 209 corresponding to the advantageous sections such as the attack mode continuation number G3. Instead of this, a value corresponding to the total number of annihilation games TEG in the various counter areas 210 corresponding to the normal section is added.

  In other words, in this modification, when an additional opportunity occurs, when executing processing for storing the number of additional games as information used in the advantageous section in various areas for the advantageous section, and the number of additional games, There is a case where processing is stored in various areas for the normal section as the total number of disappeared games TEG as information used also during the normal section, and whether or not the number of free games FG is 0 or less, that is, exceeded The process for determining whether or not the flag is set can be said to be a process for selecting which area to perform the storage process. Thus, in this modification, it is possible to vary the area for storing information on the events that occurred during the advantageous section depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag. In this way, it is possible to take over the information of the event that occurred in the advantageous section to the normal section, on the premise that the initialization process is performed at the end of the advantageous section.

  In the subsequent step S8002, processing for acquiring a special section table from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. Here, the special section is provided as a section where a set value suggesting effect is likely to occur in the normal section after the advantageous section ends. As shown in FIG. 162 (a), the special section table is set so that the number of games in the special section varies according to the value of the total number of annihilated games TEG. Specifically, if the total number of annihilated games TEG is 0, no special section is set. If the total number of annihilated games TEG is 1 to 50, a special section of 10 games is selected, and the total number of annihilated games TEG is 51. If it is ˜100, a special section of 30 games is selected. For example, a longer special section is selected as the value of the total number of annihilated games TEG is larger.

  After the number of games in the special section is specified in the processes in steps S8001 and S8002, in step S8003, a process corresponding to the specified number of games is input to the special section game number PG. In step S8004, it is determined whether or not the input special section game number PG is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, a process of setting a special section flag is performed in step S8005, and the process proceeds to step S8006. The special section command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The special section game number PG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the special section, and the special section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the game is a special section. The special section command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the section is a special section.

  When it is determined in step S8003 that the number of special section games PG is 0, or after the process of step S8006 is executed, the process proceeds to step S8007. In step S8007, a process of clearing the total number of extinct games TEG to the initial value (0) is performed. Thereafter, the special section setting process is terminated. That is, when the total number of erasure games TEG is 0 at the end of the advantageous section, the special section flag is not set and is not set to the special section.

  In the special section in this modification, a push order notification effect is generated when a predetermined special replay is won. As shown in the second embodiment and the like, the special replay is different in the type of replay result to be awarded depending on the stop order, but the privilege that is given even if any replay result is won, As a result, the game is replayed, and a game state transition such as an RT state does not occur.

  FIG. 163 shows a normal gaming state lottery table in the present modification. In this modification, the special replay 1 and the special replay 2 can be won as a special replay in the normal gaming state. The special replay 1 and the special replay 2 are as described in FIG. 95 and FIG. 96, and the special replay 1 is an overlapping role of the first replay, the ninth replay, and the eleventh replay to the fifteenth replay. The special replay 2 is an overlapping role of the first regame, the tenth regame, and the fifteenth regame. Depending on the stopping order, the replays to be awarded differ, and the replay winnings corresponding to each stop appearance of the right-down replay, black BAR tempered out, black BAR double tempered out, black BAR single aligned, black BAR double aligned To establish. The total value of the winning probability of special replay 1, special replay 2 and normal replay is set to be the same as the winning probability of normal replay in the normal gaming state lottery table in each of the above embodiments.

  Hereinafter, processing during the special section will be described.

  FIG. 164 (a) is a flowchart showing a game number management process in the present modification.

  In this modification, when it is determined in step S1401 that the bet number is 3, it is determined in step S8101 whether the specific section flag is set. If it is set, it is determined in step S8102 whether or not the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In the case of the normal game state or the first RT state, a process of subtracting 1 from the special section game number PG is performed in step S8103. Thereafter, it is determined in step S8104 whether or not the number of special section games PG has become zero. If it has become zero, a process of clearing the specific section flag is performed in step S8105. When a negative determination is made in step S8101, step S8102, or step S8104, or after the processing of step S8105 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1402.

  FIG. 164 (b) is a flowchart showing the push order processing in the present modification.

  In this modification, when a negative determination is made in step S4419, the process proceeds to step S8111. In step S8111, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game is the above-mentioned special replay 1 or special replay 2 winning. When either special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won, the process proceeds to step S8112 to determine whether or not the specific section flag is set. If the specific section flag is set, the push order notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S8113, and then the regular push order processing is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S8111 or step S8112, the push order process is terminated without setting the output of the push order notification command.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the special replay notification process in the present modification. The special replay notification process corresponds to the special RT notification process in the second embodiment. That is, this process is performed in step S4515 when it is determined that the special replay winning is determined in step S4514 of the push order notification process (FIG. 98).

  In step S8201, processing for grasping the set value is executed. In the subsequent step S8202, a process of acquiring the push order notification lottery table at the time of special replay winning is executed from the various table storage areas 182a. As shown in FIG. 162 (b), the push order notification lottery table at the time of special replay winning is set so that the occurrence rate of the push order notification effect varies depending on the set value, and the winning mode when the push order notification effect occurs is different. Has been.

  Specifically, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the push order notification effect will be generated, and the higher the set value, the black BAR single set or black BAR double when the push order notification effect is generated. It is set so that the rate at which the push order notification effect of the winning mode to be aligned is selected is increased. For example, if the set value is 1, a push order notification effect is generated with a probability of 25%, and a push order notification effect that is out of the black BAR double template is selected as the winning mode at the time of occurrence. If the set value is 2, the push order notification effect is generated with a probability of 25% as in the case where the set value is 1, but a push order notification effect in which a part of the black BAR single is selected is selected. Is done. The push order notification effect of black BAR single alignment corresponds to a suggestion effect that suggests a setting value of 2 or more. When the set value is 4 or more, when the push order notification effect is generated, the push order notification effect for black BAR double alignment is also selected, and the push order notification effect for black BAR double alignment has a set value of 4 or more. Corresponds to the suggested suggestion.

  In step S8203, the push order notification lottery is executed based on the push order notification lottery table acquired in step S8202. In such a lottery process, whether or not the push order notification is to be generated and the type of push order notification effect (corresponding winning mode) when it is generated are selected by lottery. Then, based on the lottery result, in step S8204, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the corresponding push order notification effect is performed.

  As described above, depending on the presence / absence of the excess flag, the number of games drawn on the basis of an additional opportunity is stored as an additional number of games, and the case of storing as the total number of extinguished games TEG is different for different storage areas. The number of games is subject to initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section, and the total number of extinguished games TEG is not subject to initialization processing. As a result, the initialization process was performed at the end of the advantageous section, and it occurred in the advantageous section within a range that does not contradict the purpose such as clearly showing the advantageous section with a section indicator or the like and not improving the extended performance. Event information can be taken over after an advantageous interval. Thereby, the gap between the advantageous section and the normal section, which can be generated by forcibly terminating the advantageous section, can be filled, and the linkage of the performance in both sections can be enhanced.

  Then, based on the value of the total number of extinguished games TEG, a special section in which a setting value suggestion effect is likely to occur after the end of the advantageous section is set. As a result, the occurrence of an unfavorable event for the player, such as the occurrence of an extra opportunity in the situation where the excess flag is set in the advantageous section, makes it possible to estimate the set value thereafter, It can be used to compensate for the above undesirable events.

  In particular, even if an extra opportunity occurs when the excess flag is set, it will eventually be forcibly terminated with the upper limit number of games, so normally, the intention to continue the game will collapse as the extra opportunity occurs. It is considered that the game will be terminated as it is when it is forcibly terminated. On the other hand, the longer a special section can be set as the extra opportunity arises, so the game is not finished immediately after the forced termination, but at least the special section is digested before the game is finished. Can be encouraged. Then, if a suggested setting value suggestion for the player occurs during the special section, there is a high possibility that the game will continue as it is, and this can lead to an improvement in the operating rate.

  In this modified example, since the setting value suggestion is performed based on the stop appearance (stop order) of the special replay, an impression is given as if the player suggested a suggested setting value by his / her own operation. It is easy, and the degree of attention to the effect for performing such setting value suggestion is suitably increased.

  In the special replay, where the stop appearance differs depending on the stop order, if the player does not want to generate a suggestion of the set value, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be operated in a stop order different from the notified stop order. . By doing in this way, it becomes possible to avoid that the suggestion of a setting value generate | occur | produces contrary to a player's intention. That is, for example, it may be considered undesirable for a player who already knows that the setting is high to make it known to the surrounding players that his or her gaming table is set high. In view of the above, by making it possible for the player to select whether or not to generate a setting value suggestion, it is possible to obtain the content of the effect as the player desires.

<Modification 10>
In this modification, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the push order notification effect is generated during the special section, the precursor game number table in the special section is made different. FIG. 166 (a) shows a bonus predictor game number table in the normal mode in a situation that is not in the special section, and FIG. 166 (b) shows a bonus predictor game number table in the normal mode in the special section. ing.

  FIG. 166 (a) is as described in FIG. 35, and the number of precursor games is set so that one of 1 to 32 games is selected. The number of predictive games that are easily selected is set differently depending on the contents of the bonus and overlapping advantageous sections. Specifically, it is easier to select the number of predictive games that are longer in the overlap win with the attack mode than in the overlap win with the challenge mode, and the overlap win with the super attack mode is more than the overlap win with the attack mode. It is easy to select a long precursor game number.

  As shown in FIG. 166 (b), during the special period, the number of precursor games is set to be selected from 0 to 4 games, which is shorter than the case of FIG. 166 (a). It is easy to reach the number of precursors. In addition, during the special section, the larger the total number of annihilation games TEG that triggered the setting of the special section, the easier it is to select the shorter number of precursor games, and the shorter precursor that the mode in which the winning combination is advantageous is more advantageous. The number of games is set so that it can be easily selected.

  More specifically, in the case of overlapping winning with the challenge mode, if the total number of erasure games TEG that became the trigger for setting this special section is 1 to 50, the number of precursor games of 4 games is selected, while the number of total annihilation games If the TEG is 201 or more, the number of precursor games of 0 game is selected. In addition, in the overlapping winning mode with the attack mode, if the total number of erasure games TEG that became the trigger for setting this special section is 1 to 50, the number of precursor games of 2 games or 4 games is selected, while the total annihilation game If the number TEG is 201 or more, the number of precursor games of 0 game is selected.

  In this case, for example, as the special interval flag, the special interval flag 1 is set if the total annihilation game number TEG is 1 to 50 according to the value of the total annihilation game number TEG, and the total erasure game number TEG is 51 to 100. If so, the special section flag 2 is set, the special section flag 3 is set if the total number of extinction games TEG is 101 to 200, the special section flag 4 is set if the total number of extinction games TEG is 201 or more, etc. Then, it is preferable that the total number of annihilation games TEG at the time of setting the special section can be discriminated afterwards.

  As described above, the superiority of the special section is not limited to the suggestion of the set value, and can be secured by the number of bonus predictive games. In particular, when a bonus such as the first BB is won, the player's loss is less when the bonus win is established quickly because the bonus won't be duplicated. In view of this, it is possible to compensate for the invalidation during the advantageous section by making the number of precursor games easy to shorten during the special section as described above.

<Modification 11>
In this modification, a special notification is executed based on the occurrence of an extra game number FG of 0 or less. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the game number addition processing in the present modification.

  In step S8301, it is determined whether the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is set, the game number adding process is terminated. If the excess flag is not set and the number of free games FG is still 0 or more, the process proceeds to the addition process after step S8302. In step S8302, processing for grasping the number of additional games this time is executed. Then, in step S8303, by grasping the number of free games FG, whether or not the number of additional games this time is equal to or greater than the number of free games FG, that is, whether or not the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less due to the current addition. Determine whether or not. If it is not less than or equal to 0, in step S8304, a process of adding the number of additional games to the target number of continuous games is performed, and then the process of adding the number of games is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less due to the addition of this time, in step S8305, after adding the number of additional games to the target number of continuous games, in step S8306, After the 1 special notification execution command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, the game number adding process is terminated.

  In this case, when the addition occurs, there are a case where the addition command is output and a case where the addition command and the first special notification execution command are output. When the extra command and the first special notification execution command are received, for example, as shown in FIG. 168 (a) and FIG. 168 (b), the number of extra games together with the first special effect A and the first special effect B It is good also as a structure which displays a character and grasps | ascertains that the addition has occurred and the setting value suggestion at the same time.

  Regarding the extra that triggers the setting of the excess flag, at least for the excess of the upper limit number of games, the benefits cannot be fully received. It is possible to compensate by presenting information that can be beneficial to the player, such as setting value suggestion. In addition, for example, when the number of empty games FG becomes less than or equal to 0 when adding up at the limit of the maximum number of games, the situation where there is no expectation for the occurrence of special effects in the subsequent games (the number of games is small), etc. However, the special notification can be suitably generated.

  Moreover, by making it possible to simultaneously grasp the information that the addition has occurred as described above (characters corresponding to the number of added games) and the setting value suggestion information (the first special notification A and the first special notification B). , It is possible to present closely related events that are favorable for the player, such as adding the information suggested by the set value, and to enhance the impression that the information suggested by the set value is useful for the player. Is possible. In other words, for example, it is assumed that luck is involved in the outcome of the game, and for a player who deems the high or low of the set value, even if the set value suggestion information is presented, it may not be any useful information. It is done. In that regard, as described above, by presenting the setting value suggestion information in association with the strong addition effect of the luck element, it is understood that the luck element is also reflected in the setting value suggestion, It is possible to make an impression that the set value suggestion is useful.

  It should be noted that the setting value suggestion information and the information that the addition occurred may not be presented at the same time, but the information that the addition occurred first is presented, and the setting value suggestion is presented later. In other words, it is only necessary to have a configuration in which at least a period in which both are presented in duplicate is presented such that the information is presented together with information indicating that the addition has occurred.

<Modification 12>
It is good also as a structure which displays on the auxiliary | assistant display part 65 grade | etc., The value of the disappearance game number EG and the total elimination game number TEG. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the third special notification setting process in the present modification. The third special notification setting process is a process that is executed instead of or in addition to the first special notification setting process, and is a process that is performed as a process of setting an extra effect.

  As already described, the third special notification is a special notification executed based on the number of annihilated games EG or the total number of annihilated games TEG. In this modified example, in the addition command setting process of FIG. 147, information on the number of annihilated games EG is set for the third special notification command and then output to the display control device 81. Therefore, the display control device 81 can grasp the number of additional games that should have occurred this time by receiving the third special notification command. In addition, it is good also as a structure which sets the information of the total disappearance game number TEG to a 3rd special alerting | reporting command.

  In step S8401, based on the received third special notification command, a process of grasping information corresponding to the number of disappearing games EG is performed. In step S8402, the number of added games that should have occurred this time is grasped. In step S8403, an additional effect is generated with the corresponding number of additional games. In this case, it may be an effect similar to the normal addition effect (for example, FIG. 136 (b)), or different from the normal addition effect by, for example, changing the background or the like. It is good also as a structure which a player can grasp | ascertain. In step S8404, after updating the special game number display unit TGH, the third special notification setting process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 170 (a), the special game number display unit TGH displays a remaining game number display in the auxiliary display unit 65 that displays the remaining number of games in an advantageous section (such as an attack mode) including the upper limit of 1500 games. The part GH is set in a different area, and more specifically, a special game number display part TGH is provided in an area adjacent to the normal game number display part GH. For this reason, when the user tries to visually recognize the normal game number display part GH, the special game number display part TGH is likely to be easily noticed, and the special game number display part TGH is provided in an area that is difficult for the player to overlook. In addition, any display part GH and TGH are set to the area | region which does not overlap with a pushing order alerting | reporting effect.

  Further, the counter for displaying the number of games in the special game number display section TGH is set to be different in color, size, shape, etc. from the counter for displaying the number of games in the normal game number display section GH. It is easy to give an impression that the contents of the counters of the parts GT and TGH are different. Moreover, the counter that displays the number of games in the special game number display unit TGH is displayed larger than that of the normal game number display unit GH, and the counter of the special game number display unit TGH is more conspicuous. Instead, it is easy to give an impression that is meaningful content for the player.

  Here, the normal game number display section GH is updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the advantageous section. That is, every time one game is consumed, the counter of the normal game number display section GH is updated as a counter obtained by subtracting one by one. On the other hand, the counter of the special game number display section TGH is updated based on the occurrence of an extra opportunity, and is not subtracted when the game is consumed. In particular, when the special game number display portion TGH is updated, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), it is updated so that the counter is incremented instead of being subtracted based on the occurrence of an extra opportunity. Is done. Therefore, compared with the counter of the normal game number display unit GH being subtracted, the counter of the special game number display unit TGH is a counter that increases as it approaches the end of the advantageous section. It is easy to be reminded that some kind of beneficial event will occur, and an effect of relieving the feeling of loss when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated can be expected.

  Also in this modified example, a setting value suggestion is performed according to the value of the total number of annihilation games TEG at the time of forced termination of the advantageous section (a configuration in which a setting value suggestion is performed as an end-time effect, or set by setting a special section Value suggestion). That is, in fact, as the value of the special game number display portion TGH increases, it becomes easier for the player to present useful information, and a game effect that matches the player's expectation can be achieved.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the upper limit game number is provided in the advantageous section, if an increase exceeding the upper limit game number occurs, normally, the player will not make an increase exceeding the upper limit game number meaningless. Therefore, it is considered that it is not desirable to know that the extra has occurred and the number of extra games. Based on that premise, it is a normal idea to hide or not inform the player about the occurrence of extras and the number of extra games in order to prevent them from being realized by the player as much as possible. is there.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the present embodiment, such an increase has occurred and the number of added games is meaningful, and the setting value is suggested from the value displayed by the special game number display unit TGH. The game can be performed while expecting to be performed. In this way, by deliberately displaying the number of games that are not normally displayed, it is possible to suitably realize a game that suggests a setting value based on the number of games.

  Moreover, since it is displayed intentionally in this way, even if the setting value is not suggested, the player predicts that it will be displayed with some meaning. It is thought that the game will be played. In other words, since it is intentionally displayed, it can be expected that the player himself / herself predicts the significance and benefits of the display, and enjoys the prediction itself.

  The special game number display section TGH may be displayed at the end of the advantageous section such as the end effect of the attack mode. In this way, the player can calculate the total number of continued games and the total number of medals when the advantageous section is not forcibly terminated from the special game number display section TGH. It is also possible to make it a story of a memorable story with a friend, such as having won a medal.

<Modification 13>
In the present modification, notification is made using the relationship between the actual number of remaining advantageous section games ZG and the number of remaining games on the display. FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the actual advantageous section remaining game number ZG and the remaining game number on the display.

  In this modification, as a predetermined additional effect, a post-effect that notifies part or all of the number of additional games in a game after the game in which the additional opportunity has occurred is set. That is, the number of games in the advantageous section remaining game number ZG is first notified as the remaining number of games in the advantageous section, and the remaining number of games in the advantageous section remaining game number ZG is notified later. Assuming that the number of games on the side to be notified first is the display remaining number counter HG and the number of games on the side to be notified later is the post-counter BG, the advantageous section remaining game number ZG is added to the display remaining number counter HG. It becomes equal to the total value with the counter BG. The remaining display counter HG is decremented by 1 every time the game is consumed, and the post-counter BG is not subtracted unless a post-effect is generated even if the game is digested. Note that the display remaining number counter HG and the retrofit counter BG are both managed in the various counter areas 183b of the display control device 81, but may be counters managed in the main control device 101.

  For example, when the number of remaining games on the display reaches a predetermined number (1 in the present modification) during the digestion of the attack mode, that is, the display remaining number counter HG is a predetermined number (1). When this happens, a post-production effect occurs. In the post-production effect, for example, as in the case of the super-production effect, notification is made that the number of games (150 in the figure) corresponding to the post-addition counter BG (150) has been added. As a result, the added-on counter BG is subtracted by the notification amount (becomes 0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated by adding the notification amount due to the added-on effect, and the display is also displayed. The value corresponds to the counter HG (in the figure, one game is digested to 150).

  A process for performing the post-production will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173. FIG. 172 shows an extra effect setting process in this modification, and FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing an extra effect setting process. The post-loading effect setting process is performed by other processes in the effect setting process (FIG. 43) in the display control device 81.

  In the added effect setting process, if it is determined in step S8501 that the first special notification command has not been received, a process of grasping the added game number is performed in step S8502. In step S8503, a post lottery process is executed. The post-loading lottery process is a lottery process for determining whether the number of games to be added this time is notified in the game or in the subsequent game, that is, whether the game is post-loaded. For example, the ratio to be added later is set differently depending on the type of the specific combination.

  In a succeeding step S8504, it is determined whether or not a winning lottery is performed. If not elected, that is, if it is determined that the current number of games to be added is notified in the game, the process proceeds to step S8505, and processing for adding the current number of added games to the display remaining number counter HG is performed. Thereafter, in steps S8506 to S8511, the lottery of the execution timing of the extra notification effect and the setting of the extra notification effect are performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of additional games this time is to be notified in a later game, processing for setting an additional flag in various flag storage areas 183a is performed in step S8512. If the post-loading flag is already set in step S8512, the state is maintained. Then, in step S8513, the process of adding the current number of added games to the added counter BG is performed, and then the setting process of the added effect is ended.

  When the first special notification command is received in step S8501, the first special notification setting process is performed in step S8514. The first special notification setting process in this modification will be described later.

  In the post-installation effect setting process, it is determined in step S8601 whether or not the remaining display counter HG is 1 as a predetermined value. As described above, the remaining display counter HG is decremented by 1 by a subtraction process (not shown) every time one game is consumed during the advantageous period, and the display on the auxiliary display unit 65 is also updated in accordance with the subtraction process. Is done. If the remaining display counter HG is 1, it is determined in step S8602 whether or not the post-add flag is set. When the display remaining number counter HG is not 1 or when the retrofit flag is not set, the retrofit effect setting process is ended as it is.

  When the display remaining number counter HG is 1 and the retrofit flag is set, processing for grasping the value of the retrofit counter BG is executed in step S8603. In step S8604, the number of games to be added later this time is determined by lottery. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether to report all the post-mounting counter BG as a post-production effect or to notify a part of the post-mounting counter BG as a post-production effect. The lottery may be made all or part of the lottery counter BG depending on the value of the post-loading counter BG. In addition, in this modification, it is set as the structure which alert | reports all as post-production in any case.

  In the subsequent step S8605, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that an additional effect of the number of games for the notification is performed. In the subsequent step S8606, a process of adding the value of the post-counter counter BG for the notified amount to the display remaining number counter HG is performed. Then, in step S8607, a process of subtracting the value added to the notification and display remaining number counter HG from the post-counter counter BG is performed, and in step S8608, the post-counter counter BG is 0. In step S8609, a process for clearing the post-loading flag is performed. In step S8608, when the retrofit counter BG is not 0, or after the process of step S8609 is performed, the retrofit effect setting process is terminated.

  In the configuration for performing the post-production effects as described above, for example, when a large amount of extra is added to the post-counter BG, the number of empty games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set. Even so, a specific event may occur in which it cannot be determined from the remaining number of games displayed that the number of remaining games has reached the upper limit. In this modified example, the specific event is used to eliminate the feeling of loss when winning the specific role.

  The first special notification setting process in this modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S8701, it is determined whether a post-installation flag is set. If the after-loading flag is not set, first special notification processing is performed in steps S8702 to S8707. The process of step S8702 to step S8707 is the same as the process of step S6701 to step S6706.

  If the post-add flag is set, the process advances to step S8708 to perform processing for grasping the post-add counter BG. In step S8709, the number of games to be added in a pseudo manner is determined by lottery. In this case, the number of pseudo-added games is set to the upper limit of the post-counter BG. For example, if the post-addition counter BG is 100, one of 100 or less games is selected by lottery.

  Specifically, for example, a lottery table similar to the extra game number lottery table in the normal case (when an extra is actually generated) in FIG. 131 is also stored in the display control device 81. Based on the lottery table and the current game result, the number of pseudo additional games is selected by lottery. If the number of games selected by the lottery is less than or equal to the post-addition counter BG, the number of games is determined as the number of games to be added this time. On the other hand, if the number of games selected by the lottery is greater than the post-counter counter BG, the value of the post-counter counter BG is determined as the number of games for this pseudo-addition. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the pseudo-addition exceeding the post-addition counter BG from being generated, as if the addition was actually performed, in relation to the specific combination that became the trigger for the addition. .

  In the subsequent step S8710, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to perform an extra effect with the number of pseudo extra games determined in step S8709. In this case, if it is set to the same effect as the extra effect generated at the normal time, it is possible to give a strong impression that the extra event has occurred with the current game result as an opportunity.

  In subsequent step S8711, processing for adding the notification amount to the remaining display counter HG is performed, and in step S8712, processing for adding the notification amount to the post-counter BG is performed. Then, in step S8713, it is determined whether or not the retrofit counter BG has become 0. If it has become 0, the retrofit flag is cleared in step S8714. If it is determined in step S8713 that the retrofit counter BG is not 0, or after the process of step S8714 is executed, the first special notification setting process is terminated.

  As described above, even if the number of vacant games FG becomes 0 or less, the pseudo-addition effect is performed by using the number of unreserved advantageous section remaining games ZG (for the added-on counter BG). With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the feeling of loss when an extra opportunity occurs in a situation where the number of free games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set.

  In particular, the pseudo-addition for the unreported part is performed within the range of the post-addition counter BG, or the actual addition lottery / additional game number lottery is performed. It is possible to reinforce the impression that it is an actual addition based on the winning of a specific role, and to make it feel pure joy to the fact that the pseudo addition is performed.

<Modification 14>
In the present modification, the set value suggestion is performed using the pseudo addition in the modification 13. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-addition game number lottery process in the present modification. The pseudo added game number lottery process is a process executed in step S8709.

  In step S8801, processing for grasping the set value is performed. In the subsequent step S8802, a set value suggestion lottery process is performed. The set value suggestion lottery process is a process of determining whether or not to perform a set value suggestion by lottery at the time of the pseudo addition. Specifically, a pseudo-addition game number table for setting value suggestion is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and whether or not the pseudo-addition is performed with the number of games including the content of the setting value suggestion is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 176 (a), the setting value suggesting pseudo-addition game number table is set so that the number of selected pseudo-addition games differs depending on the setting value. For example, the pseudo-addition effect having the same number of games as the post-add counter BG as the number of pseudo-addition games can be selected with all set values, but is set so that the higher the setting, the easier it is to select. Further, the pseudo-addition effect of the number of games, for example, by adding 10 as the first number with respect to the post-addition counter BG is selected by setting 1 to setting 3, and is set so that the lower setting is easier to select. For example, the pseudo-addition effect of the number of games obtained by adding 56 as the second number to the post-addition counter BG is set to be selected in the setting 5 and the setting 6, respectively. For example, the pseudo-addition effect of the number of games obtained by adding 77 as the third number to the post-addition counter BG is set to be selected only by setting 6.

  After performing the set value suggestion lottery process in step S8802, it is determined in step S8803 whether or not a pseudo-addition effect for each number of games including the content of the set value suggestion is won. In the case of winning, in step S8804, processing for setting the number of games corresponding to the winning content as the number of pseudo added games at this time is performed, and then the pseudo added game number lottery processing is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 176 (a), in the pseudo-addition game number table for setting value suggestion, any setting value is selected that is not set suggestion that does not select the number of games including the contents of the setting value suggestion. Is set to get. When the setting suggestion is selected, the number of games for the pseudo-addition effect is determined by lottery by the following processing.

  That is, if the result of the lottery process in step S8802 is not above the suggested setting value, a negative determination is made in step S8803, and in this case, the process proceeds to step S8805. In step S8805, a normal pseudo extra game number lottery process is performed. The normal pseudo added game number lottery process is the same as that described in the modified example 13, and based on the lottery table similar to the normal added game number lottery table in FIG. 131 and the current game result, The number of pseudo-addition games is selected by lottery.

  In a succeeding step S8806, it is determined whether or not the number of games selected in the step S8805 is equal to or less than a post-loading counter BG. If the post-add counter BG is exceeded, in step S8807, the process of setting the value of the post-add counter BG as the number of games for the pseudo add-on is performed, and then the pseudo add-on game number lottery process is terminated. If the number of games selected in step S8805 is less than or equal to the post-addition counter BG, a process of setting the number of selected games as the number of games for the pseudo-addition in this step is performed in step S8808, and then the number of games for the pseudo-addition game is selected. The process ends.

  In this case, for example, when the upper limit value 1500 is obtained by adding the number of games notified in the additional effect (pseudo additional effect) to the total number of games and the remaining number of games, the number of pseudo additional games for suggesting the set value There is a possibility that the same number of games as the post-loading counter BG has been selected in the lottery. As described above, since the same number of games as the post-loading counter BG is easily selected as the setting is higher, it is possible to predict the higher setting. However, the same number of games as the added-on counter BG may be added when the number of games equal to or greater than the added-on counter BG is selected in the normal pseudo-added-game number lottery process. Then, it is only necessary to generate an additional effect of the same number of games as the post-addition counter BG, and the difficulty of predicting the set value is high, and the fun of the game is added.

  For example, in the extra game number table performed based on the strong cherry winning in the attack mode, the maximum number of games to be selected is set as 200 games (FIG. 131). For this reason, for example, if an addition effect of 250 games is generated as the number of games exceeding 200 games at the time of winning the strong cherry, it is highly likely that it is a pseudo-addition effect, and if the number of games is the same as the post-counter BG ( If it is added to the total number of games and the number of remaining games, an upper limit value will be obtained, resulting in an increase in the degree of expectation that is high.

  On the other hand, even if the same 250-game additional effect occurs, if it is triggered by a weak cherry win, the number of games within the range selected at the time of weak cherry is obtained (FIG. 131), and a temporary counter is assumed. Even if the number is the same as the number of BGs, the possibility that the number of games equal to or greater than the post-add-on counter BG is selected in the normal pseudo-addition game number lottery process cannot be denied.

  Also, in the above example, even if an extra effect exceeding 200 games occurs when the strong cherry is won, if the number is the number of games (260) obtained by adding the first number (10) to the post-addition counter BG, the setting is low. The possibility of being increased. On the other hand, if it is an extra effect triggered by the weak cherry winning, it cannot be declared that the setting is low.

  Here, when the number of empty games on the display ascertained from the total number of games and the number of remaining games on the display is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of additional games of one time as described above, When the same number of games is added, a clear understanding is made that the content of the setting value suggestion is included. On the other hand, when the number of empty games on the display is less than the upper limit of the number of additional games of one time, if the same number of games as the post-addition counter BG is generated, the content of setting value suggestion is included. Cannot be determined. In other words, in the situation where the number of empty games on the display is large, an extra effect including the content of setting value suggestion is more likely to occur, and even if the excess flag is set earlier, the setting value is accordingly increased. The merit that it becomes possible to enjoy the suggestion can be generated. Further, when the number of empty games on the display is less than the upper limit of one additional game, for a player who desires an additional effect including the content of setting value suggestion, an additional based on a specific role with a lower upper limit number of games (for example, (The addition based on chance A or chance B of 50 games at most). In other words, it is desired to add a game with a completely opposite sense as would normally be expected to increase the number of games, and it is possible to realize a novel gameplay that has never existed before.

  Also, for example, when the added effect that has been generated is the number of games obtained by adding the second number (56) or the third number (77) to the subsequent counter BG, a high setting is expected as described above. It is possible. However, this content also differs from the suggested content from the number of games that appear depending on the progress of the game, such as the number of remaining games on the display.

  For example, in FIG. 176 (b1), in a situation where the total number of games is 1045, the number of remaining games on the display is 102, and the post-addition counter BG is 353, the number of additional games that appear and the suggested contents of the set value Showing the relationship. In this case, if the number of added games is 353 games, a high setting is suggested, and if the number of added games is 363 games, a low setting is suggested. If the added game number is 409, setting 5 or setting 6 is suggested, and if it is 430, setting 6 is confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 176 (b2), even when the same total number of games is 1045, in the situation where the number of remaining games on the display is 56 and the post-addition counter BG is 399, the number of added games is 409. A game suggests a low setting. In other words, in the case of FIG. 176 (b1), the number of games suggesting setting 5 or setting 6 indicates a low setting in the situation of FIG. 176 (b2), and even if the same number of games is added. The suggested content will be completely different.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 176 (b3), even when the same total number of games is 1045, in the situation where the number of remaining games on the display is 35 and the post-addition counter BG is 420, the number of additional games is 430. A game suggests a low setting. In other words, in the case of FIG. 176 (b1), the number of games for which setting 6 is confirmed suggests a low setting in the situation of FIG. 176 (b3). Are completely different.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the specialized zone is different from those in the above embodiments. In each of the above-described embodiments, the process shifts to the special zone based on the fact that the shift to the special zone is based on the occurrence of the seventh replay prize during the VB mode, and the fact that the lottery for transition to the super attack mode is won. In the present embodiment, a pattern that shifts based on a specific combination winning in an attack mode or a VB mode will be described.

  FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the second specific combination process in the present embodiment. As already described, the second specific combination process is a process that is performed when the specific combination is won, and is a process that is performed when the display mode is mainly the attack mode.

  In the second specific combination process in the present embodiment, the process when the number of games in the attack mode is added and the lottery process is not won is different. In other words, the processing in steps S10001 to S10020 is the same as the processing in steps S901 to S920 described above. Based on the specific role winning, the lottery for shifting to the VB mode according to the rank of the attack mode, the rank of the attack mode, and so on. Promotion lottery or attack mode game number addition lottery is carried out, and when each of these lotteries is won, processing for granting the corresponding benefits (transition to VB mode, rank promotion, game number addition) Done.

  In the present embodiment, in step S10015, when it is determined that the number of games in the attack mode added in the previous step S10014 is not selected in the lottery process, the process proceeds to step S10021. In step S10021, a lottery for shifting to a specialized zone is executed. That is, in this embodiment, when a specific role is won during the attack mode, if the lottery for the transition to the VB mode or the number of games in the attack mode is not won, the lottery for the special zone will be performed. Done. In the special zone lottery process, a special zone transfer lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery for determining whether or not to shift the display mode to the special zone is performed using a lottery counter or the like. Do.

  As shown in FIG. 179, the special zone transfer lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the transfer lottery varies depending on the type of the specific combination.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the winning probability of the specific role in the lottery process (FIG. 16) is different from those in the above embodiments, and in particular, strong cherry (IV = 13), weak cherry (IV = 14), strong The winning probabilities of watermelon (IV = 15) and weak watermelon (IV = 16) are different. Specifically, in this embodiment, a strong cherry is won with a probability of about 1/600, and a weak cherry is won with a probability of about 1/200. Strong watermelons are won with a probability of about 1/300, and weak watermelons are won with a probability of about 1/60. In other words, in this embodiment, the probability of winning strong cherries and weak cherries (collectively referred to simply as “cherries”) is about 1/150. The collective probability of simply winning “watermelon” is about 1/50 in total, and watermelon is overwhelmingly easier to win than cherry. These cherries and watermelons are set so that there is no difference in the winning probabilities regardless of the set values. For example, the cherry winning probability of setting 1 and the cherry winning probability of setting 6 are the same, and the watermelon of setting 3 The winning probability and the setting 5 watermelon winning probability are common. The winning probabilities of other specific combinations are the same as in the above embodiments. The probabilities of game results other than the specific combination (normal replay, push order replay, push order bell, first BB, second BB, CB, miss, etc.) are the same as in the above embodiments.

  In the special zone transfer lottery table, for example, a special zone transfer lottery based on strong cherries wins with a probability of 5%, and a special zone transfer lottery based on weak cherries wins with a probability of 0.5%. On the other hand, the special zone transfer lottery based on strong watermelon wins with a probability of 15%, and the special zone transfer lottery based on weak watermelon wins with a probability of 5%. That is, the watermelon is set not only to have a higher winning probability as a game result than the cherry but also to have a higher winning probability in the special zone transfer lottery.

  The winning probability for each specific role in the special zone transfer lottery is set as a common winning probability regardless of the set value, and is set so as not to differ depending on the set value.

  In step S10022, based on the processing result in step S10021, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to the specialized zone has been won. If not won, the second specific combination process is terminated as it is. If it has been won, in step S10023, a special zone winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. Then, in step S10024, processing for obtaining a precursor game number table is performed, in step S10025, the number of precursor games is selected, in step S10026, the number of precursor games is set, and in step S10027, a precursor command is executed. After performing the process of setting, the second specific combination process is terminated. The processing from step S10024 to step S10027 is the same as the processing from step S906 to step S909, for example, and is a process for setting the precursor mode.

  Next, the third specific combination process in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As already described, the third specific combination process is a process performed when the specific combination is won, and is performed when the display mode is mainly the VB mode.

  In the third specific combination process in the present embodiment, the process when the lottery process is not won by adding the number of games in the attack mode is different as in the change in the second specific combination process. That is, the processing in steps S10101 to S10107 is the same as in steps S1001 to S1007 described above. If the number of games in the attack mode based on the specific role winning is added, and the winning lottery is won, Addition processing or the like is performed.

  In the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S10102 that the game number is added in the attack mode performed in the immediately preceding step S10101 and it is determined that the player has not been won, the process proceeds to step S10108. In step S10108, a lottery for shifting to a specialized zone is executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, when a specific combination is won during the VB mode, even when the lottery is not won by adding the number of games in the attack mode, the lottery to the special zone is performed. The special zone lottery process is the same as the process in step S10021, and is performed based on the special zone shift lottery table.

  Similarly to the special zone transfer lottery table in the attack mode, the special zone transfer lottery table in the VB mode has different winning probabilities for the transfer lottery depending on the type of specific role as shown in FIG. Is set to For example, a special zone transfer lottery based on strong cherries wins with a probability of 10%, and a special zone transfer lottery based on weak cherries wins with a probability of 1%. On the other hand, the special zone transfer lottery based on strong watermelon wins with a probability of 30%, and the special zone transfer lottery based on weak watermelon wins with a probability of 10%. That is, even in the VB mode, the winning probability of the special zone transfer lottery is set so that the watermelon is higher than the cherry. In addition, the winning probability of the special zone transfer lottery including other specific combinations is set to be higher in the VB mode than in the attack mode.

  As for the winning probability for each specific role in the special zone transfer lottery in the VB mode, as with the winning probability in the attack mode, any set value is set as a common winning probability, and does not vary depending on the set value. Is set to

  In step S10109, based on the processing result in step S10108, it is determined whether or not the transfer lottery has been won. The processing from step S10109 to step S10114 is substantially the same as the processing from step S10022 to step S10027, and is the processing for setting the precursor mode when winning the lottery for the transition to the specialized zone. However, in step S10113, the number of games obtained by adding the number of remaining games in the VB mode to the number of precursor games determined by the lottery process for the number of precursor games is set as the number of precursor games this time. In other words, the sign production that suggests the special zone winning is performed from the VB mode, but the special zone is shifted to after the VB mode ends. The remaining number of games in the VB mode may be set as the number of precursor games. In this case, the lottery process for the number of precursor games can be omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the transition to the specialized zone is performed based on the fact that the extra lottery based on the specific combination in the attack mode or the VB mode has been made. By adopting such a configuration, the profit that may be obtained when winning a specific role during the attack mode or VB mode is not limited to the direct addition of the number of games, and the expectation is further enhanced. It is done. In addition, the transition route to the specialized zone is diversified, and it is possible to greatly improve game play.

  As a process for shifting the display mode to the specialized zone, the mode transition notification process and the push order process in the present embodiment will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181. The specialized zone in the present embodiment shifts based on the establishment of the seventh re-game winning prize, as in the above embodiments. However, in the present embodiment, the lottery at the time of winning the BAR replay (the lottery for determining whether or not to win the seventh regame) is not performed and the lottery for the special zone is not performed, but as described above. Sometimes a transfer lottery is held. Then, when winning the transition lottery at the time of winning the specific role, the special zone winning flag is set so that the transition can be made, and then the push order for establishing the seventh re-game winning prize when winning the BAR replay 1 It is set as the structure which alert | report is implemented and transfers to a specialization zone.

  In other words, in the mode transition notification process in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 180, the number of precursor games has become 0 in steps S10201 to S10216 as in the processes in steps S1101 to S1116. Based on this, a process for shifting to the corresponding display mode and a process for generating a push order notification at the time of the push order winning combination serving as a transition to the corresponding gaming state are performed.

  In this embodiment, if it is determined in step S10213 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S10217. In step S10217, it is determined whether or not the special zone winning flag is set. If it is not set, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is. If set, in step S10218, processing for clearing the special zone winning flag is performed. In step S10219, processing for setting a special zone notification flag in various flag storage areas 106d is performed. The special zone notification flag is a flag for executing the push order notification corresponding to the seventh re-game winning prize. After executing the processing of step S10219, the special zone winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S10220, and then the mode transition notification processing is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the special zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so as to notify that the special zone has been won. The process may be executed, for example, under the condition that the special zone winning notification command is received in the other betting time effect setting process (step S1809) of the betting time effect setting process (FIG. 44). .

  In the push order combination process in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 181, in step S10301 to step S10313, the push for promoting to the second RT state or the third RT state is performed in the same manner as the process in steps S1201 to S1213. Notification in order (notifying the pressing order of the third re-game to the fifth re-game) and notification of pressing order not to fall to the first RT state (notifying the pressing order of the first re-game) are performed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S10309, in the present embodiment, in step S10314, it is determined whether or not the current game result is BAR replay 1 out of BAR replays. In the case of BAR replay 1, it is determined in step S10315 whether or not an attack notification flag is set, and in step S10316, it is determined whether or not a specialized zone notification flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S10315, the push order processing is terminated without performing the push order notification in the current BAR replay 1 winning game. If a negative determination is made in step S10316, the process proceeds to step S10307, and a process for notifying the pressing order for establishing the first regame winning is performed.

  If both the attack notification flag and the special zone notification flag are set, a push order notification corresponding to the seventh re-game winning is executed in step S10317, and the seventh re-game winning is performed in step S10318. The push order notification command including the stop order corresponding to is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the push order process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the relationship between the stop order at the time of winning BAR Replay 1 and the winning mode is such that the seventh replay prize, the first regame prize, and the sixth regame prize are different. It may be set (FIG. 23 (c)). As a result, when the stop operation is performed according to the push order notification corresponding to the seventh regame winning as described above, the seventh regame winning can be established more reliably. In this embodiment, when it is determined in step S1316 of the winning result corresponding process (FIG. 39) that the seventh regame winning is established, in step S1317, instead of determining the presence or absence of the VB notification flag, The presence / absence of the special zone notification flag is confirmed. That is, when the seventh regame winning is established and the special zone notification flag is set, the special zone start process (step S1318) is performed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid shifting to the specialized zone when the stop order happens to coincide with the stop order corresponding to the seventh re-game win.

  Also in the push order combination process of this embodiment, if a negative determination is made in step S10314, the process for the push order bell in steps S10319 to S10322 is the same as the process in steps S1219 to S1222. It is.

  Next, the setting process of the extra effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the setting process of the extra effect is a process executed by the display control device 81 based on the reception of the extra command from the main control device 101.

  In step S10401, it is determined whether the zone is in the specialized zone. If it is not in the special zone, it is determined in step S10402 to step S10413 whether or not the current addition is to be added, as in steps S8502 to S8513. Then, at any timing of the game, it is determined whether or not an extra effect is generated.

  In the following description, as a comparison with the subsequent effect, the additional effect generated in the extra winning game (the additional effect generated at a timing earlier than the subsequent effect) is also referred to as an immediate effect.

  If it is the addition command received during the special zone in step S10401, the special zone addition process is executed in step S10414, and then the extra effect setting process is terminated.

  Here, before explaining the specialization zone addition process, the effects in the specialization zone in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 185.

  As shown in FIG. 183 (a), when the transition to the specialization zone for addition is made, the auxiliary display unit 65 performs a character display of “increase in the addition probability”. Thereby, the player can clearly grasp that the winning probability of the lottery with the number of games added is high. Further, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the total number of games added in the specialized zone is displayed by the number of games added TUG in the specialized zone. The added game number TUG in the special zone is, for example, arranged at the upper center of the auxiliary display unit 65, and is particularly arranged at a position where it is easy for the player to catch the eye.

  Also in the present embodiment, in the specialized zone, not only the specific combination but also the push order bell and the push order replay are won for addition (FIG. 129). Therefore, an additional game number is generated for each game, a corresponding additional effect is performed, and the display of the additional game number TUG in the specialized zone is updated for each game.

  In the present embodiment, among specific roles in the specialization zone, in particular, for watermelon and cherry, when the immediate addition effect that performs the extra effect in the selected game is selected, and at the end of the specialization zone There may be a case where a post-stage effect in which the notification of the number of added games is carried over is selected.

  In the following explanation, as a comparison with the immediate installation effect and the post-installation effect other than in the special zone, the extra effect that is generated in the winning game in the special zone is also referred to as the immediate direct effect in the zone, and at the end of the special zone The extra effect that is generated (the extra effect that is generated at a later timing than the instant addition effect in the zone) is also referred to as an extra effect in the zone.

  As shown in FIG. 184 (a), for example, when the immediate riding effect in the zone is selected at the time of winning the watermelon, the adding effect described above is generated. This extra effect is an effect in which the winning notification of the extra winning and the content notification of the number of added games are performed simultaneously. On the other hand, when the post-stage directing effect in the zone is selected at the time of winning the watermelon, for example, the first post-character BUP1 as a character imitating the green treasure box corresponding to the watermelon is given as an announcement that the player has won the extra at the watermelon opportunity. In addition to the display, the character display “Get !!” indicates that the first extra character BUP1 (right to add based on a watermelon opportunity) has been acquired. Further, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), when the immediate riding effect in the zone is selected at the time of winning the cherry, the added effect described above is generated in the same manner as when the immediate riding effect is selected at the time of winning the watermelon. . On the other hand, if the post-stage production in the zone is selected at the time of winning the cherry, the second post-up character BUP2 as a character imitating a red treasure box corresponding to the cherry, for example, as a winning notification that the extra win is won by the cherry opportunity. In addition to the display, the character display “Get !!” indicates that the second extra character BUP2 (right to add based on the cherry opportunity) has been acquired. The first added character BUP1 and the second added character BUP2 have different display contents so that the player can identify them. Specifically, the characters have different colors as described above (BUP1). Is green, BUP2 is red, and the dot hatches are different in the figure).

  The acquired first added character BUP1 and second added character BUP2 are displayed side by side in the number of added games TUG in the special zone, as shown in FIG. 183 (b). In FIG. 183 (b), three first back-up characters BUP1 are displayed and one second back-up character BUP2 is displayed, indicating that the post-effect during the zone of the watermelon occurs three times. In addition, it is shown that a reverse effect occurs once in the zone of the cherry opportunity. Note that FIG. 183 (b) shows a situation in which the number of added games TUG in the special zone is updated to “150”, and this situation is immediately applied in the zone in each game in the special zone. Indicates that a total of 150 games have been added. More specifically, the situation where the display of FIG. 183 (b) is made means that 150 games are added in the specialized zone, and the post-stage effect in the zone is generated 4 times (3 times + 1 time). This means that there is a potential increase in the number of games even higher than the 150 games displayed in the additional game number TUG in the specialized zone.

  When the number of continued games in the special zone becomes zero and the special zone ends, a post-stage effect corresponding to the first post-character BUP1 and the second post-character BUP2 is generated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 185 (a), at the end of the final game in the specialized zone (after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, more specifically, after the medal payout is completed), The text “Judged Judge” is displayed, which indicates that the post-in-zone effect in the zone is generated as a content notification that has been notified by the first extra character BUP1 or the second extra character BUP2. Also, a first added game number BUG1 indicating the total number of additional games (additional) generated by the watermelon opportunity and a second additional game number BUG2 indicating the total number of additional games (additional) generated by the cherry opportunity. Is displayed. In FIG. 185 (a), the situation before the occurrence of the retrofit effect in the zone is shown, and the number of postscript games BUG1, BUG2 is 0 game.

  In the post-in-zone effect, a post-in-zone effect as a content notification is generated sequentially for each of the displayed post-characters BUP1, BUP2 (for example, every time the effect switch 66 is operated). For example, one of the plurality of displayed first added characters BUP1 moves to the approximate center of the auxiliary display unit 65 and is displayed in an enlarged manner, and the content corresponding to the winning notification indicated by the first added character BUP1. Notification is performed. As the content notification, for example, a display as if the treasure box shown as the first post-loading character BUP1 is opened and the contents pop out is displayed. The contents correspond to the number of added games, and FIG. 185 (b) shows that an additional (post) game has occurred. In this case, the display of the first added game number BUG1 is updated by adding 10 games, and the display of the added game number TUG in the specialized zone is also updated by adding 10 games. Thereafter, the content notification is sequentially performed for the remaining first added character BUP1.

  When the content notification for the first additional character BUP1 is completed, the content notification for the second additional character BUP2 is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), the second added character BUP2 moves to the approximate center of the auxiliary display unit 65 and is enlarged and displayed, and the winning notification shown by the second added character BUP3 is displayed. The content notification corresponding to is performed. For example, the treasure box shown as the second post-loading character BUP2 is opened, and a display is made as if the contents pop out. As in the case of the first added character BUP1, the content corresponds to the number of added games, and FIG. 186 (a) shows that 90 games were added (added). In this case, the second added game number BUG2 is updated by adding 90 games, and the display of the added game number TUG in the specialized zone is also updated by adding 90 games.

  When all the content notification (addition effect during the zone) about the addition that occurred during the specialization zone is completed, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), regarding the addition of watermelon and cherry that occurred during the specialization zone, A ratio notification indicating the selection ratio (selection ratio) between immediate and post-loading is performed.

  Specifically, with regard to the surcharge generated by the watermelon opportunity, the number of times that the content of the number of added games was notified in the game that won the watermelon (number of immediate additions) and the extra that triggered the watermelon at the end of the specialized zone The number of times the content notification of the number of games has been performed (the number of additions) is displayed as the first ratio display HP1. In addition, regarding the extras that occurred due to the cherry opportunity, the number of times that the content of the number of extra games was reported in the game that won the cherry (number of immediate additions) and the number of extra games that triggered the cherry prize at the end of the specialized zone The number of times that the content notification has been performed (the number of subsequent rides) is displayed as the second ratio display HP2.

  In FIG. 186 (b), in the current special zone, the first ratio display indicates that the number of instant rides triggered by a watermelon win is 1, and the post ride count triggered by a watermelon win is 3. It is shown in a stacked bar graph as HP1. In addition, in the specialized zone of this time, the number of instant rides triggered by the cherry win is 2, and the post ride number triggered by the cherry win is 1, indicating that the second ratio display HP2 is a stacked bar graph. Is shown. In these stacked bar graphs, the area indicating the number of immediate additions and the area indicating the number of subsequent additions are indicated by different colors, and the player can clearly grasp the difference between these areas. (In the figure, the dot hatches are displayed differently.) In more detail, in this specialization zone, as for the addition generated by the watermelon opportunity, the immediate addition was selected at 1/4 (25%), and the subsequent addition was selected at 3/4 (75%) In this specialization zone, 2/3 (about 66%) was selected for immediate addition, and 1/3 (about 33%) was selected for immediate addition. It is displayed so that it can be easily grasped visually.

  In the present embodiment, with regard to the addition in the specialization zone, the ratio in which the immediate addition is selected and the ratio in which the subsequent addition is selected (the probability of winning the subsequent lottery) are set to be different depending on the set value. ing. In other words, the player can predict and grasp the set value by performing the notification of the ratio between immediate and post-installation for the specialized zone as described above. Hereinafter, the process for performing the additional notification in the specialized zone including the process for performing the ratio notification will be described in detail.

  FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the special zone addition process.

  In step S10501, a process of grasping the number of additional games this time is executed. In a succeeding step S10502, a lottery process is executed after the zone. In the zone extra lottery process, the special zone additional effect timing table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a, and it is determined by lottery whether the current extra effect is to be added immediately or later.

  As shown in FIG. 188, in the special effect zone extra presentation timing table, the extra presentation execution timing is set to be different depending on the game result (winning combination) that has been the chance to win extra and the set value. . Specifically, as a result of the game that won the extra winning, the execution timing of the extra production will differ between watermelon (common for strong watermelon and weak watermelon), cherry (common for strong cherry and weak cherry), and others. Is set to

  In setting 1, the watermelon is selected at 40% for immediate loading and at 60% for trailing water. In setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 45% and the subsequent addition is selected at 55%. In setting 3, the immediate addition is selected at 50%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 55% and the subsequent addition is selected at 45%. In setting 5, the immediate addition is selected at 60%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 40%. In setting 6, the immediate addition is selected at 65%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 35%. In other words, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate for the subsequent ride and the higher the selection rate for the immediate ride.

  In setting 1, cherry is selected at 10% for immediate loading and at 90% for trailing. In setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 30%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 70%. In setting 3, the immediate addition is selected at 50%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 70%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 30%. In setting 5, the immediate addition is selected at 80%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 20%. In setting 6, the immediate addition is selected at 90%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 10%. In other words, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate for the subsequent ride and the higher the selection rate for the instant ride. This point is common to the watermelon.

  On the other hand, compared to the case of watermelon as an additional opportunity, in the case of cherry, the difference due to the set value of the ratio between the immediate addition and the subsequent addition is set to be larger. That is, for example, when predicting a set value when instant riding is selected, cherry contributes more as a predictive material than watermelon. In other words, it is more accurate to predict the set value from the immediate / rear ratio of cherry, rather than predicting the set value from the immediate / rear ratio of watermelon, and the setting value is predicted more easily. It is possible.

  As already described, in this embodiment, the winning probability is set so that watermelon is overwhelmingly easier to win than cherry (FIG. 179). The winning probability is the same winning probability even in the special zone, and the watermelon is easier to win than the cherry in the special zone. Then, in a game that predicts a set value from the immediate / rearward ratio in the specialized zone, it is easy to win a watermelon with low prediction accuracy, and it is difficult to win a cherry with high prediction accuracy. By doing this, the benefit of winning a cherry with a low probability of winning is not only the benefit related to the advantage such as the number of additional games, but also the presentation of information that can be useful to the player as a predictor of the set value It is possible to add benefits and not increase the proportion of benefits related to that advantage.

  After the post-in-zone lottery process is executed in step S10502, it is determined in step S10503 whether or not the post-in-zone lottery process is won. If it is not won, that is, if immediate addition is selected, it is determined in step S10504 whether or not the current addition opportunity was watermelon. If it is a watermelon, the process advances to step S10505 to execute a process of adding 1 to the watermelon immediate loading counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The immediate addition counter for watermelon is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times when an addition occurs due to a watermelon in the specialized zone of this time and the immediate addition is selected.

  If it is determined in step S10504 that there is no watermelon opportunity, the process advances to step S10506. In step S10506, it is determined whether or not this time the addition opportunity is cherry. If it is a cherry, the process proceeds to step S10507 to execute a process of adding 1 to the cherry immediate loading counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The cherry immediate loading counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to know the number of times when an additional cherry has occurred during the specialization zone and the immediate loading is selected.

  After executing the processing of step S10505 or step S10507, or when a negative determination is made in step S10506, in step S10508, an additional effect (in-zone immediate effect) can be generated in the current game. Set. In addition, in this embodiment, the timing for generating an additional effect in this case is when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, other timings such as when the first reel stop is turned on or when the second reel stop is turned off are used. It is good also as a structure in which an immediate riding effect occurs in the zone.

  After that, in step S10509, the number of added games TUG in the special zone is the number of added games this time at the instant application effect timing in the zone (or at a timing slightly delayed from the instant application effect generation timing in the zone). After the update effect is set so as to be updated to the display to which is added, the special zone addition process is terminated.

  As already described, the data for adding effects in step S10508 and step S10509 is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area. The CPU 181 reads out the effect data temporarily stored in the effect data setting area at the generation timing of the above-described additional effect (immediate addition effect in the zone) so that the additional effect is performed. The same applies to the following additional effects.

  If it is determined in step S10503 that the post-lot lottery in the zone has been won, that is, if post-install is selected as the current extra lot, the process proceeds to step S10510. In step S10510, it is determined whether or not the addition opportunity this time was watermelon. If it is a watermelon, the process advances to step S10511 to execute a process of adding 1 to the post-watermelon counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The post-counter counter for watermelon is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times when an extra stage occurs due to a watermelon during the current specialization zone and the post-saddle is selected.

  In the subsequent step S10512, a process of storing the number of added games this time in a watermelon rearing individual area provided in the RAM 106 is executed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of areas are provided as the watermelon rear mounting individual areas, and specifically, 255 areas are provided. Each area is set so that the number of games from 0 to 999 can be stored, and the number of games added based on a watermelon opportunity can be read later. For example, if 10 games are stored in the first area and 50 games are stored in the second area, an extra is generated as a watermelon opportunity in the specialization zone, and the first additional is selected among those selected as a postponement It is possible to grasp afterwards that the number of additional games for 10 is 10 and the number of additional games for the next additional is 50 games. In step S10512, a process of storing the number of added games as the current watermelon opportunity is performed in the area having the smallest number among the areas where the number of games is not stored in the watermelon post-addition individual area.

  Thereafter, in step S10513, the data is temporarily stored in the effect data setting area so that the first additional character BUP1 is displayed as a watermelon rearward character when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. The special zone addition process is terminated. Note that the display timing of the first extra character BUP1 is preferably the same timing as the generation timing of the immediate addition effect in the zone or a timing slightly later than that.

  If it is determined in step S10510 that there is no watermelon opportunity, the process proceeds to step S10514. In step S10514, it is determined whether or not the current addition opportunity is cherry. If it is a cherry, the process proceeds to step S10515 to execute a process of adding 1 to the cherry counter mounted in the various counter areas 106e. The cherry extra counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to know the number of times that an extra occurrence has occurred in the specialization zone at this time due to a cherry trigger and the extra ride is selected.

  In a succeeding step S10516, processing for storing the number of additional games of this time in the cherry added extra area provided in the RAM 106 is executed. The cherry rear mounting individual area corresponds to the watermelon rear mounting individual area. In other words, in the present embodiment, a plurality of areas are provided for the cherry rear individual area, and more specifically, 255 areas are provided. Each area is set so as to be able to store the number of games of 0 to 999, and the number of games added based on the cherry opportunity can be read later. In step S10516, a process of storing the number of added games as a trigger for the current cherry is performed in the area having the smallest number among the areas where the number of games is not stored in the cherry added extra area.

  After that, in step S10517, the data is temporarily stored in the effect data setting area so that the second additional character BUP2 is displayed as the cherry additional character when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. The special zone addition process is terminated. Note that the display timing of the second extra character BUP2 is also preferably the same timing as the generation timing of the immediate addition effect in the zone or a slightly later timing. If a negative determination is made in step S10514, the special zone addition process is terminated as it is.

  In the present embodiment, in the specialized zone, with regard to the addition opportunity other than the watermelon and cherry, the immediate addition is selected regardless of the set value (FIG. 188), so a negative determination is made in step S10514. There is nothing. In other words, it can be said that the determination process in step S10514 is provided for expansion in the case where the subsequent addition is generated even in other addition opportunities.

  In step S10513 or step S10515, if there is a first added character BUP1 or a second added character BUP2 already displayed, the displayed first added character BUP1 or second added character BUP2 is displayed. It is preferable that the production data is set so that the next character added this time is displayed so as to be arranged. By unifying the rules of the order of arrangement (for example, arranging in order such as upper left → upper right → lower left → lower right), post-production effects at the end of the specialized zone described later are performed In this case, it is possible to clearly understand the number of the extra ride corresponding to the winning combination. Although the first added character BUP1 and the second added character BUP2 are displayed in separate areas, respectively (in FIG. 185, the first added character BUP1 is the upper left of the screen, the second added character BUP2 is displayed). In the upper right corner of the screen), and the ordering rules may be unified. By doing in this way, in the gameability of the special zone where the addition of watermelon and cherry occurs, it becomes possible to more easily grasp when the addition corresponding to the winning combination is made.

  In addition, when the total number of the displayed additional characters and the current additional character is a predetermined number (for example, 5), the current additional character and the displayed additional character are combined. It is good also as a structure which displays an integrated display character. For example, in the situation where four first added characters BUP1 are displayed, when a new display opportunity for the first added character BUP1 occurs, the subsequent addition of five watermelon opportunities occurs. A first integrated display character (for example, a treasure box of different colors or different shapes) for displaying the situation is displayed. In this way, when displaying a character corresponding to a plurality of additional occasions using a limited display area, there is no display area that can be displayed or there are few display areas, so the upper limit (limiter) of the additional opportunity You can avoid giving the impression that there is.

  Next, the setting process of the special zone end effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special zone end effect setting process is a process executed based on the reception of the special zone end command from the main controller 101 in the all stop effect setting process (FIG. 51) (step S2316). .

  As already described, in the present embodiment, at the end of the specialization zone, a post-direction effect is performed and a ratio notification of the immediate / post-install ratio is performed. Specifically, first, in step S10601, a process of grasping the watermelon immediate loading counter and the cherry immediate loading counter is performed. In a succeeding step S10602, processing for grasping the post-counter counter for watermelon and the post-counter counter for cherry is performed. Then, in step S10603, the immediate addition / retroduction ratio of the addition triggered by the watermelon and the immediate addition / rear addition ratio of the addition triggered by the cherry are determined based on the grasp results of step S10601 and step S10602, respectively. Execute the calculation process. In step S10604, the calculated result is temporarily stored in a register or the like.

  Thereafter, in steps S10605 to S10620, processing for generating an after-effect produced by adding watermelon and cherry as an opportunity is executed. That is, in step S10605, it is determined whether or not the post-watermelon counter is greater than 0, that is, 1 or more. If the number is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S10606, and a process of grasping the number of added games from the area with the smallest number among the areas where the number of games is stored in the watermelon additional individual area is executed. Then, in step S10607, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the pre-effect in the watermelon post-effect is performed. In this case, the first added character BUP1 displayed first is selected from the first added characters BUP1, and the first added character BUP1 is moved to the approximate center of the screen. An operation instruction effect that prompts the operation of the effect switch 66 is also generated.

  After performing the process of step S10607, it is determined whether or not the effect switch 66 has been operated in step S10608, and the process waits until the effect switch 66 is operated. In addition, it is good also as a structure which affirmation determinates in step S10608 by progress of predetermined time (for example, 5 sec) irrespective of the presence or absence of operation.

  After an affirmative determination is made in step S10608, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled in step S10609 so that an extra effect is performed. In this case, the character in the treasure box as the first additional character BUP1 arranged in the approximate center of the screen is released, and a display effect is performed as if the number of added games jumps out as a treasure inside (FIG. 185 (b)). ).

  In subsequent step S10610, the display control of the first added game number BUG1 is performed so that the added game number added in step S10609 is added and updated as the display of the number of added watermelon games. In step S10611, the display of the additional game number TUG in the special zone is controlled so that the additional game number added in step S10609 is added and updated. In step S10612, 1 is subtracted from the post-watermelon counter, and the process returns to step S10605.

  When the post-mount counter for watermelon becomes 0, a negative determination is made in step S10605, and the flow proceeds to step S10613. The processing from step S10613 to step S10620 is processing for performing post-loading based on cherry, and is substantially the same as the processing from step S10605 to step S10612.

  That is, in step S10613, it is determined whether the cherry counter is greater than 0, that is, whether it is 1 or more. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step S10614, and a process of grasping the number of added games from the area having the smallest number among the areas where the number of games is stored in the extra area for cherry is executed. In step S10615, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the pre-effect of the cherry after-effect is performed. In this case, the second added character BUP2 displayed first is selected from the second added characters BUP2, and the second added character BUP2 is moved to the approximate center of the screen. An operation instruction effect that prompts the operation of the effect switch 66 is also generated.

  After executing the process of step S10615, it is determined whether or not the effect switch 66 has been operated in step S10616 and waits until the effect switch 66 is operated. In addition, it is the same as that of said step S10608 also as a structure which affirmatively determines in step S10616 by progress of predetermined time (for example, 5 sec) irrespective of the presence or absence of operation.

  After an affirmative determination is made in step S10616, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled in step S10617 so that an extra effect is performed. In this case, the character in the treasure box as the second additional character BUP2 arranged in the approximate center of the screen is released, and a display effect is performed as if the number of added games jumps out as a treasure inside (FIG. 186 (a)). ).

  In the subsequent step S10618, the display control of the second added game number BUG2 is performed so that the added game number added in the step S10617 is added and updated as the cherry added game number display. In step S10619, the display of the added game number TUG in the special zone is controlled so that the added game number added in the added effect performed in step S10617 is updated. Then, in step S10620, the cherry rear counter is decremented by 1, and the process returns to step S10613.

  When the cherry counter is set to 0, a negative determination is made in step S10613, and the process proceeds to step S10621. In step S10621, on the basis of the information stored in step S10604, a first ratio display HP1 for immediate / rear addition based on watermelon winning and a second ratio display HP2 for immediate / rearwarding based on cherry winning are: Control is performed so as to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (FIG. 186 (b)).

  Thereafter, in step S10622, initialization processing of various counters for the special zone such as each immediate addition counter and each subsequent addition counter is performed, and then the special zone end effect setting processing is ended.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  It was set as the structure from which the execution timing of an additional alert | report changes with setting values. More specifically, the content notification of the result related to the extra lottery that is set so that there is no difference in the winning probability and the number of extra games at the time of winning according to the set value is performed at different timings depending on the set value. By doing in this way, it is possible to cause a difference due to the set value, particularly for a game in the attack mode where a difference in gameability due to the set value is unlikely to occur.

  As an effect with different execution timings for adding notifications, there are provided an immediate effect for adding an effect in a game where an additional opportunity has occurred, and an additional effect for performing an additional effect in a game later than the game in which the additional opportunity has occurred In addition, in any production, the notification that the extra winning is performed is executed in the game in which the extra opportunity has occurred. In more detail, even when a retrofit effect is performed, the first retrofit character BUP1 and the second retrofit character BUP2 are displayed in the game. As a result, when an extra effect is selected, the player can grasp that the extra effect will occur before the extra effect occurs in the extra effect, and the player who understands that In addition, it is possible to play a game while looking forward to the extra production being performed in the later production. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the extra production is enjoyed.

  Even if the post-stage effect is selected as described above, the notification that the extra lottery has been won is made in advance, and the higher the set value, the more easily the immediate effect is selected. did. In this way, even if the post-stage effect is selected, by notifying in advance that the extra lottery is won, it is possible to perform the extra stage in a state that delights the player by the notification. Even if it is predicted and grasped that the setting is low due to the additional effect in the post-loading effect, it is possible to compensate for the discouragement degree of the player due to the prediction and grasping (low setting). It becomes possible.

  The immediate / rear selection ratio based on the cherry opportunity was different from the immediate / rear selection ratio based on the watermelon opportunity. By doing in this way, in predicting and grasping the setting value based on such a selection ratio, not only the setting of the occurrence rate in production but also the result of the lottery process (whether it is cherry or watermelon) Will be reflected. Therefore, as a player who wants to predict and grasp the set value, the player can play a game while hoping that the lottery result in each game will be a desired selection ratio (in the above embodiment, a cherry having a setting difference in the selection ratio). As a result, the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game can be increased.

  The setting ratio of the immediate / rearward selection ratio based on the cherry opportunity with low winning probability is larger than the immediate / rearward selection ratio based on the watermelon opportunity with higher winning probability. In this way, the advantage of winning a cherry can be secured by factors other than those directly related to the player's profit, such as the number of medals to be paid out based on the cherry prize and the extra performance based on the winning of the cherry. it can. Therefore, the privilege of each lottery result can be set within a range that does not affect the payout rate.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the special zone additional stage timing table is varied depending on the transition to the special zone. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the lottery process in the zone. As already described, the extra zone lottery process is a process performed in step S10502 in the special zone extra process (FIG. 187).

  In step S10701, it is determined whether or not the current special zone transition opportunity is cherry (either strong cherry or weak cherry). If the transition opportunity is not cherry, in step S10702, a process of acquiring a normal extra notification timing table from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10701 that the current opportunity to shift to the specialized zone is cherry, in step S10703, processing for acquiring a special extra notification timing table from the various table storage areas 182a is executed. . After acquiring any one of the notification timing tables, a post-load lottery is executed based on the notification timing table in step S10704, and then the post-load lottery process in this zone is terminated.

  Differences between the normal addition notification timing table and the special addition notification timing table will be described with reference to FIG. The normal addition notification timing table is as shown in FIG. 188, and in FIG. 191, in the normal addition notification timing table, the parameters at the time of addition occurrence triggered by the watermelon winning (immediate / rear selection) Rate) is shown as a reference value.

  That is, in the special extra notification timing table, the parameter (immediate / post-selection rate) at the time of extra occurrence triggered by the watermelon winning is different from that in the normal extra notification timing table. Specifically, in the special addition notification timing table, in setting 1, the immediate addition is selected at 10% and the subsequent addition is selected at 90%. In setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 30%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 70%. In setting 3, the immediate addition is selected at 50%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 70%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 30%. In setting 5, the immediate addition is selected at 80%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 20%. In setting 6, the immediate addition is selected at 90%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 10%. In other words, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate for the subsequent ride and the higher the selection rate for the immediate ride is the same as the parameters for winning the watermelon in the normal addition notification timing table.

  On the other hand, in the case of the special addition notification timing table, the difference due to the set value of the ratio between the immediate addition and the subsequent addition is set to be larger than that of the normal addition notification timing table. That is, for example, when predicting a set value when immediate loading is selected, a specialized zone that has been transferred due to a cherry opportunity is more suitable as a prediction material than a specialized zone that has been transferred due to another specific opportunity. High contribution. In other words, predicting the set value from the immediate / post-load ratio in the special zone that has been transitioned at the cherry opportunity will predict the set value from the immediate / post-ratio ratio in the special zone that has been transitioned at another specific role Therefore, it is possible to predict the set value more easily. That is, it can be said that the specialized zone that is moved by the cherry opportunity is a zone that makes it easier to predict the set value.

  In addition, in the special addition notification timing table according to this modification, the immediate / rear addition ratio based on watermelon and the immediate / rearward ratio based on cherry are common to all set values. By doing in this way, when performing the prediction and grasping | ascertaining of the setting value based on these ratios, each addition opportunity can be handled as common data, and a parameter can be increased.

  By doing as described above, it is possible to set a special zone having completely different game characteristics for predicting and grasping the set value without changing the addition performance in the special zone. Accordingly, it is possible to create a new gameability that requires a specialized zone that is easy to predict a set value, which is a departure from the conventional gameability such that a specialized zone with a large number of added games is desired.

  In particular, the special zone that moves with cherry chances with low winning probability is made into a special zone that makes it easy to predict and grasp the set value, so the advantage of winning the result with low winning probability is It is possible to add within a range that does not affect.

  In addition, the special zone that is moved by the cherry opportunity and the special zone that is migrated by another specific role opportunity only differ in the extra notification timing table used in the selection of immediate ride / replacement. It is possible to realize the above-described excellent game playability with a very simple configuration that does not require a change in the probability or the extra winning probability.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, when the immediate riding effect in the zone is selected, the adding effect timing table is changed. FIG. 192 (a) is a flowchart showing a lottery process for post-in-zone in this modification.

  In step S10801, processing for obtaining the table counter ATK from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is performed. The table counter ATK is a counter for the CPU 181 to specify the additional presentation timing table to be acquired in the current post lottery. That is, in step S10802, a process of acquiring an extra notification timing table corresponding to the value of the table counter ATK acquired in step S10801 from various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 is performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 193, a plurality of additional timing timing tables are provided as the additional notification timing tables, and four additional notification timing tables of the first additional notification timing table to the fourth additional notification timing table are provided. Is provided. In this variation, there is no difference in the selection rate between immediate and post-installation, such as cherry, watermelon, and other specific roles, and for any specific role, immediate and post-installation with a common selection rate. Is selected. Therefore, the characters displayed when the post-stage effect in the zone is selected are not associated with the combination for which the post-post is selected, such as the first post-character BUP1 and the second post-character BUP2. Instead, a common character is displayed. Moreover, in this modification, the ratio notification at the end of the specialized zone is not performed.

  The first extra notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is 1. In this table, regardless of the set value, the selection ratio between immediate and post-installation is set to 50%.

  The second extra notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is 2. In this table, in setting 1, the immediate addition is selected at 40%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 60%. In setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 45% and the subsequent addition is selected at 55%. In setting 3, the immediate addition is selected at 50%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 55% and the subsequent addition is selected at 45%. In setting 5, the immediate addition is selected at 60%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 40%. In setting 6, the immediate addition is selected at 65%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 35%. In other words, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate for the subsequent ride and the higher the selection rate for the immediate ride.

  The third extra notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is 3. In this table, in setting 1, the immediate addition is selected at 30% and the subsequent addition is selected at 70%. In setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 40% and the subsequent addition is selected at 60%. In setting 3, the immediate addition is selected at 50%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 60%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 40%. In setting 5, the immediate addition is selected at 70% and the subsequent addition is selected at 30%. In setting 6, the immediate addition is selected at 80% and the subsequent addition is selected at 20%. That is, the higher the setting value, the lower the selection rate for the immediate addition and the higher the selection rate for the immediate addition is common to the second addition notification timing table, but the setting value of the ratio between the immediate addition and the subsequent addition Is larger in the third additional notification timing table than in the second additional notification timing table.

  The fourth extra notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is 4 or more. In this table, in setting 1, the immediate addition is selected at 10% and the subsequent addition is selected at 90%. In setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 30%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 70%. In setting 3, the immediate addition is selected at 50%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 70%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 30%. In setting 5, the immediate addition is selected at 90% and the subsequent addition is selected at 10%. In setting 6, the immediate addition is selected at 100%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 0% (not selected). In other words, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate of the subsequent ride and the higher the selection rate of the immediate addition is common to the second addition notification timing table and the third addition notification timing table. The difference due to the setting value of the ratio of the addition is larger in the fourth additional notification timing table than in the second additional notification timing table or the third additional notification timing table.

  Returning to the description of the post-lot lottery process in the zone, after obtaining one extra notification timing table from each of the extra notification timing tables in step S10802, the post-extraction lottery process is executed in step S10803. In step S10804, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S10803 is an immediate ride. If it is immediate loading, a process of adding 1 to the table counter ATK is executed in step S10805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10804 that it is not an immediate ride but a postload, a process of setting the table counter ATK to 1 which is an initial value is executed in step S10806.

  In other words, in this modification, the table counter ATK is incremented by one when the immediate addition is selected in the post lottery, and the table counter ATK returns to the initial value of 1 when the post addition is selected. As described above, the value of the table counter ATK is associated with the type of the additional notification timing table used in the subsequent lottery. The notification timing table acquired in a situation where the value of the table counter ATK is larger It is set so that the difference depending on the setting value of the addition / rearward ratio becomes large.

  More specifically, basically (except for the first extra notification timing table), in any of the notification timing tables, the immediate setting is more easily selected as the setting is higher, and the immediate setting is less likely to be selected as the setting is lower. Has been. Then, the notification timing table acquired in a situation where the value of the table counter ATK is large increases the difference between the ease of selecting immediate placement at a high setting and the ease of selection of immediate placement at a low setting. For example, in the second extra notification timing table acquired in the situation where the table counter ATK is 2, the immediate addition is selected with a probability of 65% in the setting 6, and the immediate addition is selected with a probability of 40% in the setting 1. The difference is about 1.6 times the probability. On the other hand, in the fourth extra information timing table acquired in the situation where the table counter ATK is 4, the immediate addition is selected with a probability of 100% in the setting 6 and the probability of 10% is selected in the setting 1, and the difference Is 10 times the probability. Therefore, as the value of the table counter ATK increases, that is, as the immediate addition is continuously selected, the set value can be easily estimated from the selection ratio between the immediate addition and the subsequent addition.

  In addition, as the immediate ride is selected continuously, it is a configuration that switches to the notification timing table in which the quick ride is easily selected on the high setting side. It can be a material that supports (predicts) that. For example, as shown in FIG. 193, when switching from the first additional notification timing table to the fourth additional notification timing table is used, the probability that the immediate addition is selected four times in succession is 0.6% in the setting 1 On the other hand, setting 2 is 2.7%, setting 3 is 6.2%, setting 4 is 11.6%, setting 5 is 18.9%, setting 6 is 26%, setting 1 and setting The difference from 6 is a probability difference of about 43 times. And since it is the structure which switches to the superimposition notification timing table where it is easier to select the immediate addition as the higher setting as described above, in order to predict the set value by the continuity of such immediate addition, the setting of the continuous probability The difference is accelerated.

  In other words, for example, in the case of a configuration that uses only the second additional notification timing table (a configuration that does not cause switching to the third and fourth additional notification timing tables), the probability that the immediate addition is selected four times in succession is set to 1 Is approximately 2.7%, setting 6 is approximately 17.9%, and the difference between setting 1 and setting 6 is approximately seven times the probability, and the notification timing table is switched as in this modification. Less than the difference in configuration. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to generate a setting difference without switching the notification timing table, it is necessary to increase the difference between the immediate addition / retroduction ratio depending on the setting value, and once as in the fourth addition notification timing table. It is possible to determine to some extent whether the setting is high or low by adding.

  Therefore, by using switching of the notification timing table as in the above configuration, it is possible to gradually narrow down the set values and improve the interest of the game that predicts the set values.

  In the post-zone lottery process (FIG. 192 (a)), after the processing of step S10805 or step S10806 is performed, the display background changing process is performed in step S10807, and the post-zone post lottery process is terminated. To do. In the display background changing process, a process of changing the display background color in the special zone zone effect of the auxiliary display unit 65 in association with the value of the table counter ATK is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 192 (b), if the table counter ATK is 1, the background color is displayed in white, and if the table counter ATK is 2, the background color is displayed in yellow. If the table counter ATK is 3, the background color is displayed in green, and if the table counter ATK is 4 or more, the background color is displayed in red. By doing so, the player can easily grasp the current value of the table counter ATK, that is, the number of times that the immediate loading is continuously selected, and accumulate the immediate loading to help predict the set value. It is possible to excite the game by changing the production (change of the background color).

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the additional notification timing table is switched based on the number of games in the advantageous section in which the specialized zone is executed. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing a lottery drawing process in the zone in the present modification.

  In step S10901, processing for grasping the current number of advantageous section games is performed. As described above, the advantageous section game number AG is managed by the main control device 101. In the present modification, the display control device 81 side has a similar counter, or the main control device 101. By outputting a command from the display control device 81, the display control device 81 is configured to be able to grasp the current number of digested games in the advantageous section.

  In step S10902, an additional notification timing table corresponding to the current number of advantageous section games is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. In step S10903, after-run lottery is executed, the post-lot lottery process in this zone is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 195 (a), the additional notification timing table in the present modified example is such that the immediate addition / rearward addition ratio differs depending on the number of games played in the advantageous section (the advantageous section game number AG) and the set value. It is set. Specifically, when the number of games to be played in the advantageous section is 1 to 99, both immediate and subsequent rides are selected with a probability of 50% regardless of the set value. When the number of digested games is 100 to 499, in setting 1, the immediate addition is selected at 40% and the subsequent addition is selected at 60%. In setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 45% and the subsequent addition is selected at 55%. In setting 3, the immediate addition is selected at 50%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 55% and the subsequent addition is selected at 45%. In setting 5, the immediate addition is selected at 60%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 40%. In setting 6, the immediate addition is selected at 65%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 35%. That is, in the case where the number of digest games is 100 to 499, it is easier to select the immediate placement as the set value increases.

  When the number of games in the advantageous section is 500 to 999, in setting 1, the immediate addition is selected at 30% and the subsequent addition is selected at 70%. In setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 40% and the subsequent addition is selected at 60%. In setting 3, the immediate addition is selected at 50%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 60%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 40%. In setting 5, the immediate addition is selected at 70% and the subsequent addition is selected at 30%. In setting 6, the immediate addition is selected at 80% and the subsequent addition is selected at 20%. When the number of digested games is 1000 to 1399, in setting 1, the immediate addition is selected at 10%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 90%. In setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 30%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 70%. In setting 3, the immediate addition is selected at 50%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 70%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 30%. In setting 5, the immediate addition is selected at 90% and the subsequent addition is selected at 10%. In setting 6, the immediate addition is selected at 100%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 0% (not selected). When the number of digested games reaches 1400 to 1500, in setting 1, the immediate addition is selected at 0% (not selected), and the subsequent addition is selected at 100%. In setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 10%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 90%. In setting 3, the immediate addition is selected at 50%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 80%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 20%. In setting 5 and setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 100%, and trailing is selected at 0% (not selected).

  In other words, as the number of games played in the advantageous section increases, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select the immediate ride, and the difference in the set value in the selection rate between the immediate ride and the later ride increases. In this way, the more the advantageous section is digested, the more easily the set value can be predicted when adding in the specialized zone. A privilege other than the medal number can be granted.

  As already described, when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit of 1500 games, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. Therefore, when the number of digested games is close to 1500 games, there is a possibility that the benefits (additions) cannot be sufficiently obtained even when the game moves to the specialized zone. In that respect, by using the above configuration, even if the number of digested games is close to the upper limit and the expectation for the addition in the specialized zone may be reduced, there is a merit for moving to the specialized zone. Can be generated.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the parameters of the additional notification timing table in the modification 3 are different. FIG. 195 (b) shows an additional notification timing table in the present modification.

  In the additional notification timing table in the present modification, the relationship between the number of games played in the advantageous section and the set value is reversed from that in the third modification. More specifically, when the number of games played in the advantageous section is 1 to 99, in setting 1 and setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 100% and the subsequent addition is selected at 0% (not selected). In setting 3, the immediate addition is selected at 80%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 20%. In setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 50%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 50%. In setting 5, the immediate addition is selected at 10%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 90%. In setting 6, the immediate addition is selected at 0% (not selected), and the subsequent addition is selected at 100%. That is, in the early stage of the advantageous section, the immediate setting is more easily selected as the setting is lower, and the latter is more easily selected as the setting is higher.

  When the number of digest games is 100 to 499, in setting 1, the immediate addition is selected at 100%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 0% (not selected). In setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 90%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 10%. In setting 3, the immediate addition is selected at 70%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 30%. In setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 50%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 50%. In setting 5, the immediate addition is selected at 30%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 70%. In setting 6, the immediate addition is selected at 10%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 90%. That is, when the number of digested games is 1 to 99 and when the number is 100 to 499, the point that the immediate setting is more easily selected as the set value is higher is the same as that of the third modification. In a situation where the number of games is small, the difference in the selection rate between immediate and post-installation according to the set value is overwhelmingly large. That is, it is easy to predict and grasp the set value at the beginning of the advantageous section.

  When the number of digested games in the advantageous section is 500 to 999, in the setting 1, the immediate addition is selected at 80% and the subsequent addition is selected at 20%. In setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 70%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 30%. In setting 3, the immediate addition is selected at 60%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 40%. In setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 50%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 50%. In setting 5, the immediate addition is selected at 40% and the subsequent addition is selected at 60%. In setting 6, the immediate addition is selected at 30%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 70%. Further, when the number of digested games is 1000 to 1399, in setting 1, the immediate addition is selected at 65% and the subsequent addition is selected at 35%. In setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 60%, and the latter is selected at 40%. In setting 3, the immediate addition is selected at 55% and the subsequent addition is selected at 45%. In setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 50%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 50%. In setting 5, the immediate addition is selected at 45% and the subsequent addition is selected at 55%. In setting 6, the immediate addition is selected at 40%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 60%. When the number of digested games reaches 1400 to 1500, both immediate and post-installation are selected with a probability of 50% regardless of the set value.

  That is, as the advantageous section progresses, the setting difference between the immediate / rearward selection ratio decreases. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to raise the frequency which estimates and grasps a set value. That is, for example, the number of initial games in the attack mode in the advantageous section is 50 games, and at least the set value can be predicted and grasped if an additional opportunity occurs between the 50 games. By doing in this way, it becomes easy to play a game for predicting and grasping the set value, and it is possible to fully enjoy such a game.

<Modification 5>
In the present modification, a display remaining number counter HG is used as a parameter of the additional notification timing table in Modifications 3 and 4 instead of the number of digest games in the advantageous section. As already described, the display remaining number counter HG represents the number of remaining games in the attack mode displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  In step S10901 in the present modification, processing for grasping the display remaining number counter HG is performed instead of grasping the advantageous section game number. In step S10902, an additional notification timing table corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG is acquired, and in step S10903, an extra lottery is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 195 (c), the additional notification timing table in this modification is set so that the immediate addition / rearward addition ratio differs depending on the display remaining number counter HG and the set value. Specifically, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99, in setting 1 and setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 80% and the subsequent addition is selected at 20%. In setting 3 and setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 85%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 15%. In setting 5 and setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 90%, and trailing is selected at 10%. When the display remaining number counter HG is 100 to 299, in the setting 1, the immediate addition is selected at 30% and the subsequent addition is selected at 70%. In setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 40% and the subsequent addition is selected at 60%. In setting 3, the immediate addition is selected at 50%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 60%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 40%. In setting 5, the immediate addition is selected at 70% and the subsequent addition is selected at 30%. In setting 6, the immediate addition is selected at 80% and the subsequent addition is selected at 20%. When the remaining display counter HG is 300 or more, in setting 1 and setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 20% and the subsequent addition is selected at 80%. In setting 3 and setting 4, the immediate addition is selected at 15%, and the subsequent addition is selected at 85%. In setting 5 and setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 10%, and trailing is selected at 90%.

  That is, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99 and when it is 300 or more, the immediate addition / retroduction ratio of setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, and setting 5 and setting 6 is common. doing. Therefore, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99 or 300 or more, the setting value is narrowed down from the immediate addition / rear addition ratio, setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, and setting 5 And setting 6 cannot be distinguished. On the other hand, in the case where the display remaining number counter HG is 200 to 299, all of the settings 1 to 6 are set so that the immediate / retroduction ratio is different. For this reason, from the viewpoint of narrowing down the set values, the case where the display remaining number counter HG is 200 to 299 is more preferable than the case where the display remaining number counter HG is 300 or more. In other words, it is notified that there are a large number of remaining games in the attack mode, and the notification of the remaining number of games in the attack mode is notified with a smaller number of games than the situation where a large amount of medals can be expected. It is possible to create a new gameability that breaks away from the traditional game of aiming for medal acquisition.

  Further, comparing the case where the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99 and the case where the display remaining number counter HG is 300 or more, the immediate addition / rearward addition ratio is reversed at any set value. Specifically, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99, the immediate addition is easier to select than the subsequent addition at any setting value. When the display remaining number counter HG is 300 or more, any Also in the setting value, the rearward ride is easier to select than the immediate ride. In other words, in a situation where there is a notification that the number of remaining games in the attack mode is small, it is easy to select the immediate addition that immediately increases the number of remaining games, and there is a large number of remaining games in the attack mode. In a situation where there is a notification that there is a certain amount, it is easy to select post-installation in which the number of remaining games is increased afterwards. In this way, the former provides a sense of security by increasing the number of remaining games, and the latter provides a sense of superiority by accumulating the right to increase the number of remaining games. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to produce an effect according to the situation and the player's feelings.

<Modification 6>
The configuration relating to the immediate ride / rear ride ratio is not limited to the specialized zone in the attack mode, and may be applied to other zones than the specialized zone. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the added effect in the present modification.

  In step S11001, it is determined whether or not the zone is a special zone. If the zone is a special zone, an extra process for the special zone is executed in step S11026. This addition process is as described above. If it is determined in step S11001 that it is not a specialized zone, the number of additional games at this time is grasped in step S11002, and a subsequent lottery is performed in step S11003. In the post-slot lottery, in the present modification, a configuration in which a table in which the watermelon and the cherry are different from each other in the immediate / success ratio is described as in FIG. 188, but another table may be used. . In step S11004, it is determined whether or not a reverse lottery is won. If it is determined that immediate placement is selected without winning, the process proceeds to step S11005.

  In step S11005, it is determined whether or not the current addition is a watermelon opportunity. If it is a watermelon opportunity, in step S11006, a process of adding 1 to the total watermelon immediate loading counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is executed. The total watermelon immediate loading counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of times that an immediate riding effect has occurred due to the watermelon in the current attack mode. If it is determined in step S11005 that it is not a watermelon trigger, it is determined in step S11007 whether it is a cherry trigger. If it is a cherry trigger, in step S11008, a process of adding 1 to the total cherry immediate loading counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is executed. The total cherry immediate loading counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of times that an immediate riding effect has occurred in response to the cherry in the current attack mode. These processes in steps S11005 to S11008 correspond to the processes in steps S10504 to S10507.

  After one of the processes in steps S11006 and S11008 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S11007, the process proceeds to step S11009. The processing from step S11009 to step S11015 is the same as the processing from step S10405 to step S10411.

  If it is determined in step S11004 that it was a post-winning win, the process proceeds to step S11016. In step S11016, processing for setting a post-add flag in various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 is executed. The retrofit flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that there is at least one superposition that is a retrofit effect. After performing the process of step S11016, the process for after-effects is performed in steps S11017 to S11024. The processes in steps S11017 to S11024 correspond to the processes in steps S10510 to S10517.

  That is, in step S11017, it is determined whether or not the current addition is a watermelon opportunity. If it is a watermelon opportunity, in step S11018, a process of adding 1 to the post-watermelon counter is executed. In a subsequent step S11019, a process of storing the number of additional games this time in the post-installation individual area for watermelon is executed. In step S11020, display setting of the first added character BUP1 as the added character for watermelon is performed.

  If it is determined in step S11017 that it is not a watermelon opportunity, in step S11021 it is semi-determined whether it is a cherry opportunity. If it is a cherry trigger, in step S11022, a process of adding 1 to the cherry counter is executed. In a succeeding step S11023, processing for storing the number of additional games of this time in the cherry after-mounting individual area is executed. In step S11024, display setting of the second added character BUP2 is performed as the cherry added character.

  After executing any one of steps S11020 and S11024, or when a negative determination is made in step S11021, the process proceeds to step S11025. In step S11025, after executing the process of subtracting the number of additional games this time from the post-addition counter BG, the setting process of the additional effect is ended. The process in step S11023 corresponds to the process in step S8607.

  Although a detailed description with reference to the drawings is omitted, as described above, when the post-installation flag is set, when the remaining number of games on the display of the attack mode becomes a predetermined game, the post-installation effect is generated. In this case, similarly to the processing in steps S10605 to S10620 in FIG. 189, when there are a plurality of pieces of information to be added, the information is stored in each individual area, for example, based on the operation of the effect switch 66. While performing information acquisition and erasure processing, a post-stage effect is generated for each additional opportunity.

  In this case, when performing a retrofit effect, a process of adding the value of the counter for watermelon counter to the counter for total watermelon provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is executed, and the value of the counter counter for cherry is added. Is added to the total cherry retrofit counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, and then the process corresponding to the above-described steps S10605 to S10620 in the retrofit effect is performed. In this case, as described above, the counter for watermelon and the counter for cherry are decremented by 1 every time an extra effect is generated, while the values for the counter for total watermelon and the counter for total cherry are It doesn't change even if the performance is added. By doing so, as shown below, it is possible to calculate the immediate / rearward ratio afterwards.

  The setting process of the attack mode end effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the attack mode end effect setting process is a process executed by the display control device 81 after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the attack mode end game.

  First, in step S11101, a repair for determining the total number of acquired medals is executed. In a succeeding step S11102, a process for grasping the number of continued games is executed. As described above, the total number of acquired medals and the number of continued games are displayed in the attack mode end effect, and the processes in steps S11101 and S11102 are processes for display.

  In step S11103, a process of grasping the total watermelon immediate addition counter and the total cherry immediate addition counter is executed. In a succeeding step S11104, processing for grasping the total watermelon retrofit counter and the total cherry retrofit counter is executed. As described above, the total counter for watermelon and the counter for total cherry are counters to which the values of the counter for watermelon and the counter for cherry are added when performing a post effect.

  Then, in step S11105, a process for calculating the total watermelon immediate / replacement ratio and the total cherry immediate / rearward ratio is performed. In step S11106, the calculated ratios are displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65. Process to display. After that, in step S11107, display side end processing at the end of the attack mode, such as initialization processing of various counters, is executed, and then the attack mode end effect setting processing ends.

  An example of the attack mode end effect is shown in FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), the number of continuous games and the number of acquired medals are displayed as notification that the attack mode has ended. For example, as an operation instruction character for prompting the operation of the effect switch 66, a character imitating a button, an arrow character indicating the operation direction of the button, and “PUSH” indicating that the button should be pressed are referred to as “PUSH”. Display characters. When the effect switch 66 is operated, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), the third ratio display HP3 is displayed as a graph corresponding to the immediate / rearward ratio for the total watermelon in the current attack mode. As the 4 ratio display HP4, a graph display corresponding to the immediate addition / rearward ratio for the total cherry in the current attack mode is performed. In the example of FIG. 198 (b), the third ratio display HP3 and the fourth ratio display HP4 are displayed as a pie chart, but the first ratio display HP1 and the second ratio display HP2 in FIG. 196 (b) are displayed. As such, it may be a stacked bar graph.

  By doing as described above, it is possible to entertain not only the specialized zone, but also the entire attack mode, based on the immediate addition / retroduction ratio of the extra effect. In particular, considering that the winning probability of cherry is about 1/150 and the winning probability of watermelon is about 1/50, a limited number of games called specialized zones (5 games in the above embodiments) The chance to win these cherries and watermelons is rare. Then, even if the game of predicting and grasping the set value is performed during the specialization zone with the cherry or watermelon opportunity that has been prepared, it may be difficult to generate such an opportunity. On the other hand, if the winning probability of cherries and watermelons is increased or the number of continued games in the specialized zone is increased in order to solve this problem, there is a concern that the appearance rate will rise. Therefore, as described above, cherry and watermelon in the attack mode are targeted for playability based on the immediate ride / replacement ratio, so that such playability is suitably avoided while avoiding an increase in the payout rate. Can be realized.

<Modification 7>
The information regarding the execution timing of the additional notification such as the immediate addition / rearward addition ratio is not limited to the configuration displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the present modification, a configuration is described in which information relating to such execution timing can be read by a portable terminal or the like possessed by the player. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing processing for a mobile terminal executed by the display control device 81. The mobile terminal process is, for example, a process performed by a process that is periodically started in the display control device 81. In addition, this modification demonstrates the process for the information regarding the said immediate mounting / aftercarriage ratio especially in an advantageous area among the processes for portable terminals.

  In step S11201, it is determined whether an advantageous section has been started. When the advantageous section is started, measurement of each counter of the total watermelon immediate addition counter, the total watermelon additional counter, the total cherry immediate addition counter, and the total cherry additional counter is started in step S11202. More specifically, for example, a process of setting a flag that makes it possible to determine whether measurement is in progress is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S11201, or after the processing in step S11202 is executed, it is determined in step S11203 whether or not the user has logged out. In addition, in this modification, user information etc. is input on the management screen of the gaming machine, and information regarding the immediate carry / replacement ratio in particular can be output only when logged in. In S11203, an affirmative determination is made when the logged-in user logs out, while a negative determination is made without making an affirmative determination in a situation where the user has not logged in originally. When an affirmative determination is made in step S11203 and the logged-in user logs out, in step S11204, a total watermelon immediate addition counter, a total watermelon additional counter, a total cherry immediate addition counter, and a total cherry additional counter The measurement of each counter is terminated, and initialization processing of each counter is executed. That is, each counter is initialized by logging out. On the other hand, when the advantageous section is started, measurement of each counter is started regardless of the presence or absence of login. This prevents the game data from being read by other successor users while avoiding the event that the counter is not counted due to forgetting to log in.

  When a negative determination is made in step S11203, or after the processing of step S11204 is executed, the process proceeds to step S11205. In step S11205, it is determined whether or not a ratio display request operation has been performed. This requested operation is, for example, an operation corresponding to the operation instruction character (FIG. 198 (a)) during the attack mode end effect shown in Modification 6 and includes an operation of the effect switch 66 and the like. When an affirmative determination is made in step S11205, the process proceeds to step S11206 to determine whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous zone. If it is not in the advantageous section, in step S11207, a process for displaying the total watermelon immediate / replacement ratio and the total cherry immediate / replacement ratio is performed. Incidentally, whether or not it is in the advantageous section is determined not to be in the advantageous section in the advantageous section end game (game in which the attack mode end effect is executed).

  In this case, instead of the configuration in which the auxiliary display unit 65 displays these ratios as shown in FIG. 198 (b), as shown in FIG. Code or barcode). By reading the code display, the player can perform data analysis or the like later with his / her portable terminal or the like. Moreover, by doing in this way, possibility that a display content will be read by another player can be made low, and the predominance over having these information can be secured.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S11206 and it is determined that the vehicle is in an advantageous zone, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that a limited display is performed in step S11208. In the limited display, as shown in FIG. 200 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text “Restricted” while not displaying the immediate / rearward ratio. That is, when the requested operation for the ratio display is in the advantageous section, the output of information related to the ratio display for the requested operation is restricted. In this way, it is not possible to guess the set value from the ratio display during the advantageous section, and it is possible to know it after the advantageous section is finished, so that it is possible to pay attention to the ratio display. Can be avoided.

  After performing the process of step S11207 or step S11208, after performing other processes in step S11209, the process for portable terminals is terminated. The other processing corresponds to processing for managing other information that can be read by the mobile terminal (total execution game, number of jackpots, number of winning of child roles, etc.). Also, if a negative determination is made in step S11205, the mobile terminal processing is terminated as it is.

  By doing as described above, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the execution timing of the extra notification later. In particular, it is easy to remain in the memory of the player who wants an advantageous event, but the number of occurrences and contents of an advantageous event such as the number of added games is likely to remain in the memory of the player who wants an advantageous event. It is considered easy to be erased from the player's memory when a certain event occurs, and it is difficult to recall the notification timing later. In that respect, by making the notification timing readable to the mobile terminal as in the above-described configuration, it is possible to greatly help the data analysis of the notification timing.

<Modification 8>
In the configuration that displays (outputs) the immediate / rearward ratio at the end of the attack mode, the display (output) may be performed at a part of the end of the attack mode. In this modified example, when the attack mode is forcibly terminated by the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section, the above ratio is displayed (output). FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the attack mode end effect in the present modification.

  The setting process of this modification is substantially the same as the flowchart of FIG. As a difference, after the same processing as step S11101 and step S11102 is performed in step S11301 and step S11302, it is determined in step S11303 whether the process is forcibly terminated. In the case of forced termination, in step S11304 to step S11307, a ratio display (output) process is performed as in steps S11103 to S11106. Thereafter, after initialization processing of each counter is executed in step S11308, the setting process of the attack mode end effect is ended. On the other hand, if the remaining number of games is zero before the upper limit is reached instead of forcibly ending, the process of step S11308 is performed without executing steps S11304 to S11307, and the attack mode end effect is displayed. The setting process ends.

  As described above, it is possible to compensate for the forced termination of the attack mode by outputting the information on the immediate / post-load ratio based on the forced termination of the attack mode.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the player can select the execution timing of the extra effect. FIG. 202 is a diagram for describing a state in which the execution timing of the extra effect is selected in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, any game that executes an extra effect is configured to be executed as an effect when all stops. That is, in the present embodiment, the selection of the execution timing of the extra effect will be described as meaning that the game that executes the extra effect is selected.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to select the execution timing of the extra effect when the extra winning is given as the specific combination opportunity in the game that is the specific combination winning opportunity as the additional opportunity in the attack mode. In this embodiment, the execution timing is selected depending on which reel among the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is to be stopped first. The extra effects with different execution timings are the immediate effects where the extra effects occur in the extra winning game shown in the fifth embodiment etc., and the games after the extra winning game. In the attack mode or the like, the number of remaining games on the display is the predetermined number (1), the post-direction effect in which the additional effect is generated, and the precursor mode is executed over the predetermined number of games from the winning game. After that, a pre-via effect where an extra effect is generated is set.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 202 (a), when a specific combination is won during the attack mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a character display “Select a fate by reel stop!” As a notification mode selection effect. Thus, it is informed that it is possible to select an additional effect mode at the time of winning by adding the stop switches 42 to 44. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the immediate riding effect is selected when the first operation is performed on the left reel 32L, the post-loading effect is selected when the middle reel 32M is first operated to stop, and the right reel 32R is first selected. When the stop operation is performed, the pre-via effect is selected. Therefore, in the notification mode selection effect, the character that imitates the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the corresponding character that is associated with the effect that is selected when each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. Is displayed. Specifically, a first corresponding character TP1 (for example, “immediate” character) indicating an immediate ride effect corresponding to the character of the stop switch 42 is displayed, and a post-loading effect corresponding to the character of the stop switch 43 is displayed. The second corresponding character TP2 (for example, the character “after”) is displayed, and the third corresponding character TP3 (for example, the character “before”) indicating the indication effect is displayed corresponding to the character of the stop switch 44. . In addition, a chance notification effect (surprise mark) indicating that the game is a specific role winning is also generated, and such a chance notification effect and each display for selecting the execution timing of the additional effect are as follows: Displayed so as not to overlap each other.

  When the player first stops the left reel 32L in the game, as shown in FIG. 202 (b1), the left reel 32L is stopped based on the stop operation, and then the other reels are also stopped and then added. Production occurs.

  When the player first stops the middle reel 32M in the game, as shown in FIG. 202 (b2), the middle reel 32M is stopped based on the stopping operation, and then the other reels are also stopped. A post-production effect corresponding to the selection of the production effect is generated. In this example, a state where a first additional character BUP1 indicating that an additional right based on a watermelon opportunity has been acquired is displayed is displayed as an effect for subsequent addition. The subsequent effect based on the first additional character BUP1 or the like is as described in the fifth embodiment.

  When the player first stops the right reel 32R in the game, as shown in FIG. 202 (b3), the right reel 32R stops based on the stop operation, and then the other reels also stop. An effect for the sign is generated corresponding to the selection of the route effect. In this example, the sign “Chance” is displayed at the approximate center of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the band display “Chance is in progress” is generated on the auxiliary display unit 65. Is shown. The extra effect via the precursor mode will be described later. However, the precursor mode continues over the set number of games, and the added effect is generated when the set number of games becomes zero.

  Hereinafter, a processing configuration for realizing the above-described effects will be described.

  FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the extra effect in the present embodiment. As described above, the setting process of the extra effect is a process executed at the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by the display control device 81 in the specific role winning game.

  In step S12001, a process of grasping the number of additional games this time is performed. In step S12002, it is determined whether or not a precursor via flag is set. The sign via flag is a flag that is set when the player selects the sign via effect based on the extra opportunity. The case where the sign via flag is set in step S12002 means that an extra opportunity has occurred in the game before the game, the sign via effect is selected, and the sign mode based on this selection is in progress. , It means that there is no additional production yet. If an affirmative determination is made in step S12002, in step S12003, the number of added games in the warning mode, that is, the indication effect via the warning is selected, the number of added games in which the additional effect has not yet occurred is grasped, and the number of additional games grasped Is added to the number of games added this time. In step S12004, a process for clearing the precursor via flag is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S12002, or after the processing of step S12004 is executed, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are turned on so that the notification mode selection effect (FIG. 202 (a)) is executed in step S12005. Control. And in step S12006, after performing the process which sets an alerting | reporting aspect selection flag, the setting process of an additional effect is complete | finished. The notification mode selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the stop operation of the first reel in the current game is the stop operation that is the target of the notification mode selection effect.

  Next, in the game in which the notification mode selection effect is executed, a process when the first reel stop operation is performed (first stop ON effect setting process) will be described with reference to FIG. This process is a process performed in step S2204 in each stop operation time effect setting process (FIG. 49). More specifically, the process is performed in step S2204 when it is determined in step S2203 that the first stop ON operation is set as the target reel.

  In step S12101, it is determined whether the notification mode selection flag is set. If not set, in step S12102, another set first stop ON effect is executed, and then the first stop ON effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S12101 that the notification mode selection flag is set, processing for clearing the notification mode selection flag is executed in step S12103. In step S12104, whether or not the immediate riding effect is selected in the current notification mode selection effect, that is, whether or not the current first stop ON operation is the stop ON operation of the left reel 32L (left stop switch 42). Determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S12104, a process of setting an immediate ride selection flag is executed in step S12105, and then the first stop-ON effect setting process is terminated. The immediate ride selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the immediate ride effect has been selected.

  If a negative determination is made in step S12104, in step S12106, the post-loading effect is selected in the current notification mode selection effect, that is, the current first stop ON operation is performed on the middle reel 32M (medium stop switch 43). It is determined whether or not the operation is a stop ON operation. When an affirmative determination is made in step S12106, a process for setting a post-installation selection flag is executed in step S12107, and then the first stop-ON effect setting process is terminated. The post-installation selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the post-installation effect has been selected.

  When the negative determination is made in step S12106, the indication effect is selected in the current notification mode selection effect, that is, the current first stop ON operation is the stop ON of the right reel 32R (right stop switch 44). It means that it was an operation. In this case, in step S12108, a process for setting a sign selection flag is executed, and then the first stop-ON effect setting process is ended. The sign selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the sign via effect has been selected.

  FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the processing for adding notification when all stops in the present embodiment. The all-stop addition notification effect process is a process performed in steps S2309 and S2319 in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 51). Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, any additional effects are executed as all-stop effects, and are not executed at the time of the first stop ON operation, the second stop OFF operation, or the like.

  In step S12201, it is determined whether or not the immediate ride selection flag is set. If the immediate ride selection flag is set, processing for clearing the immediate ride selection flag is executed in step S12202. Thereafter, in step S12203, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute an extra effect triggered by the current game (see FIG. 202 (b1)).

  If a negative determination is made in step S12201, it is determined in step S12204 whether or not a post-selection flag is set. If the post-installation selection flag is set, processing for clearing the post-installation selection flag is executed in step S12205. After that, in step S12206, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute an effect for subsequent riding (see FIG. 202 (b2)). Then, in step S12207, a process of storing the number of additional games this time in the individual area is executed, and in step S12208, a process of setting a post-add flag is executed. The processes in step S12207 and step S12208 correspond to the processes in step S11016, step S11019, step S11023, and the like, and are storage processes for generating an extra effect later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S12204, it is determined in step S12209 whether or not a precursor selection flag is set. If the precursor selection flag is set, processing for clearing the precursor selection flag is executed in step S12210. Thereafter, in step S12211, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute the effect for the precursor (see FIG. 202 (b3)). Then, in step S12212, a process of storing the number of added games this time in the individual area is executed, and in step S12213, a lottery process of the number of precursor games is executed. Then, in step S12214, a process of inputting the number of precursor games lottery in step S12213 is executed in the continuous effect counter, and in step S12215, a process of setting the continuous effect flag and the precursor via flag is executed. The processing for setting the continuous effect flag in step S12213, step S12214, and step S12215 corresponds to the processing in step S2506, step S2507, and step S2509, and processing for setting the precursor mode on the display control device 81 side, and It is a process in the case of performing a continuous production based on this. In addition, by setting the precursor via flag in step S12216, in the subsequent game (the game until the number of precursor games set in step S12212 is consumed), the setting process of the extra effect is performed. In step S12002, an affirmative determination is made.

  After executing any of the processes of step S12203, step S12208, and step S12215, or after making a negative determination in step S12209, the process proceeds to step S12216. The processing of step S12216 to step S12220 is processing when it is selected that an extra effect is generated in a subsequent game, not an extra winning game, that is, when a post effect or an indication effect is selected. .

  That is, in step S12216, it is determined whether or not the post-installation flag is set, and whether or not the current game is a game for generating post-installation effects. More specifically, when the postponing flag is set and the display remaining number counter HG is 1 as a predetermined value, an affirmative determination is made in step S12216. If an affirmative determination is made in step S12216, a post-effect setting process is executed in step S12217.

  Here, the setting process of the post-effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that in the after-effects in this embodiment, basically the same effects as the after-zone effects (content notification) in the zone shown in the fifth embodiment are generated.

  That is, in step S 12301, a process for obtaining the data (the number of added games) of the individual area with reference to the individual area in which the oldest data is stored among the plurality of individual areas provided. In this case, the corresponding rearward characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. are enlarged and displayed at the approximate center of the auxiliary display unit 65. In the subsequent step S12302, it is determined whether or not the effect switch 66 has been operated as an effect operating unit, and the operation waits until it is operated. If operated, the process proceeds to step S12303, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to display the number of added games as well as the effect that the treasure box is opened as the content notification (FIG. 185 (b)). ). In the subsequent step S12304, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to add the number corresponding to the number of extra effects executed in step S12303 to the display remaining number counter HG and update the corresponding display. To do. In step S12305, the process of erasing the data in the current individual area is performed. In step S12306, it is determined whether or not unreported individual area data remains.

  In step S12306, if unreported individual area data remains, the process returns to step S12301, and the processes of steps S12301 to S12305 are repeated. In other words, the post-stage effect is a configuration in which the post-stage effects are sequentially performed in the order in which the extra opportunities are generated. Become.

  If it is determined in step S12306 that unreported individual area data does not remain, the process proceeds to step S12307, and a process of clearing the postponing flag is executed. Thereafter, in step S12308, for example, after the total number of games added in the current post-effect is notified as the post-effect production end processing, the post-effect effect setting processing is ended.

  Returning to the description of the all-stop addition notification process, when a negative determination is made in step S12216, or after the process of step S12217 is executed, the process proceeds to step S12218. In step S12218, it is determined whether the precursor via flag is set and the continuous effect counter is zero. As already described, the continuous performance counter is a counter for grasping the number of games in the sign mode, and is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game. That is, the game in which the continuous effect counter is 0 is the final game in the precursor mode. In this case, the process proceeds to step S12219, and a process of reading the number of games added from the individual area is executed. Then, in step S12220, auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that the corresponding number of games is added. When a negative determination is made in step S12218, or after the process of step S12220 is executed, the stop-time addition notification process is terminated.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the relationship between the winning modes of various specific roles and the first reel that is selected in the notification mode selection effect.

  When the specific role is a strong cherry, as already explained, the symbol combination corresponding to the 28th small role, the 32nd small role to the 35th small role stops on the active line, and a strong cherry prize is established (see FIG. 17). For any of the 28th small role, the 32nd small role to the 35th small role, the corresponding symbol of the left reel 32L is the “cherry” symbol or the “second replay” symbol (FIG. 10). In this case, the “cherry” symbol is assigned fourth in the left reel 32L, and the “second replay” symbol is assigned sixth in the left reel 32L. That is, in the 3-bet game, the left stop switch 42 is from the timing when the 18th “black BAR” symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage to the timing when the fourth “cherry” symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage. Is operated (ON operation), the corresponding symbol of the strong cherry can be stopped on the active line. In other words, if the operation timing of the left stop switch 42 is the timing when the 17th “white BAR” symbol reaches the lower stage from the 5th “LUCKY” symbol of the left reel 32L, the strong cherry corresponding symbol is the effective line. It cannot be stopped immediately, and so-called spilling occurs.

  On the other hand, in the strong cherry, the corresponding symbol of the middle reel 32M is, for example, the “red bell” symbol, the “white bell” symbol, or the “cherry” symbol in the 28th small role (FIG. 10). The middle reel 32M is not separated by more than 5 symbols, and any symbol can be stopped on the active line regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the middle stop switch 43. In the strong cherry, the corresponding symbol of the right reel 32R is, for example, the “cherry” symbol, the “first replay” symbol, or the “second replay” symbol in the 28th small role (FIG. 10). As for these symbols, any symbol can be stopped on the active line regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the right stop switch 44.

  That is, when the extra winning is a strong cherry, in the notification mode selection effect, when the left reel 32L is first stopped and an immediate effect is selected, the strong cherry winning is caused by the stop operation. May not be established and may be missed. On the other hand, in the notification mode selection effect based on strong cherries, when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped to try to select the post-loading effect or the warning effect, the failure is caused by the stop operation. There is no case. As described above, when selecting the execution timing of the extra effect based on the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has a different possibility of being overlooked. The presence / absence of the spillover can be added to the selection game of the execution timing of the extra effect.

  For example, for a player who is concerned that the possibility of losing is increased due to the competition between the selection operation and the stop operation, in the notification mode selection effect triggered by the strong cherry winning, the middle reel 32M or the right reel It is conceivable to stop the 32R first. In this case, as the extra effect, the post effect or the indication effect is selected, and the extra effect is generated in the later game than the game. On the other hand, when the left reel 32L is first operated to stop after being aware of the possibility of missing, an immediate ride effect is selected, and an extra is generated in the game. As a result, even if there is a missing game, it is possible to clearly grasp whether the game has been won by a small role or not, by generating an extra effect in the game. By doing in this way, when selection operation and stop operation compete, it can be set as the production which considered the risk of missing, and the game nature by these selection operations is improved.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the game in which the specific combination winning in the attack mode is performed, the execution timing (execution game) of the extra effect triggered by the specific combination winning is different based on the stop operation mode of the game. More specifically, in the specific role winning game, when the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time, an immediate effect is generated, and when the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, a post-effect is generated, and the right reel is generated. When 32R is stopped for the first time, a predecessor effect is generated. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the execution execution timing at the time of the addition is determined by the stop operation mode of the extra winning game, it is possible to realize the extra effect according to the player's preference.

  In particular, since the selection of the execution timing of the extra effect is performed in the extra winning game, for example, the execution timing is selected in comparison with the configuration selected at the start of the attack mode or before the transition to the attack mode. The timing is likely to be close to the timing at which an extra opportunity has occurred. This makes it possible to select the execution timing according to the state of the attack mode that changes from moment to moment, and it is possible to more reflect the request to the player.

  While the push order notification is frequently generated during the attack mode, the push order notification is not generated in the specific combination winning game that is a trigger for the addition. That is, the notification mode selection effect and the push order notification effect are set so as not to compete with each other. Thereby, in the notification mode selection effect, there is no event that there is no room for selection of the additional effect because the push order for winning a desired result is set. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the playability by the notification mode selection effect.

  As described above, while the push order notification frequently occurs during the attack mode, the push order notification does not occur at the time of winning the specific role, so as a player, while aiming for medal acquisition by the push order notification, It is considered that the game progresses with a sense of expectation that a game in which no push order notification is generated will occur. In other words, since the notification mode selection effect is generated in a game in which the push order notification does not occur, the notification mode selection effect is performed in a situation where the degree of attention has already been increased. Can be realized.

  As already described, the attack mode is executed mainly in the second RT state, but in the second RT, the probability of winning one of the replays is high, and the replay winning is frequently established. Among the replays that can be won during the second RT state, there are replays that are not subject to push order notifications such as normal replays, in addition to push replays such as fall replays 1 to 3 and second promoted replays 1 and 2. In other words, in the second RT state in which replay is frequently won, there are not only games that establish a desired replay winning by notifying the pressing order but also games that establish a replay winning without being notified of the pressing order. Under such a premise, since it is configured to generate a notification mode selection effect when a specific role winning is achieved, whether the notification mode selection effect is generated is a specific role winning or a normal replay winning It will function as a branching effect. Accordingly, the attention level in the normal replay winning game is increased by using the high interest in the notification mode selection effect, and the attention level can be improved throughout the attack mode.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, in the situation close to the upper limit number of games of the advantageous period, it is made impossible to select the predecessor effect. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the first stop-ON effect setting process in the present modification.

  The processing from step S12401 to step S12407 is the same as the processing from step S12101 to step S12107. When the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time, the immediate loading selection flag is set, and when the middle reel 32M is set to the first stop. Set the trailing selection flag. If it is determined in step S12406 that the middle reel 32M is not in the first stop, it is determined in step S12408 whether or not the number of executed games in the current advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number of games (1450 games). . That is, assuming that the predetermined number of games is 1450 games, the affirmative determination in step S12408 is a case where there are less than 50 games up to the upper limit of the advantageous section. In this case, even if the predecessor effect is selected with the right reel 32R as the first stop, the process proceeds to step S12405, and a process for setting the immediate ride selection flag is executed. In other words, when an additional opportunity arises in a situation close to the upper limit of the advantageous section, the additional effect is generated as if the immediate effect was forcibly selected even if the warning effect was selected. In this way, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the advantageous section is forcibly terminated during the precursor mode. If it is determined in step S12408 that the number of games played in the current advantageous section is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games, the sign selection flag is set in step S12409, and then the current selection is performed, as in step S12108. 1 When the stop is ON, the effect setting process is terminated.

  As described above, it is possible to limit the execution of the effect selected in the notification mode selection effect in the relationship with the forced termination game of the advantageous interval, so that the advantageous zone (attack mode) is not executed without the selected effect being executed. ) Can be avoided.

  In the above configuration, the description has been made on the premise that the third corresponding character TP3 is displayed that the predecessor effect is selected when the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time. It is good also as a structure which does not display 3 corresponding character TP3. In this case, it is preferable to display the first corresponding character TP1 corresponding to the immediate riding effect instead of the third corresponding character TP3. However, since the above configuration does not require a change in the notification mode selection effect itself, there is an advantage that the effect configuration can be simplified. In addition, when the right reel 32R is set to the first stop in the notification mode selection effect, it may be configured to forcibly add the effect.

  Further, when the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time and the post-stage effect is selected, depending on the number of games to be played in the advantageous section (if the number of executed games is 1450 or more), the immediate effect is forcibly added. It is good also as composition to do. Even in this case, the second corresponding character TP2 corresponding to the post-loading effect may not be displayed, or the first corresponding character TP1 corresponding to the immediate loading effect may be displayed instead of the second corresponding character TP2. Good.

  The correspondence relationship between the selection operation executed in the notification mode selection effect and the execution timing of the selected addition notification may be made different according to the number of additional games at the time of winning the addition. Specifically, for example, when the number of added games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games (100 games), the additional effect is executed at a predetermined probability (50%) at an execution timing different from the execution timing selected by the selection operation. It is good also as a structure made. More specifically, when the number of games to be added is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games, even if the effect via the precursor is selected, it is possible to execute the immediate effect without the selected effect via the precursor with a predetermined probability. Good. In this way, the surprise of the added number of games is added to the surprise of being executed at a timing different from its own will, and it is possible to produce an effect that makes the player more surprised.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, a notification mode selection effect is executed in a game won in normal replay (a game different from the extra winning game). FIG. 208 (a) is a flowchart showing the effect setting process during normal replay. This process is performed in the start effect setting process in the display control device 81 as the start effect of the normal replay winning game in the attack mode.

  In step S12501, it is determined whether or not the selected counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is 1 or more. The selected counter indicates the number of games in which the execution timing of the extra effect selected in the notification mode selection effect is valid, and a predetermined value (20) is input by the selection operation, and one each time one game is consumed. A counter to be subtracted.

  When the selected counter is 1 or more, the effect setting process at the time of normal replay is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the selected counter is 0, the notification setting selection flag is set in step S12502, and then the effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the normal replay winning game, the notification mode selection effect can be executed as the first stop ON effect.

  In the first stop-ON effect setting process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 209, the same processes as those in steps S12101 to S12108 are executed in steps S12601 to S12608. After executing one of the processes of step S12605, step S12607, and step S12608, the process proceeds to step S12609, where a process of inputting, for example, “20” as a predetermined value to the selected counter is executed, and then the first stop ON The time production setting process ends. Thereby, an affirmative determination is made in step S12501 over 20 games thereafter. More specifically, by performing the selection operation at the time of normal replay winning, the notification mode selection effect does not occur even if the normal replay is won again after 20 games.

  As described above, the process for setting various kinds of extra effects is executed in the extra notification process at the time of all stops (FIG. 205). More specifically, by generating a notification mode selection effect at the time of normal replay winning and causing the selection operation to be performed, any one of the immediate addition selection flag, the subsequent addition selection flag, and the precursor selection flag is set. If an extra win is won, based on the above selection operation performed in the game before the extra win game (based on the immediate addition selection flag, the subsequent selection flag, and the sign selection flag), all stops In the hour addition notification process, the execution timing of the addition effect is set.

  That is, in the notification mode selection effect at the time of the normal replay winning, when the left reel 32L is first stopped and the immediate ride effect is selected, the immediate ride selection flag is set. An extra effect is generated in the winning game (an immediate effect is generated). Further, in the notification mode selection effect at the time of the normal replay winning, when the rear reeling effect is selected when the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, the rearward selection flag is set. When the number of remaining games on the mode display becomes the predetermined number of games, an extra effect is generated (afterward effect is generated). Then, in the notification mode selection effect at the time of the normal replay winning, when the right reel 32R is first stopped and the effect via sign is selected, the sign selection flag is set, and when the player wins in the subsequent game, the sign mode After that, an additional effect is generated (an effect via a sign is generated).

  Thus, by making the execution game of the notification mode selection effect different from the extra winning game, the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect and the pressing operation in the specific role selection will not compete. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the phenomenon that the eye pressing operation fails and the oversight occurs because the user concentrates on the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect.

  In the present modification, the selected counter process for managing the selected counter will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 208 (b). The selected counter process is performed as one process in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 51) in the display control device 81.

  In step S12511, it is determined whether the selected counter is 1 or more. When it is not 1 or more, that is, when it is 0, the processing for the selected counter is terminated as it is. If it is equal to or greater than 1, in step S12512, the selected counter is decremented by 1. In step S12513, it is determined whether or not the selected counter has become 0. If not, the selected counter process is terminated. If 0 is reached, it is determined in step S12514 whether a post-selection flag or a precursor selection flag is set. If any of these flags is set, the corresponding flag is cleared in step S12515, and the immediate loading selection flag is set in step S12516, and then the selected counter process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S12514 and the immediate ride selection flag is set, even if the selected counter becomes 0, this selection flag is not deleted and is maintained as it is, and the processing for the selected counter is performed. finish.

  As described above, the notification mode selection effect is generated in the normal replay winning game in the attack mode, and the selection operation in the game is considered to be valid over the predetermined number of games. When an extra opportunity occurs before winning the replay, an immediate effect is generated. In other words, the immediate installation effect is set as the default, and the subsequent addition of the predetermined number of games is performed as a different execution timing from the default immediate installation effect by the notification mode selection effect of the normal replay winning game, and the post-direction effect and the indication effect via the sign are displayed. It was set as the structure made to select so that it might be performed. For example, a configuration in which the selection operation at the time of normal replay winning is considered valid until the end of the attack mode is also conceivable. However, with such a configuration, after the selection operation is performed, even if the player's desired execution timing changes due to changes in the game situation (increase / decrease in the number of remaining games in the attack mode, increase in acquired medals, etc.) It becomes difficult to respond to the change. On the other hand, by doing as described above, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the player himself selects the execution timing of the extra effect according to the situation of the attack mode that can change from moment to moment.

  Moreover, since the predetermined number of games is set to the number of games (20 games) shorter than the initial number of games in the attack mode (50 games), for example, when a notification mode selection effect occurs immediately after the attack mode starts, At least, there is still room for another notification mode selection effect to occur. As a result, even in the case where an extra is not generated, a player who wants to change the execution timing of the add-on effect in the first half and the second half of the attack mode and cause a change in the attack mode effect in preparation for the occurrence. It is possible to meet the needs. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game effect according to the various needs of the player.

  Furthermore, since it is configured to generate a notification mode selection effect triggered by a randomly occurring event such as normal replay winning, as described above, an element of luck is also added as to whether or not a notification mode can be selected, The enjoyment of the game can be improved.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, it is set as the structure which can change the execution timing of the additional alert | report selected by selection operation later. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the extra stop notification process in the present modification.

  The difference between the all-stop addition notification process in the present modification and the flowchart of FIG. 205 is the process when the immediate addition selection flag is set. That is, if it is determined in step S12701 that the immediate ride selection flag is set, a process of clearing the immediate ride selection flag is executed in step S12702. In step S12703, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute an additional effect of the current game. The processes in steps S12701 to S12703 are the same as the processes in steps S12201 to S12203.

  In step S12704, it is determined whether a post-installation flag is set. In the case where it is determined in step S12704 that the add-on flag is set, the add-on effect is selected for the add-on event that occurred before the current add-on event, but the immediate add-on effect is used for this add-on event. Means you have selected. In this case, correction processing is executed in step S12705. If the post-loading flag is not set in step S12704, or after executing the correction process in step S12705, the process proceeds to step S12718. The processing from step S12706 to step S12722 is the same as the processing from step S12204 to step S12220.

  The correction process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S12801, an advanceable effect is set. The advanceable effect is an effect for informing that the add-on effect that should have occurred just before the end of the attack mode is selected and the advance effect can be executed in the current game. . More specifically, in order to notify the situation that it is possible to generate an extra effect in the current game based on the first extra character BUP1, the second extra character BUP2, etc. acquired as the extra right. For example, in the auxiliary display unit 65, a character display “Would you like to open the stored treasure chest?” Is displayed. In addition, in the forward-advanced effect, the characters “YES” and “NO” are displayed, and the player can select whether or not to add the effect by moving forward by operating the effect switch 66 or the like.

  After generating an advanceable effect in step S12801, it is determined in step S12802 whether or not a forward instruction operation has been performed in which an additional effect is generated by moving forward. In the above example, it is preferable that a forward display instruction operation be performed when a character display selection operation of “YES” is performed in an advanceable performance.

  If the forward instruction operation has not been performed in step S12802, it is determined in step S12803 whether or not a post-maintenance operation has been performed in which an additional effect is not generated by forward movement. In the above example, it is preferable that the operation for selecting the character display of “NO” in the effect that can be moved forward is performed as a post-maintenance operation. Further, for example, the operation of any one of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 may be a post-maintenance operation. This is because such an operation can be regarded as a display of intention to start the next game, and can also be regarded as a display of intention that no additional effects are generated in the current game.

  If it is determined in step S12803 that the post-mounting maintenance operation has been performed, the correction process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S12803, the process returns to step S12802 and loops until either a forward instruction operation or a post-mounting operation is performed.

  If it is determined in step S12802 that the forward instruction operation has been performed, the number of stored individual areas is displayed in step S12804. More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 212 (a), the first added character BUP1 and the second added character BUP2 are displayed side by side in the order in which the added effect should have been performed. Thereby, the player can grasp how many right to carry on. In FIG. 212 (a), three first post-up characters BUP1 are displayed side by side, and it is shown that they have three back-up rights triggered by a watermelon winning.

  In the subsequent step S12805, it is determined whether or not an individual area selection operation has been performed. For example, in FIG. 212 (a), a cursor such as an arrow is displayed with respect to the arranged right to mount (treasure box), and one additional right (treasure box) can be selected by moving and determining the cursor. . For example, the effect switch 66 may be used for selection of the right to add the rider. For example, the cursor is automatically moved at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 sec) to indicate a desired right to add the rider. When the effect switch 66 is operated in this state, it is assumed that one additional right is selected and an individual area selection operation is performed. If an individual area selection operation has not been performed, the process returns to step S12805 to wait until a selection operation is performed.

  If a selection operation has been performed, in step S12806, a process of reading data on the number of added games in the selected individual area is executed. Then, in step S12807, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the corresponding individual area is overlaid (FIG. 212 (b)). In step S12808, a process of adding the number of additional games of this time to the display remaining number counter HG is performed, and in step S12809, data erasure processing of an individual area corresponding to the additional effect generated in step S12807 is executed.

  In step S12810, it is determined whether there is an unreported individual area. When it exists, it returns to step S12802 and repeats step S12802 to step S12809. If there is no unreported individual area, a negative determination is made in step S12810, the process proceeds to step S12811, and a process of clearing the postponing flag is executed. After that, in step S12812, after finishing the finishing effect, the correction process is ended. The processes in steps S12811 and S12812 are the same as the processes in steps S12307 and S12308.

  In the modification process in the present modification, the characters corresponding to the acquired right to carry on are displayed in order as shown in FIG. 212 (a), and each character can be selected regardless of the acquisition order. That is, regardless of the order of occurrence of the extra opportunity that has caused the extra stage effect, it is possible to generate the extra stage effect. For example, the first extra right that occurred first and the second right that occurred later If there is a right to carry on later, it is possible to select to perform the extra effect based on the second extra right to be executed before the extra effect based on the first extra right.

  In more detail, in FIG. 212 (a), as the three right to add, in order from the left, the left treasure box indicates the right to add on the basis of the first occurrence, and the inner treasure box is the second added right. The right to add on the basis of the opportunity is shown, and the treasure box on the right shows the right to add on the basis of the opportunity to add the third time. The cursor shown in FIG. 212A indicates the treasure chest corresponding to the second right to add. In this situation, when it is determined that an individual area selection operation has been performed (step S12805: YES), in step S12806, the number of added games is acquired from the individual area corresponding to the second right to add, and in step S12806, An extra effect based on the second right to add is generated (FIG. 212 (b)). In this case, the additional effect of the right to add on the basis of the additional opportunity that has occurred first has not yet occurred. In other words, it is possible to make the occurrence order of the extra opportunity different from the order of occurrence of the extra effect in the post-effect.

  As described above, even if the post-installation effect is selected by the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect, the post-installation effect is supposed to be performed afterwards as an extra effect corresponding to the post-installation effect. By making it possible to execute at a timing before the previous timing, it becomes possible to cope with a player's heart change according to a game situation that changes every moment. For example, if an additional opportunity occurs in the early stage of the attack mode, even if the additional stage based on the current additional stage is selected as a post-stage stage after expecting that an additional stage will occur, the prospect is There is a possibility that, for example, it is possible to change the mind that it is desired to generate the extra selected as the post-production effect before the execution timing of the post-production effect. In that respect, as described above, the selected post-installation effect can be changed to the post-installation effect immediately afterwards, so that it is possible to flexibly cope with the player's change of mind.

  As an opportunity to make the above-mentioned change possible, it was decided that an immediate performance at the time of addition was selected. Assuming that the change is possible, that is, when the correction process is executed, for example, a configuration that can be changed indefinitely, such as a configuration in which a game is generated, an effect of whether or not to make a change (an advanceable effect) is frequent. This may cause annoyance, and the intention of selecting the post-stage effect may not be respected. In that regard, if the immediate effect is selected after the post-effect is selected, there is a high possibility that a heart change has occurred, and in the above configuration, the correction process can be executed in response to a change in the player's mind. It is configured. Thereby, the execution frequency of the processing for surroundings can be lowered, and an effect according to the player's needs can be realized within a range in which the troublesomeness in the effect is not felt.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the forced termination condition of the advantageous section is changed. As described above, in each of the above embodiments, based on the fact that the number of games executed during the advantageous interval has reached the upper limit number of games (1500 games), the advantageous interval is forced regardless of the remaining number of games such as the attack mode. Is configured to end automatically (second section display process). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the first forced termination condition for the upper limit game number, the medal increase / decrease number (the difference number between the medal payout number and the medal use number) in the advantageous section is the upper limit increase number. Reaching (upper limit sheet number, 2400 sheets) is set as a second forced termination condition.

  Specifically, FIG. 213 and FIG. 213 show the situation when the advantageous section ends with the first forced termination condition of the upper limit number of games and when the advantageous section ends with the second forced termination condition of the upper limit increase number. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 213 shows a state where the advantageous section is terminated under the first forced termination condition. It is assumed that, for example, the advantageous section is started by winning the challenge mode at the timing ta1, and the mode is changed to the challenge mode at the timing ta2. As already described, even if the player is selected to enter the challenge mode lottery and then enters the challenge mode, the slot machine 10 is unlikely to notify the push order, and the number of medals decreases as the game progresses. When the attack mode is won during the challenge mode and the transition to the attack mode occurs at the timing of ta3, the push order notification can be generated and the number of held medals also increases. After that, for example, when the transition to the VB mode occurs at ta4, the mode returns to the attack mode at ta5, and when the number of digested games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, which is the upper limit game number at the timing of ta6, The advantageous section is forcibly terminated. In this example, the medal increase / decrease number in the advantageous section does not reach the upper limit increase number (2400) at the timing of ta6, but the first forced termination condition that is the upper limit game number is satisfied. The advantageous section is forcibly ended regardless of the number of remaining games such as the attack mode.

  FIG. 214 shows a state where the advantageous section is terminated under the second forced termination condition. It is assumed that, for example, the advantageous section is started by winning the challenge mode at the timing of tb1, and the mode is shifted to the challenge mode at the timing of tb2. As in the case of ta3, an increase in the number of medals can be expected by shifting to an attack mode in which a push order notification can be generated at the timing tb3.

  Here, the RT state is shifted to the second RT state or the third RT state with a high replay probability by pushing order notification at the time of pushing order replay winning, and a role with a large number of payouts by the pushing order notification at the time of pushing order bell winning (first (1 small role) It is as already explained that a medal increase can be expected by winning a prize, and if the 2nd RT state or the 3rd RT state is digested in a state with a push notification (so-called ART state), An increase of about 1.90 per game can be expected. In addition, bonus results such as 1BB and 2BB are provided as game results where the number of medals can be expected (the medal acquisition can be expected), and in the bonus state based on the 1BB or 2BB winning, the upper limit is 216 Medal payout occurs as the number of payouts. In the bonus state, each game has a high probability of winning one of the BB small and medium roles 1 to 3 and the BB small and medium role 3 is expected to increase by about 6.00 per game. That is, when the number of medals per game (net increase) in the ART state is compared with the net increase number in the bonus state, the bonus state has a larger net increase number, and in order to obtain the same payout number, The number of games that need to go through the state is sufficient.

  In the example of FIG. 214, the timing of tb4 to tb5 and the timing of tb6 to tb7 indicate that the advantageous period has been consumed as a bonus state. After the bonus state ends at tb7, when the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number of 2400 at the timing of tb8, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. In this example, the number of digest games in the advantageous section at the timing of tb8 does not reach the upper limit (1500 games, tb9), but the second forced termination condition that is the upper limit increase number is satisfied. The advantageous section is forcibly ended regardless of the number of remaining games such as the attack mode.

  That is, when the upper limit increase number in the advantageous section is set as the second forced termination condition, the number of games until the second forced termination condition is reached depending on in which state each game in the advantageous section is executed. To be different. FIG. 215 collectively shows a lottery table for the normal gaming state, the first RT state to the third RT state, and the BB state in the present embodiment. As already explained, although the normal game state and the first RT state are different in the types of replays that can be won, the total replay probability is common, and the replay probability is relatively low compared to the second RT state and the third RT state. This is the state. In addition, the second RT state and the third RT state are different in the types of replays that can be won, but the total replay probability is common, and the replay probability is relatively high compared to the normal gaming state and the first RT state. It is. Therefore, in FIG. 215, the normal gaming state and the first RT state are collectively displayed as a low RT state, and the second RT state and the third RT state are collectively displayed as a high RT state. In addition, although the winning order bell and CB winning probability and the number of medals to be paid out (privileges) at the time of winning are different from those of the above-described embodiments, this is a change for adjusting the net increase number.

  FIG. 216 shows the difference in the number of net increase according to each state and the presence / absence of push order notification.

  In the situation where the display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode and the push order notification is not generated, and in the low RT state (the normal gaming state and the first RT state), the net increase that can be expected per game is about -1. The number of medals is reduced by playing the game. On the other hand, even in a situation where the push order notification does not occur, in the above-described high RT state (second RT state and third RT state), the net increase that can be expected per game is about -0.03, The game can be performed with almost no reduction.

  On the other hand, when the display mode is a situation in which the push order notification is generated as in the attack mode or the VB mode, in the low RT state, the net increase that can be expected per game is about -0.99, This is larger than the net increase in the low RT state when the push order notification is not generated (the decrease is reduced). Then, in a situation where a push order notification occurs, and in a high RT state, the net increase in the number of games that can be expected per game is about +1.90, so that many medals can be expected.

  Here, each of the net increase numbers is a net increase number that does not include the number of medals that can be acquired in the bonus state that shifts based on the bonus winning. That is, as described above, in the bonus state based on the first BB or the second BB winning, the net increase number that can be expected per game is about +6.00. The net increase in the bonus state is higher than the net increase in any of the low RT state and high RT state in the situation where the push order notification does not occur and the low RT state and high RT state in the situation where the push order notification can occur. In many cases, by adding the bonus state, the number of net increase per game that can actually be expected in each game is larger than that in which the bonus state is not taken into account. In FIG. 216, the net increase in number including the bonus state is also displayed. In the state where no push order notification is generated, about −1.05 in the low RT state, about +0.52 in the high RT state, and the push order. In a situation where a notification can occur, the number is about −0.44 in the low RT state and about +2.46 in the high RT state.

  The net increase including the bonus status does not take the bonus status into consideration, based on the bonus winning probability per game and the number obtained in the bonus status at the time of winning, converted from the bonus status per game. Calculated by adding to the net increase in number per game. For example, if the bonus winning probability is about 1/254 and the number obtained in the bonus state is 144 (216-3 pieces × 24 games), the increase in the bonus state is the converted value per game, About 1/254 × 144 sheets = about 0.56 sheets. Then, this converted value is added to the net increase number that does not take into account the bonus state, and the net increase number that takes into account the bonus state is calculated.

  The upper limit increase number (2400) that is the second forced termination condition of the advantageous section defined in the present embodiment is the notification of the order of pushing all the upper limit number of games (1500 games) that is the first forced termination condition of the advantageous section. Expected acquisition number when it is digested in a high RT state that can occur (1500 games × about 1.90 pieces = 2850 pieces), and expected acquisition number when considering a bonus state (1500 games × about 2.46) Sheets = 3690 sheets). That is, if all the advantageous sections are digested in a high RT state in which the push order notification can be generated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated under the second forced termination condition before the first forced termination condition. (FIG. 214).

  FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the section display second process in the present embodiment.

  In step S13001, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous zone. Here, in this embodiment, even after the transition to the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 as the section display may not be lit up. This configuration will be described in detail later. As already described, in the first section display process, the number of games in the advantageous section is counted by setting the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag (advantageous section game). Addition of number AG) is started. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined in step S13001 that the advantageous section game number AG is grasped, not the presence / absence of display of the section indicator, and the advantageous section game number AG is 1 or more, the advantageous section game is in the advantageous section. A determination is made, and when the advantageous section game number AG is 0, it is determined that the advantageous section is not an advantageous section.

  In step S13002, an advantageous interval game number AG addition process is executed. In step S13003, an advantageous interval increase / decrease number ZM update process provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The advantageous zone increase / decrease number ZM is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the increase / decrease number of medals in the advantageous zone (the difference between the number of bets and the number paid out in each game in the advantageous zone). In S13003, the number of medals increased / decreased in the current game (the number of medals paid out in the current game−the number of bets in the current game) is grasped based on the result of winning of the current game (the previous winning result handling process or payout determination process). Then, a process of adding the number of medals to the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is performed. For example, when the current game is a 3-bet game and nine medals are paid out, the number of medals increases / decreases is +6, and in step S13003, a process of adding +6 to the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is performed. If the current game is a 3-bet game and no medal is paid out, the medal increase / decrease number is -3, and in step S13003, a process of adding -3 to the advantageous interval increase / decrease number ZM is performed.

  After executing the process of step S13003, a remaining game number management process is executed in step S13004. The remaining game number management process is as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 218, and is substantially the same as in the above embodiments, but when the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less (the total advantageous section game number SG is advantageous). When the situation exceeds the upper limit number of games in the section, step S13110: NO), in step S13111, a process of setting the first excess flag in the various flag storage areas 106d instead of the above excess flag is performed. The first excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the first forced termination condition can be satisfied thereafter, and in the present embodiment, the second forced termination condition can be satisfied thereafter. The configuration is distinguishable from the situation (second excess flag).

  After the remaining game number management process is executed in step S13004, the remaining number management process is executed in step S13005. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the remaining number management process.

  In step S 13201, the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM updated in step S 13003 is grasped. In subsequent step S 13202, the number of remaining games ZG calculated in the remaining game management process in step S 13004 (step S 13107) and the net increase (expected increase / decrease) that can be expected in each game in the advantageous section stored in the ROM 105. The number of remaining increase / decrease expected number NM that can be acquired with the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is calculated from the number KM). In this embodiment, the expected increase / decrease number KM is a net increase number (about +2.46) in consideration of the bonus state when the advantageous section is digested in the high RT state in the situation where the push order notification is generated. ). That is, for example, if the advantageous section remaining game number ZG is 500 games, the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM is 500 games × 2.46 = 11230.

  In step S 13203, the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM grasped in step S 13201 and the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM calculated in step S 13202 are acquired in the current advantageous section taking into account the number of remaining advantageous section remaining games. The number of sheets that can be expected (total increase / decrease expected number SM) is calculated. In step S13204, a process for calculating an increase in the available number FM is performed. The process of step S13204 corresponds to the process of calculating the number of free games FG that can be added in step S13109 in the remaining game number management process, and the process of step S13109 is the first forced termination condition in the subsequent game. Is a process for predicting in advance that the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated, and the process in step S13204 predicts in advance that the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated under the second forced termination condition in the subsequent game. It is processing to do. That is, in step S13204, the total increase / decrease expected number SM calculated in step S13203 is subtracted from 2400 which is the upper limit increase number of advantageous sections.

  By the way, as shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 above, even during the advantageous period, before the transition to the attack mode occurs (until ta3 in FIG. 213 and tb3 in FIG. 214), each game The number of medals can decrease, and the net increase during this period is negative. Then, in the prediction process (step S 13202) performed in each game during this period, it is considered that the prediction should be performed with a net increase in the number of medals. However, as described above, in predicting whether the upper limit increase number is reached or not from the relationship with the current advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM, the decrease to ta3 and tb3 is absorbed into the current advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM. It can be done. Therefore, as described above, a configuration in which the net increase in the meantime is not separately calculated is employed, and the processing configuration is simplified.

  In step S13205, based on the processing result in step S13204, it is determined whether or not the number of vacant sheets FM that can be increased is 0 or less, and is forcibly terminated in the future under the second forcible termination condition. If the number of vacant sheets FM is 1 or more, it is determined that the upper limit increase number has not been reached, and the remaining number management process is terminated. If the empty number FM is equal to or less than 0, the process proceeds to step S13206, the process of setting the second excess flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is performed, and the remaining number management process is terminated. The second excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the second forced termination condition can be satisfied thereafter.

  In the second section display process, after the remaining number management process is executed in step S13005, it is determined in step S13006 whether or not the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit game number 1500, or the advantageous section increase / decrease number. It is determined whether or not ZM has reached the upper limit increase number of 2400 or more. If any of these forced termination conditions is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S13007, and processing for ending the advantageous section is executed.

  That is, in step S13007, the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM are cleared to zero. In a succeeding step S13008, a process for terminating the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. In step S13009, a process for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section is performed, and then the second section display second process is terminated. The display end process of the section display and the data initialization process are as already described.

  Even if it is determined in step S13006 that none of the forced termination conditions are satisfied, if it is determined in step S13010 or step S13011 that the normal termination conditions are satisfied (challenge mode winning flag or attack mode) If none of the winning flag, challenge mode flag, or attack mode flag is set), the process proceeds to step S13007, and the process for ending the advantageous section is performed. The process when the normal end condition is satisfied is the same as the above-described process.

  As described above, the present embodiment has the first forced termination condition that defines the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section and the second forced termination condition that defines the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section. If it is predicted in advance that the forced termination condition of 1 and the second forced termination condition will be established in the future (in a subsequent game) and predicted to be established, the first excess flag and the second By setting an excess flag, the CPU 102 can specify that it will be forcibly terminated in the future.

  In the present embodiment, when the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, and when an additional lottery can be won by adding an extra lot such as an attack mode, the benefit of the additional is obtained by forced termination. As a compensation for not being able to obtain, a setting value suggestion is performed so as to present information that may be useful to the player.

  FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the game number addition processing in the challenge mode and the attack mode in the present embodiment. As already described, this process is a process performed in step S6025, step S918, step S1005, step S1513, step S1517, step S1603, etc., such as the first specific combination process.

  In step S13301, it is determined whether any of the first excess flag and the second excess flag is set. If any excess flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S13302, the number of additional games this time is grasped, and after adding the number of additional games to the target continuous game number in step S13303, the main game is performed. Finish the process of adding the number of games.

  If it is determined in step S13301 that any excess flag is set, the process advances to step S13304. In step S13304, as in step S13302, processing for grasping the number of additional games this time is executed. In step S13305, a process of adding the number of games added this time to the total number of erasure games TEG in the various counter areas 106e is performed. As already described, the total number of annihilation games TEG is a counter for grasping the number of excess games that will be annihilated by forced termination of the advantageous section.

  After executing the process of step S13305, the process for setting value suggestion (special notification) is performed in steps S13306 to S13311. That is, in step S13306, a process of grasping the specific combination that has been used as an additional opportunity this time is executed. And after performing the process which acquires a 5th specific information lottery table from the various table storage area 105a in step S13307, a 5th special information lottery is performed in step S13308.

  As shown in FIG. 221, the fifth special notification lottery table includes a specified combination that has become an additional opportunity (the opportunity for the fifth special notification), a current display mode and a display mode to be added, and a set excess. The winning probability of the fifth special notification lottery is set differently depending on the type of flag.

  Specifically, as in the first special notification lottery table, when the display mode is the challenge mode, it is easier to win the fifth special notification lottery than when the display mode is the attack mode. Even in the zone, it is easier to win the fifth special notification lottery than in the attack mode. In addition, the role having a lower appearance rate (winning rate) of each game is set such that the fifth special notification lottery is easier to win, such that the winning probability of the strong cherry is higher than that of the weak cherry.

  Further, when only the first excess flag is set and when only the second excess flag is set, only the second excess flag is set when only the first excess flag is set. It is set to make it easier to win the fifth special notification lottery than when is set. This is because forced termination always occurs when the first excess flag is set, but forced termination does not occur depending on the lottery result of each subsequent game when the second excess flag is set. There is also a difference.

  In addition, the winning probability of the fifth special notification lottery is set differently when one of the first excess flag and the second excess flag is set and when both the excess flags are set, In the present embodiment, it is set so that the case where both excess flags are set makes it easier to win the fifth special notification lottery. This is because when both the excess flags (and the first excess flag) are set more reliably than the case where only the second excess flag is set, the certainty of the forced termination is increased and the first excess flag is set. Even when both excess flags are set (and the second excess flag is also set), it is more sufficient at the time of forced termination than when only the flag is set This is due to the expected increase in medals.

  After the fifth special notification lottery is performed in step S13308, it is determined in step S13309 whether the result of the fifth special notification lottery is a winning result. If the notification is successful, a process of setting the fifth special notification execution command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S13310. If the notification is not successful, the process proceeds to step S13311. After executing the process of setting the fifth special notification non-execution command as an output target to the display control device 81, the game number addition process is terminated.

  The fifth special notification execution command and the fifth special notification non-execution command correspond to the first special notification execution command and the first special notification non-execution command, and receive the fifth special notification execution command. The display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so as to perform the fifth special notification type lottery and execute the corresponding fifth special notification. Specifically, the first special notification setting process in FIG. 135 may be applied as the fifth special notification setting process. For example, as the fifth special notification type lottery process (step S6703), a plurality of types of fifth special notifications are provided. The fifth special notification lottery corresponding to the type may be executed using the fifth special notification lottery table (FIG. 222 (a)) set so that the winning probabilities differ depending on the set values.

  More specifically, the fifth special notification lottery table includes fifth special notification A, fifth special notification B, and fifth special notification C as the types of the fifth special notification. Different production contents are set to the extent that the player can identify each of them depending on the display contents and sound effects from the speaker 64.

  The various fifth special notifications are different depending on the setting status of the first excess flag and the second excess flag. Specifically, the fifth special notification A is easily selected in a situation where only the first excess flag is set (a situation where the second excess flag is not set), and the fifth special notification B is only the second excess flag. Is easily selected (situation where the first excess flag is not set), and the fifth special notification C is easily selected when both excess flags are set.

  Incidentally, by including information on the presence / absence of the first excess flag and the second excess flag in the fifth special notification execution command and the like, the display control device 81 side can also perform the above-mentioned type of the above-described type based on each excess flag. It is possible to make a selection. Note that when the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, information (command) to that effect is output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81. It is good also as a structure which selects the kind of 5 special alerting | reporting.

  In the fifth special notification type lottery, after the lottery based on the type table of FIG. 222 (a), details of the fifth special notification actually performed are determined based on the detailed table of FIG. 222 (b). Specifically, the fifth special notification a1 and the fifth special notification a2 are provided in the fifth special notification A, and the fifth special notification b1 and the fifth special notification b2 are included in the fifth special notification B. The fifth special notification c1 and the fifth special notification c2 are provided in the fifth special notification C. These are also indicated by the display content by the auxiliary display unit 65, the sound effect from the speaker 64, etc. Different effects are set to such an extent that the player can identify them.

  The detailed production contents of the various fifth special notifications differ depending on the set value, which is easily selected. Specifically, among the fifth special notification A, the fifth special notification a1 is easily selected by the odd setting of the settings 1, 3, and 5, and the fifth special notification a2 is selected by the even setting of the settings 2, 4, and 6. It is easy to be done. Of the fifth special notification B, the fifth special notification b1 is easily selected as setting 3 or more, and the fifth special notification b2 is easily selected as setting 2 or less. Is set not to be selected. Of the fifth special notification C, the fifth special notification c1 can be selected in the settings 5 and 6, while the settings 1-4 are not selected, and the fifth special notification c2 can be selected in the settings 1-4. Not selected in settings 5 and 6.

  That is, only the first excess flag is set, and then an extra opportunity occurs and the fifth special notification A is performed, so that even / odd of the set value can be predicted, and only the second excess flag is set, and then As a result of the occurrence of the additional special event B and the fifth special notification B being performed, the level of the set value can be predicted. Then, both the excess flags are set, and after that, when an extra opportunity is generated and the fifth special notification C is performed, it is possible to determine whether the setting is 5 or more or 4 or less.

  In this way, by changing the setting value suggestion that occurs depending on the set excess flag, that is, depending on which forced termination condition is predicted to be forcibly terminated in the future, In addition to the enjoyment of predicting the set value, the enjoyment of which forced end condition aims to end the advantageous section is also added, and the gameability of the advantageous section is greatly improved.

  More specifically, it is considered that it is preferable for the player to end the advantageous section with the second forced termination condition as the upper limit increase number of medals from the premise that a large number of medals are aimed. If it is desired to see the setting value suggestion that is generated when it is predicted that the forced termination condition will be established in the future, the purpose of achieving the first forced termination condition is also added.

  The fifth special notification is set so that the set value set by one occurrence is difficult to be determined, and the set value can be narrowed down by a plurality of occurrences. On the other hand, the fifth special notification is a configuration that can occur when the additional condition is satisfied after each excess flag is set, so that the set value is narrowed down as the additional condition is satisfied after each excess flag is set. It can be said that it becomes easier to perform information, and it can be said that the more advantageous information is presented to the player as the additional condition is satisfied after the respective excess flags are set.

  Furthermore, since it is more advantageous that the additional condition is satisfied after each excess flag is set, it may be advantageous for the player to set each excess flag as early as possible.

  In other words, by setting each excess flag, the number of games and medal increase / decrease numbers in the advantageous section cannot change any more, but whether or not the additional condition is satisfied after the excess flag is set, Depending on the timing at which the excess flag is set, the game advantage of narrowing the set value is different, and the game is improved.

  The manner in which the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 223 and 224.

  FIG. 223 shows a case where an advantageous section is started at the timing of tc1, challenge mode at the timing of tc2, attack mode at the timing of tc3 and tc5, and VB mode at the timing of tc4. The timing of tc6 is shown as a reference. In this example, the bonus is not won during the advantageous section, and the game between the timing tc3 and the timing tc6 has a net increase of about +1.90 regardless of whether the display mode is the attack mode or the VB mode. Transition in the state of.

  At the timing of tc6, the advantageous section game number AG has not reached 1500 games which is the upper limit number of advantageous sections, and the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM has not reached 2400 which is the upper limit increase number. However, when the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section is added to the current advantageous section game number AG, the upper limit number of games is exceeded. In this case, the first excess flag is set. On the other hand, even if the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM is added to the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM, the upper limit increase number is not exceeded. In this case, the second excess flag is not set.

  In this example, when the advantageous section game number AG reaches 1500 games at the timing of tc7, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. As a result, the advantageous section ends without acquiring 2400 medals, which is the upper limit increase number.

  FIG. 224 shows a case where the advantageous period is started at the timing td1, the challenge mode is started at the timing td2, the attack mode is started at the timing td3, td5, and td7, and the bonus state is started at the timing td4 and td6. The timing of td8 in the attack mode is shown as a reference. In this case, all of the games at the timing of td3 to the timing of td4, the timing of the time of td5 to the timing of td6, and the timing of the timing of td7 to the timing of td8 change in a state where the net increase is about +1.90. On the other hand, the bonus state between the timing of td4 to the timing of td5 and the timing of the timing of td6 to the timing of td7 changes in a state where the net increase number is about +6.00. The increased number of games per game will increase substantially.

  At the timing of td8, the advantageous section game number AG has not reached 1500 games which is the upper limit number of advantageous sections, and the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM has not reached 2400 which is the upper limit increase number. However, when the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM is added to the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM, the upper limit increase number is exceeded. In this case, the second excess flag is set. On the other hand, even if the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section is added to the current advantageous section game number AG, the upper limit number of games is not exceeded. In this case, the first excess flag is not set.

  In this example, the advantageous zone increase / decrease number ZM reaches 2400 at the timing of td9, which is the timing before the timing of td10 when the advantageous zone remaining game number ZG is consumed, and the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated. As a result, the advantageous section ends without digesting the upper limit number of games 1500.

  The relationship between both excess flags and the occurrence rate of the fifth special notification will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  In the advantageous section started from the timing of te1, if an extra opportunity occurs such as winning a specific role such as a strong cherry at the timing of te2, the first excess flag and the second excess are still present at the timing of te2. Since none of the flags is set, an extra lottery based on the extra opportunity is performed. When the winning lottery is won, the corresponding number of games is added.

  When the first excess flag corresponding to the upper limit number of games is set at the timing of te3 and the second excess flag corresponding to the upper limit increase number is not set, and when an additional opportunity occurs at the subsequent timing of te4, Thus, since the first excess flag is set, no extra is generated, and the fifth special notification can be generated instead. As described above, the fifth special notification is performed through the fifth special notification lottery, and the winning probability (occurrence rate) is indicated as A% here.

  When the second excess flag corresponding to the upper limit increase number is set at the timing of te5 and the first excess flag corresponding to the upper limit number of games is not set, and when an additional opportunity occurs at the subsequent timing of te6, Since the second excess flag is set as described above, no extra is generated, and a fifth special notification can be generated instead. In this case, the winning probability (occurrence rate) of the fifth special notification lottery is displayed as B% here.

  When the first excess flag corresponding to the upper limit number of games is set at the timing of te7, and further, the second excess flag corresponding to the upper limit increase number is set, and an additional opportunity has occurred at the subsequent timing of te8 In this case, since the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set as described above, no extra is generated, and a fifth special notification can be generated instead. The winning probability (occurrence rate) of the fifth special notification lottery in this case is displayed as C% here.

  As already described, in the fifth special notification lottery table, the fifth special notification is executed with higher probability when only the first excess flag is set than when only the second excess flag is set. The fifth special notification is set to be executed with higher probability when both excess flags are set than when only one excess flag is set. ing. That is, in the above example, when the occurrence rates of the fifth special notification at each timing of te4, te6, and te8 are compared, if the same display mode is the same specific role, the fifth special notification at the timing of te6 The occurrence rate (B%) of the notification is the lowest, the occurrence rate (C%) of the fifth special notification at the timing of te8 is the highest, and the occurrence rate increases in the order of B%, A%, and C%. That is, the probability that information that may be useful to the player, that is, the suggestion of the set value, is the lowest in the situation where only the second excess flag is set and the highest in the situation where both excess flags are set.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  As the forced termination condition of the advantageous section, a first forced termination condition that is the upper limit number of games and a second forced termination condition that is the upper limit number of medals are provided, and these forced termination conditions are established in the future. In the situation where the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG etc. can be grasped in advance and the compulsory termination condition is known to be satisfied, if an additional advantageous section occurs, the compulsory grasped A setting value suggestion according to the end condition is generated. In this way, by providing a plurality of forcible termination conditions, it is possible to prevent a significant increase in medals that would not be intended by the designer when the advantageous section is digested, and to avoid a rise in the advantageous degree of the advantageous section. It is possible to secure transparency and soundness of the game. On the other hand, by setting the upper limit increase number of medals as the second forcible termination condition, the maximum value of benefits obtained during the advantageous section is defined for the player. It is also conceivable that the interest in the advantageous section is lowered for the reason of the designer, such as avoiding a rise in the advantageous degree of the advantage. In particular, for gaming purposes such as aiming for an increase in medals, when it is specified that the maximum number of increases will be reached in the future, no more medals can be obtained in the advantageous section. The possibility of becoming a so-called digestion game is high. In that respect, as shown in the above configuration, even after it is specified that the upper limit increase number will be reached in the future, a configuration in which information of high interest of the player, such as a setting value suggestion, is presented based on an additional opportunity, and By doing so, it is possible to avoid a decrease in game motivation and to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  In a situation where it is specified that the set value suggestion in the situation where the upper limit number of games that is the first forced end condition is reached and the upper limit increase number of medals that is the second forced end condition is reached The setting value suggestion type and occurrence rate were varied. This makes it possible to give interest to the point of which forced termination condition causes the advantageous section to be terminated. That is, from the viewpoint of aiming for an increase in medals, it seems that it is preferable for the player to end the advantageous section under the second forced termination condition, but the first forced termination condition may be established in the future. From the point of view of the desire to generate a setting value suggestion in the specified situation, it would be desirable to satisfy the first forced termination condition, and vice versa. As described above, in a configuration having a plurality of forced termination conditions for forcibly terminating an advantageous section, not only the degree of advantage when the forced termination condition is met, but also when it is specified that it is established. Different types of benefits (setting value suggestion) are provided, so that the fun of the game is remarkably improved and the game is greatly improved.

<Modification 1>
In the present modification, the content (advantage) of setting value suggestion depends on which of the specification that the first forced termination condition is satisfied and the specification that the second forced termination condition is satisfied first. Make them different. FIG. 226 (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining game management process in this modification, and FIG. 226 (b) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number management process in this modification.

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 226 (a), in the remaining game number management process in this modification, a negative determination is made in step S13110, and if it is determined that the number of free games FG that can be added is 0 or less, step S13401 Proceed to In step S 1401, processing for setting the first excess flag is executed in the same manner as in step S 13111. In a succeeding step S13402, it is determined whether or not the second excess flag is already set. That is, the process of step S13402 is a process of determining whether or not it has already been specified that the second forced termination condition is established after the first forced termination condition is identified afterwards. It is. If the second excess flag is set, in step S13403, a process for setting the second destination flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed, and then the present game number management process ends. The second destination flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the specification that the second forced termination condition is satisfied is performed before the specification that the first forced termination condition is satisfied. is there. If the second excess flag is not set in step S13402, the remaining game number management process is terminated as it is.

  In the remaining number management process, as shown in FIG. 226 (b), a negative determination is made in step S13205, and if it is determined that the increaseable empty number FM is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step S13451. In step S13451, processing for setting the second excess flag is executed in the same manner as in step S13206. In a succeeding step S13452, it is determined whether or not the first excess flag is already set. That is, the process of step S13452 is a process of determining whether or not the first forced termination condition is already established at the stage where it is identified that the second forced termination condition is subsequently established. It is. If the first excess flag is set, in step S13453, processing for setting the first destination flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed, and then the present game number management processing is terminated. The first destination flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the specification that the first forced termination condition is satisfied is performed before the specification that the second forced termination condition is satisfied. is there. If the first excess flag is not set in step S13452, the remaining game number management process is terminated as it is.

  By the way, as described above, when an excess exceeding the upper limit number of games as the first forced termination condition occurs, the added number of games is not added to the advantageous section remaining game number ZG, but is added to the total number of annihilated games TEG. The Further, whether or not the upper limit increase number of medals as the second forced termination condition is exceeded is basically determined by using the predicted total increase / decrease expected number SM from the advantageous section remaining game number ZG. Done. Then, when the first excess flag is set and the second excess flag is set, the game identified as exceeding the upper limit number of medals is basically a game before the upper limit number of games. Is a number. That is, in a situation where it is specified that the first forced termination condition is met and the second forced termination condition is identified, the advantageous segment remaining game number ZG has reached the upper limit game number, and the advantageous In this situation, the upper limit of the number of medals is exceeded before the remaining game number ZG is consumed.

  FIG. 226 (c) and FIG. 226 (d) show the fifth special notification type table in the present modification. In the fifth special notification type table of FIG. 226 (c), the distribution destination (the fifth special notification type) when only the first excess flag is set or when only the second excess flag is set is This is substantially the same as that of the seventh embodiment (FIG. 222 (a)). Of the details of the fifth special notification type table of FIG. 226 (d), the detailed tables of the fifth special notification A and the fifth special notification B are also those of the seventh embodiment (FIG. 222 (b)). ).

  In this modified example, in addition to the fifth special notification A, the fifth special notification B, and the fifth special notification C, the fifth special notification D is set as the distribution destination of the type of the fifth special notification. The 5 special notification D is a special notification mainly selected when both excess flags are set. As shown in FIG. 226 (c), when the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, the first destination flag is set and the second destination flag is not set, that is, When the specific person that the first forced termination condition is established in the future is performed first, the fifth special notification A and the fifth special notification B are each 10 as the distribution destination of the fifth special notification type. % Special notification C is distributed with a probability of 80%, and the fifth special notification D is not distributed. On the other hand, when the first destination flag is not set and the second destination flag is set, that is, the specific one that the second forced termination condition is established in the future is performed first. In this case, as a distribution destination of the type of the fifth special notification, the fifth special notification A and the fifth special notification B are each distributed with a probability of 10%, the fifth special notification C is not distributed, and the fifth special notification C is distributed. Notification D is distributed with a probability of 80%. As with the relationship between the fifth special notification A, the fifth special notification B, and the fifth special notification C, the fifth special notification A, the fifth special notification B, and the fifth special notification are also provided for the fifth special notification D. Different production contents are set such that the player can recognize that the notification is different from C. For example, the display contents by the auxiliary display unit 65, the sound effect from the speaker 64, and the like are different. In this modification, when only the first excess flag is set and when only the second excess flag is set, the fifth special notification C and the fifth special notification D are distributed by 5% each. Has been changed.

  In the detailed table, as shown in FIG. 226 (d), the fifth special notification C is a setting value suggestion that suggests whether or not the setting value is 5 or more, and the setting value is 4 or less. If there is, the fifth special notification c1 is selected, and if the set value is 5 or more, the fifth special notification c2 is selected. On the other hand, the fifth special notification D is a set value suggestion that suggests whether the set value is 4 or 5, or otherwise (1 to 3, 6), and the set value is 4 or 5 If so, the fifth special notification d1 is selected, and if the set value is 1 to 3 or 6, the fifth special notification d2 is selected. In addition, for the fifth special notification d1 and the fifth special notification d2, different contents of the presentation are set such that the player can identify each by the display contents of the auxiliary display unit 65, the sound effect from the speaker 64, and the like.

  In other words, according to the present modification, the specific that the first forced termination condition is established in the future is performed prior to the identification that the second forced termination condition is established in the future, and A case where the specific notification that the second forced termination condition is established in the future is performed prior to the identification that the first forced termination condition is established in the future, and the fifth special notification is generated. The setting value suggestion contents of the former are different, and the former mainly causes a setting value suggestion (fifth special notification C) as to whether or not the setting value is 5 or more, and the latter mainly has a setting value of 4 or 5 Or a set value suggestion (fifth special notification D).

  The relationship between the identification of the first forced termination condition and the identification of the second forced termination condition will be described. The number of games remaining in the same advantageous section is the same as when the first forced termination condition is identified first. Even if it is ZG, it is a case where the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is relatively small, and the case where the specific one of the second forced termination conditions is performed first is the same advantageous section remaining game number ZG, This is a case where the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is relatively large. That is, in a situation where sufficient medals have not been acquired in the advantageous section so far, the first forced termination condition is more easily specified first, and the fifth special notification C is likely to occur. Then, in a situation where sufficient medals can be obtained in the advantageous section so far, the second forced termination condition is more easily specified first, and the fifth special notification D is likely to occur.

  As described above, the specific end of the forced termination condition reflects the game content of the advantageous section until then, and the content of the setting value suggestion as a special notification (obtained by the player) By making different types of information and information that can be useful), the game content of the advantageous section and the special notification can be related to each other. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform special notification according to game contents.

  Comparing the fifth special notification C and the fifth special notification D, the fifth special notification is a setting value suggestion as to whether or not the setting value is 5 or more, and the fifth special notification D has a setting value of 4 or 5 It is a set value suggestion of whether or not, and by combining the fifth special notification C and the fifth special notification D, it is possible to narrow the set value. That is, when the fifth special notification c1 is generated and the fifth special notification d1 is generated, it is determined that the set value is 6, the fifth special notification c1 is generated, and the fifth special notification d2 is generated. Is confirmed that the set value is 5, and if the fifth special notification c2 is generated and the fifth special notification d2 is generated, it is determined that the set value is 4, and the fifth special notification c2 is generated. When the fifth special notification d1 occurs, it is determined that the set value is 3 or less. However, since the fifth special notification C and the fifth special notification D are unlikely to occur in the same advantageous section, it is highly necessary to perform a plurality of advantageous sections when performing such narrowing down. Become. In this way, even after the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, it is possible to encourage the transition to a new advantageous section or enthusiasm for establishing the forced termination condition in the advantageous section. Become.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, when it is specified that both the first forced end condition and the second forced end condition are satisfied, the difference between the games in which the forced end condition will be satisfied is determined. Based on this, the content (advantage) of the set value suggestion is varied. FIG. 227 (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining game management process in this modification, and FIG. 227 (b) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number management process in this modification.

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 227 (a), in the remaining game number management process in this modification, a negative determination is made in step S13110, and if it is determined that the number of free games FG that can be added is 0 or less, step S13501 Proceed to In step S13501, a process of setting the first excess flag is executed in the same manner as in step S13111. In a succeeding step S13502, it is determined whether or not the second excess flag is already set. That is, in the process of step S 13502, in the same manner as the process of step S 13402, when the first forced termination condition is specified to be established afterwards, it is already specified that the second forced termination condition is already established. This is a process for determining whether or not it has been done. If the second excess flag is set, processing for setting the second destination flag is executed in step S13503.

  After executing the process of step S13503, in step S13504, a process of grasping the difference between the upper limit number of games, which is the first forced termination condition, and the number of games that will exceed the upper limit increase number is executed. The number of games that exceed the upper limit increase number is stored in the temporary storage area of the RAM 106 at the stage when the second forced termination condition is specified in the future, that is, when the second excess flag is set. Remembered. This process will be described later. After the process of step S13504 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S13502, the remaining game number management process ends.

  In the remaining number management process, as shown in FIG. 227 (b), a negative determination is made in step S13205, and if it is determined that the available empty number FM is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step S13551. In step S13551, the process of setting the second excess flag is executed in the same manner as in step S13206. In the subsequent step S13552, a process of storing the number of games that will exceed the upper limit increase number in the temporary storage area of the RAM 106 is executed. By the way, the number of games that exceed the upper limit increase exceeds the upper limit increase obtained by dividing the difference between the current advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM and the upper limit increase number (2400) by the expected increase / decrease number KM. It is calculated by adding the current number of advantageous section games AG to the number of games up to.

  In a succeeding step S13553, it is determined whether or not the first excess flag is already set. That is, in the process of step S13553, in the same way as the process of step S13452, it is determined that the first forced termination condition has already been established after the second forced termination condition has been identified. This is a process for determining whether or not it has been done. If the first excess flag is set, processing for setting the first destination flag is executed in step S13554.

  After executing the process of step S13554, in step S13555, a process of grasping the difference between the upper limit number of games, which is the first forced termination condition, and the number of games that will exceed the upper limit increase number is executed. After the process of step S13555 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S13553, the remaining game number management process ends.

  An example of the fifth special notification type table in this modification is shown in FIG. 227 (c). The table when only the first excess flag is set or when only the second excess flag is set is the same as that in FIG. 226 (c), and in FIG. 227 (c) It is omitted.

  In the fifth special notification type table when both the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, as in the first modification, either the first destination flag or the second destination flag is set. The type of the fifth special notification to be distributed differs depending on whether or not it is. Furthermore, in this modification, the difference game number grasped in step S13504 or step S13555 is also configured to affect the type of fifth special notification to be distributed.

  More specifically, in the case where the first first flag is set, that is, when a specific one reaching the upper limit number of games is performed first, and in general, a sufficient increase in medals in the previous advantageous section If the difference game number is less than the predetermined number and is 99 games or less, or the difference game number is the predetermined number or more and 100 games or more, the sort type is different. When the number of difference games is 99 games or less, the fifth special notification A and the fifth special notification B are both distributed at 20%, the fifth special notification C is distributed at 60%, and the fifth special notification D is distributed. I can't. On the other hand, when the number of difference games is 100 games or more, the game is distributed to the fifth special notification C at 100%, and is not distributed to other fifth special notifications.

  In addition, when the second first flag is set, that is, when a specific way of reaching the maximum number of medals is performed first, generally, the medals increase sufficiently in the previous advantageous section If the difference game number is less than the predetermined number and 99 games or less, or the difference game number is the predetermined number or more and 100 games or more, the type of distribution is different. When the number of difference games is 99 games or less, the fifth special notification A and the fifth special notification B are both distributed at 20%, the fifth special notification C is not distributed, and the fifth special notification D is 60%. Sorted. On the other hand, when the number of difference games is 100 games or more, it is distributed to the fifth special notification D at 100%, and is not distributed to other fifth special notifications.

  That is, in the above modification, based on the difference game number between the game in which the first forced termination condition is satisfied (upper limit game number) and the game in which the second forced termination condition is satisfied (game reaching the upper limit increase number). Thus, the type of setting value suggestion to be selected is different, and the setting value suggestion for which the setting value is more easily narrowed as the number of difference games increases is selected. As described above, when it is specified that both the first forced termination condition and the second forced termination condition are satisfied, basically, the second forced termination condition is satisfied first. The number of difference games can be said to be the number of games indicating how fast the medal upper limit increase is reached than the upper limit game number. That is, by reaching the upper limit increase number with a smaller number of games, a setting value that is likely to be beneficial to the player is suggested. In this way, it is possible to compensate for the case where the upper limit increase number is reached with a smaller number of games, that is, forcibly terminated without digesting the remaining games up to the upper limit number of games.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, a configuration will be described in which information according to the excess is presented at the time of forced termination. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the section display second process in the present modification.

  The change from the second section display process in the embodiment described above is that when the advantageous section game number AG reaches the upper limit game number, or when the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM reaches the upper limit increase number and forcibly terminates, The point is to perform processing for presenting information according to minutes. That is, the processing of step S13601 to step S13606 is the same as the processing of step S13001 to step S13006, and the update processing of the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM, the number of free games FG, and the presence or absence of the free number FM. When the determination process is performed and the advantageous section game number AG reaches the upper limit game number or the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM reaches the upper limit increase number, an affirmative determination is made in step S13606 and the process proceeds to step S13607. In step S13607, the sixth special notification process is executed. This process is a process for presenting information according to the excess. The processing from step S13608 to step S13612 is the same as the processing from step S13007 to step S13011.

  The sixth special notification process in step S13607 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S13701, the advantageous zone increase / decrease number ZM is 2400 or more, and it is determined whether or not the current forced zone forced termination (step S13606: YES) was performed under the second forced termination condition. When the advantageous zone increase / decrease number ZM is 2400 or more, the process advances to step S13702 to perform processing for grasping the total number of extinct games TEG. As already described, the total number of extinguished games TEG is a counter to which the number of added games is added when an additional game occurs in a situation where any excess flag is set. In a succeeding step S13703, a process of acquiring the sixth special notification A lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is performed.

  In the present modification, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the sixth special notification is generated as presentation of information that can be beneficial to the player according to the value of the total number of annihilated games TEG. The occurrence rate of the sixth special notification varies depending on the value of the total number of annihilated games TEG, and whether the current forced termination is performed under the first forced termination condition or the second forced termination condition The occurrence rate of the sixth special notification differs depending on whether it has been performed. Said 6th special alerting | reporting A lottery table is a table | surface acquired when an advantageous area is complete | finished in the condition where the 2nd forced termination conditions are satisfied at least. On the other hand, when the advantageous section is terminated without the second forced termination condition being satisfied (by the first forced termination condition), the sixth special notification B lottery table is acquired (step S13709).

  As shown in FIG. 230 (a), the sixth special notification A lottery table and the sixth special notification B lottery table both increase the occurrence rate of the sixth special notification as the total number of extinct games TEG increases. However, the sixth special notification B lottery table (the winning rate of the sixth special notification B) is more than the sixth special notification A lottery table (than the winning rate of the sixth special notification A). In addition, the sixth special notification is set to be easily generated when compared with the same total number of extinct games TEG. Note that the sixth special notification A and the sixth special notification B can be identified by the player based on the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65, the sound effect from the speaker 64, and the like, similar to the fifth special notification. Different production contents are set.

  After acquiring the sixth special notification A lottery table in step S13703, the sixth special notification A lottery process is executed in step S13704, and in step S13705, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the notification lottery is won, the sixth special notification A execution command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S13706, and then the sixth special notification processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the notification lottery is not won, the sixth special notification A non-execution command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S13707, and then the sixth special notification processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S13701 that the advantageous zone increase / decrease number ZM has not reached 2400, that is, if the current forced zone is forcibly terminated without satisfying the second forced termination condition, the process proceeds to step S13708. The processing from step S13708 to step S13713 is substantially the same as the processing from step S13702 to step S13707. In step S13708, processing for determining the total number of annihilated games TEG is executed. In step S13709, the sixth special notification B lottery table is executed. To get. Then, the sixth special notice B lottery process is executed in step S13710, and it is determined whether or not the notice lottery is won in step S13711. If the notice lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S13712. When the 6 special notification B execution command is not won in the notification lottery, the sixth special notification B non-execution command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S13713, respectively. The sixth special notification process is terminated.

  In the display control apparatus 81 that has received these commands related to the sixth special notification, for example, the sixth special notification is executed at the time of the attack mode end effect as in the process related to the fourth special notification in the setting process of the attack mode end effect in FIG. Process to do. Specifically, in FIG. 154, instead of or in addition to the process of determining whether or not the fourth special notification command is received in step S7703, the sixth special notification A execution command or the sixth special notification B Processing for determining whether or not an execution command has been received is performed. If any of the commands related to the sixth special notification has not been received, or if it has been received and is the sixth special notification A non-execution command or the sixth special notification B non-execution command, the process proceeds to step S7704. Then, after setting the normal end effect, this setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S7703 that the sixth special notification A execution command or the sixth special notification B execution command has been received, the process proceeds to step S7705 to acquire the sixth special notification detail table. As shown in FIG. 230 (b), the sixth special notification detail table shows details of the sixth special notification depending on the type of sixth special notification (sixth special notification A and sixth special notification B) and the set value. The production contents are set differently. Specifically, a sixth special notification a1 and a sixth special notification a2 are provided in the sixth special notification A, and a sixth special notification b1, a sixth special notification b2, and a sixth special notification B2 are provided in the sixth special notification B. 6 special notifications b3 are also provided, and these are also set with different contents of presentation that can be identified by the player depending on the display contents of the auxiliary display unit 65, sound effects from the speaker 64, and the like.

  The detailed performance contents of the various sixth special notifications differ depending on the set value, which is easily selected. Specifically, among the sixth special notification A, the sixth special notification a1 is easily selected by the odd setting of the settings 1, 3, and 5, and the sixth special notification a2 is selected by the even setting of the settings 2, 4, and 6. It is easy to be done. Of the sixth special notification B, the sixth special notification b1 is selected in the settings 1 and 2, but not selected in the settings 3 to 6, and the sixth special notification b2 is selected in the settings 3 and 4. In the settings 1, 2, 5 and 6, the sixth special notification b3 is selected in the settings 5 and 6, but not in the settings 1 to 4.

  That is, when the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is reached and the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the sixth special notification A is performed, so that even / odd of the set value can be predicted, and the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is not reached. When the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the sixth special notification B is performed, so that the set value can be narrowed down to a predetermined number of types or less (two types or less).

  As described above, depending on the type of forced termination condition for which the advantageous section has been forcibly terminated, different set value suggestions can be generated, so that the advantageous section can be determined in any forced termination condition. It is possible to entertain until the final stage of the advantageous section in terms of whether it is forcibly terminated. In other words, for the purpose of a game such as wanting to increase the number of medals by playing a game, the forcible termination is reached when the advantageous section reaches the maximum number of medals, and the forcible termination is reached when the maximum number of games is reached. It is preferable to the player. On the other hand, the setting value suggestion that occurs when the process is forcibly terminated without reaching the upper limit increase number can make it easier to narrow down the set value. It is set to be higher than the case where it is reached. Then, it is considered that a player who wants to see the set value wants to forcibly terminate the advantageous section without reaching the upper limit increase number.

  Conversely, a player who wants to enjoy an advantageous section for a long time may want to use the maximum number of games without reaching the maximum number of medals. The setting value suggestion which is not preferable from the viewpoint of the ease of narrowing down the set value, such as the suggestion of, is set.

  In this way, by creating different forcible termination conditions and the types of setpoint suggestions that occur at that time, the game will create new fun while responding to the diverse needs of the player, and playability of advantageous sections Can be suitably increased.

  As described above, the sixth special notification A lottery table and the sixth special notification B lottery table differ in the occurrence rate of the set value suggestion according to the value of the total number of disappeared games TEG, but the sixth special notification A lottery table The notification A lottery table is a table acquired when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated when the second forced termination condition is satisfied, and the sixth special notification B lottery table is satisfied with the first forced termination condition. This is a table acquired when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. In other words, depending on which forced termination condition the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the total number of extinction games TEG is selectively used for the first forced termination condition value and the second forced termination value. It can be said that the weighting of the value of the number of disappearing games TEG is different. By doing in this way, while using a common counter such as the total number of extinguished games TEG, the storage capacity can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the number of games that will exceed each forced termination condition is stored separately. It has been. In addition, when it is specified that the game is forcibly terminated under the first forced termination condition, the number of additional games after that, and when it is specified that the game is terminated forcibly under the second forced termination condition, It is good also as a structure which memorize | stores the number of additional games separately, and it is good to set it as the structure which grasps | ascertains the corresponding game number in step S13702 or step S13708 in this case.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the above modification 3 is used as a base, and at the time of forced termination, a privilege is given in consideration of information on the other forced termination condition.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 231, in the sixth special notification process in this modification, if it is determined in step S13801 that the second forced termination condition is satisfied, the total disappearance game is determined in step S13802. After grasping the number TEG, processing for grasping the number of games up to the upper limit number of games is executed in step S13803. That is, as long as both forced termination conditions are satisfied at the same time and the advantageous section is not terminated, if the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit increase number of medals as the second forced termination condition, the upper limit number of games may be reached. The first forced termination condition is not satisfied. The process of step S13803 is a process of grasping the number of remaining games until the upper limit number of games is reached, and specifically, a process of grasping a value obtained by dividing the advantageous section game number AG from 1500.

  In a succeeding step S13804, a process of acquiring a sixth special notification A lottery table is executed. As shown in FIG. 232 (a), the sixth special notification A lottery table in the present modification is based on the number of games up to 1500 games and the number of games corresponding to exceeding the number (total number of annihilation games TEG). The rate of occurrence of 6 special notifications is different, the higher the number of games up to 1500 games, the higher the rate of occurrence of 6th special notification, and the higher the number of extras that exceed the upper limit increase, the 6th The occurrence rate of special notification is set to be high.

  That is, in this modification, when the number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase and is forcibly terminated, the set value suggestion as the sixth special notification occurs as the number of games in the advantageous section that cannot be digested increases. The setting value suggestion is more likely to occur as there are more medals that cannot be obtained by exceeding the upper limit increase number even though the addition has occurred.

  The processing of step S13805 to step S13808 is the same as the processing of step S13704 to step S13707, and after executing the sixth special notification A lottery process, if the notification lottery is won, the sixth special notification A The execution command is set to output, and if it is not selected, the sixth special notification A non-execution command is set to output.

  If it is determined in step S13801 that the upper limit increase number has not been reached, that is, if the current forced termination is terminated forcibly under the first forced termination condition instead of the second forced termination condition, the process proceeds to step S13809. Then, a process of grasping the total number of extinct games TEG corresponding to the excess of the number of games is executed. In step S13810, a process of grasping the remaining number of medals up to the upper limit increase number of medals is executed. That is, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit number of games as the first forcible termination condition, the second forced termination condition for reaching the upper limit increase number is not satisfied, and the process of step S13810 is performed. This is a process of grasping the remaining increase number up to the upper limit increase number, and specifically, a process of grasping the value obtained by dividing the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM from 2400.

  In a succeeding step S13811, processing for acquiring a sixth special notification B lottery table is executed. As shown in FIG. 232 (b), the sixth special notification B lottery table in the present modification is based on the number of games up to 2400 and the number of games (total number of annihilation games TEG) corresponding to the number of games exceeding The rate of occurrence of 6 special notifications is different, the higher the number of sheets up to 2400, the higher the rate of occurrence of 6th special notification, and the higher the amount exceeding the upper limit number of games, the 6th special notification The notification occurrence rate is set to be high.

  That is, in the same way as the sixth special notification A lottery table, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and is forcibly terminated, the larger the number of medals that did not increase in the advantageous section, the more the sixth special notification The setting value suggestion is more likely to occur, and the more the number of games that could not be digested by exceeding the upper limit number of games even though the addition occurred, the easier the setting value suggestion occurs.

  In particular, when the sixth special notification A lottery table and the sixth special notification B lottery table are compared, the sixth special notification B lottery table is more likely to be generated in the sixth special notification B lottery table even if the total number of erasure games TEG is the same. Is set to be easily increased. This is because the original purpose of the game is to receive medals as a result of each game and aim for an increase in medals. Although it has not been done, the player's feeling of loss is due to the idea that the number of games is greater than when the number of games has not reached the upper limit number of games.

  The process of step S13812 to step S13815 is the same as the process of step S13710 to step S13713 described above. After executing the sixth special notification B lottery process, if the notification lottery is won, the sixth special notification B The execution command is set to output, and if it is not selected, the sixth special notification B non-execution command is set to output.

  As described above, in the present modification, in a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, the expectation that the other forced termination condition was expected to be satisfied is given a privilege such as setting value suggestion. This makes it possible to compensate for the player's feeling of loss. In addition, regarding the forced termination condition on the established side, the loss due to the condition can be compensated by setting value suggestion. In other words, in this modified example, in a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, when one forced termination condition is satisfied, compensation is made from both the forced termination condition on the established side and the other forced termination condition. By doing so, it is possible to thicken the compensation for the player and to suitably avoid a decrease in gaming motivation due to forced termination.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the advantage section is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit number of games, despite the prediction that the upper limit number of medals will be reached based on the above modified examples 3 and 4. In this case, the sixth special notification is likely to occur.

  FIG. 233 (a) shows a part of a flowchart of the sixth special notification process in this modification. That is, it shows a process after the advantageous section is forcibly terminated without the number of medals increasing / decreasing reaching the upper limit increase number (step S13701: NO) and the sixth special notification B lottery process is executed in step S13710. ing.

  In step S13901, it is determined whether the sixth special notification B lottery has been won. In the case of winning, the sixth special notification B execution command is set to be output in step S13902 in the same manner as described above, and then the sixth special notification process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13901 that the winning is not achieved, the process proceeds to step S13903, and it is determined whether the second excess flag is set. In the case where it is determined in step S13903 that the second excess flag is set, it is forcibly terminated by the upper limit game number without reaching the upper limit increase number even though the second excess flag is set. This is the case (step S13701: NO). In this case, in step S13901, the sixth special notification B execution command is output and set, and then the sixth special notification process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second excess flag is not set, the sixth special notification B non-execution command is set to output in step S13904 in the same manner as described above, and then the sixth special notification processing is terminated. That is, when the second excess flag is set, even if the sixth special notification B lottery is not won, the sixth special notification B is executed as winning, and a process advantageous to the player is performed. Is called.

  As shown in the seventh embodiment, when it is predicted that the first forced termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied based on the advantageous section remaining game number ZG (when only the first excess flag is set) ), And the prediction that the second forced termination condition for the advantageous section is satisfied (when only the second excess flag is set), and the prediction that both the forced termination conditions for the advantageous section are satisfied. There is a case (when both excess flags are set). On the other hand, even if it is predicted that both forced termination conditions are met, if both forced termination conditions are not met simultaneously (in the same game), if one forced termination condition is met, The advantageous section ends without the forced termination condition being satisfied.

  In this modified example, when it is predicted that both forced termination conditions are met, if the second forced termination condition is not met and the first forced termination condition is met, It was made advantageous for the person. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to follow appropriately the feeling of loss of the player who was expecting that the 2nd forced termination condition will be satisfied.

<Modification 6>
In this modified example, in the above modified example 5, when it is predicted that the second forced termination condition will be established in the future, a notification that the prediction has been made has occurred. When the game is terminated without the second forced termination condition being met, it is advantageous for the player.

  FIG. 233 (b) shows a part of the flowchart of the sixth special notification process in the present modification, and the difference from that in Modification 5 is determined that the sixth special notification B lottery is not won. If this is the case (step S13951: NO), in step S13953, it is determined whether or not a special notification that the second excess flag has been set has been executed.

  Although a detailed description with reference to the drawings is omitted, in the present modification, when the second excess flag is set, a notification to that effect (special notification) can be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. The notification to that effect is made when a winner is won by a predetermined lottery, and if the winner is not won by the predetermined lottery, that fact is notified even if the second excess flag is set. Absent.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 233 (c) and 233 (d), even if the total increase / decrease expected number SM is 2410 and the second excess flag is set, the second excess flag is As a notification of the fact that it has been set, the limit excess information image GTP (in the figure, an image of “Limit Breakthrough!”) Is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 (FIG. 233 (d)), or not displayed (FIG. 233 (c)). In this case, in FIG. 233 (c), it cannot be directly grasped that the increase / decrease number of medals will reach the upper limit increase number, and in FIG. 233 (d), the upper limit increase number may be reached. It is clearly understandable.

  Then, in step S13953, if the special notification in which the above-exceeded limit information image GTP is displayed has been forcibly terminated without reaching the upper limit increase number, the sixth special in step S13952 is performed. When the notification B execution command is output and set and the special notification is not generated, the sixth special notification B non-execution command is set and output in step S13954.

  Thus, even if it is predicted that the upper limit increase number will be reached, whether or not it is advantageous depends on whether or not the player has grasped in advance that the upper limit increase number will be reached. By making it possible, it becomes possible to prevent the advantage to the player from becoming excessively high.

<Modification 7>
In this modification, in the configuration that suggests the set value based on the excess amount or the amount that could not be achieved at the forced end of the advantageous section, if the set value suggestion based on the excess occurred before the advantageous section was forced to end In this case, a set value suggestion at the time of forced termination is generated by subtracting the advantage of that amount.

  FIG. 234 (a) and FIG. 234 (b) are flowcharts of the sixth special notification process when the idea of subtracting the set value suggestion before forced termination is applied to Modification 5 and Modification 6. Shows the part.

  That is, after the sixth special notice B lottery is executed in step S13704, it is determined whether or not the notice lottery is won in step S13961 and step S13971. It is determined whether or not the 2 excess flag is set, or whether or not a special notification that the second excess flag is set is executed in step S13973. If an affirmative determination is made in step S13963 or step S13973, in this modified example, in step S13964 or step S13974, whether or not the fifth special notification has occurred as a setting value suggestion based on the excess before the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. Determine whether. In this process, when it is determined that the fifth special notification is to be executed, the information may be temporarily stored in the RAM 106 or the like.

  If the fifth special notification is not executed, the sixth special notification B execution command is set to be output in step S13962 or step S13972, and if the fifth special notification is executed, step S13965 or step S13975 is executed. To output the sixth special notification B non-execution command. Note that the sixth special notification B non-execution command is set to be output even when the second excess flag is not set in step S13963 or when the special notification to that effect is not executed in step S13973.

  In this way, when a privilege based on the excess amount is given before the forced termination of the advantageous section, the privilege at the forced termination is set by taking into account (subtracting) it at the forced termination (No. 6). With the configuration in which the presence or absence of execution of special notification is determined), it is possible to solve that the advantage of the player due to the benefit based on the excess is too high.

<Modification 8>
In this modification, an application example in the case where a special section is set when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated will be described. As described in the modified example 9 of the fourth embodiment, the special section is a section that is set based on the total number of erasure games TEG when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, and more specifically, after the advantageous section ends. In the normal section, the setting value suggesting effect is likely to occur. In the special section, for example, when a special replay 1 or 2 wins, a push order notification is generated with a predetermined stop outcome (stop outcome with a “black BAR” symbol set) at a probability according to the set value, and the set value Can be predicted (see FIG. 162). In this modified example, in addition to the total number of extinct games TEG, a special section is set based on the number of games remaining in the advantageous section remaining game number ZG and the upper limit increase number. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing special section setting processing in the present modification. The special section setting process is, for example, a process performed in step S7808 in the second section display process of FIG. 158, and is performed at the end of the advantageous section.

  In step S14001, a process of grasping the total number of extinguished games TEG is performed. Then, in step S14002, a process for grasping the advantageous section remaining game number ZG is performed. Incidentally, the case where the advantageous section remaining game number ZG is 1 or more means that the termination process of the current advantageous section is terminated by the second forced termination condition.

  In a succeeding step S14003, processing for grasping the number of differences up to the upper limit increase number of the advantageous sections is performed. This process is the same as the process in step S13803, and the difference sheet number can be grasped by subtracting the advantageous section increase / decrease sheet number ZM from the upper limit increase number (2400 sheets). In step S14003, when the current special section setting process is performed based on any of the forced termination conditions, the difference number is grasped. That is, in step S14003, if the current advantageous section is terminated without satisfying any of the forced termination conditions, such as when the number of continuations of the attack mode becomes zero, the difference in number from the upper limit increment is grasped. No (or grasp as 0).

  In a succeeding step S14004, processing for acquiring a special section table from the various table storage areas 105a is performed. In the special section table in this modification, as shown in FIG. 236, the special section game number PG and the special section are determined by the total number of annihilated games TEG, the advantageous section remaining game number ZG, and the number of differences up to the upper limit increase number. The number of sheets PM is set to be different. As described above, the special section game number PG is a counter for defining the number of games in the special section, and is a counter that is decremented by one each time one game in the special section is executed. On the other hand, the special section number PM is a counter for determining the number of games in the special section, but is a counter for grasping the number of medals paid out in each game. Is a counter to which a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out is subtracted.

  In step S14005, a process of inputting the special section game number PG is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 236, when the difference number up to the upper limit increase number is 0 and the advantageous section remaining game number ZG is 1 or more, that is, the upper limit increase number is reached and the upper limit game number is reached. If the game is forcibly terminated without reaching (the difference number = 0 and ZG> 0), a value obtained by adding a value (0 to 80 in the figure) corresponding to the value of the total number of annihilated games TEG to the number of remaining games ZG is special. Enter the number of section games PG. In this case, the number of games corresponding to the number of games up to the upper limit number of games may be input to the special section game number PG, and the number of games up to the upper limit number of games corresponds to the value of the total number of disappeared games TEG. The value to be input may be input. On the other hand, when the upper limit number of games is reached and the game is forcibly terminated without reaching the upper limit increase number (difference number> 0 and ZG = 0), 0 is input to the special section game number PG (no value is input). Then, when the upper limit increase number is reached and the upper limit game number is reached and the game is forcibly terminated (difference number = 0 and ZG = 0), a value corresponding to the value of the total disappearance game number TEG is input to the special section game number PG. . Note that the value input to the special section game number PG when both forced end conditions are satisfied is likely to be larger than the value input to the special section game number PG when only one of the forced end conditions is satisfied. Is set to

  In a succeeding step S14006, a process of inputting the special section number PM is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 236, when the upper limit increase number is reached and it is forcibly terminated without reaching the upper limit game number (difference number = 0 and ZG> 0), 0 is input to the special section number PM (value) Do not enter). On the other hand, when the upper limit number of games is reached and the game is forcibly ended without reaching the upper limit increase number (difference number> 0 and ZG = 0), a value corresponding to the difference number up to the upper limit increase number is input to the special section number PM. . Then, when the upper limit increase number is reached and the upper limit game number is reached and the game is forcibly terminated (difference number = 0 and ZG = 0), a value corresponding to the value of the total disappearance game number TEG is input to the special section number PM. Note that the value input to the special section number PM when both forced end conditions are satisfied is likely to be larger than the value input to the special section number PM when only one of the forced end conditions is satisfied. Is set.

  In step S14007, it is determined whether or not a value of 1 or more is input to the special section game number PG or the special section number PM. If an affirmative determination is made in step S14007, a special section flag is set in step S14008, and a special section command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S14009. Incidentally, the special section command includes information on the value of the special section game number PG and the special section number PM. If a negative determination is made in step S14007, or after the process of step S14009 is executed, a process of clearing the total number of extinguished games TEG is executed in step S14010, and then the special section setting process is ended.

  The game number management process in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing a part of the game number management process in the present modification.

  In step S14101, it is determined whether a special section flag is set. If the special section flag is set, it is determined in step S14102 whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If it is in these low RT states, the process proceeds to step S14103, and the special interval game number PG subtraction process is executed. These processes are the same as those in steps S8101 to S8103. In step S14104, a special section number PM subtraction process is executed based on the winning result of the current game. Specifically, a process of subtracting the medal payout number of the current game from the special section number PM is executed. In this case, if the result of the current game is a disapproval result, or if the result is a so-called missed stop without corresponding to the completion of winning, the medal payout number is 0, and the special section number PM is 0. Is subtracted (not subtracted in this game).

  In step S14105, it is determined whether both the special section game number PG and the special section number PM have become zero. If both are 0, processing for clearing the special section flag is executed in step S14106. In step S14107, a special section end command for causing the display control apparatus 81 to grasp that the special section ends is set as an output target to the display control apparatus 81. With these processes, the special section ends. On the other hand, if any of them is not 0 in step S14105, that is, for example, if the number of special section games PG is 0 but the number of special sections PM is not 0, negative in step S14105. It will be judged.

  As described above, in this modified example, when the advantageous section ends, a special section is set according to the excess amount, and the difference number up to the upper limit increase number, the number of games up to the upper limit game number, and the remaining game number ZG are set. The special section is set accordingly. In this way, not only the special section according to the extra generated in the advantageous section but also the point that the number of obtained medals and the number of digestible games is lost due to the other forced termination condition is followed in the special section. With this configuration, it is possible to suitably reduce a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  The contents of the production in this modification will be described. FIG. 238 is a flowchart of the setting process of the attack mode end effect, and FIG. 239 is a diagram for explaining the effect contents by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. The attack mode end effect setting process is a process executed by the display control device 81 for setting an effect that occurs when the attack mode ends or when the advantageous section is forcibly ended.

  In step S 14201, a process of grasping the total number of medals acquired in the current advantageous section (advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM) is executed. Then, in step S14202, a process of grasping the total number of continued games in the current advantageous section (advantageous section game number AG) is executed. In step S14203, processing for setting an end effect including the total number of medals and the total number of continued games is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing in steps S7701, S7702, and S7704.

  In a succeeding step S14204, it is determined whether or not the special section command is received. If the special section command has not been received, the setting process is terminated as it is. When the special section command is received, in step S14205, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like performs a continuation effect indicating that the special section that is a section that is more advantageous to the player continues after the advantageous section ends. Execute the process.

  In a succeeding step S14206, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of special section games PG included in the received special section command is 1 or more. If it is equal to or greater than 1, in step S14207, after the end effect set this time, processing for continuing to display the remaining number of games in the advantageous section that was executed before that is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S14206, or after the process of step S14207 is executed, it is determined in step S14208 whether the value of the number of special sections PM included in the special section command received this time is 1 or more. To do. If it is equal to or greater than 1, in step S14209, after the end effect set this time, a process for continuing the display of the remaining increased number of advantageous sections previously executed is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S14208, or after the process of step S14209 is executed, the setting process ends.

  The contents of the effect performed in the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 239 (a1), (b1), (c1), and (d1) show the contents of the effect when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and is forcibly terminated. FIGS. 239 (a2), (b2), ( c2) and (d2) show the contents of the effect when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase of medals and is forcibly terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 239 (a1), the advantageous segment game number AG is close to the upper limit game number, the advantageous segment remaining game number ZG has reached the upper limit game number, and the first excess flag is set. In the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, the above-exceeding limit information image GTP is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239 (b1), when the upper limit game of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, and the attack mode end effect is performed. In this case, as described above, a special section is set according to the excess and the number of differences up to the upper limit increase number.

  When the attack mode end effect is performed, for example, the continuous effect shown in FIG. 239 (c1) triggered by a predetermined operation (based on the operation of any one of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58, for example). Will occur. More specifically, in the continuation effect, the face of the soldier as a predetermined character is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 generates a voice saying “It's not yet!” From the male voice. Note that such a continuous effect is an effect that is also used in, for example, post-notification of an attack mode, and is executed as part of a pseudo end effect as if the advantageous state ends. More specifically, in the pseudo end effect, after the end notification such as the end effect of the attack mode is generated, the continuous notification as the continuous effect is generated. In other words, when the end notification is performed without any forced end condition being met, the above-mentioned forcing is performed on the premise of a series of effects such as the subsequent notification being generated and the advantageous section being continued. It is possible to give a strong impression as if the special section is a section in which the advantageous section is continued by generating the continuous notification at the end and shifting to the special section.

  As described above, after continuous notification is performed, the process proceeds to a special section. As shown in FIG. 239 (a1) and FIG. 239 (b1), since the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit number of games this time, a value of 1 or more is input to the special section number PM. . Then, in step S14209, a process for continuing the display of the remaining increased number of advantageous sections is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 239 (d1), display of the total number of acquired medals in the advantageous section and display of the difference number (remaining payout number) up to the upper limit increase number are continued. Thereby, it becomes possible to further strengthen the impression that the advantageous section that has been performed before the special section as the normal section is continued.

  As shown in FIG. 239 (a2), when the advantageous interval increase / decrease number ZM is close to the upper limit increase number, the total expected increase / decrease number SM has reached the upper limit increase number, and the second excess flag is set, the auxiliary On the display unit 65, for example, the above-exceeding limit information image GTP is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239 (b2), when the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, and the attack mode end effect is performed. In this case, as described above, a special section corresponding to the excess amount, the number of games up to the upper limit number of games, and the remaining number of games ZG is set.

  Similarly to FIG. 239 (c1), after the end effect (end notification), the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like generates a continuous effect (continuous notification) triggered by a predetermined operation.

  After continuing notification, it shifts to a special section. As shown in FIG. 239 (a2) and FIG. 239 (b2), since the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit increase this time, a value of 1 or more is also input to the special section game number PG. ing. Then, in step S14207, a process for continuing to display the remaining increased number of games in the advantageous section is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 239 (d2), the display of the total number of continued games in the advantageous section and the display of the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games are continued. Thereby, it becomes possible to further strengthen the impression that the advantageous section that has been performed before the special section as the normal section is continued.

<Modification 9>
In the present modification, a description will be given of processing when the actual advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is smaller than the predicted number (total increase / decrease expected number SM) by the remaining number management process. First, with reference to FIG. 240, an explanation will be given of an event that occurs when the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is smaller than predicted.

  In FIG. 240 (a), the timing of tf1 in the advantageous section is shown as a reference, and if the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section at that time is digested, the increase / decrease number exceeds the upper limit increase number at the timing of tf2. This shows a situation where the second excess flag is set.

  If an extra opportunity occurs in this situation, the second excess flag is set as described above, although the upper limit number of games (1500 games) will not be reached even if the added number of games is added to the advantageous section remaining game number ZG. Thus, as already explained, this additional amount is added to the total number of annihilated games TEG (FIG. 240 (b)).

  FIG. 240 (c) is a timing later than those in FIG. 240 (a) and FIG. 240 (b), and shows the timing of tf2 when the advantageous section remaining game number ZG is completely consumed. This example shows a case where the net increase from tf1 to tf2 is lower than the prediction at the time of tf1. That is, at the time of tf1, the case where the increase / decrease number has been predicted to reach the upper limit increase number at the subsequent timing of tf2, but the upper limit increase number was not reached even at the actual timing of tf2. Show.

  Although the advantageous section remaining game number ZG is 0 at the timing of tf2, as described above, the added game number of tf1 is added to the total number of extinct games TEG. In other words, even if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section becomes zero, if the advantageous section is terminated as it is, the player suffers a great loss. Therefore, in such a case, the number of games reaching the upper limit increase number (timing at tf4) is predicted again, and the number of games up to that time (the amount until reaching the upper limit increase number) is calculated as the total number of annihilated games TEG. To the remaining number of games ZG (FIG. 240 (d)).

  Hereinafter, the redistribution process performed when the actual increase / decrease number is smaller than the prediction will be described. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the reallocation process. The redistribution process is a process executed after making an affirmative determination in step S1408, step S1414, step S1421, and step S1426 in the game number management process, and the number of continuations in the current display mode (challenge mode, attack mode, etc.). This process is performed when becomes 0.

  In step S14301, it is determined whether all of the challenge mode continuation number, attack mode continuation number, VB mode continuation number, and specialized zone continuation number are zero. That is, in step S14301, for example, after determining that the number of continuations in the attack mode is 0 in the immediately preceding process, it is determined that the mode is not the case of shifting to the challenge mode without shifting to the normal mode. If all the continuation numbers are 0, it is determined in step S1432 whether or not the total number of annihilated games TEG is 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, it is advantageous in step S14303. It is determined whether or not the forcible end condition is satisfied when the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number of the section is reached. The case in which an affirmative determination is made in step S14301 and step S14302 and a negative determination is made in step S14303 is the situation in FIG. 240 (c).

  That is, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG becomes zero despite the number of games added to the total number of extinct games TEG being stored, the process proceeds to step S14304. In step S14304, processing for determining the total number of extinguished games TEG is executed. In step S14305, a remaining increase / decrease expected number NM is calculated when the total number of extinct games TEG is consumed as an advantageous section. More specifically, the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM is calculated by multiplying the total number of extinct games TEG by the expected increase / decrease number KM. In subsequent step S14306, a process of calculating the total expected increase / decrease number SM from the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM and the current advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is executed. In step S14307, a process of calculating an increaseable free sheet number FM is executed. In other words, the processing from step S14304 to step S14307 is processing for determining whether or not the upper limit increase number is exceeded when the total number of extinct games TEG is digested as an advantageous interval.

  In step S14308, it is determined whether or not the number of vacant sheets FM is 0 or less assuming that the upper limit increase number is exceeded. If it is not less than 0 and it is predicted that the upper limit increase will not be exceeded even if all the total number of erasure games TEG are digested, the process proceeds to step S14309, and the value of the total number of erasure games TEG is continued in the attack mode. Perform the process of entering the number.

  If the empty number FM is 0 or less in step S14308, the process proceeds to step S14310. In step S14310, a process of calculating the number of games YG required up to the upper limit increase number is executed. More specifically, the number of games YG required to reach the upper limit increase number is calculated by dividing the difference between the current advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM and the upper limit increase number by the expected increase / decrease number KM. In step S14311, it is determined whether or not the number of games YG required to reach the upper limit increase number is larger than the free game number FG calculated from the advantageous segment game number AG and the upper limit game number 1500 games. If the free game FG is larger, it is possible to digest the advantageous interval up to the upper limit increase number. In this case, in step S14312 a process of dividing the game number YG required for the upper limit increase number from the total disappearance game number TEG is executed. In step S14313, a process of adding the number of games YG required for the upper limit increase number to the number of continuations in the attack mode is executed.

  If it is determined in step S14311 that the number of games YG required up to the upper limit increase is greater than the number of free games FG, the number of games corresponding to the number of free games FG is determined from the total number of annihilated games TEG in step S14314. A process of dividing is executed, and in step S14315, a process of adding the number of games corresponding to the number of free games FG to the number of continuations in the attack mode is executed.

  After executing any one of steps S14309, S14313, and S14315, in step S14316, processing for setting a redistribution flag in various flag storage areas 106d is executed. The redistribution flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to know that the attack mode continuation number has been re-input by the above-described processes. Thereafter, in step S14317, an additional command corresponding to the number of games added to the number of continuation of the attack mode in the above process is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the reallocation process is terminated. . In this case, the number of displayed games and the number of attack mode continuations are adjusted by post-notification or the like.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the second excess flag is set by predicting the increased number of advantageous sections, after the second excess flag is set, the added game number TEG is the total number of annihilated games TEG Although the remaining game number ZM is not added in addition to the above, the remaining game number ZM may become zero before the increased number reaches the upper limit increase number when the actual increase number is lower than predicted. Therefore, when such an event occurs, the above-mentioned redistribution process re-predicts the number of games up to the upper limit increase number again based on the value of the number of disappeared games TEG, and reaches the upper limit increase number. Only the required number of games is extracted from the number of disappeared games TEG. Therefore, the addition after the second excess flag is set is not completely invalidated, and it is possible to preferably avoid the player from being disadvantaged.

  Further, in the redistribution process, since the remaining number of games ZM is redistributed within the range of the number of disappeared games TEG, redistribution exceeding the surplus generated after the second excess flag is set is performed. It is possible to prevent such a situation that the payout rate becomes too high.

<Modification 10>
In this modified example, in the configuration of modified example 9 above, when an additional opportunity occurs after the second excess flag is set, not all are added to the number of disappeared games TEG, but temporarily added to another counter. It is set as the structure memorize | stored. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the game number adding process in the present modification.

  That is, in step S14401, it is determined whether one of the first excess flag and the second excess flag is set. If neither is set, the process of adding the current additional game number to the corresponding number of continued games is performed in steps S 14402 and S 14403, and then the present game number addition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S14401 that any excess flag is set, in step S14404, the first excess flag is set in step S14405 after the number of added games is determined in step S14404. It is determined whether or not. If the first excess flag is set, the process of adding the current number of added games to the total number of annihilated games TEG is executed in step S14406, as in the seventh embodiment.

  On the other hand, if the first excess flag is not set in step S14405, that is, if only the second excess flag is set among the first excess flag and the second excess flag, the process proceeds to step S14407. In step S14407, a process of adding the number of additional games this time to the number of annihilation preparation games EJG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The disappearance preparation game number EJG is used to temporarily store the number of additional games when an additional game occurs in a situation where the second forced termination condition of the advantageous section is predicted to be established in the future. It is a counter.

  After the process of step S14406 or step S14407 is executed, the process for adding the number of games is terminated after the fifth special notification process is executed in steps S14408 to S14413. The processing from step S14408 to step S14413 is the same as the processing from step S13306 to step S13311.

  In this case, in the redistribution process (FIG. 241), it is determined in step S1432 whether or not the annihilation preparation game number EJG is 1 or more instead of the total annihilation game number TEG. In step S14304, the number of annihilation preparation games EJG is grasped instead of the total number of annihilation games TEG. In step S14305, the number of annihilation preparation games EJG is set to the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM instead of the total annihilation game number TEG. Used for calculation. In step S14312, a process of subtracting the game number CG up to the upper limit game number from the disappearance preparation game number EJG is performed. In step S14314, a process of subtracting the empty game number FG from the disappearance preparation game number EJG is performed.

  FIG. 243 (a) is a flowchart showing the disappearance game number moving process for moving the disappearance preparation game number EJG to the total disappearance game number TEG. The disappearance game number movement process is a process that is performed after step S13111 in the remaining game number management process, for example, and is a process that is performed when the first excess flag is set, and the number of free games FG is 0 or less. It is a process that is performed in the situation.

  In step S14501, it is determined whether the second excess flag is set. If the second excess flag is set, in step S 14502, a process of grasping the number of annihilation preparation games EJG and adding the value of the annihilation preparation game number EJG to the total annihilation game number TEG is executed. In this case, the value of the disappearance preparation game number EJG is cleared. If the second excess flag is not set in step S14501, or after executing the process of step S14502, the disappearance game number moving process is ended as it is.

  In other words, in the present modification, when an addition occurs in a situation where only the second excess flag is set, a value corresponding to the added game number is temporarily stored in the disappearance preparation game number EJG. Then, when the first excess flag is set, the number of games stored in the disappearance preparation game number EJG moves to the total disappearance game number TEG. If the advantageous section remaining game number ZG becomes 0 before the first excess flag is set, the redistribution process to the remaining game number ZG is performed using the value of the disappearance preparation game number EJG. . In other words, in this modification, there is no event that the number of games stored in the total number of annihilated games TEG is subtracted before annihilation. Thus, by managing separately the number of annihilation preparation games EJG that can be reduced and the total number of annihilation games TEG that are not reduced, the management of the total number of annihilation games TEG is improved, and the total number of annihilation games TEG is increased. Based on this, when presenting useful information to the player, it is possible to reduce the rewrite frequency and access frequency of the total number of erasure games TEG as the basis thereof, and to ensure the storage stability of the total number of erasure games TEG. Therefore, for example, an error such as accidentally erasing the total number of extinct games TEG is less likely to occur, and a profit that should be obtained by the player (presentation of information that may be useful, occurrence of setting value suggestion) due to the error. The event of disappearing can be preferably avoided.

  As described above, the disappearance preparation game number EJG is stored when the second excess flag is set and an additional game occurs. Then, it can be said that the second excess flag can be used to determine whether or not the total number of annihilation games TEG when the forced termination condition is finally satisfied may be temporarily stored in the number of annihilation preparation games EJG.

  In this case, the sixth special notification lottery table may be different depending on the presence or absence of the second excess flag in the sixth special notification process at the time of forced termination. More specifically, for example, when the second excess flag is set, processing by the sixth special notification A lottery table is performed, and when the second excess flag is not set, the sixth special notification B lottery is performed. It is assumed that processing is performed using a table. In any sixth special notification lottery table, when the information on the total number of annihilation games TEG is used, the sixth special notification based on the total number of annihilation games TEG that has passed the annihilation preparation game number EJG is obtained by using the above configuration. And the sixth special notification process based on the total number of annihilation games TEG that have not passed the annihilation preparation game number EJG can be performed separately. Depending on whether or not, it is possible to cause a difference in the advantage by suggesting the set value.

  In the RAM 106, as shown in FIG. 243 (b), the total number of annihilation games TEG and the number of preparation games EJG annihilation are the total annihilation game numbers TEG. The number of games may be stored in the TEG area, and the number of annihilation preparation games EJG may be stored in the number of annihilation preparation games EJG area provided in the advantageous section corresponding counter area 209 of the various counter areas 106e. In this way, in the configuration for presenting information that is useful to the player using the number of games in excess of the forcible termination condition, the seventh embodiment is such that the excess may not exceed. Also, information used in relation to the push order notification in the advantageous section (disappearance preparation game number EJG) and information used in the sections other than the advantageous section (total disappearance game number TEG) are stored separately. Thus, it is possible to take over the information generated during the advantageous section even after the advantageous section ends.

  The CPU 102 may have different access restriction settings for the area where the total number of extinction games TEG is stored and the area where the number of extinction preparation games EJG is stored. More specifically, in the area where the total number of annihilated games TEG is stored, the process of adding the number of games in step S14406 or step S14502 is allowed in the advantageous section, and for example, the process of subtracting the number of games is accessed. If the configuration is limited, the stability of the information on the number of disappearing games TEG is ensured, and special notification based on the number of disappearing games TEG can be more safely performed. On the other hand, with regard to the disappearance preparation game number EJG, if the access is permitted in both the addition process and the subtraction process in the advantageous section, the convenience of the disappearance preparation game number EJG is greatly improved. Thus, by making the access restriction settings for both the numbers of games TEG and EJG different, the significance of separately storing common information such as the number of games in the advantageous section in a plurality of storage areas is enhanced.

<Modification 11>
In this modification, the subsequent advantages are made different based on the fact that the redistribution process shown in Modification 10 is performed. FIG. 244 is a diagram for describing an example in which the difference in the degree of advantage based on the above redistribution process is applied to the sixth special notification at the time of forced termination. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special alerting | reporting.

  That is, in step S14601, it is determined whether or not the redistribution flag is set. If the redistribution flag is not set, processing for generating a special notification using the sixth special notification A lottery table (steps S14602 to S14607) is executed as the sixth special notification of this time. Note that the processing in steps S14602 to S14607 is the same as the processing in steps S13702 to S13707.

  On the other hand, if the redistribution flag is set and redistribution of the total number of annihilation games TEG and the number of annihilation preparation games EJG is performed before this forced termination, Processing for generating a special notification using the special notification B lottery table (steps S14608 to S14613) is executed. Note that the processing from step S14608 to step S14613 is the same as the processing from step S13708 to step S13713.

  As already explained, the setting value suggestion using the sixth special notification A lottery table and the setting value suggestion using the sixth special notification B lottery table are those using the B lottery table using the A lottery table. It is easier to narrow down the set values than those (FIG. 230). The redistribution process is when the upper limit increase is not reached in a game that was predicted to reach the upper limit increase even though the upper limit increase was predicted. This is a case where the medal payout in each game is less than predicted. That is, the player is not benefiting from the initial prediction. Therefore, by making the ease of narrowing down the set value when performing the sixth special notification as described above, it is possible to compensate for the profit not enjoyed by information such as a set value suggestion.

<Modification 12>
In the present modification, when the actual advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is smaller than the predicted number (total increase / decrease expected number SM) by the remaining number management process, the net increase number in the advantageous section is adjusted to increase. FIG. 245 shows the CB push order notification process in this modification. The CB push order notification process is a process that is performed when it is determined in the push order combination process (FIG. 38) that the CB is not shown. For example, after a negative determination is made in step S1219, the current game Is a process that is performed when it is determined whether or not CB has been won and the determination is affirmative.

  In step S14701, with reference to the remaining payout number in the CB state (see step S605 of the bonus state process in FIG. 26), it is determined whether or not the remaining payout number is 15. Here, as the winning combination in the CB state, CB medium / small combination 1 to CB medium / small combination 4 having an index value IV = 49 to 52 are set (see FIG. 17 and the like). ~ Win one of the CB small and medium roles 4 with a high probability (be sure to win any one). The CB state is a two-bet game. When winning a CB medium role 1 to CB medium role 4, a winning of any of the first small role to the 41st small role is established, and 15 medals are given as a bonus. A payout or 14 medal payouts are made (see FIGS. 9 and 10). In the CB medium / small combination 1 to CB medium / small combination 4, which small combination winning is established is managed by the stop order of the stop switches 42 to 44 (see FIG. 27A). More specifically, CB medium-sized role 1 and CB medium-sized role 2 receive a small-rank winning that results in 15 medal payouts in any stop order, and CB medium-sized role 3 and CB medium-sized role 4 stop Depending on the order, the stop order of the small combination for paying out 15 medals and the small combination for paying out 14 medals differ.

  The situation where the number of remaining payouts is 15 in step S14701 means that it is the first game in the CB state. If the remaining payout number is 15, the process advances to step S14702 to determine whether or not the above redistribution flag is set. If the redistribution flag is set, it is determined in step S14703 whether the lottery result of the current game is CB medium / small combination 3 or CB medium / small combination 4. That is, the process of step S14703 is a process of determining whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a result of different payout numbers depending on the stop order.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S14703, in step S14704, a push order notification of a stop order that results in 14 medal payouts is generated. Thereafter, in step S14705, a push order command is output to the display control device 81, and then the push order notification process for CB is terminated. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S14701 to S14703, this process ends without performing the process for notifying the pressing order. In this case, the result of 14 medal payouts wins, or the result of 15 medal payouts wins.

  By doing as described above, the number of net increase after the redistribution processing is increased. More specifically, when the CB win is made after the redistribution flag is set, it is possible to receive 14 medals and 15 medals in the CB state. 14 sheets + 15 sheets−2 sheets × 2 = 25 sheets. On the other hand, before the increase notification flag is set, for example, when 15 medals are paid out in the first game, the CB state ends in the game. Is 15-2 sheets = 13 sheets, and an increase in the number of sheets that is nearly twice as large as that after the redistribution flag is set. In this way, when the redistribution process is performed, that is, when the actual increased number of sheets is smaller than the expected number, it is possible to approach the expected number.

<Modification 13>
In the present modification, a description will be given of processing when the actual advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is larger than the predicted number (total increase / decrease expected number SM) by the remaining number management process. First, with reference to FIG. 246, an explanation will be given of an event that occurs when the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is larger than expected.

  In FIG. 246 (a), the timing of tg1 in the advantageous section is shown as a reference, and the upper limit number of games is not reached at the timing of tg2 for digesting the advantageous section remaining game number ZG at that time, and the number of medals increases / decreases Indicates that neither the first excess flag nor the second excess flag is set, assuming that the upper limit increase number is not exceeded.

  In this case, the auxiliary display unit 65 can display the number of remaining games as many as the advantageous section remaining games ZG, and in the figure, the number of games (200 games) equal to the advantageous section remaining games ZG remains. Displayed as a number.

  In FIG. 246 (b), the timing of tg3, which is a timing later than the timing of tg1, is shown as a reference. In this example, an increase in the number of sheets more than the increase / decrease number predicted at the timing of tg1 occurs, and the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is exceeded at the timing of tg3. That is, the timing of tg3 is a timing before tg2 that should have consumed the advantageous section remaining game number ZG (200 games) at the timing of tg1. In this case, when the upper limit increase number of the advantageous sections is exceeded as described above, the advantageous sections are forcibly terminated, and the auxiliary display unit 65 performs, for example, an attack mode end effect.

  Then, at the timing of tg1, the number of remaining games corresponding to the advantageous section remaining game number ZG is notified by the auxiliary display unit 65, and at the timing of tg3, all the remaining number of games that have been notified at the time of tg1 are displayed. The advantageous section has been forcibly terminated without digestion, and the player has the impression that the profit to be obtained has been unfairly exploited for the game for the tg1 notification (the remaining 100 games in FIG. 246). There is a possibility of holding.

  FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing a seventh special notification process in this modification. The seventh special notification process is, for example, a process that is performed when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated in the section display second process (for example, between step S13606 and step S13607 in FIG. 228).

  In step S14801, it is determined whether the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is 2400 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S14801 and the current advantageous section ends without satisfying the second forced termination condition, the seventh special notification process is terminated as it is. If the second forced termination condition is satisfied, it is determined in step S14802 whether or not the number of remaining advantageous zone games ZG is greater than zero. The case where the advantageous zone remaining game number ZG is larger than 0 is a case where the game is forcibly terminated by the second forced termination condition even though the advantageous zone remaining game number ZG exists. If the remaining advantageous game number ZG is 0, the seventh special notification process is terminated, and if it is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S14803. In step S14803, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section remaining game number ZG grasped in step S14802 includes a notified one. More specifically, the number of post-notification games (the number of games corresponding to the post-counter counter BG on the display control device 81 side, which will be described as a post-counter counter BG in the following), is described. If BG is equal to the advantageous segment remaining game number ZG, it is determined that the number of games in the advantageous segment remaining game number ZG does not include the notified game, and if the post-counter counter BG is smaller than the advantageous segment remaining game number ZG, It is determined that a notification has been included. If it is determined that a notification has not been included, the seventh special notification process is terminated. That is, even if there is an advantageous segment remaining game number ZG, even if the game is forcibly terminated by the second forced termination condition, if the advantageous segment remaining game number ZG is not notified, the seventh special No notification process is performed.

  If the notified information is included, the process proceeds to step S14804. In step S14804, processing for grasping the notification amount is executed. In this case, it is possible to grasp the notification amount by subtracting the post-counter counter BG from the number of advantageous section remaining games ZG. In a succeeding step S14805, the seventh special notification lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a. As shown in FIG. 248 (a), in the seventh special notification lottery table, the occurrence rate of the seventh special notification (the winning rate of the notification lottery) varies depending on the number of already notified games grasped in step S14804. The occurrence rate is set higher as the number of notified games is larger.

  In subsequent step S14806, a lottery for executing the seventh special notification is performed based on the number of games for the notification grasped in step S14804 and the seventh special notification lottery table acquired in step S14805. In step S14807, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the lottery has been won, the seventh special notification execution command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S14808. If the information lottery has not been won, the seventh special notification non-execution command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S14809. After executing the process of step S14808 or step S14809, the seventh special notification process is terminated.

  The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the seventh special notification execution command or the seventh special notification non-execution command is roughly the same as the processing when the other special notification execution command / non-execution command is received. Since this is the same, a detailed description of the processing is omitted, but since the seventh special notification execution command and the seventh special notification non-execution command are output at the end of the advantageous section, the attack mode end effect, etc. The seventh special notification (the presence or absence of the appearance of a predetermined character, the type of the character to appear, the background, etc.) may be performed. In the display control device 81, when the seventh special notification is executed (when the seventh special notification execution command is received), the type of the seventh special notification is determined by type lottery or the like. As shown in FIG. 248 (b), the seventh special notification type table is set such that the types of the seventh special notification (a1 to a4) to be generated differ depending on the set value, and the player has generated The set value can be predicted from the type of the seventh special notification.

  However, the seventh special notification is set so that it is difficult or difficult to narrow down the set value by any type. That is, the seventh special notification a1 and the seventh special notification a2 occur at any set value. When the seventh special notification a3 occurs, it is determined that the setting is 3 or more, and when the seventh special notification a4 is generated, it is determined that the setting is 5 or more. However, at any set value, more than half of the types of the seventh special notification to be selected are the seventh special notification a1 and the seventh special notification a2, and the set value is compared with other special notifications. The difficulty of narrowing down is high. In the situation of FIG. 246 (b) above, this has at least reached the upper limit increase in the advantageous section, and the substantial profit of the player is what was predicted in FIG. 246 (a) (upper limit increase). This is because it has become more favorable for the player than In other words, in the situation of FIG. 246 (b), the player has not suffered a substantial disadvantage and rather enjoys more profits than expected, which is beneficial to the player in such a situation. This is based on the idea that if it is possible to present possible information, the level of its usefulness may be lowered. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a balance between the loss or disadvantage of the player and the presentation (compensation) of information.

  As described above, in the configuration in which there are the first forced termination condition of the upper limit number of games and the second forced termination condition of the upper limit increase number as the forced termination condition of the advantageous section, the second forced termination condition is unexpectedly early. If established (in a game earlier than predicted), a discrepancy may occur due to the notification content of the remaining number of games in the advantageous section. Therefore, in order to resolve the dissatisfaction that the player may feel due to the discrepancy, information that may be useful to the player (setting value suggestion) is provided. By doing in this way, a game can be enjoyed suitably, without reducing a player's willingness to play.

<Modification 14>
In this modification, based on the modification 13, the actual advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is larger than the predicted number (total increase / decrease expected number SM) by the remaining number management process, and the remaining game number notification is not digested. When the upper limit increase number is reached, the information that could not be digested is used for setting the special section. FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing special section setting processing in the present modification.

  The processing of step S14901 to step S14905 is the same as the processing of step S14001 to step S14005, and the number of special section games is based on the total number of extinguished games TEG, the advantageous section remaining game number ZG, and the number of differences up to the upper limit increase number. PG is set. In this modification, in addition to the number of special section games PG based on these parameters, the number of games based on the notification content that could not be digested is set for the special section. The special section game number PG based on the difference between the TEG, the advantageous section remaining game number ZG, and the upper limit increase number is referred to as a first special section game number PG1.

  In step S14906, processing for determining the number of notified games is executed. The processing in step S14906 is the same as the processing in step S14804, and the number of games that have been notified can be grasped by subtracting the postponing counter BG from the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG. In a succeeding step S14907, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the number of games grasped in the above step S14906 is executed to the second special section game number PG2 provided in the various counter areas 106e. Note that the value input in step S14907 may not be completely the same as the value grasped in step S14906. For example, one of the second special section game numbers PG2 set in a plurality of stages is set. It is good also as a structure to which it is set as the structure input by lottery etc. and the value grasped | ascertained in the said step S14906 is used as the parameter of the lottery.

  Thereafter, in step S14908, it is determined whether any of the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2 is 1 or more. If any one is 1 or more, step S14909 and In step S14910, processing for setting a special section is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S14908, or after the process of step S14910 is executed, the special section setting process is terminated after the total number of extinguished games TEG is cleared in step S14911.

  In this modification, as shown in FIG. 250 (a), in the special section game number subtraction process (15003), the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2 are subtracted one by one. In step S15004, it is determined whether the first special section game number PG1 out of the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2 is 0. In step S15005, the special section flag is cleared and the special section ends. That is, although the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2 are set as parameters for the number of games in the special section, the number of games in the special section itself is defined by the first special section game number PG1. .

  On the other hand, in the push order combination process in the present modification, the occurrence rate of the push order notification when the special replays 1 and 2 are won is such that the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2 are 1 or more. The situation differs from the situation after the second special section game number PG2 becomes zero (the situation where only the first special section PG1 is 1 or more). Specifically, if it is determined in step S15051 that the special replays 1 and 2 have been won, it is determined in step S15052 whether or not it is a special section. If it is a special section, the set value is grasped in step S15053, and the push order notification lottery table at the time of special replay winning is acquired in step S15054. As shown in FIGS. 251 (a) and 251 (b), the push order notification table at the time of winning the special replay is the situation after the second special section game number PG2 becomes 0 (only the first special section PG1 is present). The situation in which the number is 1 or more, FIG. 251 (a)) is different from the situation in which the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2 are 1 or more (FIG. 251 (b)). FIG. 251 (a) is the same as the table shown in FIG. 162 (b), and is set so that the occurrence rate of the push order notification and the type of push order notification when the push order notification is generated differ depending on the set value. Has been. FIG. 251 (b) is similar to FIG. 251 (a), although the push order notification occurrence rate and the type of push order notification when the push order notification is generated are set differently depending on the set value. The difference in the occurrence rate of the push order notification depending on the value and the variation in the type of push order notification when the push order notification is generated are different from those in FIG. 251 (a), which is more than the table in FIG. 251 (a). The table in FIG. 251 (b) is set so that it is easier to narrow down the set values based on the occurrence rate and type.

  In step S15055, a push order notification lottery process is executed. In step S15056, it is determined whether the notification lottery has been won. In the case of winning, processing for setting a push order notification command is executed in step S15057.

  That is, when a special section is set based on forced termination, a section in which the set value is easily narrowed down by the number of notified games is set. By doing in this way, it becomes the structure which follows that it was easy to narrow down a setting value that the number of notified games cannot be digested, and a player's absurd feeling can be eliminated suitably.

  In particular, in the special section, if it is set to the special section, information that is useful to the player is not presented. It is possible to avoid excessive events and to keep a good balance between the player's losses and disadvantages and their follow-up.

<Modification 15>
In this modified example, when the second excess flag is set in the remaining number management process, a new game is provided that uses the relationship between the number of games that will reach the upper limit increase number and the number of already notified games. To do. FIG. 252 (a) shows a part of a flowchart of the remaining number management process in the present modification.

  In this modification, if it is determined in step S13205 that the increase in the number of vacant sheets FM is 0 or less, the second excess flag is set in step S15101. Then, in step S15102, a process for grasping the number of games required to reach the upper limit increase number is executed, and in step S15103, a process for grasping the number of remaining games that have been notified is executed.

  In step S15104, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games notified in step S15103 is larger than the number of games required to reach the upper limit increase determined in step S15102. When the number of remaining games that have been notified is larger, that is, when the second excess flag is set, it is grasped that the upper limit increase number is reached before all the remaining number of games that have already been notified is exhausted, After the eighth special notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S15105, the remaining number management process is terminated. If the number of games required to reach the upper limit increase is larger than the number of remaining games that have been notified, the remaining number management process is terminated without setting the eighth special notification command.

  An example of the eighth special notification effect is shown in FIG.

  In this example, the number of remaining games that have been notified is 300 games and the number of games required to reach the upper limit increase number is 250 as an example, and the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the number of remaining games. The limit excess information image GTP based on the second excess flag being set is displayed along with the display (300 games) and the total number of acquired medals (1900).

  As the eighth special notification, regarding the display of the number of remaining games, a notification indicating that it is advantageous to reach the upper limit increase number and forcibly terminate it with the remaining number of displayed games remaining as much as possible is an auxiliary display unit. It is set to be performed at 65. In this example, with the character of the girl, the display of the number of remaining games is displayed with an explanation that says `` If you have a lot left, you are super lucky '' It will be explained that the special section after that will be advantageous.

  By doing in this way, the event that it is forcibly terminated without digesting the number of remaining games that have been informed is not a disadvantage for the player, but rather that it is an advantageous event It is possible to make an impression of the game, and it is possible to create a new game using the game.

  In particular, in this modified example, it is advantageous for the player to forcibly terminate the advantageous section earlier, so that it is possible to further increase the expectation for the bonus state in which the expected increase / decrease number per game is large. In other words, in a situation where it is known that the upper limit increase number will be reached, either the increase in medals due to the push mode notification in the attack mode or the like, or the increase in medals due to the bonus state will be final. Since the number of medals does not change, there may occur an event that a bonus winning that should be rejoiced is not enjoyed. On the other hand, as the above configuration, it will be advantageous to reach the upper limit increase earlier, so that it will be possible to achieve earlier achievement by winning the bonus. It is possible to strengthen the impression.

  In the above-described modified example, the greater the number of remaining games informed at the time of forced termination, the more advantageous to the player. However, the smaller the number of remaining games informed, the more advantageous to the player. However, if the number of remaining games that have been notified is a predetermined number such as a good number, it may be advantageous to the player.

  For example, in FIG. 253 (a), for the seventh special notification shown in the modified example 13, as the number of informed games at the time of forced termination decreases, the occurrence rate of the seventh special notification increases. A lottery table is shown. By doing so, it is advantageous to exhaust the number of games that have been notified as much as possible, and to forcibly end the game, and it is possible to enjoy the advantageous section thoroughly until the end.

  FIG. 253 (b) shows that for the seventh special notification shown in the modified example 13, if the number of already notified games at the time of forced termination is a predetermined specific number such as 10, 50, 100, 200, 7 shows a seventh special notification lottery table in which the occurrence rate of the seventh special notification is higher than the case where there is no such information. By doing in this way, the number of games that have already been informed early is depleted and vice versa, and it is unlikely that the expectation for the seventh special notification will be diminished. In relation to the remaining number of completed games, it is possible to draw interest to the game results of each game to the end.

  In the above-described configuration, for example, in the setting process of the extra effect (FIG. 172 and the like), whether the extra report is set as the immediate report or the post-report is changed depending on whether the second excess flag is set It is good also as a structure. In this case, for example, in a configuration where the number of already-reported games remains large and the forced termination is performed at the upper limit increase number (seventh special notification is likely to occur), the immediate placement notification is selected. In a configuration that is more advantageous for a player and more advantageous for forced termination with an upper limit increase in a situation where the number of notified games has decreased, it is more preferable for the player to select post-notification. In this way, in the situation where the excess flag is set, such as the number of extra notification games, even if the event may no longer be of interest, Can be incorporated into the game, and the fun of the game can be improved.

<Modification 16>
In this modification, the configuration for predicting that the second forced termination condition may be established in the future is changed. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the remaining number management process in the present modification.

  In step S15201, the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is grasped. In the subsequent step S15202, a process of calculating an average value of the number of times that the bonus winning can be expected (expected bonus winning number KB) is calculated from the number of remaining advantageous zone games ZG. For example, if the advantageous zone remaining game number ZG is 500 games and the bonus winning probability is about 1/254, the expected bonus winning number KB is calculated as 500 games × about 1/254 = about 1.97 times. Is done.

  In step S15203, based on the expected bonus winning number KB calculated in step S15202, an increase that can be expected with the bonus (expected bonus increase number KBM) is calculated. For example, if the number of bonuses acquired is 144, the expected bonus increase number KBM is calculated as about 1.97 times (KB) × 144 = about 283.68.

  In subsequent step S15204, the number of games (notification game number HG) excluding the number of games executed in the bonus state in the advantageous zone remaining game number ZM when the bonus is won as the expected bonus winning number KB is calculated. For example, if the advantageous game remaining number of games ZG is 500, the expected bonus winning number KB is about 1.97 times, and the number of games necessary to digest the bonus state is 24 games, the number of notification games HG is 500 games. -Calculated as approximately 1.97 times (KB) x 24 games = approximately 452.72 games.

  In step S15205, the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM is calculated when the above-described advantageous section corresponding to the number of notification games HG is executed. In this case, the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM is calculated by multiplying the notification game number HG by the expected increase / decrease number KM which is a net increase (about +1.90) without taking the bonus state into consideration. In the example in which the number of informing games HG is about 452.72 games, the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM is calculated as about 452.72 games × 1.90 (KM) = about 860.17.

  In step S15206, by adding the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM and the expected bonus increase number KBM to the advantageous interval increase / decrease number ZM, the advantageous interval remaining game number ZG which takes into account the number of games consumed in the bonus state is added. The total increase / decrease expectation number SM is calculated. In the above example, the total increase / decrease expected number of sheets SM is a value obtained by adding about 860.17 sheets (NM) + about 283.68 sheets (KBM) = 1143.85 sheets to the current advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM. This value is smaller than the total increase / decrease expected number SM (1230 + ZM) calculated as the same advantageous section remaining game number ZG in the seventh embodiment. Thereafter, the number of available empty FMs that can be increased is calculated in step S15207. If the available number FM becomes 0 or less (step S15208), a process of setting a second excess flag is performed (step S15209).

  As described above, in predicting (calculating) the number of medals that can be expected in the remaining advantageous sections, the number of remaining games in the advantageous sections that are consumed in the bonus state as well as taking into account the increase in the bonus state By taking into account, it is possible to more accurately predict the number of medals.

  In particular, even if the advantageous section is digested in the bonus state, the advantageous section game number AG continues to be counted. Therefore, by shifting to the bonus state, it can be expected that more medals will be obtained than when the transition is not made, but the bonus The number of games executed such as attack mode is reduced by the amount of the state. In other words, for example, if the number of games that can be expected when a predetermined number of games are executed in a so-called ART in the attack mode and the high RT state is calculated in consideration of the transition to the bonus state, Since the count of the remaining number of games is stopped, simply adding the rate of transition to the bonus state or the expected increase number in the bonus state to the increase number that can be expected in the ART state. An increase in the number of sheets that can be expected during ART can be calculated. More specifically, for example, if the ART of 100 games is executed with a net increase of about +1.90 and a bonus lottery in which 144 medals can be expected in about 254 in the meantime, the 100 By digesting the ART of the game, 100 games x about 1.90 + 100 games x about 1/144 of 254 = about 246 medals can be expected, which is converted into a net increase per game Then, it becomes about 2.46 sheets. On the other hand, if the ART count is not stopped when shifting to the bonus state, it is necessary to take into account the decrease in the number of ART games for the bonus state. (100 games-100 games x approx. 1/254 x 24 games (the number of games required in the bonus state)) x approx. 1.90 + 100 games x approx. 1/254 x 144 = approx. 227 Can be expected, and when converted to a net increase per game, it is about 2.27. In this way, it is possible to perform more accurate prediction by adopting a configuration in which the number of expected increase is predicted after taking into account the configuration in which the count of the advantageous interval is not stopped by the bonus winning in the advantageous interval.

<Modification 17>
In this modification, a device for reducing the blur width in which the net increase in the number of advantageous sections is increased or decreased depending on whether or not BB is won will be described. FIG. 255 (a) shows a part of the lottery table for the first RT state in the present modification.

  In this modification, the winning probabilities of various replays in the first RT state in the seventh embodiment are different, and the normal replay with the index value IV = 1 has a higher winning probability than the seventh embodiment, and the index The first promotion replays 1 to 4 with values IV = 2 to 5 have lower winning probabilities than the seventh embodiment. On the other hand, the total replay probability of the various replays with index values IV = 1 to 5 is set to be equivalent to that of the seventh embodiment. The index value IV = 6 and after is the same as in the seventh embodiment.

  As described above, in the first RT state in the present modification, the winning probability of the first promotion replay is lower than that of the seventh embodiment, and the push order notification may occur. However, the average number of games until the transition to the second RT state is longer than that in the seventh embodiment. The net increase in the first RT state in the situation where the push order notification can occur is as shown in FIG. 216 above, and does not include the bonus win, and is about −0.99 per game, Can be reduced.

  FIG. 255 (b) is a diagram for comparing the increase / decrease of medals when a bonus is won during ART between the seventh embodiment and this modification.

  In the seventh embodiment, when a bonus is won at the timing of th1 during ART, the bonus carry-over state is entered until the timing of th2 when the bonus winning is established, and the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state. In addition, in the return state from the timing of th3 when the bonus ends to the timing of th4 when returning to the second RT state, the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the first RT state. The net increase in each of these states is as described above, th1 to th2, and th3 to th4 are about −0.99 per game, and th2 to th3 are about +6.00, more than th1. The number before and after th4 is about +1.90.

  The figure also shows that the bonus is won at th5, the bonus is won at th6, the bonus is terminated at th7, and the state returns to the second RT state at tf8. Th5 to th6 and th7 to th8 are about -0.99 per game, th6 to th7 are about +6.00, and before th5 and after th8 are about +1.90. .

  The seventh embodiment and this modification are different in the average number of games from the end of the bonus until returning to the second RT state, and the average number of games in the seventh embodiment is th3 to th4 in the figure, The average number of games in this modification is th7 to th8, and this modification tends to be longer. By doing this, the number of net increase when a bonus is won during ART is the increase in the number of net increase when a bonus is won during ART (net increase from th1 to th4 and net increase from th5 to th8). Can be suppressed. Therefore, the blur width of the net increase when the bonus is won during ART is reduced, and the difference between the predicted value of the net increase and the actual value can be reduced.

  Incidentally, in this modification, the winning probability of the first promotion replay during the first RT state is about 1/50, and the transition to the second RT state can occur in an average of 50 games. Also, in the normal gaming state, the transition to the first RT state occurs due to the loss of the bell that is won in about one-fifth (one third), so the transition can occur in an average of 16.5 games . That is, after the bonus, it takes 66.5 games on average to return to the second RT state. In this case, the average increase / decrease number of medals is about −64.8 (−0.99 × 66.5). When 214 bonus increments are added to this and 70.5 games, including 24 bonus games, are calculated, the net increase from winning the bonus to returning to ART is approximately 2.12. More than the net increase. If about 8 games are required to win a bonus, the net increase is about +1.90, which is almost equal to the net increase in ART (almost the same, so that there is no difference in the number of predicted games, Equal to the extent that the player cannot grasp the difference).

<Modification 18>
In this modification, the total increase / decrease expected number SM calculated in the remaining number management process is appropriately corrected. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the addition command in the present modification. The additional command setting process is a process that is started when an additional command is output and set to the display control device 81 after an additional game number process such as an attack mode. In addition, in this modification, it is configured so that the setting process of the addition command is started even when the addition is not won, and further, as the execution timing of the addition notification, the immediate addition notification, the subsequent addition notification, the stop ON operation, and the stop OFF The operation timing is determined on the main control device 101 side.

  In step S15301, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery has been won in this extra lottery. As already described, in this modification, when the extra command setting process is activated even when the extra is not won, the process of step S15301 is a process for determining whether or not the setting process is activated when the extra is not won. I can say that. Even in the situation where the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, it is determined in step S15301 that the extra lottery has not been won. If it is not activated at the time of non-winning and is at the time of extra winning, the process proceeds to step S15302 to perform processing for grasping the number of additional games this time. In step S15303, the first adjustment process is executed. The first adjustment process is a process for correcting the total increase / decrease expected number SM calculated in the previous game section display second process when adding this time.

  The first adjustment process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the description, FIG. 260 is also referred to as appropriate.

  In step S 15401, processing for grasping the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter areas 106 e is executed. This display remaining number counter HG corresponds to the display remaining number counter HG on the display control device 81 side, and is the remaining number of games in the advantageous section that is currently informed, and the remaining advantageous section that has been notified. Corresponds to the number of games ZG. In addition, about a figure and the following description, all are called the display remaining number counter HG. In step S15402, the counter performs a process of temporarily inputting the value of the display remaining number counter HG to the calculation counter SC provided in the various counter areas 106e. The calculation counter SC is a counter used in arithmetic processing such as the total increase / decrease expected number of sheets SM.

  In step S15403, a process of further adding the number of games added this time to the calculation counter SC to which the display remaining number counter HG (the notified advantageous section remaining game number ZG) is input is performed. In step S15404, a process of calculating the remaining maximum expected increase number NMM from the calculation counter SC after addition and the maximum increase / decrease number MM is performed. The maximum increase / decrease number MM is the maximum number that can be expected per game, and in this modification, the maximum increase / decrease number MM is set to 12 by subtracting 3 bets from 15 that is the maximum payout number per game. It should be noted that the increased number (9-3 = 6) of the payout combination having the highest probability of winning in the state at the time of calculation and the subsequent state (so-called main combination, push order bell in the attack mode) is the maximum increase / decrease number MM. It is good. In step S15405, the remaining increase maximum expected number NMM calculated above is added to the current advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM to calculate the total increase / decrease maximum expected number SMM.

  FIG. 260 (a) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of games, the counter, and the like when the first adjustment process is performed. The figure shows a situation where an extra is generated at the timing of ti1, and at the timing of ti1, the number of games up to ti2 corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG is compared to the advantageous section game number AG. It has already been notified, and the case where an additional number of games from ti2 to ti4 has occurred is shown as an additional for this time. At the timing of ti1, the expected increase number is obtained as the total increase / decrease expected number SM in the immediately preceding section display second process. In this example, it is predicted that the upper limit increase number of 2400 will not be reached. ing.

  As described above, in step S15405, the current added game number is added to the remaining game number ZG, and the total increase / decrease maximum expected number SMM is calculated. In a succeeding step S15406, it is determined whether or not the calculated total increase / decrease maximum expected number of sheets SMM exceeds the upper limit increase number. If it is determined that the upper limit increase number is exceeded, the excess CM is calculated by subtracting the upper limit increase number from the total maximum increase expected number SMM in step S15407, and the excess CM and the maximum increase / decrease number MM are exceeded in step S15408. A process of calculating the excess number of games CG corresponding to the minute CM is performed. In step S15409, a process for calculating a notification upper limit HJ, which is an upper limit that does not cause an event that is forcibly terminated without digesting the number of already-reported games, is executed at the time of adding this time. More specifically, the notification upper limit HJ is calculated by subtracting the display remaining number counter HG and the excess game number CG from the calculation counter SC.

  In FIG. 260 (a), the excess game number CG corresponding to the excess CM is calculated from the calculated total increase / decrease maximum expected number SMM. When the maximum increase is expected in each game, including the addition of this time, based on the timing of ti1, the upper limit increase is exceeded in ti4. More specifically, when the maximum increase is expected Exceeds the maximum increase in ti3 games. In this case, the game from ti3 to ti4 is calculated as the excess game number CG, and the number of games from ti2 to ti3 is calculated as the notification upper limit HJ.

  After the notification upper limit HJ is calculated in step S15409, processing for setting an adjustment flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S15410. The adjustment flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the excess game number CG and the notification upper limit HJ have been calculated as the total maximum increase / decrease expected number SMM exceeds the upper limit increase number due to this addition.

  In the subsequent step S15411, a process of adding an additional game number exceeding the notification upper limit HJ, that is, an excess game number CG, to the first adjustment counter CC1 provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Then, after clearing the calculation counter SC in step S15412, the first adjustment process is terminated. If it is determined in step S15406 that the total maximum increase / decrease expected number SMM does not exceed the upper limit increase number, the calculation counter SC is cleared in step S15412 without calculating the excess game number CG or the like. The first adjustment process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the setting process for the add-on command, after the first adjustment process is executed in step S15303, an add-on lottery process is executed in step S15304 as to whether or not the current add-on notification is to be set as the post-addition notification. This process is a process corresponding to the process of step S8503 on the display control device 81 side. Then, in step S15305, it is determined whether or not post-loading notification is selected. If immediate reporting is selected instead of post-loading notification, the display remaining number counter HG is added to the display remaining number counter HG in step S15306. The number or the notification upper limit HJ set in the first adjustment process is added. In this case, when the notification upper limit HJ is not set, notification of the number of additional games this time occurs in the game, and when the notification upper limit HJ is set, the additional notification corresponding to the notification upper limit HJ. Occurs in the game. The processing from step S15307 to step S15312 corresponds to the processing from step S8506 to step S8511 described above, and is a process for setting at which timing of the current game an extra notification is to be generated. After executing any of the processes of step S15309, step S15311, and step S15312, after executing the process of outputting and setting an addition command including the information set in each of the above processes in step S15313, this addition command End the setting process.

  If it is determined in step S15305 that post-notification has been selected, processing for setting a post-installation flag in various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S15314. Then, in step S15315, a process of adding the current number of added games or the notification upper limit HJ to the added counter BG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The retrofit counter is also a counter corresponding to the retrofit counter BG on the display control device 81 side, and is referred to as a retrofit counter BG in the drawings and the following description. After that, in step S15316, the addition command for which various information is set is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the setting process for the addition command is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S15301 that the addition has not been won, the third adjustment process is executed in step S15317, the addition command is set to be output in step S15318, and the addition command setting process is terminated. The third adjustment process will be described later in detail.

  Next, the second adjustment process started in the section display second process in this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second adjustment process is a process for readjusting the first adjustment counter CC1 set in the first adjustment process based on the result of the current game. For example, in step S13005, the remaining number management process Invoked after is executed.

  In step S15501, the number of games corresponding to the advantageous section remaining game number ZG that has been notified as the display remaining number counter HG is grasped. In a succeeding step S15502, the number of games corresponding to the notification upper limit HJ is grasped. In step S15503, a process of inputting the display remaining number counter HG and the notification upper limit HJ to the calculation counter SC is executed. Thereafter, in step S15504, processing for calculating the remaining maximum increase / decrease expected number NMM from the calculation counter SC and the maximum increase / decrease number MM is executed, and in step S15505, processing for calculating the total maximum increase / decrease expected number SMM is executed. Steps S15504 and S15505 correspond to the above steps S15404 and S15405.

  In subsequent step S15506, it is determined whether or not the total maximum increase / decrease expected number SMM exceeds the upper limit increase number. If it is determined, the excess CM is detected in step S15507, and then the excess game number CG is determined in step S15508. Execute the process to calculate These processes in steps S15506 to S15508 correspond to the processes in steps S15406 to S15408.

  In the subsequent step S15509, a process of inputting the difference between the first adjustment counter CC1 and the excess game number CG to the second adjustment counter CC2 provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. When a negative determination is made in step S15506, or after the process of step S15509 is executed, the calculation counter SC is cleared, and the second adjustment process ends.

  FIG. 260 (b) shows a situation when the second adjustment process is performed after the first adjustment process is performed in FIG. 260 (a). While the first adjustment process is performed at the start of the game, the second adjustment process is a process performed at the end of the game, and FIG. 260 (b) is started at the timing of ti1 in FIG. 260 (a). The timing of ti5 at the end of the game is shown as a reference.

  As described above, the notification upper limit HJ at the time of winning the bonus is calculated from the maximum increase number, and in the game exceeding the upper limit increase number derived from the maximum increase number, the result of this game is the maximum increase number. If not, the game is different from the previous prediction. More specifically, at the time of ti1 in FIG. 260 (a), a game exceeding the upper limit increase number is predicted as ti3. However, if the result of this game is not the maximum increase number, it is more than that ti3. It is predicted that the upper limit increase will be exceeded in the later game ti6. The second adjustment process described above is a process for correcting the difference between ti3 and ti6. Of the games from ti3 to ti4 that have been input to the first adjustment counter CC1, the amount of deviation is the second. This is a process of inputting to the adjustment counter CC2.

  As described above, the first adjustment process is executed in a game in which an extra opportunity has occurred, while the second adjustment process is executed at the end of each game. Therefore, the deviation is cumulatively added to the second adjustment counter CC2 in each game.

  FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing a third adjustment process started in the setting process of the above-described addition command.

  In step S15601, it is determined whether or not the second adjustment counter CC2 is equal to or greater than 1. If it is equal to 0, the process ends. If the number is 1 or more, in step S15602, a pseudo-addition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a. Although the pseudo-addition is not won in the current addition lottery, based on the second adjustment counter CC2, that is, of the first adjustment counter CC1, which is the amount for which the addition notification restriction has been performed, This is an effect of notifying the number of games for which an additional notification is possible depending on the game situation, and the same effect as the additional notification is set. Although the detailed description of the pseudo-addition lottery table is omitted, whether or not to win the pseudo-addition is set according to the game result, the display mode, and the like, as with the extra lottery table.

  In step S15603, a pseudo lottery process is executed, and in step S15604, it is determined whether or not the lottery process is won. If it is not winning, the third adjustment process is ended as it is, and if it is winning, the process proceeds to step S15605. In step S15605, as the number of games to be notified in the second adjustment counter CC2, the number of pseudo additional notification games is determined by lottery or the like. Then, in step S15606, a process of setting an additional notification effect is executed. More specifically, the addition command for causing the above-described pseudo addition notification game number to be added is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Then, in step S15607, a process of subtracting the current number of pseudo added games from the second adjustment counter CC2 is performed, and then the third adjustment process ends.

  As described above, even if the remaining number of games is notified, the upper limit that is not forcibly terminated without digesting the notified number of games depending on the subsequent game situation is calculated from the maximum increase number, and an additional notification up to the upper limit is notified. By adopting a configuration that does this, it is possible to avoid an event that causes a contradiction in reporting afterwards, and not to give a sense of incongruity or loss to being forcibly terminated without digesting the number of games that have been notified. It becomes possible.

  Moreover, after having set it as the structure which calculates an alerting | reporting upper limit as mentioned above, and carries out the additional alerting | reporting based on the upper limit, it was set as the structure which readjusts an alerting | reporting upper limit by 2nd adjustment processing according to an actual game situation. Thus, it is possible to avoid an event in which the extra notification is unnecessarily restricted and prevent the noticeable inconsistency from occurring while preventing the effect of improving the attention to the extra notification from being performed. .

  With the configuration in which the number of games that can be notified in the second adjustment process is notified as a pseudo-addition in the third adjustment process at the time of non-winning addition, for example, even in situations where the additional lottery is limited, It is possible to give an impression as if a lottery has been performed, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Modification 19>
In this modification, a remaining game number management process and a remaining number management process that are activated in a game after the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set will be described.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the remaining game number increasing process such as adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed in the advantageous section, the phenomenon that the advantageous section remaining game number ZG is subtracted due to a factor other than the digestion of the game is The configuration does not occur. Then, in the remaining game number management process, once the first excess flag is set, that is, after it is specified that the upper limit number of games is reached, the specification does not cover. Then, regarding the remaining game number management process, once the first excess flag is set, the remaining game number management process is not activated, or the first excess flag is set even if activated. As a configuration, the remaining game number management process may be terminated without executing the processes of steps S13101 to S13111.

  On the other hand, regarding the second excess flag, that is, after it is specified that the upper limit increase number of medals is reached, as described above, the upper limit increase number of medals is not reached depending on the subsequent game situation. It can also happen. The remaining number management process in this case will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In this modification, it is determined in step S15701 whether the second excess flag has already been set. If not set, the process advances to step S15702 to execute processing for specifying that the second forced termination condition in steps S15702 to S15707 is established in the future. The processing in steps S15702 to S15707 is the same as the processing in steps S13201 to S13206.

  If it is determined in step S15701 that the second excess flag is set, the process advances to step S15708 to determine whether or not a predetermined correction condition is satisfied. If the correction condition is satisfied, the process for specifying that the second forced termination condition in steps S15302 to S15307 is satisfied in the future is executed again, and the correction condition must be satisfied. For example, the remaining number management process is terminated without performing the specific process.

  The above correction conditions are, for example, when a bonus is won, when a bonus is won, or when the RT state shifts to a low RT state (from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state or the normal gaming state) ) When the RT state shifts from the high RT state to the low RT state, when the state further returns to the high RT state, the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM and the previously predicted number (total increase / decrease expected number SM) When the difference of exceeds a predetermined number, etc. are mentioned.

  If it is configured to perform a correction process based on winning a bonus, winning a bonus, or changing the RT state to a low RT state, the expected increase / decrease number KM is substantially different from that used for prediction. The configuration is such that correction is performed based on the shift, and it is not necessary to add the bonus, the transition rate of the RT state, or the like to the prior prediction, and the processing configuration of the prediction process (remaining number management process) can be simplified. In addition, when the RT state shifts from the high RT state to the low RT state, if the correction process is performed based on the return to the high RT state, the number of staying games in the low RT state is reduced. The process of predicting in advance is omitted, the amount of decrease in the actual low RT state may be corrected, and the processing configuration can be further simplified. In addition, if the configuration is such that the correction is made when the difference between the actual increase / decrease number and the predicted number exceeds a predetermined number, the correction is made after the difference from the predicted number occurs, and the number of times correction processing can be performed Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the processing.

<Modification 20>
In this modified example, a case where a bonus is won near the end of the advantageous section will be described. First, the state just before the end of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 262 (a) shows a case where the bonus winning flag of the first BB or the second BB is set in the game of tj1, which is a situation where the push order notification such as the attack mode occurs, and at tj2 after tj1. It shows the case where a bonus prize has occurred. In this case, by winning a bonus, the gaming state from tj1 to tj2 that is being carried over to the bonus winning becomes the normal gaming state, and the net increase in the normal gaming state is smaller than the net increase in the attack mode. More specifically, in the game from tj1 to tj2, an increase of about −0.99 per game can be expected, and the number of held medals can decrease (see FIG. 216). Further, even in the return state from tj3 when the bonus state ends to tj4 when the gaming state returns to the second RT state, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, so the number of medals can be reduced. When the transition to the second RT state occurs at tj4, the number of medals increases, and an increase in medals can be expected until tj5 when the remaining number of games in the advantageous section becomes zero.

  On the other hand, FIG. 262 (b) shows a case where the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached at tj6 from tj3 when the bonus state ends to tj4 when returning to the second RT state. As described above, in the game from tj3 to tj4, the net increase per game is negative, but it is forcibly terminated at tj6 while the number of medals is decreasing. Then, there will be a significant increase in the number of held medals, and even though the number of games has reached the upper limit number of games, it is advantageous in the state that the number of held medals is finally reduced from the maximum number (timing tj3 in the figure). The section will be forcibly terminated, and the precious game will be the result of a butt sag. If such an event occurs, the player's satisfaction cannot be fully satisfied, which is not preferable.

  Therefore, in this modification, the sign mode setting process is devised for the bonus winning near the end of the advantageous section.

  FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing a precursor setting process when a bonus is won in the present embodiment. The sign setting process at the time of winning the bonus is, for example, a process performed in a situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set in the lottery result handling process, and setting the predictor mode based on the bonus winning It is a process for performing. In the first embodiment described above, in the first specific combination process to the third specific combination process, the sign mode is set through the transition lottery such as the challenge mode and the attack mode and the extra lottery. In this case, the sign mode set in the sign setting process when the bonus is won is prioritized. In addition, as already explained, the sign mode is a mode in which a suggestive effect suggesting the winning content is generated with a relatively high probability, and a continuous effect is generated when the number of predictor games set as the predictor mode approaches zero. In this mode, the winning content is notified when it becomes 0. In other words, in the precursor mode based on bonus winning, a suggestion effect that suggests a bonus winning is generated, and a bonus winning notification is performed through a continuous effect.

  In step S15801, it is determined whether or not the set first BB winning flag and second BB winning flag are set in the current game, that is, whether or not the bonus winning game. If it is not a winning game and the bonus is being carried over, the sign setting process is terminated. If it is a winning game, processing for obtaining a precursor table is executed in step S15802. An example of the precursor table is shown in FIG. More specifically, 0 to 32 games are set as the number of precursor games in the precursor table, and the number of precursor games to be selected is determined by whether or not the display mode and the attack mode are selected simultaneously when winning. Is different. Note that the precursor table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 35 above, and a game result that is a bonus winning opportunity (for example, even if the same first BB is won, whether the trigger is a strong cherry duplication 1 or weak) Cherry duplication 1 etc.) and the bonus type that is won (for example, duplication with the same strong cherry is duplication with the first cherry BB or duplication with the second BB) It may be set so that the number of precursor games selected depends on whether the cherry cherry overlap is 2 or the like. Alternatively, the number of precursor games to be selected may be set differently depending on whether or not there is an overlap with another result (for example, whether the first BB is a single winner or a strong cherry overlap 1). Furthermore, the number of predictive games is not limited to 0 to 32 games, and a configuration in which a larger number of games can be selected may be used, or a configuration in which 0 games are always selected (so-called one notification) may be used.

  In subsequent step S15803, based on the precursor table acquired in step S15802, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode based on the current bonus winning is determined by lottery, and the determined number of precursor games is input to the precursor counter. .

  In step S15804, it is determined whether or not the current bonus winning is a bonus winning in the advantageous section. If it is during the advantageous section, it is determined in step S15805 whether the first excess flag is set among the first excess flag and the second excess flag. If the first excess flag is set and it is specified that the upper limit number of games will be reached in the future, in steps S15806 to S15810, the upper limit number of games is set during the return state after the bonus state. It is determined whether or not it is reached, that is, whether or not the situation shown in FIG.

  More specifically, in step S15806, a process of grasping the number of games (A) required up to the upper limit number of games from the current advantageous section game number AG and the upper limit number of games (1500) is performed. In subsequent step S15807, based on the lottery result in step S15803, a process of grasping the current number of precursor games (B) is performed. In step S15808, the number of games executed in the bonus state won this time (24 games in both the first BB state and the second BB state) is grasped. Then, in step S15809, after the bonus state is finished, a process of grasping the average value (D) of the number of return games until the transition to the second RT state occurs by performing the push order notification is performed. In the slot machine 10, the average number of games until the transition to the first RT state occurs after the push-out bell is lost in the normal gaming state, and the first promotion replay is won in the first RT state. The average number of games until the transition to the second RT state occurs is about 8 games, and the average value (D) of the number of return games is about 19 games. Thereafter, in step S15810, whether or not the upper limit number of games is reached during the return state after the bonus state is determined by the number of games (A) required up to the upper limit number of games, the number of precursor games (B) and the number of games in the bonus state. It is determined whether or not it is greater than the sum of (C) and less than the sum of the number of precursor games (B), the number of bonus games (C), and the average number of return games (D). To do.

  As shown in FIG. 262 (b), the case where the number of games (A) required up to the upper limit number of games is smaller than the sum of the number of precursor games (B) and the number of bonus games (C) is a precursor. When the upper limit number of games is reached during the mode or bonus state, the number of games (A) required up to the upper limit number of games is the average of the number of precursor games (B), the number of bonus games (C), and the number of return games The case where the value is greater than the sum of the values (D) is a case where the upper limit number of games is reached after the return to the second RT state after the bonus state ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S15810, in step S15881, a process of grasping the number of games (E) from the end of the bonus state until the upper limit number of games is reached is executed. This process is calculated by subtracting the number of precursor games (B) and the number of games in bonus state (C) from the number of games required up to the upper limit number of games (A). In step S15812, the number of games (E) calculated in step S15881 is set as the number of adjusted games, and the number of adjusted games is added to the number of precursor games determined in step S15803, so that the number of precursor games this time The process is executed. More specifically, a process of adding the calculated number of adjusted games (E) to the precursor counter is performed.

  After executing the process of step S15812, after performing the process of setting a precursor command including information on the number of precursor games of this time as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S15813, the precursor setting process is terminated. To do. In this case, the sign mode is performed over the number of games to which the number of adjusted games (E) is added, and after winning the number of adjusted games (E), bonus winning notification is performed. In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S15804 and the bonus is not won in the advantageous section, or if the first excess flag is not set in step S15805, the upper limit number of games being returned in step S15810 If it is determined that the number has not reached, the process proceeds directly to step S15813, and a precursor command including information on the number of precursor games in which the number of adjusted games in step S15812 is not added (the number of precursor games drawn in step S15803). Is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the precursor setting process is terminated.

  As a result of the above processing, as shown in FIG. 264, the number of predictive games when the bonus is won in the game of tk1 in the advantageous section is the number of games up to tk3 in addition to the original number of games (B) up to tk2. A value obtained by adding (E) is set. As a result, if the notification in the precursor mode is followed, the bonus state is digested from tk3 to tk5 and forcibly terminated at tk5. That is, the medal reaches the maximum value at tk4 before the adjustment, and after that, it is forcibly terminated after reducing the medal to tk5, but after the adjustment, it is forcibly terminated in the situation where the medal has the maximum value. , The game will be forcibly terminated when the player's satisfaction has reached its peak.

  In particular, when the number of adjusted games is added as described above, the number of games in the sign mode and the return state does not change, so the maximum value of medals at the time of forced termination does not change. By doing so, it is possible to greatly vary the impression given to the player at the time of forced termination without greatly varying the advantage for the player.

  By the way, when the bonus winning flag is set, the gaming state changes from the previous high RT state (second RT state or third RT state) to the low RT state (here, normal gaming state), and the replay probability is greatly increased. It will be lower, and reach eyes based on bonus winnings may also appear. In other words, the player can detect the bonus winning at a timing before the bonus winning notification is performed, and as described above, the medal can be decreased in the low RT state. Therefore, if you win a bonus, you can reduce the number of medals you have by winning the bonus as soon as possible. For example, in FIG. 264, if a bonus is awarded immediately after winning a bonus at tk1, it is possible that the upper limit number of games will be reached after returning to the high RT state after the bonus state. More specifically, a bonus is awarded between the time when a bonus is won at tk1 and the game in which the number of adjusted games (E) is subtracted from the average value (D) of the number of returned games, so that a high RT state is achieved. The maximum number of games will be reached after returning. The total number of medals at the time of reaching the upper limit game during this period will increase as the bonus winning is slower, and the increase after returning to the high RT state will decrease, and the decrease until the bonus winning will increase. Sometimes, the total number of medals when winning is the largest, and the total number of medals when the game obtained by subtracting the adjusted game number (E) from the average value (D) of the number of returned games is awarded is the smallest. In other words, depending on the skill of the player (the number of games required from bonus detection to bonus winning is small and large), the maximum value of medals at the time of forced termination can be larger than that of tk5 in FIG. Thus, by leaving room for technical intervention, it is possible to stimulate the player's willingness to play and to actively participate in the game.

  On the other hand, after the game in which the adjusted game number (E) is subtracted from the average value (D) of the number of return games is digested, the slower the bonus winning is, the more the number of decrease until the bonus winning is, and the higher RT state Since the return is not expected, the fluctuation of the total medal when reaching the upper limit game will be less as the bonus wins are slower, and the decrease will be from the average value (D) of the return game from the bonus winning It becomes larger than the reduction to the game obtained by subtracting the number of adjustment games (E). In other words, in the case where the bonus winning is made from the bonus winning until the game obtained by subtracting the adjustment game number (E) from the average value (D) of the return games, the adjustment game number (D) is calculated from the average value (D) of the return games. It can be said that the effect of reducing the number of held medals is higher than the case where a bonus is won after the game in which E) is subtracted. Note that the time point when the game in which the adjusted game number (E) is subtracted from the average value (D) of the number of return games from the bonus winning is digested is also referred to as a first branch point.

  Then, after digesting the number of precursor games (B) before the addition of the number of adjusted games (E) from the bonus winning, until the number of adjusted games (E) is digested, the total number of medals when reaching the upper limit game It is difficult to change as described above. In other words, after the number of precursor games (B) has been exhausted from winning the bonus, even if the bonus is awarded early, there is no effect of reducing the number of held medals. Note that the point in time when the number of precursor games (B) before the addition of the number of adjusted games (E) is exhausted from the bonus winning is also referred to as a second branch point.

  In this case, it is good also as a structure which changes the production | presentation aspect of a sign effect, such as a suggestion effect of the presence or absence of the bonus winning in sign mode, based on each said branch point. For example, from the time of winning the bonus, at the first branch point, an indication effect that there is a possibility that a continuous effect (FIG. 60) may occur is generated (the precursor effect is the first mode), and the first branch point From the first to the second branch point, the fact that the continuous production will occur will be notified and the conditions that will be the winning content in the continuous production will be explained (such as explanation of the number of steps for the daruma drop). ), A continuous effect is generated after the second branch point (the precursor effect is the third mode). By doing so, a player who has sensed that there is a possibility that a continuous production may occur due to the production up to the first branch point, is desired to confirm, for example, whether or not a bonus is won by the first branch point. A player who has made a stop operation aiming at the symbol of, and has clearly recognized that a continuous effect will occur due to the effects after the first branch point, for example, in order to establish a bonus prize by the second branch point It is considered that the stop operation is performed aiming at the bonus-corresponding symbol, and after the second branch point, the direction of the production (continuous production) is enjoyed rather than the early bonus winning. In other words, a game that aims to win a bonus from the bonus winning to the first branch point or the second branch point, and a game where the second branch point or later enjoys a production rather than an early bonus prize. Is realized. In this way, by setting the effect mode of the precursor mode based on the relationship between the skill of the player and the final number of medals, it is possible to provide an unprecedented fun game.

<Modification 21>
In this modified example, the relationship with the eighth display segment N8 serving as the section display will be described with respect to the bonus winning just before the end of the advantageous section, particularly the bonus winning just before the end of the challenge mode. FIG. 265 is a diagram showing a state of winning a specific combination during the challenge mode, and FIG. 265 (a) shows a case where the selected specific combination is a double combination with a bonus such as a strong cherry duplication 1 and the like. FIG. 265 (b) shows a case where the selected winning combination is not an overlapping combination with a bonus such as strong cherry. As already described, the challenge mode is a mode in which the winning probability for the attack mode or the like is higher than that in the normal mode, and is also referred to as a so-called chance zone (CZ). If the challenge mode does not win a lottery for shifting to the attack mode within a predetermined number of games, the challenge mode ends.

  FIG. 265 (a) shows a case where a specific combination is won in a game at tm2 before tm3 when the challenge mode ends when the challenge mode is started at tm1. As already described, the challenge mode is included in the advantageous section, and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is started at the time of the specific combination winning (tm1) that becomes a trigger for the transition to the challenge mode.

  As described above, the specific combination won in the tm2 is, for example, a combination with a bonus such as a strong cherry overlap 1 or the like, and here, it is assumed that the winning lottery based on the strong cherry overlap 1 is won. To do. Then, the sign mode is set based on the bonus winning or the attack mode winning. For example, when the precursor mode or continuous production set at tm2 starts from tm2 and continues to tm4 after tm3, which is the end game of the challenge mode, bonus winning and attack in the game of tm4 Winning notification of mode win is performed. Then, a transition is made to the bonus state at tm4, and the attack mode is entered after tm5 when the bonus state ends.

  In this case, although the challenge mode ends at tm3 as described above, since the attack mode winning flag is set, the display end process of the section display is not performed in the section display second process. That is, the display of the section display started at tm1 does not end at tm3, and continues after tm5.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 265 (b), although a specific combination is won at tm2 in the challenge mode, the specific combination is not a duplicate combination with a bonus and is selected for a lottery for shifting to the attack mode. Absent. However, even if the specific role of tm2 in FIG. 265 (b) is triggered, the pseudo precursor mode may be set (FIG. 53). For example, the precursor mode or continuous performance set in tm2 When starting from tm2 and continuing to tm4 after the challenge mode end game tm3, a bonus non-winning or an attack mode non-winning notification is performed in the game of tm4 (winning notification is performed). Not)

  In this case, in FIG. 265 (b), although the challenge mode ends at tm3, since the attack mode winning flag is not set, in the section display second process, the section indicator is displayed at the tm3. Termination processing is performed. That is, in the continuous production starting from tm2, the section display is displayed until tm3, but tm3 to tm4 are not displayed. In other words, in comparison with that of FIG. 265 (a), in FIG. 265 (b), the display of the section display is ended at the end of the challenge mode of tm3, so that the end of the continuous production (tm4) Without waiting, it becomes clear that the lottery of tm2 was not won. Then, not only will it be determined that it is not winning, but the humor of the continuous performance that is being executed will stand out, and there is a possibility that the degree of attention to the performance, including other effects, will be greatly reduced. .

  FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing a precursor setting process when a duplication target combination is won in the challenge mode in the present modification. Here, the duplication target combination is a duplication result such as strong cherry duplication 1, 2 or weak cherry duplication 1, 2, etc., which is a winning combination with the first BB or the second BB, and duplication with the first BB or the second BB in the duplication result. It is a result including a non-overlapping result to be selected (strong cherry 1 and 2 are duplicate results, strong cherry is a non-overlapping result, and weak cherries 1 and 2 are duplicate results, and a weak cherry is a non-overlapping result). The sign setting process at the time of winning the duplication target role in the challenge mode is, for example, a process performed when the above-mentioned duplication target role is won in the lottery result handling process in the challenge mode, regardless of whether or not the bonus is won. This is a process for setting the precursor mode. In other words, this is a process for setting both the precursor mode based on the bonus winning and the pseudo precursor mode based on the bonus non-winning. As in the case of the above-described modification 20, the processing for setting various precursor modes of the first specific combination process to the third specific combination process overlaps with the precursor setting process at the time of winning the duplication target combination in the challenge mode. However, the sign mode set in the sign setting process at the time of winning the duplication target role in the challenge mode is given priority.

  In step S15901, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the duplicate target combination. If it is not a duplication target combination, the sign setting process is terminated. If it is a duplication target combination, a process for acquiring a precursor table is executed in step S15902, and a lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S15903. Such processing is the same as the processing in steps S15802 and S15803. Note that the number of precursor games set in the precursor table is also as described above, and the number of precursor games to be selected differs depending on the game result or the like.

  In a succeeding step S15904, it is determined whether or not the current duplication target combination is a duplication result with the first BB and the second BB. If the result is an overlap with the first BB or the second BB, in step S15905, the information on the number of precursors determined in step S15903 and the information on the bonus winning (the previous mode is the bonus winning) The precursor command including the information indicating that it is the precursor mode for performing notification) is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the precursor setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S15904 that the current duplication target combination is not a duplication result with the first BB or the second BB but a non-duplication result, the process proceeds to step S15906. In step S15906, the number of remaining games in the current challenge mode is compared with the number of precursor games determined in step S15903 to determine whether the number of precursor games is greater than the number of remaining games in challenge mode. To do. In other words, the process of step S15906 is a process of determining whether or not the game in which the result of the previous sign mode is notified (the sign counter is 0 and the winning notification or the non-winning notification is performed) is in the challenge mode. . If the result notification is in the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S15905, where information on the number of precursor games determined in step S15903 and information on the bonus non-winning (the previous mode is a bonus non-winning notification) The sign command including information indicating that the sign mode is used for performing the display is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the sign setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S15906 that the warning mode result notification is performed after the challenge mode, in step S15907, the number of remaining games in the challenge mode is subtracted from the number of warning games to calculate the number of difference games. I do. In step S15908, a process of adding the difference game number calculated in step S15907 to the challenge mode continuation number is executed. With this process, the challenge mode is extended by the number of the difference games.

  In a succeeding step S15909, a process for setting the addition CM pseudo end command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The display control device 81 that has received the added CM pseudo end command performs control so that the effect in the challenge mode for the amount added in step S15908 is not performed. In other words, the above-mentioned added CM pseudo end command is such that the number of games in the challenge mode is substantially extended, but it seems that it is difficult to grasp or difficult to grasp that the challenge mode has been extended. It is a command to do.

  In addition, in this modification, when a continuous production is performed during the challenge mode, it is possible to determine whether the challenge mode is being performed from the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 (for example, together with the display content in the continuous production). , The display in the challenge mode is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65), and the above-described addition CM pseudo end command makes it possible to grasp whether or not the challenge mode is in the continuous production. It can be said that it is a command for preventing display. On the other hand, when continuous production is performed during the challenge mode, a configuration in which it is not possible to grasp whether the challenge mode is in effect or not from the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 (in the above example, during the continuous production, the challenge mode is in progress. In other words, the addition CM pseudo end command can be omitted.

  The added CM pseudo end command only needs to transmit information to that effect to the display control device 81. For example, the information to that effect may be set in the precursor command.

  In the subsequent step S15910, an extra notification non-generation process is executed to prevent the extra notification from occurring when the difference game number is extended. In step S15910, for example, a process of setting a non-occurrence flag on the various flag storage areas 106d is performed. The addition non-occurrence flag is, for example, processing for preventing the challenge mode addition notification processing from being performed for the extension of step S15908 in the first specific combination processing. More specifically, although the extra notification based on the extension of step S15908 is not generated, the extra notification based on another opportunity (such as when a specific role is won in another game) is allowed.

  After executing the process of step S15910, the process proceeds to step S15905, where information on the number of precursor games obtained by adding the number of precursor games determined in step S15903 to the number of precursor games determined in step S15903, and the bonus non-winning. The warning command including the warning information (information that the current warning mode is the warning mode for performing bonus non-winning notification) is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the previous warning setting process is performed. finish.

  As a result of the above processing, as shown in FIG. 267, in the challenge mode started from tn1, in the case of winning a duplication target combination that is a non-overlapping result at tn2, if it is originally, it ends at tn3 The challenge mode that was supposed to be extended to tn4 after that. In this case, the precursor mode and the continuous effect set at tn2 are executed until tn4, and the display of the section display started from tn1 is continued until tn4. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the result of the continuous production becomes fully understood depending on whether or not the section display is displayed, and it is possible to suitably enhance the production effect during the challenge mode.

  Here, in order to avoid the phenomenon that the result of the continuous performance becomes fully understood depending on whether or not the display of the section display is continued, in addition to the configuration in which the challenge mode (advantageous section) is extended as described above, the challenge Although the mode (advantageous section) ends, a configuration in which only the display on the section display is continued is also conceivable. However, with such a configuration, despite the fact that the advantageous section is clearly indicated by the section indicator, it becomes meaningless, and the credibility itself of the section display is reduced. It can also be considered. On the other hand, the configuration in which the challenge mode itself is extended as in the above configuration, so that the effect of the continuous production can be suitably expected while ensuring the relationship between the advantageous zone and the zone indicator. It becomes possible.

  As described above, since the addition CM pseudo end command is output, among the tn2 to tn4 in which the continuous effect is performed, for the tn2 to tn3, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the challenge mode together with the continuous effect. A message indicating that the current mode is in the challenge mode is not displayed for tn3 to tn4. By doing in this way, when it is a duplication result winning as a duplication target combination, the production mode up to tm4 and the production mode up to tn4 become the same mode from the viewpoint of displaying whether or not they are in the challenge mode. Therefore, the result of the precursor mode (continuous production) of this time cannot be determined. Thereby, the production effect of continuous production is further enhanced.

  When the challenge mode is extended, the extra notification is not generated, so that the player will be informed by the extra notification that the extension has been made in accordance with the continuous production. be able to.

  In the above configuration, as a duplication target combination, whether or not to perform the challenge mode extension process depending on whether the result of duplication with the first BB, the duplication result with the second BB, or the non-duplication result, As a result, even if it is a duplicate result, winning in the attack mode or the like is not finalized. For example, if it is a duplicate result with the first BB, it is won simultaneously with the attack mode, while if it is a duplicate result with the second BB, the attack mode is entered. Events such as not winning simultaneously may also occur. Then, in step S15904, it may be determined that the result of duplication with the bonus is affirmative, and even when the challenge mode is not extended, the display of the section display may end when the challenge mode ends. . In other words, even if the display of the section indicator ends during the continuous performance, the winning notification may be performed as a result of the warning mode or the continuous performance. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to eliminate the phenomenon of having no expectation at all even if the display of the section display is finished, and to make the continuous production more enjoyable.

<Modification 22>
In the present modification, the advantage of the challenge mode that is extended when setting the precursor mode based on the non-overlapping result winning in the modification 21 is changed. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing a precursor setting process when a duplication target combination is won during the challenge mode in the present modification.

  This modification is substantially the same as the precursor setting process of Modification 21, except that the difference game number is calculated by subtracting the remaining game number in the challenge mode from the precursor game number in step S16007. Thereafter, in step S 16008, the difference game number is not added to the challenge mode continuation number, but the difference game number is added to the continuation number of the second challenge mode different from the current challenge mode.

  The second challenge mode is a challenge mode that is set to be less advantageous for the player than the normal challenge mode (also referred to as “first challenge mode” for comparison in the following description). is there. More specifically, the winning probability in the attack mode is set to be lower in the second challenge mode than in the first challenge mode (see FIG. 269 (b)).

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 269 (a), when a duplication target combination is won at tо2 in the first challenge mode started at tо1, and the duplication target combination is a bonus non-winning, as described above. In step S16008, the extension process of the second challenge mode is performed.

  As a result, when the first challenge mode is ended at tо3, the second challenge mode is continued until tо4 at which the continuous production started from tо2 ends. In this case, although the second challenge mode from tо3 to tо4 is an advantageous section, the advantage for the player is set lower than that of the first challenge mode, and the player's advantage is unfairly set due to the circumstances of production. It is possible to avoid an event in which the result of the continuous performance becomes completely understood depending on whether or not the display of the section display is continued while suppressing the height from becoming too high.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 269 (b), in the second challenge mode, the winning probability of the transition lottery to the attack mode from the attendance mode is high, and the winning probability of the transition lottery to the attack mode from the first challenge mode is high. Although set to be lower, in practice, the winning probability of the attack mode transition lottery in the second challenge mode is set to be substantially the same as or comparable to that in the normal mode. In this way, while the second challenge mode can be processed as an advantageous section, the configuration in which the second challenge mode is added from the viewpoint of production is almost advantageous compared to the case where it is not added. It is possible to prevent the change from occurring.

<Modification 23>
In this modification, the lighting start condition of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is changed. That is, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, basically, the lighting process is performed until the game won in the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section is the start game and the next game after the start game becomes playable. Is configured to be performed. That is, it is possible to clearly grasp whether or not the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is won by whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is lit. However, in such a configuration, as shown in the modified example 21 and the like, the result of the effect that is being executed depending on whether or not the display of the section display is continued even in the lottery during the advantageous section is fully understood. There are also inconveniences such as that, and the same inconvenience may also occur with regard to the transition lottery to the advantageous section depending on whether or not the display of the section indicator is started.

  Therefore, in this modification, the display start timing of the section indicator is a situation in which the push order notification can occur in the advantageous section and the net increase number is positive (the SIM payout rate is greater than 1). A game in which a start condition is satisfied. In this case, in the above configuration, basically, the start condition is satisfied in the game in which the attack mode start effect is performed (game in which the attack mode is started) (see FIG. 51). More specifically, the attack notification flag is set by the attack mode winning notification, and various push order notifications are generated (FIGS. 36 and 38), and the net increase is positive by shifting to the second RT state (FIG. 216), the attack mode is started, and the display start condition of the section indicator is satisfied. In other words, even if the advantageous mode is started after winning the challenge mode, the display on the section display is not started.

  In addition, for example, when the bonus such as the first BB and the attack mode are simultaneously won, the bonus increase is positive, but the slot machine 10 does not notify the push order during the bonus state. Thus, after the push order notification is generated at the end of the bonus (after the attack mode winning notification is performed), the display start condition of the section indicator is established. Also, even if you win the attack mode lottery in the bonus state, the push order notification will occur because the number of net increase is positive in the bonus state, but the push order notification is not possible. The display start condition of the section indicator is satisfied at the end of the bonus to be obtained.

  That is, the situation where the push order notification can occur is the first start condition, the situation where the net increase is positive is the second start condition, and after the transition to the advantageous section, the first start condition and the second start condition Based on the fact that the condition is satisfied, the display of the section indicator is started. In this modification, the first start condition and the second start condition need not be satisfied simultaneously (in the same game), and after the first start condition is satisfied, When the start condition is satisfied, the display of the section display may be started, or after the second start condition is satisfied, the display of the section display may be started when the first start condition is satisfied. Good configuration. By doing in this way, the freedom degree of the display start game of an area indicator can improve significantly, and it can become a structure very useful in order to eliminate the inconvenience on said production | presentation.

  In the bonus winning during the challenge mode, the display of the section display is not started during the challenge mode as described above, and the display of the section display is not started even when the bonus is won. The inconvenience in the production shown in is not caused.

  However, since the display start timing (start game) of the section indicator is different from the start timing (start game) of the advantageous section, the following inconvenience may occur.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 270 (a), it is assumed that the advantageous section is started by winning the challenge mode at tp1, and then the attack mode is started at tp2, so that the display of the section indicator is displayed. When started, it is possible to continue the advantageous section up to tp3 where any forced termination condition is satisfied. In this case, in the advantageous section from tp1 to tp3, the section (substantial increase section) in which the medal increase can be substantially expected by the push order notification is tp2 to tp3.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 270 (b), even if the transition of the advantageous section is the same as that of FIG. 270 (a) at tp1, the tp2 at which the attack mode is started after the transition to the advantageous section is shown in FIG. ) Is slower than the case. Then, in the advantageous section from tp1 to tp3, the substantial increase section from tp2 to tb3, which is a section in which the medal increase can be substantially expected by the push order notification, is also shorter than that in FIG. 270 (a). That is, the length of the substantial increase section differs depending on the length of the section from tp1 to tp2, and even if the attack mode is started at tp2, FIG. 270 (a) and FIG. 270 (b) The player's advantage is potentially different.

  FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the section display first process in the present modification.

  That is, in step S16101, it is determined whether or not the section display is being displayed. If it is not displayed, the process advances to step S16102 to perform processing for determining whether or not it is in an advantageous section. More specifically, it is determined whether or not a transition upper limit to the advantageous section has been established or has already been transitioned. If it is not in the advantageous section, the section display first process is terminated as it is. If it is during the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S16103.

  In step S16103, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section start process has already been performed by determining whether or not the advantageous section game number AG is being measured. If it is before the start of the measurement of the advantageous section game number AG, an advantageous section start process is performed in steps S16104 to S16106.

  That is, in step S16104, processing for starting the measurement of the advantageous section game number AG is performed. In step S16105, processing for starting measurement of the number of pre-start games MG provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. The pre-start game number MG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games after the advantageous section transition and before the start of display of the section display, and corresponds to the number of games from tp1 to tp2 in FIG. Thereafter, in step S16106, an output start process of the winning signal is performed. The winning signal is a type of output signal for performing external output from an external terminal connected to the main control device 101 to a hall computer, hall data equipment, or the like. The WIN state and the HI state are set as the output state of the winning signal, and the hall computer or the data device can specify the switching and state of the winning signal. In step S16106, the winning signal is switched from the LOW state to the HI state, thereby causing the hall computer or the data device to specify that the advantageous section has started.

  When it is determined in step S16103 that the advantageous zone start process has already been executed, or after the start process is executed in step S16106, the process proceeds to step S16107. In step S16107, it is determined whether or not the display start condition of the section indicator is satisfied. More specifically, the attack notification flag is set as a situation where the push order notification can occur as the first start condition, and further, the situation where the net increase is positive as the second start condition, that is, When the transition to the second RT state occurs or the transition to the bonus state occurs, it is determined that the display start condition is satisfied. If the display start condition is not satisfied, the section display first process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the display start condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S16108, and processing for starting the display of the section indicator is performed in steps S16108 to S16110.

  That is, in step S16108, the lighting process of the eighth display segment N8 is performed as the display start process of the section indicator. In a succeeding step S16109, a process for changing the prediction condition of the remaining number management process is performed. More specifically, in the process of calculating the total expected increase number SM (prediction process, step S 13202, step S 13203), the expected increase / decrease number KM that is the basis thereof is changed to a value different from the previous value. In this case, the expected increase / decrease number KM before the start of the display of the section display is set to the net increase in the low RT state (about −1.05 or about −0.44, see FIG. 216). Based on the expected increase / decrease number KM, the prediction process is performed as a net increase in the high RT state. In this way, by reflecting the subtraction of the previous section on the predicted number (total expected increase number SM), it is possible to calculate the predicted number more accurately.

  In subsequent step S16110, the winning signal output stop processing is performed. More specifically, by switching the output state of the winning signal from the HI signal to the LOW signal, the hall computer or the data device can specify that the display of the section display has started after the start of the advantageous section. In step S16111, display signal output processing is performed, and then the first section display first processing is terminated. Similar to the winning signal, the display signal is a type of output signal for external output from an external terminal connected to the main control device 101 to a hall computer, hall data equipment, or the like. The display signal is set to a LOW state and an HI state as its output state, and the hall computer or data device can specify the switching and state of the display signal. In step S16111, by switching the display signal from the LOW state to the HI state, the display of the section display is started, and the hall computer or the data device is specified that the above-described substantial increase section is started.

  If it is determined in step S16101 that the section display is being displayed, the display section continuation process is performed in step S16112, and then the section display first process ends.

  Next, the section display second process in this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S16201, it is determined whether it is in an advantageous section. If it is not in the advantageous section, the section display second process is terminated as it is. If it is during the advantageous section, an addition process of the advantageous section game number AG is executed in step S16202. In the subsequent step S16203, an update process of the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is executed. These processes are as described above.

  In step S16204, it is determined whether the section display is being displayed. The case where a negative determination is made in step S16204 is a situation before the start of the display of the section display even during the advantageous section. In this case, the pre-start game number MG is added in step S16205. Specifically, in accordance with the digestion of the current game, a process of adding 1 to the pre-start game number MG is executed. In a succeeding step S16206, a process of setting the pre-start game number command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The pre-start game number command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp the information about the pre-start game number MG. The display control device 81 that has received the pre-start game number command The pre-start game number notification corresponding to the value of the pre-start game number MG is executed on a predetermined area (for example, the upper right corner) or a display unit different from the auxiliary display unit 65.

  If it is determined in step S16204 that the section display is being displayed, or after the pre-start game number command setting process is performed in step S16206, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S16207. In S16208, remaining number management processing is executed. The remaining game number management process and the remaining number management process are also as described above.

  In step S16209, it is determined whether any forced termination condition is satisfied. If any of the forced termination conditions is satisfied, in step S16210, the pre-start game number MG, the advantageous zone game number AG, and the advantageous zone increase / decrease number ZM are initialized, and in step S16211, It is determined whether or not the section display is being displayed. If it is being displayed, the display end processing of the section indicator is executed in step S16212. Specifically, a process for turning off the eighth display segment N8 is performed. When a negative determination is made in step S1621, or after executing the process of step S16212, a data initialization process is executed in step S16213. After that, the display signal output stop process is executed in step S16214, and then the section display second process ends. In detail about step S16214, the process which switches the output mode of a display signal from a HI signal to a LOW signal is performed.

  If it is determined in step S16209 that the forcible termination condition is not satisfied, the presence / absence of a winning flag in each mode corresponding to the advantageous section is determined in step S16215, and if it is not set, advantageous in step S16216. The presence / absence of each mode flag corresponding to the section is determined, and if the corresponding mode flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S16210 to execute the advantageous section end processing. These processes are as described above.

  A state in which a winning signal and a start signal are output and a display example of the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 273 (a), when the advantageous section is started at tq1, the output mode of the winning signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal. As a result, the hall computer and the data device can grasp the shift to the advantageous section. When the attack mode is started at tq2, the display start process of the section display is performed on the assumption that the display start condition of the section display is satisfied. In this case, the player can grasp that the player has shifted to the substantial increase section based on the eighth display segment N8. Also, in this case, the output mode of the winning signal and the output mode of the display signal are switched. More specifically, at tq2, the winning signal is switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal. At tq2, the display signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

  The display of the section indicator and the output of the display signal with the HI signal continue until tq3 when the advantageous section ends, and the display of the section indicator ends at tq3, and the display signal is switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal. .

  In the advance section after the start of the advantageous section from tq1 to tq2 and before the start of the section display, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays (starts) the number of previous section games as shown in FIG. 273 (b). A pre-start game number notification corresponding to the value of the previous game number MG) is performed, and an advantageous section game number corresponding to the advantageous section game number AG is displayed. Further, in the target section as the substantial increase section after the start of display of the section display from tq2 to tq3, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the above-mentioned number of previous section games as advantageous as shown in FIG. 273 (c). Along with displaying the number of section games, the number of target section games (displaying the number of attack mode continuations) is displayed.

  In this way, by shifting the display start timing of the section display device from the start timing of the advantageous section, the effect of the transition lottery to the advantageous section and the lottery transition to the substantial increase section is enhanced, and before the display of the section display is started. It is possible for the player to grasp the number of games in the advantageous section, and to play a game after understanding the degree of advantage in the substantial increase section when shifting to the substantial increase section. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the game while enhancing the effect of the game effect.

  Here, the display of the number of prior section games, the display of the number of target section games, and the display of the number of advantageous section games are configured to be managed on the display control device 81 side on the sub side. It is also possible as an effect to hide the display of the number of games or to display different from the corresponding section. That is, for example, in the challenge mode, when a continuous production occurs in a situation where the number of games in the previous section is displayed, the display of the number of games in the previous section can be hidden. Even during the continuous production, the display of the number of games in the previous section is continued, and even if the challenge mode ends (the previous section ends), the display of the number of games in the previous section may continue until the end of the continuous performance. Is possible. As a result, while ensuring the credibility of the advantageous section by the section indicator, it is possible to grasp the potential advantage of the advantageous section by displaying the number of games in advance section, etc. The degree of freedom can be greatly improved.

  In addition, because the winning signal is output externally in the previous section and the display signal is output externally in the target section, even if the display of the section indicator is not started, the game hall manager or the like is advantageous It is possible to clearly distinguish a gaming table that has shifted to a section from a gaming table that is not, and it is also possible to grasp the remaining degree of advantage in a substantially increased section after the display of the section indicator is started. As a result, for example, it can be used as a judgment material for the presence or absence of reset processing at the time of opening or closing of a hall, and even when a large number of medals are paid out at a predetermined game machine even during operation In addition, it can also be used as a judgment material when specifying whether or not it is an illegal act.

<Modification 24>
In this modification, the difference in the advantage of the substantial increase section (target section) depending on the game situation in the previous section in the modification 23 will be described.

  FIG. 274 (a) shows a case where the advantageous section is started at tr1 and the display of the section display is started at tr2. As already described, in the present embodiment, the first forced termination condition reaching the upper limit number of games and the second forced termination condition reaching the upper limit number of medals are set as the forced termination conditions of the advantageous section. In this case, the first forced termination condition is defined by the advantageous section game number AG counted from tr1, and the first forced termination condition is satisfied at tr4 when the advantageous section game number AG reaches the upper limit game number. . On the other hand, the second forcible termination condition is defined by the advantageous zone increase / decrease number ZM counted from tr1, but until the substantial increase interval of tr2 is started, the advantageous zone increase / decrease number ZM is basically negative. It becomes.

  That is, the advantageous zone increase / decrease number ZM is not the increase number from tr2 at which the actual increase interval starts, but the second forced termination condition is satisfied when the increase number from tr1 reaches the upper limit increase number, The number of increases from the start of the substantial increase section at tr2 to the reaching of the upper limit increase number is the addition of the decrease (α) from r1 to tr2 with respect to the upper limit increase number.

  Then, for example, in FIG. 274 (b), compared with the case of FIG. 274 (a), the start game (tr1) in the advantageous section is the same, but the start game (tr2) in the substantial increase section is shown in FIG. This shows that the case of 274 (b) is slower, and the amount of decrease in medals from tr1 to tr2 is more for β pieces in FIG. 274 (b) than for α pieces in FIG. 274 (a). In other words, in the case of FIG. 274 (b), although the number of games from the start of the advantageous section to the start of the real increase section is larger, the number of medals increases from the start of the real increase section to the upper limit increase number. 274 (b) is more than in FIG. 274 (a), and the advantage at the time when the substantial increase section is disclosed is that FIG. 274 (b) is more advantageous for the player. (2400 + α <2400 + β).

  However, as described above, even in the substantial increase section, when the upper limit number of games, which is the first forced end condition, is reached, the advantageous section is forcibly ended before the upper limit increase number is reached. Then, as the start of the real increase section is delayed, the number of medal increases until the upper limit increase number is not increased, and there is a reaching limit branch point (third branch point) at which the upper limit increase number can be reached. .

  The branch point of the reaching limit includes the number of games in the previous section, the net increase in number in the previous section (about -1.05), and the upper limit number of games in the substantial increase section calculated from the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section (1500). This is the number of games in the previous section when the total of the net increase number (about +2.46) in the substantial increase section is the upper limit increase number (2400). In this embodiment, it is 367 games. In this case, the number of medals decreased when the previous section has consumed 367 games is about 385, and the maximum number of medals that can be increased when moving to the substantial increase section is the upper limit increase number to about 385 above. It is about 2785 sheets including 2400 sheets.

  In other words, the maximum number of medals that can be increased when moving to the substantial increase section gradually increases until the number of games that become the reaching limit branch point in the prior section is exhausted. On the other hand, after the number of games that become the branch point of the reach limit is digested, the maximum number of medals that can be increased when shifting to the substantial increase section gradually decreases.

  FIG. 275 (a) shows a part of a flowchart of the section display second process in the present modification.

  Steps S16301 to S16303 are the same as the processes in Steps S16201 to S16203, and update processing of the advantageous segment game number AG and the advantageous segment increase / decrease number ZM is performed on the condition that the advantageous segment is in effect. In step S16304, it is determined whether or not the section display is being displayed, and it is determined whether or not it is the previous section. If it is a prior section, the pre-start game number MG is updated in step S16305. In step S16306, it is determined whether or not the pre-start game number MG has reached the reaching limit branch point.

  If the reaching limit branch point has not been reached, a process of setting the first pre-start game number command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S16307. In this case, as with the pre-start game number command, the display control device 81 displays the number of games in the previous section and gradually increases the maximum number of medals that can be increased when shifting to the substantial increase section. For example, as shown in FIG. 274 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays “Expecting the number of expected sheets!” As a notification that the situation is in progress.

  If the reaching limit branch point has been reached, a process of setting the second pre-start game number command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S16308. In step S16309, a transition process to the second challenge mode is performed. As shown in FIG. 275 (b), in the second challenge mode in the present modification, the winning probability of the transition lottery to the attack mode is improved as compared to the first challenge mode (the challenge mode before the transition process in step S16309). It is set as a mode. In other words, when the reaching limit branch point is exceeded, the maximum number of medals that can be increased when moving to the real increase section decreases, but the transition rate to the real increase section (attack mode) is higher than before. It becomes the composition which becomes. The display control device 81 that has received the second pre-start game number command displays the number of games in the previous section, and instead of gradually decreasing the maximum number of medals that can be increased when moving to the substantial increase section, As a notification that the rate of transition to the real increase section is improving, for example, as shown in FIG. 274 (b), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays “winning probability increasing!”. Do.

  As described above, if the advance section becomes long, the medal will decrease before the transition to the real increase section, so the advantage may be low in the advantageous section as a whole. The maximum number of medals that can be increased after the transition is increased as the previous section becomes longer. For this reason, it is possible to prompt the continuation of the game without giving up the game just because the lottery for the transition to the real increase section is not won easily (the transition to the real increase section is difficult).

  On the other hand, if the prior section becomes too long, the upper limit increase number cannot be reached in the substantial increase section from the relationship with the upper limit game number. In this case, as described above, the winning probability of the lottery transition to the real increase section is made higher than before, so that the transition to the real increase section can be made relatively easily, and the upper limit increase number is not reached. However, it is possible to complete the real increase section without giving up.

  In this way, after the start of the advantageous section, the game situation of the prior section before the start of the display of the section indicator takes into account the phenomenon that affects the advantage in the substantial increase section after the start of the display of the section indicator. By incorporating it into the gameability, it becomes possible to create an unprecedented gameplay.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, each embodiment and each modification mentioned above are not limited to the description content, All or some of the various structures shown in each embodiment, each modification, or each other embodiment and each modification are arbitrary. It is also possible to combine them. Moreover, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment and each modification mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications by combining some or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In these cases, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration that is a combination of each embodiment or each modification, and some or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) As an advantageous section, an attack mode in which the frequency of push order notification is higher than in the normal mode, a challenge mode in which the winning probability of the lottery for entering the attack mode is higher than in the normal mode, and a supermarket including an additional special zone The attack mode, the VB mode, and the modes that have been elected for each of these modes and before the transition are included, but at least those that include a mode in which the function related to the push order notification is improved compared to the normal mode. It is not limited to. For example, the challenge mode may not be set.

  (2) Although the VB mode as a pseudo bonus can be shifted only during the attack mode, it may be shifted even during the normal mode. In this case, when winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode, the winning game is set as the start game, and the display of the section display is started at a timing before allowing the operation of the next game of the start game. And it is sufficient. In this case, when the first BB or the second BB is won simultaneously with the VB mode, a game in which a winning to the first BB or the second BB is established may be set as the start game.

  (3) As a specific role that triggers a lottery or a lottery to move to an advantageous section, a small role with a medal payout such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc., and winning with these strong cherries, etc. Although specific replays having common aspects and overlapping roles of these small roles and specific replays and bonuses have been described as examples, the result of the lottery trigger is not limited to these results. For example, it may be configured to perform a single combination of a predetermined bonus, a lottery to shift to an advantageous section even in normal replay, and the like. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs a transfer lottery etc. based on the number of digest games, the cumulative number of points provided separately based on each result, etc. In any case, it is only necessary that the lottery or the like for the transition to the advantageous section does not cause a difference in the winning probability or the occurrence frequency according to the set value.

  (4) The winning mode of the game result for performing the lottery to move to the advantageous section is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration in which a winning combination is established in a common winning mode for any specific combination, or a configuration in which a winning mode is common among some specific combinations may be employed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure in which the winning aspect of the game result (for example, normal replay) in which a transfer lottery is not performed and the winning aspect of a specific combination are partly or in common.

  (5) Although the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display unit N9 are described as examples of the section display, the configuration of the section display is not limited to the above. The section indicator may be configured to explicitly display whether or not it is an advantageous section at least by switching the display mode. For example, the arrangement position and the size of the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display portion N9 The display mode (lighting mode) in the advantageous section may be different from the above. For example, the operation unit of the start lever 41 and a part or all of predetermined credit insertion switches 56 to 58 can be controlled to emit light, and the operation unit and credit insertion switches 56 to 58 emit light based on an advantageous section. It is good also as a structure which secures the function as an area indicator with a predetermined | prescribed operation part. As described above, the display of the section indicator is started at a timing prior to allowing the operation of the next game of the start game, and the predetermined operation unit is an operation target that is the end of the start timing. As described above, by displaying the advantageous section at or near the predetermined operation unit, it becomes easier to grasp the transition to the advantageous section.

  In addition, the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 may include a display unit having a section display function. In this case, at least the display unit having the function of the section indicator is preferably controlled by the main control device 101. The main control unit 101 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 itself, and the function of the section display unit is controlled. The main control device 101 may be configured to control the display unit together with the display unit.

  In addition, as a section indicator, an accessory that can be displaced between a predetermined first position and a second position that is different from the first position is provided at a position where the player can visually recognize it (for example, the front portion of the gaming machine). It is notified whether or not it is an advantageous section by a display mode including the bonus item by arranging the bonus item in the first position and a display mode including the bonus item by arranging the bonus item in the second position. It is good also as a structure.

  (6) A plurality of section indicators may be provided in addition to the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display unit N9. That is, the structure provided with one area indicator may be sufficient, and the structure provided with two or more may be sufficient. In the case where a plurality of sections are provided, it may be combined with a section indicator having another configuration such as the above (5).

  (7) About the section indicator, it is good also as a structure which changes the alerting | reporting aspect of the predetermined alerting | reporting means which adjoins to the said section indicator thru | or adjacent to a section indicator according to the display aspect of a section indicator. Examples of the predetermined notification means associated with the section display include, for example, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 associated with the eighth display segment N8 as the section display in the instruction monitor 68. Can be mentioned. Further, examples of the predetermined notification means adjacent to the section indicator include the auxiliary display unit 65 and the payout number display unit 62.

  For example, after the section indicator is configured to be able to start display at a predetermined timing, the predetermined notification means is set as the first notification mode at the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing different from the predetermined timing. The predetermined notification means is a second notification mode different from the first notification mode. In this case, when the predetermined notification means is the first notification mode and the second notification mode may be grasped so that the display visibility and display content of the section indicator are different, Even if the display mode of the section display is not changed, the appearance of the section display can be changed.

  Furthermore, by combining the configuration for changing the display mode of the section display and the configuration for changing the notification mode of the predetermined notification means, it is possible to make the appearance of the section display more diverse.

  For example, the predetermined notifying means is constituted by a light emitting unit composed of a plurality of LEDs or the like, and the light emitting unit is arranged in a matrix (for example, a grid of x columns × y rows). Then, one element (for example, the element in the a-th column and the b-th line) in the matrix is replaced with a section display. When the section display of the a-th column and the b-th row is turned on, the a + n-th column to the a-n-th column, the b-th row, the a-th column, the b + n-th column to the b-n-th row around it. The light emitting unit is turned on and the light emitting unit on the outer periphery is turned off. In addition, when the section display of the a-th column and the b-th row is turned off, the a + n-th column to the a-n-th column, the b-th row, the a-th column, the b + n-th column to the b-n-th column around it. The light emitting parts are turned off and the outer light emitting parts are turned on (x, y, a, b, n are all natural numbers). By doing in this way, the section indicator used as one element in a matrix can be easily recognized by the relationship with the light emission part of another element. In addition, when the section display in the a-th column and the b-th row is lit up, the light-emitting units such as the a + 1-th column and the b-th row adjacent thereto are turned off and the other light-emitting units are lit up. In addition, when the section display in the a-th column and the b-th row is displayed in the off state, the light-emitting units in the a-th column and the (b + 1) -th row adjacent thereto are turned on and the other light-emitting units are displayed in the off state. By doing so, the lighting / extinguishing of the section display of the a-th column and the b-th row is turned on / off of the light-emitting unit of the a + 1-th column and b-th row and the light-emitting unit of the a-th column and b + 1-th row. It becomes difficult to distinguish and the section indicator that is one element in the matrix can be difficult to recognize due to the relationship with the light emitting units of other elements. In this case, the light emitting unit to be turned on / off instead of the section indicator is not limited to the light emitting unit adjacent to the section indicator. For example, which light emitting unit is to be displayed on / off. It is good also as a structure determined at random by lottery etc.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which makes the said other predetermined alerting | reporting means differ with the alerting | reporting aspect in a start game, and the alerting | reporting aspect in an advantageous area.

  (8) The brightness of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display and the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine are increased, and the section display is made more than other display sections (the surrounding display section and other predetermined notification means). Although it is configured to improve the visibility of the display, when displaying the section display, the brightness and illuminance of other display units (surrounding display units, other predetermined notification means) are reduced to make it visible May be improved. Further, the difference in brightness and illuminance from other display units is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, 10 times the brightness and illuminance.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which improves visibility by the relationship with the display color of another display part. That is, by making the emission color of the section display and the display color (light emission color) of the other display section, for example, a complementary color (opposite color), the visibility of the section display or other display section is improved. It is good also as a structure to make it easy (to make distinction easy).

  On the contrary, it is good also as a structure which makes the brightness and illumination intensity reverse relationship of said relationship, and reduces the visibility of an area indicator. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the section display to be visually recognized, to make it difficult to notice that the display is being performed, and to improve the effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Since the visibility of the display unit is increased, the degree of attention to other display units can be improved. As for the display color, for example, the display color of the section display and the display color (light emission color) of the other display section have a similar color relationship, so that the section display section and other display sections can be distinguished. It becomes difficult to attach, and it is possible to enhance the impression that the section display device and the other display units are integrated production devices that are related to each other.

  (9) The display start mode table of the section display is not limited to the above. For example, in addition to the game result that triggered the display start, the table may include parameters such as the number of times of winning the bonus on the current day or a plurality of days, the number of times of transition to the advantageous section or the number of times of winning, and the like based on these parameters. The display start mode may be different. In this case, for example, a display start mode table that makes it easier to predict the contents and set values of the advantageous section as the number of bonuses or advantageous sections for the current day or a plurality of days increases, matches the progress of the game. As a result, it becomes easier to predict game contents and set values gradually, and it is possible to realize the game characteristics as if the player nurtures the effect contents of the gaming machine.

  (10) In a configuration in which the display start mode of the section indicator is set according to the contents and the degree of advantage of the advantageous section, the contents and the degree of advantage of the advantageous section are 1: 1 without going through the lottery of the display start mode. It is good also as a display start mode matched.

  (11) The display end mode table of the section display is not limited to the above. For example, not only the contents of the advantageous section at the end but also the number of digested games at the end (value of the advantageous section game number AG) may be included as a parameter, or the time at the end may be included as a parameter. In addition, it may be configured to include the time at the start of the advantageous section as a parameter, or may be configured to include the length of time required to digest the advantageous section as a parameter, and the display end mode is different based on these parameters. It is good to do so. For example, in the case of a configuration that includes the number of digested games at the end as a parameter, information that is more useful to the player can be provided as the number of digested games increases (the more benefits obtained during the advantageous section). The display end mode table may be a display end mode table that can provide useful information to the player as the number of digested games is smaller (the advantage obtained during the advantageous section will be less). Also good.

  (12) In the display end mode table of the section display device, information useful for the player can be presented, but the configuration according to the display start mode table may be applied. That is, it is good also as a structure by which a setting value etc. can be shown as information useful to a player by the display start aspect of an area indicator.

  (13) As information useful for the player presented at the end of the display of the section indicator, information related to the setting value has been described as an example. For example, as a configuration in which advertisements and advertisements of game halls and other stores are presented Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which discount coupons, coupons, etc. of products are presented. In addition, in a configuration in which the display start mode table is changed in a specific state, when an advantageous display start mode table is selected according to the cumulative number of winnings such as bonuses or advantageous sections, or the cumulative number of non-winnings, the cumulative number is It is good also as a structure shown or suggested.

  (14) By setting a freeze state in the start game, it is configured to restrict the start of the next game of the start game, but as a freeze state that restricts the operation of the next game of the start game, It is good also as a structure which restrict | limits that the next game is started.

  (15) It is good also as a structure which generates a predetermined | prescribed effect in the freeze state in a start game. For example, specific rotation control for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in reverse or low speed during the freeze state is performed, or a predetermined pattern combination (for example, “red” is set at the end of the freeze state after performing the specific rotation control. 7 "symbol alignment) may be configured to generate an effect that stops or temporarily stops on a predetermined line (for example, the middle line L2). In this case, depending on the length of the freeze state period, that is, depending on the content of the advantageous section when the display of the section indicator starts, the degree of advantage, etc. It is good also as a structure which changes the aspect of rotation control, the kind of predetermined pattern combination (for example, "red 7" symbol alignment and "black BAR" symbol alignment) to stop or temporarily stop, and predetermined to stop or temporarily stop It is good also as a structure which makes the kind (for example, upper line L1 and middle line L2) different.

  (16) In the configuration in which the length of the freeze state period is set in accordance with the content or advantage of the advantageous section or the display start mode of the section indicator, the freeze state is generated a plurality of times. The total length of the freeze state period may be associated with the content or advantage of the advantageous section or the display start mode of the section indicator. You may be matched with the content thru | or advantage and the display start aspect of an area indicator.

  (17) In the configuration in which the section indicator can be lit in a plurality of colors as in the ninth display unit N9, the display start mode is configured to change which color is set to the lighting state. It is good also as a structure which changes whether it makes a light extinction state in which color. In this case, it is preferable that the lighting state of white in the advantageous section in the end game is switched to the lighting state of the corresponding color and then turned off.

  (18) When winning a lottery for a transition to an advantageous section based on a combination of bonuses and a specific combination (for example, strong cherry overlap 1, strong watermelon overlap 1, etc.) Set the length of the freeze state period according to the content and advantage level of the advantageous section, and display the section until the next game operation is permitted after the carry-over state and the bonus winning game as the starting game The display of the container may be started. In addition, when winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section with the combination of the bonus and the specified role as a trigger, the game is later than the game won for the duplicate role and before the bonus winning game In addition to generating a freeze state in the game, the length of the freeze state period is set according to the content of the advantageous section, the degree of advantage, etc., and the section indicator is displayed until the next game operation is permitted with the bonus winning game as the starting game The display may be started. Furthermore, when winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section triggered by the combination of the bonus and the specified combination, the game is a game that is later than the game won for the overlapping combination, and a freeze state is generated in the bonus winning game At the same time, the length of the freeze state period is set according to the contents and the degree of advantage of the advantageous section, and the display of the section indicator is started until the operation of the next game is allowed with the bonus winning game as the starting game. It is good also as a structure. In the configuration in which the freeze state is generated during the carry-over state, the freeze state may be generated a plurality of times in a plurality of games, and in this case, the total length of the plurality of freeze states is the content of the advantageous section or the advantage. It may be associated with the display start mode of the degree or section indicator, and the number of occurrences of the freeze state multiple times is associated with the contents of the advantageous section or the advantage or the display start mode of the section display. Also good.

  (19) When winning the lottery to the advantageous section based on the winning replay, the winning game of the winning replay is set as the start game, and the start operation of the start lever 41 is not the bet operation in the next game of the start game. Although the end of the start timing of the display is set, it may be configured to determine by lottery whether the end of the start timing is a bet operation or a start operation at the time of winning replay. A plurality of winning replays may be provided, and the betting operation may be terminated or the starting operation may be terminated depending on the type of winning replay. In this case, it is preferable that the stop appearance is different for each winning replay, and the stop appearance corresponding to another payout small part (for example, bell alignment) is stopped on a line different from the active line on the side where the start operation ends. If it is set as the structure to perform, the surprise effect with respect to starting the display of an area indicator based on start operation can be heightened more. Even in this case, it is more preferable that the start operation is allowed based on the bet operation.

  (20) Although the first BB and the second BB are used as a transition to the bonus state, a configuration may be adopted in which a transition is made to the bonus state based on the first BB or the second BB winning and a replay is given. In this case, since the re-game is given, when the first BB win is set as the start game, the start operation of the start lever 41 is not the bet operation of the next game and the end of the display start timing of the section indicator. It is also possible to do.

  (21) In the configuration in which the display start mode of the section indicator is determined based on the display start mode table for the specific state when the game state becomes the specific state, the transition condition to the specific state and the continuation condition of the specific state The parameter of (end condition) is not limited to the above. For example, as a parameter for the transition condition to the specific state, a configuration for performing transition setting or transition lottery to the specific state according to the number of games from RAM clear or power-on, or a normal section from the end of the previous advantageous section Configuration for performing transition setting or transition lottery according to the number of games, configuration for performing transition setting or transition lottery according to the number of games between bonuses, specific role, replay, small role, miss, bonus, advantageous A configuration in which transition setting or transition lottery is performed based on the number of winnings in a section or the like, the number of winning prizes or the number of transitions, and the like can be considered. Further, when determining whether or not these transition conditions are successful, the number of continuing games may be determined by lottery or the like, and the length of the determined number of continuing games may be changed according to each parameter. As a parameter of the continuation condition (end condition) of the specific state, a configuration in which the continuation setting to the specific state or the continuous lottery is performed according to the number of games since the transition to the specific state, the specific combination in the specific state, replay, There may be a configuration in which continuous setting or continuous lottery is performed according to the number of winnings such as a small role, losing, bonus, etc., the number of winnings or the number of transitions. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which the winning probability of a transfer lottery or a continuous lottery differs according to the frequency | count of transfer to a specific state, or the frequency | count of occurrence of a transfer opportunity.

  (22) When starting the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator at the start of the advantageous section, depending on the type of the advantageous section selected (either challenge mode, attack mode, or super attack mode) Although the display mode such as the display start timing and the display start emission color is made different, the display mode may be made different according to the number of continuing games in the selected advantageous section. For example, the number of initial games in the challenge mode, attack mode, and specialized zone is variable, and the initial number of games is determined by lottery or the like at the time of transition lottery (winning) of these modes. And it is good also as a structure which determines the display start aspect of an area indicator according to the determined initial number of games. When the display end mode at the end of the advantageous section is made different, the display end mode may be made different according to the length of the continued advantageous section. Further, in addition to the initial number of games, the display start / end mode may be made different according to a parameter for changing the advantage (for example, ease of transition to the VB mode in the attack mode). The display start / end mode may be made different depending on the combination of these parameters and the types of advantageous sections.

  (23) The trigger or end condition for transition to the special RT state is not limited to the above. For example, a specific combination with a medal payout (strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.), a duplicate combination of the specific combination with a bonus (strong cherry overlap 1, strong watermelon overlap 1, etc.), or a specific combination replaced with a specific replay In addition to the above, a configuration may be adopted in which any of these combinations is used. In addition, as a termination condition, the special RT state is configured to end based on the bonus prize when the bonus is overlapped. However, even when the bonus is overlapped, the special RT state is set by digesting a predetermined number of games or stopping the transition game. It may be configured to end.

  (24) In the configuration in which the lottery for the advantageous section is won based on the bonus overlapping role and the special RT state is shifted, the special replay in the special RT state is caused by the stoppage of the game that has become the bonus overlapping role. It is good also as a structure which makes a stop appearance different. For example, if there is a strong watermelon overlap 1 as the duplicate role, a strong watermelon prize (30th small role award) will be established in the game won for the strong watermelon overlap 1, and a strong watermelon If you missed out (if you have not won the 30th small role), the special replay will have different stopping points. For example, if you win a strong watermelon, you will win It is good also as a structure which makes the stop appearance of a special replay differ so that it may become easy to estimate the content and advantage.

  (25) In the configuration for shifting to the special RT state, the display control device 81 may be configured not to set the pseudo precursor mode as an effect. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not generate | occur | produce a continuous production.

  (26) With regard to the push order notification effect of the special replay winning during the special RT state, not only the stop appearance that becomes the black BAR temper, but also the stop appearance that becomes the black BAR double alignment and the stop appearance that becomes the black BAR single alignment. It is good also as a structure performed when notifying about the pushing order of eyes also after winning through the execution lottery of a pushing order notice.

  (27) Regarding the push order notification effect at the time of special replay winning in the special RT state, an upper limit may be provided for the number of times the push order notification effect is generated. For example, if the upper limit is set to once in one special RT state, and a corresponding stop event appears once by performing a push order notification effect such as black BAR double alignment or black BAR single alignment, It is good also as a structure which does not perform the same pushing order alerting | reporting effect at the time of special replay winning. In this case, when a stop appearance different from the executed push order notification effect appears due to a failure of the eye pressing operation or an erroneous operation of the stop order, the push order notification effect may be generated again.

  (28) A push stop notification effect at the time of winning a special replay in the special RT state causes a predetermined stop appearance (black BAR double alignment, black BAR single alignment, etc.) to appear and suggests the contents and advantages of the advantageous section In the configuration, the content and the degree of advantage of the advantageous section may be suggested based on the number of appearances of the predetermined stop appearance. For example, when the first number (one time) of black BAR single sets appears as a predetermined stop outcome, it is confirmed that the lottery for entering the challenge mode has been won, and black BAR as the predetermined stop outcome. When the second number (twice) larger than the first number appears, it may be determined that the winning lottery for shifting to the attack mode more advantageous than the challenge mode is confirmed. In this case, it is good to set it as the structure which changes the pushing order alerting | reporting effect at the time of special replay winning so that it may become a corresponding appearance number.

  (29) In the configuration for performing the notification release lottery with the specific role in the special RT state as an opportunity, the configuration is such that the release lottery is performed when the lottery to the advantageous section has already been won. Even if it is not, it is good also as a structure which performs cancellation | release lottery. In this case, if the release lottery is won when the transition lottery is not won, the push-out notification effect will be generated, but the stop event in which an advantageous section such as a stop event with black BAR double alignment will be established. It is good to be the structure which generate | occur | produces the press order alerting | reporting effect which does not appear.

  (30) In the configuration in which the notification release lottery is performed in response to the specific combination in the special RT state, the winning probability of the release lottery table is not limited to the above. For example, a uniform winning probability may be used regardless of the type of the specific combination. In addition, the number of wins for the specific combination in the special RT state may be stored, and the winning probability may be different depending on the number of wins. In this case, the cancellation winning probability may be increased as the number of winning times increases. Furthermore, the winning combination probability of the notification cancellation lottery may be different depending on the relationship between the specific combination that triggered the transition to the special RT state and the specific combination won during the special RT state, for example, the transition trigger As long as the specific combination and the specific combination won in the special RT state are the same specific combination (same index value IV), it may be configured that it is easier to win the notification release lottery than that.

  (31) In the configuration in which the notification release lottery is performed in response to the specific combination in the special RT state, the content notified after the release may be different from the above. Specifically, it may be the contents of the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section that has already been executed. For example, the transition to the advantageous section performed based on the game result before the result of the transition to the special RT state. The content of the lottery may be used, and the result of the transition to the special RT state may be a notification that the transfer lottery is not won or a notification that the transfer lottery has been performed.

  (32) In the configuration in which the notification release lottery is performed with a specific combination in the special RT state as an opportunity, the advantage section executed based on the game result (duplicate combination with the bonus) that has been a trigger for the transition to the special RT state As an example of setting the precursor mode as a configuration that makes it difficult for the contents of the transfer lottery to be notified in the game that has resulted in the game result, it is limited to be notified in the game that has resulted in the game result. Any configuration may be used. For example, the configuration may be such that notification is not performed in the game. In this case, the precursor mode may not be set.

  (33) In a configuration having a plurality of special RT states and different types of special replays that can be won in each special RT state, the winning probability of special replays may be higher than the winning probability of normal replays. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which wins only a special replay without winning a normal replay. In this way, the frequency (possibility) of special replays can be increased, and if a “black BAR” symbol is targeted in each game, a desired stop appearance can appear relatively smoothly. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game aiming at the “black BAR” symbol from being bored in each game.

  (34) In the configuration in which there are a plurality of special RT states and the winning probability of special replays that can be won in each special RT state is different, the types of special replays are not limited to the above. For example, the winning probabilities of special replay 3 may be varied. Also, the number of special replays that can be won may be multiple, not one, and in this case, the type of RT state is predicted by the difference in the winning probability of each special replay (by the balance of the winning probabilities) Therefore, it is good also as a structure which performs the game which predicts the content of an advantageous area. More specifically, for example, the special replay 3 is easy to win and the special replay 4 is difficult to win in the sixth RT state, and the special replay 3 is difficult to win and the special replay 4 is easy to win in the seventh RT state. You may do it. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can win a predetermined special replay only to a predetermined RT state. For example, the special replay 5 may be able to win only in the fifth RT state.

  (35) In a configuration in which the number of black BAR symbols in the special RT state indicating whether or not a bonus has been won and the contents of the advantageous section are suggested, if a bonus is won during a special RT state that is not based on bonus winning, the “Black BAR” symbol (Black BAR stop counter), notification scenario, and upper limit value may be reset.

  (36) In a configuration that suggests whether or not a bonus has been won and the contents of an advantageous section based on the stop appearance in the special RT state, the symbol to be stopped is not limited to the “black BAR” symbol, and the stop position is not limited to the middle stage. For example, when the stop position is an upper stage, a middle stage, or a lower stage, a plurality of corresponding symbols may be stopped on one reel.

  (37) A configuration in which a notification scenario is set according to the suggested content in a configuration that suggests whether or not a bonus has been won and the content of an advantageous section is set according to the number of stops of the corresponding symbol in the special RT state. It is not limited to things. For example, a plurality of types of notification scenarios may be set for one suggestion content, and one notification scenario may be selected from the plurality of types by lottery or the like. In this case, for example, a notification scenario that does not match the suggested content may be included in a plurality of types of notification scenarios, for example, there is a notification scenario in which the black BAR stop counter has an upper limit value of 2 although the bonus winning is suggested. .

  (38) A configuration in which the corresponding symbol count (black BAR stop counter) is subtracted by a predetermined trigger in a configuration that suggests whether or not a bonus has been won and the contents of an advantageous section based on the number of corresponding symbol stops in the special RT state It is good. For example, if the corresponding symbol is not stopped despite the notification of the stop order that allows the corresponding symbol to be stopped, the count of the corresponding symbol is subtracted. It is good also as a structure. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which subtracts the count of a corresponding symbol, when notification of the stop order which makes a corresponding symbol impossible to stop is performed.

  (39) In a configuration that suggests whether or not a bonus has been won and the contents of an advantageous section based on the stopping appearance in the special RT state, the type of bonus may be suggested. For example, the content of the suggestion may be different depending on whether the special RT state is based on the first BB or the second BB (for example, the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter or the notification scenario may be different).

  (40) The game state is shifted to the special RT state, and the stop appearance in the special RT state indicates whether or not a bonus is won and the contents of the advantageous section are suggested. It is good also as a structure which suggests the presence or absence of a bonus winning and the content of an advantageous area by a stop appearance in the 1st RT state. In this case, special replays can be won not only in the carry-over state, but also in the normal gaming state and the first RT state, and the state corresponding to the carry-over state and the fake special RT state (BB non-winning and advantageous zone non-winning) In the game after the specific combination winning), it is possible to generate a push order notification effect of the corresponding stop order based on the special replay winning. In other words, when the game result (specific role, duplicate role, etc.) that is the trigger for the transition to the special RT state is reached, the mode of the push order notification effect at the time of winning the special replay is different (from the predetermined stop appearance) It is good also as a structure which transfers to the mode which is easy to generate | occur | produce the push order notification effect which becomes.

  (41) In a configuration that suggests whether or not a bonus has been won and the content of an advantageous section depending on the number of stops of the corresponding symbol in the special RT state, the cumulative number of stops of the corresponding symbol over a plurality of games and the stop of the corresponding symbol relating to a single game Depending on the number, it may be configured such that the presence / absence of bonus winnings and the suggestion of the contents of the advantageous section are different, or the weight of the suggestion is different between the cumulative number of stops and the number of stops related to the single game. Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which a bonus win is confirmed when the cumulative stop count is 3 or more, when the stop count for a single game is 3, that is, the cumulative stop count corresponding to the bonus win in one game is cleared. In such a case, the bonus winning and the attack mode winning may be determined, or the bonus winning may be determined when the number of stops for the single game is 2 or more.

  (42) In the configuration in which the number of stops of the corresponding symbol is changed by changing the stop appearance of the special replay in the special RT state by the push notification effect, the number of corresponding symbols is 0 as the stop sequence of one special replay. It is good also as a structure which does not include the stop order which becomes.

  (43) In the configuration in which the number of stops of the corresponding symbol is changed by changing the stop appearance of the special replay in the special RT state by the push notification effect, there is one corresponding symbol as the stop sequence of one special replay. The first number (one) as described above and a stop order that includes one or more corresponding symbols and a second number (two) different from the first number may be included.

  (44) In a configuration that suggests whether or not a bonus has been won or the contents of an advantageous section depending on the number of stops of the corresponding symbol in the special RT state, the background color when the suggested contents are determined by the cumulative number of stops or the number of stops in a single game In addition to the change, it may be configured to perform a confirmed effect of the corresponding content. For example, in a configuration in which a bonus winning is confirmed when the cumulative stop number of the “black BAR” symbol is 3 or more, a bonus winning notification effect is generated in a game in which the cumulative stop number (black BAR stop counter) is 3. It is good.

  (45) As the special RT state, the total replay probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state. However, in any special RT state or in all the special RT states, the total replay probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state. The structure which becomes low may be sufficient.

  (46) In a configuration having a plurality of special RT states, the total replay probability in each special RT state is set to be the same probability, but the player's The same probability may be sufficient to the extent that it can be recognized as the same in the bodily sensation. More specifically, for example, if the difference in replay probability between special RT states is smaller than one tenth of the replay probability, it is considered that the same probability is recognized. The relationship with the total replay probability with other RT states (the second RT state and the third RT state) is also the same, and may not be the same probability but may be the same probability.

  (47) The advantageous section may be defined as follows. A section in which a push order notification corresponding to a winning relating to the maximum payout number occurs at least once. More specifically, in a push order bell in which 9, 3, or 0 medals can be paid out according to the stop order, a push order notification that causes 9 medals to be paid out occurs at least once. The section to become.

  (48) Even when the advantageous section ends without reaching the upper limit of continuation, the initialization process may be performed.

  (49) Even when the first BB or the second BB is elected alone, a configuration may be used in which an advantageous section transition lottery, an extra lottery, or the like is performed. In each of the above-described embodiments, the single winning of the first BB and the second BB is made so as not to cause a difference in the winning probability due to the set value. It is considered that no inconvenience occurs.

  (50) The first BB and second BB bonuses are configured such that the winning probabilities differ depending on the set values including the winning probabilities of overlapping roles. However, bonuses that do not differ depending on the set values may be provided. In this case, it may be configured such that a lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the like can be performed during a bonus carry-over state in which the winning probability does not differ depending on the set value. That is, a case where the lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the like is performed in the specific winning combination while being carried over may or may not be provided. In addition, the single winning of the first BB and the second BB is configured to have the same winning probability depending on the set value, but may be configured differently.

  (51) In addition to the first BB and the second BB, CBs (first CB to fourth CB) are provided as transitional combinations in which the small role probability can be changed by the transition of the gaming state. Other transitional roles may be provided. Other transitional roles include the ability to execute MB (middle bonus) with no limit on the number of smooth frames, REG (regular bonus) with less upper limit than the first BB or second BB, and one JAC game. SB (single bonus) or the like to be considered. Further, the upper limit acquisition number in each bonus is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit acquisition number in the CB state may be 3 less than 15 or 0.

  (52) Although the medal payout is not performed when the winning combination (first BB, second BB, CB) is won, the medal payout may be performed.

  (53) It is good also as a structure which performs the lottery, the lottery, etc. which shift to attack mode etc. during a bonus. In this case, the lottery will be performed at the time of winning the bonus or during the bonus without any difference in the probability or advantage of the winning lottery or additional lottery to the probability of winning, winning number, bonus attack mode, etc. It is preferable that these lotteries are not performed when a bonus is won.

  (54) The lottery is performed based on the lottery result with no setting difference so that the setting value does not cause a difference in the probability and the advantage of the lottery for transition to the attack mode or the like or the extra lottery. Although a lottery is performed based on a certain lottery result, a setting difference may not be generated by adjusting a benefit (winning probability such as a bonus or a transfer lottery or the number of added games) at the time of winning. For example, in setting 1, a winning combination with a probability of 1/100 is set, and in setting 6, a specific winning combination with a probability of 1/10 is provided, and the winning probability of the extra lottery in the attack mode at the time of the specific winning combination is set to 1 Is set to 1/2, and setting 6 is set to 1/20. By doing in this way, the total extra winning probability is 1/200 at any setting value, and there is no setting difference.

  (55) Although the content of the effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 has been mainly described as an effect by the other notification means of the section display part, another display part is provided as another notification means, and the effect is produced by such another display part. It is good also as a structure to generate.

  (56) By winning the lottery for the transition to the attack mode or the like and winning the extra lottery, an event that is advantageous to the player basically occurs. However, for example, a configuration for performing the lottery for the attack mode or the like may be adopted. And it is good also as a structure which performs the subtraction lottery of the continuation game number.

  (57) Although the game in the situation where the bet number is 3 has been mainly described, the above invention may be applied to a 1-bet game where the bet number is 1 and a 2-bet game where the bet number is 2. For example, the display start mode table of the section display unit is selected when the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section is won in the 1-bet game or the 2-bet game and when the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section is won in the 3-bet game. It is good also as a structure from which the display start aspect of an area indicator differs by making it differ.

  (58) Although the setting value suggestion is performed when an extra opportunity occurs in the situation where the excess flag is set, for example, as a zone that can be shifted during the attack mode, the setting value suggestion is performed rather than during the normal attack mode. It is also possible to provide a specific zone that makes it easier to perform the process, and to easily shift to the specific zone when an extra opportunity occurs in the situation where the excess flag is set.

  (59) Although the setting value suggestion is performed when an extra opportunity such as a specific winning combination occurs when the excess flag is set, the extra opportunity is not limited to the above. For example, an additional opportunity may be generated depending on the number of digested games in the advantageous section, or an additional opportunity may be generated depending on the number of small roles won, the number of winnings, the number of medals paid out, etc. in the advantageous section. It is preferable that the setting value suggestion is performed when the extra opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set.

  (60) When an extra opportunity occurs, instead of adding the number of games, the setting value is suggested. However, the setting value may be suggested after adding the number of games.

  (61) In the situation where the excess flag is set, when winning the mode transition lottery, such as challenge mode or attack mode, or attack mode to specialized zone, etc., the setting value is suggested after the mode transition. The mode may not be changed.

  (62) The setting value is suggested when an extra opportunity occurs when the excess flag is set. However, even when an extra opportunity occurs when the excess flag is not set, the extra value is added. If the lottery is not won, the setting value suggestion may be suggested. In addition, when the extra lottery is not won, it may be assumed that the extra lottery is won and the added game number is added to the total number of extinct games TEG or the like.

  (63) In the configuration in which the set value suggestion is performed with reference to the total number of disappeared games TEG at the time of forced termination, a configuration in which a display mode at the time of forced termination is taken into account may be adopted. For example, a set value suggestion table (a third special notification lottery table, a third special notification type table, or the like) is prepared depending on the display mode at the time of forced termination. In the case of forcibly ending during the specialization zone, the setting value suggestion may be easily generated with the total number of annihilated games TEG smaller than in the case of forcibly ending during the attack mode.

  (64) When a game that is forcibly ended occurs during a bonus, processing such as setting value suggestion may be different from when it occurs in a situation that is not during a bonus. For example, when forcibly ending in a situation that is not in a bonus, a setting value suggestion is performed in the game to be forcibly terminated, while in the case of compulsory termination during a bonus, a setting value suggestion is waited for the bonus to end It is good. Further, the processing for suggesting the set value may be varied depending on the type of bonus. For example, if a game that is forcibly terminated occurs during the first BB that has a common winning probability regardless of the set value, the set value is suggested, while the forced end is determined during the second BB that has a different winning probability depending on the set value. When a game is generated, a configuration in which no setting value suggestion is performed or vice versa may be employed. Alternatively, the setting value suggestion may be performed in the forced end game if the first BB is being performed, and the setting value suggestion may be performed after the bonus is completed if the second BB is being performed, or vice versa. When processing such as setting value suggestion is different, it may be configured to determine which processing is to be performed by lottery, and may have different winning probabilities.

  (65) The number of advantageous section forced termination games is not limited to the above number (1500), and may be more or less.

  (66) The extra lottery table and the extra game number lottery table are not limited to those described above, and may be configured to perform an extra lottery by other triggers (small role or replay). The number range, average, etc. are also arbitrary. For example, the number of games (2000 games or the like) exceeding the upper limit number of advantageous sections may be selected as the number of additional games.

  (67) In the situation where the excess flag is set, when an additional opportunity occurs, the setting value suggestion is performed as a compensation to present information useful to the player. However, information useful to the player As long as it is, it is not limited to setting value suggestion. For example, the above-mentioned advertisement or coupon may be used, or a configuration such as a rare image may be provided.

  In addition, when an extra opportunity occurs in the situation where the excess flag is set, the information of the push order notification at the time of winning the push order bell or the push order replay is different, so that information useful to the player is presented. It is good also as a structure where a privilege is provided. For example, the pushing order bells are a first combination in which one or zero medals are paid out, a second combination in which nine medals are paid out more than the first combination, and 15 more than the second combination. This is a combination of the combination in which the medals are paid out. In the normal section other than the advantageous section, the first winning combination is likely to be established if the push order notification is not performed, and the second or third winning combination is performed by performing the pushing order notification in the advantageous section. A configuration that facilitates establishment. Until the excess flag is set, the push order notification of the second role is easy to be performed, and after the excess flag is set, the push order notification of the third role is performed based on the occurrence of an additional opportunity. The configuration is easy. By doing in this way, it is also possible to provide a privilege when an extra opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set.

  In this case, when 3 bets are placed, an increase of 6 medals can be expected by winning the second role, and an increase of 12 medals can be expected by winning the 3rd role. An increase in medals can be expected. Therefore, when the push order notification for establishing the third winning combination is generated as described above, the number of games corresponding to two times of the push order bell winning is subtracted from the upper limit game number, and the subtraction is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which forced termination occurs at the upper limit number of games. In this way, it is possible to enjoy the advantage of ending the advantageous section early without substantially changing the total number of medals acquired.

  (68) The forced termination condition may be defined not by the number of games but by the total medal payout number or the total medal acquisition number (total medal payout number minus total bet number). In this case, the attack mode may be managed not by the number of games but by the prescribed number of total medals paid out and the total number of acquired medals (configuration in which the attack mode is terminated when the prescribed number is reached). Even when this occurs, it is preferable that the prescribed number increase process is performed instead of the number of games. For example, the advantageous section is configured to be forcibly terminated when the total number of acquired medals reaches 3000. Then, as a result of adding the prescribed number such as the attack mode, the excess flag is set when the prescribed number reaches 3000 sheets. With such a configuration, the total number of medals that can be obtained by the player even if a push order notification is given that results in a prize winning with a large number of payouts in the situation where the excess flag is set as in (67) above It is possible to receive the merit that the advantageous section can be ended with a small number of games while the advantage is not changed and the advantage is not changed.

  (69) The number of additions may be stored for each type of extra opportunity that occurs in the situation where the excess flag is set, and the lottery table or type table in the setting value suggestion may differ depending on the number of times. For example, if the strong cherry is won once after the excess flag is set and the weak cherry is won four times, the setting value suggestion when the weak cherry is won and the strong flag is set after the excess flag is set. Narrow down the set value when the winning probability or set value suggestion is made with the suggested value when the weak cherry is won in the situation where the cherry is won four times and the weak cherry is won once The configuration may be different in ease, and the latter may be a setting value suggestion that is more advantageous for the player (setting value suggestion that makes it easy to narrow down the setting value) because it is difficult to win a strong cherry Good.

  (70) In the configuration in which the set value suggestion is performed in consideration of the game situation of the day, the total number of games TG is initialized by changing the winning probability, that is, by clearing the RAM. However, it is good also as a structure initialized by power ON / OFF.

  (71) In the configuration in which the setting value suggestion is performed in consideration of the game situation of the day, information other than the total number of games TG and the time may be added as the game situation of the day. For example, it is good also as a structure which considers the elapsed time from power ON instead of or in addition to time. Further, for example, a configuration in which a bonus, the number of winnings of a predetermined small role, the number of winnings, etc. are taken into consideration may be adopted. A configuration that takes into account the number of medals inserted and the number of medals may be adopted. It is good also as a structure which considers the frequency | count of forced termination.

  (72) In the configuration in which the setting value suggestion is performed in consideration of the game situation of the day, the configuration in which the setting value suggestion is difficult to occur when the forced termination is performed at a relatively early stage or the low setting value suggestion is likely to occur. Although it is configured, it may be configured so that a high setting value suggestion is likely to occur when it is forcibly terminated at a relatively early stage, or a configuration in which a low setting value suggestion is unlikely to occur or a high setting value It is good also as a structure where an indication does not generate | occur | produce easily.

  On the assumption that the utilization rate in the morning or evening is high, the utilization rate by the player who expects the set value suggestion is assumed if the setting value suggestion is likely to occur if it is forcibly terminated during other daytime hours. Can be expected to increase. In this case, for example, the operating rate over the previous day or a plurality of days up to the previous day can be grasped from a built-in clock, a game number counter, or the like, and a setting value suggestion table (special notification lottery table) based on the operating rate Or a special notification type table) may be changed.

  (73) In the configuration in which the setting value is suggested in consideration of the game situation of the day, the data to be referred to as the total number of games TG is data that can be managed over a plurality of days, and a plurality of days when forced termination occurs It is good also as a structure which takes into consideration the game situation over. For example, the total number of games TG is not initialized even if the process of changing the winning probability is performed, and the setting value suggestion is taken into account by taking into account the total number of games since the game table was installed in the game hall. It is good also as a structure to perform. In this case, it may be configured such that setting value suggestion is less likely to occur / is likely to occur at the beginning of introduction (initial installation).

  (74) When the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the setting value is suggested in consideration of the game situation of the day. However, when the other advantageous states are forcibly terminated, the setting of the game situation of the day is taken into consideration. The structure which performs value suggestion may be sufficient. As another advantageous state, for example, when the bonus state is not only the number of payouts but other forced termination conditions are satisfied (for example, when a specific winning combination is won or when the specific winning combination winning is achieved, When the so-called puncture occurs, it is configured to end, and when the bonus state ends based on the forced termination condition being established before reaching the upper limit of the number of payouts, the setting value suggestion is performed in consideration of the game situation of the day It is good also as a structure.

  (75) The storage area for the advantageous section and the storage area for the normal section are provided in separate areas so as not to overlap each other, but it is sufficient that the CPU 102 can distinguish each other. It may be duplicated.

  As a configuration provided in separate areas, a configuration in which a RAM for an advantageous section and a RAM for a normal section are provided may be used instead of a configuration in which one RAM has a separate area. In this case, the CPU can access both RAMs, but the information in both RAMs may not be communicated directly (without going through the CPU).

  (76) Depending on the presence or absence of an excess flag, the configuration is such that the information when an extra opportunity occurs is stored in the storage area for the advantageous section or the storage area for the normal section. When an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where is set, a process of storing information based on the additional opportunity (number of additional games) in a predetermined area provided in the storage area for the advantageous section; In addition, at least before the initialization process is performed, the information stored in the predetermined area is stored again in the normal section storage area (total number of annihilation games TEG and number of annihilation games EG). It is good.

  (77) Although it is configured such that the information when an extra opportunity is generated depending on the presence or absence of an excess flag is stored in a storage area for an advantageous section or a storage area for a normal section, When this occurs, information corresponding to any storage area may be stored. Specifically, for example, when an additional opportunity occurs in the situation where the excess flag is set, the number of added games is added to the number of continuing games such as an attack mode, and the number of added games is the total number of games that have been eliminated. It is good also as a structure which performs the process which adds also to TEG and the number of annihilation games EG. Even in this case, the number of added games such as the attack mode added after the above excess flag is set is initialized by the initialization process at the time of forced termination, while the total number of annihilation games TEG and the number of annihilation games Since the EG is not initialized, the total number of annihilation games TEG and the like can be used in the normal section.

  (78) Information corresponding to an event occurring during the advantageous section is stored in the storage area for the normal section, and a special section is set in the normal section after the forced advantageous section based on the stored information. Although it is configured, the scene using information corresponding to the event that occurred during the advantageous section is not limited to the normal section after the forced termination. For example, it may be configured to be used when a transition is made again to an advantageous section after the forced termination (for example, a configuration in which a setting value suggestion is likely to occur in the advantageous section that has been transitioned again), or the power ON / OFF may be turned on after the forced termination. A configuration used when it is performed (for example, a configuration in which the setting value suggestion is likely to occur in the morning of the next day), or a configuration used during the bonus when the bonus is won after the forced termination ( For example, a configuration in which setting value suggestion is likely to occur during a bonus may be adopted.

  (79) During the special section, as a special notification, a push order notification effect for the special replays 1 and 2 occurs, or a short number of precursor games is selected when the bonus is won. The push order notification effect and the special notification as the number of short precursor games may be generated not only during the special section but also during other normal sections or advantageous sections. In this case, a configuration in which the probability of occurrence of a special notification is higher in the special section than in other normal sections or advantageous sections, a notification useful for the player (a push order notification in which the set value is easy to narrow down, and a short number of predictive games) It is preferable that the configuration is easy to be.

  (80) Although the disappearance game number EG and the total disappearance game number TEG are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as the special game number display unit TGH, they may be displayed on another display unit.

  (81) The special game number display unit TGH is configured to display the number of times corresponding to the number of added games as the total number of annihilated games TEG. For example, when the set value suggestion is generated by the value of the total number of annihilated games TEG Alternatively, the total number of annihilation games TEG serving as a threshold for the occurrence or non-occurrence may be 100%, and the percentage up to the total number of annihilation games TEG may be displayed on the special game number display unit TGH. In this case, every time the total number of extinguished games TEG is added, the percentage of the special game number display portion TGH approaches 100%, and it gives a strong impression that some benefit can be obtained by becoming 100%. Is possible.

  Further, the special game number display portion TGH may be a light emitting portion capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors, and may be configured to suggest that some benefit is obtained by the emitted light color (expect setting value suggestion to occur). In this case, as the light emission of a plurality of colors, a structure in which light is emitted in a color having a relationship corresponding to the expected degree of emission color of other general expected effects such as white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that some kind of benefit can be obtained by changing the emission color.

  (82) A configuration in which the number of annihilated games EG and the total number of annihilated games TEG are displayed on the special game number display unit TGH, and the setting value is not suggested by the total number of annihilated games TEG. It is good.

  (83) The configuration for displaying the price of invalidation due to forced termination by displaying the number of annihilated games EG and the total number of annihilated games TEG on the special game number display unit TGH is limited to forced termination of the advantageous section Instead, it may be applied to forced termination of other advantageous states. For example, a bonus (first BB, second BB, etc.) or a high probability state in which the winning probability in the VB mode is relatively high and a low probability state are set, and an upper limit is set for the number of bonuses in the high probability state or in the VB mode. Is provided. And, for example, if it is configured to be able to win multiple bonuses or VB mode by one winning, or to be able to win bonus or VB mode even during bonus or VB mode, Will also win the bonus and VB mode. In such a configuration, by displaying the bonus after reaching the upper limit or the number of winning times in the VB mode, the case where the upper limit is ended, that is, when the bonus or the VB mode after the upper limit is invalidated. Even so, it can be expected that some benefit will be obtained because the number of winnings after reaching the upper limit is displayed.

  (84) If there is an unannounced event in the situation in which the excess flag is set on the premise of an after-effect, if there is an unreported amount (if the later flag is set), the range of the unreported portion In this case, the number of games to be added is determined by referring to the additional game number lottery table at the normal time, but the added game number lottery table for the pseudo addition is used. It is good also as a structure which determines the number of games of pseudo addition. In this case, a pseudo-addition with a large number of games is likely to occur when there is a large amount of unreported information, and a pseudo-superimposition with a small number of games is likely to occur when there is a small amount of unreported information.

  (85) On the premise of a post-production effect, when an extra opportunity occurs in the situation where the excess flag is set, if there is an unreported part, if there is a pseudo-addition within the unreported part, In this case, the setting value suggests the case where the pseudo addition is performed beyond the unreported amount, but the setting value suggestion is performed within the range not exceeding the unreported amount. It is good.

  For example, when a pseudo addition of the number obtained by subtracting 10 as the first number from the post-addition counter BG occurs, settings 1 to 3 are suggested, and when a pseudo addition of the number obtained by subtracting 56 as the second number from the post-addition counter BG occurs. The setting 5 or the setting 6 may be suggested, and the setting 6 may be suggested when the pseudo addition of the number obtained by subtracting 77 as the third number from the post-addition counter BG occurs. In this case, the pseudo addition of the number obtained by subtracting each of the first to third numbers from the after-addition counter BG is not only generated as a setting value suggestion, but can be selected based on the normal addition game number lottery table. It will be a thing. For this reason, when a pseudo-addition of these times occurs, the setting value is predicted in consideration of whether it has occurred as a setting value suggestion, and the enjoyment of the prediction game is improved. .

  Furthermore, with the above-described configuration, the situation where the setting value suggestion needs to occur is that the post-counter BG needs to be greater than or equal to the first number to the third number. It becomes difficult to determine whether or not it is being performed, and the enjoyment of predicting the set value is improved.

  Needless to say, the values of the first to third numbers are not limited to the above values.

  (86) When an extra opportunity occurs in the situation where the excess flag is set on the premise of an after-effect, the target section is limited to the advantageous section even in the configuration in which the pseudo-addition is generated if there is an unreported amount. Instead, it may be applied to other advantageous states or sections. For example, a bonus (first BB, second BB, etc.) or a high probability state in which the winning probability in the VB mode is relatively high and a low probability state are set, and an upper limit is set for the number of bonuses in the high probability state or in the VB mode. Is provided. And, for example, if it is configured to be able to win multiple bonuses or VB mode by one winning, or to be able to win bonus or VB mode even during bonus or VB mode, Will also win the bonus and VB mode. In such a configuration, it may be further notified that the upper limit has been reached later, and if the bonus or VB mode is won in a situation where there is an unreported portion even if the upper limit has been reached, It is good also as a structure which performs a successful winning alert | report.

  (87) In the extra game number lottery process (FIG. 130) and the extra game number process (FIG. 132), it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set and whether or not the subsequent process is executed is different. However, if the excess flag is set in at least the previous number-of-games lottery process (FIG. 128), the number-of-games additional lottery has not been performed, and the additional determination will be made in the subsequent determination process. It is determined that it is not. Therefore, in the situation where the excess flag is set, it is practically not performed that the additional number-of-games lottery process (FIG. 130) or the additional number-of-games process (FIG. 132) is performed. In these processes, the excess flag determination process may be omitted.

  (88) Although a setting value suggestion is made as compensation for compulsory termination due to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, a set value is provided as compensation when the advantageous section is terminated compulsorily due to other factors that can be grasped in advance. It is good also as a structure which suggests etc. For example, when the game hall is forcibly terminated due to the closing time of the game hall (when the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section cannot be fully consumed within the business hours), the setting value suggestion may be performed.

  (89) The description has been made on the premise that the number of games can be added when a specific combination is won during an advantageous section. However, the number of games can be subtracted and added based on a predetermined opportunity such as a specific combination. It is good also as the game nature which can generate | occur | produce either of these, and it is good also as the game nature which can generate | occur | produce only a subtraction. If it is assumed that subtraction of the number of games can occur, even if the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less, the upper limit number of games is not necessarily reached, and the subsequent games can be more enjoyed. In this case, after shifting to the advantageous section, the number of remaining games exceeding the upper limit number of games is displayed, and when the upper limit number of games is reached, or when the game progresses to the upper limit number of games, the upper limit number of games is displayed. The remaining game number on the display may be subtracted.

  (90) At the time of push order bell or push order replay winning, the winning combination is different depending on the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the given privileges are different, and the stop order is notified. The advantage for the player varies depending on whether or not it is used, but any combination may be used as long as the player has a different advantage for the player by notifying the stop operation.

  For example, in the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel, the first symbol (for example, “black BAR” symbol) and the second symbol (for example, “red 7” symbol) cannot be aimed at the same time (at least five symbols apart). )Deploy. Then, a first symbol of the left reel 32L, a predetermined symbol (for example, “first replay” symbol or “second replay” symbol) of the middle reel 32M, and a predetermined symbol (for example, “first replay” symbol or the like of the right reel 32R) When the “second replay” symbol is stopped on the active line, the first result winning is established, and the second symbol of the left reel 32L and the predetermined symbol (for example, the “first replay” symbol or “ When the second replay symbol) and a predetermined pattern on the right reel 32R (for example, the “first replay” symbol or the “second replay” symbol) are stopped on the active line, the second winning result is established. The winning mode of the first result and the second result is set. In this case, if the stop operation is aimed at the first symbol when winning the first result, the first result winning can be established, but if the stop operation is aimed at the second symbol instead of the first symbol, the first result winning is It is not established and the corresponding privilege is not granted. Similarly, if the second result winning is performed by aiming at the second symbol when the second result is won, the second result winning can be established, but if the stopping operation is aimed at the first symbol instead of the second symbol, the second result winning is It is not established and the corresponding privilege is not granted. In addition, a specific combination for which either the first result or the second result will be won is provided, and which of the first result and the second result is won when the specific combination is won (the first symbol and the first result) It is possible to notify which of the two symbols should be aimed to stop the left reel 32L). Even in such a configuration, it is possible to win the result won by the notification (either the first result or the second result), and the advantage for the player changes depending on the presence or absence of the notification. Then, at least one of a mode in which such notification is likely to be performed, a mode in which the probability of transition to a mode in which the notification is easily performed is high, and a mode that has been won in the lottery for transition to these modes is before transition. A situation including any of the above modes may be used as an advantageous section, and a situation including at least one of the modes described above may be used as an advantageous section including the above modes and modes based on the pressing order.

  In addition, by performing black BAR eye-pressing notification (see FIG. 106) at the time of special replay winning, the configuration in which the 15th regame winning etc. is established instead of the first replay is notified by pressing order notification at each special replay winning. You may apply with respect to the structure which makes a stop output different.

  That is, even if the winning combination is the same, the stop operation for making the stop appearance different is not limited to the stop order, and any stop operation mode including the stop operation timing may be used. Is not limited to the push order notification, but may be a mode notification related to the operation mode.

  (91) In the configuration in which the display start mode of the section display device is made different depending on the result of the lottery opportunity when winning the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section, and the stop start and the display start mode of the section display device are associated with each other. The display start mode of the section indicator may be made different depending on the winning mode as a result of the lottery trigger or the presence / absence of winning. For example, a strong cherry with IV = 13 is set as an overlapping role of the 28th small role, the 32nd small role to the 35th small role, depending on which of these overlapping roles the strong cherry winning is achieved. The display start mode of the section indicator may be different. More specifically, the “cherry” symbols on the active line stop and the 28th small role is established and a strong cherry win is achieved, and the “cherry” symbols are not aligned on the active line. It is good also as a structure from which the display start aspect of an area indicator differs by the case where either 32 small part-35th small part is formed and it becomes a strong cherry prize. In addition, in a specific combination that can be missed, a section indicator is displayed when the specific combination winning is established at the time of winning the specific combination and when the specific combination winning cannot be achieved due to a failure. The display start mode may be different.

  In these cases, the section indicator is not started to be turned on until the stop of the circuit around which the winning mode, the stop-out, and the presence or absence of the missed branch will be branched. It is good also as a structure which changes the timing and aspect (color etc.) which start lighting after setting it as the structure which starts lighting an area indicator at timing. Specifically, for example, on the premise that the stop operation is performed in the order of the left reel 32L → the middle reel 32M → the right reel 32R, when the middle reel 32M is stopped, the winning mode and the like are branched (in a strong cherry) In the case of the 28th small role winning and the 32nd small role to 35th small role winning), the section indicator starts to light up after the middle reel 32M is stopped at the timing after the second stop OFF. A certain third stop ON time is set as a predetermined lighting start timing. When the stop operation is performed and the winning mode or the like branches to the first mode (the 28th small role winning side in the strong cherry), the lighting is started when the above-mentioned third stop is ON, When the mode or the like branches to the second mode (32nd small role to 35th small role winning side in the strong cherry), the lighting for change is not the lighting start timing specified above (when the third stop is ON). It is set as the structure which starts lighting at the time of 3rd stop OFF as a start timing. In this way, it is possible to provide enjoyment using the relationship between the success or failure of the eye-pressing operation and the timing at which the advantageous section winning can be recognized by the lighting start of the section indicator.

  (92) Regarding the advantageous section, the winning lottery probability and the benefits at the time of winning (transition mode, the number of extra games, etc.) are common regardless of the set value, but the winning probability is different depending on the set value. Also good. In this case, depending on the type of the result of the lottery, such as transition lottery, there is a difference between the probability due to the set value and the benefit at the time of winning, and the case where there is no difference between the probability due to the set value and the benefit at the time of winning. It is good also as composition to do.

  (93) In the indication monitor 68, the display mode of the push order information ("1" to "6") using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is not limited to the above. For example, as a push order, the winning combination depends on the stop switches 42 to 44 that are initially stopped, and the stop order of the second reel and the third reel includes a three-select push order that is not related to the winning combination. The first display segment N1, the sixth display segment N6, and the seventh display segment N7 are turned on, the push order information (display of “7”), and the first display segments N1 to N1. Push display information (display of “8”) displayed by lighting the 7 display segment N7, the first display segment N1 to the third display segment N3, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display A configuration may be adopted in which the push order notification of these three choices of push order is performed based on the push order information (display of “9”) displayed by turning on the segment N7.

  (94) In the instruction monitor 68, the timing of turning off the push order information using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is not limited to the time when the third reel stop is turned on. The push order notification only needs to be performed until the stop switches 42 to 44 to be grasped (the push order information only needs to be displayed). For example, the second reel stop ON operation may be performed, or the second reel stop OFF operation may be performed. Further, when the push order notification of the three-choice push order is performed, it may be at the time of the first reel stop ON operation or at the time of the first reel stop OFF operation. Further, the light may be turned off after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed since these operations.

  Further, the timing may be later than the time when the third reel stop is turned on, the time may be when the third reel stop is turned off, or a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) from the time when the third reel stop is turned off. The configuration may be such that the light is extinguished after a lapse of time, or at the end of the medal payout.

  (95) The instruction monitor 68 may also be used as the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, or the payout number display unit 62. In these cases, the push order notification is performed in the display units 60 to 62 at the timing when the push order notification is performed, while the original display of each display unit 60 to 62 is performed at the timing when the push order notification is not performed. It is good to have a configuration to do.

  In the case where the credit display unit 60 is also used, at least until the bet operation is performed, the credit display unit 60 displays the credit, and then the push order notification is performed (based on the operation of the start lever 41). The push order notification ends at least at a timing before the timing at which the number of medals acquired (paid out) increases (updates) in the game is updated (the medal payout starts) (the push order information is turned off). For example, it may be configured to end by the time of the third reel stop ON operation, and when the medal payout is started, the configuration is switched to the credit display.

  The remaining payout number display unit 61 is a display unit that displays the number of remaining payouts in the bonus. For example, the bonus state is a game that increases the medal by increasing the winning probability of a small role, There is a configuration in which notification is not performed (gameability different from that for increasing medals by pressing order notification), and a game in which the remaining payout number is displayed by the remaining payout number display unit 61 and a game in which the push order notification is performed. You may make it not overlap. In this case, the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 may be generated during the bonus.

  When the payout number display unit 62 is also used, it is preferable that the push order notification ends at a timing before the display of the number of payout medals of the game is started at least in the payout number display unit 62. For example, when the third reel stop ON operation is finished, the push order notification is terminated (the push order information is turned off), and when the payout combination wins, the payout number is displayed at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation. Good. Such a configuration may be applied to the remaining payout number display unit 61.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which performs pushing order alerting | reporting using these display parts 60-62. In the gaming panel 25, the credit display unit 60 is arranged on the left, the remaining payout number display unit 61 is arranged in the middle, and the payout number display unit 62 is arranged on the right side (FIG. 1). When the left stop switch 42 is to be operated, the credit display unit 60 is displayed. When the middle stop switch 43 is to be operated, the remaining payout number display unit 61 is displayed. When the right stop switch 44 is to be operated, the payout is performed. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports a pressing order, for example by displaying the number display part 62. FIG. In this case, as described above, from the time when the betting operation is performed to the time when the third reel stop is turned on, the display units 60 to 62 are notified of the push order for all the display units 60 to 62. However, when the original display function is secured, the period from the time when the bet operation is performed to the time when the third reel stop is turned ON is set as the period during which the display unit 60 to 62 performs the push order notification. In the period, it is preferable that the original display of each of the display units 60 to 62 is performed.

  (96) Although the number of continued games in the advantageous section is managed by the advantageous section game number AG or the like, for example, until a predetermined number of games are consumed (for example, 50 games) or a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, A configuration may be adopted in which one set is set until three replays are won, and management is performed according to the number of sets. Specifically, the attack mode is determined by setting a predetermined number of games (50 games) as one set, and the number of sets is determined by lottery at the start of the attack mode or at the attack mode shift lottery. Then, the attack mode is terminated when the determined number of sets is consumed. In this case, if the measurement conditions are met, such as during the attack mode, etc., when the specified conditions are met, an additional lottery will be performed as an additional lottery for the attack mode, and if such a lottery is won, depending on the contents of the winning It is preferable to add the number of sets.

  In such a configuration, in relation to the upper limit number of games (1,500 games) in the advantageous section, for example, a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) is set as one set, or a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, replay) If the number of specific games (e.g. 50 games) is consumed as one set, the maximum number of games divided by the predetermined number of games or the number of specific games (30 sets) It is good also as a structure which makes it an upper limit set number and forcibly ends an advantageous area by digesting the said upper limit set number. In this case, it may be configured to grasp the number of sets of advantageous sections with a predetermined counter and forcibly terminate the counter when the counter reaches the upper limit (30). If challenge mode or precursor mode is taken into account, these challenge mode and precursor mode are also added to the number of sets (for example, the number of games is determined so that the total number of games in precursor mode and challenge mode is one set. If these counters reach the upper limit value including these modes, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section will be reached. In a configuration in which the number of games per set can vary (a configuration in which a predetermined end condition is satisfied or a specific number of games is consumed as one set), the number of games is smaller than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. Thus, the counter for the number of sets can be the upper limit value.

  In relation to the excess flag, in the above-mentioned counter for the number of sets, it is preferable that the excess flag is set when the sum of the number of digested sets and the number of undigested sets reaches the upper limit of the number of sets. .

  (97) The push order notification may be performed even in the challenge mode or the precursor mode. More specifically, when an advantageous section including the attack mode, the challenge mode, the precursor mode, etc. is entered into the specific gaming state, the advantageous section is kept until the push order notification is generated at least a predetermined number of times (one time). It is good also as composition which does not end.

  (98) As a result of lottery during the advantageous section, the timing for reporting the result of the extra lottery is made different depending on the setting value depending on the setting value, but the lottery that changes the timing for notifying the lottery result depending on the setting value Is not limited to the extra lottery, but may be another lottery as long as it is a lottery in the advantageous section. For example, the timing for reporting the result of the extra game number lottery may be different depending on the set value. In this case, the immediate / post-notification timing may be different depending on the number of additional games depending on the set value. It is good also as a structure from which the setting difference of a mounting / rearward-addition ratio differs. Further, the present invention is not limited to the lottery regarding the instruction function. For example, the BB lottery result notification timing in the advantageous section may be varied depending on the set value. In this case, the number of precursor games at the time of winning the BB varies depending on the set value. It is good also as a structure to allow. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which changes the alerting | reporting timing of the winning result of small roles, such as a cherry, with a setting value, and it is good to set it as the structure which changes the alerting | reporting timing in a winning game with a setting value.

  (99) In the case of performing an after-effect, the first added character BUP1, the second added character BUP2, or the like is used as a notification of the winning result, but the characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. may not be displayed. . In this case, on the premise that there is a result notification (winning notification) and a content notification (winning game number notification) in the extra effect, in the post effect, the result notification is at the same timing as the content notification of the post effect or slightly more The configuration may be performed at an early timing, and the result notification may not be performed in a game in which an extra lottery is performed.

  In addition, in the post-production, the first post-up character BUP1, the second post-up character BUP 2 and the like are displayed when the extra lottery is won, but these characters BUP 1 and BUP 2 are also displayed when the win is not won. It is good also as a structure. In this case, the characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. are characters indicating that the extra lottery has been performed. When these characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. are displayed in the non-winning case, the result is displayed when the content is notified, for example, in the content notification, the effect that the treasure box is empty or the effect that the number of added games is 0 is performed. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports.

  (100) As a lottery with no setting difference, the informing timing of the extra lottery is configured to be different depending on the setting value between the immediate effect and the later effect, but if the lottery has no setting difference, it is not limited to the extra lottery, Other lotteries may be used. For example, it may be possible to meet by lottery for the number of added games, or the timing for reporting the result of the number of added games lottery may be different depending on the set value. May be different depending on the set value, or may be different in the setting difference between the immediate ride / rear ride ratio. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the lottery regarding the instruction function. For example, the timing of informing the result of the BB lottery in the normal section or the advantageous section may be different depending on the set value. In this case, the number of precursor games at the time of winning the BB is set. It is good also as a structure which changes with values. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which changes the alerting | reporting timing of the winning result of small roles, such as a cherry, with a setting value, and it is good to set it as the structure which changes the alerting | reporting timing in a winning game with a setting value.

  (101) Based on the fact that the immediate addition effect is continued as the additional effect in the special zone, the table counter ATK is added and the additional notification timing table is switched. It is good also as a structure which switches an addition alerting | reporting timing table. In this case, the table counter ATK may be initialized (1) based on the occurrence of the immediate riding effect.

  In addition, the continuity of the immediate and directing effects is not limited to the special zone, and as an additional effect that occurred during the attack mode, it was added by the fact that the immediate effect and the subsequent effect were continuous. It is good also as a structure which switches an alerting | reporting timing table.

  In addition, the switching timing of the additional notification timing table is not limited to the continuity of the selected effects, and the additional notification timing table when the additional by the same kind of small role is continued (for example, when the additional cherry timing is continued). The table counter ATK may be initialized when additions by other types of small roles continue.

  (102) The configuration is such that the additional notification timing table is switched when the immediate presentation effects are continued, but the configuration where the additional notification timing table is switched simply by the number of selections of the immediate installation effects even if they are not continuous. It is good. In this case, for example, the first addition notification timing table is selected when the number of times of selecting the immediate effect (table counter ATK) is 1 to 3, and the number of times of selecting the immediate effect (table counter ATK) is 4 to 5 times. Setting based on the selected additional notification timing table, such as selecting the first additional notification timing table if the fourth additional notification timing table is selected and the number of selections of the immediate addition effect (table counter ATK) is 6 or more The configuration in which the difficulty level of value estimation changes uniformly according to the number of times (the higher the number of times, the higher the difficulty level, or the higher the number of times, the lower the difficulty level) may be. .

  (103) Although the configuration is such that the difficulty of estimating the set value based on the additional notification timing selected by increasing the number of consecutive immediate effects is selected, it is selected by increasing the number of consecutive immediate effects. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the difficulty of estimating the set value based on the additional notification timing increases.

  (104) In the configuration of switching the extra notification timing table, the initial value of the table counter ATK may be different depending on the timing of transition to the specialized zone. Specifically, for example, if the timing of transition to the specialized zone is a watermelon, the initial value of the table counter ATK is set to 1, while if the timing of transition to the specialized zone is cherry, the initial value of the table counter ATK is The value may be set to 3. By doing in this way, the difficulty of estimation of a setting value can be varied based on the opportunity to shift to a specialized zone.

  (105) The special zone to be transferred by the cherry opportunity is a special zone in which the special addition notification timing table having a large setting difference between the immediate addition and the rear addition ratio is used. However, the special zone is transferred to the special zone by the watermelon opportunity. It is good also as a structure to perform, and it is good also as a structure which transfers to the said specialization zone with another specific combination opportunity.

  (106) Although the special notification zone that is shifted at the cherry opportunity and the special zone that is shifted at another specific role opportunity are configured to be different, the special notification timing table used is different. The zones are not limited to two types, but may be three types or more.

  (107) In the game nature in which the set value is predicted based on the immediate addition / rearward addition ratio, an additional effect may be generated at a timing different from the immediate effect and the subsequent effect. For example, it is good also as the game nature which performs prediction of a setting value with the selection rate also including the effect via a sign.

  (108) Although the information regarding the immediate addition / rearward addition ratio is output at the end of the special zone or at the end of the attack mode, an addition that is a target of the ratio occurs during the special zone or the attack mode. If there is no win, that is, if the watermelon or cherry is not won, information regarding the immediate ride / rear ride ratio may not be output.

  (109) It is good also as a structure which can output the information regarding alerting | reporting timings, such as an immediate carry-on / after-load ratio, by lottery. For example, it is good also as a structure which performs the output lottery with a predetermined | prescribed probability at the time of completion | finish of attack mode, and outputs the information regarding the said notification timing when the said output lottery is won. The winning probability of the output lottery is arbitrary, but the winning probability may be different depending on the setting value. In this case, the winning probability may be higher as the setting value is higher, or vice versa. In addition, the winning probability may be different depending on the number of digested games in the attack mode (advantageous section). In this case, the winning probability may be higher as the number of digested games is larger, or vice versa.

  (110) The output timing of the information related to the notification timing such as the immediate / rearward ratio is not limited to the end of the special zone or the end of the attack mode, and may be output at another timing. For example, it is good also as a structure output based on the number of execution games of an advantageous section having reached the predetermined number of games (for example, 1000 games) before an upper limit. Moreover, it is good also as a structure output during the bonus state at the time of the start and completion | finish of the bonus state elected in attack mode. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which can be output by the opportunity of the specific winning combination (for example, cherry winning) in attack mode.

  (111) In the configuration for outputting information related to the notification timing such as the immediate addition / rearward addition ratio, it is also possible to output the information including the information that the addition lottery for which the addition lottery has been performed is not won. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which outputs the information including the presence or absence of missing over at the time of the output of the information regarding the alerting | reporting timing of the superimposing effect triggered by the winning combination in which a missing out occurs.

  (112) In the configuration in which information regarding the immediate / rearward ratio is output, only the ratio may be output, and the information regarding the respective immediate effects and the number of subsequent effects may not be output. By doing in this way, it can avoid suppressing that the impression which a player receives deteriorates, for example resulting from a small number of extra winnings.

  (113) In the notification mode selection effect, it is configured that the immediate loading effect is selected when a reel that causes missing is selected, but the latter effect may be selected when a reel that causes missing is selected. It is good also as a structure by which the effect via a sign is selected. In addition, the selection operation and the execution timing of the extra notification to be selected are associated with each other in terms of the relationship between the reels that are not to be missed and the reels that are not to be missed. It is good also as a structure which matches the selection operation and the execution timing of the additional alerting | reporting selected according to the high possibility of this. More specifically, for example, it may be configured such that an immediate ride effect is selected by selecting and operating a reel having the highest possibility of being missed (a reel having a small number of winning-corresponding symbols).

  (114) In the notification mode selection effect, the execution timing of the extra effect is selected by the stop operation of the first reel, but the execution timing is selected by the stop operation of the second reel or the stop operation of the third reel. Also good. In addition, in the predetermined reel, the first specific symbol, the second specific symbol, and the third specific symbol, which cannot be stopped at the same time, are provided, and the execution timing is selected depending on which specific symbol is stopped. Also good.

  (115) Although the configuration is such that the data for each after-effect is individually changed to the immediate effect in the situation where the after-effect is selected by the correction process, each data can be changed to the immediate effect at once. It is good also as a structure. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can select whether it changes to immediate production | presentation according to the kind of the addition opportunity of the data used as after-loading object. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can select whether it changes to an immediate addition effect according to the number of additional games.

  (116) Although the configuration is such that the data for which the post-stage effect is selected is changed to the immediate effect by the correction process, the data may be changed to the pre-route effect, or the data for which the pre-route effect is selected. It is good also as a structure which changes to a direct ride production and a post-production production.

  (117) The configuration of the individual areas to be stored when the post-stage effect or the warning effect is selected and determined is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit of the number of games that can be stored may be smaller or larger than the above. Also, the number of individual data can be changed.

  (118) With respect to the individual area for storing the additional data, when there are more storage triggers (selection of post-installation effects, etc.) than the number of provided individual areas, the data in any one or more of the individual areas On the other hand, the number of additional games this time may be added. In the case of a configuration in which data is added to data in a plurality of areas, a configuration in which the number of additional games this time is divided and added may be added, or a configuration may be added that is divided and distributed.

  (119) In the case where an after-effect is selected, the first added character BUP1, the second added character BUP2, etc. are displayed according to the extra winning opportunity. It is not limited to. For example, it is good also as a structure which displays a different character according to the number of additional games.

  (120) The configuration for changing the execution timing of the extra effect is not limited to the effect at the time of the extra lottery winning, and may be applied when the extra lottery is not won.

  (121) In the configuration in which the execution timing of the extra effect is determined based on the player's selection operation, the execution is different from the execution timing selected by the player by the selection operation due to the relationship between the number of additional games and the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section It is good also as a structure which adds an effect at a timing. More specifically, for example, in a situation where there are 50 games after the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section (situation where the number of executed games is 1450 games), when an additional 100 games more than the 50 games occur, an immediate effect Even if is selected, an extra effect is generated as a post-effect. By doing in this way, it is possible to grasp that an advantageous section is forcibly terminated due to an increase in the number of games exceeding the upper limit game number, by using an additional effect at a timing different from the selection operation of the player himself / herself.

  This configuration may be used for setting value suggestion. More specifically, an extra effect is generated with a predetermined probability at a timing different from the execution timing by the player's selection operation. When the set value is the first set value (for example, set 1), the effect is added at a timing different from the selection operation with the first probability (for example, 10%) as the predetermined probability. In the case of a second setting value (for example, setting 6) different from the one setting value, an extra effect is provided at a timing different from the selection operation with a second probability (for example, 80%) different from the first probability as the predetermined probability. The configuration is to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to realize a new gameability such as predicting a set value through the generation of an extra effect at an execution timing different from that of the selection operation.

  Furthermore, when the number of games more than the number of free games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is generated, an additional effect can be generated at an execution timing different from the above selection operation. It is good also as a structure from which the probability that an additional production | generation will generate | occur | produce at an execution timing changes with setting values. By doing in this way, when the addition exceeding an upper limit generate | occur | produces, the merit that setting value can be estimated can be produced and it becomes possible to ensure the excess of the upper limit by addition.

  (122) In the configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions such as the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase number are provided as the forced termination conditions of the advantageous section, these forced termination conditions are not limited to the upper limit game number and the upper limit increase number, and other conditions Alternatively, it may be configured to include other conditions. Other conditions include, for example, when the number of wins for a predetermined result (which may be bells, replays, multiple types of payout results, or multiple types of replays) in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, One forced termination condition is when the number of times reaches the maximum number of times, for example, when the number of outliers in the advantageous section reaches the maximum number of times or when the number of consecutive times reaches the maximum number of times For example, if the number of bonus winnings in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number or if the number of consecutive winnings reaches the upper limit number of times, one forced termination condition is used. One compulsory termination condition is when the time reaches the predetermined time, or one compulsory when, for example, the number of occurrences of the predetermined effect in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit or the number of consecutive occurrences reaches the upper limit End condition It may be.

  In these cases, it can be predicted in advance from the current game content (the number of remaining advantageous game ZG) that the forced termination condition is satisfied, and it can be beneficial to the player such as setting value suggestion based on the prediction result. It is good to set it as the structure which performs the specific process which performs presentation of information, provision of a privilege, etc.

  (123) In a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions of an upper limit game number and an upper limit increase number are set, when it is specified in advance that each forced termination condition is satisfied, a first excess flag and a second When the excess flag is set and the additional conditions are satisfied after that, the number of additional games is added to the total number of extinct games TEG, but the counter for storing the excess for each forced termination condition It is good also as a structure which provides and each memorize | stores separately. For example, when the first excess flag is set, the number of subsequent added games is added to the first total disappearance game number TEG1 provided in the various counter areas 106e, and the second excess flag is set. May be configured to add the subsequent added game number to the second total disappearance game number TEG2 provided in the various counter areas 106e. In this case, when both the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, the first excess flag corresponding to the first excess flag among the first total extinction game number TEG1 and the second total extinction game number TEG2 is set. It is preferable to add the number of games to the total number of annihilated games TEG1. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to simplify the process for correction when the situation where the 2nd excess flag was set is canceled afterwards.

  (124) The value and relationship between the upper limit game number and the upper limit increase number are not limited to the above, and the upper limit game number may be less than 1500 games or more than 1500 games, and the upper limit increase number is less than 2400. However, it may be more than 2400. However, in the gameability of aiming to increase the upper limit increase number in the advantageous section, it is better that the net increase in the advantageous section is specified so that the upper limit increase number is reached when the advantageous section of the upper limit game number is digested. Specifically, it may be configured such that the net increase number is defined so that the upper limit increase number is reached with a smaller number of games than the upper limit game number.

  (125) In the advantageous section, the attack mode or the like is configured to manage the presence / absence of the continuation based on the number of continuations based on the number of remaining games. More specifically, for example, in the above configuration, 50 games are set as the initial game when shifting to the attack mode, and the attack mode is ended by digesting the 50 games. A configuration may be adopted in which 100 sheets are set as the initial number of payouts at the time of transition, and the attack mode is ended when 100 or more payouts are made. In this case, when an extra is generated, the payout number may be added instead of the number of games. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which prescribes | regulates the increase / decrease number which deducted the use number from the payout number instead of the payout number.

  (126) In calculating the advantageous zone increase / decrease number ZM, the number of used media used in each game is subtracted from the number of game media paid out in each game. It is good also as a structure which has a game and the game which is not reflected. For example, when the replay is won, since the deduction is zero, the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM may not be calculated. By doing in this way, compared with the structure which calculates every game, it can anticipate the reduction effect of a significant processing load. In particular, since the calculation is mainly performed in a high RT state where the replay winning probability is high, the reduction effect can be great.

  In addition, in the advantageous section, it may be configured not to reflect the number of payouts and the number of used coins in a predetermined bet number. For example, although the number of payouts and the number of used coins in a game performed in the 3-bet mode is reflected, A configuration in which the number of payouts and the number of used cards in a game performed in the 1-bet mode is not reflected may be employed. In this case, for example, in the CB state in which the 2-bet mode is a specified number, the game may be reflected in the calculation of the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM as a game resulting from the CB winning in the 3-bet mode. For example, when the bonus winning flag is set, the payout number and the used number may be reflected regardless of the number of bets, and in this way, the carryover with the bonus winning flag set is performed. By continuing the state indefinitely, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of digesting the number of games substantially exceeding the upper limit number of games.

  (127) The case where the first excess flag in which it has been specified that the upper limit number of games has been exceeded is set, and the case where the second excess flag in which it has been specified that the upper limit increase number has been exceeded has been set. Depending on the situation, the type of special notification to be generated (contents of setting value suggestion) and the rate of occurrence of special notification are different, so that the advantage for the player is different, but the configuration that makes the advantage different is this However, the contents may be different from each other, for example, one may suggest a set value and the other may display a rare image. Further, the level of the advantage is not limited to that of the above-described embodiment or modification, and may be reversed, the advantage may be the same or similar, or the same special notification (setting value suggestion) ) May occur.

  Further, not only the set excess flag but also the type of special notification to be generated (contents of setting value suggestion) and the occurrence rate of the special notification are varied depending on the total number of annihilated games TEG, thereby increasing the advantage for the player. Although it is configured differently, for the total number of annihilated games TEG, the degree of advantage reflecting the value and the type and content of the special notification are not limited to those of the above-described embodiment or modification, and are configured to reflect different values It is good. For example, a special notification that is more advantageous to the player may be generated as the total number of extinct games TEG is smaller (as the additional amount after the upper limit is specified).

  (128) The type of special notification (content of setting value suggestion) or special notification generated depending on whether the specification of exceeding the upper limit number of games or the specification of exceeding the upper limit increase number is performed first. However, the configuration that varies the advantage is not limited to this, one of which suggests a set value and the other displays a rare image. The contents may be different from each other. Further, the level of the advantage is not limited to that of the above-described embodiment or modification, and may be reversed, the advantage may be the same or similar, or the same special notification (setting value suggestion) ) May occur.

  (129) The number of net increase for each state is not limited to the above. For example, the net increase in number when the attack mode is digested in the high RT state (about +1.90 in the seventh embodiment) is not limited to that of the above-described embodiment or modification, but per game The number may be less than two or more than two. For example, a net increase number such as 3, 5, 10, or 14 per game may be set.

  (130) A transition lottery such as an attack mode based on a winning combination (for example, duplication result with the second BB, strong cherry duplication 2, weak cherry duplication 2, etc.) that does not depend on the set value is performed. However, it is good also as a structure to perform. In this case, even in a bonus state based on winning combinations having different winning probabilities according to the set values (for example, the second BB state based on strong cherry overlap 2), a transition lottery such as an attack mode or an additional lottery may be performed.

  (131) When it is specified in advance that a plurality of forced termination conditions such as the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase number are satisfied, it is generated according to the advantageous section game number AG when the specification is performed. It is good also as a structure from which the advantageous degree for a player differs by changing the kind etc. of special alerting | reporting. For example, the advantage of special notification to be generated when the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number is specified before a predetermined number of games (1000 games) or after that is determined. Different types may be used, or a special notification that is advantageous to the player may be used as long as it is before a predetermined number of games.

  (132) A configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions such as the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase number are provided, and when one of the forced termination conditions is satisfied, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated even if the other forced termination condition is not satisfied However, it may be configured to forcibly terminate after waiting for any of the forced termination conditions to be satisfied.

  (133) The second excess flag may be cleared in the remaining number management process when the upper limit increase number is not reached in accordance with the gaming situation after it is specified that the upper limit increase number has been reached. In this case, once the information indicating that the upper limit increase number has been identified is temporarily stored, the situation where the upper limit increase number is not specified at all, and once the specification is performed. Depending on the situation, the process may be configured differently. For example, the advantage or type of the special notification when the upper limit increase number is reached may be changed. In addition, when the advantageous section is terminated without being forcibly terminated (without reaching the upper limit increase number), if the information indicating that the identification has been performed is temporarily stored, the set value suggestion is performed. On the other hand, when the above specification is not performed, the set value suggestion may not be performed, or vice versa.

  (134) The upper limit increase number has been described on the premise that the upper limit increase number may not be reached depending on the gaming situation after it is specified that the upper limit increase number has been reached. Also, the upper limit number of games may not be reached depending on the game situation after it is specified that the upper limit number of games has been reached. For example, if the remaining game number ZG is subtracted according to the game result in the advantageous section, the subtraction process is performed even when it is specified that the upper limit number of games has been reached. Depending on the winning status of the game result, an event that does not reach the upper limit number of games may occur. In this case, each invention when the upper limit increase number is not reached is determined according to the gaming situation after the upper limit increase number is specified, after the upper limit game number is specified. It may be applied when the upper limit number of games is not reached depending on the game situation.

  (135) After the notification that the second excess flag has been set, when the advantageous section ends without reaching the upper limit increase number, the configuration is more advantageous than the other case, When the notification is performed, the configuration may be more disadvantageous than when the notification is not performed.

  (136) A configuration in which the notification is compensated by special notification when it is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit increase number without digesting the notification of the remaining number of games in the advantageous section, but the compensation is not performed Alternatively, it may be configured to generate a special notification that is advantageous when there is no notification. The number of remaining games to be notified differs greatly depending on whether the addition notification is selected as the immediate addition notification or the post-indication notification. When there is a large amount of notification, the immediate addition notification is selected and the notification amount is reduced. The case where there are few cases is when many post-informing notifications are selected. Then, if there is at least a large amount of notification, it is considered that there were a lot of productions (flashy productions were performed), and the amount of production and the degree of liveliness are subtracted from the advantage of special notifications ( If there are a lot of productions, it is possible to have a configuration in which compensation is not performed or compensation is reduced accordingly).

  (137) In the case where the advantage section is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit number of games and the sixth special notification is executed based on the excess, if the second excess flag is set, the sixth special notification lottery is not won Even so, it is configured to be advantageous to the player by treating it as a win. For example, the sixth special notification A lottery table is used instead of the sixth special notification B lottery table, and the sixth special notification process is performed. It is good also as a structure which performs an advantageous process. In addition, if the fifth special notification is executed even if the second excess flag is set, the advantage is not increased too much by not treating the non-winning as a win. For example, the sixth special notification B lottery You may perform the process for 6th special alert | report using the lottery table whose setting value is more difficult to narrow down than a table. Further, the sixth special notification may be set in consideration of not only the presence / absence of the execution of the fifth special notification but also the number of executions and the execution mode of the fifth special notification. The configuration may be such that the sixth special notification is not executed if the number is executed more than a few, and the sixth special notification is executed if the number is less than a predetermined number.

  (138) A configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions such as the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase number are provided, and the advantage is varied by changing the contents of the special notification depending on which forced termination condition is used. If it is forcibly terminated with the upper limit number of games, the difference number up to the upper limit increase number is taken into account, and if it is forcibly terminated with the upper limit increase number, the number of games up to the upper limit game number is taken into account. If it is forcibly terminated, the number of games up to the maximum number of games will be considered, but if it is forcibly terminated with the maximum number of games, the difference number up to the maximum number of increases will not be taken into account, or vice versa. It is good also as a structure which considers the condition until the forced termination conditions are satisfied.

  (139) In the case where the game is forcibly terminated with the upper limit number of games, the display of the remaining payout amount is continued in the special section, taking into account the difference number up to the upper limit increase number. If there is no display of the remaining increase number (at least at the time of forced termination), there is no need to display the number of payouts in the special section. The display of the number of remaining games is continued in consideration of the number of games. However, if the number of remaining games is not displayed during the advantageous section (at least when forced termination), the number of remaining games in the special section May not be displayed. Further, whether or not to continue the display may be changed depending on whether or not the display is performed at the time of forced termination.

  (140) In the case of forced termination with the upper limit number of games, the continuity of the special section is managed by the difference number up to the upper limit increase number in the special section, and the remaining payout number is displayed. It is good also as a structure which manages the continuity of a special area by the increase number, and displays the remaining increase number. In this case, the special section is likely to continue until the game medium is expected to increase.

  (141) The erasure preparation game number EJG and the total annihilation game number TEG are managed separately in the advantageous section corresponding counter area 209 and the normal section corresponding counter area 210, respectively. May be managed in the normal section corresponding counter area 210, or may be managed in another area. The information on the excess may be used for special notifications, etc., and not deleted at the time of forced termination, or the information on the excess may be deleted after moving to the normal section. May be maintained in the normal section until the transition to the next advantageous section (deleted at the transition to the next advantageous section), and the information about the excess is subjected to a predetermined reset process (operation of the reset button, RAM clearing). It may be configured to be maintained (erasing based on a predetermined reset process) until operation, power ON / OFF, etc. are performed.

  (142) The number of games for annihilation preparation game EJG is moved to the total number of annihilation games TEG based on the setting of the first excess flag. Any configuration can be used. In the case of the configuration for moving at the time of forced termination, the special notification during the advantageous section may be performed based on the number of annihilation preparation games EJG, and the special notification at the time of forced termination or after that may be performed based on the total number of annihilation games TEG.

  (143) Although the number of EJG preparation game numbers EJG is moved to the total number of annihilation games TEG based on the setting of the first excess flag, it may be managed separately as it is without being moved. Good. In this case, the excess when only the second excess flag is set is managed as the disappearance preparation game number EJG, and when the first excess flag is set (when only the first excess flag is set and It is possible to manage the excess amount (when the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set) as the total number of extinct games TEG. Further, after the second excess flag is set, it is possible to grasp the difference in the excess game number generated until the first excess flag is set as the disappearance preparation game number EJG.

  (144) Excess information stored in the total disappearance game number TEG via the disappearance preparation game number EJG and excess information stored in the total disappearance game number TEG without passing through the disappearance preparation game number EJG It is good also as a structure managed separately (for example, in a separate counter and a separate storage area). Even if it is managed by the same counter (total number of annihilation games TEG), a boundary value between the amount of intervening and not intervening is stored, for example, for special notification based on at least the total number of annihilation games TEG When performing the process, it is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not the game is via the disappearance preparation game number EJG.

  (145) A special notice that is more advantageous as it is forcibly terminated with the upper limit increase in a state where a large number of remaining games have been informed, or a special notice that is more advantageous as the number of remaining games that have been informed at the time of forced termination is smaller , Special notification is more advantageous as the number of remaining games that have been informed at the time of forced termination is better, but some processing is performed by forced termination at the upper limit increase number when there are remaining number of games that have been informed May be used, and a configuration in which it is advantageous to be forcibly terminated with the upper limit increase number or the upper limit game number in a situation where there is no remaining number of games that have been notified may be employed.

  (146) A special notice that is more advantageous as it is forcibly terminated with the upper limit increase in a state in which a large number of remaining games have been informed, or a special notice that is more advantageous as the number of remaining games that have been informed at the time of forced termination is smaller In the configuration in which special notification is more advantageous as the number of remaining games that have been informed at the time of forced termination is better, the configuration is such that the advantageous remaining number of games is clearly indicated on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. At the same time, the display of the number of remaining games may be updated (for example, updated in a countdown) at the time of digestion of each game toward the number of games specified.

  (147) A special notification that is more advantageous as it is forcibly terminated with the upper limit increase in a state where a large number of remaining games have been notified, or a special notification that is more advantageous as the number of remaining games that have been notified at the time of forced termination is smaller In the configuration in which special notification is advantageous as the number of remaining games that have been notified at the time of forced termination is better, the upper limit increase number such as transition to a bonus state is reached instead of the number of remaining games at the time of forced termination In this case, the special notification process may be performed as the number of remaining games at the time when a specific condition that is determined before reaching the upper limit increase number is satisfied.

  (148) In the configuration in which the first adjustment process to the third adjustment process are performed, in particular, the configuration in which the subsequent increase / decrease number is predicted based on the maximum increase / decrease number MM can be used for other processes. If the total expected increase / decrease number SM is predicted based on the maximum increase / decrease number MM in the processing, the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM may be calculated from the advantageous section remaining game number ZG and the maximum increase / decrease number MM.

  (149) The second adjustment process is activated every time the second section display process is performed. For example, the second adjustment process may be activated when a correction condition is satisfied. The correction conditions include, for example, when the deviation from the total increase / decrease maximum expected number of sheets SMM predicted in the first adjustment process is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, or when the gaming state (RT state) shifts to another state. is there.

  (150) When it is determined that the upper limit number of games will be reached after the bonus is over and during the return to the high RT state when the bonus is won at the end of the advantageous section, until the upper limit number of games is reached after the bonus ends The number of games is added to the number of precursor games, but the average number of games in the return state may be added to the number of precursor games. In this case, the process of calculating the number of games until the upper limit number of games is reached can be omitted.

  (151) When it is determined that the upper limit number of games will be reached after the bonus ends and during the return to the high RT state when the bonus is won at the end of the interest period, until the upper limit number of games is reached after the bonus ends Instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the number of games is added to the number of precursor games, a special notification such as setting value suggestion may be generated in order to follow the forced termination as a bottom sag. In this case, the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated without waiting for the upper limit number of games to be executed (specifically, forcibly terminated based on the end of the bonus). Further, when the upper limit number of games is reached during the return state, the advantageous section may be extended until the high RT state is returned.

  (152) Although the challenge mode can be extended based on winning the overlapping target role that triggers the bonus lottery at the end of the challenge mode, the mode to be extended is not limited to the challenge mode, It may be a mode in another advantageous section such as an attack mode or a VB mode.

  (153) In the case of extending the mode based on winning the duplication target role at the end of the attack mode or VB mode, not only the number of continuation modes and continuous production but also the average game until the transition of the RT state The extension process may be performed in consideration of the number and actual transition. That is, for example, if the actual transition of the RT state is taken into account, a game up to winning the fall replay (game before the fall replay winning) may be a subject of the extension process.

  (154) The challenge mode extension process has been described on the premise that the sign mode is set and the continuous effect is finally generated based on the winning of the overlapping target combination, but it does not occur in the continuous effect in the sign mode. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a configuration in which the precursor mode ends.

  (155) Although the challenge mode extension process is performed on the assumption that the precursor mode is set at the end of the challenge mode at the end of the challenge mode, the duplicate target role is selected even if the precursor mode is not set. It is good also as a structure which performs an extension process sometimes.

  (156) Although the challenge mode can be extended based on the fact that the combination target is won at the end of the challenge mode, the challenge mode is not extended, and only the display continuation game on the section display is extended. It is good.

  (157) The configuration in which the extension process of the second challenge mode, which is more disadvantageous than before, may be applied when extending the attack mode, the VB mode, or the like when winning the duplication target combination at the end of the challenge mode. In this case, for example, an attack mode or the like in which a normal push order notification is likely to occur is referred to as a first attack mode or the like, and a portion that is extended by the extension process has a lower probability of occurrence of a push order notification than in the first attack mode. It is good also as a structure set as 2 attack mode. Instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the advantage is lowered depending on the occurrence probability of the push order notification, the advantage of the target role to be notified when the push order notification is generated is different (for example, the first number in the first attack mode). In the second attack mode, and in the second attack mode, the push order corresponding to the second result in which the second number less than the first number is generated is reported). Good.

  (158) The advantageous section is configured to be initialized not only by compulsory termination in the second section display process, but also by a RAM clear process (reset process) by a game hall administrator or the like. It is good also as a structure performed. For example, an initialization process may be performed when a predetermined combination (forcibly terminated combination) winning in the advantageous section or the predetermined combination winning is established, and an initialization process may be performed at the forced end.

  (159) In the configuration in which the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed after the start condition after the transition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the start condition is not limited to the above, and at least the first start The first start condition may be any configuration as long as a condition in which push order notification as a condition can occur and a situation in which an increase in game media can be expected as a second start condition are satisfied. And the second start condition may be satisfied simultaneously (in the same game), the start condition may be satisfied.

  In addition, when a bonus and attack mode are won at the same time, in addition to the bonus winning, the start condition may be satisfied when the bonus is won (when the attack mode is won), or when the bonus ends (when the attack mode is notified) ), The start condition may be satisfied, or the start condition may be satisfied when the transition to the attack mode occurs after the bonus ends.

  (160) The number of games in the previous section (display based on the number of pre-start games MG) is not limited to the above, and for example, instead of or in addition to the above configuration, according to the value of the number of pre-start games MG The background color may be changed (for example, 0 to 99 is a blue background, 100 to 199 is a yellow background, 200 to is a red background, etc.).

  (161) Although it has been described on the premise that the number of held medals can be reduced in each game in the previous section, a configuration in which a section in which the number of held medals increases in the previous section may be included. For example, if you win a bonus during the previous section and you do not win the attack mode (if you do not get a push order notification), the start condition will not be met, but it will be held during the previous section. An increase in medals can be expected.

  (162) The configuration in which the payout rate varies depending on each set value is set such that the setting 1 has the lowest output rate and the setting 6 has the highest output rate. What is necessary is just a structure where the increase / decrease rate and increase / decrease mode of this change. For example, it may be configured such that the set payout rates of some setting values are the same, and the set payout rates of other set values are different, such as the set payout rates of setting 1 and setting 2 being the same. Further, the settings 1, 3 and 5 may be configured such that the rate of increase / decrease in the ball is high, and the settings 2, 4 and 6 may be configured such that the rate of increase / decrease in the ball is low. In addition, setting 1 and 5 increase the predetermined amount of balls in a short time and decrease the predetermined amount in a long time, and settings 2, 3 and 4 require a longer time than setting 1 and 5 to increase the predetermined amount. The predetermined amount may be reduced in a shorter time than the settings 1 and 5, and the setting 6 may be configured such that the increase or decrease in the number of balls hardly occurs. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

  (163) The slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, five reels and five corresponding stop switches are arranged in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, it is sufficient that there are at least two reels and corresponding stop switches. In addition, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the effective line is set to 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the effective line may be 5 lines.

  (164) Although an example in which the slot machine 10 is embodied has been shown, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. That is, in the slot machine, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having a ball insertion and ball payout function such as a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-use revolving game machine) may be used. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  For example, in a pachinko machine or ball-cylinder revolving type gaming machine, it is configured to have a plurality of setting values that change the payout rate etc., and each of the above inventions may be applied as an indication or teaching effect of these setting values. Good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high probability state in which the jackpot probability is high and low and a low probability state, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as a high probability state, and the entrance to a predetermined ball-entry part may be applied. In a pachinko machine having a high ball entering state and a low ball entering state in which the sphere rate is high and low, each of the above inventions may be applied with the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 as a high ball entering state.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a characteristic configuration extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

  The invention shown in each of the following feature groups is as follows. “As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition. In the slot machine, specifically, a start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. Then, the internal lottery is performed and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the above result, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In the gaming machine illustrated above and the like must increase player's interest in the game, in this regard, in which the invention that there. "Is still room for improvement has been made with the problems to be solved.

<Feature AA group>
Features AA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Transition lottery means (execution of the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and the lottery to shift to the specific gaming state is executed. Function)
The notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eight display segment N8) based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the specific is based on the end of the specific gaming state. Specific game state notifying means (function of executing section display first processing to section display fourth processing by the main control device 101) for terminating notification by setting the notification means to a light-off state;
With
The specific gaming state notifying means is
First means for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means (for example, executing a process of starting display of the section indicator at the time of the first stop OFF operation in the main control device 101 in the predetermined first mode) Function)
In a second mode different from the first mode, a second unit for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification unit (for example, a process of starting display of the section indicator at the time of the third stop OFF operation in the main controller 101) Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by the privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result winning is determined by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the circuit body, A result that is a result winning is set, and a mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and a game is created that varies the degree of advantage by changing the presence or absence of a win depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification The

  In this case, the notification by the specific notification means is started when the state shifts to the specific gaming state where the state notification is easily performed, and the notification by the specific notification means is also ended when the specific gaming state ends. In other words, if the presence / absence of the notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game state is the specific game state. For example, a game without being aware of the fact that the game has entered the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has been seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to enjoy the game based on the mode notification equally.

  Moreover, in this gaming machine, there are cases where the start and end of notification by the specific notification means is performed in the first mode and in the second mode. In this way, using the specific notification means such as simply starting notification at the time of transition to the specific gaming state and ending notification at the end of the specific gaming state, fully expect the stage effect in the game. Is also possible. Further, if the above configuration is used, for example, the notification by the specific notification means is ended by winning the lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state and starting the notification by the specific notification means or by playing the specific gaming state. Information such as the content of the game and the content of the specific game state can be given to the player who played the game in the start / end mode of notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure superiority over the player who played the game that triggered the notification while ensuring equality among the players by the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

  As for “specific gaming state notification means”, “notification is started by turning on the specific notification means based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the specific gaming state ends. The notification is ended by setting the specific notification means to the extinguished state on the basis of the above. However, the notification by the specific notification means is simply started based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the specific A configuration may be adopted in which the notification by the specific notification unit is ended based on the end of the gaming state. The same applies to the “specific game state notifying means” in the following other features.

  Feature AA2. The specific game state notification means starts or ends notification by the specific notification means by the first means, and starts notification by the specific notification means by the second means, depending on the advantage of the specific game state, The gaming machine according to Feature AA1, wherein the game machine can be different from a case where the game ends.

  According to the said structure, the start and completion | finish of alerting | reporting by a specific alerting | reporting means will differ with the case where it performs in a 1st aspect, and the case where it performs in a 2nd aspect according to the advantage of a specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the specific notification unit when the notification by the specific notification unit starts / ends.

Feature AA3. As the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different advantages for the player,
The specific gaming state notifying means is
If the specific gaming state is a predetermined first predetermined state, the first means starts or ends the notification by the specific notification means,
When the specific game state is a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state, the notification by the specific notification unit is started or ended by the second unit according to the feature AA1 or the feature AA2 The gaming machine described.

  According to the said structure, a 1st aspect and a 2nd aspect will differ with the kind of specific game state as an advantage of a specific game state. Since it is important to shift to any state in the playability by the stop operation mode and the mode notification of the first result and the second result, the notification of the specific notification means can be performed as described above. It is possible to suitably increase the interest in starting. Further, when the notification is ended, if the notification of the specific notification unit is ended in a mode associated with the information on which state, the reverberation of these states is performed through the notification end mode of the specific notification unit. Can be entertained.

Feature AA4. As the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different advantages for the player,
The specific gaming state notifying means is
When the specific gaming state is the first predetermined state, the notification by the specific notification unit is started by the first unit,
The gaming machine according to Feature AA3, wherein when the specific gaming state is the second predetermined state, the second means starts notification by the specific notification means.

  According to the said structure, the effect at the time of a notification start can be suitably show | played among characteristic AA3.

  Feature AA5. The specific gaming state notification means performs notification in the specific gaming state in the same manner when the notification is started or ended by the first means and when notification is started or ended by the second means. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA4.

  According to the above configuration, since the notification mode is the same during the specific gaming state, the function of ensuring equality between the players can be performed by the notification of the specific notification unit, and the point where the notification mode of the specific notification unit is different is started. Also, by gathering at the end, it becomes easy to understand the timing to be noted, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the specific notification means.

  Feature AA6. The specific gaming state notification means starts notification by the specific notification means in either the first mode or the second mode according to the content of the specific gaming state when notification by the specific notification unit is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA5, further comprising start time setting means for setting whether to perform (a function of executing the first section display process by the main control device 101).

  According to the above configuration, the content of the specific gaming state differs depending on whether the notification is started in the first mode or the notification is started in the second mode. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in whether or not the mode is any one of the modes, and to appropriately achieve the attention level improving effect.

  The above-mentioned “according to the contents of the specific game state” means, for example, “as the specific game state, a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, predictor mode) having different advantages for the player. Etc.) and depending on whether the specific gaming state is a first predetermined state or a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state, etc. You may express using the kind of state. Moreover, it is good also as what was matched with the number of continuous games etc. like "according to the length of the said specific game state".

  Feature AA7. The specific gaming state notifying means performs the notification by the specific notifying means in either the first mode or the second mode, depending on the advantage of the specific gaming state when notification by the specific notification unit is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA6, further comprising start time setting means for setting whether to start (a function of executing the section display first processing by the main control device 101).

  According to the above configuration, the advantage of the specific gaming state varies depending on whether the notification is started in the first mode or whether the notification is started in the second mode. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in whether or not the mode is any one of the modes, and to appropriately achieve the attention level improving effect.

  Further, when this configuration is applied to the feature AA6, the “start time setting means” of the feature AA6 may be read as “start time setting means” of the present configuration, and the “start time setting means” of the feature AA6 is “ “First start time setting means” may be replaced with “second start time setting means”. That is, in the case where the “starting time setting means” overlaps in applying each feature, one “starting time setting means” may be limited to the configuration of the other “starting time setting means”. The “start time setting means” may coexist. In addition, the relationship of limitation or duplication of each means is the same for the following features.

  Feature AA8. When the notification of the specific notification means is started or ended by the first means, the notification is started or ended at a first timing as the first aspect, and the specific notification is performed by the second means. When the notification of the means is started or ended, the notification is started or ended at a second timing different from the first timing as the second mode. AA1 to AA7 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  As a mode for starting / ending notification by the specific notification means, a difference in display content (color difference, image difference, etc.), a sound difference, and the like are included in addition to the timing difference. The notification start / end timing of the specific notification means is different from the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to make other differences (display contents, sound differences, etc.) the same, and the first means and the second means share the effect data at the start / end of the notification of the specific notification means. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects of the above features with a simple configuration.

  Feature AA9. The second timing is a timing later than the first timing, and when the notification of the specific notification means is started at the second timing, the specific notification means at the first timing. The gaming machine according to feature AA8, wherein the specific gaming state to be notified by the specific notification means is more advantageous for the player than when the notification is started.

  According to the above configuration, if the notification start timing on the rear side is more advantageous to the player, it is preferable that the notification start is later, and it is possible to enjoy a throbbing feeling such as whether or not the notification starts. It becomes.

Feature AA10. The lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, and in the situation where the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won, the specific result corresponding to the specific result is stopped at the effective position. A game that can be granted by the privilege granting means a privilege corresponding to
The specific gaming state notification means starts notification by the specific notification means at a timing prior to at least allowing operation of the next game after the start game,
The gaming machine according to Feature AA9, wherein the first timing and the second timing are included in the start game.

  According to the above configuration, since the timing at which the notification by the specific notification means is started becomes more limited, it is difficult for the production to be delayed in a game such as whether or not the notification is performed. In addition, by setting the end of the timing at which the notification by the specific notification means is started, points to be noted as to whether or not notification by the specific notification means is performed (whether or not the transition lottery is won) are collected. If it contributes to improving the degree of attention and the rear timing is more advantageous to the player as in the feature AA9, the notification is started at the front timing and a sense of security is obtained. It is possible to realize a gameability such as whether or not the notification is started until the timing on the rear side and the thrilling feeling is felt.

Feature AA11. The first means starts or ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the operation of the first stop operation means among the plurality of stop operation means,
The second means starts notification by the specific notification means based on the operation of the second stop operation means operated after the first stop operation means among the plurality of stop operation means, or The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA10, which is terminated.

  According to the said structure, the alerting | reporting by a specific alerting | reporting means is started or complete | finished according to operation of several stop operation means. In this way, for example, the stop operation means can be operated with expectation while hoping that the notification by the specific notification means starts or does not end, that is, the specific game state or the specific game state continues. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, the fun of the operation of the stop operation means can be increased as each game progresses.

  In addition, if the said structure is applied to characteristic AA6, there exists the following effect especially.

  Since the content of the specific gaming state to be notified by the specific notification means may differ depending on the end of the stop operation means to be operated, while changing the expectation level step by step in a game in which notification by the specific notification means can be started Each stop operation means can be operated. Further, based on the game nature in which the corresponding circuit body stops based on the operation of each stop operation means, and the pattern combination corresponding to the game result stops when all the circuit bodies stop, the rear stop operation means There is a high possibility that the pattern combination corresponding to the game result is nearing completion. Then, it is possible to link the degree of completion of the pattern combination corresponding to the game result at the timing when the notification by the specific notification means is started and the content of the specific game state that is the notification target of the specific notification means. Therefore, if it is set as the said structure, it can be set as the alerting | reporting by the specific alerting | reporting means using the relationship with the pattern stopped to each circulation body, and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to the alerting | reporting suitably. .

  Further, when the above configuration is applied to the feature AA7, the following effects are obtained.

  Since the advantage of the specific gaming state to be notified by the specific notification means may differ depending on the subsequent point of the stop operation means to be operated, the expectation is changed step by step in a game in which notification by the specific notification means can be started. It is possible to operate each stop operating means. Further, based on the game nature in which the corresponding circuit body stops based on the operation of each stop operation means, and the pattern combination corresponding to the game result stops when all the circuit bodies stop, the rear stop operation means There is a high possibility that the pattern combination corresponding to the game result is nearing completion. Then, it is possible to link the degree of completion of the pattern combination corresponding to the game result at the timing when the notification of the specific notification means is started and the advantage of the specific game state to be notified by the specific notification means. Therefore, if it is set as the said structure, it can be set as the alerting | reporting by the specific alerting | reporting means using the relationship with the pattern stopped to each circulation body, and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to the alerting | reporting suitably. .

Feature AA12. The stop operation means can be displaced from the initial position to the operation position,
The drive control means controls the drive so as to stop the corresponding rotating body based on the stop operation means being operated from the initial position to the operation position.
Based on the advantage of the specific gaming state when the notification by the specific notification means is started, as the first aspect, based on the operation of the predetermined stop operation means from the initial position to the operation position Whether to start notification by the specific notification unit or whether to start notification by the specific notification unit based on the fact that the predetermined stop operation unit returns from the operation position to the initial position as the second mode is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA11, comprising start setting means (function of executing section display first processing by main controller 101).

  According to the above configuration, when the notification by the specific notification unit is started based on the stop operation unit being operated from the initial position to the operation position to stop the circulating body, the stop operation unit is operated to the operation position. In some cases, the notification by the specific notification means is started based on the return to the initial position later (after the circuit body is stopped), and the advantages of the specific gaming state that is the notification target of the specific notification means are different. ing. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to start alerting | reporting by a specific alerting | reporting means by the relationship between the act of stopping each circulation body, and the reverberation after stopping, and alerting | reporting of a specific alerting | reporting means is started. The degree of attention to this is increased more suitably.

  Feature AA13. The specific gaming state notifying means may be the one of the first aspect and the second aspect according to the content of the specific gaming state that is the notification target when the notification by the specific notification means is terminated. An end-time setting means for setting whether to end the notification by the specific notification means (a function for executing a process for ending the advantageous section display in the section display first process by the main control device 101) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA12.

  According to the above configuration, whether the notification is ended in the first mode or the notification is ended in the second mode depends on the content of the specific gaming state that has been performed. In this way, for example, when the content of the specific gaming state would not be what the player wanted (for example, when the game was finished with a short number of games), the content of the specific gaming state was It is possible to expect a production effect at the end by changing the notification end mode by the specific notification means, for example, when it would have been desired (when continuing for a long number of games, etc.) It becomes.

Feature AA14. Content notification means for executing content notification (addition notification effect) related to the specific game state being executed (function for executing the additional notification effect in the display control device 81), which is an effect executed in the specific game state. With
The content notification by the content notification means is likely to be content that is more advantageous to the player as the period from when the notification is triggered to when notification is performed is longer,
The specific gaming state notifying unit is arranged on the rear side of the first unit and the second unit such that the content of the specific gaming state to be notified by the specific reporting unit is advantageous to the player. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics AA1 to AA13, wherein the notification by the specific notification unit is easily started or ended by the unit that starts or ends the notification.

  According to the above configuration, the configuration in which the content of the specific gaming state that is the notification target is more advantageous for the player as the notification start / end by the specific gaming state notification means is delayed is the content notification in the specific gaming state. In association with the execution timing relationship, the notification is easy to understand for the player. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize a game in which the start / end of notification by the specific game state notification means is associated with the contents and enjoyed.

Feature AA15. The specific gaming state notifying means is
Depending on the game situation when the transition lottery is won by the transition lottery means, the first means starts notification by the specific notification means, or the second means starts notification by the specific notification means The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA14, which can be made different.

  According to the above configuration, the notification start mode by the specific notification means differs depending on not only the winning lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state but also the winning lottery depending on the game situation. In this way, the notification mode can be diversified.

Feature AA16. The situation setting means (in the main control device 101) sets the game situation to a specific situation on the condition that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the transfer lottery by the transition lottery means is not won. A function to execute processing for a specific state)
The specific gaming state notifying means is configured so that information that can be beneficial to the player in the specific situation is more likely to be suggested from the start mode of notification by the specific notification means than in the situation that is not the specific situation. The gaming machine according to feature AA15, wherein it is possible to change which one of the first means and the second means starts the notification by the specific notification means.

  According to the above configuration, even if the lottery result is a specific result, the game situation can be set to the specific situation even if the lottery to shift to the specific game state is not won. When winning a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state during a specific situation, information that may be useful to the player is suggested by the start mode of notification by the specific gaming state notification means. In this way, not only whether or not to win a lottery to transition to a specific gaming state, whether it is set to a specific situation or not is a key to the game, and the lottery to transition to a specific gaming state is not won. You can avoid being discouraged.

  Note that “information that can be useful to the player” is, for example, “information of setting values set by setting means”.

Feature AA17. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is a winning combination when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed as the mode notification by the predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA16, wherein:

  According to the said structure, the order alerting | reporting regarding the stop order of several circulating bodies as an aspect alert | report may be performed. By doing in this way, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefits of the mode notification even for a player who is not good at the eye-pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circling body.

The above-described configuration is as follows: “When each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets A second stop order different from the first stop order as each of the second stop operation modes. When the second result winning is established by operating the above, the second privilege (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small role winning in the 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given can be shown more clearly.

Feature AA18. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set 101, a function to execute the winning probability setting process by 101)
The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA17, wherein the winning probability of the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means is the same winning probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. .

  According to the above configuration, there is no difference in the winning probability depending on the set value with respect to the specific gaming state, so even if any of the gaming machines installed in the gaming hall is selected, the equality of the game regarding the specific gaming state is Secured. By applying such a configuration to a configuration in which notification is uniformly started at the time of state transition by the specific notification unit, it is possible to further enhance the effect of ensuring equality.

  Feature AA19. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA18, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (a precursor mode) that is won in the lottery for transition to a high probability and is before the transition is set.

  According to the said structure, the variation of a specific game state is diversified, and game property improves. In addition, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved depending on the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, the notification is started by the specific notification means when the state is changed to the specific game state, so that the game is ended without being noticed even though the state is changed to the specific game state. It is possible to suitably avoid such an event. In other words, if the state has shifted to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous state of the high frequency state is specified. By adopting a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and to expect the staging effect and the interest improvement described in the feature AA1.

Feature AA20. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Transition lottery means (execution of the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and the lottery to shift to the specific gaming state is executed. Function)
The notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eight display segment N8) based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the specific is based on the end of the specific gaming state. Specific game state notifying means (function of executing section display first processing to section display fourth processing by the main control device 101) for terminating notification by setting the notification means to a light-off state;
With
The specific gaming state notifying means is
First means for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means at a predetermined first timing (for example, executing a process of starting display of the section indicator at the time of the first stop OFF operation in the main control device 101) Function)
Second means for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means at a second timing different from the first timing (for example, display of the section indicator at the time of the third stop OFF operation in the main control device 101 is started) Function to execute processing)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by the privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result winning is determined by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the circuit body, A result that is a result winning is set, and a mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and a game is created that varies the degree of advantage by changing the presence or absence of a win depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification The

  In this case, the notification by the specific notification means is started when the state shifts to the specific gaming state where the state notification is easily performed, and the notification by the specific notification means is also ended when the specific gaming state ends. In other words, if the presence / absence of the notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game state is the specific game state. For example, a game without being aware of the fact that the game has entered the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has been seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to enjoy the game based on the mode notification equally.

  Moreover, in this gaming machine, there are cases where the start and end of notification by the specific notification means is performed at the first timing and at the second timing. In this way, using the specific notification means such as simply starting notification at the time of transition to the specific gaming state and ending notification at the end of the specific gaming state, fully expect the stage effect in the game. Is also possible. Moreover, if the said structure is used, the game which ended the alerting | reporting by a specific alerting | reporting means by making the transition lottery to a specific gaming state win and starting the alerting | reporting by a specific alerting | reporting means, or playing a specific gaming state. It is possible to provide information such as the content of the game and the content of the specific game state to the player who has performed at the start / end timing of notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure superiority over the player who played the game that triggered the notification while ensuring equality among the players by the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Feature AA21. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Transition lottery means (execution of the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and the lottery to shift to the specific gaming state is executed. Function)
The notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eight display segment N8) based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the specific is based on the end of the specific gaming state. Specific game state notifying means (function of executing section display first processing to section display fourth processing by the main control device 101) for terminating notification by setting the notification means to a light-off state;
With
The specific gaming state notifying means is
The first means for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means (for example, in the main controller 101 in red in the section indicator) by setting the lighting state or the extinguishing state in a predetermined first color. Display start function)
Second means for starting or ending notification by the specific notification means by setting the lighting state or the extinguishing state in a second color different from the first color (for example, a section in green in the main control device 101) Function to start display on the display unit),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by the privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result winning is determined by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the circuit body, A result that is a result winning is set, and a mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and a game is created that varies the degree of advantage by changing the presence or absence of a win depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification The

  In this case, the notification by the specific notification means is started when the state shifts to the specific gaming state where the state notification is easily performed, and the notification by the specific notification means is also ended when the specific gaming state ends. In other words, if the presence / absence of the notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game state is the specific game state. For example, a game without being aware of the fact that the game has entered the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has been seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to enjoy the game based on the mode notification equally.

  Moreover, in this gaming machine, there are cases where the start and end of notification by the specific notification means are performed in the first color and in the second color. In this way, using the specific notification means such as simply starting notification at the time of transition to the specific gaming state and ending notification at the end of the specific gaming state, fully expect the stage effect in the game. Is also possible. Moreover, if the said structure is used, the game which ended the alerting | reporting by a specific alerting | reporting means by making the transition lottery to a specific gaming state win and starting the alerting | reporting by a specific alerting | reporting means, or playing a specific gaming state. It is possible to provide information such as the content of the game and the content of the specific game state to the player who has played by the difference in color at the start / end of notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure superiority over the player who played the game that triggered the notification while ensuring equality among the players by the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the configurations of the features AA1 to AA19 may be individually applied to the feature AA20 or the feature AA21, or may be applied in combination.

<Feature AB group>
Features AB1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the transfer lottery means for executing the lottery for shifting to the specific gaming state (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) When,
Based on the fact that the specific notification means (eight display segment N8) is turned on based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, the state notification is started, and the specific gaming state ends. Specific gaming state notifying means (a function for executing section display first processing to section display fourth processing by the main control device 101) for terminating notification during the state by setting the specific notifying means to an extinguished state;
With
In the situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state is won, the specific game state notifying unit is a specific picture combination corresponding to the specific result at the effective position. When the game is stopped, a game corresponding to the specific result can be given by the privilege granting unit as a start game, and at least before the operation of the next game after the start game is allowed, The notification during the state by the specific notification means is started,
At a timing prior to the start of the notification during the state by the specific gaming state notification means, a special notification corresponding to the content of the specific gaming state that is the target of the notification during the state is determined in advance. Special notification means (first section display processing by the main control device 101 and special RT state processing) that can be executed by the notification means (eight display segment N8, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, auxiliary display unit 65, etc.) And a function for executing special RT state notification means by the display control device 81).

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by the privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result winning is determined by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the circuit body, A result that is a result winning is set, and a mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and a game is created that varies the degree of advantage by changing the presence or absence of a win depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification The

  In this case, the state notification by the specific notification unit is started when the state is changed to the specific gaming state where the state notification is easily performed, and the state notification by the specific notification unit is also ended when the specific gaming state is ended. In other words, if the presence / absence of the notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game state is the specific game state. For example, a game without being aware of the fact that the game has entered the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has been seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to enjoy the game based on the mode notification equally.

  On the other hand, as described above, if the start of the state notification is timed, whether or not the state notification is finally started (until the operation of the next game is allowed). In this case, as a player, it is only necessary to determine whether or not notification during the state is started when the operation of the next game after the start game is allowed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the degree of attention of the start game itself is lowered. Therefore, in this gaming machine, in addition to the notification during the state, in the middle of the start game, which is the timing before the notification during the state is started, the timing when the transition lottery is won, etc. (mainly the start timing of the start game) ), A special notification corresponding to the content of the specific game state can be executed by a specific notification means. By doing in this way, paying attention to whether or not the notification during the state is started by the specific notification means, for the player who is interested in the next game of the start game, the start game of the interest Can be moved to.

  Feature AB2. In the case where the special notification is performed at the first timing by the special notification means and the case where the special notification is performed at the second timing which is a timing later than the first timing, The gaming machine according to the feature AB1, wherein the particular game state is a target for which notification during the state is started by the specific notification unit.

  According to the said structure, the advantage of the specific game state used as the notification object in the state started after that differs with the timing at which the special alerting | reporting means is performed. In this way, interest in the special notification to the special notification means can be increased with a simple configuration.

  Feature AB3. The feature AB2 is characterized in that the special notification means is more likely to perform the special notification at the second timing than the first timing such that the content of the specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the later the timing for executing the special notification, the easier it is to enter a specific gaming state with a content advantageous to the player. Therefore, in the start game, while expecting that the special notification will not be executed earlier, The advance operation of the start game can be performed while expecting the notification during the state to start before the operation of the next game is permitted. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game with different expectations in stages by associating the game progress and the expectation in the start game.

  In addition, since it is premised on a timed notification that the notification during the state is started before the operation of the next game after the start game is allowed, a special notification that is performed before the notification during the state If the execution timing is delayed, the more advantageous the player is, the closer the execution / start timing of the special notification and in-state notification is closer to the player. In this way, it is possible to make awareness of the start of notification during the state using the advantage of the specific gaming state and the difference in execution timing of the special notification, and the degree of freedom of the notification mode is compared. Even if the notification is made in a relatively small state, the impression of the notification can be greatly changed.

Feature AB4. As the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different advantages for the player,
The special notification means can easily perform the special notification at a first timing when the specific gaming state that is a target of notification during the state to be started is a predetermined first predetermined state, When the specific gaming state to be notified during the state to be started is a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state, the second game timing is different from the first timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to facilitate special notification.

  According to the above configuration, if the notification timing at which the special notification is easily performed is varied depending on the type of the specific gaming state, the type of the specific gaming state that is subsequently shifted from the notification timing (in-state notification is started) is predicted. , And the game is diversified.

  Feature AB5. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB4, wherein the special notification unit is capable of executing the special notification based on a predetermined operation of the stop operation unit.

  According to the above configuration, the special notification can be associated with the operation of each stop operation means until the notification during the state is performed, and the special notification is issued in the situation that the lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state is won. The stop operation means can be operated with expectation to be performed.

  In particular, in a gaming machine to which a game using a result in which a privilege given depending on the stop order among the stop operation modes is added, the player's eyes tend to go only in the operation order of each stop operation means. There is a possibility that the original gaming nature of the slot machine, such as operating each stop operating means to stop the design, will be lost. In that respect, as described above, if the special notification is performed based on the operation of the stop operation means, a passive game such as operating the stop operation means in the instructed order to stop the circuit body. In addition to the above, it is possible to realize an active gameability such as operating a stop operation means to generate a special notification, and increasing each player's attention to each operation by stopping each stop operation means. It is possible to reignite or secure the original gaming characteristics of the slot machine such as operating the means to stop the pattern.

Feature AB6. The stop operation means can be displaced from the initial position to the operation position,
The drive control means controls the drive so as to stop the corresponding rotating body based on the stop operation means being operated from the initial position to the operation position.
The predetermined stop operation means is moved from the operation position by the special notification means, rather than the case where the special notification is performed based on the operation of the predetermined stop operation means from the initial position to the operation position. The gaming machine according to feature AB5, wherein when the special notification is made based on returning to the initial position, the content of the specific gaming state tends to be advantageous to the player.

  According to the above configuration, after the stop of the circulating body rather than the special notification being made while stopping the rotating body, on the assumption that the corresponding rotating body stops by displacing the stop operation means to the operation position It is advantageous for the player to perform special notification. In other words, it is more advantageous to stop the circling body and watch the stop event as a set with the special notification than when only the special notification is performed before the stop. It is possible to reinforce the impression that was advantageous by having appeared.

  Feature AB7. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB6, wherein the special notification unit is capable of executing the special notification by the specific notification unit as the specific notification unit.

  According to the above configuration, not only is the configuration concentrated, but the level of interest in special notifications is increased using the high level of interest in state notifications, or the level of interest in special notifications is used. Thus, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the notification during the state, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to both notifications.

Feature AB8. The specific notification means is configured to be able to switch between a light-off state and a light-on state,
The specific gaming state notification means starts notification during the state by switching the specific notification means from the unlit state to the lighting state, and switches the specific notification means from the lighting state to the unlit state. It is to end the medium notification,
The special notification unit performs the special notification using a timing of switching the specific notification unit from the unlit state to the lighting state when notification during the state is started. Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, the specific notification unit is realized by a simple configuration of switching between the extinguishing state and the lighting state, and in addition to the simple configuration, by the special notification by the special notification unit such as a difference in timing of switching to the lighting state. It is possible to enhance the production effect. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both conflicting effects such as simplification of the configuration and improvement of the production effect.

Feature AB9. In the situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (first BB) including the specific result, and the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won, the transition position corresponding to the transition result in the valid position If the picture combination is not stopped and the privilege corresponding to the transition result is not granted by the privilege granting means, the game that has won the transition result is regarded as the winning game, and the transition result winning can be reserved Reservation means (function to execute the process of step S609 by the main controller 101),
In a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, a privilege corresponding to the transfer result is granted by the privilege granting means by stopping the pattern combination for transfer at the effective position; The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB8, wherein the game is a start game.

  According to the above configuration, when the winning of the transition result is reserved, the number of games for which special notification can be executed is increased, and the execution timing of the special notification is diversified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the fun of the game, such as predicting / obtaining the content of the specific gaming state that is the subject of the state notification by the special notification.

  Note that, regarding the “transition result”, “when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result and the transition picture combination corresponding to the transition result stops at the effective position, it is advantageous for the player. By limiting the “transition to the advantageous state (bonus state)”, the so-called jackpot result (bonus) that can be reserved by the reservation means is further clarified.

  Feature AB10. The special notification means is capable of executing the special notification in a game from the winning game to the start game in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, since special notification is performed in the game from the winning game to the start game, the game is prevented from being extended while the specific result winning is reserved. In other words, by making the winning of the transition result reserved, it is possible to realize the gameability of extending the game for judging whether or not the result is a transition and maintaining the expectation, but the retained game is long. As expected, the effect of sustaining the expectation can be expected. On the other hand, if the reserved game is lengthened, the delay is likely to occur, and the attention may be lowered. In that respect, if the configuration is such that the special notification is executed during the reservation as described above, it is possible to make it difficult to produce the feeling of extension, and to effectively maintain the expectation by the reservation.

  Feature AB11. The special notification means can execute the special notification based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined notification response result in a situation where the winning of the transition result is reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine according to Feature AB10, wherein there is a game machine.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to make an interest in the lottery result of each game being reserved. In other words, if the configuration is such that the special notification is not performed as an effect during the reservation but the special notification is made based on the lottery result of the reserved lottery means, each game being reserved is awaiting the special notification or the transition result award. This makes it possible to give meaning to the lottery of each game.

Feature AB12. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result (for example, a strong watermelon single role) that does not include the transition result among the specific results, the game in which the lottery result is the first specific result is Is the starting game,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result (for example, strong watermelon + first BB duplicate role) including the transition result among the specific results, the game in which the shift result winning is established is the start game. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB9 to AB11.

  According to the above configuration, whether or not the reservation is made differs depending on the type of the specific result. In this way, there is a case where the execution of the special notification and the start of the notification during the state are reserved, and the case where the execution of the special notification and the start of the notification during the state are not reserved, the execution and the state of the special notification. The start mode of the medium notification is greatly diversified.

  Feature AB13. The gaming machine according to Feature AB12, wherein a common picture combination at the effective position can be stopped in the game won in the first specific result and the game won in the second specific result. .

  According to the above configuration, it is impossible to determine whether or not the reservation of the execution of the special notification and the start of the notification during the state is reserved from the stop point. Thereby, even if a special notification or an in-state notification is not performed when a common picture combination is stopped, a sense of expectation can be maintained in the subsequent game.

  Feature AB14. The gaming machine according to feature AB13, wherein the common symbol combination can be stopped even when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result and the shift lottery is not won.

  According to the above configuration, in the case of winning the first specific result, the common symbol combination is stopped regardless of whether or not the lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state is won, and the stopping result is common. Therefore, even if it is the same stoppage, a pattern in which special notification and in-state notification are performed without being reserved by the reservation means, and a pattern in which special notification and in-state notification are performed after being reserved by the reservation means, In addition, a pattern in which neither special notification nor in-state notification is performed is added. In this way, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation that special notification and in-state notification will be performed not only in a game in which the common picture combination is stopped, but also in subsequent games.

Feature AB15. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is a winning combination when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed as the mode notification by the predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB14, wherein:

  According to the said structure, the order alerting | reporting regarding the stop order of several circulating bodies as an aspect alert | report may be performed. By doing in this way, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefits of the mode notification even for a player who is not good at the eye-pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circling body.

The above-described configuration is as follows: “When each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets A second stop order different from the first stop order as each of the second stop operation modes. When the second result winning is established by operating the above, the second privilege (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small role winning in the 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given can be shown more clearly.

  Feature AB16. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB15, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (a precursor mode) that is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition is set.

  According to the said structure, the variation of a specific game state is diversified, and game property improves. In addition, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved depending on the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, the notification is started by the specific notification means when the specific game state is entered, so that the game ends without being noticed even though the specific game state is entered. It is possible to suitably avoid such an event. In other words, if the state has shifted to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous state of the high frequency state is specified. By adopting a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and to expect the staging effect and the interest improvement described in the characteristic AB1.

<Characteristic AC group>
Features AC1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the transfer lottery means for executing the lottery for shifting to the specific gaming state (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) When,
Based on the fact that the specific notification means (eight display segment N8) is turned on based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, the state notification is started, and the specific gaming state ends. Specific gaming state notifying means (a function for executing section display first processing to section display fourth processing by the main control device 101) for terminating notification during the state by setting the specific notifying means to an extinguished state;
With
In the situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state is won, the specific game state notifying unit is a specific picture combination corresponding to the specific result at the effective position. When the game is stopped, a game corresponding to the specific result can be given by the privilege granting unit as a start game, and at least before the operation of the next game after the start game is allowed, The notification during the state by the specific notification means is started,
A gaming machine comprising limiting means (a function of executing a third section display third process by the main control device 101) capable of limiting the operation of the next game after the start game.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by the privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result winning is determined by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the circuit body, A result that is a result winning is set, and a mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and a game is created that varies the degree of advantage by changing the presence or absence of a win depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification The

  In this case, the state notification by the specific notification unit is started when the state is changed to the specific gaming state where the state notification is easily performed, and the state notification by the specific notification unit is also ended when the specific gaming state is ended. In other words, if the presence / absence of the notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game state is the specific game state. For example, a game without being aware of the fact that the game has entered the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has been seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to enjoy the game based on the mode notification equally.

  On the other hand, if it does as mentioned above, the timing which can start alerting | reporting during a state will become short, it will become a monotonous start effect which cannot anticipate the production effect at the time of start, or it will be started when the said timing becomes short It can be a concern that things themselves are missed. In this respect, since the gaming machine includes a restricting unit capable of restricting the operation of the next game after the start game, the operation of the next game is restricted. It can be noticed that notification is performed, and if the operation of the next game is restricted in this way, the period during which the notification can be started during the state will be extended, Diversification of the start mode of the medium notification is achieved.

Features AC2. Providing progress processing execution means (function for executing normal processing by the main control device 101) for performing progress processing of the game,
By the restriction by the restriction means, the execution of a specific process (a function for executing a payout control process by the main control device 101) in the progress process in the start game is restricted. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, by restricting the execution of the specific process among the progress processes of the start game, the progress of the start game is limited, and thus the operation of the next game of the start game is allowed to be permitted. You can do that. By doing in this way, while ensuring the independence of each game, it is possible to reflect the event of transition to the specific game state that occurred in the start game in the next game after the start game.

  Features AC3. The gaming machine according to Feature AC1 or Feature AC2, wherein an operation in the start game is also restricted during a restriction period in which the restriction by the restriction means is performed.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to limit the progress of the start game by restricting the operation of the start game, thereby restricting that the operation of the game next to the start game is allowed. . By doing in this way, while ensuring the independence of each game, it is possible to reflect the event of transition to the specific game state that occurred in the start game in the next game after the start game.

  Feature AC4. The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC3, wherein the specific gaming state notifying unit is capable of starting notification during the state during a restriction period by the restricting unit.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to recognize that the notification during the state is started through the operation being restricted, and to appropriately confirm the start of the notification during the state.

Feature AC5. A restriction period setting means (a function for executing a freeze setting process in the section display third process by the main control device 101) for setting a length of a restriction period in which the restriction by the restriction means is performed;
The restriction period setting means is configured so that a period from when restriction by the restriction means is started until notification during the state is started corresponds to the content of the specific gaming state that is a notification target during the state notification. The gaming machine according to Feature AC4, wherein the length of the restriction period can be set.

  According to the above configuration, the period from the time when the operation of the next game after the start game is permitted to the time until the notification during the state is started is associated with the content of the specific gaming state, and thus, is limited. It is possible to give a strong interest to the length of the period from the time point, and by increasing the degree of attention to the length of the period, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the start of notification during the state.

  Feature AC6. The gaming machine according to feature AC5, characterized in that the restriction corresponding to the predetermined operation performed by the player is restricted by the restriction by the restriction means.

  According to the above configuration, the player can operate as compared to the configuration in which the control corresponding to the operation performed by the player is limited, so that the progress of unilateral processing on the gaming machine side is limited. It becomes difficult to understand the restriction start timing. Therefore, in the configuration in which the length of the limited period is important as in the feature AC5, it is difficult to clearly grasp the length, and it is assumed that the in-state notification start timing (period length) is temporary. Even if it is not preferable for the player, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation until the player enters the specific gaming state.

Feature AC7. A restriction period setting means (a function for executing a freeze setting process in the section display third process by the main control device 101) for setting a length of a restriction period in which the restriction by the restriction means is performed;
The time limit setting means is configured so that a period from the start of the notification during the state to the end of the restriction by the restriction means corresponds to the content of the specific gaming state corresponding to the notification during the state by the specific gaming state notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features AC4 to AC6, wherein the length of the limited period can be set so as to correspond.

  According to the above configuration, since the period from the start of the state notification until the operation of the next game is permitted corresponds to the content of the specific gaming state, the player first starts the state notification. When attention is paid to this and notification during the state is started, attention is paid to the timing at which the operation is allowed, and it is possible to produce a time-dependent or step-by-step effect.

  Feature AC8. The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC7, wherein the specific gaming state notifying unit is capable of starting notification during the state in a period different from the limiting period by the limiting unit.

  According to the above-described configuration, if the operation is restricted in the first place, it is considered that the degree of attention is increased in terms of production. It is possible to improve the attention level evenly.

Feature AC9. A restriction period setting means (a function for executing a freeze setting process in the section display third process by the main control device 101) for setting a length of a restriction period in which the restriction by the restriction means is performed;
The limitation period setting unit can set the length of the limitation period according to the advantage of the specific gaming state corresponding to the notification during the state by the specific gaming state notification unit. The gaming machine according to any one of AC8.

  According to the above-described configuration, the period during which the notification of the next game is permitted and the notification during the state can be started is ensured, and the length of the secured period (limit period) is that of the specific game state. It corresponds to the advantage. In this way, it is possible to further increase the throb feeling by the length of the period in which the throb feeling increases, such as whether notification during the state is started. For example, if the specific gaming state is more advantageous as the period during which the notification during the state can be started is longer, not only the enjoyment of whether the notification during the state is started but also the period lasts long even if it is not started. In addition, the longer the period that has not been started, the longer the period that has not been started. In addition, if the specific gaming state is more advantageous as the period during which the notification during the state can be started is shorter, the period during which the notification during the state is enjoyed is condensed, and it is possible to provide a strong throbbing feeling. Become.

  Feature AC10. The feature AC9 according to the feature AC9, characterized in that the limit period setting means is more likely to set the limit period longer as the contents of the specific gaming state corresponding to the notification during the state by the specific gaming state notification means are more advantageous. Gaming machine.

  In general, based on the premise that the longer the performance time, the easier it will be for the player, as described above, the longer the time limit, the more advantageous the content of the specific gaming state for the player. Such a configuration can be easily understood by the player and can be balanced with other effects.

Feature AC11. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is a winning combination when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notifying means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC10, wherein:

  According to the said structure, the order alerting | reporting regarding the stop order of several circulating bodies as an aspect alert | report may be performed. By doing in this way, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefits of the mode notification even for a player who is not good at the eye-pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circling body.

The above-described configuration is as follows: “When each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets A second stop order different from the first stop order as each of the second stop operation modes. When the second result winning is established by operating the above, the second privilege (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small role winning in the 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given can be shown more clearly.

  Feature AC12. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC11, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (a precursor mode) that is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition is set.

  According to the said structure, the variation of a specific game state is diversified, and game property improves. In addition, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved depending on the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, the notification is started by the specific notification means when the specific game state is entered, so that the game ends without being noticed even though the specific game state is entered. It is possible to suitably avoid such an event. In other words, if the state has shifted to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous state of the high frequency state is specified. By adopting a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and to expect the staging effect and the interest improvement described in the characteristic AC1.

<Feature AD group>
Features AD1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the transfer lottery means for executing the lottery for shifting to the specific gaming state (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) When,
Based on the fact that the specific notification means (eight display segment N8) is turned on based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, the state notification is started, and the specific gaming state ends. Specific gaming state notifying means (function for executing section display first process to section display fourth process by the main control device 101) for terminating the notification during the state by setting the specific notifying means in an extinguished state;
With
The specific gaming state notifying means is
The lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, and in the situation where the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won, the specific result corresponding to the specific result is stopped at the effective position. A game that can be given a privilege corresponding to the bonus by the privilege granting unit is a start game, and at least a notification prior to allowing the operation of the next game after the start game is allowed, during the state notification by the specific notification unit Is a starting point,
When the first specific pattern combination stops at the effective position in the start game, the first means for starting the notification during the state by the specific notification means in the first mode (for example, main control at the time of winning the super attack mode) A function of executing a process of starting display of the section indicator at the time of the first stop-off operation of the stop-out game corresponding to the strong cherry in the device 101),
When the second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination stops at the effective position in the start game, the notification during the state by the specific notification means is changed to the second mode different from the first mode. The second means (for example, the function of executing the process of starting the display of the section indicator at the time of the third stop OFF operation of the stop-out game corresponding to the weak cherry in the main controller 101 when the super attack mode is won. )When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by the privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result winning is determined by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the circuit body, A result that is a result winning is set, and a mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and a game is created that varies the degree of advantage by changing the presence or absence of a win depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification The

  In this case, the state notification by the specific notification unit is started when the state is changed to the specific gaming state where the state notification is easily performed, and the state notification by the specific notification unit is also ended when the specific gaming state is ended. In other words, if the presence / absence of the notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game state is the specific game state. For example, a game without being aware of the fact that the game has entered the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has been seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to enjoy the game based on the mode notification equally.

  On the other hand, if the start of in-state notification is limited as described above, the start state of in-state notification may be simplified. However, there is a limit to diversify the start mode of state notification. In this regard, the present gaming machine is configured to vary the start mode of the state notification depending on the outcome of the stop in the start game, that is, the type of the specific result and the winning mode when the specific result is won. Thereby, it becomes possible to start the notification during the state in relation to the stopping appearance of each circling body, and the effect of the notification during the state can be greatly enhanced without requiring a change in the configuration of the specific notification means.

Features AD2. The identification result includes a first identification result (for example, strong cherry) and a second identification result (for example, weak cherry),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result is given by stopping the first specific pattern combination (triple cherry) at the effective position,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specific result, a privilege corresponding to the second specific result is given by stopping the second specific pattern combination (single cherry) at the effective position. A gaming machine according to feature AD1, characterized by:

  According to the above configuration, since the stop appearance differs depending on the type of the specific result, the game machine having the feature AD1 has a configuration in which the start state of the notification during the state differs depending on the type of the specific result. In this way, the pleasure of predicting the subsequent development is added while grasping what triggered the transition lottery to the specific gaming state as an opportunity, and the interest is improved.

Features AD3. A third specific result (for example, strong cherry) is included as the specific result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third specific result, a privilege corresponding to the third specific result is given by stopping the first specific pattern combination at the effective position, and the effective position The gaming machine according to Feature AD1 or Feature AD2, wherein a privilege corresponding to the third specific result is given by stopping the second specific pattern combination.

  According to the above configuration, even when the same third identification result is obtained, the first specific pattern combination is stopped and a winning is achieved, and the second specific pattern combination is stopped and the winning is achieved. The in-state notification start mode is different. By doing in this way, the interest in a stop appearance can be strengthened especially.

Feature AD4. The identification result includes a fourth identification result (for example, strong watermelon),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fourth specific result, a privilege corresponding to the fourth specific result is given by stopping the first specific pattern combination at the effective position, and the effective position The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD3, wherein a privilege corresponding to the fourth specific result is not given when the second specific pattern combination is stopped.

  According to the above configuration, in the case of the fourth specific result, the case where the first specific pattern combination is stopped and a winning is achieved, and the case where the second specific pattern combination is stopped and the winning is not achieved, so-called missing. Depending on the case, the start mode of the state notification differs. By doing in this way, the interest in a stop appearance can be strengthened especially.

Feature AD5. The first means is the first before the stop of the specific circuit that stops at the specific number (second for strong cherry and weak cherry) of each of the circular bodies (for example, the first when the super attack mode is won with strong cherry) In the stop OFF operation), the notification during the state can be started by the first aspect,
The second means is capable of starting notification during the state according to the second aspect after the stop of the specific orbiting body (for example, when the super attack mode is won by a weak cherry and at the time of 3 stop OFF operation). The gaming machine according to any one of features AD2 to AD4.

  According to the said structure, the game result used as the opportunity of alerting | reporting in a state will differ depending on whether the start timing of alerting | reporting in a state is before or after the stop of a predetermined circulating body. That is, in a game in which each stop operation means is operated to stop the circuit body, when the state notification is started based on the first specific result, the state notification is started before the specific operation, 2 When the notification during the state is started based on the identification result, the notification during the state is started after the specific operation. By doing in this way, for example, in a situation where it is not possible to determine whether the result of the current game is the first specific result winning or the second specific result winning before the specific operation Even if notification during the state is not started at that time, it is possible to provide enjoyment such as connecting hope to the fact that the lottery for shifting to the specific gaming state is won. In addition, if it is determined that the game result of this time is the first specific result winning, the game will proceed while hoping that the notification during the state is started by the specific operation. If it is conceivable and it is determined that the result of the current game is the second specific result winning, the game proceeds while hoping that the notification during the state is started at the specific operation transition It is thought that. Furthermore, even if the third specific result winning or the fourth specific result winning can be determined, whether the notification during the state is started by the specific operation or after that The game progresses while predicting the start timing of in-state notification from the relationship (commonness, dissimilarity) of the stop event between the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination. In any case, the period of interest for whether or not the in-state notification is started is aggregated, and it becomes possible to add inflection to the game.

  Feature AD6. The first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination may share a pattern that stops at the effective position up to the specific number (for example, the left reel of strong cherry and weak cherry). A gaming machine according to AD5.

  According to the above configuration, the first specific result winning or the second specific result winning cannot be determined up to the specific number from the stop event, and the fourth specific result has not been missed until the specific number. Therefore, even if the notification during the state is not started until the specific circuit is stopped, the lottery for the transition to the specific game state is won in performing the stop operation of the specific or subsequent circuit You can play games while connecting your wishes.

  Feature AD7. The gaming machine according to Feature AD5 or Feature AD6, wherein the first specific design combination and the second specific design combination have different designs that stop at the effective position in the specific circuit body.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to determine whether the first specific result winning or the second specific result winning is made by stopping the specific circuit body, determining the winning mode of the third specific result, or determining the fourth specific result. It is possible to determine whether or not a prize has been won. For this reason, in particular, in a situation where notification during the state has not started before that, it is possible to stop the specific circuit body, for example, the transition to the specific gaming state triggered by the first specific result or the fourth specific result winning It becomes a turning point to determine whether there is no possibility of winning the lottery. Therefore, the stop operation of the specific circling body is more interesting, and the interest is improved.

Feature AD8. The identification result includes a first identification result (for example, strong cherry) and a second identification result (for example, weak cherry),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result is given by stopping the first specific pattern combination (triple cherry) at the effective position,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specific result, a privilege corresponding to the second specific result is given by stopping the second specific pattern combination (single cherry) at the effective position,
In the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means, if the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specified result, the transfer lottery to the specific gaming state is won with a first probability, and the lottery result of the lottery means is the first lottery result. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD7, wherein if the result is two specific results, a lottery for shifting to the specific gaming state is won with a second probability.

  According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the transfer lottery varies depending on the type of the specific result. Therefore, when the stop event that results in winning the transition lottery is stopped, and when the stop result is difficult to win the transfer lottery. The possibility that in-state notification will be started in the start game differs depending on when the outcome stops. If it does in this way, it will be judged from a stop appearance including the ease of the start in the case where notification in a state is started in the 1st mode, and the case where notification in a state is started in the 2nd mode. It is possible to increase the interest in stopping the game.

Feature AD9. The identification result includes a first identification result (for example, strong cherry) and a second identification result (for example, weak cherry),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result is given by stopping the first specific pattern combination (triple cherry) at the effective position,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specific result, a privilege corresponding to the second specific result is given by stopping the second specific pattern combination (single cherry) at the effective position,
The contents of the specific gaming state may be different between the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means based on the first specific result and the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means based on the second specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of AD8.

  According to the above configuration, when the first specific pattern combination is stopped and notification during the state is started in the first mode, and when the second specific pattern combination is stopped and notification during the state is performed in the second mode. The content of the specific gaming state when started is different depending on when it is started. Therefore, when the first specific pattern combination is stopped and when the second specific pattern combination is stopped, the joy is different, and it is possible to further increase the interest in the stop appearance.

Feature AD10. The specified result includes a payout result in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and a replay result that allows the next game to be replayed without requiring a new game medium,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result, the predetermined number of game media are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the first specific result by stopping the first specific picture combination at the effective position. I,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the replay result, the replay can be performed as a privilege corresponding to the replay result by stopping the second specific picture combination at the effective position,
When the specific result is the payout result, the first means notifies the user of the state until accepting an accepting operation (bet operation) for accepting a game medium in a game subsequent to the start game as the first mode. Start
When the specific result is the re-game result, the second means starts the in-state notification until the start operation of the start operation means is permitted in the next game of the start game as the second aspect. The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD9.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first specific symbol combination is stopped if it is a payout result and the second specific symbol combination is stopped if it is a replay result, the notification in the state starts depending on which symbol combination is stopped The end of timing is different. More specifically, when transitioning to the specific game state based on the payout result, the in-state notification is issued until the first specific pattern combination is stopped in the start game and the game medium accepting operation of the next game is permitted. When the game is started and transitions to the specific game state based on the replay result, the second specific pattern combination is stopped in the start game and the start notification of the start operation means of the next game is permitted until the start operation is permitted. Is started. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the end-stage variations until the in-state notification is started. In addition, by associating the variation at the end with the stop event, the manager of the game hall or the like wants to check which result caused the notification during the state to be started. For example, the first specific pattern combination is stopped. In such a case, when the in-state notification is started after the reception operation, etc., it is determined that the previous game is not the start game but the current game is the start game. Can be confirmed from the stoppage.

Feature AD11. The start operation unit is configured to allow the start operation by performing the reception operation on a predetermined reception unit (for example, the first credit insertion switch 56).
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the replay result and the second specific picture combination is stopped at the effective position, the position is visible via the display unit and is different from the effective position. A pattern of each orbiting body is attached so that the first specific pattern combination stops at a specific position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the replay result, means for enabling the replay by performing the accepting operation on the accepting means in the next game (when operating in the main controller 101) The gaming machine according to feature AD10, further comprising a function of executing a process of setting a bet flag.

  According to the above configuration, when the second specific pattern combination stops at the effective position and a replay result is won, the first specific pattern combination stops at a specific position different from the effective position. Therefore, it is difficult to visually determine whether a re-game result winning is established or whether a payout winning is established. Moreover, in the next game in which a re-game winning is established, it is possible to re-play the next game by performing a reception operation on a predetermined reception means, so whether or not a new game medium is required. Although there is a difference, the operation performed by the player in the next game is the same operation for the payout result and the re-game result. In this way, in the configuration in which the end timing of the in-state notification is different between the payout result and the re-game result, the player determines whether the in-state notification is started or started depending on which result. Can be difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to more enjoy the feeling of thrill of when the notification is started during the state.

  Feature AD12. In the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result winning, the first stop means for stopping the first specific picture combination (for example, at the time of winning the overlapping role of strong watermelon and bonus in the main control device 101 A function of executing a process of stopping a stop-out that becomes a bonus prize, and a second stop means for stopping the second specific picture combination (for example, when winning a duplicate combination of a strong watermelon and a bonus) 101. A gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD11, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of stopping a stop-out that becomes a watermelon winning in 101).

  According to the above configuration, there are a case where the first specific pattern combination is stopped and a case where the second specific pattern combination is stopped even with the same specific result. Therefore, even if it is the same specific result, there are a case where in-state notification is started in the first aspect and a case in which state notification is started in the second aspect, and even if the lottery result is the same Therefore, it is possible to expect the attention improvement effect by different stop appearances and different notification modes within a range in which the lottery result is not complicated.

  The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature AD5.

Feature AD13. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is a winning combination when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notifying means as the aspect notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD12, wherein:

  According to the said structure, the order alerting | reporting regarding the stop order of several circulating bodies can be performed as a mode alerting | reporting. By doing in this way, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefits of the mode notification even for a player who is not good at the eye-pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circling body.

The above-described configuration is as follows: “When each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets A second stop order different from the first stop order as each of the second stop operation modes. When the second result winning is established by operating the above, the second privilege (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small role winning in the 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given can be shown more clearly.

  Feature AD14. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD13, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (a precursor mode) that is won in the high-probability transition lottery and is before the transition is set.

  According to the said structure, the variation of a specific game state is diversified, and game property improves. In addition, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved depending on the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, the notification is started by the specific notification means when the specific game state is entered, so that the game ends without being noticed even though the specific game state is entered. It is possible to suitably avoid such an event. In other words, if the state has shifted to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous state of the high frequency state is specified. By adopting a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and to expect the staging effect and the interest improvement described in the feature AD1.

<Feature AE group>
Features AE1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
The lottery result is executed based on the fact that the lottery result is a predetermined specific result, and the lottery has the same winning probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, Transition lottery means (function to execute the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) for executing the transition lottery,
At least notification in the state by turning on the specific notification means (eight display segment N8) by the predetermined specific timing in the specific game in which the game state shifts to the specific game state is started, and the specific Based on the completion of the gaming state, the specific notification means is turned off to turn off the notification during the state. The specific gaming state notification means (the first display section display process to the fourth display section display process by the main control device 101). Function to execute)
With
The specific gaming state notifying means is
When winning the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state triggered by the first specific result (for example, strong watermelon) of the specific results, the first specific timing (timing for allowing bet operation) as the specific timing Start notification during the state,
When winning the lottery to shift to the specific gaming state triggered by a second specific result (for example, winning replay) different from the first specific result among the specific results, the specific timing is determined from the first specific timing. The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification during the state is started by the second specific timing that is later.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by the privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result winning is determined by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the circuit body, A result that is a result winning is set, and a mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and a game is created that varies the degree of advantage by changing the presence or absence of a win depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification The

  In this case, the state notification by the specific notification unit is started when the state is changed to the specific gaming state where the state notification is easily performed, and the state notification by the specific notification unit is also ended when the specific gaming state is ended. In other words, if the presence / absence of the notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game state is the specific game state. For example, a game without being aware of the fact that the game has entered the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has been seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to enjoy the game based on the mode notification equally.

  Here, the notification during the state is started at least by a specific timing in the specific gaming state to shift to the specific gaming state, and the end time of the notification start is determined. There is a risk that the sense of expectation for the game will fade at a stretch, and the degree of attention may be reduced in a game that can be in a specific gaming state. In that regard, in the above configuration, the end of the notification in the state is different depending on the game result that became the winning trigger of the transition to the specific gaming state, so even if one end is exceeded, The game can be continued while leaving a sense of expectation for the notification. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

Feature AE2. The lottery result by the lottery means includes a payout result in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and a replay result in which the next game can be replayed without requiring a new game medium,
The first specific result is the payout result;
The gaming machine according to Feature AE1, wherein the second specific result is the re-game result.

  According to the above configuration, the start / end time of the in-state notification by the specific gaming state notification means varies depending on whether the payout result or the re-game result. In this way, it is not necessary to set a special game result by using a conventional payout result or re-game result to make the start and end of notification during the state different, and with a relatively simple configuration, The effect of the feature AE1 can be achieved.

Feature AE3. The specific gaming state notifying means is
When the specific result is the payout result, the notification during the state is started with the timing for accepting a reception operation (bet operation) for receiving a game medium in the specific game as the first specific timing,
When the specific result is the replay result, the notification during the state is started with the timing at which the start operation of the start operation means is permitted in the specific game as the second specific timing. Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, the timing at which the player's operation is permitted is set as the end of each, the accepting operation is permitted if the payout result, and the starting operation is permitted if the regame result It is timing. Thus, by setting the timing at which the player's operation is allowed to end, it is possible to actively advance the game instead of waiting until the notification is started. In general, the re-game result is allowed to start without requiring an acceptance operation. However, since the end time is set together with the operation mode corresponding to each game result, the configuration becomes complicated. The above-described excellent effects can be achieved without any problems.

Feature AE4. The start operation unit is configured to allow the start operation by performing the reception operation on a predetermined reception unit (for example, the first credit insertion switch 56).
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result and the first specific pattern combination corresponding to the first specific result is stopped at the effective position, the privilege granting unit is configured as the predetermined It is a configuration that pays out a number of game media,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the replay result, and the second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination stops at the effective position, the position that can be visually recognized via the display unit The pattern of each orbiting body is attached so that the first specific pattern combination stops at a specific position different from the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the replay result, means for enabling the replay by performing the accepting operation on the accepting means in the specific game (the operation bet in the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to feature AE3, which has a function of executing a process of setting a flag.

  According to the above configuration, when the second specific pattern combination stops at the effective position and a replay result is won, the first specific pattern combination stops at a specific position different from the effective position. Therefore, it is difficult to visually determine whether a re-game result winning is established or whether a payout winning is established. Moreover, in the next game in which a re-game winning is established, it is possible to re-play the next game by performing a reception operation on a predetermined reception means, so whether or not a new game medium is required. Although there is a difference, the operation performed by the player in the next game is the same operation for the payout result and the re-game result. In this way, in the configuration in which the end timing of the in-state notification is different between the payout result and the re-game result, the player determines whether the in-state notification is started or started depending on which result. Can be difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to more enjoy the feeling of thrill of when the notification is started during the state.

Feature AE5. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and based on the fact that the transition picture combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position, the gaming state is advantageous for the player. Transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting to a state;
If the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the first reservation means (in step S609 by the main control device 101) for retaining the transition result winning until the transition picture combination stops at the effective position. Processing function), and
With
The specific result includes a third specific result of the replay result and the transition result,
The specific gaming state notification means, when shifting to the specific gaming state based on the overlap result, a second reservation that holds the start of notification during the state until the transition picture combination stops at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of features AE2 to AE4, characterized in that it comprises means (a function for executing section display first processing and section display fourth processing by the main control device 101).

  According to the above configuration, the lottery result includes the transition result (so-called jackpot result) that triggers the transition to the advantageous state, and also includes the duplicate result of the replay result and the transition result. And in the case of a duplicate result, a transition result winning is retained until a transition result winning of the re-game result and the transition result is established. In such a configuration, when transitioning to a specific gaming state based on the overlap result, the specific game that is a game transitioning to the specific gaming state is reserved until the game in which the transition result winning is established. By doing so, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the lottery to the specific game has been won based on the winner of the transition result among the duplicate results, and consistency with the fact that the winner of the transition result is reserved Sexuality can be secured.

  Feature AE6. When the specific gaming state notification means wins the lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state triggered by the third specific result of the specific results, the specific gaming state notification means notifies the in-state notification by the first specific timing as the specific timing. The gaming machine according to Feature AE5, which starts.

  According to the above configuration, when the specific game itself is also reserved as a result of the transfer result winning being reserved, the start / end of the state notification in the specific game matches that of the payout result. In this way, in the configuration (feature AE2) in which the start and end of in-state notification differ between the payout result and the replay result, by defining the start and end time in the third specific result that is the winning combination of the replay result and the transition result Even if the re-game is not given based on the winning of the transition result, it is possible to prevent the game operation and the start and end time from differing depending on the game result.

Feature AE7. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is a winning combination when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notifying means as the aspect notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features AE1 to AE6, wherein:

  According to the said structure, the order alerting | reporting regarding the stop order of several circulating bodies as an aspect alert | report may be performed. By doing in this way, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefits of the mode notification even for a player who is not good at the eye-pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circling body.

The above-described configuration is as follows: “When each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets A second stop order different from the first stop order as each of the second stop operation modes. When the second result winning is established by operating the above, the second privilege (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small role winning in the 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given can be shown more clearly.

Feature AE8. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set 101, a function to execute the winning probability setting process by 101)
The gaming machine according to any one of features AE1 to AE7, wherein the winning probability of the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means is the same winning probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. .

  According to the above configuration, there is no difference in the winning probability depending on the set value with respect to the specific gaming state, so even if any of the gaming machines installed in the gaming hall is selected, the equality of the game regarding the specific gaming state is Secured. By applying such a configuration to a configuration in which notification is uniformly started at the time of state transition by the specific notification unit, it is possible to further enhance the effect of ensuring equality.

  Feature AE9. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics AE1 to AE8, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (a precursor mode) that is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition is set.

  According to the said structure, the variation of a specific game state is diversified, and game property improves. In addition, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved depending on the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, the notification is started by the specific notification means when the specific game state is entered, so that the game ends without being noticed even though the specific game state is entered. It is possible to suitably avoid such an event. In other words, if the state has shifted to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous state of the high frequency state is specified. By adopting a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and to expect the staging effect and interest enhancement described in the feature AE1.

<Feature BA group>
Feature BA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the transfer lottery means for executing the lottery for shifting to the specific gaming state (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) When,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and based on the fact that the transition picture combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position, the gaming state is advantageous for the player. Transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting to a state;
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) holds the transition result winning until the transition picture combination stops at the effective position. Function to execute)
Limiting means (main control) for restricting the lottery execution by the transition lottery means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the situation where the transition result winning is retained by the reservation means (carry-over state) The function of executing the processing of step S702 by the apparatus 101),
In a situation where the gaming state is the specific gaming state and the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the lottery result by the lottery means is determined in advance as a special result (for example, special replays 1 and 2) The first control means for executing the stop control of each of the circulating bodies so that the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position (in the main control device 101, for example, the stop output of the black BAR double-alignment). A function to control the replay prize to be established)
In a situation where the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the winning of the transition result is reserved by the reservation means, the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result (for example, special replay). Second control means (in the main control device 101, for example, black BAR non-control) that executes stop control of each of the circulating bodies so that a second specific picture combination different from the first specific picture combination can be stopped at a position. A function to control the replay prize to be established at the stoppage to be stopped)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is granted by the bonus grant means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, it shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the transition result winning is reserved. In such a configuration, there is a case where the result of winning may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the circuit body, and a specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence / absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result, a transition lottery to the specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state can occur in each game, and the game performance is remarkably increased. improves.

  On the other hand, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, if it is a configuration for performing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, performing a stop operation so as not to stop the pattern combination for transition, etc. There is a possibility that an action to prevent the transition to the advantageous state from occurring easily and to generate an unlimited lottery to the specific gaming state may be performed. Then, the difference in the advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation that does not stop the transition picture combination and the player who cannot perform such a stop operation becomes remarkable, from the viewpoint of the fairness of the game It is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate by design, which is not preferable from such a viewpoint. Therefore, in a state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, the above-described intended payout rate can be obtained by limiting the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, and the fairness of the game Can be secured.

  In addition, by making it possible to reserve the winning result of the transition, if the game is played while suggesting it in production etc. in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state has been confirmed internally, against the transition to the advantageous state There is also a merit of sustaining expectations. However, since the lottery to the specific gaming state is not performed in the situation where the winning result is reserved by the reservation means, the expectation to the advantageous state can be improved, but from the viewpoint of the expectation to the specific gaming state Then, it can be said that the situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means is not preferable for the player.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, in the situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the stopping result at the special result winning is different depending on whether or not the transfer lottery to the specific gaming state is won. Yes. Specifically, if it is a specific gaming state and the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the stop result at the time of winning the special result is set as the first specific picture combination, and the normal gaming state, If the winning of the transition result is reserved by the reservation means, the stop result at the time of winning the special result is set as the second specific pattern combination. By doing in this way, even if the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is restricted, if the first specific picture combination appears, the transition to the specific gaming state will occur. It is understood that the player has won the transition lottery, and the game can be performed while maintaining a sense of expectation for the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature BA2. In a situation where the gaming state is the specific gaming state and the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, special means for making the frequency at which the first specific picture combination stops at the effective position (for example, The gaming machine according to the feature BA1, further comprising a function for executing the notification lottery process 1 in the display control device 81 and a lottery table for special RT states having different special replay winning probabilities.

  According to the above configuration, in the specific gaming state, the frequency at which the first specific picture combination stops can be changed by special means. For example, the first specific picture combination does not stop due to a special result winning. However, the specific gaming state is not completely denied, and a sense of expectation for the specific gaming state can be continued. That is, in the situation where the winning result is reserved by the reservation means, a game of predicting whether or not the specific gaming state is based on the stop frequency of the first specific picture combination is added, and Interest can be improved suitably.

  In addition, as a specific configuration of the above configuration, for example, “when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the first control unit executes the specific control that can stop the first specific picture combination Means for determining whether or not to perform (function of executing the notification lottery process 1 in the display control device 81), or means for changing the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result (the special replay winning probability is It is conceivable that at least one of different special RT state lottery tables) is provided.

  Feature BA3. The gaming machine according to Feature BA2, wherein the special means can vary the frequency at which the first specific picture combination stops according to the content of the specific gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, a game is added in which the content of the specific game state is predicted based on the stop frequency of the first specific picture combination in a situation where the winning of the transition result is reserved by the reservation means. In this way, not only whether or not the game is in a specific gaming state, but also the contents can be predicted from the stopping point, the gameability during the reservation is significantly improved.

Feature BA4. As the first specific pattern combination, the first type specific pattern combination (for example, black BAR single assortment) and the second type specific pattern combination different from the first type specific pattern combination (for example, black BAR off-temple) ) And are set,
The special means can vary the stop frequency of the first type specific picture combination and the second type specific picture combination according to the content of the specific gaming state. A gaming machine described in BA3.

  According to the above configuration, the content of the specific gaming state differs depending on whether the first type specific design combination of the first specific design combinations stops or the second type specific design combination stops. , It becomes possible to increase interest in stopping out.

Feature BA5. As the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different advantages for the player,
When the specific gaming state is the first predetermined state, the special means performs the special notification so that the first type specific picture combination is likely to stop, and the specific gaming state is the first predetermined state. The game machine according to feature BA4, wherein when the second predetermined state is different, the second type specific picture combination is easily stopped.

  According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature BA4 can be achieved with a specific configuration.

  Feature BA6. The special means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, by changing the execution frequency of the special notification (black BAR eye press notification effect) that can stop the first specific picture combination, The gaming machine according to any one of features BA2 to BA5, wherein the stop frequency of the first specific pattern combination is changed.

  According to the above configuration, since the stop frequency of the first specific pattern combination is adjusted depending on the presence / absence of notification, the suggestion that the mode is the pre-transition mode, teaching, and the like are performed as effects. Can be realized with a relatively easy configuration.

Feature BA7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the first specific picture combination can be stopped by the first control means when the circuit bodies are stopped in a first specific stop order. Control is performed so that the second specific picture combination can be stopped by the second control means when each of the circulating bodies is stopped in a second specific stop order different from the first specific stop order. I,
The gaming machine according to Feature BA6, wherein the special means performs a notification regarding the first specific stop order as the special notification.

  According to the above configuration, depending on the stop order at the time of winning the special result, whether the first specific pattern combination stops or the second specific pattern combination stops, the special means is a special notification Since the stop frequency of the first specific pattern combination is made different by giving notification regarding the first specific stop order corresponding to the first specific pattern combination, the stop operation mode including the stop order is used. Based on this, the affinity with the specific game state in which the degree of advantage changes is high, and it is easy for the player to understand that the special notification is an indication of the specific game state (pre-transition mode).

Feature BA8. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the specific circuit body in each of the circuit bodies is stopped at the first timing, the specific pattern constituting the first specific pattern combination is stopped at the effective position. It is possible to stop the specific circuit body at a second timing different from the first timing, and the specific picture cannot be stopped at the effective position.
The gaming machine according to Feature BA6 or Feature BA7, wherein the special means is capable of notifying that the specific circuit body is stopped at the first timing as the special notification.

  According to the above configuration, since the first specific pattern combination can be stopped by pressing the specific circuit body, the game machine can be stopped by aiming at the pattern to obtain a privilege. It is a configuration that is incorporated into effects such as suggestion and teaching of the game state. In this way, it is possible to make it seem as if the specific game state has been won by its own stop operation, and it is possible to increase the fun of the game (stop operation).

Feature BA9. The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the first specific pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, a special privilege (replay) is given as a privilege corresponding to the special result,
In any one of features BA6 to BA8, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the second specific picture combination stops at the effective position, the special privilege is given. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, when a special result is won, the stoppage may differ depending on the stop order or stop timing, but the benefits that can be obtained from any stop start (stop order, stop timing) are common. It becomes. By doing so, it is possible to ensure consistency with the fact that the lottery execution by the transfer lottery means is restricted in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means. In other words, since the advantage at the time of winning the specified result does not change due to special notification, even if the winning of the transfer result is intentionally delayed in the situation where the winning of the transfer result is reserved by the reservation means, the profit based on the specified result is unfair You will not enjoy it.

Feature BA10. First control means (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means and the mode notification means;
Second control means (display control device 81) having at least the special means;
Have
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result or the second result, the aspect notification is performed by the aspect notification means in the first control means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special notification by the special means in the second control unit is performed, while the mode notification by the mode notification unit in the first control unit is not performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA6 to BA9, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, particularly in the feature BA9 that cites the feature BA7, when notifying the stop order of the special results, it is possible to clarify the difference between the first result and the second result having different winning results. In other words, for the lottery means and mode notification means related to the player's profit, it is easy to take measures to suitably avoid fraud by concentrating on the first control means, and a function that mainly produces effects not related to profit Are concentrated in the second control means, and the functions are distributed. In such a configuration, if the special notification by the special means is a function on the second control means side, it is clarified that the change of the stop appearance based on the special result is not directly related to the profit, For example, when a design change or the like is performed with respect to the special means, it can be performed without requiring calculation of a new payout rate. Therefore, it is possible to achieve excellent game play by special means with a relatively easy configuration.

Feature BA11. Based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, the specific notification means (eight display segment N8) is turned on to start notification, and based on the end of the specific gaming state, A specific gaming state notifying unit (function for executing the first display of the section display to the fourth process of the section display by the main control device 101) that terminates the notification by setting the specific notifying means to the off state;
As the specific result, a duplicate result including the transition result (for example, strong cherry duplicate 1, strong watermelon duplicate 1, chance A duplicate 1) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplicate result and the transition to the specific gaming state is won, the specific gaming state notifying unit is brought into the advantageous state by stopping the transition picture combination. The transition game is a start game, the notification by the specific notification means is not started at a timing prior to the start game, and the specification is performed at a timing prior to allowing the operation of the next game of the start game. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA10, characterized in that notification by the notification means is started.

  According to the above configuration, when the transition to the specific gaming state is made, notification by the specific gaming state notifying means is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended, the notification is also ended. In other words, if the presence or absence of notification by the specific gaming state notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific gaming state is present. For example, even if the specific gaming state has been entered, it is not noticed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inequality between the player who ends the game and the player who is seated later on the game table where the game ends. Therefore, it is possible to have all the players enjoy the game based on the order notification equally.

  In addition, when the transition to the specific game state is based on the winning of the duplicate result including the transition result, the start of notification by the specific game state notification means until the start game in which the combination of patterns for transition stops and shifts to the advantageous state Is limited. In other words, as described above, in the situation where the inequality between players regarding the specific gaming state is eliminated, but the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the notification regarding the specific gaming state is also restricted, and the special result It is possible not to reduce the joy of the first specific picture combination appearing at the time of winning (the joy of knowing that the lottery for shifting to the specific gaming state is won). Therefore, while ensuring equality between players by the specific gaming state notification means, it is possible to suitably improve the gaming characteristics in a situation where the winning of the transition result by the reservation means is reserved.

Feature BA12. As the specific result, a non-overlapping result not including the transition result (for example, strong cherry, strong watermelon, chance A) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the non-overlapping result and the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won, the specific gaming state notifying unit sets the game won for the specific result as a start game, The gaming machine according to the feature BA11, characterized in that the notification by the specific notification means is started at a timing prior to allowing operation of the next game of the game.

  According to the above configuration, the case where the start of notification by the specific gaming state notification means is limited is limited to the time of overlapping winning with the transition result, and the game is ended despite the transition to the specific gaming state. It is possible to reduce such an event as much as possible. Therefore, the function which ensures the equality between players by providing a specific game state notification means can be improved more.

Feature BA13. As the duplication result, a first duplication result (for example, strong cherry duplication 1) that is a duplication result with a first identification result (for example, strong cherry) of the identification results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a first non-overlapping result (for example, strong cherry) that is a non-overlapping result of the first specific result (for example, strong cherry) of the specific results is set,
The privilege granting means
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the first duplicate result, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the first specific result has stopped at the effective position;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped at the effective position. A gaming machine according to Feature BA12, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, in the game won in the first duplicate result that becomes the duplicate winning of the first specific result and the transition result and the game won in the first non-overlapping result that becomes the single winning of the first specific result, In any case, since the first specific result winning combination can be stopped and the first specific result winning can be established, it is stopped whether the first duplicate result or the first non-overlapping result is won. It becomes difficult to judge from the appearance. On the other hand, in the notification by the specific gaming state notification means, if the first overlap result, the game in which the transition result winning is established is set as the start game, and if the first non-overlapping result is set, the game in which the first specific result winning is established. Let it be a starting game. Therefore, even if any of the results is used to win the lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state, an event may occur that the presence or absence (start timing) of the notification of the specific gaming state notification means is different. That is, even when the graphic combination for the first specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started before the operation of the next game of the game is permitted, the first specific determination is performed. The possibility that the pattern combination for the result is based on the first specific result in the first overlap result can be left, and the expectation is maintained even if the lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state is not won It becomes possible to make it.

  In addition, in this case, since it is possible to determine whether or not the lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state is won by the stoppage at the time of winning the special result, it is possible to attract a great interest in the subsequent stopout. .

Feature BA14. As the duplication result, a second duplication result (for example, strong watermelon duplication 1) that is a duplication result with the second identification result (for example, strong watermelon) of the identification results is set.
As the non-overlapping result, a second non-overlapping result (e.g., strong watermelon) that is a non-overlapping result of the second specific result (e.g., strong watermelon) among the specific results is set,
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second overlap result, a privilege corresponding to the second specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the second specific result has stopped at the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the second specific result is given based on the fact that the picture combination for the second specific result is stopped at the effective position. Is,
The gaming machine according to feature BA13, wherein the probability of winning the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means is different between the lottery based on the first specific result and the lottery based on the second specific result.

  According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means is taken into consideration in the game play of the feature BA13. That is, for example, if the first specific result is easier to win the transition lottery than the second specific result, the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped, and notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started. If not, the possibility of winning the specific gaming state is higher than when the picture combination for the second specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started, A sense of expectation for the appearance of a specific pattern combination is further increased. On the other hand, when the pattern combination for the second specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started, the surprise effect when the first specific pattern combination appears thereafter is enhanced. . As described above, by taking into account the winning probability of the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means, the gameability for predicting the presence or absence of a specific gaming state win from the stop event is significantly improved during reservation .

Feature BA15. As the duplication result, a third duplication result (for example, chance A duplication 1) that is a duplication result with the third identification result (for example, chance A) of the identification results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a third non-overlapping result (for example, chance A) that is a non-overlapping result of the third specific result (for example, chance A) of the specific results is set,
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the third identification result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the third identification result is stopped at the effective position;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the third specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the third specific result is stopped at the effective position. Is,
In the lottery by the lottery means, the ratio of the overlapping result and the non-overlapping result is the ratio of the first overlapping result and the first non-overlapping result, and the third overlapping result and the third non-overlapping result. The gaming machine according to Feature BA13 or Feature BA14, which is different in proportion.

  According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transition result is taken into account in the playability of the feature BA13 and the feature BA14. That is, for example, the ratio of the first overlap result and the first non-overlap result is higher than the ratio of the third overlap result and the third non-overlap result. If there is a high possibility of winning the transition result even if it is a result, the third combination is specified if the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started. There is a higher possibility that the winning of the transition result is reserved by the reservation means than when the picture combination for the result is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started. In other words, in the configuration of the feature BA14, if the result is a non-overlapping result and a specific gaming state, the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started in the game, and thus, for the first specific result as described above. If the symbol combination is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started, the possibility that the specific gaming state is won is higher than in the case of the symbol combination for the third specific result. As described above, by taking into account the probability of winning the result of the transition, the game performance for predicting the presence / absence of the specific gaming state from the game stoppage is significantly improved during reservation.

  Feature BA16. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA15, wherein the special result is a result that does not trigger the transition lottery to the specific gaming state by the transition lottery means.

  According to the above configuration, in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the transfer lottery to the specific gaming state is restricted, the result is different from the result that is the restriction target of the transfer lottery to the specific gaming state Thus, the notification of whether or not the lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state has been won (whether or not the mode is the pre-transition mode) is made by stopping the game. Therefore, it is possible to entertain purely without stopping the user from feeling a sense of loss due to the result of the restriction.

  Feature BA17. In the situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result winning is higher than the situation where the transfer result winning is not reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA16, characterized by:

  According to the above configuration, since the probability of a special result is high during the reservation, it is easy to play a game that enjoys whether the first specific picture combination stops or the second specific picture combination stops. Can do.

  Feature BA18. The privilege granting means replays as a benefit corresponding to the special result based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the picture combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. Or a payout of game media equal to or less than the number of bets of the game won by the special result.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a game in which a specific game state is estimated based on the stopping outcome without excessively increasing the advantage during reservation. In other words, for example, if the configuration is such that an increase in game media can be expected due to the benefits at the time of special results winning, it will be possible to enjoy profits by winning special results, and expect to win special results in anticipation of increase in gaming media It can be a barrier to gameplay, enjoying pure stoppage.

Feature BA19. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is a winning combination when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notifying means as the aspect notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA18, wherein:

  According to the said structure, the order alerting | reporting regarding the stop order of several circulating bodies as an aspect alert | report may be performed. By doing in this way, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefits of the mode notification even for a player who is not good at the eye-pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circling body.

The above-described configuration is as follows: “When each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets A second stop order different from the first stop order as each of the second stop operation modes. When the second result winning is established by operating the above, the second privilege (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small role winning in the 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given can be shown more clearly.

  Feature BA20. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA19, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (a precursor mode) that is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition is set.

  According to the said structure, the variation of a specific game state is diversified, and game property improves. In addition, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved depending on the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, the notification is started by the specific notification means when the specific game state is entered, so that the game ends without being noticed even though the specific game state is entered. It is possible to suitably avoid such an event. In other words, if the state has shifted to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous state of the high frequency state is specified. By adopting a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the effect of enhancing the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and enhancing the expectation for the specific gaming state described in the feature BA1.

<Feature BB group>
Feature BB1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When each said stop operation means is operated by the 1st stop operation aspect, the pattern combination of the 1st aspect corresponding to a 1st result can be stopped, and each said stop operation means is a said 1st stop operation aspect. When the second stop operation mode is different from the first combination, the pattern combination corresponds to the second result different from the first result, and the second mode is different from the pattern combination of the first mode. First operation mode result (for example, push order bell) that can stop the pattern combination,
When each said stop operation means is operated by the 3rd stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the said 3rd mode corresponding to a 3rd result can be stopped, and each said stop operation means is said 3rd stop operation. When operated in a fourth stop operation mode different from the mode, the pattern combination corresponding to the third result, which is different from the pattern combination in the third mode, can be stopped. And the second operation mode result (for example, special replay) is set,
A first mode relating to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode, or the third stop operation mode and the fourth stop operation mode based on a lottery result by the lottery means. Provided with first mode notifying means (function to execute the processing for pressing order notification by the display control device 81) capable of executing notification (push order notification effect) by the first notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Transition lottery means (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) for executing the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result; ,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and based on the fact that the transition picture combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position, the gaming state is advantageous for the player. Transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting to a state;
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) holds the transition result winning until the transition picture combination stops at the effective position. Function to execute)
Limiting means (main control) for restricting the lottery execution by the transition lottery means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the situation where the transition result winning is retained by the reservation means (carry-over state) The function of executing the processing of step S702 by the apparatus 101),
In a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation unit, the first mode notification by the first mode notification unit is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery unit is the second operation mode result. Possible special notification means (function to execute special RT notification processing by the display control device 81);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is granted by the bonus grant means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, it shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the transition result winning is reserved. In such a configuration, there are cases where the winning results may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the circuit body, and a specific game state is provided in which the advantage varies depending on the presence or absence of the first mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Yes. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result, a transition lottery to the specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state can occur in each game, and the game performance is remarkably increased. improves.

  On the other hand, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, if it is a configuration for performing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, performing a stop operation so as not to stop the pattern combination for transition, etc. There is a possibility that an action to prevent the transition to the advantageous state from occurring easily and to generate an unlimited lottery to the specific gaming state may be performed. Then, the difference in the advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation that does not stop the transition picture combination and the player who cannot perform such a stop operation becomes remarkable, from the viewpoint of the fairness of the game It is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate by design, which is not preferable from such a viewpoint. Therefore, in a state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, the above-described intended payout rate can be obtained by limiting the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, and the fairness of the game Can be secured.

  In addition, by making it possible to reserve the winning result of the transition, if the game is played while suggesting it in production etc. in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state has been confirmed internally, against the transition to the advantageous state There is also a merit of sustaining expectations. However, since the transfer lottery to the specific gaming state is not performed in the situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the player can be clearly understood that the transfer lottery is not performed. Is not preferred.

  In that respect, in the above configuration, the first mode notification based on the second operation mode result is executed even in the situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the transfer lottery to the specific gaming state is restricted. . Similar to the first operation mode result, the second operation mode result is set to have the same winning result depending on the stop operation mode, although the stop output varies depending on the stop operation mode. That is, if it is a 2nd operation mode result, even if it performs 1st mode alerting | reporting, a player's advantage will not change. Therefore, in the situation where the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is restricted as described above, if the first mode notification based on the second operation mode result is configured, the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. It is possible to execute the first mode notification within a range that does not contradict the purpose of limiting the lottery to transition to the specific gaming state, and the execution of the first mode notification makes it difficult to understand the situation where the transition lottery is limited. be able to. Therefore, the gameability during reservation can be improved while ensuring the fairness of the game.

  Feature BB2. The first mode notification means does not execute the first mode notification even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation unit. The gaming machine described in the feature BB1.

  According to the above configuration, the case where the first mode notification is executed in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means is the second operation mode result among the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result. Limited to certain cases. As described above, the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result may be different from the first operation mode result depending on the stop operation mode, while the second operation mode result is changed to the stop operation mode. Regardless, the same result wins. By doing in this way, in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved, while ensuring the significance of restricting the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, the first mode in the situation that is reserved Notification can be executed.

  Feature BB3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result, the first notification unit provides a second mode notification regarding the stop operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. Second mode notification means (function to execute the push forward processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by different second notification means (first display segment N1 to seventh display segment N7 in the instruction monitor 68). A gaming machine according to the feature BB1 or the feature BB2, which is provided.

  According to the above configuration, the first mode notification means executes the first mode notification for both the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result, while the second mode notification means sets the first operation mode result for the first operation mode result. Two-mode notification is executed. As described above, in the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result, the first operation mode result may have different winning results depending on the stop operation mode, while the second operation mode result is changed to the stop operation mode. Regardless, the same result wins. That is, in the first mode notification and the second mode notification, the second mode notification includes a change in the player's profit, and the first mode notification includes a change that does not cause a change in the profit. Then, for example, when the manager of the game hall monitors the relationship between the stop operation mode and the winning result, the second mode notification by the second notification unit may be monitored. Thus, by leaving the notification associated with the player's profit to the second mode notification, the first mode notification can be used as an effect notification, and the notification related to the profit can be used. The degree of freedom of notification is overwhelmingly increased, for example, notification is not performed.

Feature BB4. A first control device (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means and the second mode notification means;
A second control device (display control device 81) having at least the first mode notification means;
The gaming machine according to feature BB3, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, since the lottery means and the second aspect notification means directly related to the player's profit and the first aspect notification means for production are mounted on separate control devices, the structure related to the profit It is possible to take countermeasures against fraud intensively, and to suppress a local increase in processing load by distributing functions.

  The “second control device” is limited to “provided separately from the first control device”, whereby the effect of being a separate control device is more clearly exhibited.

Feature BB5. The predetermined notification means (eight display segment N8) is turned on based on the transition to the specific gaming state to start notification, and the predetermined notification is completed based on the end of the specific gaming state. Specific game state notifying means (function for executing section display first processing to section display fourth processing by the main control device 101) that terminates notification by turning the means off;
The first mode notification means can execute the first mode notification regardless of whether or not the notification by the specific gaming state notification unit is started, while the second mode notification unit is configured to execute the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature BB3 or Feature BB4, wherein the second mode notification can be executed on the condition that notification by the notification means is started.

  According to the above configuration, regarding the specific gaming state, when the transition to the specific gaming state is made, notification by the specific gaming state notifying unit is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended, the notification is also ended. In other words, if the presence / absence of notification is confirmed by the predetermined notification means by the specific gaming state notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific gaming state is present. Regardless of this, it is possible to eliminate an inequality between a player who finishes the game without noticing it and a player who has subsequently seated on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to enjoy the game based on the special notification equally.

  In addition, regarding the first mode notification and the second mode notification, the second mode notification is configured such that the second mode notification can be executed on the condition that the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started. The significance of being directly linked to profits is further strengthened, and the importance of monitoring the second mode notification is increased along with the notification by the specific gaming state notification means. Further, since the first mode notification can be executed regardless of whether or not the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started, the degree of freedom in performing the first mode notification is improved, and the function as an effect is more enhanced. It becomes possible to raise.

Feature BB6. The transition lottery means can execute a transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the transition result winning,
In the situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the start of notification by the specific gaming state notification means corresponding to the result of the lottery transition to the specific gaming state executed based on the transition result winning, Means characterized in that it has means (for example, step S4204, step S4208, function of executing section display fourth process in main controller 101) capable of limiting at least until the transition result winning is established. A gaming machine according to BB5.

  According to the above configuration, the consistency between the fact that the lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state is restricted in the situation where the winning of the transition result is reserved by the reservation means and the second mode notification is not performed in the situation. It is possible to guarantee, and in the situation where the winning of the transition result is reserved, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the player has also won the transition lottery to the specific gaming state.

  Feature BB7. By performing the first mode notification by the special notification means, the specific content corresponding to the result of the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery executed by the transfer result retained by the reservation means is suggested. The gaming machine according to Feature BB6, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, in the situation where the winning of the transition result is reserved, the first mode notification based on the second operation mode result is performed, thereby entering the specific gaming state triggered by the reserved transition result. Since the content of the transfer lottery is suggested, even if execution of the transfer lottery to the specific gaming state is restricted in such a situation, it is possible to prevent the interest in the transfer lottery from being interrupted.

Feature BB8. As the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different advantages for the player,
In a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, when the result by the transfer lottery means executed based on the transfer result winning is a transfer winning to the first predetermined state, the special notification means Executes the first mode notification about the third stop operation mode in which the third order picture combination in the second operation mode result can be stopped,
In a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the result of the transfer lottery means executed based on the transfer result winning is a transfer winning to a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state. If so, the special notification means executes the first mode notification about the fourth stop operation mode in which the pattern combination in the fourth order in the second operation mode result can be stopped. The gaming machine according to feature BB7.

  According to the said structure, it becomes possible to alert | report the winning content of the lottery to transfer to a specific game state using the 2nd operation mode result which changes a stop operation mode and a stop appearance changes. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to realize new game play using the aspect notification in a situation where the aspect notification directly linked to the profit can be limited.

Feature BB9. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a plurality of types of regame results that can be given as a privilege by the privilege granting means are provided,
As the plurality of types of replay results, the replay is given by the privilege granting means, and a transition replay result (for example, promotion replay) that triggers the transition of the gaming state, and the replay is given by the privilege granting means. A non-transition replay result (for example, special replay) that is granted and does not trigger a game state transition,
The gaming machine according to any one of features BB1 to BB8, wherein the second operation mode result is the non-transitional re-game result.

  According to the above configuration, in the situation where the transfer result winning is reserved, even if the second operation mode result winning is achieved, the gaming state does not shift, and the re-game is simply given. The effect of the feature BB1 is within the range that does not contradict the purpose of restricting the transition lottery to the specific gaming state in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by performing the mode notification using such a game result. It becomes possible to play.

Feature BB10. The first operation mode result indicates that when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result is When each stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the second corresponding to the second result becomes possible. The pattern combination of the aspect can be stopped,
When the second operation mode result is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result is obtained. When the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode, the fourth operation corresponding to the third result is possible. The pattern combination of the aspect can be stopped,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result or the second operation mode result, the first mode notification unit is configured to perform the first stop sequence and the second stop sequence, or the third mode. A first order notification (push order notification effect) regarding the stop order including the stop order and the fourth stop order can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification. BB1 Thru | or the game machine of any one of BB9.

  According to the said structure, the order alerting | reporting regarding the stop order of several circulating bodies as an aspect alert | report may be performed. By doing in this way, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefits of the mode notification even for a player who is not good at the eye-pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circling body.

In addition, the said structure is as follows. "When the said 1st operation mode result is operated in the 1st stop order as each said stop operation means as said 1st stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the said 1st mode is carried out. The first result winning is achieved by stopping, and a first privilege (for example, nine medals awarded based on the first small role winning in the 3-bet game) is awarded by the privilege granting means, and each said stop When the operating means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the second mode is stopped and the second result prize is awarded. A second privilege different from the first privilege (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small role winning in the 3-bet game) is granted by the privilege granting means,
The second operation mode result indicates that, when each stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode stops and the third result A winning is established, a third privilege (replay) is granted by the privilege grant means, and each stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode. If it is, the pattern combination of the fourth aspect is stopped and the third result winning is established, and the third privilege is granted by the privilege granting means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result or the second operation mode result, the first mode notification unit is configured to perform the first stop sequence and the second stop sequence, or the third mode. The first notification means (push order notification effect) regarding the stop order including the stop order and the fourth stop order can be executed by the first notification means as the first aspect notification. " In this case, it is possible to show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given more clearly.

  Feature BB11. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics BB1 to BB10, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (a precursor mode) that is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition is set.

  According to the said structure, the variation of a specific game state is diversified, and game property improves. In addition, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved depending on the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, the notification is started by the specific notification means when the specific game state is entered, so that the game ends without being noticed even though the specific game state is entered. It is possible to suitably avoid such an event. In other words, if the state has shifted to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous state of the high frequency state is specified. By adopting a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of enhancing the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and enhancing the expectation for the specific gaming state described in the feature BB1.

<Feature BC group>
Feature BC1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the transfer lottery means for executing the lottery for shifting to the specific gaming state (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) When,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and based on the fact that the transition picture combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position, the gaming state is advantageous for the player. Transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting to a state;
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) holds the transition result winning until the transition picture combination stops at the effective position. Function to execute)
Limiting means (main control) for restricting the lottery execution by the transition lottery means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the situation where the transition result winning is retained by the reservation means (carry-over state) The function of executing the processing of step S702 by the apparatus 101),
When execution of the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means is restricted by the restricting means, a special notification regarding the transfer lottery by the already executed transfer lottery means is made based on the specific result winning that has been restricted by the restriction means. Executable special notification means (function for executing notification release processing and special RT notification processing by the display control device 81);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is granted by the bonus grant means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, it shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the transition result winning is reserved. In such a configuration, there is a case where the result of winning may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the circuit body, and a specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence / absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result, a transition lottery to the specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state can occur in each game, and the game performance is remarkably increased. improves.

  On the other hand, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, if it is a configuration for performing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, performing a stop operation so as not to stop the pattern combination for transition, etc. There is a possibility that an action to prevent the transition to the advantageous state from occurring easily and to generate an unlimited lottery to the specific gaming state may be performed. Then, the difference in the advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation that does not stop the transition picture combination and the player who cannot perform such a stop operation becomes remarkable, from the viewpoint of the fairness of the game It is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate by design, which is not preferable from such a viewpoint. Therefore, in a state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, the above-described intended payout rate can be obtained by limiting the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, and the fairness of the game Can be secured.

  In addition, by making it possible to reserve the winning result of the transition, if the game is played while suggesting it in production etc. in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state has been confirmed internally, against the transition to the advantageous state There is also a merit of sustaining expectations. However, since the lottery to the specific gaming state is not performed in the situation where the winning result is reserved by the reservation means, the expectation to the advantageous state can be improved, but from the viewpoint of the expectation to the specific gaming state Then, it can be said that the situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means is not preferable for the player.

  In particular, if the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result determined in advance, the player can not feel the benefit that the transfer lottery is usually performed, the player may feel lost, and the transfer result win The more games that are reserved, the more likely that such an event will occur. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is restricted at the time of winning the specific result, if it is configured to notify the transition lottery performed before that, it will be as if at the time of winning the specific result It is possible to make it appear as if the transition lottery to the specific gaming state has been performed, and it becomes difficult to realize that the transition lottery is limited. Therefore, it is possible to preferably realize the gameability by the advantageous state and the specific game state.

  Feature BC2. The game machine according to feature BC1, wherein the special notification means relates to a transfer lottery by the executed transfer lottery means, and is capable of notifying the contents not yet notified.

  According to the said structure, the alerting | reporting content by a special alerting | reporting means becomes more limited. More specifically, the notification content by the special notification means is not related to the notified lottery transfer, but is related to the unnotified lottery, so that it is executed in a game close to the game in which the transfer lottery is limited although it is a specific result. The notification regarding the transition lottery that has been made is made, and since it is a content in a close game, the effect of making it seem as if the transition lottery has been performed based on the specific result can be further enhanced.

Feature BC3. The transition lottery means can execute the transition lottery of the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result,
In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, a means capable of restricting execution of the notification regarding the lottery by the transition lottery means triggered by the transition result (in the display control device 81, for example, in the attack mode) The game machine according to Feature BC1 or Feature BC2, which has a function of executing a process of setting a precursor mode when winning.

  According to the above configuration, when the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means is performed based on the transfer result, since the execution of the notification regarding the transfer lottery is limited, in the situation where the transfer result winning is carried over by the reservation means, When a specific result is won, it is possible to reduce the number of events such as the fact that the transfer lottery has not been performed before that.

  Feature BC4. Any one of the characteristics BC1 to BC3 is characterized in that the special notification means can execute the special notification in a game after the game that has been subjected to the specific result that has been restricted by the restriction means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, in the game after the game that has won the specific result in which the transfer lottery is restricted, the notification regarding the transfer lottery that has been executed before the game that has achieved the specific result is performed. By doing in this way, the game in which the special notification is performed is not limited to the game that has won the specific result, the special notification is diversified, and the result of the transition lottery is not preferable for the player. Even if there is, it is possible to entertain the game after the specific result while expecting a change in the content of the special notification.

  Feature BC5. The special notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result in a game after the game that has been the specific result restricted by the restriction means, The gaming machine according to feature BC4, wherein the special notification can be executed.

  According to the above configuration, when the special notification is performed, it is considered that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result. Therefore, even if the transition result winning is established without becoming the special result, the notification is performed. It is possible to bring a sense of expectation to the contents of the special notification that should have been made. In other words, in a configuration in which the result of the transition lottery is favorable for the player by performing the special notification, the reason that the special notification is not performed even if the special notification is not performed is the result of the transition lottery. In addition to the case where is not preferable for the player, there are cases where the special result is not won, and the expectation can be maintained. In particular, since the timing of the special notification is limited to the situation where the winning of the transition result is reserved by the reservation means, there will be many scenes in which the special result will not be obtained before winning the transition result, and the above special notification will be performed. There is a high possibility that it will not be a factor. Therefore, the effect of sustaining the above expectation can be suitably achieved.

Feature BC6. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the first control means (in the main control device 101, for example, controls each circuit body so that the first special picture combination can be stopped at the effective position. A function to control the replay winning at the stop of the black BAR double match),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the second body is controlled so that the second special picture combination different from the first special picture combination can be stopped at the effective position. A control means (a function of controlling the main control device 101 so that a replay winning is established at a stop turn where the black BAR is not stopped, for example);
With
The gaming machine according to feature BC5, wherein the special notification means executes a notification capable of stopping the first special picture combination as the special notification.

  According to the said structure, special alert | report is performed by the stop appearance at the time of special result winning. By doing in this way, in the structure which performs special alerting based on the special result winning, there is no need for a structure such as changing the probability of winning the special result before and after the winning of the specific result. There is an effect.

  Feature BC7. The special notification means is a game that has won the specific result, in which the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means is restricted by the restriction means in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means. The game BC1 is characterized in that the game after the game before the event game is more easily notified of the transfer lottery by the executed transfer lottery means. The gaming machine according to any one of BC6.

  According to the above configuration, when a specific result win is made in a situation where the transfer result win is reserved, the game that has won the specific result is set as an opportunity game, and the game after the game before the trigger game is executed. The notification regarding the completed transfer lottery is easily performed. By doing in this way, even if it is an already executed transition lottery, it is possible to make it seem as if the transition lottery has been performed based on the specific result of the trigger game.

Feature BC8. Multiple types of the specific results are set,
According to the type of the specific result in which the transition lottery by the transition lottery unit is restricted by the restriction unit, the special notification unit is a game after the game before the trigger game, The gaming machine according to the feature BC7, characterized in that it is possible to vary the probability that the notification regarding the transition lottery by the already-executed transition lottery means is easily performed.

  According to the above configuration, depending on the type of the specific result being reserved, the probability that the notification regarding the transition lottery is likely to be performed in the game after the game that has won the specific result is different. The notification according to can be made as an effect in line with the actual situation of the transfer lottery. Specifically, for example, as a specific result, it is common that there are a result that is easy to win the transition lottery and a result that is difficult to win, and the change in the notification rate during reservation is adjusted according to the winning probability. Thus, it is possible to further strengthen the impression as if the transition lottery has been performed based on the specific result of the opportunity game.

  Feature BC9. Means (fourth section display by the main control device 101) capable of executing notification regarding the lottery by the transition lottery means that have already been executed when the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and then the transition result winning is established. The gaming machine according to any one of features BC1 to BC8, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of

  According to the above configuration, even if the specific result is not won during the reservation, or even if the specific result is won, the special notification is made based on the special result winning, such as the feature BC5. Even if the transition result winning is established without notification, it is possible to reduce the number of events such as shifting to an advantageous state without performing notification related to the lottery by the executed transition lottery means. By doing in this way, the alert | report regarding the lottery by a transfer lottery means can be performed suitably.

Feature BC10. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is a winning combination when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notifying means as the aspect notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features BC1 to BC9, wherein:

  According to the said structure, the order alerting | reporting regarding the stop order of several circulating bodies as an aspect alert | report may be performed. By doing in this way, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefits of the mode notification even for a player who is not good at the eye-pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circling body.

The above-described configuration is as follows: “When each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets A second stop order different from the first stop order as each of the second stop operation modes. When the second result winning is established by operating the above, the second privilege (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small role winning in the 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given can be shown more clearly.

  Feature BC11. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features BC1 to BC10, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (a precursor mode) that is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition is set.

  According to the said structure, the variation of a specific game state is diversified, and game property improves. In addition, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved depending on the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, the notification is started by the specific notification means when the specific game state is entered, so that the game ends without being noticed even though the specific game state is entered. It is possible to suitably avoid such an event. In other words, if the state has shifted to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous state of the high frequency state is specified. By adopting a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of enhancing the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and enhancing the expectation for the specific game state described in the feature BC1.

<Feature BD group>
Feature BD1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the transfer lottery means for executing the lottery for shifting to the specific gaming state (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) When,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and based on the fact that the transition picture combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position, the gaming state is advantageous for the player. Transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting to a state;
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) holds the transition result winning until the transition picture combination stops at the effective position. Function to execute)
Limiting means (main control) for restricting the lottery execution by the transition lottery means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the situation where the transition result winning is retained by the reservation means (carry-over state) The function of executing the processing of step S702 by the apparatus 101),
With
As the gaming state, a plurality of replaying states (particularly, the 5th RT state to the 8th RT state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined replaying result are different from the normal gaming state are set.
A re-gaming state transition means capable of shifting a gaming state to one of the plurality of re-gaming states when a specific condition including a winning condition for holding the transition result winning by the reservation means is satisfied ( In the special RT state process of the main controller 101, a function of executing a process of shifting to any one of the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state),
When the game state is shifted to the replay state by the replay state transition means, selection means (a special RT of the main controller 101) that can select the replay state to be shifted based on a specific event related to the specific game state. In the state process, a function for executing the process of setting the RT state depending on the presence / absence of the challenge mode winning flag, the attack mode winning flag, and the special zone winning flag),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is granted by the bonus grant means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, it shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the transition result winning is reserved. In such a configuration, there is a case where the result of winning may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the circuit body, and a specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence / absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result, a transition lottery to the specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state can occur in each game, and the game performance is remarkably increased. improves.

  On the other hand, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, if it is a configuration for performing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, performing a stop operation so as not to stop the pattern combination for transition, etc. There is a possibility that an action to prevent the transition to the advantageous state from occurring easily and to generate an unlimited lottery to the specific gaming state may be performed. Then, the difference in the advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation that does not stop the transition picture combination and the player who cannot perform such a stop operation becomes remarkable, from the viewpoint of the fairness of the game It is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate by design, which is not preferable from such a viewpoint. Therefore, in a state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, the above-described intended payout rate can be obtained by limiting the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, and the fairness of the game Can be secured.

  In addition, by making it possible to reserve the winning result of the transition, if the game is played while suggesting it in production etc. in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state has been confirmed internally, against the transition to the advantageous state There is also a merit of sustaining expectations. On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the pattern combination for transition itself, there will be many cases where the execution of lottery related to a specific state will be restricted as a result of the result, and the player will feel lost. obtain. Therefore, based on the situation where such a situation can occur, that is, the situation where the winning of the transition result is reserved in the reservation means, the re-playing state in which the probability of a predetermined re-playing result changes, so-called RT state In addition to the configuration to be shifted, the type of the replay state is selected based on a specific event related to the specific game state. By doing in this way, a game such as predicting a specific event related to a specific gaming state from the type of re-gaming state is added, and the execution of the lottery related to the specific gaming state is restricted as a specific result, It is also possible to entertain a game relating to a specific game state. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Feature BD2. The transition lottery means can execute the transition lottery based on the transition result winning,
The gaming machine according to feature BD1, wherein the specific event is a content of the transition lottery performed based on the winning of the transition result.

  According to the said structure, in the structure which transfers to a re-game state based on a transfer result winning, the re-game state to transfer changes with the contents of the transfer lottery performed based on the said transfer result winning. By doing in this way, the game of predicting the content of the transfer lottery from the transferred re-game state can be suitably realized.

Feature BD3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay), the means (main control device 101) controls each circuit body so that the specific replay pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position. Function to execute reel control processing in
The gaming machine according to the feature BD1 or the feature BD2, wherein the frequency of the combination of the specific replaying picture patterns is different depending on the type of the replaying state selected by the selection unit.

  According to the above-described configuration, the stop frequency of the specific replay pattern combination that may appear when the specific replay result is won differs depending on the type of replay state. By doing in this way, it is possible to perform a game such as predicting the type of replay state from the stop frequency of the pattern combination for specific replay, thereby predicting a specific event related to the specific game state Become.

  Feature BD4. The gaming machine according to feature BD3, wherein a probability of the specific replay result varies depending on a type of the replay state.

  According to the above configuration, since the winning probability itself of the specific replay result is different, the appearance rate of the pattern combination for the specific replay may be different depending on the type of the replay state. In this way, for example, it is not necessary to control whether or not to stop the combination of the specific replay picture patterns according to the stop order, the stop timing, or the like when the specific replay result is won. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game in which a specific event for a specific game state is predicted from the appearance rate of a pattern combination for a specific re-game with a relatively simple configuration.

  Feature BD5. Regardless of the type of the replaying state, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means any one of the replaying results is the same probability or almost the same probability. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, in the situation where the winning of the transition result is reserved, in order to realize the game of predicting a specific event for the specific gaming state, the advantages of the re-gaming state to be transferred during the reservation are made different. There is no need. Therefore, it is possible to realize the gameability for the specific game state without considering the payout rate or the like.

  Note that the “same probability or almost the same probability” includes not only the case where the probability is completely the same, but also the difference in the probability that the player hardly feels the difference in the probability.

Feature BD7. The specific condition includes a non-winning condition that is established without the transfer result winning being reserved by the reservation means (for example, a duplicate role that is BB non-winning),
The lottery in the replay state selected by the selection means based on the fact that the non-winning condition is satisfied and the replay state selected by the selection means based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD6, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the means becomes any one of the re-game results is the same probability or substantially the same probability.

  According to the above configuration, the re-game state that shifts based on the fact that the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the re-play state that is not so have the same probability or almost the same probability as the re-game result. Become. By doing in this way, when playing a game such as predicting whether or not the transition result winning is reserved when transitioning to the re-gaming state, it cannot be predicted from the winning probability of the re-game result In this way, the prediction game can be made heavy.

Feature BD8. A normal replay result (normal replay) is set as the replay result that can be won in the normal game state,
A specific replay result (special replay) is set as the replay result that can be won in the replay state,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the normal replay result, the means for controlling each circuit body so that the combination of the symbols for normal replay can be stopped at the effective position (reel control of the main controller 101) In the process, a function to execute a process of winning a replay when the normal replay is stopped, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay), the means (main control device 101) controls each circuit body so that the specific replay pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position. In the reel control process, for example, a function of executing a replay winning process at the stop of the black BAR stop),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay), a means (main control device) for controlling each circuit body so that the normal replay picture combination can be stopped at the effective position A function to execute a replay winning process in the reel control process 101)
With
8. The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD7, wherein the frequency of stopping the graphic combination for the specific replay varies depending on the type of the replay state selected by the selection unit.

  According to the above configuration, in the gameability of predicting the type of the replay state from the appearance rate of the pattern combination for the specific replay, even if the specific replay result is won, the same stop appearance as the normal replay result May occur. By doing this, the specific replay pattern combination is stopped or the normal regame pattern combination is stopped at the time of winning the specific replay result without changing the winning probability of the specific replay result. It is possible to change the appearance rate of the pattern combination for the specific replay only by making them different. Therefore, with a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to realize the gameability of predicting the type of replay state from the appearance rate of the pattern combination for specific replay and thereby predicting a specific event related to the specific game state. it can.

Feature BD9. The transition lottery means can execute the transition lottery based on the transition result winning,
The transition result includes a first transition result and a second transition result,
As the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different advantages for the player,
The transition lottery means, when executing the transition lottery based on the first transition result winning, performs a transition lottery to the first predetermined state in the specific gaming state, and based on the second transition result winning When executing the transition lottery, the transition lottery to the second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state of the specific gaming state,
The re-gaming state transition means shifts to the first re-gaming state of the plurality of re-gaming states on condition that the first transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, and the reservation means causes the first re-game state to be transferred. One transition result BD1 to BD8, characterized in that a transition is made to a second replaying state different from the first replaying state among the plurality of replaying states on condition that the winning result is reserved. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the said structure, the kind of transition result, the kind of re-game state, and the content of the specific game state in which a transfer lottery is performed are respectively linked | related. In other words, an event occurs in which the player enters the first replaying state despite the winning of the second transition result, or the player enters the second replaying state despite winning the first transferring result. Absent. Therefore, the transparency of the game is ensured, and a game that predicts the specific game state from the type of re-game state can be suitably realized.

Feature BD10. Based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, a predetermined notification means (eight display segment N8) is turned on to start notification, and based on the end of the specific gaming state, Specific game state notifying means (function for executing section display first processing to section display fourth processing by the main control device 101) for terminating notification by setting a predetermined notifying means to an extinguished state;
When the game state is shifted to the replay state by the replay state transition means, means for restricting the start of notification by the specific game state notification means (when the display control device 81 wins the attack mode or the like, the sign mode Function to execute the process of setting
The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD9, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, regarding the specific gaming state, when the transition to the specific gaming state is made, notification by the specific gaming state notifying unit is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended, the notification is also ended. In other words, if the presence / absence of notification is confirmed by the predetermined notification means by the specific gaming state notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific gaming state is present. Regardless of this, it is possible to eliminate an inequality between a player who finishes the game without noticing it and a player who has subsequently seated on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to enjoy the game based on the special notification equally.

  In addition, when transitioning to the re-gaming state by the re-gaming state transition unit, the start of notification by the specific gaming state notification unit may be limited. In this way, it is preferable to play a game in which a specific event related to a specific gaming state is predicted from the type of the replaying state when the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the state is changed to the replaying state. Can be executed. That is, when the notification is started by the specific gaming state notification means, in the configuration in which the presence or absence of the transition to the specific gaming state is set as the specific event, the specific event is predicted by the notification by the specific gaming state notification means. It is because it will be grasped soon.

Feature BD11. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is a winning combination when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notifying means as the aspect notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD10, wherein:

  According to the said structure, the order alerting | reporting regarding the stop order of several circulating bodies as an aspect alert | report may be performed. By doing in this way, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefits of the mode notification even for a player who is not good at the eye-pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circling body.

The above-described configuration is as follows: “When each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets A second stop order different from the first stop order as each of the second stop operation modes. When the second result winning is established by operating the above, the second privilege (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small role winning in the 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given can be shown more clearly.

  Feature BD12. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics BD1 to BD11, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (a precursor mode) that is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition is set.

  According to the said structure, the variation of a specific game state is diversified, and game property improves. In addition, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved depending on the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, the notification is started by the specific notification means when the specific game state is entered, so that the game ends without being noticed even though the specific game state is entered. It is possible to suitably avoid such an event. In other words, if the state has shifted to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous state of the high frequency state is specified. By adopting a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the effect of enhancing the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and enhancing the expectation for the specific gaming state described in the feature BD1.

Feature BD13. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the transfer lottery means for executing the lottery for shifting to the specific gaming state (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) When,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and based on the fact that the transition picture combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position, the gaming state is advantageous for the player. Transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting to a state;
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) holds the transition result winning until the transition picture combination stops at the effective position. Function to execute)
Limiting means (main control) for restricting the lottery execution by the transition lottery means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the situation where the transition result winning is retained by the reservation means (carry-over state) The function of executing the processing of step S702 by the apparatus 101),
With
As the gaming state, a plurality of replaying states (particularly, the 5th RT state to the 8th RT state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined replaying result are different from the normal gaming state are set.
The plurality of replay states are set such that the probabilities of specific replay results among the replay results are different,
The transition lottery means can execute a transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the transition result winning,
A re-gaming state transition means capable of shifting a gaming state to one of the plurality of re-gaming states when a specific condition including a winning condition for holding the transition result winning by the reservation means is satisfied ( In the special RT state process of the main controller 101, a function of executing a process of shifting to any one of the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state),
When the game state is shifted to the replay state by the replay state transition means, selection means (main control) capable of selecting the replay state to be shifted in accordance with the winning expectation of the lottery for transition to the specific game state In the special RT state processing of the device 101, a function of executing processing for setting the RT state depending on the presence / absence of a challenge mode winning flag, an attack mode winning flag, and a special zone winning flag),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is granted by the bonus grant means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, it shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the transition result winning is reserved. In such a configuration, there is a case where the result of winning may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the circuit body, and a specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence / absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result, a transition lottery to the specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state can occur in each game, and the game performance is remarkably increased. improves.

  On the other hand, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, if it is a configuration for performing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, performing a stop operation so as not to stop the pattern combination for transition, etc. There is a possibility that an action to prevent the transition to the advantageous state from occurring easily and to generate an unlimited lottery to the specific gaming state may be performed. Then, the difference in the advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation that does not stop the transition picture combination and the player who cannot perform such a stop operation becomes remarkable, from the viewpoint of the fairness of the game It is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate by design, which is not preferable from such a viewpoint. Therefore, in a state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, the above-described intended payout rate can be obtained by limiting the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, and the fairness of the game Can be secured.

  In addition, by making it possible to reserve the winning result of the transition, if the game is played while suggesting it in production etc. in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state has been confirmed internally, against the transition to the advantageous state There is also a merit of sustaining expectations. On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the pattern combination for transition itself, there will be many cases where the execution of lottery related to a specific state will be restricted as a result of the result, and the player will feel lost. obtain. Therefore, based on the situation where such a situation may occur, that is, the situation where the winning of the transition result is reserved in the reservation means, any one of the plurality of replay states having different probabilities of being a specific replay result is determined. In addition, the type of the re-gaming state is selected according to the winning expectation degree of the lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state. By doing in this way, games such as predicting and grasping the type of re-gaming state from the winning probability of the specific re-game result and predicting the winning expectation of the lottery to the specific game state are added, and the specific result Thus, even in a situation where the execution of the lottery relating to the specific gaming state is restricted, it becomes possible to entertain the game relating to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, with respect to the feature BD13, the configurations of the features BD1 to BD12 may be applied individually or may be applied in combination.

<Feature BE group>
Feature BE1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the transfer lottery means for executing the lottery for shifting to the specific gaming state (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) When,
The notification by the specific notification means (eight display segment N8) is started based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the notification by the specific notification means is ended when the specific gaming state ends. Specific gaming state notifying means (function for executing section display first processing to section display fourth processing by the main control device 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and based on the fact that the transition picture combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position, the gaming state is advantageous for the player. Transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting to a state;
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) holds the transition result winning until the transition picture combination stops at the effective position. Function to execute)
With
As the specific result, a duplicate result including the transition result (for example, strong cherry overlap 1, strong watermelon overlap 1, chance A overlap 1) and a non-overlapping result not including the transition result (for example, strong cherry, strong watermelon, Chance A) is set,
The specific gaming state notifying means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the non-overlapping result, and the winning lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state is won, the game winning the non-overlapping result is set as the start game, and the operation of the game next to the start game Means for starting notification by the specific notification means at a timing prior to permitting the function (function of executing the section display first processing in the main control device 101);
A game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplicate result or the transition result, and when the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is won, the transition to the advantageous state is caused by the stop of the transition picture combination The notification by the specific notification unit is not started at the timing before the start game, and the notification by the specific notification unit is not started at the timing before the operation of the next game of the start game is allowed. Means for starting (function of executing the section display fourth process in the main controller 101);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by the privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result winning is determined by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the circuit body, A result that is a result winning is set, and a mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and a game is created that varies the degree of advantage by changing the presence or absence of a win depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification The

  In this case, the notification by the specific notification means is started when the state shifts to the specific gaming state where the state notification is easily performed, and the notification by the specific notification means is also ended when the specific gaming state ends. In other words, if the presence / absence of the notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game state is the specific game state. For example, a game without being aware of the fact that the game has entered the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has been seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to enjoy the game based on the mode notification equally.

  In addition, the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is to start a game that can win a lottery result that has won the winning lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state as a start game, and allow operation of the next game after the start game. Is started before, and the notification start timing is timed notification. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce as much as possible the end of the game despite winning the lottery for the transition to the specific game state.

  On the other hand, if the transition lottery notification is timed as described above, the result of the transition lottery can be clearly determined by whether or not the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started. In addition, it can be said that the production is not interesting.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is a trigger for the transition to the advantageous state, and the result of duplication with the transition result (so-called jackpot) that can win the winning until the winning is established And a non-overlapping result that is not an overlap with the transition result, and the notification start by the specific gaming state notifying means is different between the overlapping result and the non-overlapping result.

  More specifically, when a lottery for a transition to a specific gaming state is won in response to a non-overlapping result, the game that has won the non-overlapping result is set as the start game, and before the operation of the next game is allowed. When the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started and the winning lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state is triggered by the result including the transition result (mainly the duplicate result), the transition pattern corresponding to the transition result The game in which the combination stops and shifts to the advantageous state is set as the start game, and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started before the operation of the next game is permitted.

  By doing in this way, even if the stop game corresponding to the result that triggers the transition lottery to the specific game state appears, even if the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started in the game, Since the possibility of the duplicate result remains, it is possible to make notification with a high effect while making the notification by the specific gaming state notification means time-limited. Therefore, interest improvement can be aimed at suitably.

Feature BE2. As the duplication result, a first duplication result (for example, strong cherry duplication 1) that is a duplication result with a first identification result (for example, strong cherry) of the identification results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a first non-overlapping result (for example, strong cherry) that is a non-overlapping result of the first specific result (for example, strong cherry) of the specific results is set,
The privilege granting means
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the first duplicate result, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the first specific result has stopped at the effective position;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine described in the feature BE1.

  According to the above configuration, in the game won in the first duplicate result that becomes the duplicate winning of the first specific result and the transition result and the game won in the first non-overlapping result that becomes the single winning of the first specific result, In any case, since the first specific result winning combination can be stopped and the first specific result winning can be established, it is stopped whether the first duplicate result or the first non-overlapping result is won. It becomes difficult to judge from the appearance. On the other hand, in the notification by the specific gaming state notification means, if the first overlap result, the game in which the transition result winning is established is set as the start game, and if the first non-overlapping result is set, the game in which the first specific result winning is established. Let it be a starting game. Therefore, even if any of the results is used to win the lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state, an event may occur that the presence or absence (start timing) of the notification of the specific gaming state notification means is different. That is, even when the graphic combination for the first specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started before the operation of the next game of the game is permitted, the first specific determination is performed. The possibility that the pattern combination for the result is based on the first specific result in the first overlap result can be left, and the expectation is maintained even if the lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state is not won It becomes possible to make it.

Feature BE3. As the duplication result, a second duplication result (for example, strong watermelon duplication 1) that is a duplication result with the second identification result (for example, strong watermelon) of the identification results is set.
As the non-overlapping result, a second non-overlapping result (e.g., strong watermelon) that is a non-overlapping result of the second specific result (e.g., strong watermelon) among the specific results is set,
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second overlap result, a privilege corresponding to the second specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the second specific result has stopped at the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the second specific result is given based on the fact that the picture combination for the second specific result is stopped at the effective position. Is,
The gaming machine according to feature BE2, wherein the probability of winning the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means is different between the lottery based on the first specific result and the lottery based on the second specific result.

  According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means is taken into consideration in the game play of the feature BE2. That is, for example, if the first specific result is easier to win the transition lottery than the second specific result, the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped, and notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started. Otherwise, there is a higher possibility of winning the transition than the case where the pattern combination for the second specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started, and the first specific pattern Expectation for the appearance of the combination is further increased. On the other hand, when the pattern combination for the second specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started, the surprise effect when the first specific pattern combination appears thereafter is enhanced. . As described above, the entertaining probability of the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means is taken into account, and the game of predicting the result of the transfer lottery from the stop event is significantly improved during reservation.

Feature BE4. As the duplication result, a third duplication result (for example, chance A duplication 1) that is a duplication result with the third identification result (for example, chance A) of the identification results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a third non-overlapping result (for example, chance A) that is a non-overlapping result of the third specific result (for example, chance A) of the specific results is set,
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the third identification result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the third identification result is stopped at the effective position;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the third specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the third specific result is stopped at the effective position. Is,
In the lottery by the lottery means, the ratio of the overlapping result and the non-overlapping result is the ratio of the first overlapping result and the first non-overlapping result, and the third overlapping result and the third non-overlapping result. The gaming machine according to the feature BE2 or the feature BE3, which is different in proportion.

  According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transition result is also taken into account in the playability of the features BE2 and BE3. That is, for example, the ratio of the first overlap result and the first non-overlap result is higher than the ratio of the third overlap result and the third non-overlap result. If there is a high possibility of winning the transition result even if it is a result, the third combination is specified if the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started. There is a higher possibility that the winning of the transition result is reserved by the reservation means than when the picture combination for the result is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started. In other words, in the configuration of the feature BE3, if the result is a non-overlapping result and a specific gaming state, the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started in the game. If the symbol combination is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started, the possibility that the specific gaming state is won is higher than in the case of the symbol combination for the third specific result. As described above, by taking into consideration the probability of winning the transition result, the stop game is enjoyed, so that the gameability for predicting the result of the transfer lottery from the stop event during the reservation is remarkably improved.

Feature BE5. As the duplication result, a fourth duplication result (eg, middle bell duplication 1) that is a duplication result with the fourth identification result (eg, middle bell) of the identification results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a fourth non-overlapping result (for example, middle bell) that is a non-overlapping result of the fourth specific result (for example, middle bell) of the specific results is set,
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fourth overlapping result, based on the fact that the pattern combination for the fourth identification result is stopped at the effective position, a privilege corresponding to the fourth identification result is granted,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fourth non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the fourth identification result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the fourth identification result is stopped at the effective position. Is,
As the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different advantages for the player,
As the transition lottery by the transition lottery means, the first transition lottery that is the transition lottery to the first predetermined state (challenge mode) and the transition lottery to the second predetermined state (attack mode) different from the first predetermined state A second transition lottery is set,
In the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery executed based on the first specific result, either of the transition lotteries can be won, while the first transition lottery executed based on the fourth specific result In the second transition lottery, the gaming machine according to any one of the features BE2 to BE4, characterized in that it is set not to win in any one of the transition lotteries.

  According to the above configuration, the specific gaming state includes the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state that do not shift depending on the type of the specific result. That is, in the case of the first specific result, it can shift to either the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state, but in the case of the fourth specific result, it cannot shift to either one. By doing in this way, when the pattern combination for 1st specific results corresponding to a 1st duplication result or a 1st non-overlap result stops, and the 4th specification corresponding to a 4th duplication result or a 4th non-overlap result In addition to the viewpoint of whether or not the picture combination for the result is stopped, whether or not notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started, in addition to the viewpoint of whether or not notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started, a lottery for transition to any predetermined state is performed From the point of view of whether or not it has been played, it is possible to play a game that enjoys subsequent trends.

Feature BE6. As the duplication result, a fifth duplication result (for example, middle bell duplication 1) that is a duplication result with a fifth identification result (for example, middle bell) of the identification results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a fifth non-overlapping result (for example, middle level bell) that is a non-overlapping result of the fifth specific result (for example, middle level bell) of the specific results is set,
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fifth overlapping result, based on the fact that the pattern combination for the fifth identification result has stopped at the effective position, a privilege corresponding to the fifth identification result is granted,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fifth non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the fifth identification result is given based on the fact that the picture combination for the fifth identification result has stopped at the effective position. Is,
As the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different advantages for the player,
As the transition lottery by the transition lottery means, the first transition lottery which is the transition lottery to the first predetermined state (challenge mode) and the transition lottery to the second predetermined state (super attack mode) different from the first predetermined state And the second transition lottery that is
In the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery executed based on the first identification result, there may be cases where neither of the transition lotteries wins, while the first transition lottery executed based on the fifth identification result. The gaming machine according to any one of the features BE2 to BE5, wherein the transition lottery and the second transition lottery are set so as to win in at least one of the transition lotteries.

  According to the above configuration, the specific gaming state includes the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state that always shift to one of the predetermined states depending on the type of the specific result. That is, in the case of the first specific result, there is a case where the state does not shift to either the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state, and in the case of the fifth specific result, it always shifts to either one. By doing in this way, when the pattern combination for 1st specific results corresponding to a 1st duplication result or a 1st non-overlap result stops, and the 5th specification corresponding to a 5th duplication result or a 5th non-overlap result In addition to the viewpoint of whether or not the picture combination for the result is stopped, whether it is reserved, whether the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started, in addition to which predetermined state is to be transferred From a viewpoint, it is possible to play a game that enjoys the subsequent trends.

Feature BE7. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is a winning combination when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed as the mode notification by the predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features BE1 to BE7, wherein:

  According to the said structure, the order alerting | reporting regarding the stop order of several circulating bodies as an aspect alert | report may be performed. By doing in this way, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefits of the mode notification even for a player who is not good at the eye-pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circling body.

The above-described configuration is as follows: “When each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets A second stop order different from the first stop order as each of the second stop operation modes. When the second result winning is established by operating the above, the second privilege (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small role winning in the 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given can be shown more clearly.

  Feature BE8. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the 8. The gaming machine according to any one of features BE1 to BE7, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (a precursor mode) that is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition is set.

  According to the said structure, the variation of a specific game state is diversified, and game property improves. In addition, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved depending on the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, the notification is started by the specific notification means when the specific game state is entered, so that the game ends without being noticed even though the specific game state is entered. It is possible to suitably avoid such an event. In other words, if the state has shifted to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous state of the high frequency state is specified. By adopting a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of enhancing the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and enhancing the expectation for the specific gaming state described in the feature BE1.

<Feature CA group>
Feature CA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a result of lottery by the lottery means, when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination for the first mode can be stopped, and each stop operation unit is stopped in the first stop mode. When operated in a second stop operation mode different from the operation mode, an operation mode result (for example, a push order bell) that can stop the pattern combination for the second mode different from the pattern combination for the first mode. ) Is set,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and based on the fact that the transition picture combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position, the gaming state is advantageous for the player. Transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting to a state;
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) holds the transition result winning until the transition picture combination stops at the effective position. Function to execute)
With
As a gaming state, a re-gaming state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a re-gaming result is higher than the normal gaming state is set,
When a specific condition is established that includes a winning condition that is established when the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and a non-winning condition that is established without the transfer result winning being reserved by the reservation means, Re-game state transition means (function to execute special RT state processing by the main controller 101) capable of shifting the game state to the re-game state,
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the operation mode result in the re-gaming state, the mode notifying unit shifts based on the fact that the winning condition is established as the specific condition. If there is, it is easy to execute the mode notification related to the first stop operation mode, and the second stop operation is performed if the re-playing state is shifted based on the fact that the non-winning condition is established as the specific condition. A gaming machine comprising a special mode notification means (a function of executing a special RT notification process by the display control device 81) that facilitates execution of the mode notification related to a mode.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is granted by the bonus grant means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, it shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the transition result winning is reserved.

  Furthermore, a re-gaming state (so-called RT state) in which the probability of a re-gaming result as a gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state is set, and the transition to the re-gaming state is made on condition that the winning of the transition result is reserved. In some cases, there are cases in which a transition is made to the replay state on condition that the winning of the transition result is not reserved. For this reason, when a transition is made to the re-gaming state, the player's advantage varies greatly depending on whether or not the winning of the transition result is reserved, and it is considered that the player's interest is the presence or absence of the reservation.

  Here, the re-game result is a result in which so-called missing is not generated. Therefore, for example, in the case where the presence / absence of the reservation is made by a production or the like, the frequency of the need for pressing during the re-playing state is relatively low, and the production of the presence / absence of the reservation is overlooked. It is preferable from the viewpoint of deterring. On the other hand, there is a possibility that a stop game may be monotonous while the re-game result wins are generally uniform.

  In that respect, in the above configuration, the pattern combination for the first mode is stopped or the pattern combination for the second mode is stopped by changing the mode notification when the operation mode result is won during the replay state. A game of predicting the presence or absence of the reservation depending on whether to stop is added. In other words, by indicating the presence or absence of the reservation that the player is interested in during the re-gaming state by stopping the stop game, by notifying the stop game in the re-gaming state, It is possible to expect a production effect such as dramatically increasing the degree of attention to the stop appearance. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Feature CA2. As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Transition lottery means (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) for executing the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result; ,
Limiting means (main control) for restricting the lottery execution by the transition lottery means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the situation where the transition result winning is retained by the reservation means (carry-over state) The function of executing the processing of step S702 by the apparatus 101),
The gaming machine according to Feature CA1, wherein

  According to the above configuration, in the situation where the transfer result winning is reserved, execution of the transfer lottery to the specific game state related to the mode notification is restricted. In other words, in the re-gaming state, if the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state related to the mode notification is restricted, the reservation of the transition result winning is confirmed, and the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state related to the mode notification is restricted. Otherwise, it is confirmed that the winning of the transition result is not reserved. In other words, if the situation is unfavorable for the player such that the execution of the transfer lottery is restricted, the situation is favorable for the player that the winning of the transfer result is reserved, and conversely the execution of the transfer lottery is not restricted. If the situation is favorable for the player, the situation is not favorable for the player that the winning of the transfer result is not reserved, and any situation is preferable for the player. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a balanced game.

Feature CA3. The pattern combination for the first mode is established by stopping the first predetermined number of specific patterns at a specific position (medium line L2) that can be visually recognized through the display unit in each of the orbiting bodies. ,
The pattern combination for the second mode is established by stopping the second number of the specific patterns smaller than the first number at the specific position in each of the circulating bodies. Or the gaming machine described in the feature CA2.

  According to the above configuration, the difference in the stop appearance between the pattern combination for the first aspect and the pattern combination for the second aspect can be grasped by the number of stops of the specific pattern. In this way, for example, it is possible to make the game easier to understand, such as making a game for which the presence / absence of reservation is predicted based on the difference in the stop appearance be determined by the number of stops of the specific pattern.

  Feature CA4. The gaming machine according to Feature CA3, wherein the second number is zero.

  According to the above configuration, whether or not the specific pattern stops at a specific position is the difference between the stop appearance when the pattern combination for the first mode stops and when the pattern combination for the second mode stops. This is a clearer difference. Therefore, it is possible to make the game more simple in predicting the presence or absence of reservation.

  Furthermore, for example, in the game to be predicted, when it is not desired to stop a specific picture at a specific position any more, for example, if it is configured as described above, for example, the operation mode result will not be won any more. Even without using such a complicated configuration, it is possible to adjust the presence / absence of stoppage of the specific picture depending on the difference in the stop operation mode, and the game to be predicted can be realized with a simpler configuration.

Feature CA5. Comprising specific means (black BAR stop counter) for counting the number of the specific picture stopped at the specific position over a plurality of games in the re-playing state;
The special mode notification means, if the number counted by the specific means reaches a specific number, if the re-playing state has shifted based on the fact that the non-winning condition has been established as the specific condition, Means for disabling execution of the mode notification relating to the first stop operation mode (in the display control device 81, a process of setting a push order notification effect for black BAR non-stop from the notification scenario and the value of the black BAR stop counter is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature CA4, which is provided with a function of

  According to the above configuration, when the number of stops of the specific pattern reaches the specific number in the replay state where the winning of the transition result is not reserved, the mode for the first stop operation mode corresponding to the pattern combination for the first mode Notification is not executed. As a result, the first number of the specific patterns as the pattern combination for the first mode does not stop, so that the specific pattern does not stop at the specific position as the pattern combination for the second mode. This makes it possible to predict that the winning of the transition result is not reserved through the fact that the number of the specific design stopped at the specific position does not exceed the specific number, and conversely, the number of the specific design stopped at the specific position exceeds the specific number. This makes it possible to grasp that the winning result of the transition is reserved.

  Feature CA6. The special mode notification means is a transition made based on the fact that the non-winning condition is established as the specific condition even if the number counted by the specifying means is less than the specific number. And when the first number is added to the number counted by the specifying means and the specified number is exceeded, means for disabling execution of the mode notification related to the first stop operation mode (display control device) 81. The gaming machine according to feature CA5, further comprising a function of executing a process of setting a push order notification effect for black BAR non-stop from the type of special replay and the value of the black BAR stop counter in 81) .

  According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to avoid an event in which the number of specific pictures stopped at a specific position exceeds the specific number in spite of the fact that the transfer result winning is not reserved by the reservation means. Therefore, in a game in which the presence or absence of reservation is predicted from the number of stops, a contradiction between the number of stops and the presence or absence of reservation is less likely to occur.

Feature CA7. As the operation mode result, when the pattern combination for the first mode is stopped, a plurality of operation mode results having different numbers of stopping the specific pattern at the specific position are provided,
In any of the plurality of operation mode results, when the pattern combination for the second mode is stopped, the number of the specific pattern to be stopped at the specific position is zero. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, in a game in which the presence or absence of a reservation is predicted based on the number of stops of a specific design, the number of increases in the number of stops varies depending on the type of operation mode result, and the increase rate is diversified. Thus, in the case where it is not desired to further increase the relationship between the number of stops and the presence / absence of reservation, it is only necessary to notify the state of the second stop operation mode, and the game for predicting the presence / absence of reservation is suitably realized. can do.

  Feature CA8. Means capable of changing the content (background color) of the specific effect in the specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) according to the number counted by the specifying means (processing for setting the effect during addition by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features CA3 to CA7, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the number of the specific picture stopped at the specific position from the content of the predetermined effect by the specific notification means, and the player does not have to count the number of himself / herself. Therefore, the game which predicts the presence or absence of reservation from the number of stops can be made easier.

  Feature CA9. The lottery result by the lottery means is the operation mode result, and when each of the circuit bodies is stopped in the first stop operation mode, the stop timing of the predetermined circuit body among the circuit bodies is the first timing. If the pattern combination for the first mode is stopped, the pattern combination for the first mode is different if the stop timing of the predetermined rotating body is a second timing different from the first timing. The feature combination according to any one of the features CA3 to CA8, wherein the number of design combinations for a low number is less than the first number. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, even if the stop operation mode matches the first stop operation mode (for example, even if the stop operation mode is the stop order and matches the first stop order), the first The number of specific patterns does not necessarily stop at a specific position, but the timing of the stop operation, that is, the pattern combination for the first mode in which the first number of specific patterns stops by the pushing operation is stopped, or from the first number However, it depends on whether or not the low-number pattern combination that stops a small number of specific patterns stops. If it does in this way, it will become possible to make it seem as if a specific picture was stopped by own stop operation, and it won as a result of a transition, and it will become possible to improve game nature in a re-game state.

  Feature CA10. In the game that will shift to the re-playing state when the winning condition is satisfied, a stop turn that stops at each of the circuit bodies, and to shift to the re-playing state when the non-winning condition is satisfied The game machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA9, characterized in that a stop appearance that stops at each of the circuit bodies is common in the game.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is impossible to determine whether or not the transfer result winning is reserved from the stoppage of the game that becomes an opportunity to shift to the replay state. Therefore, the gameability of predicting and grasping the presence / absence of the reservation from the stop appearance in the re-gaming state is not impaired.

Feature CA11. Grasping means (special RT counter) for grasping the number of games in the re-playing state which has been shifted when the non-winning condition is satisfied;
Based on the fact that the number of games grasped by the grasping means has reached a predetermined number, a means (main control device 101) for returning from the replaying state to the gaming state before shifting to the replaying state. A function of executing processing for returning to the original gaming state based on the special RT counter being set to 0),
A gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA10, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to limit the re-playing state that has been transferred without the winning of the transfer result being reserved. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the re-playing state with a high probability of winning the re-playing result continues endlessly even though the winning of the shifting result is not reserved.

  In addition, regarding the “predetermined number”, if it is configured to be “a number greater than the denominator of the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the operation mode result”, at least once on average during the re-playing state The operation mode result can be expected to be won, and there is an advantage that it is possible to suitably realize the gameability using the stop game. On the contrary, regarding the “predetermined number”, if it is configured such that “the lottery result by the lottery means is a number smaller than the denominator of the probability that the operation mode result is obtained”, it is difficult for the operation mode result to be won during the replaying state. Thus, there is an advantage that the rarity of the stop appearance based on the operation mode result can be increased, and the degree of attention to the stop appearance can be increased.

Feature CA12. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set 101, a function to execute the winning probability setting process by 101)
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
The lottery result is executed based on the fact that the lottery result is a predetermined specific result, and the lottery has the same winning probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, A transition lottery means (a function for executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) for executing the transition lottery is provided,
In any one of the features CA1 to CA11, as the transition result, a first transition result (second BB) in which a winning probability by the lottery unit is different depending on a setting value set by the setting unit is provided. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stops, the transition to the advantageous state advantageous to the player, and the transition pattern combination must stop. For example, in addition to the gameability that the transition result winning is reserved, a specific gaming state is provided such that when the operation mode result is won, the stop game is made different depending on the presence / absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result, a transition lottery to the specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state can occur in each game, and the game performance is remarkably increased. improves. In addition, the specific gaming state is set so that there is no difference in the winning rate of the transfer lottery according to the setting value that causes a change in the increase / decrease rate of the game medium, etc. Increased game fairness is ensured. On the other hand, if there is no difference between the set values in this way, the enjoyment of selecting one game table from a plurality of game tables installed in the game hall, that is, which set value is predicted is predicted. However, there is a possibility that the fun of playing games will be erased. Therefore, in the above configuration, by providing a first transition result having a different winning probability depending on a set value as a transition result, a game in which the set value is predicted can be determined by whether or not a reservation is made in a re-game state. While performing while predicting, it is possible to entertain gaming characteristics linked to a specific gaming state.

  As for the “specific game state”, “as the specific game state, a high-frequency state where the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal game state, and a high frequency state where the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than the normal game state. The probability state, and at least one of the pre-transition state (a precursor mode) that is won and transitioned to the high-frequency state or the high-probability transition lottery may be set. According to the above configuration, variations in the specific gaming state are diversified and the gaming property is improved, and both the high probability state and the pre-transition state are before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification. The level of advantage of each game is almost the same as that of the normal game state. By adopting a configuration in which knowledge is started, it is possible to suitably avoid an event in which a game is terminated without noticing it even though the game state has shifted to a specific game state. If the state has shifted to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification, and the specific notification means for the transition to the previous state of such a high frequency state It becomes possible to make the transition to the specific gaming state more suitable by making the configuration informed by the start of the notification, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means. It has the effect of becoming. Note that the variations of the “specific game state” are the same for the following features.

Feature CA13. As the transition result, a second transition result (first BB) in which the winning probability by the lottery means is common regardless of the setting value set by the setting means is provided,
The re-gaming state transition means shifts to the common re-gaming state regardless of which of the first transition result winning and the second transition result winning is retained by the reservation means. A gaming machine according to feature CA12.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to complicate the game of predicting the set value while predicting the presence or absence of reservation in the re-gaming state. In other words, even if it is determined whether or not there is a reservation in the re-playing state, whether the reserved result is the first transition result with a difference in the winning probability due to the set value or the second transition without the difference in the winning probability due to the set value As a result, there are more branches in the prediction of the set value, and the game for predicting the set value can be made more diverse, thereby improving the game performance.

Feature CA14. As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
The transition lottery means can execute a transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the transition result winning,
The notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eight display segment N8) based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the specific is based on the end of the specific gaming state. Specific game state notifying means (function for executing section display first processing to section display fourth processing by the main control device 101) that terminates notification by setting the notification means to an extinguished state,
The specific gaming state notifying means is
When the game result triggered by the transfer lottery means is a result that does not include the transfer result, the game in which the result winning is established is set as the start game, and the operation of the game next to the start game is permitted. First means (function to execute section display first processing by the main control device 101) for starting notification by the specific notification means at a timing earlier than,
When the game result triggered by the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery is a result including the transfer result, the transfer result winning is determined as a start game, and the operation of the next game after the start game is allowed. Second means for starting notification by the specific notification means at a previous timing (function of executing section display fourth processing by the main control device 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA13, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stops, the transition to the advantageous state advantageous to the player, and the transition pattern combination must stop. For example, in addition to the gameability that the transition result winning is reserved, a specific gaming state is provided such that when the operation mode result is won, the stop game is made different depending on the presence / absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result, a transition lottery to the specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state can occur in each game, and the game performance is remarkably increased. improves.

  In such a configuration, when the transition to the specific gaming state is made, notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended, the notification is also ended. In other words, if the presence / absence of notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game state is the specific game state. For example, the game is not noticed even though the game state has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has been seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to enjoy the game based on the special notification equally.

  Moreover, the notification by the specific notification means starts at least before allowing the operation of the game next to the starting game in which the lottery result that triggered the start of the specific gaming state wins, and the start timing of the notification is timed It is reported. More specifically, if the lottery result that triggered the start is a result that does not include the transition result, and the result of the transition result winning is not reserved, the operation of the game next to the game in which the lottery result winning is established If the lottery result that triggered the start is the result including the transition result and the transition result winning can be reserved, the next of the game where the transition result winning is established Notification is started before the game operation is permitted. In other words, basically, in the game of the lottery result winning that triggered the start of the specific gaming state, when the winning of the transition result is retained, the specific game until the transition result winning is established. The start of notification by the state notification means is limited. Then, for example, in a game with a game result that can be a trigger for starting a specific gaming state, when notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started, (1) the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won and Whether the winning of the transfer result is reserved by the reservation means, or (2) If the winning of the transfer result is reserved by the holding means, and (3) the specified game Either the lottery for transition to the state or the result of the transition is not won. In that respect, as in the feature CA1, the game can be presumed based on whether or not the transition result is won based on the stop appearance of the operation mode result, and therefore, in relation to the presence / absence of the notification by the specific gaming state notification means. When the notification is not started, it is possible to narrow down whether the case is the case (1) or (2) or the case (3) from the stoppage of the operation mode result. By doing in this way, the game nature which presumes the presence or absence of reservation based on a stop appearance can be made more advanced, and interest improvement is achieved.

  In particular, as in the case of the feature CA12 and the feature CA13, in the configuration having the first transition result having a difference in the winning probability according to the set value and the second transition result having no difference as the transition result, winning of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state If it is assumed that the probability does not vary depending on the set value, the lottery to the specific gaming state cannot be performed in the first transition result, and the lottery to transition to the specific gaming state in the second transition result It becomes the structure which can perform. Then, in the cases (1) and (2) above, if the first transition result is reserved, it is the case (2), and if the second transition result is reserved, the case (1). Therefore, it is possible to narrow down which case it is from the relationship with the type of migration result.

Feature CA15. As a result of the operation mode,
When each said stop operation means is operated by the said 1st stop operation aspect, the pattern combination of the 1st aspect corresponding to a 1st result can be stopped as a pattern combination for said 1st aspects, and each said stop When the operating means is operated in the second stop operation mode, the pattern combination for the second mode is a pattern combination corresponding to a second result different from the first result, and the first mode. A first operation mode result (for example, push order bell) that can stop the pattern combination of the second mode different from the pattern combination of
When each said stop operation means is operated by the said 1st stop operation aspect, the pattern combination of the 3rd aspect corresponding to a 3rd result can be stopped as a pattern combination for said 1st aspect, and each said stop When the operating means is operated in the second stop operation mode, it is a pattern combination corresponding to the third result as the pattern combination for the second mode, and is different from the pattern combination of the third mode. A first operation mode result (for example, special replay) that can stop the pattern combination of the fourth mode is set,
The special mode notification means executes the mode notification if the operation mode result is the second operation mode result, and does not execute the mode notification if the operation mode result is the first operation mode result. The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA14, characterized by:

  According to the above configuration, in the game of predicting the presence or absence of reservation from the stop appearance at the time of the operation mode result winning, if the operation mode result is the second operation mode result, while adjusting the stop output by the mode notification, If it is the first operation mode result, the mode notification is not performed and the stop appearance is not adjusted. The first operation mode result and the second operation mode result are different from each other in the first operation mode result depending on the stop operation mode, while the second operation mode result is the same regardless of the stop operation mode. Won the prize. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game in which the presence / absence of reservation is predicted based on the stopping result at the time of winning the operation mode result as long as the profit of the player is not changed. Therefore, when setting the game to be predicted, it is not necessary to consider the payout rate or the like, and it can be set in anticipation of a pure effect.

Feature CA16. As a result of the operation mode, when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination for the first mode can be stopped, and each stop operation means When the second stop operation mode is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order, the order correspondence result (for example, push order bell) that allows the pattern combination for the second mode to be stopped. Is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the order correspondence result, the mode notification unit is configured to use the sequence notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA15, which can be executed by a predetermined notification means.

  According to the said structure, the order alerting | reporting regarding the stop order of several circulating bodies as an aspect alert | report may be performed. By doing in this way, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefits of the mode notification even for a player who is not good at the eye-pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circling body.

The above-described configuration is as follows: “When each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets A second stop order different from the first stop order as each of the second stop operation modes. When the second result winning is established by operating the above, the second privilege (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small role winning in the 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given can be shown more clearly.

<Characteristic CB group>
Feature CB1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When each said stop operation means is operated by the 1st stop operation aspect, the pattern combination of the 1st aspect corresponding to a 1st result can be stopped, and each said stop operation means is a said 1st stop operation aspect. When the second stop operation mode is different from the first combination, the pattern combination corresponds to the second result different from the first result, and the second mode is different from the pattern combination of the first mode. First operation mode result (for example, push order bell) that can stop the pattern combination,
When each said stop operation means is operated in the 3rd stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the 3rd mode corresponding to the 3rd result can be stopped, and each said stop operation means becomes the 3rd stop operation mode. When the operation is performed in a fourth stop operation mode different from the above, it is possible to stop the pattern combination corresponding to the third result, which is a pattern combination of the fourth mode different from the pattern combination of the third mode. And a second operation mode result (for example, special replay) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result, the first mode notification (push order notification) regarding the stop operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is first. First mode notification means (function of executing the push order processing by the main control device 101) executable by the notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 in the instruction monitor 68);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second operation mode result, the second mode notification (push order notification effect) relating to the stop operation mode including the third stop operation mode and the fourth stop operation mode is performed. 2nd notification means (function to execute the push order notification processing by the display control device 81) executable by the 2 notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
With
For both the first mode notification by the first mode notification unit and the second mode notification by the second mode notification unit, a first specific state (advantageous section) that is allowed to be executed,
While execution of the first aspect notification by the first aspect notification means is limited, execution of the second aspect notification by the second aspect notification means is allowed, and a second specific state (normal period),
Is set,
In the second specific state, on the basis of the second mode notification by the second mode notification unit, a suggestion unit (execution of special RT notification processing by the display control device 81) suggests an advantage after the second specific state. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In the so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by the privilege grant means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, a first operation mode result having a different result depending on the stop operation mode of the circuit body is set. In addition, it is possible to realize a gameability in which the degree of advantage is changed depending on the presence or absence of the first mode notification when the first operation mode result is won. In addition to this, since the second operation mode result having a common result according to the stop operation mode of the circuit body is also set, the second mode notification at the time of winning the second operation mode result is set as the first specific state. It is possible to realize a game with reduced gambling without changing the advantage excessively, by generating it in combination with the notification.

  In such a configuration, a second specific state is set in which the execution of the first aspect notification is restricted while the first aspect notification and the second aspect notification are limited. By setting such a second specific state, it is possible to realize gameability that does not cause a change in the advantage by the mode notification while performing the mode notification, and simply aims to acquire a game medium by the mode notification. It is possible to contribute to the creation of new game play that has escaped from the game play. However, as a player, he would like to enjoy such a new game, but he does not want to acquire game media, etc., and the interest in the advantage is still high. It can be said. Therefore, in the second specific state, if the configuration is used to suggest the advantage after the second specific state using the mode notification, a game of predicting the subsequent development by the mode notification is added. It is possible to improve the playability in the second specific state where the advantage does not change by itself. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature CB2. The first specific state is a state in which at least the execution frequency of the first aspect notification by the first aspect notification means can be higher than the normal gaming state.
A first transition lottery means (function for executing a first specific combination process by the main controller 101) for executing a first transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the first specific state;
The notification by the specific notification means (eight display segment N8) is started based on the fact that the first shift lottery by the first shift lottery means has been won, and the specific notification is based on the end of the first specific state. Specific notification executing means for terminating notification by means (function of executing section display first processing to section display fourth processing by main controller 101);
With
The specific notification execution unit does not perform notification by the specific notification unit in the second specific state even when the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery unit is won. A gaming machine according to feature CB1.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration having the first specific state in which the execution of the first mode notification and the second mode notification is allowed, and the second specific state in which the execution of only the second mode notification is allowed, Since the specific state is set so that the execution frequency of the first mode notification can be higher than the normal game state, the player plays a game while expecting to shift to the first specific state. Conceivable. In that regard, when the first transition lottery to the first specific state is won, notification by the specific notification unit is started, and when the first specific state is ended, notification by the specific notification unit is ended. Thus, it is possible to confirm whether or not it is in the first specific state. By doing so, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being ended without noticing it even though the first transition lottery to the first specific state is won, and the game The uneven distribution of profits between the player who ends the game and the succeeding player who plays the game thereafter can be resolved.

  Thus, if the specific notification means that clearly indicates whether or not it is in the first specific state is provided, the effect of ensuring the fairness of the game as described above can be expected, but on the other hand, the game result and the stop appearance, Regardless of the production or the like, the player can pay attention only to the specific notification means, so the production effect may be reduced. Therefore, in the above configuration, since the notification of the specific notification means is not performed in the second specific state, the result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means, that is, the start of the notification of the specific notification means is maximum. It is possible to urge the player who has focused his or her interest to move the point of interest to the second mode notification that occurs in the second specific state, and the subsequent advantage based on the second mode notification It is possible to favorably realize the gameability of predicting.

  Feature CB3. The suggestion means includes a case where the second mode notification about the third stop operation mode is performed and a case where the second mode notification about the fourth stop operation mode is performed, after the second specific state. The gaming machine according to the feature CB1 or the feature CB2, wherein the advantages of the features are different.

  According to the above configuration, when the suggestion means performs the stop operation in the third stop operation mode and the pattern combination of the third mode stops, the stop operation is performed in the fourth stop operation mode and the fourth mode. The advantage after the second specific state differs depending on when the pattern combination is stopped. In this way, if the structure is used to make suggestions by using the stop outcome, even if the common third result is a prize, the interest in the stop operation is increased and the subsequent advantage is predicted. Gameability can be improved suitably.

  Feature CB4. The suggesting means may perform the specific effect (background color change) when the second mode notification about the third stop operation mode is performed and the pattern combination of the third mode is stopped. The second mode notification for the third stop operation mode is performed while the second mode notification for the stop mode is performed and the specific effect can be executed when the pattern combination of the fourth mode is stopped. When the pattern combination of the fourth mode is stopped, the specific effect is not executed, the second mode notification about the fourth stop operation mode is performed, and the pattern combination of the third mode is stopped The gaming machine according to the feature CB3, wherein, when the specific effect is not executed, the advantage after the second specific state can be suggested.

  According to the above configuration, the suggesting unit executes the specific effect as a kind of suggestion if the stop operation is performed according to the second mode notification, but does not execute the specific effect when the stop operation is performed without following the second mode notification. . In other words, the second mode notification matches the set of the stop appearance and the suggestion is established. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game that does not follow the second mode notification just because the winning results are all the third result, and it is possible to favorably implement the game using the suggestion means.

Feature CB5. A second transition lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for executing a second transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the second specific state;
As a lottery result by the second transition lottery means, a first result that does not shift to the first specific state after the second specific state (for example, a special combination that has not been won in the second BB win, bonus, attack mode, etc.) The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics CB1 to CB4, characterized in that a second result (for example, a first BB win) that can shift to the first specific state after the second specific state is included.

  According to the above configuration, in the second specific state, a pattern that does not shift to the first specific state after the second specific state and a pattern that shifts to the first specific state after the second specific state are generated. It is also possible to suggest whether or not to shift to the first specific state using the suggestion by the second mode notification performed in the second specific state. In particular, since the first specific state is a state in which both types of notification are allowed and the degree of advantage is changed by the mode notification, the second specific state has high affinity with the suggestion performed by the mode notification (second mode notification). It is possible to easily associate the first specific state with the suggestion by the mode notification.

  Feature CB6. The feature suggestion CB5 is characterized in that the suggestion means can suggest whether or not to shift to the first specific state after the second specific state as an advantage after the second specific state. Game machines.

  According to the said structure, the effect of characteristic CB5 can be show | played by a specific structure.

Feature CB7. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result in which a predetermined number of game media are given as the bonus by the privilege granting means is set,
As the gaming state, a third specific state (bonus state) is set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined payout result is higher than the normal gaming state,
When the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is the first result, the system shifts to the third specific state after the second specific state,
When the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is the second result, the process shifts to the third specific state after the second specific state, and then shifts to the first specific state. CB5 Or the game machine as described in characteristic CB6.

  According to the above configuration, since a predetermined number of game media are paid out when a payout result winning is established, an increase in a large number of game media can be expected in the third specific state. Such a third specific state occurs after the second specific state in both the first result and the second result, and the first specific state after the third specific state is determined by the first result and the second result. Whether or not to move to is different. In this way, at least the third specific state will occur after the second specific state, regardless of the result of the transition to the second specific state, and there is a sense of expectation for the second specific state. It becomes possible to raise more.

Feature CB8. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set 101, a function to execute the winning probability setting process by 101)
The probability that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means becomes the first result may differ depending on the set value set by the setting means, and the lottery result by the second transition lottery means differs from the second result. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics CB5 to CB7, characterized in that the probability is the same regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

  According to the above configuration, the probability of the first result that does not shift to the first specific state after the second specific state differs depending on the setting value that causes a change in the increase / decrease rate of the game medium, and the second result after the second specific state. The probability of the second result to shift to one specific state is common regardless of the set value. That is, for the first specific state in which the advantage changes due to the first mode notification (also the second mode notification), the probability of transition can be common regardless of the set value. By doing in this way, whether to shift to the first specific state can be made stronger, and the fairness of the game based on the first specific state is ensured. On the other hand, if there is no difference between the set values in this way, the enjoyment of selecting one game table from a plurality of game tables installed in the game hall, that is, which set value is predicted is predicted. However, there is a possibility that the fun of playing games will be erased. Therefore, in the above configuration, when the transition to the first specific state is not made after the second specific state, it is assumed that a difference depending on the set value may occur, so that the fun of playing the game while predicting the set value is not erased. In the range, the fairness of the game based on the first specific state can be ensured.

Feature CB9. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result in which a predetermined number of game media are given as the bonus by the privilege granting means is set,
As the gaming state, a third specific state (bonus state) is set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined payout result is higher than the normal gaming state,
A second transition lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for executing a second transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the second specific state;
As a lottery result by the second transition lottery means, a third result (specific role that is not won in the bonus and attack mode, etc.) that does not shift to the third specific state after the second specific state, and the second specific The gaming machine according to any one of features CB1 to CB8, characterized in that a fourth result (for example, a first BB win) that can shift to the third specific state after the state is included.

  According to the above configuration, since a predetermined number of game media are paid out when a payout result winning is established, an increase in a large number of game media can be expected in the third specific state. By setting such a third specific state and then performing the above configuration, in the second specific state, a pattern that does not shift to the third specific state after the second specific state, and the second specific state After that, there is a pattern to shift to the third specific state, so use the suggestion by the second mode notification performed in the second specific state, and also suggest whether to shift to the third specific state after that Is also possible.

  Feature CB10. The feature suggestion CB9 is characterized in that the suggesting means can suggest whether or not to shift to the third specific state after the second specific state as an advantage after the second specific state. Game machines.

  According to the said structure, the effect of characteristic CB9 can be show | played by a specific structure.

Feature CB11. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result that a replay is given as the privilege by the privilege granting means is set,
The second operation mode result is a specific replay result of the replay results,
As the gaming state, a plurality of re-gaming states in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means the predetermined re-game result winning is higher than the normal gaming state are set,
Based on the transition to the second specific state, means for shifting to the specific replay state in which the probability of winning the specific replay result is higher than the normal game state among the plurality of replay states (main control device) 101. The gaming machine according to any one of features CB1 to CB10, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing a special RT state process by 101.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which a plurality of replay states are set, the specific replay state is set as the second specific state. In the specific replay state, the probability of winning the specific replay result as the second operation mode result is high. By using the re-game state in this way, the winning probability of the game result can be changed without using the so-called jackpot state as in the third specific state, and when the game state shifts to the second specific state. It becomes possible to increase the possibility of winning the second operation mode result.

Feature CB12. The first operation mode result indicates that when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result is When each stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the second corresponding to the second result becomes possible. The pattern combination of the aspect can be stopped,
When the second operation mode result is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result is obtained. When the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode, the fourth operation corresponding to the third result is possible. The pattern combination of the aspect can be stopped,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result or the second operation mode result, the first mode notification unit is configured to perform the first stop sequence and the second stop sequence, or the third mode. A first order notification (push order notification effect) regarding the stop order including the stop order and the fourth stop order can be executed by the first notification means as the first aspect notification. CB1 Thru | or any one of CB11.

  According to the said structure, the order alerting | reporting regarding the stop order of several circulating bodies as an aspect alert | report may be performed. By doing in this way, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefits of the mode notification even for a player who is not good at the eye-pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circling body.

In addition, the said structure is as follows. "When the said 1st operation mode result is operated in the 1st stop order as each said stop operation means as said 1st stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the said 1st mode is carried out. The first result winning is achieved by stopping, and a first privilege (for example, nine medals awarded based on the first small role winning in the 3-bet game) is awarded by the privilege granting means, and each said stop When the operating means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the second mode is stopped and the second result prize is awarded. A second privilege different from the first privilege (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small role winning in the 3-bet game) is granted by the privilege granting means,
The second operation mode result indicates that, when each stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode stops and the third result A winning is established, a third privilege (replay) is granted by the privilege grant means, and each stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode. If it is, the pattern combination of the fourth aspect is stopped and the third result winning is established, and the third privilege is granted by the privilege granting means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result or the second operation mode result, the first mode notification unit is configured to perform the first stop sequence and the second stop sequence, or the third mode. The first notification means (push order notification effect) regarding the stop order including the stop order and the fourth stop order can be executed by the first notification means as the first aspect notification. " In this case, it is possible to show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given more clearly.

<Feature DA group>
Features DA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order, and each stop operation means is different from the first stop order. And a second result that results in a winning prize when operated in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68). N1-seventh display segment N7), which is provided with order notification means (a function for executing the push forward processing by the main controller 101).
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result in the normal gaming state, the transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (a winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101 is executed) Function)
First grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific gaming state;
A second grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state (advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific gaming state, first ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (usually in the section display second process by the main control device 101) A function to execute an advantageous section ending process based on the fact that the ending condition is satisfied),
Regardless of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number in the specific gaming state. A second ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (a function for executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101);
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
In a specific situation where the total of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit number, the specific condition is satisfied, or When the specific situation is achieved by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition, it is possible to generate a specific event that is different from the event based on the increase process and can be beneficial to the player. Specific event execution means (function to execute each process for special notification in a situation where the excess flag is set by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In so-called slot machines where benefits are awarded by means of privilege granting if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the winning results may differ depending on the stopping order of the circuit bodies. A specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the game. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result, a lottery for transitioning to the specific gaming state can be performed, and when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific gaming state, a process of increasing the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state, so-called addition Therefore, the playability in each game is significantly improved.

  However, the so-called slot machine's original gameplay is to obtain a privilege by stopping aiming at the pattern of the orbiting body, but if there are too many privileges that can be obtained by a game using order notification, the original game The gameability may be sparse, and if the specific game state using the order notification can be executed without limitation, there may be a possibility that a game that exceeds the designer's intended game play rate may occur. Therefore, in the above configuration, the process is terminated when the upper limit number is reached regardless of the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to make the game using the order notification the game that accompanies the original game and enjoy both games.

  However, if the upper limit count is defined as described above, in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions and the remaining count has already reached the upper limit count, no extra will occur even if the specific condition is satisfied. The game in such a situation becomes a so-called digest game, and the fun of the game can be extremely reduced.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number of times has already reached the upper limit number or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of a specific condition, the increase process (addition) is performed. A specific event that is different from the above and may be beneficial to the player occurs. In this way, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the extra event is not performed or is meaningless even if the extra event is performed, and the fun of each game is increased even in the specific situation. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, interest improvement can be aimed at suitably.

  In addition, regarding the “first result” and the “second result”, “the first result that is awarded when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the above-mentioned It may be expressed as “a second result in which a winning is achieved when operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode”. In this case, “stop order” may be read as “stop operation mode”, “order notification” as “mode notification”, and “order notification unit” as “mode notification unit”.

  Feature DA2. The gaming machine according to Feature DA1, wherein the specific event is an event not related to the occurrence probability, occurrence frequency, and occurrence frequency of the order notification.

  According to the said structure, the consistency with not setting an upper limit frequency | count and not performing an increase process can be ensured more.

  In addition, the said structure can also be expressed as "the generation | occurrence | production probability of the said order alerting | reporting, the occurrence frequency, and the frequency | count of occurrence do not change with the case where the said specific event arises and the case where it does not arise."

Feature DA3. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set 101, a function to execute the winning probability setting process by 101)
The gaming machine according to Feature DA1 or Feature DA2, wherein the specific event executing unit performs suggestion notification that suggests information on a setting value set by the setting unit as the specific event.

  According to the above configuration, since the suggestion information of the set value is presented as the specific event, the player can use it as a determination material for continuing the game after the specific game state has reached the upper limit number of times. That is, if the suggestion notification indicates a low setting, it can be determined that the game should end after the end of the specific gaming state, and if the suggestion notification indicates a high setting, the game should continue even after the specific gaming state ends. For the player who wants to increase the game media and wants the game media not to decrease, such setting value suggestion notification is useful.

  Feature DA4. The gaming machine according to feature DA3, wherein the specific condition has a common establishment probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

  According to the above configuration, the occurrence probability of the increasing process is common regardless of the set value. In other words, in a situation where the upper limit number has been reached, the specific condition that triggers the increase process occurs at a common occurrence probability regardless of the set value, and when it occurs, the set value suggestion notification is performed. By doing in this way, it can be assumed that the setting value suggestion notification is performed and the luck factor is strongly involved. Thereby, for example, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconveniences such as the fact that the setting value suggestion notification is more likely to occur as the setting is higher, so that the suggestion notification is not substantially generated at the low setting.

  Moreover, since the probability of establishment of the specific condition is common regardless of the set value as described above, the possibility that the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number can be the same regardless of the set value. In other words, the probability of occurrence of a specific situation in which the setting value suggestion notification can be performed is also common regardless of the setting value, and the independence in which the setting value is not involved in the occurrence rate of the setting value suggestion notification is further increased. Is possible.

Feature DA5. The specific condition when the increase process is performed can be established based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result,
The establishment probability of the specific condition when the increase process is performed according to the type of the special result is different,
The characteristics DA1 to DA4 are characterized in that the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the specific event occurs is likely to increase as the type of the specific result that the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the increase process is performed increases. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, the probability when the increase process is performed with a special result and the probability when a specific event occurs with the special result are linked. By doing in this way, it can be easily understood that a specific event occurs instead of performing an increase process based on a special result. Therefore, for example, in a specific situation, when a special result winning with a high probability is performed, it is possible to raise the expectation that a specific event will occur in advance, and the player's mind It is possible to increase the degree of attention to a specific event through making preparations.

Feature DA6. As the specific gaming state, a plurality of types of predetermined states including a first predetermined state (attack mode) and a second predetermined state (specialized zone) different from the first predetermined state are set.
The specific condition in the case where the increase process is performed is that the probability of establishment is different between the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of the special result. Yes,
In the specific gaming state, the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the specific event occurs is likely to increase as the predetermined state increases the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the increase process is performed. A gaming machine described in DA5.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the probability that the increase process is performed is changed depending on the type of the specific gaming state (predetermined state) even with the same type of special result, the probability of occurrence of the specific event is also the type of the specific gaming state (predetermined It changes according to the state) and is linked to the case of increase processing. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to heighten the effect by becoming easy to understand that a specific event arises instead of performing an increase process based on having become a special result.

Feature DA7. As the specific game state, a special state (VB mode, special zone) in which the minimum number of continuous games is determined is set.
Based on the fact that a predetermined special condition is satisfied during the specific game state, a special transition means for shifting the specific game state to the special state (for example, a VB notification flag by the main controller 101 is set). Function to execute processing)
The specific event execution means may cause the specific event when the special condition is established in the specific situation, or when the special condition is established by shifting to the special state based on the special condition establishment. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA6, characterized in that it is possible.

  If the special state is entered during the specific gaming state, the special state continues for the minimum number of continuous games. Therefore, the transition to the special state is the minimum continuous game in terms of the number of games in the specific gaming state. This can be regarded as equivalent to the process of increasing the number of times. Then, it can be meaningless for the player to shift to the special state in the specific situation or to enter the specific state by shifting to the special state. Therefore, in the above-described configuration, it is possible to avoid making the above-described meaningless sense by making the special event a target for such a special state.

Feature DA8. The specific condition when the increase process is performed can be established based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result,
The specific condition when the increase process is performed is that the special state is more likely to be established than the other state in the specific gaming state even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of the special result. Is a configuration that increases,
The establishment probability of the specific condition when the specific event occurs is a configuration in which the special state is higher than the other states in the specific gaming state,
The specific event execution means, when the special condition is established in the specific situation, or when the specific event occurs when the special condition is established by shifting to the special state based on the special condition establishment, 8. The gaming machine according to feature DA7, wherein transition to the special state based on establishment of the special condition is allowed.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the increase process is easily performed when the state is shifted to the special state, the specific event is generated when the state is shifted to the special state in the specific state or when the state is shifted to the special state. At this time, the transition to the special state is allowed. Therefore, the specific event is generated at the time of transition to the special state, and the specific event is allowed to occur even during the special state. In this way, by making the special state a state in which the increase process is easily performed and a state in which a specific event is likely to occur, the transition to the special state during the specific game state is approached by the specific state or the specific state. It is possible to look forward to even the situation.

Feature DA9. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific condition is achieved by performing the increase process based on the specific condition being satisfied, or when the increase process is performed based on the specific condition being satisfied. Storage means for storing the number-of-times information corresponding to the number of times to be increased in the number-of-times information storage means (number of annihilated games EG) (function of executing a process of adding the number of games added to the number of annihilated games EG by the main control device 101) With
The specific event execution unit is capable of causing the specific event based on the number-of-times information stored in the number-of-times information storage unit, according to any one of the features DA1 to DA8, Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation, a specific event may occur based on the number of times when the increase process is performed. By doing in this way, for example, it becomes possible to generate a specific event as compensation for a privilege that should have been obtained by the increasing process, such as a specific event is more likely to occur as the number of times information is larger.

Feature DA10. The number-of-times information stored in the number-of-times information storage means is stored at least until the specific gaming state in which the specific event has occurred shifts to the normal gaming state, and the stored information is stored. When the specific condition is newly established in the specific situation, or when the specific condition is established by performing the increasing process based on the specific condition establishment, the specific condition is established based on the establishment of the specific condition. The number of times corresponding to the number of times of increase when the increase process is performed can be updated by adding to the stored number of times information,
The specific event executing means can cause the specific event to occur based on the number-of-times information stored in the number-of-times information storage means when shifting from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state. A game machine according to Feature DA9.

  According to the above configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a specific situation, the number of times information when the increase process is performed is accumulated, and a specific event occurs at the end of the specific gaming state based on the total number of times information . In this way, in the configuration of the feature DA9, even if the number of times information based on the establishment of each specific condition is small, it is possible to generate a specific event if the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times. Expectation can be sustained.

  In particular, when a specific situation is reached at a relatively early stage after entering a specific gaming state, a game in which the number of executions of the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number of times, that is, a game that can be a so-called digest game, is executed over a long period of time. It will be. In that regard, as in the above configuration, a specific event can occur by accumulating multiple increase processes, so that the more events that can be the digest game, the more likely the specific event will occur and the digest game feel Can be suppressed.

  Feature DA11. The specific event execution means can cause the specific event each time based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the specific game state is changed to the normal game state by the second end means. The gaming machine according to Feature DA10, wherein the specific event can be caused based on the number-of-times information stored in the number-of-times information storage means based on the transition.

  According to the above configuration, a specific event occurs each time a specific condition is satisfied, and a specific event can occur depending on the integrated value when the increase process is performed at the end of the specific gaming state. In this way, you can enjoy both the effect of not getting bored of a specific gaming state due to the occurrence of a specific event each time and the effect of enjoying a specific gaming state for a long time by establishing a specific condition multiple times. It becomes possible to make it.

  Feature DA12. The specific event executing means is capable of causing the specific event based on the specific condition being satisfied during the normal gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state in which the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA11.

  According to the above configuration, the fact that the specific condition is satisfied during the specific game state can be taken over as a specific event in the normal game state after the end of the specific game state. And since the specific event is an event different from the increase process, the event in the specific gaming state is taken over to the normal gaming state within a range that does not contradict the significance of forcibly terminating the specific gaming state by the upper limit number of times. It becomes composition. By doing so, the linkage between the specific game state and the normal game state is improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature DA13. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific condition is established by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition, or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition Means for storing information corresponding to the number of times increased in a predetermined information storage means (disappearing game number EG) (function of executing processing for adding the number of games added to the disappearing game number EG by the main control device 101); ,
Initially capable of executing an initialization process for initializing the specific information related to the order notification used during the specific game state when the second end means shifts from the specific game state to the normal game state Means (function for executing initialization processing by the main controller 101);
When the initialization process is performed by the initialization means, a means for restricting the information stored in the information storage means from being initialized (the number of disappeared games is provided in the normal section area in the main controller 101). A function for executing processing to be stored in a designated area), and
A gaming machine according to feature DA12, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the number of executions in the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number, when the specific gaming state is terminated, the specific information related to the order notification is initialized. The effect of the feature DA11 is achieved while preventing a so-called consecutive resort from entering the specific game state again based on the information in the specific game state forcibly ended in spite of having ended. It is possible to expect.

  Feature DA14. The increase process can be executed even when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or even when the specific condition is established by performing the increase process based on the specific condition being satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA13, wherein:

  In the above configuration, it is clarified that even if a specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation or a specific situation is caused by an increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition, the increase process itself is not limited. The That is, for example, in a configuration in which execution of processing related to a predetermined order notification including an increase process is restricted in a normal game state that is not a specific game state, the increase process related to the specific situation is not a restriction target. Is clarified. However, as described above, even if the increase process is performed in the above situation, it can be meaningless depending on the upper limit number of times. As a result of the specific event occurring in such a situation, the excellent effect of the feature DA1 can be obtained. You can expect.

Feature DA15. Based on the transition of the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state, notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eight display segment N8), and the specific gaming state is the normal gaming. Specific game state notifying means (function for executing section display first processing to section display fourth processing by the main control device 101) for terminating notification by setting the specific notification means to the extinguishing state based on the transition to the state. With
The specific gaming state notifying means ends the notification by setting the specific notifying means to the extinguished state even when the second ending means shifts the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA14.

  According to the above configuration, when the transition from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state is made, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state ends and the transition to the normal gaming state occurs, the notification is also ended. In other words, if the presence / absence of notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game state is the specific game state. For example, the game is not noticed even though the game state has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has been seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to enjoy the game based on the special notification equally.

  In particular, even when the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number of times and shifts to the normal gaming state, the notification by the specific notification means is ended, so that the player has completed the specific gaming state, that is, the specific condition in the specific situation Even if is established, it can be clearly understood that the increase processing has not been performed. Then, since the notification of the specific notification means is strictly terminated, it is difficult to entertain the end of the specific gaming state even if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation. In that respect, if the configuration can cause a specific event as in the feature DA1, even if the specific notification means forcibly ends the specific game state can be clearly understood, It is also possible to entertain the reverberation based on the establishment of specific conditions.

Feature DA16. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order, and each stop operation means is different from the first stop order. And a second result that results in a winning prize when operated in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68). N1-seventh display segment N7), which is provided with order notification means (a function for executing the push forward processing by the main controller 101).
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result in the normal gaming state, the transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (a winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101 is executed) Function)
First grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific gaming state;
A second grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state (advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific gaming state, first ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (usually in the section display second process by the main control device 101) A function to execute an advantageous section ending process based on the fact that the ending condition is satisfied),
Regardless of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number in the specific gaming state. A second ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (a function for executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101);
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
In the specific situation where the total of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit number, the specific condition is satisfied, or Specific event execution means (main control device) capable of generating a specific event that is an event different from the event based on the increase process when the specific situation is obtained by performing the increase process based on the specific condition being satisfied 101, a function for executing each process for special notification in the situation where the excess flag is set by 101),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In so-called slot machines where benefits are awarded by means of privilege granting if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the winning results may differ depending on the stopping order of the circuit bodies. A specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the game. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result, a lottery for transitioning to the specific gaming state can be performed, and when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific gaming state, a process of increasing the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state, so-called addition Therefore, the playability in each game is significantly improved.

  However, the so-called slot machine's original gameplay is to obtain a privilege by stopping aiming at the pattern of the orbiting body, but if there are too many privileges that can be obtained by a game using order notification, the original game The gameability may be sparse, and if the specific game state using the order notification can be executed without limitation, there may be a possibility that a game that exceeds the designer's intended game play rate may occur. Therefore, in the above configuration, the process is terminated when the upper limit number is reached regardless of the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to make the game using the order notification the game that accompanies the original game and enjoy both games.

  However, if the upper limit count is defined as described above, in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions and the remaining count has already reached the upper limit count, no extra will occur even if the specific condition is satisfied. The game in such a situation becomes a so-called digest game, and the fun of the game can be extremely reduced.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number of times has already reached the upper limit number or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of a specific condition, the increase process (addition) is performed. A specific event, which is a different event, is generated. In this way, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the extra event is not performed or is meaningless even if the extra event is performed, and the fun of each game is increased even in the specific situation. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, interest improvement can be aimed at suitably.

  In addition, regarding the “first result” and the “second result”, “the first result that is awarded when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the above-mentioned It may be expressed as “a second result in which a winning is achieved when operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode”. In this case, “stop order” may be read as “stop operation mode”, “order notification” as “mode notification”, and “order notification unit” as “mode notification unit”.

<Feature DB group>
Feature DB1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set,
First grasping means (an advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the highly advantageous state;
A second grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state (the advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantageous state, first ending means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (usually in the section display second process by the main control device 101) A function to execute an advantageous section ending process based on the fact that the ending condition is satisfied),
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number in the highly advantageous state. A second ending means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (function of executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101);
Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one setting value among the setting values of the plurality of steps is set 101 to execute the winning probability setting process by 101),
A gaming machine comprising
Specific information grasping means for grasping specific information (total number of games) corresponding to the game situation of the day (function for executing processing for grasping the total number of games in the second section display processing by the main control device 101);
Suggestion notification execution means (a function for executing a process for performing the fourth special notification by the display control device 81) for executing suggestion notification indicating the information of the setting value set by the setting means;
With
The suggestion notification execution means can execute the suggestion notification based on the specific information grasped by the specific information grasping means when the second end means shifts from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the above configuration, there are a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state is terminated based on the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state; Since it may end based on having reached the upper limit number of times, it is suppressed that the advantage of a highly advantageous state is raised extremely. However, it is considered that the player wants the high advantage state to continue for a long time, and it is preferable that the high advantage state is forcibly terminated even if there is a remaining number of times based on the upper limit being reached. In addition, when the high advantage state is forcibly terminated, it is considered that the intention to continue the game can be extremely reduced. Therefore, when such a high advantage state is forcibly terminated, a notification of a setting value that causes a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium is performed, for example, a high setting It is possible to motivate the game to continue by performing suggestion notification.

  On the other hand, depending on the situation in which the high advantageous state has reached the upper limit number of times, the notification of setting value suggestion as described above may be a motivation for continuing the game, but it may also be a motivation for ending the game. That is, for example, if the high advantageous state has reached the upper limit number of times, such as a situation shortly after the opening of the game hall, when the high setting suggestion notification is performed as described above, the game that plays the game table Although it may be a motivation to continue the game for the player, the other game tables are determined to be low due to the fact that the game table is set high, and the motivation to end the game There is a possibility of being attached. In addition, for example, in a situation where the high advantageous state has reached the upper limit number of times, the closing of the game hall is about to close, rather than taking into account the motivation to continue the game and the motivation to end the game, it is purely a suggestion notification of the set value There are cases where it is better to go. Therefore, in a situation where the high advantageous state has reached the upper limit number of times, the high advantageous state is forcibly terminated by adopting a configuration in which setting value suggestion notification is performed in consideration of specific information corresponding to the game situation of the day. In this case, it is possible to suitably suppress a player's intention to continue the game.

Feature DB2. A specific execution means (for example, a function for executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) for executing a specific process relating to the continuation rate or the continuation number of the highly advantageous state;
The gaming machine according to the feature DB1, wherein the specific execution means executes the specific processing regardless of a setting value set by the setting means.

  According to the above configuration, the specific process regarding the continuation rate and the number of continuations is executed regardless of the set value. On the other hand, when the high advantageous state reaches the upper limit number as a result of the specific process, the set value suggestion may occur. . In this case, the fact that the high advantageous state has reached the upper limit number of times has a strong luck factor and is not related to the level of the set value, but when the high advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times, a large amount of game media is acquired. Under such circumstances, it is considered that the player tends to predict a setting value higher than the actual setting value. However, even if the high advantage state reaches the maximum number of times, even if a large amount of game media is required by that time, such as when a large amount of game media has been reached, Depending on the game situation, the total payout rate may not be high. Therefore, regarding the high advantageous state as described above, the setting value suggestion notification is given to the game medium that has been acquired by performing the suggestion notification of the set value in consideration of the game situation at the time of forced termination. It can be used as a boost to continue the game at the time of forced termination.

  For more details on the “specific execution means”, for example, it is possible to execute a transition lottery on whether or not to shift from the low advantageous state to the high advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Transition lottery means (function for executing mode lottery processing by the main control device 101) ", for example," increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on a predetermined condition being satisfied " (A function of executing the game number addition process by the main control device 101) "or, for example," means capable of executing the lottery of the highly advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition " .

  Further, the “specific execution means” may be expressed as “the specific processing is executed with a uniform probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means” Regardless of the level of the setting value set by the setting unit, the specific process may be executed with a common probability ”or“ the level of the setting value set by the setting unit Regardless, the result of the specific process is common ”.

Feature DB3. The specific information grasping means can grasp the total number of executions of the game as the specific information in the gaming situation on the day,
The suggestion notification execution means, when the second end means shifts from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state, the total number of executions grasped by the specific information grasping means is a predetermined number of times (2000 If the total number of executions is less than the specific number of times, the suggestion notification execution probability is lower than when the total number of executions exceeds the specific number of times, In the feature DB 1 or the feature DB 2, the suggestion notification is executed so that the player is less likely to predict the set value than the suggestion notification executed when a specific number of times is exceeded. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, when comparing the case where the total number of executions is less than or equal to the specific number of times and the case where the total number of times exceeds the specific number of times, the former case is more difficult to perform setting value suggestion notification, or even if it is executed, the set value It is a mode that is difficult to predict. Therefore, it is difficult to narrow down the set value even if the high advantageous state reaches the upper limit number in a situation where the number is less than the specific number. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event in which the set value is determined immediately after the opening of the game hall and the operating rate of the game table or other game tables decreases.

Feature DB4. The specific information grasping means can grasp time information as the specific information in the gaming situation of the day,
The suggestion notification execution means is configured to change the time information grasped by the specific information grasping means to a predetermined specific time (13:00) when the second ending means shifts from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state. ) If the time information is before, the execution probability of the suggestion notification is lower than when the time information is later than the specific time, or the suggestion notification executed when the time information is before the specific time. The features DB1 to DB3 are characterized in that the suggestion notification is executed so that the player is less likely to predict the set value than the suggestion notification executed after the specific time. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, when comparing the case where the time of forced termination is before the specific time and the case where it is after the specific time, the former case is less likely to perform the setting value suggestion notification or Even if this is done, it may be difficult to predict the set value. For this reason, it is difficult to narrow down the set value even if the high advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times before the specific time. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event in which the set value is determined immediately after the opening of the game hall and the operating rate of the game table or other game tables decreases.

  In particular, by adding the above configuration to the feature DB 3, a setting value suggestion according to the operation start time of the day can be obtained. Specifically, for example, in the feature DB 3, if the start of operation on the day is delayed, it may be determined that the specific number of times has been exceeded at a later stage than when the specific number of times has been exceeded since the start of operation in the morning. Then, there is a possibility that the set value suggestion as intended by the designer may not be achieved. Therefore, by having the configuration of the feature DB 4 together with the configuration of the feature DB 3, it is possible to generate a setting value suggestion notification as designed by the designer.

Feature DB5. The specific information grasping means can grasp, as the specific information, at least one of the total number of executions or time information from power-on in the gaming situation of the day,
The suggestion notification execution means, when the second end means shifts from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state, the total number of executions grasped by the specific information grasping means is a predetermined number of times (2000 Times) or when the time information is in a first specific situation before a predetermined specific time (13:00), the total number of executions exceeds the specific number of times or the time information is later than the specific time. The execution probability of the suggestion notification that suggests a lower setting is higher than the case of the second specific situation, or the suggestion notification that is executed when the first specific situation is the second specific situation The suggestion notification is executed so that the player can easily predict the setting value of the low setting as the prediction of the setting value, rather than the suggestion notification executed in step (b). The gaming machine according to any one of the features DB1 to DB4 to.

  According to the above configuration, when the high advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times and is forcibly terminated at a relatively early stage from the opening of the game hall, the suggestion notification that makes it easy to narrow the low setting is executed. The situation where the high advantage state has reached the upper limit number of times at a relatively early stage is considered to be a situation where a large amount of game media is acquired and the total payout rate is also high. In such a situation, the actual set value is exceeded. It is considered that there is a tendency to easily predict a high set value, and even if a suggestion notification that makes it easy to narrow down a low setting as a notification of a set value as described above, it is highly likely that the game will continue. It is done. Therefore, if it is configured to perform the suggestion notification of the setting value on the low setting side in view of such a situation, the balance of the appearance rate with the suggestion notification of the setting value on the high setting side is caused without causing a decrease in the operation rate. Can keep.

Feature DB6. The suggestion notification executing means includes
As the suggestion notification of the set value, using the suggestion notification information group in which information corresponding to a plurality of types of suggestion notification is stored, the information corresponding to one suggestion notification is selected from the suggestion notification information group, and the selection is performed. And performing the suggestion notification based on information corresponding to the suggested notification,
In the case of shifting from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state by the second ending means, the suggestion notification information group used in the first specific situation, and the suggestion notification information group used in the second specific situation, , The suggestion notification is executed so that the execution probability of the suggestion notification suggesting the low setting is increased or the setting value of the low setting is easily predicted. A gaming machine described in the feature DB5.

  According to the above configuration, the configuration of the feature DB 5 can be realized with a simple configuration such as switching of a suggestion notification information group, that is, a table used for suggestion notification.

Feature DB7. Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined transition result (second BB), the transition means (by the main control device 101) that can shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. A function to execute bonus state processing)
The increase rate of the game media in each game is configured to be higher in the special game state than in the high advantage state,
The special gaming state is set so as to be able to shift even during the high advantageous state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DB1 to DB6, wherein the first grasping means grasps the number of executions including the number of games executed during the special gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, a special game state is set as a so-called jackpot state with a high increase rate of game media, and the number of games in the special game state is also added to the number of executions. If the special game state is present in the advantageous state, the final number of acquired game media can be larger than the case where the special game state is not present. That is, in the highly advantageous state in which the upper limit number is set, the final number of game media acquired when the highly advantageous state ends is diversified by the upper limit number of times. In this way, when the high advantage state ends by the upper limit number of times, for example, if the number of acquisitions is large, the high setting is predicted, and if the number of acquisitions is small, the low setting is predicted. The pleasure of predicting the set value at the end is added.

  Feature DB8. The gaming machine according to the feature DB 7, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the winning of the transition result may vary depending on the set value set by the setting means.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature DB 7, the number of acquisitions at the time of forced termination of the highly advantageous state can actually vary depending on the set value. As a result, it is possible to increase the significance of performing the setting value suggestion notification at the time of forced termination.

Feature DB9. The specific information grasping means can grasp the total number of executions of the game as the specific information in the gaming situation on the day,
The total number of executions is initialized when the processing for changing the set value set by the setting unit is performed, but is not initialized based on power-on or power-off of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of features DB1 to DB8.

  According to the above configuration, the total number of executions as a gaming situation reflected in the suggestion notification at the time of forced termination is not initialized by power-on or power-off, but is initialized by a setting value change process. Therefore, when the power is turned on / off without changing the set value when the game hall is closed or opened, the total number of executions of the previous day is taken over. This makes it possible to play a game for predicting a set value based not only on the suggestion of the set value but also on whether or not the change of the set value has been performed, and the game performance is greatly improved.

Feature DB10. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order, and each stop operation means is different from the first stop order. And a second result that results in a winning prize when operated in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68). N1-seventh display segment N7), which is provided with order notification means (a function for executing the push forward processing by the main controller 101).
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result in the normal gaming state, the transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (a winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101 is executed) Function)
With
The low advantageous state is the normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DB1 to DB9, wherein the high advantageous state is the specific gaming state.

  In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped, In so-called slot machines where benefits are granted by the benefit granting means if the stop outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the winning results may differ depending on the stop order of the circuit bodies. A specific gaming state is provided as a highly advantageous state in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence. If the configuration related to the setting value suggestion according to the gaming situation of the feature DB 1 is applied to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the subsequent operation rate when the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number is suitably adjusted. Can do.

  In particular, compared to a special gaming state with a game state transition, i.e., a jackpot state, the above-mentioned specific gaming state is determined by the presence or absence of notification at the time of winning the order correspondence result, the frequency of notification, the mode of notification, etc. The advantage changes. In such a configuration, the degree of continuation of a specific gaming state is strictly determined, with a higher degree of freedom in setting a continuation condition compared to a one-to-one correspondence with a gaming result such as a transition of a gaming state. It is easy to realize a game that is not played, that is, a game that enjoys how long a specific game state continues. On the other hand, in such gameability, when the upper limit number of times is reached and the specific gaming state is ended, it is considered that the intention to continue the subsequent game may be lowered, and there is a concern that the operating rate is lowered. In that respect, by applying the configuration of the feature DB 1 to such a gaming machine, while enjoying the continuity of the specific gaming state, even after the continuation count reaches the upper limit count, It can be motivated to continue.

<Characteristic DC group>
Features DC1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order, and each stop operation means is different from the first stop order. And a second result that results in a winning prize when operated in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68). N1-seventh display segment N7), which is provided with order notification means (a function for executing the push forward processing by the main controller 101).
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result in the normal gaming state, the transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (a winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101 is executed) Function)
Specific ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined ending condition (function of executing an advantageous zone ending process in the zone display second process by the main control device 101) When,
Specific storage means (processing for storing information corresponding to various areas for advantageous sections in the RAM 106 by the main control device 101) that can store specific information related to the order notification, which is information used in the specific gaming state. Function to execute)
Normal storage means capable of storing normal information that is not related to the order notification and can be used even in a state other than the specific gaming state (stores information corresponding to various areas for normal sections in the RAM 106 by the main control device 101) Processing function), and
When the specific ending means shifts from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, initialization means capable of executing initialization processing of the specific information stored in the specific storage means (section display by the main controller 101) 2) A function for executing initialization processing during processing)
For a specific event that occurs during the specific game state (for example, an additional opportunity for the number of games in a situation in which an excess flag is not set), the specific storage means uses the information corresponding to the specific event (the number of additional games) as the specific information. A first means capable of executing a storage process to be stored in (a function of executing a process of adding the added game number to the corresponding continuous number in the game number adding process by the main control device 101)
For the specific event that occurs during the specific gaming state (for example, an additional opportunity for the number of games in the situation where the excess flag is set), information corresponding to the specific event (number of disappearing games) is stored as the normal information in the normal storage Second means capable of executing storage processing stored in the means (function of executing processing for adding the added game number to the number of disappeared games in the game number adding process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In so-called slot machines where benefits are awarded by means of privilege granting if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the winning results may differ depending on the stopping order of the circuit bodies. A specific gaming state in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the game is provided, and the gameability of each game is improved.

  However, the so-called slot machine's original gameplay is to obtain a privilege by stopping aiming at the pattern of the orbiting body, but if there are too many privileges that can be obtained by a game using order notification, the original game Gameability can be sparse, and if the specific game state can be executed indefinitely, such as by increasing the performance of the specific game state using sequence notification, it will surpass the designer's intended play rate There is also a possibility that a ball may appear. Furthermore, when the extended game performance of a specific gaming state is improved, even if the game is terminated because the specific gaming state has ended, it is likely that the specific gaming state will continue to occur, The fairness between the player who has finished the game and the subsequent player seated on the finished game table may not be ensured.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, when the specific gaming state ends, the specific storage means for storing the specific event in the specific gaming state as the specific information related to the order notification is performed. It is possible to eliminate the unfair feeling among the players without excessively improving the performance of the villa in the state.

  However, if the above configuration is used, the impression that the gaming property in the specific gaming state and the gaming property in the normal gaming state are different from each other becomes stronger, and the linkage between these two gaming states is reduced, so that the total view There is also concern that the gameability may be reduced. Therefore, in the above configuration, since the information regarding the specific event in the specific gaming state is not stored as the specific information, the second means for storing the information as normal information not related to the order notification is provided. Information on a specific event in a specific game state can be transferred to the normal game state as information different from the order notification. Therefore, it is possible to improve the linkage between the specific game state and the normal game state while preventing the extended game performance of the specific game state from being excessively increased and ensuring equality among the players. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features DC2. A specific storage area (various areas for advantageous sections in the RAM 106) corresponding to the specific storage means;
A normal storage area (various areas for normal sections in the RAM 106) corresponding to the normal storage means;
Is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature DC1, wherein the specific storage area and the normal storage area are set as non-overlapping storage areas.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the characteristic DC1, the location where each piece of information is stored becomes physically different. For example, the normal information in the normal storage unit is initialized during the initialization process. Such an error is less likely to occur, and the event that the specific information remains without being initialized even after the specific gaming state ends is less likely to occur.

  Feature DC3. Using the normal information corresponding to the specific event stored in the normal storage means by the second means, a special notification is given by a specific notification means after the end of the specific gaming state in which the specific event has occurred. The game machine according to Feature DC1 or Feature DC2, further comprising executable special notification means (function of executing a special replay notification process by the display control device 81).

  According to the above configuration, the special notification for the specific event that occurred during the specific gaming state is executed after the end of the specific gaming state, so that the linkage between the specific gaming state and the normal gaming state is a game called special notification. This can be achieved through production.

  Feature DC4. Selection means for selecting which of the first means and the second means is to be executed when the specific event occurs (a process for determining whether or not an excess flag is set in the main control device 101) The game machine according to any one of features DC1 to DC3, characterized in that the game machine is provided with a function of

  According to the above configuration, information related to a specific event is stored as either specific information or normal information. By doing so, both information is not stored redundantly, so the storage capacity can be reduced, and when normal information based on a specific event is taken over at the end of a specific gaming state, the specific information is related. Thus, the possibility of being taken over (possibility of not being initialized due to some inconvenience) can be reduced.

Feature DC5. Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (specific role), an increase determination means (mainly) capable of executing an increase determination as to whether or not to execute an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state A function of executing the lottery process by adding the number of games by the control device 101),
Based on the result of the determination by the increase determination means being the result of executing the increase process, the increase processing means capable of executing the increase process of the remaining number of times (function of executing the game number addition process by the main control device 101) )When,
With
The selection means includes
If the determination result by the increase determination means is a result of executing the increase process as the specific event, select to execute the storage process by the first means,
If the determination result by the increase determination unit is a result that the increase process is not executed as the specific event, a selection is made to execute the storage process by the second unit. Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, as a specific event, when it is determined whether or not to increase the number of continuous games in a specific gaming state, when it is determined to increase the number of continuous games, as specific information related to order notification When the storage process by the first means is performed and it is determined that the number of continuing games is not increased, the storage process by the second means is performed as normal information not related to the order notification. If the number of continuous games in a specific gaming state increases, it will be advantageous for the player, and if the player wants the increase processing to be performed, information that the determination has resulted in an undesirable result for the player However, it is stored as normal information and can be taken over until after the specific gaming state. In this way, information corresponding to the profit that could not be fully enjoyed in the specific gaming state can be transferred to the normal gaming state without taking over the profit in the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state. The linkage between the specific gaming state and the normal gaming state can be enhanced by making it possible for the profit to be enjoyed in the normal gaming state.

Feature DC6. Limiting means capable of executing a limiting process for limiting the execution of the increasing process, or that the determination result by the increasing determining means is a result of executing the increasing process when a predetermined condition is established (Function to execute processing for setting an excess flag by the main control device 101)
The gaming machine according to claim DC5, wherein the selection unit selects the storage process by the second unit based on the limitation process performed by the limitation unit.

  If the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination result by the increase determination means is the result of executing the increase process, or the execution process of the increase process itself is restricted. Therefore, if the predetermined condition is satisfied during the specific gaming state, the lottery means Even if the result of lottery becomes a specific result, there is no merit for the player in the specific game state, but rather a result that regrets that the specific result should be obtained in a situation where the predetermined condition is not satisfied Can be. In that respect, in the above configuration, the storage processing is performed so that the information indicating the unsuccessful result is transferred to the normal gaming state. Later, it can be expected that some kind of benefit will be obtained.

Feature DC7. First grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific gaming state;
A second grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times (the number of remaining advantageous game ZG);
With
The specific ending means is
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific gaming state, first ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (usually in the section display second process by the main control device 101) A function to execute an advantageous section ending process based on the fact that the ending condition is satisfied),
Regardless of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number in the specific gaming state. A second ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (a function for executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101);
With
The predetermined condition is satisfied when a total of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit number. A gaming machine described in DC6.

  In the above configuration, the specific gaming state may be terminated based on the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state, or may be terminated based on reaching the upper limit number. The total number of times with the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit number of times. That is, when the increase process is not performed any further, the number of remaining games cannot be expected to increase, and the storage process by the second process is performed based on the specific result that triggers the increase process. For a player who wants to consume as many games as possible in a specific game state, it is considered that an increase process is performed in each game in the specific game state, that is, the game result becomes a specific result. If the increase in the number of remaining games cannot be expected even after the increase process, the interest in the game result of the game in that situation will decrease, the interest in the specific gaming state itself will decrease, and the degree of attention to the game May be drastically reduced. In that respect, as in the above configuration, even in such a situation, when the specific result is won, the storage process by the second means is performed, so that the specific result win can be meaningless. Information can be taken over after a specific gaming state, and it can be meaningful to have a specific result in that situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameability during the specific game state.

  Feature DC8. When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result in the situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second means has a result that the determination result by the increase determination means executes the increase process. The game machine according to Feature DC6 or Feature DC7, wherein a storage process for storing in the normal storage means is executed using the specific number of times to increase the remaining number in the increase process in the case as the normal information.

  According to the above configuration, when the specific result is won when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific number of times that should have been increased in the increasing process is stored as normal information as it is. In this way, when the storage process is performed not by the first means but by the second means, special processing such as information conversion processing is not required, and the effect of the feature DC6 or the like can be obtained with a simple configuration. I can expect.

Feature DC9. In the normal gaming state, a special state (special section) in which a predetermined special notification can be executed is set,
Means for shifting to the special state (function for executing a process of setting a special section flag by the main controller 101) when the specific game state is shifted to the normal game state by the specific end means;
A means for selecting the number of executions of the special state based on the information on the specific number of times that the storage process has been performed by the second means (corresponding to the special section game number PG based on the special section table by the main control device 101) Function to execute the process of entering a value),
A gaming machine according to Feature DC8, wherein

  According to the above configuration, when the specific gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state, there may be a transition to a special state where special notification can be executed, and the number of executions of the special state is stored by the second means. It is determined by a specific number of information. Therefore, the information that the increase process during the specific gaming state has not been performed is carried over as information that the continuity of the special state where the special notification is performed, and the specific gaming state and the normal gaming state are changed to the special state. Can be linked via

Feature DC10. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set 101, a function to execute the winning probability setting process by 101)
The game machine according to claim DC9, wherein the special notification is a suggestion notification as information on the set value set by the setting means.

  According to the above configuration, instead of the increase process not being performed during the specific gaming state, the suggestion notification can be executed after the specific gaming state. Assuming that the player wants a high setting, the suggestion notification of the set value becomes useful information for the player, and the increase process is performed by presenting such useful information. It can be a price for not having it.

Feature DC11. As a lottery result by the lottery means, when each stop operation means is operated in the third stop order, the third specific picture combination is stopped and a third result winning can be established, and each stop operation means Is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order, the fourth specific picture combination different from the third specific picture combination stops and the third result winning can be established. A second order correspondence result (for example, special replay) is set,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the second order notification (push order notification effect) relating to the stop order including the third stop order and the fourth stop order is specified notification means (auxiliary display). The game machine according to Feature DC9 or Feature DC10, further comprising second order notification means (a function of executing special replay notification processing by the display control device 81) executable by the unit 65).

  According to the above-described configuration, the first order that causes the advantage to change even if it is performed during the normal gaming state, as long as the result of the second order corresponding to the benefit that does not change, although the stop appearance differs depending on the stop order. The specific gaming state in which the notification (the order notification of the feature DC1 is referred to as the first order notification in the relationship with the above configuration, and the order correspondence result of the feature DC1 is also referred to as the first order correspondence result) is set with the upper limit number of times. The special notification can be realized by the notification using the stop point as long as it does not contradict the intended meaning.

Feature DC12. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result determined in advance, the winning notification means (display control) that can notify the special notification means (for example, the auxiliary display unit 65) of the winning notification that the special result is won. A function of executing a bonus winning notification effect by the device 81);
Game number setting means for setting the number of winning notification games from the game that has won the special result to the game for which the winning notification is made by the winning notification means (the lottery process for the number of precursor games by the display control device 81 is executed) Function)
With
Any of the features DC9 to DC11, wherein the number of winning notification games set by the game number setting means is more likely to be shorter when the special notification is performed than when the special notification is not performed. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the above configuration, it is preferable for a player who wants to know the special result winning as soon as possible to set a short winning notification game number by performing a special notification. From that point, an increase process is performed during a specific gaming state. It is possible to pay for not being performed.

<Characteristic DD group>
Feature DD1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set,
First grasping means (an advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the highly advantageous state;
A second grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state (the advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantageous state, first transition means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (usually in the section display second process by the main controller 101) A function to execute an advantageous section ending process based on the fact that the ending condition is satisfied),
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number in the highly advantageous state. , Second transition means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (function to execute a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
When the increase process is performed by the increase unit, an increase notification execution unit (an auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing an increase notification (addition notification) that the increase process has been performed (preliminary display unit 65). A function of executing an additional notification effect by the display control device 81),
In a situation where the sum of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit number, the increase process is performed. Specific notification execution means (special game number display in the third special notification setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification about the excess exceeding the upper limit number of times by the predetermined notification means or another notification means. Function to execute the update process of the copy),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, there are a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state is terminated based on the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state; Since it may end based on having reached the upper limit number of times, it is suppressed that the advantage of a highly advantageous state is raised extremely. In such a configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied, it has a so-called extra function in which the remaining number of high advantageous states is increased, and a sense of expectation that the specific condition is satisfied is enhanced.

  On the other hand, if the game that satisfies the specific condition is before the total of the number of executions and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit number of times, it is preferable for the player as described above, but the total reaches the upper limit number of times. After that, no matter how much the specific condition is satisfied, the high advantage state ends when the upper limit number is reached, so the interest in success or failure of the specific condition will decrease, and until the upper limit number is reached The game becomes a so-called digest game, and there is a possibility that the degree of attention to the game is extremely reduced.

  In that respect, in the above configuration, even after the total reaches the upper limit number, a specific notification about the excess when the increase process is performed is performed, and by exceeding the upper limit number, It is configured to let the player know the number of times that he / she could not fully receive the benefits. In other words, even if the increase process is performed, there is no increase process depending on the upper limit number of times. By informing the user, it would be possible to use the benefits that would have been obtained if the increase processing had been performed exceeding the upper limit, or to compensate for the failure to receive the benefits. It is possible to have an expectation that this will be done. In other words, instead of concealing the inability to enjoy the benefits of increased processing, the idea of reversing to explicitly show it is to evoke a feeling different from the feeling of loss based on the inability to enjoy the benefits, It is possible to improve the playability in the situation where the upper limit number is reached.

  Feature DD2. The specific notification execution means can notify the number of times corresponding to the excess as the specific notification, and notifies the number of times so that it can be grasped as a number of times different from the remaining number of times. A gaming machine according to DD1.

  It is also possible to add the excess to the remaining number of times and display it on the same number of times display. However, in the above configuration, it is easy to grasp the excess by displaying these separately. However, since the excess is purposely displayed separately, it is possible to have a strong impression that some kind of compensation is performed based on the excess.

Feature DD3. The increasing means, when performing the increasing process, selects one number using a number information group in which a plurality of types of number information is stored, and increases the remaining number by the selected number. ,
The specific notification execution unit selects the number of times as the excess number by using the number information group or an information group in which the same number of times information as the number information group is stored, and the selected number The game machine according to Feature DD1 or Feature DD2, wherein the increase notification corresponding to the number of times can be executed as the specific notification.

  According to the above configuration, since the number of notifications in the specific notification is determined using the same or similar information group (table) as the actual increase notification, the excess when the increase process is performed is clarified. It can be grasped. In addition, if the number of times is determined using the same information group, it is not necessary to store the information group exclusively, and it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the storage capacity.

Feature DD4. The specific notification execution means includes
As a notification of the number of times corresponding to the excess, a predetermined number of times information can be notified,
By performing the increase notification corresponding to the selected number of times, the predetermined number of times can be added to the predetermined number of times information, and then the predetermined number of times information can be updated and notified. A gaming machine according to the feature DD3.

  According to the above configuration, when the increase process exceeding the upper limit number is performed a plurality of times, the number of times corresponding to each increase process is integrated and notified. In this way, even after the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit number of times, the pleasure of adding and increasing the notified excess is added and the notification is made As the number of times increases gradually, the content of compensation that will be executed will become thicker.

  Feature DD5. Special notification executing means capable of executing a predetermined special notification based on the number of times of the excess in the specific notification by the specific notification executing means (function of executing a third special notification setting process by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features DD1 to DD4, comprising:

  According to the said structure, special alerting | reporting is performed as compensation with respect to an excess. For example, in a configuration in which useful information is presented to the player by performing a special notification, the player will be satisfied if the special notification is performed. Even if the notification is, for example, a flashy effect, it is possible to compensate for the player's feeling of loss due to the absence of the increase process by watching the flashy effect.

  Feature DD6. The special notification execution means is capable of executing the special notification as a transition notification (attack mode end effect) when the second shift means shifts from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state. A gaming machine according to feature DD5.

  According to the said structure, the transition alert | report at the time of a highly advantageous state complete | finishes becomes a special alert | report, and the excess will be reflected. In the transition notification when the highly advantageous state ends, generally, the number of game media and the number of continuous games acquired during the highly advantageous state are notified. By reflecting the above, it is easy to remind the user how many games have been continued if there is no upper limit, the number of game media acquired when there is no upper limit, and the like. In addition, when shooting such transition notifications with photos etc., the excess information will be reflected, and for example, based on the taken photos, the pleasure of reporting to friends will increase, Even if you review it later, you can immerse yourself in memories.

  Feature DD7. The special notification execution means is capable of executing the special notification in the low advantageous state after the second transition means has shifted from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state. A gaming machine according to feature DD6.

  According to the said structure, the excess part of a highly advantageous state can be reflected not in the said highly advantageous state but in a low advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the linkage in performance between the high advantageous state and the low advantageous state by using the excess.

Feature DD8. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set 101, a function to execute the winning probability setting process by 101)
The special notification execution unit is capable of executing a suggestion notification that suggests information of a setting value set by the setting unit as the special notification, according to any one of features DD5 to DD7, Gaming machine.

  Based on the premise that the player desires a high setting, the setting value suggestion notification can be useful information for the player. Therefore, as described above, if the setting value suggestion notification is performed based on the excess, it is predicted that the setting value is suggested from the excess notified by the specific notification, and When the setting value is suggested, it is possible to realize gameability such as predicting the setting value, and it is possible to increase interest in the specific notification that is the starting point of the game.

Feature DD9. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order, and each stop operation means is different from the first stop order. And a second result that results in a winning prize when operated in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68). N1-seventh display segment N7), which is provided with order notification means (a function for executing the push forward processing by the main controller 101).
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result in the normal gaming state, the transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (a winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101 is executed) Function)
With
The low advantageous state is the normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DD1 to DD8, wherein the highly advantageous state is the specific gaming state.

  In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped, In so-called slot machines where benefits are granted by the benefit granting means if the stop outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the winning results may differ depending on the stop order of the circuit bodies. A specific gaming state is provided as a highly advantageous state in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence. If the configuration related to the specific notification of the feature DD1 is applied to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the gameability after the total number of executions of the specific gaming state and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit number is preferably improved. Can do.

  In particular, compared to a special gaming state with a game state transition, i.e., a jackpot state, the above-mentioned specific gaming state is determined by the presence or absence of notification at the time of winning the order correspondence result, the frequency of notification, the mode of notification, etc. The advantage changes. In such a configuration, the degree of continuation of a specific gaming state is strictly determined, with a higher degree of freedom in setting a continuation condition compared to a one-to-one correspondence with a gaming result such as a transition of a gaming state. It is easy to realize a game that is not played, that is, a game that enjoys how long a specific game state continues. On the other hand, it can be said that the problem described in the feature DD1 is likely to occur by determining the upper limit number of times for such game play. In that respect, by applying the configuration of the above feature DD1 to such a gaming machine, while enjoying the continuity of the specific gaming state, it is possible to improve the gaming property when it is determined that the continuation number reaches the upper limit number. It becomes possible to improve.

<Feature DE group>
Features DE1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set,
First grasping means (an advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the highly advantageous state;
A second grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state (the advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantageous state, first transition means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (usually in the section display second process by the main controller 101) A function to execute an advantageous section ending process based on the fact that the ending condition is satisfied),
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number in the highly advantageous state. , Second transition means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (function to execute a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
When the increase process is performed by the increase unit, an increase notification execution unit (an auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing an increase notification (addition notification) that the increase process has been performed (preliminary display unit 65). A function of executing an additional notification effect by the display control device 81),
With
The increase notification execution means can execute the increase notification of a special number increase that is a part or all of the number of times increased by the increase processing in a game after the game in which the increase processing is performed. And a post-notification executing means (function of executing a post-installation effect setting process by the display control device 81),
The sum of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means has reached the upper limit number, and the post-notification executing means relates to the increase process. In the specific situation where the unreported part exists as the special number (the situation where the excess flag is set and the postponed flag is set), when the specific condition is satisfied, within the range of the unreported part, First special notification execution means (function to execute the first special notification setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing the first special notification (pseudo addition notification) as an increase notification by the predetermined notification means is provided. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the above configuration, there are a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state is terminated based on the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state; Since it may end based on having reached the upper limit number of times, it is suppressed that the advantage of a highly advantageous state is raised extremely. In such a configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied, it has a so-called extra function in which the remaining number of high advantageous states is increased, and a sense of expectation that the specific condition is satisfied is enhanced. In addition, even if the remaining number increase process is performed, the notification of part or all of the number of times may not be performed immediately, so that the expectation when the specific condition is satisfied can be continued for a long time. .

  On the other hand, if the game that satisfies the specific condition is before the total of the number of executions and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit number of times, it is preferable for the player as described above, but the total reaches the upper limit number of times. After that, no matter how much the specific condition is satisfied, the high advantage state ends when the upper limit number is reached, so the interest in success or failure of the specific condition will decrease, and until the upper limit number is reached The game becomes a so-called digest game, and there is a possibility that the degree of attention to the game is extremely reduced.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, even when the total reaches the upper limit number, if there is an unreported portion of the increase process, the unreported portion is used and the range of the number of unreported portions is used. Since the increase notification can be executed, the impression that the remaining number of times has increased can be given without causing a mismatch between the increase notification and the number of continued advantageous games. Therefore, the game after the total reaches the upper limit number can be suitably performed.

Feature DE2. The increasing means, when performing the increasing process, selects one number using a number information group in which a plurality of types of number information is stored, and increases the remaining number by the selected number. ,
The first special notification execution means selects one number as the number of unreported times using the number information group or an information group in which number information of the same type as the number information group is stored, and the selection The gaming machine according to Feature DE1, wherein the first special notification can be executed as the increase notification corresponding to the number of times played.

  According to the above configuration, the same or similar information group (table) as the actual increase notification is used to determine the number of notifications in the first special notification. The impression that the increasing process is being performed can be strengthened. In addition, if the number of times is determined using the same information group, it is not necessary to store the information group exclusively, and it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the storage capacity.

  Feature DE3. In the feature DE2, the first special notification executing means can notify the number of unreported times as the first special notification when the selected number exceeds the number of unreported times. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, while enjoying the merit of the first special notification that the increase notification is performed within the unreported range, the effect related to simplification of the configuration relating to the number of times selection or the actual increase process is expected. be able to.

Feature DE4. In the specific situation, when the specific condition is satisfied, the second special notification (pseudo-add-on notification) as the increase notification is executed by the predetermined notification means beyond the unreported range. Special notification executing means (function of executing the first special notification setting process by the display control device 81);
When the second special notification is performed by the second special notification execution unit, a special unit different from the privilege based on the increase process being performed can be provided (by pseudo-addition notification by the display control device 81). Setting value suggestion), and
The gaming machine according to any one of features DE1 to DE3, characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the second special notification is performed as an increase notification exceeding the range of the number of unreported times, on the premise of the first special notification as an increase notification that falls within the range of the number of unreported times. Will give a special benefit different from the increase process, so even if there is a discrepancy between the increase notification and the number of continuous games in a highly advantageous state, it will lead to a happy event for the player, It becomes possible to improve the playability after the total number of times reaches the upper limit.

  In particular, since the second special notification is executed on the condition that there is an unreported portion of the increase process, when there is no unreported portion, that is, the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number is the upper limit number. The configuration is such that the second special notification is performed before the player has grasped that it has reached, but not after it has grasped. By doing in this way, for the player who wants to increase processing until the total reaches the upper limit number of times, the second special notification is more than the expectation, and the case where the second special notification is performed It can increase happiness. In other words, in a situation where the player already knows that the total has reached the upper limit, it is considered that the player's interest has shifted from the increase process to the provision of a special privilege. Then, even if a special privilege is given in such a situation, it is considered difficult to provide joy more than the special privilege. Therefore, in a situation where something different from the special privilege (increase processing) is desired, by giving the special privilege together with the increase processing, it becomes possible to provide joy more than that special privilege.

  Feature DE5. The second special notification execution means can execute the increase notification by adding a predetermined number of times (10 times, 56 times, 77 times) to the number of unreported times as the second special notification. The gaming machine according to Feature DE4, wherein there is a gaming machine.

  The number of unannounced minutes is the number of times that the number of executions and the number of reminders of the remaining number of times are subtracted from the upper limit number of times in the highly advantageous state. Each time the number of times increases, the number of unreported parts decreases, and the special number also changes depending on the ratio of unreported by the post-notification means. Then, as in the configuration described above, in the configuration in which the special privilege is given by performing an increase notification of the number of times that the specific number is added to the number of unreported times, the increase in which the special privilege is given The number of notifications varies depending on the progress of the game. By doing this, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the increase notification that is the opportunity for granting the special privilege, and it is easy to see the player who is playing the game table and knows the game situation and the game. It is possible to vary the easiness of noticing that a special privilege is given to others who are watching at. In other words, it is easy for a player playing the game stand to notice that a special privilege is granted, and it is difficult for others to notice, so that the superiority of the player playing the game stand is superior. Can be secured.

Feature DE6. The second special notification execution means can execute the increase notification by adding the first specific number (10 times) as the specific number to the number of unreported times, and the number of unreported times On the other hand, the increase notification can be executed by adding a second specific number of times (56 times, 77 times) different from the first specific number of times as the specific number of times,
The content of the special privilege given by the granting unit is different between the case where the increase notification including the first specific number of times is executed and the case where the increase notification including the second specific number of times is executed. The gaming machine according to Feature DE5, wherein

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature DE5, the number of times of increase notification that the special privilege is to be granted is further diversified, and further, it is complicated about which special privilege is given. The superiority of the player who plays the game table can be further secured.

Feature DE7. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one setting value among the setting values of the plurality of steps is set 101 to execute the winning probability setting process by 101),
In the specific situation, when the specific condition is satisfied, the second special notification (pseudo-add-on notification) as the increase notification is executed by the predetermined notification means beyond the unreported range. Special notification executing means (function of executing the first special notification setting process by the display control device 81);
When the second special notification is performed by the second special notification execution unit, a special unit different from the privilege based on the increase process being performed can be provided (by pseudo-addition notification by the display control device 81). Setting value suggestion), and
With
Any one of the features DE1 to DE6 is characterized in that the giving means can give the special privilege by executing a suggestion notification that suggests information on a setting value set by the setting means. Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, the second special notification is performed as an increase notification exceeding the range of the number of unreported times, on the premise of the first special notification as an increase notification that falls within the range of the number of unreported times. Will give a special benefit different from the increase process, so even if there is a discrepancy between the increase notification and the number of continuous games in a highly advantageous state, it will lead to a happy event for the player, It becomes possible to improve the playability after the total number of times reaches the upper limit.

  In particular, since the second special notification is executed on the condition that there is an unreported portion of the increase process, when there is no unreported portion, that is, the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number is the upper limit number. The configuration is such that the second special notification is performed before the player has grasped that it has reached, but not after it has grasped. By doing in this way, for the player who wants to increase processing until the total reaches the upper limit number of times, the second special notification is more than the expectation, and the case where the second special notification is performed It can increase happiness. In other words, in a situation where the player already knows that the total has reached the upper limit, it is considered that the player's interest has shifted from the increase process to the provision of a special privilege. Then, even if a special privilege is given in such a situation, it is considered difficult to provide joy more than the special privilege. Therefore, in a situation where something different from the special privilege (increase processing) is desired, by giving the special privilege together with the increase processing, it becomes possible to provide joy more than that special privilege.

  In the above configuration, in particular, setting value suggestion information is presented as a special privilege. That is, since the information of the setting value is presented by performing the second special notification exceeding the range of the unreported portion, the player has the power to decide whether or not to continue the game after the high advantageous state ends. Can be used as a basis for judgment.

  Moreover, the case where the high advantageous state is reached after reaching the upper limit number of times is considered to be a situation where a large amount of game media is acquired, and even if information indicating a low setting is presented, a large amount of game media is acquired. Therefore, it is highly possible that it is determined that the setting is high, and it is considered that it is easy to determine that the game is continued. Therefore, for example, compared to a configuration in which the setting value is suggested when the upper limit number is not reached, an effect of relaxing the determination criterion for continuing the game toward the continuation side can be expected while suggesting the setting value.

  Feature DE8. The gaming machine according to Feature DE7, wherein the establishment probability of the specific condition is common regardless of a setting value set by the setting means.

  According to the above configuration, when a specific condition that is satisfied with the same probability of establishment is satisfied regardless of the setting value, the setting value is suggested when notification exceeding the upper limit number is performed by the second special notification. By doing so, even if there are few parts where the set value is related to the highly advantageous state, it is possible to let the player know the importance of the set value, and the game can be played from multiple game machines installed in the game hall. It is possible to provide the pleasure of selecting a game table to be performed.

Feature DE9. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order, and each stop operation means is different from the first stop order. And a second result that results in a winning prize when operated in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68). N1-seventh display segment N7), which is provided with order notification means (a function for executing the push forward processing by the main controller 101).
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result in the normal gaming state, the transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (a winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101 is executed) Function)
With
The low advantageous state is the normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DE1 to DE8, wherein the high advantageous state is the specific gaming state.

  In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped, In so-called slot machines where benefits are granted by the benefit granting means if the stop outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the winning results may differ depending on the stop order of the circuit bodies. A specific gaming state is provided as a highly advantageous state in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence. If the configuration related to the first special notification of the feature DE1 is applied to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the gameability after the total number of executions of the specific advantageous state and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit number is preferably improved. Can be made.

  In particular, compared to a special gaming state with a game state transition, i.e., a jackpot state, the above-mentioned specific gaming state is determined by the presence or absence of notification at the time of winning the order correspondence result, the frequency of notification, the mode of notification, etc. The advantage changes. In such a configuration, the degree of continuation of a specific gaming state is strictly determined, with a higher degree of freedom in setting a continuation condition compared to a one-to-one correspondence with a gaming result such as a transition of a gaming state. It is easy to realize a game that is not played, that is, a game that enjoys how long a specific game state continues. On the other hand, it can be said that the problem described in the feature DE1 is likely to occur by setting the upper limit number of times for such a game. In that respect, by applying the configuration of the above feature DE1 to such a gaming machine, while enjoying the continuity of the specific gaming state, it is possible to improve the gaming property when it is determined that the continuation number reaches the upper limit number. It becomes possible to improve.

<Feature EA group>
Feature EA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set 101, a function to execute the winning probability setting process by 101)
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
It is a lottery performed based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific gaming state, and a specific notification corresponding to a predetermined specific lottery result can be notified by the specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). Provided with specific notification execution means (for example, a function for executing a setting process of an extra effect by the display control device 81);
The specific notification execution means includes
When the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the first notification means (in the case of an extra effect, the execution timing of the immediate effect) that is capable of executing the specific notification (first notification means) A function of executing a process of generating an extra notification effect in the extra winning game by the display control device 81);
When the setting value set by the setting means is a second setting value different from the first setting value, the specific notification is made in a second mode (if it is an extra effect) that is a mode different from the first mode. Second notification means (a function of executing a process of generating an additional notification effect in a game later than the winning game added by the main control device 101) that can be executed at the timing of execution of the additional effect);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by the privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result winning is determined by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the circuit body, A result that is a result winning is set, and a mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and a game is created that varies the degree of advantage by changing the presence or absence of a win depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification The

  Here, in a configuration in which the increase / decrease rate and the increase / decrease mode of the game medium are managed by the setting values set by the setting means, it is general that the probability of the lottery by the lottery means varies depending on each setting value. On the other hand, in creating the gameability as described above, if there is a difference depending on the set value to the presence / absence of mode notification, the probability of transition to a specific game state, continuity, etc., there will be too many parameters with setting differences. Accordingly, there is a possibility that the increase / decrease rate of the game medium and the range of the increase / decrease of the increase / decrease mode may be increased due to the overlap between the upper and lower amounts of each parameter. However, in the game in the specific game state, if the configuration is not provided with any difference due to the set value, the enjoyment in the specific game state can be reduced.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, the mode of notification of the result of specific lottery (specific notification) executed in the specific gaming state is made different depending on the set value, so that it is difficult to affect the payout rate by the set value. Within the range, it is possible to cause a difference in playability depending on the set value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The “first mode” and the “second mode” may be expressed as “first timing” and “second timing”. As described above, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, the above-described excellent effect can be exhibited with a simpler configuration.

Feature EA2. The specific notification execution means, as the specific notification, is a first specific notification that the specific lottery has been won (an additional notification effect in the immediate addition effect in the zone, a first additional character BUP1 in the latter case effect in the zone) 2nd additional character BUP2 display) and second specific notification regarding the contents when the specific lottery is won (in the zone immediate display effect, the number of games in the additional effect, special in the zone post effect) Notification of the number of additional games at the end of the zone)
The first notification means executes the first specific notification in a specific mode, and executes the second specific notification in the first mode.
The gaming machine according to claim EA1, wherein the second notification means executes the first specific notification in the specific mode and executes the second specific notification in the second mode. .

  According to the above configuration, as the specific notification, the first specific notification that the specific lottery regarding the specific gaming state has been won and the second specific notification regarding the winning content of the specific lottery are provided. The notification is executed in a common mode (specific mode) regardless of the set value, and the second specific notification is executed in a mode different depending on the set value. For this reason, the difference in the set value depends on the execution mode of the second specific notification, while preventing the occurrence of an event or the like that ends the game without noticing that the specific lottery has been won not differ depending on the set value. It is possible to realize a game property (a game property for predicting and grasping a set value) that reflects the above in the production.

Feature EA3. When the first setting value is set by the setting means, the increase rate of the game medium is higher than when the second setting value is set,
The gaming machine according to feature EA2, wherein the first mode is set as a timing ahead of the second mode.

  According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the second specific notification becomes earlier as the set value increases the increase rate of the game medium. Assuming that the player wants to set a setting value that increases the rate of increase and preferentially selects a gaming table with such a setting value, It is preferable that the second specific notification as the winning content is executed earlier. Thus, the set value can be predicted and grasped using the execution timing of the second specific notification.

  Here, in the game nature for predicting and grasping such a set value, if the predicted and grasped set value is not preferable for the player (in the case of the second set value in the above example), the player's The willingness to play can drop sharply. In that respect, in the above configuration, even if it is predicted and grasped that the second set value is not preferable for the player by the second specific notification, the specific lottery is won by the first specific notification before that. Therefore, the first specific notification makes the player a little more pleased by the first specific notification, and the decrease in the motivation for the game can be alleviated.

Feature EA4. The specific lottery is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result (specific role),
As the specific result, at least a first specific result (watermelon) and a second specific result (cherry) are provided,
The notification when the specific notification is performed by the first notification means and the ratio when the specific notification is performed by the second notification means is the notification ratio (immediate / post-load ratio) and is the first set value. The notification ratio difference, which is the difference between the ratio and the notification ratio in the case of the second set value, differs between the specific notification based on the first specific result and the specific notification based on the second specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of features EA1 to EA3, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, regarding the notification ratio between the case where the specific notification is performed in the first aspect and the case where the specific notification is performed in the second aspect, the notification ratio in the case of the first set value and the notification in the case of the second set value The notification ratio difference from the ratio is different between the first specific result and the second specific result. For example, when the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is larger than the notification ratio difference based on the second specific result, the specific notification based on the first specific result is better in the game of predicting and grasping the set value. Rather than the specific notification based on the second specific result, it can be a more powerful basis for the prediction and grasping material. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the ease of prediction and grasping varies depending on the type of specific result, the interest in the specific result that triggers the specific notification is raised, and the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game is increased. It becomes possible to raise suitably.

Feature EA5. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second specific result is set higher than the probability that the lottery result becomes the first specific result,
The feature EA4 is characterized in that the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is set to be larger than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second specific result. The gaming machine described.

  Based on the premise that the larger the notification ratio difference is, the more likely it will be as a basis for predicting and grasping the set value, the first identification result with a lower probability of winning is configured to have a larger notification ratio difference than the second identification result. Then, the specific notification based on the first specific result can be a more powerful basis for predicting and grasping the set value. Therefore, it is possible to create a merit that has been won with the first specific result with a low winning probability other than merit such as a special lottery based on the first specific result and a benefit at the time of winning the specific lottery. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to winning the first specific result.

  In addition, in the case where the benefit of the specific lottery is a benefit related to the game play rate, such as a benefit related to continuity during a specific game state, a configuration that provides the benefits of notification as described above, It is possible to provide merits from a viewpoint different from the rate, and it is possible to increase the merits for achieving the first specific result without causing a rise in the payout rate.

Feature EA6. As the gaming state in the specific gaming state, a first specific gaming state (special zone of cherry opportunity) and a second specific gaming state (special zone of special role opportunity other than cherry) are set,
In the first specific gaming state, the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is set to be larger than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second specific result. And
In the second specific gaming state, the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is set to be smaller than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second specific result. The gaming machine according to Feature EA4 or Feature EA5, wherein

  According to the above configuration, the notification ratio difference based on the first specific result and the second specific result is reversed between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. In other words, the effect of the feature EA5 is achieved in the first specific gaming state, and the setting value can be easily predicted and grasped when the second specific result winning with a high winning probability is achieved in the second specific gaming state. Therefore, the second specific gaming state is a state in which it is easier to predict and grasp the set value than the first specific gaming state. By doing in this way, it is possible to entertain a game for predicting and grasping a set value from the viewpoint of which specific gaming state it will be, and it is possible to improve interest through diversification of the game.

Feature EA7. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second specific result is set higher than the probability that the lottery result becomes the first specific result,
The gaming machine according to feature EA6, further comprising means for shifting to the second specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result.

  According to the said structure, when it becomes the 1st specific result with a low winning probability, it may transfer to the 2nd specific game state which is easy to predict and grasp a setting value. In this way, the merit based on the first specific result winning can be provided not only from the viewpoint of specific notification based on the winning, but also from the viewpoint of transition of the specific gaming state. It is possible to further improve the superiority of the result.

  Feature EA8. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first specific result and the probability that the second specific result becomes the same regardless of the gaming state is any one of features EA4 to EA7 The gaming machine described.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to realize gameability using the first specific result and the second specific result without changing the lottery probability by the lottery means. Therefore, for example, there is no need to change the lottery table, and the above-described gameability can be realized in comparison with a configuration that can be applied only in a limited state such as a big hit state in which the small role winning probability is different from the normal game state. The degree of freedom is greatly improved.

Feature EA9. The first notification means, as the first aspect, executes the specific notification in the game in which the specific lottery is performed,
The game according to any one of features EA1 to EA8, wherein, as the second aspect, the second notification means executes the specific notification in a game after the game in which the specific lottery is performed. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, the difference between the specific notification by the first notification unit and the specific notification by the second notification unit is the difference in the mode in different games. By doing in this way, it becomes a difference whether the result of a specific lottery is notified by the game, or it is notified by the game after it, and the game property by such a notification aspect is prolonged. It is possible to entertain for a period of time.

Feature EA10. Means for grasping the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state (the advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
Based on the remaining number of times in the specific game state, means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (in the advantageous section based on the fact that the normal end condition is established in the section display second process by the main control device 101) The function to execute the termination process),
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features EA1 to EA9, wherein the specific lottery is a lottery related to an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times.

  According to the above configuration, the specific lottery is a lottery regarding an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state, that is, an extra lottery. From the viewpoint of gameability that is advantageous to the player by performing mode notification in the specific game state, it is advantageous that the specific game state lasts for a long time, and such an increase in the remaining number of times can be said to be a favorable event for the player. In particular, after the transition to the specific game state, the game should be performed while hoping that the specific game state will continue for a long time. Therefore, the specific lottery regarding the increase process can be said to be a lottery that the player is interested in. In addition, by making the execution mode of the specific notification related to the increase processing of the remaining number different depending on the set value, it becomes possible to attract a great interest to the player regarding the difference of the execution mode, and the winning probability of the increase processing For example, it is possible to entertain while associating the set value with the increasing process without actually setting a difference.

Feature EA11. As the specific notification, the specific notification execution means includes a first specific notification that the increase process is performed (an additional notification effect in the immediate addition effect in the zone, a first additional character BUP1 in the post-indication effect in the zone) Second display character BUP2 display) and second specific notification regarding the increase in the remaining number of times when the increase process is performed (in the zone immediate effect, the number of games in the additional effect, post-zone additional) In the production, an announcement of the number of additional games at the end of the specialized zone) can be executed,
The first notification means executes the first specific notification in a specific mode, and executes the second specific notification in the first mode.
The gaming machine according to claim EA10, wherein the second notification unit is configured to execute the first specific notification in the specific mode and perform the second specific notification in the second mode. .

  According to the above configuration, on the premise of the configuration in which the first specific notification that the winning (increase processing) of the number of games is won in the specific gaming state and the second specific notification regarding the added number of games are provided, the first The specific notification is executed in a common mode (specific mode) regardless of the set value, and the second specific notification is executed in a mode different depending on the set value. Therefore, after the player is pleased through the addition by the first specific notification, the second specific notification related to the number of games to be added is performed in a mode with a setting difference. It will be performed in a situation where interest in notification has been increased in advance. In other words, it is considered that the difference in the notification mode gives a big impression to the player who is waiting now or more, and the merit of providing the setting difference for the notification mode of the second specific notification is more suitably exhibited. Is possible.

Feature EA12. The first notification means executes the first specific notification as the specific mode in the game in which the specific lottery is performed, and the second specific notification is performed in the game in which the specific lottery is performed as the first mode. Run and
The second notification means executes the first specific notification as the specific mode in the game in which the specific lottery is performed, and in the game after the game in which the specific lottery is performed as the second mode. The gaming machine according to feature EA10 or feature EA11, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

  According to the above-described configuration, when the additional notification (specific notification) is performed by the first notification means, the notification of the addition winning in the game in which the specific lottery is performed (first specific notification) and the notification of the number of additional games (Second specific notification) is performed, which is a so-called immediate notification. On the other hand, when an additional notification (specific notification) is performed by the second notification means, a notification that the winning is added (first specific notification) is performed in the game in which the specific lottery is performed, and the additional game is performed in the subsequent games. Number notification (second specific notification) is performed, and so-called post-notification is performed. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the immediate addition notification and the subsequent addition notification in the additional notification are made different depending on the set value, the game can be performed without causing a difference due to the set value with respect to the additional winning rate and the number of additional games at the time of winning It becomes possible to involve a set value for the addition of a number.

Feature EA13. Means for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific gaming state (advantageous section game number AG);
Based on the fact that the number of executions has reached a predetermined upper limit in the specific gaming state, means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times (main control device 101 A function for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the second section display process by
With
The ratio between the case where the specific notification is performed by the first notification unit and the case where the specific notification is performed by the second notification unit is a notification ratio, and the notification ratio in the case of the first set value and the second set value The gaming machine according to any one of features EA10 to EA12, wherein a notification ratio difference, which is a difference from the notification ratio in the case of, is different depending on the number of executions.

  According to the above configuration, on the premise that the upper limit number is set in the specific gaming state, the first set value regarding the notification ratio between the case where the specific notification is performed in the first mode and the case where the specific mode is performed in the second mode The notification ratio difference between the notification ratio in the case of and the notification ratio in the case of the second set value varies depending on the number of executions of the specific gaming state, and the difficulty of predicting and grasping the set value changes. For example, if there is still enough room for the number of games up to the maximum number of times, the player will want to add a large number of games, and if the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of times is small, Even if an extra number occurs, the player will not feel much joy, but will probably think that a loss has occurred if an extra amount exceeds the upper limit. In that respect, by using the above configuration, the difficulty of predicting and grasping the set value is varied in relation to the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of times, so that the happiness at the time of occurrence of addition is predicted. This makes it possible to compensate for the ease of operation.

Feature EA14. A number of times display means capable of displaying the number of times corresponding to the remaining number of times on a predetermined display means (function of executing processing for performing display corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81);
Any one of the characteristics EA10 to EA13, wherein whether the specific notification is performed by the first notification unit or the second notification unit differs depending on the number of times displayed by the number display. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, whether the specific notification as the additional notification is performed in the first mode or in the second mode differs depending on the number of times display corresponding to the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state. For example, in the situation where the number of times displayed is small, the player will be able to get a sense of relief by adding the number of times displayed, and conversely, in the case where the number of times displayed is large, In some cases, it may be preferable to obtain a superior feeling that the number of remaining remaining times is greater than the number display, rather than immediately increasing the number display. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by changing the manner of the additional notification according to the number of times displayed from the number of times display, an effect using the difference in emotion due to the addition as described above is obtained. It becomes possible. Therefore, an effective performance that attracts the player can be realized.

Feature EA15. Grant determination means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the occurrence of a determination trigger;
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player, a privilege that can grant a privilege corresponding to the grant response result to the player Granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium based on the determination result by the grant determination means are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of stages is Setting means to be set (function to execute the processing for setting the winning probability by the main controller 101);
Specific determination means that is executed based on the determination result by the assignment determination means, and performs specific determination with a common winning probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means (the first determination by the main control device 101) 1 specific combination process to second specific combination process)
The specific notification corresponding to the determination result by the specific determination unit can be executed by a predetermined notification unit (auxiliary display unit 65). Function)
With
The specific notification execution means includes
When the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the first notification means (in the case of an extra effect, the execution timing of the immediate effect) that is capable of executing the specific notification (first notification means) A function of executing a process of generating an extra notification effect in the extra winning game by the display control device 81);
When the setting value set by the setting means is a second setting value different from the first setting value, the specific notification is made in a second mode (if it is an extra effect) that is a mode different from the first mode. Second notification means (a function of executing a process of generating an additional notification effect in a game later than the winning game added by the main control device 101) that can be executed at the timing of execution of the additional effect);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the setting value that causes a change in the increase / decrease rate and the increase / decrease mode of the game medium based on the determination result by the grant determination unit is set, the setting value does not affect the winning probability by the specific determination unit. Although it does not exist, it affects the execution mode of the specific notification as the result notification corresponding to the determination result by the specific determination means, and the execution mode differs between the case of the first set value and the case of the second set value. By doing in this way, with respect to the specific determination executed based on the determination result by the grant determination means, it is possible to associate the set value with the specific determination without providing a difference due to the set value for the winning probability. Become.

  Here, it is considered that a player who wants to increase the number of game media searches for a game table having a better setting value and plays a game, and suggests a suggestion effect that suggests a setting value set by the setting means. By providing it, it can be said that it is possible to make the game more interesting. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the probability of occurrence varies depending on the setting value for the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect itself does not occur or hardly occurs depending on the set value that is set, and the suggested effect that has been prepared is effective. For example, in order to provide a suggestion effect such as confirming that a predetermined set value is established when it appears, it is necessary to prepare a suggestion effect for the predetermined set value separately. In that respect, in the above-described configuration, regarding the specific notification having the function as the suggestive effect, the winning probability of the specific determination that triggers the specific notification is not caused to vary depending on the set value. Since the setting values can be common and only the specific notification execution mode is changed, it is not necessary to prepare separate specific notifications for each setting value. Therefore, it is possible to carry out the suggestion effect more simply and effectively, and it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

  The “first mode” and the “second mode” may be expressed as “first timing” and “second timing”. As described above, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, the above-described excellent effect can be exhibited with a simpler configuration.

  Note that the configurations of the features EA1 to EA14 may be applied individually to the feature EA15, or may be applied in combination. In this case, the term “application determination means” in the feature EA15 may be read as “lottery means”, and the terminology may be appropriately matched between the components.

<Feature EB group>
Feature EB1. Specific determination means capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to execute a specific event advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition (first specific combination process to third control by the main control device 101) A function to execute a specific role process),
Event execution means for executing the specific event based on the determination result by the specific determination means corresponding to the execution of the specific event (function for executing the game number addition processing by the main control device 101) When,
The specific notification corresponding to the execution of the specific event or the specific notification corresponding to the execution of the specific event can be performed by the specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) (indication effect by the display control device 81). Function to execute the setting process),
Number of times grasping means for grasping the number of times of the specific event (function for executing a process for managing a watermelon post-mounting counter and a watermelon immediate loading counter by the display control device 81),
With
The specific notification execution means includes
First notification execution means (a function for executing a process for performing an immediate riding effect in the zone in the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing;
Second notification execution means (a function for executing a process for performing a post-stage effect in the zone in the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing later than the first timing;
Selection means (display) for selecting a notification execution means for executing the specific notification from a plurality of notification execution means including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means according to the number of times grasped by the number grasping means. A function of executing a process of selecting an additional notification timing table according to the table counter ATK in the control device 81);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when a specific event advantageous for the player occurs by winning in the specific determination, the player can grasp the specific event based on the specific notification corresponding to the specific event. For example, if a specific event is a jackpot, the specific notification is a jackpot notification, and the player can fully enjoy the jackpot by the jackpot notification and can immerse himself in a sense of superiority.

  Here, when a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs, the player's feelings when the specific event occurs are subtle at each occurrence even if the advantage of the specific event does not change at each occurrence. It is thought that a change will occur. Specifically, at the first occurrence, it is thought that the occurrence of the specific event will be greatly appreciated, but after that, the “accustomed” to the occurrence occurs every time, and the joy of the first occurrence is felt. It is thought that it will disappear.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, the specific notification according to the subtle change of the player at each occurrence can be realized by changing the execution timing of the specific notification for the occurrence of the specific event at each occurrence. This makes it possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature EB2. The gaming machine according to feature EB2, wherein the selection unit is more easily selected so that the specific notification is performed by the first notification execution unit as the number of times grasped by the number grasping unit is smaller.

  According to the said structure, the notification is performed earlier, so that there are few specific events advantageous to a player. For a player who is looking forward to whether or not an advantageous specific event occurs, it is preferable that the notification is made early, and after an advantageous specific event has already occurred several times, It is thought that it is possible to feel joy as much as it was not expected when the specific event is notified at an unexpected timing. Therefore, by using the above configuration, it is possible to suitably realize specific notification according to the player's emotion that can change at each occurrence.

Feature EB3. The number-of-times grasping means is a first specific event number that is the number of times of the specific event for which the specific notice is executed by the first notice execution means, or the second notice number. Specific number grasping means for grasping either one of the second specific event number, which is the number of the specific event for which the specific notification is executed by the execution means (for example, the display control device 81 immediately puts on the watermelon) Function to execute processing to manage the counter)
The selection unit includes a plurality of notification executions including the first notification execution unit and the second notification execution unit according to the first specific event number or the second specific event number determined by the specific number determination unit. The game machine according to Feature EB1 or Feature EB2, wherein a notification execution unit that executes the specific notification is selected from a unit.

  According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the next specific notification is selected based on the number of times that the specific notification is executed at the first timing (or the second timing), not just the number of executions of the specific event. In this case, for example, if a large number of times are executed at the first timing, the second timing is easily selected next time or the first timing is easily selected next time. In consideration of the timing of the specific notification, it is possible to determine the execution timing of the new specific notification, and to finely adjust the subtle difference in the impression given to the player by the execution timing of the specific notification.

  Feature EB4. Based on the fact that the specific notification is executed by the notification execution means different from the specific notification by the notification execution means on the side grasped by the specific number grasping means, the first identification grasped by the specific number grasping means The gaming machine according to feature EB3, comprising means capable of initializing the number of times of events or the number of times of the second specific event (function of executing the process of step S10806 by the display control device 81).

  According to the above configuration, for example, when the specific number grasping unit grasps the first specific event number, when the specific notification is executed by the first notification executing unit, the first specific event number is incremented by one, When the specific notification is executed by the second notification executing means, the first specific event count is initialized (reset). That is, the number of times grasped by the specific number of times grasping means is the continuous number of times that the specific notice is executed by the first notice executing means, or the continuous number of times that the specific notice is executed by the second notice executing means. Thus, for example, if the specific notification at the first timing is continued, the specific notification execution timing is determined according to the number of grasps, such as making it easier to perform the specific notification at the first timing. In addition, it is possible to make a decision according to the number of consecutive times.

Feature EB5. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set 101, a function to execute the winning probability setting process by 101)
The selection means is capable of selecting a notification execution means for executing the specific notification from the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means and a set value set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features EB1 to EB4.

  According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the specific notification also changes depending on the setting value that causes a change in the increase / decrease rate or the increase / decrease mode of the game medium. For example, a situation in which a large amount of game media is acquired due to a setting value being a good setting value, a situation in which a gaming medium is not acquired due to a setting value being a bad setting value, In comparison with the case where an advantageous specific event occurs, it is considered that the joy of the player is greater in the latter than in the former. Therefore, by using the above configuration, it is possible to realize specific notification according to a subtle change in the player's emotion based on an advantageous specific event and whether the set value is good or bad.

Feature EB6. The selection means includes
When the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is the first number of times and the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, a predetermined notification executing means is selected with a first probability, When the number of times grasped by the number-of-times grasping means is the first number of times and the setting value set by the setting means is a second setting value different from the first setting value, the first probability Selects the predetermined notification execution means with a different second probability,
If the number grasped by the number grasping means is a second number greater than the first number and the setting value set by the setting means is the first set value, the third probability When the predetermined notification executing means is selected, the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is the second number of times, and the setting value set by the setting means is the second setting value, the third The predetermined notification execution means is selected with a fourth probability different from the probability,
The gaming machine according to feature EB5, wherein the probability difference between the third probability and the fourth probability is set to be larger than the probability difference between the first probability and the second probability.

  According to the above configuration, when the notification execution unit is selected based on the number of specific events and the set value, the influence of the set value increases as the number increases, and conversely, the influence of the set value decreases as the number decreases. By doing in this way, for example, in the case of a configuration in which a setting value is suggested at a specific notification execution timing, it becomes easier to narrow down the setting value as the number of executions of the specific event increases. In other words, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being narrowed down in a situation where the number of executions of the specific event is small, and not to kill the fun of games in which the setting value is gradually narrowed down.

  More specifically, the “predetermined notification execution unit” is “first notification execution unit” or “second notification execution unit”.

  Feature EB7. The gaming machine according to Feature EB6, wherein when the first number is one, the first probability and the second probability are the same probability.

  According to the above configuration, when the first specific event is executed, there is no difference between the specific notification execution timing and the set value. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event in which the set value is determined from the first time, and it is possible to suitably realize the gameability for predicting the set value.

Feature EB8. A notification in which information on notification execution means for executing the specific notification is stored from a plurality of notification execution means including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means according to the number of times grasped by the number grasping means. Each execution means information group (addition notification timing table) is set,
The selection means selects the notification execution means for executing the specific notification by switching the information execution means information group to be used according to the number of times grasped by the number grasping means. EB1 to EB7 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, the notification execution means selected by the selection means can be varied by simply switching the notification execution means information group (table) according to the number of executions of the specific event. Therefore, the effect of the feature EB1 can be achieved with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature EB9. As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state (normal section) and a specific gaming state (advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features EB1 to EB8, wherein the specific event is an event capable of increasing a remaining number of times of the specific gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, the specific event is executed during the specific game state where the game state is advantageous in the first place, and when the specific event occurs, the remaining number of the specific game state increases. That is, the specific event is an addition of the specific game state. By setting the execution timing of specific notification (addition notification) when such an increase occurs according to the number of occurrences of addition, for example, when the number of occurrences of addition is small and the remaining number is small Thus, it is possible to make an extra notification using a subtle difference in the player's emotion when the extra is generated when the extra occurrence is large and the remaining number is large.

<Feature EC group>
Features EC1. Specific determination means capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to execute a specific event advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition (the first specific combination process through the first specific combination process by the main controller 101) 3 specific function processing)
Event execution means for executing the specific event based on the determination result by the specific determination means corresponding to the execution of the specific event (function for executing the game number addition processing by the main control device 101) When,
The specific notification corresponding to the execution of the specific event or the specific notification corresponding to the execution of the specific event can be performed by the specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) (indication effect by the display control device 81). Function to execute the setting process),
Specific storage means capable of storing information related to the timing at which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification execution means (a function of executing a process for managing a watermelon retrofit counter and a watermelon immediate addition counter by the display control device 81); ,
Specific output means capable of outputting specific information corresponding to the information stored in the specific storage means at a timing later than the timing at which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification execution means (for the watermelon by the display control device 81) A function to display the immediate / rearward ratio and the immediate / rearward ratio for cherry)),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when a specific event advantageous for the player occurs by winning in the specific determination, the player can grasp the specific event based on the specific notification corresponding to the specific event. For example, if a specific event is a jackpot, the specific notification is a jackpot notification, and the player can fully enjoy the jackpot by the jackpot notification and can immerse himself in a sense of superiority. Although the specific notification can be performed at various timings, the timing at which the specific notification is executed is stored in the above configuration, and the specific information regarding the timing is output after the fact. Here, for example, when the game data is aggregated later, specific events such as jackpots may be displayed on the data display of the game hall, etc., and such events that are advantageous to the player are stored in memory. It is likely that it will remain and can be easily recalled later. On the other hand, regarding the execution timing of the specific notification that a specific event advantageous to the player will occur, the player's desire will be satisfied at the time when the specific notification is performed, and the game will occur when the specific event occurs. Since the person's feeling of exaltation will further increase, it is considered that the specific notification executed before that tends to fade from memory as the feeling of exaltation increases. In other words, regarding the specific notification, it is considered that the execution timing is particularly difficult to remain in the player's memory. Therefore, as described above, information that is difficult to be stored in the memory is stored on the gaming machine side and can be read (output) later, thereby assisting the player in collecting data. It becomes possible.

Features EC2. As the specific event, a plurality of specific events (additions with different numbers of games) having different advantages for the player are set,
The game according to feature EC1, wherein the specific storage means can store the same advantage as the specific event, but can be stored as different information when the specific notification is executed at different timings. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, even if specific events have the same advantage, they can be tabulated separately if the specific notification execution timing is different. That is, even if the jackpot is similar, if the jackpot notification timing is different, it can be tabulated as separate information. For example, in a conventional counting method, although the jackpot and the jackpot are separately tabulated, the same information is generally tabulated even if the notification timing is different if the jackpot is the same. According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to clarify the difference from such a conventional technique and more appropriately realize the aggregation of the notification timing shown in the feature EC1.

Features EC3. The specific notification execution means includes
A first specific notification executing means (a function for executing a process for performing an immediate ride by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing;
Second specific notification execution means (a function for executing a process for performing a retrofit effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing different from the first timing;
With
The specific output means is capable of outputting, as the specific information, ratio information between the specific notification executed by the first specific notification execution means and the specific notification executed by the second specific notification execution means. The gaming machine according to feature EC1 or feature EC2.

  According to the above configuration, the ratio information of the ratio executed at the first timing and the ratio executed at the second timing is output as the information regarding the execution timing of the specific notification. In this way, not only is the counting easier, but for example, when the number of executions of a specific event is small, it is not preferable for the player to output only the ratio without outputting the number of times. It is also possible to avoid that information is expressed as it is.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.
“The specific notification execution means
A first specific notification executing means (a function for executing a process for performing an immediate ride by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing;
Second specific notification execution means (a function for executing a process for performing a retrofit effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing different from the first timing;
With
The specific output means is capable of outputting, as the specific information, ratio information between the specific notification executed by the first specific notification execution means and the specific notification executed by the second specific notification execution means. The number information of the specific notification executed by the first specific notification execution unit and the specific notification executed by the second specific notification execution unit is not output. ”

  Feature EC4. Restriction that can restrict the output of the specific information by the output means in a specific situation (advantageous section) in which the specific event is being executed or a game based on the specific event is being performed The gaming machine according to any one of the features EC1 to EC3, characterized in that it comprises means (function to execute the processing of step S11206 by the display control device 81).

  According to the above configuration, the output of the specific information is restricted during a specific event or in a specific situation where a game based on the specific event is being performed. For example, during the jackpot, the information regarding the execution timing of the jackpot notification is not output. By doing so, it is possible to prevent an event that a specific event or the like cannot be fully enjoyed due to data collection during a specific situation. Further, assuming such a configuration, the output of the specific information can be at a later timing, so that the significance of storing the specific information is enhanced.

Feature EC5. The specific notification execution means executes the specific notification after determining the execution timing of the specific notification using a predetermined information group (an additional notification timing table including information on setting values),
The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC4, wherein the information set in the predetermined information group can be useful information for a player.

  According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the specific notification is determined using the information set in the predetermined information group, and the predetermined information group is set by counting the execution timings. Information can be predicted and grasped. Since the information set in the predetermined information group can be useful information for the player, the aggregation of execution timing can be said to be an action for collecting information that can be useful for the player. Therefore, the significance of outputting the specific information is further enhanced, and it becomes possible to cause a player's merit by outputting the specific information.

Feature EC6. In the specific storage means, the specific area for storing information related to the timing at which the specific notification is executed is configured to be capable of storing information related to the timing at which the plurality of specific notifications are executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC5, wherein the specific output means is capable of outputting cumulative information of the plurality of stored information as the specific information.

  According to the above configuration, when there are a plurality of pieces of information regarding the execution timing of the specific notification, such as when the specific notification is executed a plurality of times, the cumulative information is output as the specific information. Therefore, the player can perform data analysis more easily based on the specific information.

Feature EC7. A first determination condition (cherry) and a second determination condition (watermelon) are set as the determination conditions,
The specific information storage means separately includes information corresponding to the execution timing of the specific notification based on the establishment of the first determination condition and information corresponding to the execution timing of the specific notification based on the establishment of the second determination condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC6, wherein

  According to the above configuration, since information corresponding to the execution timing of the specific notification is stored for each type of determination condition, it is possible to perform more useful data analysis such as when the information obtained for each type is different. Become.

Feature EC8. It has an operation unit (production switch 66) that can be operated by the player,
Based on the operation of the operation unit, there is provided means capable of erasing information stored in the specific storage means (a function of executing the processing of steps S11203 and S11204 by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC7.

  According to the said structure, a player can select freely whether the information memorize | stored in the specific memory | storage means is erased. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the successor from taking over the game data that has been played by himself, and to ensure the superiority of collecting specific information.

Feature EC9. Based on the operation of the operation unit, the specific information is output by the specific output means,
The gaming machine according to feature EC8, wherein the specific storage means is capable of storing information related to a timing at which the specific notification is executed regardless of whether or not the operation unit is operated.

  According to the above configuration, on the assumption that the information regarding the execution timing of the specific notification is erased or output by the operation of the operation unit, the information regarding the execution timing of the specific notification is stored regardless of whether the operation unit is operated or not. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the specific information cannot be output due to forgetting the operation or the like, while ensuring the superiority by entrusting the operation by the player to collect the specific information.

Feature EC10. As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are set,
First ending means for ending the specific gaming state in accordance with the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state (a function of executing a process of normally ending the advantageous section in the main control device 101);
A second ending means for ending the specific gaming state regardless of the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state (function for executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the main control device 101);
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC9, wherein the specific output means is capable of outputting the specific information based on completion of the specific gaming state by the second ending means. .

  The specific gaming state advantageous to the player may be ended depending on the remaining number of times that can be executed, or may be ended regardless of the remaining number of times. The former is a normal termination mode, and the latter corresponds to forced termination, for example, when the number of executions reaches the upper limit. In such a configuration, if the player is forcibly terminated by the second ending means, the player who wants to fully enjoy the specific gaming state may receive an impression as if the obtained profit has been exploited. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the specific information is output instead, so that it is possible to follow the forced termination of the specific gaming state.

<Feature ED group>
Features ED1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set,
First grasping means (an advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the highly advantageous state;
A second grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state (the advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantageous state, first ending means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (usually in the section display second process by the main control device 101) A function to execute an advantageous section ending process based on the fact that the ending condition is satisfied),
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number in the highly advantageous state. A second ending means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (function of executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101);
Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one setting value among the setting values of the plurality of steps is set 101 to execute the winning probability setting process by 101),
A gaming machine comprising
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
When the increase process is performed by the increase unit, an increase notification execution unit (an auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing an increase notification (addition notification) that the increase process has been performed (preliminary display unit 65). A function of executing a setting process of an extra effect by the display control device 81),
With
The increase notification execution means, when performing the increase notification, is a specific notification execution means (display control device) capable of executing a specific notification suggesting information of a setting value set by the setting means according to the number of executions. 81. A gaming machine having a function of executing a post-zone directing effect in 81 and an immediate directing effect in the zone.

  According to the above configuration, there are a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state is terminated based on the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state; Since it may end based on having reached the upper limit number of times, it is suppressed that the advantage of a highly advantageous state is raised extremely. In such a configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied, it has a so-called extra function in which the remaining number of high advantageous states is increased, and a sense of expectation that the specific condition is satisfied is enhanced.

  On the other hand, even if the specified condition is satisfied and the remaining number is increased, the increase is sufficient, for example, when the remaining number is increased to reach the upper limit number, as in the situation where the number of executions is close to the upper limit number. However, in a highly advantageous state in which the upper limit number is set, the feeling of expectation for the increase in the remaining number varies greatly depending on the situation.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, when the increase notification corresponding to the increase process is performed, the setting value can be suggested according to the number of executions. Even in a situation where the merit of satisfying the condition cannot be fully enjoyed, it is possible to follow the merit by suggesting the set value. Therefore, a highly advantageous state can be fully enjoyed, and it is possible to suitably improve the interest.

  Features ED2. The specific notification execution unit is configured so that the information on the setting value set by the setting unit in the specific notification becomes easier to grasp as the number of executions grasped by the first grasping unit approaches the upper limit number. The gaming machine according to feature ED1, wherein the gaming machine can be suggested.

  According to the above configuration, the set value can be easily grasped by the specific notification so that the number of executions increases and approaches the upper limit number, and even if the increase process is performed, the merit cannot be fully enjoyed. As a result, it is possible to compensate for the merits that cannot be enjoyed by the increase process by suggesting the set value.

Features ED3. The specific notification execution means includes
When the number of executions grasped by the first grasping unit is the first number and the setting value set by the setting unit is the first setting value, the execution mode of the specific notification is determined with a first probability. The setting value information is suggested in a specific manner, the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is the first number, and the setting value set by the setting means is the first number. When the second setting value is different from the first setting value, the setting value information is suggested so that the specific notification execution mode becomes the specific mode with a second probability different from the first probability,
If the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is the second number larger than the first number and the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the third probability is set. The setting information is suggested so that the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode, the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is the second number, and the setting means When the set value to be set is the second set value, the setting value information is suggested so that the specific notification execution mode becomes the specific mode with a fourth probability different from the third probability. Is,
The gaming machine according to feature ED2, wherein the difference in probability between the third probability and the fourth probability is set to be larger than the difference in probability between the first probability and the second probability.

  According to the above configuration, the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode and suggests the set value so that the number of executions increases and approaches the upper limit number, and even if the increase process is performed, the merit of the specific notification becomes the specific mode. The difference between the set values in the probability that the Thereby, the effect of characteristic ED2 can be show | played by a specific structure.

  Features ED4. The game according to any one of features ED1 to ED3, wherein the specific notification execution means can suggest the information of the set value at the execution timing of the increase notification as the specific notification. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, as long as the setting value is suggested using the difference in the execution timing of the increase notification, there is no need to prepare different effects for the setting values set in a plurality of stages. Thereby, specific alerting | reporting is realizable with a simple structure, without causing complication of an effect structure.

  Features ED5. The specific notification execution means executes the increase notification at a first timing when the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, and the setting value set by the setting means When the second setting value is different from the first setting value, the specific notification can be executed by executing the increase notification at a second timing different from the first timing. A gaming machine described in feature ED4.

  According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature ED4 can be achieved by a more specific configuration.

  Features ED6. The gaming machine according to claim ED5, wherein the second timing is a game after the first timing.

  According to the above configuration, the game is different in the first timing and the second timing. In this case, the remaining number of times when the specific notification is executed at the first timing is different from the remaining number of times when the specific notification is executed at the second timing. For example, in the case where the specific notification is notified in a situation where the remaining number is small and the case where the specific notification is notified when the remaining number is large, it is considered that the joy of increasing the remaining number is greater in the former. That is, the impression received by the player when the remaining number of times is increased by the increase notification is greatly different. By adopting a configuration that suggests a setting value by using such a difference in impression received by the player, for example, by suggesting a low setting at a timing when the player feels happy about the increase notification It is possible to relieve the sadness of being in a low setting, and conversely to compensate for the joy of an increase notification by giving a high setting suggestion at a time when you feel that you are not very happy with the increase notification. it can.

Features ED7. The specific notification execution means includes
When the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the increase notification is executed in the first game, and the setting value set by the setting means is more than the first setting value. If the second set value is advantageous for the second game, the increase notification is executed in a second game that is a game after the first game.
In the same setting value set by the setting means,
When the number of executions grasped by the grasping means is the first number of executions, the specific selection rate at which the second game is selected over the first game is the first selection rate,
When the number of executions grasped by the grasping means is a second number of executions greater than the first execution number, the specific selection rate is set to a second selection rate higher than the first selection rate, The gaming machine according to any one of ED4 to ED6, wherein the specific notification can be executed.

  According to the above configuration, the higher the setting, the easier the increase notification is executed in the later game, and when compared with the same set value, the number of executions than that in the early stage where the number of executions of the specific gaming state is small In the early stage when the number of executions of the specific gaming state is small, the increase notification is executed in the first game and is set to a low setting by the configuration in which the increase notification is executed more easily in the later game. Although it is easy to make a suggestion to the effect, the joy of being informed of the increase can alleviate the sadness of the low setting. On the other hand, since it is easy to suggest that the setting is high at the end of a specific gaming state, even if it is a situation where you feel that you are not happy with the increase notification, follow up with the suggestion that the setting is high. It becomes possible.

Features ED8. The increase notification is
First means for executing the increase notification in the game in which the specific condition is satisfied (function of executing a process for performing an immediate ride effect in the display control device 81);
A second means for executing the increase notification in a game after the game for which the specific condition is satisfied (a function for executing a process for performing a retrofit effect in the display control device 81);
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features ED4 to ED7, wherein the increasing means executes the increasing process in a game in which the specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the above configuration, since the increase process itself is executed in a game in which a specific condition is satisfied, even if the increase notification is performed in a subsequent game like the second means, the difference in production Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration for performing specific notification based on the difference in execution timing of increase notification while managing the number of executions, the upper limit number of times, and the like.

Features ED9. A number notification means (a function for executing a process for managing the display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81) capable of performing the number notification corresponding to the remaining number by a predetermined notification means;
When the increase notification is executed in a game after the game in which the specific condition is satisfied by the second means, the number notification means is a result of an increase process executed in the game in which the specific condition is satisfied. The number of times notification is performed without reflecting, and the result of the increase processing for the increase notification is reflected in the number of times notification based on the increase notification performed by the second means. A gaming machine according to ED8.

  According to the above configuration, when an increase notification is performed after the remaining number of times is grasped to some extent by the number notification means, the result of the increase process is not reflected in the number notification until the increase notification occurs. As a result, it is possible to achieve the effect of simplifying the processing configuration such as the feature ED8 while achieving the effect of performing the increase notification in a subsequent game.

  Features ED10. 10. The gaming machine according to feature ED9, wherein the specific notification execution unit is capable of performing the specific notification in accordance with information on the number notification notified by the number notification unit.

  According to the above configuration, the setting value suggestion (specific notification) is performed by performing the increase notification in consideration of the information about the number notification on the display. In this way, for example, when the remaining number of times actually remains, but when the number of times displayed on the display shows a small number of times, it is handled as a case where the increase notification will be happy. It becomes possible. Therefore, the number of scenes where the configuration such as the feature ED6 is applied is increased, and the effect of the feature ED1 can be more suitably exhibited.

<Feature FA group>
Feature FA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result in the normal gaming state, the transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (a winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101 is executed) Function)
Grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state (the number of remaining advantageous game ZG);
Based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the specific game state, normal transition means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (normal end condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101) The function of executing the termination process of the advantageous section based on the fact that
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
When the increase process is performed by the increase unit, an increase notification execution unit (an auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing an increase notification (addition notification) that the increase process has been performed (preliminary display unit 65). A function of executing a setting process of an extra effect by the display control device 81),
With
The increase notification executing means includes
First notification execution means (a function for executing a process for performing an extra effect based on the immediate addition selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification in the first mode;
Second notification execution means (a function for executing a process for performing an extra effect based on a post-selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification in a second mode different from the first mode; ,
With
The first notification execution means is based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in the first specific stop operation mode and the corresponding circulating body stops in the specific game in which the aspect notification by the aspect notification means is not executed. The increase notification when the increase process is performed is executed in the first aspect,
In the specific game, the second notification execution unit is configured such that the stop operation unit is operated in a second specific stop operation mode different from the first specific stop operation mode, and the corresponding circuit body stops. Based on this, the notification of the increase when the increase process is performed is executed in the second mode.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by the privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation unit. A specific gaming state is provided in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence of notification. In addition, if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific game state, the remaining number of the specific game state may be increased, and it may be possible to acquire a large amount of game media by continuing the specific game state for a long time. The playability of each game has been greatly improved.

  On the other hand, in a specific gaming state, the player is likely to be a one-sided game from the gaming machine, such as a player performing a stop operation based on the mode notification on the gaming machine side and winning the corresponding result, In consideration of the original gaming characteristics of the slot machine, such as stopping by aiming at the pattern of the orbiting body and obtaining a privilege, the gaming machine-led game described above is not preferable.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition is performed is changed to the player by the stop operation mode by the stop operation means in the specific game where the mode notification is not performed. The configuration is selected. By doing so, it is possible to cause the player to intervene in the game in the specific gaming state, and it is possible to promote the participation of the player in the gameability that can be led by the gaming machine.

  In addition, regarding the “specific game in which the mode notification by the mode notification unit is not executed”, “with a special result (specific role, normal replay) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery unit” When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special result winning can be established by operating each stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the second result. The special result winning can be achieved by being operated in the stop operation mode, and the game “the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result” may be the “specific game”.

  The “first mode” and the “second mode” may be expressed as “first timing” and “second timing”. As described above, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, the above-described excellent effect can be exhibited with a simpler configuration.

Feature FA2. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a re-game result that allows a next game to be re-played without requiring a new game medium is provided,
The gaming machine according to Feature FA1, wherein when the specific gaming state is entered, a transition to a re-gaming state in which a probability that a lottery result of the lottery means becomes a predetermined re-gaming result is higher than the normal gaming state is possible. .

  According to the above configuration, when a transition is made to a specific gaming state in which an aspect notification is performed, a transition to a so-called RT state where the probability of a predetermined re-game result is high can be made. In general, the replay result is that a winning is established regardless of the stop operation mode of the stop operation means. In the RT state, the mode notification is performed and the privilege is obtained in the stop operation mode according to the mode notification. It is conceivable that, in addition to the game that wins the first result or the second result, a game that wins a predetermined replay result with a high winning probability frequently occurs. As described above, since the re-game result is generally one in which a winning is established regardless of the stop operation mode, in these games, the stop operation is performed according to the instruction from the gaming machine side. It may be a game or a game in which the stop operation mode is not related to the presence or absence of a prize, and there is less room for a player to intervene in the game. In that regard, as described in the feature FA1, since the execution mode of the increase notification is determined based on the stop operation mode of the specific game in which the mode notification is not performed, for example, the above replay result winning game Can also be set as a specific game. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the above configuration limits that “when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result winning, the specific replay result winning is established regardless of the stop operation mode by each stop operation means”. By doing so, it becomes possible to produce the above-mentioned effect more clearly.

Feature FA3. Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the specific condition is satisfied,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode so that the specific result winning can be established, and each stop operation means is the first result. The gaming machine according to Feature FA1 or Feature FA2, wherein the specific result winning can be established by being operated in the stop operation mode of 2.

  According to the above configuration, in the specific result winning game that triggers the execution of the increase process, the specific result winning is established regardless of the stop operation mode of the stop operation means. That is, a game that is not an execution target of the mode notification by the mode notification unit is triggered by the increase process, and the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase process is performed according to the stop operation mode of the game is determined. Assuming that the game is being played while hoping that the increase processing is performed in the specific gaming state, the interest in the game in which such a mode notification is not performed is another game (the mode notification is performed). It is considered to be high compared to the game). Therefore, as described above, by adopting a configuration in which an execution mode of increase notification is determined in a game that is originally of high interest, it is possible to fully enjoy the gameability of selecting the increase notification by itself.

  Feature FA4. The gaming machine according to feature FA3, wherein a game whose lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result is the specific game.

  According to the above configuration, the specific result winning game becomes the specific game. That is, the game for which the increase process is performed and the game for selecting the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase process is performed are the same game. When the increase notification is performed, the joy of the player is considered to be different depending not only on the execution mode but also on the progress of the game (the state of the specific game state). It is possible to select the execution mode in a situation closer to the progress situation that changes every moment. In other words, for example, a configuration in which the execution mode of the special notification is selected at the start of the game or at the start of the specific game state is also conceivable. In such a configuration, the execution mode originally desired as the game progresses is different. There is a possibility that an increase notification is performed in the execution mode. In that respect, according to the above configuration, it is possible to realize an increase notification according to the player's preference.

Feature FA5. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the specific result winning is established by stopping a specific picture combination corresponding to the specific result at the effective position,
In each of the circulating bodies, the specific pattern constituting the specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position when the corresponding stop operation means is stopped in the first stop mode. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in a second stop mode different from the first stop mode, the specific circuit body is attached so that the stop is not possible at the effective position. A gaming machine described in FA4.

  According to the above configuration, since the specific result is a so-called missed result, the stop operation for performing such a selection is performed in the gameability that selects the execution mode of the increase notification in the stop operation mode in the specific result winning game. The configuration is such that the specific result is not missed, and the difficulty of the operation is increased and the gameability is improved.

Feature FA6. The second aspect is a timing later than the first aspect,
The first specific stop operation mode is a stop operation mode in which the first stop operation unit among the stop operation units is operated to stop a specific number.
The second specific stop operation mode is a stop operation mode in which a second stop operation unit different from the first stop operation unit among the respective stop operation units is operated to stop the specific number,
6. The gaming machine according to feature FA5, wherein the stop operation means corresponding to the specific circuit body is the first stop operation means.

  According to the above-described configuration, the configuration is such that the execution mode of the increase notification is selected depending on which stop operation means to perform the specific stop operation, and in the specified result winning game, the stop operation for the circulating body that has been missed When the means is stopped to the specific position, the first mode is selected. By doing this, even if a missed out occurs, an increase notification will be made at a relatively early timing, whether it was missed, or whether it was not winning the specific result in the first place It can be configured to resolve questions and anxiety due to possibility earlier.

  Feature FA7. The game machine according to Feature FA3, wherein a game preceding the game whose lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result is the specific game.

  According to the said structure, it becomes a structure which selects the execution aspect of the increase alert | report when an increase process is performed by the stop operation aspect of the game before the specific result winning game used as the opportunity of an increase process. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform operation to select and operation which is going to establish a specific result winning in a separate game, and can concentrate on each operation.

Feature FA8. Based on the transition to the specific gaming state, means (attack mode start effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing transition notification (attack mode start effect) of the transition to the specific gaming state by a predetermined notification means Function to execute)
The game machine according to any one of features FA1 to FA7, wherein a game after the game for which the transition notification is performed is the specific game.

  According to the above configuration, it is clarified that one game in the game in the specific game state is the specific game, and the difference from the game property selected before or at the start of the specific game state becomes clearer. That is, in the game after the specific game state is started, it is possible to more clearly show the effect of enhancing the enjoyment of the game in which the mode notification is not performed.

  Feature FA9. The gaming machine according to any one of features FA1 to FA8, wherein the second mode is included in a game different from the game including the first mode.

  According to the above configuration, the game in which the increase notification is performed can be different depending on the stop operation mode in the specific game. By setting it as such a structure, the selection result by a player can be influenced to the production over a some game, and it becomes possible to raise the importance and significance of selection.

  Feature FA10. When the stop operation means is operated in the second specific stop operation mode in the specific game, the game before the target game including the second mode is further set as the specific game, and the increase The game machine according to Feature FA9, wherein the notification execution means executes the increase notification in a mode corresponding to a stop operation mode of the stop operation unit in the rear specific game.

  In the configuration in which an increase notification is performed in a later game across the game as in the feature FA9, a scene that becomes a specific game can be considered in a situation where the later game is selected. In that respect, in the above configuration, since the configuration is given priority over the selection on the rear side, it is possible to execute the increase notification in a mode that further considers the situation at the time of selection.

Feature FA11. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result in the normal gaming state, the transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (a winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101 is executed) Function)
Grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state (the number of remaining advantageous game ZG);
Based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the specific game state, normal transition means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (normal end condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101) The function of executing the termination process of the advantageous section based on the fact that
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
When the increase process is performed by the increase unit, an increase notification execution unit (an auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing an increase notification (addition notification) that the increase process has been performed (preliminary display unit 65). A function of executing a setting process of an extra effect by the display control device 81),
With
The increase notification executing means includes
First notification execution means (a function for executing a process for performing an extra effect based on the immediate addition selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification in the first mode;
Second notification execution means (a function for executing a process for performing an extra effect based on a post-selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification in a second mode different from the first mode; ,
With
The first notification execution unit performs the increase process based on the stop operation unit being operated in the first specific stop operation mode in a specific game in which the mode notification by the mode notification unit is not executed. In the first mode, the increase notification in the case of being broken is executed,
In the specific game, the second notification execution unit performs the increasing process based on the fact that the stop operation unit is operated in a second specific stop operation mode different from the first specific stop operation mode. The game machine, wherein the increase notification when executed is executed in the second mode.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by the privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation unit. A specific gaming state is provided in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence of notification. In addition, if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific game state, the remaining number of the specific game state may be increased, and it may be possible to acquire a large amount of game media by continuing the specific game state for a long time. The playability of each game has been greatly improved.

  On the other hand, in a specific gaming state, the player is likely to be a one-sided game from the gaming machine, such as a player performing a stop operation based on the mode notification on the gaming machine side and winning the corresponding result, In consideration of the original gaming characteristics of the slot machine, such as stopping by aiming at the pattern of the orbiting body and obtaining a privilege, the gaming machine-led game described above is not preferable.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition is performed is changed to the player by the stop operation mode by the stop operation means in the specific game where the mode notification is not performed. The configuration is selected. By doing so, it is possible to cause the player to intervene in the game in the specific gaming state, and it is possible to promote the participation of the player in the gameability that can be led by the gaming machine.

  In addition, regarding the “specific game in which the mode notification by the mode notification unit is not executed”, “with a special result (specific role, normal replay) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery unit” When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special result winning can be established by operating each stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the second result. The special result winning can be achieved by being operated in the stop operation mode, and the game “the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result” may be the “specific game”.

  Further, the “first mode” and the “second mode” may be expressed as “first timing” and “second timing”. As described above, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, the above-described excellent effect can be exhibited with a simpler configuration.

Feature FA12. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result in the normal gaming state, the transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (a winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101 is executed) Function)
Grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state (the number of remaining advantageous game ZG);
Based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the specific game state, normal transition means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (normal end condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101) The function of executing the termination process of the advantageous section based on the fact that
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
When the increase process is performed by the increase unit, an increase notification execution unit (an auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing an increase notification (addition notification) that the increase process has been performed (preliminary display unit 65). A function of executing a setting process of an extra effect by the display control device 81),
With
The increase notification executing means includes
First notification execution means (a function for executing a process for performing an extra effect based on the immediate addition selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification in the first mode;
Second notification execution means (a function for executing a process for performing an extra effect based on a post-selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification in a second mode different from the first mode; ,
With
The first notification executing means is operated in the first specific stop operation mode in a specific situation where each of the circulating bodies is rotating in a game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed. Based on this, the increase notification when the increase process is performed is executed in the first aspect,
The second notification execution unit is configured to execute the increase process based on the fact that the stop operation unit is operated in a second specific stop operation mode different from the first specific stop operation mode in the specific situation. The gaming machine, wherein the increase notification when it is performed is executed in the second mode.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by the privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation unit. A specific gaming state is provided in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence of notification. In addition, if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific game state, the remaining number of the specific game state may be increased, and it may be possible to acquire a large amount of game media by continuing the specific game state for a long time. The playability of each game has been greatly improved.

  On the other hand, in a specific gaming state, the player is likely to be a one-sided game from the gaming machine, such as a player performing a stop operation based on the mode notification on the gaming machine side and winning the corresponding result, In consideration of the original gaming characteristics of the slot machine, such as stopping by aiming at the pattern of the orbiting body and obtaining a privilege, the gaming machine-led game described above is not preferable.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition is performed is changed to the player by the stop operation mode by the stop operation means in the specific game where the mode notification is not performed. The configuration is selected. By doing so, it is possible to cause the player to intervene in the game in the specific gaming state, and it is possible to promote the participation of the player in the gameability that can be led by the gaming machine.

  In addition, regarding the “game in which the mode notification by the mode notification unit is not executed”, “the special result (specific role, normal replay) is provided as the lottery result by the lottery unit”, When the lottery result by the means is the special result, the special result winning can be established by operating each stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the second result. It is configured that the special result winning can be achieved by being operated in the stop operation mode, and a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result is not executed. It may be a “game”.

  Further, the “first mode” and the “second mode” may be expressed as “first timing” and “second timing”. As described above, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, the above-described excellent effect can be exhibited with a simpler configuration.

<Feature FB group>
Feature FB1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set,
Grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state (the advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the high advantageous state, the transition means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (the normal end condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101 is A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment)
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
When the increase process is performed by the increase unit, an increase notification execution unit (an auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing an increase notification (addition notification) that the increase process has been performed (preliminary display unit 65). A function of executing a setting process of an extra effect by the display control device 81),
With
The increase notification executing means includes
Based on the fact that the first selection operation by the player has been performed, the increase notification triggered by a predetermined specific condition is immediately put on first notification execution means (display control device 81) that can be executed at the first timing. A function to execute an extra effect based on the selection flag),
Second notification executing means capable of executing the increase notification triggered by the predetermined specific condition at a second timing after the first timing based on a second selection operation performed by the player (A function of executing a process for performing an extra effect based on the rearward selection flag in the display control device 81);
Based on the fact that the third selection operation by the player is performed in the specific situation after the second selection operation is performed and until the second timing is reached, the predetermined specific condition is satisfied. Third notification executing means (a function for executing correction processing in the display control device 81) that causes the increase notification to be triggered at a third timing different from the second timing;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in a configuration having a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, a so-called addition that the remaining number of high advantageous states is increased when a specific condition is satisfied. When the remaining number of times is increased, an increase notification as an additional notification is performed, so that a sense of expectation that the specific condition is satisfied is enhanced.

  Moreover, in this gaming machine, the player can select whether to execute the increase notification at the first timing or the second timing after the increase notification. It is possible to make a gaming machine that has a function customized by the player and that meets the needs of the player. In addition, in a situation where an increase notification at the second timing is selected, an increase notification is generated at a third timing different from the second timing according to the player's selection in a specific situation before reaching the second timing. It has a function that can be changed. By doing this, once the second timing was selected, but when a change of mind occurs due to the subsequent game situation, etc., the execution timing of the increase notification can be changed afterwards to meet various needs A gaming machine is realized.

Feature FB2. Storage means (by the display control device 81) that can store the result of the increase process triggered by the predetermined specific condition executed at the second timing by the second notification execution means in a predetermined storage area With separate areas)
The third notification executing means includes
Means for acquiring a result of the increase process triggered by the predetermined specific condition stored in the storage means (function for executing the process of step S12806 by the display control device 81);
Means for executing the increase notification corresponding to the acquired increase process result at the third timing (function of executing the process of step S12807 by the display control device 81);
Means for erasing the acquired result of the increase processing from the storage means (function for executing the processing of step S12809 by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to feature FB1, characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the content of the increase notification that should have been executed at the second timing can be changed to be executed at the third timing while preventing duplication or omission. By doing so, it is possible to realize the gameability of the feature FB1 while avoiding the disadvantage that the player suffers a disadvantage or that there is a production mismatch.

Feature FB3. The storage means can individually store a plurality of results of the increase processing,
The third notification execution means is capable of separately executing the increase notification for the result of the increase processing stored individually at the third timing based on the third selection operation by the player. The gaming machine described in the feature FB1 or the feature FB2.

  According to the above configuration, when there are a plurality of pieces of information corresponding to the increase notification that should have been executed at the second timing, it is possible to change the information to be executed individually at the third timing. By doing in this way, the production | presentation according to the player's needs can be implement | achieved more.

Feature FB4. The storage means has been subjected to the increase process based on a first specific opportunity, the information corresponding to the result of the increase process selected to be executed at the second timing, and the first specific The increase process is performed based on a second specific trigger different from the trigger, and information corresponding to the result of the increase process selected when executed at the second timing is stored separately. Is possible,
Based on the third selection operation by the player, the increase process is performed based on the first specific trigger, and corresponds to the result of the increase process selected when executed at the second timing. The information to be executed can be executed at the third timing and the increase process is performed based on the second specific opportunity, and the increase process selected to be executed at the second timing The gaming machine according to Feature FB3, wherein information corresponding to the result of the above can be executed at the second timing.

  The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature FB3.

  Note that “different from the first specific opportunity” for the “second specific opportunity” means not only that the type of opportunity when the “specific condition” is satisfied, but also the same type of opportunity. This includes that the timing (game) at which the “specific condition” is satisfied is different.

Feature FB5. The storage means has been subjected to the increase process based on a first specific opportunity, the information corresponding to the result of the increase process selected to be executed at the second timing, and the first specific The increase process is performed based on a second specific opportunity that occurs prior to the trigger, and information corresponding to the result of the increase process selected to be executed at the second timing, respectively Can be stored separately,
Based on the third selection operation by the player, the increase process is performed based on the first specific trigger, and corresponds to the result of the increase process selected when executed at the second timing. The information to be executed can be executed at the third timing and the increase process is performed based on the second specific opportunity, and the increase process selected to be executed at the second timing The gaming machine according to Feature FB3 or Feature FB4, wherein the information corresponding to the result of can be executed at the second timing.

  According to the above configuration, while the increase notification for the second specific opportunity that occurred first remains at the second timing, the increase notification for the first specific opportunity that occurred later occurs at the third timing before the second timing. Can be executed. That is, the increase notification can be performed in an order different from the order in which the increase processing is performed by using a configuration capable of individually storing the results of the increase processing.

Feature FB6. Display control means (display control device 81) having a predetermined display screen (auxiliary display unit 65);
In the specific situation, the correspondence information corresponding to the information on the result of the increase processing individually stored in the storage means can be displayed on the predetermined display screen (step S12804 by the display control device 81). Function to execute the process)
Based on a third selection operation by the player, means for enabling selection of one piece of the displayed correspondence information (a function of executing the processing of steps S12805 and S12806 by the display control device 81);
With
The gaming machine according to any one of the features FB2 to FB5, wherein the third notification executing means executes the increase notification of the selected correspondence information at the third timing.

  According to the above configuration, the player can execute the increase notification at the third timing by selecting one correspondence information from the correspondence information displayed on the predetermined display screen. Thus, by selecting while displaying on the display screen, it is possible to make the selection operation easy even for a player who is intuitively easy to understand and who is not familiar with the game. Therefore, it can be set as a user-friendly gaming machine.

  Feature FB7. The game machine according to any one of features FB1 to FB6, wherein the game having the first timing is different from the game having the second timing.

  If the configuration of the feature FB1 is applied to a gaming machine on the premise that the increase notification is performed in different games by the first selection operation and the second selection operation as in the above configuration, the first timing and The second timing is a timing further away from the second timing, the second timing is selected, and not only the specific situation before that is likely to occur, but also the third selection operation is performed in such a specific situation. It is possible to secure a grace period.

Feature FB8. The first timing exists in the first game in which the specific condition is satisfied,
The second timing is present in the second game after the first game,
The third timing exists in a third game before the second game,
The gaming machine according to feature FB7, wherein the third notification execution means executes the increase notification in the third game when the third selection operation is performed.

  According to the above configuration, when the first selection operation is performed, an increase notification is generated in the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, and in the game after the game in which the specific condition is satisfied when the second selection operation is performed. Increase notification occurs. Assuming such a configuration, when the third selection operation is performed, an increase notification is generated in the game in which the selection operation is performed. In this way, when the third selection operation is performed, the increase notification is immediately executed, so that not only the player can easily understand but also the third selection operation is performed. In this case, since it is not necessary to newly store information again, the configuration can be simplified.

<Characteristic GA group>
Feature GA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing payout of the number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a first specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state (for example, an attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than other states (for example, a challenge mode) in the first specific gaming state is set. And
First transition lottery for executing the first transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state in the normal gaming state (execution of lottery for transition to the challenge mode in the first specific combination process by the main control device 101 Function)
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the first transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first specific gaming state, the first specific transition means (main control device 101) for transitioning to the first specific gaming state. Function to execute the process to shift to the challenge mode in the winning result handling process by)
A second transition lottery for executing a second transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the second specific gaming state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific combination process by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state, the second specific transition means (main control device 101) for transitioning to the second specific gaming state. A function to execute a process for shifting to the attack mode in the winning result handling process by
In the second specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the second specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes zero, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, the number management In the above configuration, the first grasping means (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining payout number or increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or increase number reaches the set number) is established. When,
Second grasping means (advantageous area game number AG, advantageous area increase / decrease number ZM) for grasping at least one of the number of executions of the first specific game state and the increase / decrease number of game media increased / decreased in the first specific game state;
Based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means, first ending means for shifting the second specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (a normal ending condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101 is A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment)
Grasping by the first grasping means based on at least one of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means reaching a predetermined upper limit number and the increase / decrease number reaching the upper limit increase number. Regardless of the remaining number, second end means for shifting the first specific game state including the second specific game state to the normal game state (an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main controller 101). A function to execute a forced termination process), and
An increasing means capable of executing an increase process of the second specific gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
The total of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit number, or the increase / decrease number grasped by the second grasping means And the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation where the sum of the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means reaches the upper limit increase number, or the specific condition is satisfied A specific event that is different from the event based on the increase process and can generate a specific event that can be beneficial to the player, based on the fact that the specific situation is achieved by performing the increase process based on Execution means (function of executing each process for special notification in a situation where the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a game medium can be paid out by payout means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, a first specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is provided. Since the second specific game state that is further advantageous as the state included in the first specific game state is provided, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed. In addition, the playability premised on the state transition that is advantageous to the stage is realized, and it can be greatly used for improving the interest.

  The first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state have the number of executions of the first specific gaming state in addition to the case where the second specific gaming state ends based on the remaining number up to the end condition of the second specific gaming state. When the upper limit number is reached or the increase / decrease number of game media reaches the upper limit increase number, the first specific gaming state is set to end regardless of the remaining number of the second specific gaming state. Since the one specific game state and the second specific game state are continuously continued, inconveniences such as an increase in game media exceeding the designer's expectation and the player cannot easily finish the game are avoided.

  However, if the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number of the first specific gaming state are defined as described above, the sum of the current number of executions and the remaining number is the upper limit when a so-called addition such as an increase process of the second specific gaming state occurs. If the number of times exceeds the maximum, or if the sum of the current increase / decrease number and the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number exceeds the upper limit increase number, no further increase can be expected. The expectation may be drastically reduced, and it may be perceived that the increase processing has been lost, and the interest in the game may be greatly reduced.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, when a specific situation exceeding the upper limit number or the upper limit increase number or the specific situation is obtained by performing an increase process, the event is different from the increase process (addition). Specific events that can be beneficial to the person. In this way, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the extra event is not performed or is meaningless even if the extra event is performed, and the fun of each game is increased even in the specific situation. It becomes possible to make it.

  Moreover, in the above configuration, the second specific gaming state is a state included in the first specific gaming state, and when the first specific gaming state ends, the second specific gaming state also ends at the same time. When the two specific game state is ended, the first specific game state is also ended. For example, in a configuration in which the first specific gaming state is not ended even if the second specific gaming state is ended, if the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number of the first specific gaming state are defined, the first specific gaming state When the transition to the second specific gaming state is completed after the second specific gaming state has been continued, there is an event that the upper limit number of times or the increase number of the first specific gaming state is small or the increase number is small. It tends to occur. On the other hand, if the first specific gaming state is also ended when the second specific gaming state is ended as in the above configuration, when the first specific gaming state is shifted to the second specific gaming state, In the first specific gaming state until then, there is no portion digested in the second specific gaming state, and it is unlikely that an event such as the number of times up to the upper limit number or the upper limit increase number or the increase number is small as described above Become. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game between the first specific game state in which the upper limit number and the upper limit increase number are defined and the second specific game state included therein.

  The “increase / decrease number of game media increased / decreased in the specific game state” is more specifically described as “the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the specific game state and the specific game state” The number of increase / decrease that is the difference between the number of game media used at ”.

  Further, regarding the “first specific game state” and the “second specific game state”, “the lottery result by the lottery means is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. The lottery by the lottery means has a first result and a second result that is established when each of the stop manipulation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode. On the basis of the result, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to predetermined notification means (first display segments N1 to N1 in the instruction monitor 68). 7 is provided with an aspect informing means (function for executing the push forward processing by the main control device 101) "that can be executed in the display segment N7), and the" first specific gaming state " Information The event is defined as a “first specific game state where the player is more likely to be more advantageous than the normal game state”, and the “second specific game state” is set to “the event related to the mode notification is a game more than the other states in the first specific game state”. It may be expressed as “a second specific gaming state that is likely to be advantageous to the player”. This point can also be applied to other configurations (including other feature groups).

  Feature GA2. When the number of executions reaches the upper limit number, the second ending means shifts the first specific gaming state to the normal gaming state even if the increase / decrease number does not reach the upper limit increase number, and the increase / decrease The gaming machine according to Feature GA1, wherein when the number reaches the upper limit increase number, the first specific gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state even if the number of executions does not reach the upper limit number. .

  According to the above configuration, when the number of executions reaches the upper limit number or the increase / decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number, the first specific gaming state is forcibly terminated by the second ending means, and the state shifts to the normal gaming state. As described above, if any one of the forced termination conditions (upper limit) is satisfied, the termination is performed regardless of the other situation, thereby increasing the significance of providing a plurality of types of forced termination conditions. In other words, the configuration in which the second termination unit forcibly terminates after waiting for the completion of both termination conditions makes the conditions for forced termination more serious and avoids an accidental forced termination event. However, if any one of the forced termination conditions is satisfied as in the above configuration, the player's benefit depends on which forced termination condition causes the forced termination. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game by using such a plurality of forced termination conditions.

  Feature GA3. The gaming machine according to Feature GA1 or Feature GA2, wherein the increase / decrease number can reach the upper limit increase number before the execution number reaches the upper limit number.

  Based on the premise of the game that the game medium is paid out in accordance with the game result and the game medium is aimed to increase, the first specific game state is ended by the second end means by reaching the upper limit increase number, Rather, it can be said that the goal of the game has been achieved. On the other hand, when the number of executions reaches the upper limit number without reaching the upper limit increase number and the first specific gaming state is ended, the target ends without being achieved. The above configuration is a configuration for ensuring the superiority of the upper limit increase number based on the difference between the upper limit number and the upper limit increase number, even if the number of executions does not reach the upper limit number as in the above configuration. By adopting a configuration that can reach the upper limit increase number, in other words, even if the number of executions reaches the upper limit number of times, it is not configured so that the upper limit increase number cannot be reached. It is possible to set an upper limit so as not to reduce the player's willingness to play.

  Feature GA4. One of the features GA1 to GA3, wherein the result of multiplying the average value of expected increase / decrease numbers per game in the second specific gaming state and the upper limit number is greater than the upper limit increase number The gaming machine according to 1.

  The above configuration stipulates that the result of multiplying the so-called pure increase number and the upper limit number as the average value of the expected increase / decrease number is larger than the upper limit increase number. By having such a configuration, for example, the characteristic GA3 Thus, reaching the upper limit number before reaching the upper limit number is not an accidental event but an event that can occur normally (on average). That is, it becomes easy to aim at exceeding the upper limit increase number, and the game goal of reaching the upper limit increase number before being forcibly ended by the upper limit number of times becomes clear.

  In addition, in the above configuration, when the first specific gaming state is played in the second specific gaming state, the upper limit is increased before the upper limit is reached, so in the first specific gaming state When a state that is not the second specific gaming state is included, the difference between the game that reaches the upper limit number and the game that reaches the upper limit increase number can be reduced or reversed by the number of times of execution. That is, if the number of executions in a state that is not the second specific gaming state is large, the upper limit number can be reached before the upper limit increase number is reached. By doing so, the aim of the game, such as how to shift to the second specific game state in the first specific game state, becomes clearer, and it becomes possible to draw out the fun of the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Feature GA5. The specific event execution means includes:
The specific condition is satisfied in the first specific situation in which the sum of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means reaches the upper limit number of times. Or an event that is different from the event based on the increase process and may be beneficial to the player based on the fact that the first specific situation is achieved by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition. First execution means capable of causing one specific event (function to execute various special notifications based on the setting of the first excess flag by the main control device 101);
The sum of the increase / decrease number grasped by the second grasping means and the planned increase / decrease number corresponding to the remaining number grasped based on the remaining number by the first grasping means reaches the upper limit increase number. Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied in the second specific situation, or based on the fact that the second specific situation is established by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition, Second execution means that is capable of generating a second specific event that is a different event and can be beneficial to the player (performs various special notifications based on the fact that the second excess flag is set by the main control device 101) Function to execute processing for)
A gaming machine according to any one of features GA1 to GA4, characterized by comprising:

  In a configuration in which a plurality of end conditions such as an upper limit count and an upper limit increase count are set, a first specific situation exceeding the upper limit count and a second specific situation exceeding the upper limit increase count are assumed. There may be a difference in the profit that the player cannot obtain between the specific situation and the second specific situation. Therefore, it is possible to set specific events according to the loss of profits in these specific situations by managing these separately as in the above configuration and making different specific events depending on which specific situation For example, the player can be compensated more favorably by a specific event.

  Feature GA6. The first specific event and the second specific event may differ in the degree of advantage for the player or the degree of benefit to the player, or whether the first execution event is caused by the first execution means The probability of winning the first lottery in the first lottery may be different from the probability of winning the second lottery in the second lottery as to whether the second specific event is caused by the second execution means. The gaming machine according to Feature GA5, wherein the gaming machine is at least one of configurations.

  When the excess of the number of times of the second specific gaming state disappears and the excess of the increase / decrease number (increase) disappear, the degree of loss feeling that both can give to the player can be different. The above configuration is a configuration in which the degree of loss of the player is followed according to each specific event or the likelihood of occurrence of the specific event, so that the player can be compensated more appropriately. Is possible.

  Feature GA7. In the first lottery in which the second specific event is an event that can be more beneficial to the player than the first specific event, or whether the first execution event causes the first specific event to occur. A configuration in which the probability of winning the second lottery in the second lottery of whether or not to cause the second specific event to be generated by the second execution means is higher than the probability of winning the first lottery, The gaming machine according to Feature GA6, wherein the gaming machine is at least one.

  When the excess of the number of times of the second specific gaming state disappears and the excess of the increase / decrease (increase) disappears, the excess of the increase / decrease (increase) disappears. The latter (the disappearance of the increased number) can be greater in the sense of loss that is directly related to the player's interest and can be given to the player. In the above configuration, whether or not it is directly linked to such profits and the degree of loss due to the loss of profits is followed according to each specific event and the likelihood of the occurrence of a specific event. The person can be compensated more appropriately.

Feature GA8. Calculation means for calculating the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (function for executing a prediction process based on the expected increase / decrease number KM in the remaining payout number management process by the main control device 101) With
The calculation means is capable of calculating the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number and an average value of expected increase / decrease numbers that can be expected per game in the second specific gaming state. A gaming machine according to GA6 or feature GA7.

  According to the above configuration, the planned increase / decrease number is calculated based on the expected increase / decrease number per game and the remaining number of times. With such a configuration, it is only necessary to store the expected increase / decrease number in the second specific gaming state in advance, and the planned increase / decrease number can be calculated with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature GA9. Calculation means for calculating the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (prediction processing based on the maximum increase / decrease number MM in the first adjustment process or the second adjustment process by the main control device 101). Function to be executed)
The calculation means can calculate the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number and a maximum expected increase / decrease value per game in the second specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of GA5 to GA8.

  According to the above configuration, the planned increase / decrease number is calculated based on the maximum value of the expected increase / decrease number per game and the remaining number of times. Therefore, it is only necessary to store in advance the maximum value of the expected increase / decrease number in the second specific gaming state, and the maximum value of the planned increase / decrease number can be calculated with a relatively simple configuration.

  In particular, in the above configuration, since the maximum value of the expected increase / decrease number is used, the calculated expected increase / decrease number becomes the maximum value, and an event in which the actual increase / decrease number exceeds that does not occur. By doing so, for example, it becomes possible to prevent inconvenience such as the first specific gaming state being ended earlier than expected by exceeding.

  When the above feature GA9 is applied to the feature GA8, the “calculation unit” of the feature GA8 may be expressed as “first calculation unit”, and the “calculation unit” of the feature GA9 may be expressed as “second calculation unit”. The same “calculation means” may be configured to allow calculation based on the “average value” and the “maximum value”, respectively.

Feature GA10. Transition results (first BB and second BB) that allow the transition to a transition gaming state in which the probability that the result of the gaming medium is paid out by the paying means may be different as the lottery result by the lottery means. Etc.)
Transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the transition gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the transition picture combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. A function of executing bonus state processing of the main control device 101),
The lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, and reservation means (the first BB winning flag or the second BB by the main control device 101) can be retained until the transition picture combination stops at the effective position. A function that does not clear the winning flag until the corresponding BB winning)
With
The transition game state can be executed at least a predetermined number of times by transition,
Calculation means (a function of executing a remaining number management process by the main control device 101) for calculating the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means;
The calculating means includes an increase / decrease number of game media in the transition gaming state, a number obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the remaining number, and an average value of expected increase / decrease numbers that can be expected per game in the second specific gaming state. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to any one of features GA5 to GA9, wherein the planned increase / decrease number can be calculated based on a maximum value.

  When the transition to the transition gaming state occurs, the winning probability of the result to be paid out of the gaming media is different, so the number of gaming media can be increased or decreased. For example, the expected increase or decrease in gaming media during the second specific gaming state If the number is calculated, when the predetermined game is executed by adding the transition rate to the transition game state or the increase / decrease number in the transition game state to the increase / decrease number in each game in the second specific gaming state The number of changes can be calculated. However, assuming that the first specific gaming state is forcibly terminated when the number of games in the first specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number of games, the corresponding game is obtained by shifting to the transition gaming state. The number cannot be digested in the first specific gaming state, particularly in the second specific gaming state, and simply adding the increase / decrease number in the transition gaming state to the increase / decrease number in the second specific gaming state This can result in inaccuracy. Therefore, in the above configuration, the number of games digested in the transition gaming state is excluded from the number of digested games in the second specific gaming state, and the configuration in which the planned increase / decrease is calculated is compulsory. It is possible to calculate an increase / decrease number that is easy to use in relation to the end condition.

Feature GA11. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set 101, a function to execute the winning probability setting process by 101)
The gaming machine according to any one of features GA1 to GA10, wherein the specific event execution unit performs a suggestion notification that suggests information on a setting value set by the setting unit as the specific event.

  According to the above configuration, since the suggestion information of the set value is presented as the specific event, the player uses the first specific game state after reaching the upper limit number or the upper limit increase number, and uses it as a determination material for the game continuation. be able to. That is, if the suggestion notification indicates a low setting, it can be determined that the game should be ended after the end of the first specific gaming state. If the suggestion notification indicates a high setting, the game can be performed even after the first specific gaming state ends. For the player who wants to increase the game medium and wants the game medium not to decrease, such setting value suggestion notification is useful.

  Feature GA12. The gaming machine according to Feature GA11, wherein the predetermined specific condition has a common establishment probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

  According to the above configuration, the occurrence probability of the increasing process is common regardless of the set value. In other words, in the situation where the upper limit number or the upper limit increase number has been reached, the specific condition that triggers the increase process occurs with a common occurrence probability regardless of the set value, and when it occurs, the setting value suggestion notification is performed. Become. By doing in this way, it can be assumed that the setting value suggestion notification is performed and the luck factor is strongly involved. Thereby, for example, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconveniences such as the fact that the setting value suggestion notification is more likely to occur as the setting is higher, so that the suggestion notification is not substantially generated at the low setting.

  Moreover, since the probability of establishment of the specific condition is common regardless of the set value as described above, the possibility that the first specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number or the upper limit increase number is also equal regardless of the set value. Can be a thing. In other words, the probability of occurrence of a specific situation in which the setting value suggestion notification can be performed is also common regardless of the setting value, and the independence in which the setting value is not involved in the occurrence rate of the setting value suggestion notification is further increased. Is possible.

Feature GA13. The specific condition when the increase process is performed can be established based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result,
The establishment probability of the specific condition when the increase process is performed according to the type of the special result is different,
The characteristics GA1 to GA12 are characterized in that the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the specific event occurs is likely to increase as the special result has a higher probability of establishment of the specific condition when the increase process is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, the probability when the increase process is performed with a special result and the probability when a specific event occurs with the special result are linked. By doing in this way, it can be easily understood that a specific event occurs instead of performing an increase process based on a special result. Therefore, for example, in a specific situation, when a special result winning with a high probability is performed, it is possible to raise the expectation that a specific event will occur in advance, and the player's mind It is possible to increase the degree of attention to a specific event through making preparations.

Feature GA14. A plurality of types of predetermined states including a first predetermined state (attack mode) and a second predetermined state (specialized zone) different from the first predetermined state are set as the second specific gaming state,
The specific condition in the case where the increase process is performed is that the probability of establishment is different between the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of the special result. Yes,
In the second specific gaming state, the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the specific event occurs is likely to increase as the predetermined state increases the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the increase process is performed. A gaming machine according to the feature GA13.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the probability that the increase process is performed is changed depending on the type (predetermined state) of the second specific gaming state even with the same type of special result, the probability that the specific event occurs is also the second specific gaming state. It changes depending on the type (predetermined state) and is linked to the case of increase processing. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to heighten the effect by becoming easy to understand that a specific event arises instead of performing an increase process based on having become a special result.

Feature GA15. As the second specific game state, a special state (VB mode, special zone) in which the minimum number of continuous games is determined is set.
Special transition means for shifting the second specific gaming state to the special state based on the fact that a predetermined special condition is satisfied during the second specific gaming state (for example, VB notification by the main control device 101) A function to execute processing to set a flag)
The specific event execution means may cause the specific event when the special condition is established in the specific situation, or when the special condition is established by shifting to the special state based on the special condition establishment. The gaming machine according to any one of features GA1 to GA14, wherein the gaming machine is possible.

  When shifting to the special state during the second specific gaming state, since the special state continues for the minimum number of continuous games, the transition to the special state is the number of games in the second specific gaming state, This can be regarded as equivalent to performing the process of increasing the minimum number of continuous games. Then, it can be meaningless for the player to shift to the special state in the specific situation or to enter the specific state by shifting to the special state. Therefore, in the above-described configuration, it is possible to avoid making the above-described meaningless sense by making the special event a target for such a special state.

Feature GA16. The specific condition when the increase process is performed can be established based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result,
The specific condition when the increase process is performed is that the special state is more than the other state in the second specific gaming state even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of the special result. It is a configuration that increases the probability of establishment,
The establishment probability of the specific condition when the specific event occurs is a configuration in which the special state is higher than the other states in the second specific game state,
The specific event execution means, when the special condition is established in the specific situation, or when the specific event occurs when the special condition is established by shifting to the special state based on the special condition establishment, The gaming machine according to the feature GA15, wherein a transition to the special state based on establishment of the special condition is allowed.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the increase process is easily performed when the state is shifted to the special state, the specific event is generated when the state is shifted to the special state in the specific state or when the state is shifted to the special state. At this time, the transition to the special state is allowed. Therefore, the specific event is generated at the time of transition to the special state, and the specific event is allowed to occur even during the special state. In this way, by making the special state a state in which the increase process is easy to be performed and a state in which the specific event is likely to occur, the transition to the special state during the second specific gaming state It is possible to look forward to even the situation that is approaching.

Feature GA17. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific condition is achieved by performing the increase process based on the specific condition being satisfied, or when the increase process is performed based on the specific condition being satisfied. Storage means (main control device 101 adds the number of games added to the total number of extinguished games TEG) to store the increase information corresponding to the remaining number increased in the increase information storage means (total number of extinction games TEG) Function)
The specific event execution unit is capable of causing the specific event based on the increase information stored in the increase information storage unit, according to any one of features GA1 to GA16, Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation, a specific event may occur based on the increase information when the increase process is performed. By doing in this way, for example, it becomes possible to cause a specific event as compensation for a privilege that should have been obtained by the increase process, such as a specific event is more likely to occur as there is more increase information.

Feature GA18. The increase information stored in the increase information storage means is stored until at least the first specific game state in which the specific condition is satisfied shifts to the normal game state, and the increase information is stored. If the specific condition is newly established in the specific situation, or if the specific condition is established by performing the increasing process based on the specific condition establishment, based on the establishment of the specific condition The increase information corresponding to the remaining number that is increased when the increase process is performed can be updated by adding to the stored increase information,
The specific event execution means can cause the specific event based on the increase information stored in the increase information storage means when shifting from the first specific game state to the normal game state. The gaming machine according to Feature GA17, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the specific situation, the increase information when the increase process is performed is respectively integrated, and the specific event at the end of the first specific game state based on the total increase information Occurs. In this way, in the configuration of the feature GA17, even if there is little increase information based on the establishment of each specific condition, it is possible to generate a specific event if the specific condition is satisfied multiple times. Expectation can be sustained.

  In particular, when a specific situation occurs relatively early after the first specific gaming state (second specific gaming state), the number of executions of the first specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number or the increase / decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number. A game that can be a so-called digestion game will be implemented over a long period of time. In that regard, as in the above configuration, a specific event can occur by accumulating multiple increase processes, so that the more events that can be the digest game, the more likely the specific event will occur and the digest game feel Can be suppressed.

  Feature GA19. The specific event execution means can cause the specific event to occur each time based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the first specific game state is changed to the normal game by the second end means. The gaming machine according to Feature GA18, wherein the specific event can be caused based on the increase information stored in the increase information storage unit based on the transition to a state.

  According to the above configuration, a specific event occurs every time the specific condition is satisfied, and a specific event can occur due to the integrated value when the increase process is performed at the end of the first specific gaming state. By doing in this way, the effect which does not get tired of the first specific gaming state by causing a specific event each time, and the effect of enjoying the first specific gaming state for a long time by establishing the specific condition multiple times Can be enjoyed together.

  Feature GA20. The specific event executing means can cause the specific event based on the specific condition being satisfied during the normal game state after the end of the first specific game state in which the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine according to any one of features GA1 to GA19.

  According to the above configuration, the fact that the specific condition is satisfied during the second specific game state (first specific game state) can be taken over as a specific event in the normal game state after the end of the first specific game state. It becomes. And since the said specific event is an event different from an increase process, in the range which is not contrary to the meaning of forcibly terminating the 1st specific gaming state by the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number, The event in the first specific gaming state) is transferred to the normal gaming state. By doing in this way, the interlocking | linkage of a 2nd specific game state (1st specific game state) and a normal game state is improved, and the interest improvement of a game is achieved.

Feature GA21. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific condition is achieved by performing the increase process based on the specific condition being satisfied, or when the increase process is performed based on the specific condition being satisfied. Means for storing the increase information in a predetermined increase information storage means (total number of annihilated games TEG) (function of executing a process of adding the number of games added to the total number of annihilated games TEG by the main control device 101);
Initializing means capable of executing initialization processing for initializing various information used during the first specific gaming state when at least the second end means shifts from the first specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (Function for executing initialization processing by main controller 101);
When the initialization process is performed by the initialization unit, a unit for limiting the information stored in the increase information storage unit from being initialized (the total number of extinguished games TEG in the main control unit 101 is used for a normal section) A function to execute processing stored in the area provided in the area), and
A gaming machine according to Feature GA20, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the first specific gaming state is terminated when the number of executions in the first specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number or the increase / decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number, Since the various information used during the initialization is initialized, the first specific gaming state is forcibly terminated, but the information regarding the forcibly terminated first specific gaming state is again applied. It is possible to expect the effect of the feature GA20 while preventing the so-called consecutive resort from shifting to the first specific gaming state.

Feature GA22. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific condition is achieved by performing the increase process based on the specific condition being satisfied, or when the increase process is performed based on the specific condition being satisfied. Is stored in a different information storage means (number of disappearance preparation games EJG) different from the predetermined increase information storage means (the process of adding the number of games added to the number of disappearance preparation games EJG by the main controller 101) Function to execute)
Means for storing the increase information stored in the additional information storage means in the increase information storage means at least before the initialization process is performed by the initialization means (the number of disappeared games by the main control device 101) Function to execute the movement process),
With
The information stored in the separate information storage means is subject to initialization processing by the initialization means, while the information stored in the increased information storage means is not subject to initialization processing by the initialization means. A gaming machine according to the characteristic GA21.

  According to the above configuration, the convenience of generating a specific event using the increased information by moving the information to the increased information storage means that is not the target of the initialization process before the initialization process. Its accuracy is improved. More specifically, for example, by setting an access restriction on an area that is not an initialization target area, an event that information that is not targeted at the initialization process is initialized may be avoided. In such a case, the area to be initialized can be accessed more easily than the area not to be initialized. Then, by temporarily storing the increase information in another information storage means to be initialized, the convenience of the increase information is improved, and during the initialization process, the increase information is moved to the increase information storage means. By doing so, the event that the increase information is initialized can be avoided.

Feature GA23. The specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation where the sum of the increase / decrease number grasped by the second grasping means and the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means reaches the upper limit increase number. A special event in which the increase / decrease number grasped by the second grasping means does not reach the upper limit increase number after the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on establishment of the specific condition based on A possible configuration,
Based on the occurrence of the special event, means for storing the increase information stored in the separate information storage means in a storage means for storing information corresponding to the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (main The gaming machine according to Feature GA22, further comprising a function of executing redistribution processing by the control device 101.

  According to the above configuration, if the specific situation is a configuration that can be resolved thereafter, the player is greatly disadvantaged if the increased information is not handled as the remaining number. Therefore, if the increased information is temporarily stored in another information storage means and the specific situation is resolved, the temporary stored information is returned so that the player will not be disadvantaged. Become. In addition, by using a configuration in which the information is temporarily stored in a separate information storage unit different from the increase information storage unit as in the feature GA22, convenience and accuracy in generating a specific event using the increase information are further improved. Can do. In other words, assuming that the increase information is stored in the increase information storage unit as it is, assuming that the access restriction is provided as described above, the increase information is released after the access restriction is removed when the specific situation is resolved. It is necessary to move the increase information of the storage means as the remaining number. On the other hand, as described above, the information is temporarily stored in another information storage means that is not subject to access restrictions (to be initialized). This eliminates the need for a process such as releasing an access restriction, which improves convenience.

  Feature GA24. The increase process can be executed even when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or even when the specific condition is established by performing the increase process based on the specific condition being satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features GA1 to GA23.

  In the above configuration, it is clarified that even if a specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation or a specific situation is caused by an increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition, the increase process itself is not limited. The However, as described above, even if the increase process is performed in the above situation, it can be meaningless depending on the upper limit number or the upper limit increase number. As described above, by generating a specific event in such a situation, An excellent effect can be expected.

Feature GA25. Based on the transition of the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state, or the gaming state transitions from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state, and a predetermined start condition is satisfied. The notification is started by setting the specific notification means (eight display segment N8) to the lighting state, and the specific notification means is turned off based on the transition of the first specific gaming state to the normal gaming state. Specific game state notification means (function to execute the section display first process to the section display fourth process by the main control device 101),
The specific game state notifying means ends the notification by setting the specific notification means to the extinguished state even when the second end means shifts the first specific game state to the normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features GA1 to GA24.

  According to the above configuration, when the transition from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state or after a predetermined start condition is established, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and the first specific gaming state ends and the normal gaming When the state is shifted to, the notification is ended. That is, if the presence / absence of notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the first specific gaming state is present, for example, even though the first specific gaming state continues. It is possible to eliminate an inequality between a player who finishes the game without noticing and a player who has subsequently seated on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to enjoy the game based on the special notification equally.

  In particular, even when the first specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number of times or reaches the upper limit increase number and shifts to the normal gaming state, the notification by the specific notification means is terminated, so that the player is concerned with the first specific gaming state. It is possible to clearly grasp that the process has ended, that is, the increase process has not been performed even if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation. Then, it is difficult to enjoy the reverberation that the first specific gaming state has ended even if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation because the notification of the specific notification means is strictly terminated. Become. In that respect, if it is a configuration that can cause a specific event, such as the feature GA1, even if it is a configuration that allows the specific notification means to clearly grasp that the first specific gaming state has been forcibly ended. Through the event, it is possible to entertain the reverberation based on the establishment of a specific condition.

Feature GA26. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing payout of the number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a first specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state (for example, an attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than other states (for example, a challenge mode) in the first specific gaming state is set. And
First transition lottery for executing the first transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state in the normal gaming state (execution of lottery for transition to the challenge mode in the first specific combination process by the main control device 101 Function)
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the first transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first specific gaming state, the first specific transition means (main control device 101) for transitioning to the first specific gaming state. Function to execute the process to shift to the challenge mode in the winning result handling process by)
A second transition lottery for executing a second transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the second specific gaming state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific combination process by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state, the second specific transition means (main control device 101) for transitioning to the second specific gaming state. A function to execute a process for shifting to the attack mode in the winning result handling process by
In the second specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the second specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes zero, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, the number management In the above configuration, the first grasping means (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining payout number or increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or increase number reaches the set number) is established. When,
Second grasping means (advantageous area game number AG, advantageous area increase / decrease number ZM) for grasping at least one of the number of executions of the first specific game state and the increase / decrease number of game media increased / decreased in the first specific game state;
First termination means for shifting the first specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (the normal termination condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101 is A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment)
Grasping by the first grasping means based on at least one of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means reaching a predetermined upper limit number and the increase / decrease number reaching the upper limit increase number. Regardless of the remaining number, second end means for shifting the first specific game state including the second specific game state to the normal game state (an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main controller 101). A function to execute a forced termination process), and
An increasing means capable of executing an increase process of the second specific gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
The total of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit number, or the increase / decrease number grasped by the second grasping means And the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation where the sum of the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means reaches the upper limit increase number, or the specific condition is satisfied Specific event execution means (first excess by the main control device 101) capable of causing a specific event different from the event based on the increase process based on the fact that the specific situation is obtained by performing the increase process based on A function of executing each process for special notification in a situation where the flag or the second excess flag is set),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a game medium can be paid out by payout means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, a first specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is provided. Since the second specific game state that is further advantageous as the state included in the first specific game state is provided, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed. In addition, the playability premised on the state transition that is advantageous to the stage is realized, and it can be greatly used for improving the interest.

  The first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state have the number of executions of the first specific gaming state in addition to the case where the first specific gaming state ends based on the remaining number up to the end condition of the second specific gaming state. When the upper limit number is reached or the increase / decrease number of game media has reached the upper limit increase number, the case where the first specific gaming state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of the second specific gaming state is set. By continuing the first specific game state and the second specific game state in an endless manner, inconveniences such as an increase in game media that surpasses the designer's expectation and the player cannot easily finish the game are avoided.

  However, if the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number of the first specific gaming state are defined as described above, the sum of the current number of executions and the remaining number is the upper limit when a so-called addition such as an increase process of the second specific gaming state occurs. If the number of times exceeds the maximum, or if the sum of the current increase / decrease number and the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number exceeds the upper limit increase number, no further increase can be expected. The expectation may be drastically reduced, and it may be perceived that the increase processing has been lost, and the interest in the game may be greatly reduced.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, if a specific situation that exceeds the upper limit number or the upper limit increase number or a specific situation occurs by performing an increase process, a specific event different from the increase process (addition) will occur. I have to. In this way, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the extra event is not performed or is meaningless even if the extra event is performed, and the fun of each game is increased even in the specific situation. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, interest improvement can be aimed at suitably.

  The “increase / decrease number of game media increased / decreased in the specific game state” is more specifically described as “the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the specific game state and the specific game state” The number of increase / decrease that is the difference between the number of game media used at ”.

Feature GA27. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing payout of the number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As the gaming state, there are provided a normal gaming state (normal section) and a specific gaming state (such as an attack mode in the advantageous section) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state,
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state in the normal gaming state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (the attack mode in the winning result handling process by the main control device 101) To execute the process to move to)
In the specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, First grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining payout number or increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or increase number reaches the set number);
Second grasping means (advantageous area game number AG, advantageous area increase / decrease) that grasps at least one of the number of executions of the predetermined game state (advantageous section) including the specific game state and the increase / decrease number of game media increased or decreased in the predetermined game state. Number ZM),
First ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (a normal ending condition is established in the second section display processing by the main controller 101) A function to execute an advantageous section end process based on
Grasping by the first grasping means based on at least one of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means reaching a predetermined upper limit number and the increase / decrease number reaching the upper limit increase number. Regardless of the remaining number, the second ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (function for executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101); ,
Based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition has been established, an increasing means (a function for executing the game number adding process by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increasing process of the specific gaming state;
The total of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit number, or the increase / decrease number grasped by the second grasping means And the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation where the sum of the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means reaches the upper limit increase number, or the specific condition is satisfied A specific event that is different from the event based on the increase process and can generate a specific event that can be beneficial to the player, based on the fact that the specific situation is obtained by performing the increase process based on Execution means (function of executing each process for special notification in a situation where the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which the game medium can be paid out by the payout means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is provided. The game state is terminated based on the remaining number until the end condition of the specific game state is satisfied, the number of executions of the predetermined state including the specific game state reaches the upper limit number, or the increase / decrease number of game media is the upper limit When the number reaches an increase, it is set to end regardless of the remaining number of specific gaming states, so the specific gaming state will continue forever, surpassing the designer's expectation Or cause an increase in the skills media, the player has been avoided disadvantage can not end a pretty game.

  However, when the upper limit number and the upper limit increase number are specified as described above, when a so-called extra addition such as an increase process of a specific gaming state occurs, the total of the current execution number and the remaining number exceeds the upper limit number, If the total of the increase / decrease number and the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number exceeds the upper limit increase number, no further increase can be expected. In other words, the interest in the game may be greatly diminished, for example, that the increase process is regarded as a loss.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, if a specific situation that exceeds the upper limit number or the upper limit increase number or a specific situation occurs by performing an increase process, a specific event different from the increase process (addition) will occur. I have to. In this way, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the extra event is not performed or is meaningless even if the extra event is performed, and the fun of each game is increased even in the specific situation. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, interest improvement can be aimed at suitably.

  The “increase / decrease number of game media increased / decreased in the specific game state” is more specifically described as “the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the specific game state and the specific game state” The number of increase / decrease that is the difference between the number of game media used at ”.

Feature GA28. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing payout of the number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As the gaming state, there are provided a normal gaming state (normal section) and a specific gaming state (such as an attack mode in the advantageous section) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state,
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state in the normal gaming state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (the attack mode in the winning result handling process by the main control device 101) To execute the process to move to)
In the specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, First grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining payout number or increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or increase number reaches the set number);
Second grasping means (advantageous area game number AG, advantageous area increase / decrease) that grasps at least one of the number of executions of the predetermined game state (advantageous section) including the specific game state and the increase / decrease number of game media increased or decreased in the predetermined game state. Number ZM),
First ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (a normal ending condition is established in the second section display processing by the main controller 101) A function to execute an advantageous section end process based on
Grasping by the first grasping means based on at least one of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means reaching a predetermined upper limit number and the increase / decrease number reaching the upper limit increase number. Regardless of the remaining number, the second ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (function for executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101); ,
Based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition has been established, an increasing means (a function for executing the game number adding process by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increasing process of the specific gaming state;
The total of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit number, or the increase / decrease number grasped by the second grasping means And the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation where the sum of the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means reaches the upper limit increase number, or the specific condition is satisfied Specific event execution means (first excess by the main control device 101) capable of causing a specific event different from the event based on the increase process based on the fact that the specific situation is obtained by performing the increase process based on A function of executing each process for special notification in a situation where the flag or the second excess flag is set),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which the game medium can be paid out by the payout means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is provided. The game state is terminated based on the remaining number until the end condition of the specific game state is satisfied, the number of executions of the predetermined state including the specific game state reaches the upper limit number, or the increase / decrease number of game media is the upper limit When the number reaches an increase, it is set to end regardless of the remaining number of specific gaming states, so the specific gaming state will continue forever, surpassing the designer's expectation Or cause an increase in the skills media, the player has been avoided disadvantage can not end a pretty game.

  However, when the upper limit number and the upper limit increase number are specified as described above, when a so-called extra addition such as an increase process of a specific gaming state occurs, the total of the current execution number and the remaining number exceeds the upper limit number, If the total of the increase / decrease number and the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number exceeds the upper limit increase number, no further increase can be expected. In other words, the interest in the game may be greatly diminished, for example, that the increase process is regarded as a loss.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, if a specific situation that exceeds the upper limit number or the upper limit increase number or a specific situation occurs by performing an increase process, a specific event different from the increase process (addition) will occur. I have to. In this way, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the extra event is not performed or is meaningless even if the extra event is performed, and the fun of each game is increased even in the specific situation. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, interest improvement can be aimed at suitably.

  The “increase / decrease number of game media increased / decreased in the specific game state” is more specifically described as “the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the specific game state and the specific game state” The number of increase / decrease that is the difference between the number of game media used at ”.

  Further, the configurations shown in the features GA1 to GA25 may be applied individually or in combination to the features GA26 to GA28.

<Feature GB group>
Feature GB1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set,
As the state included in the high advantageous state, a specific high advantageous state (for example, attack mode) having a higher advantage for the player than other states in the high advantageous state (for example, challenge mode) is set.
Predetermined termination conditions for the specific high advantageous state (for example, the remaining number of games in the attack mode is 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, the number of remaining payouts and increase in the number management configuration) A remaining number grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the number of sheets reaches 0, or the number of payouts or increase reaches the set number);
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, normal termination means for terminating the specific high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (forced termination in the second section display processing by the main controller 101) Function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section without the condition)
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state is terminated and the low advantageous state based on the fact that the predetermined first specific condition is satisfied. The first specific ending means for shifting to (in the second section display processing by the main controller 101, a function for executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the fact that the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit number of games) When,
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the specific high advantageous state is included based on the fact that a second specific condition that is a predetermined condition and different from the first specific condition is satisfied. A second specific ending means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (based on the fact that the advantageous zone increase / decrease number ZM has reached the upper limit increase number in the section display second process by the main controller 101) A function to forcibly terminate the advantageous section), and
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means in the specific high advantageous state, first specifying means (remaining game management by the main control device 101) capable of specifying in advance that the first specific condition is satisfied Processing function), and
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means in the specific high advantageous state, second specifying means (main control number management by the main controller 101) that can specify in advance that the second specifying condition is satisfied Processing function), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above-described configuration, there are a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state includes a specific high advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is further higher. In the included configuration, the specific high advantageous state is terminated based on the case where the specific high advantageous state is terminated based on the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state and the fact that the first specific condition and the second specific condition in the high advantageous state are satisfied. Since it may end together with the state, it is suppressed that the advantage of the highly advantageous state including the specific highly advantageous state is extremely increased. For a player who wants to continue the high advantageous state, particularly the specific high advantageous state for a long time, the first specific condition in the high advantageous state in which the specific high advantageous state is included, as well as grasping the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state, It is thought that it is desired to grasp how long the second specific condition will be satisfied. Therefore, in the above configuration, the first specific condition and the second specific condition are configured so that they can be specified before the condition is established, for example, the player knows, for example, that the specific result is notified in accordance with the progress of the game. It is also possible to use the content that you want to play. In particular, since the high advantageous state can be ended by different conditions such as the first specific condition and the second specific condition, and each of them can be specified separately, the end forms of the high advantageous state are diversified, The throbbing feeling in a highly advantageous state can be enhanced, and the throbbing feeling, the mutual relationship between the two specific conditions, and the playability utilized can be suitably realized. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that “can be specified in advance that the first specific condition is satisfied” or “can be specified in advance that the second specific condition is satisfied” is, for example, that “the first specific condition is satisfied” ”Can be specified in a game before the first specific condition is satisfied” or “can be specified in a game before the second specific condition is satisfied that the second specific condition is satisfied” It is also possible to express.

  In addition, the “first specific ending means” and the “second specific ending means” are, for example, that a predetermined first specific condition is satisfied regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Based on the first specific ending means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state by ending the specific high advantageous state, or “the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means” Regardless, based on the fact that a second specific condition that is a predetermined condition and different from the first specific condition is satisfied, the specific high advantageous state is terminated by ending the specific high advantageous state, and the It may be expressed as “second specific ending means for shifting to a low advantageous state”.

  Furthermore, “the first specific condition” and “the second specific condition” include “the first specific condition set as the end condition of the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state” and “the specific high advantageous state”. It may be expressed as “a second specific condition that is set as an end condition for the high advantageous state and is different from the first specific condition”.

Feature GB2. When it is specified that the first specific condition is satisfied by the first specifying means, it is possible to cause a first specific event that may be beneficial to the player before the first specific condition is satisfied. First specific event executing means (function for executing various special notifications in the situation where the first excess flag is set by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81),
When it is specified that the second specific condition is satisfied by the second specifying means, it is possible to cause a second specific event that may be beneficial to the player before the second specific condition is satisfied. Second specific event execution means (function for executing various special notifications in the situation where the second excess flag is set by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81);
A gaming machine according to the feature GB1, characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, it is not only specified in advance that the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, but also based on the specification result, rather than the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied. There may be a first specific event or a second specific event that may be beneficial to the player before. By doing in this way, in the structure which grasps | ascertains that the 1st specific condition and the 2nd specific condition are materialized, it is meaningful to grasp the grasp before the 1st specific condition and the 2nd specific condition are materialized. In a highly advantageous state (especially a specific highly advantageous state), the first specific event or the second specific event is generated by confirming (specifying) that the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied in advance. The game is more fun and the fun of the game is improved.

  It should be noted that “a first specific event execution means capable of generating a first specific event that can be beneficial to the player before the first specific condition is satisfied” or “a first specific event that can be beneficial to the player”. The “second specific event execution means capable of generating two specific events before the second specific condition is satisfied” means that “the second specific event is executed by the player before the first specific condition is satisfied”. “First privilege granting means capable of granting one privilege” or “second privilege granting means capable of granting the player the second privilege before the second specific condition is satisfied”. . The same applies to the “specific event execution means” defined by other features and other feature groups. Conversely, the “privilege granting means” defined by other features and other feature groups is changed to “ It can also be expressed as “specific event execution means”.

Feature GB3. The first specific event by the first specific event execution means can be more beneficial to the player as soon as the first specific condition is satisfied in the specific high advantageous state (first excess flag is earlier). ) Is set, for example, the number of times the setting value suggestion as the fifth special notification is performed is increased, and the setting value is easily narrowed down).
The second specific event by the second specific event execution means can be more beneficial to the player as soon as the second specific condition is established in the specific high advantageous state (early the first excess flag). The game machine described in the feature GB2 is characterized in that, for example, the setting value suggestion as the fifth special notification is performed more frequently and the setting value is easily narrowed down.

  According to the above configuration, the first specific event or the second specific condition is confirmed (specified) in the specific high advantageous state, and the first specific event or In game play such as causing a second specific event, a further interesting feature has been added, such as confirming that the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied as soon as possible, and a new use of the high advantage end condition Playability is created.

Feature GB4. The first specifying means can specify in advance that the first specifying condition is not satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means,
Any one of features GB1 to GB3, wherein the second specifying means can specify in advance that the second specifying condition is not satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to specify in advance that the first specific condition and the second specific condition are not satisfied depending on the remaining number of the current situation. By making it possible to separately specify that the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied, as in GB1, for example, the first specific condition is satisfied but the second specific condition is not satisfied, It is possible to specify a situation in which the specific condition is satisfied but the first specific condition is not satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the significance of providing a plurality of specific conditions, and to greatly contribute to processing, effects, and the like when the success or failure of each specific condition is specified in advance.

Feature GB5. Based on the fact that the first specifying condition is specified by the first specifying means and the second specifying condition is specified by the second specifying means, it can be beneficial to the player. Third specific event execution means capable of causing a third specific event (various special notifications by the main control device 101 and the display control device 81 in a situation where the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set) Function to execute processing to perform)
After specifying that the first specifying condition is satisfied by the first specifying means and then specifying that the second specifying condition is satisfied by the second specifying means, and by the second specifying means, The third specific event by the third specific event executing means when the first specific means is specified to be satisfied after the second specific condition is specified and then the first specific condition is satisfied. The game according to any one of the features GB1 to GB4, characterized in that the degree of advantage or the degree of benefit is different (difference in the type of the fifth special notification due to the difference between the first and second destination flags) Machine.

  According to the above configuration, the advantage of the third specific event that occurs depending on whether the first specific condition is satisfied by the first specifying means and the second specific condition is specified by the second specifying means. The degree to which it can be useful or different. In this way, when the first specific condition and the second specific condition as a plurality of forced termination conditions are specified in advance, it is possible to incorporate game characteristics such as which one is to be performed first into the game. It becomes possible and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Feature GB6. The remaining number grasping means grasps the number of remaining games as the remaining number in the specific high advantageous state,
The first specifying condition means that the first specifying condition is that, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the number of games played in the highly advantageous state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games. As the establishment of, to end the high advantageous state and shift to the low advantageous state,
Regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the second specific ending means determines the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each highly advantageous game and each game. When the increase / decrease number, which is the difference from the number of used game media, has reached a predetermined upper limit increase number, the second specific condition is satisfied, and the high advantageous state is terminated and the low advantageous state is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of features GB1 to GB5, wherein the gaming machine is one to be transferred.

  According to the above configuration, when the specification that the upper limit number of games is reached is specified later, the specification that the upper limit increase number is reached later, and the specification that the upper limit increase number is reached is reached when the upper limit game number is reached first. Comparing the case where the identification is later with the number of executions in the same highly advantageous state, it is assumed that the number of increase / decrease is smaller in the former, instead of the number of executions. As a forced termination condition, which one comes first can be information that reflects the game situation so far. Therefore, for example, the third specific event according to the game situation so far can be generated by changing the advantage of the third specific event, etc., depending on the subsequent points of the specific GB5. it can.

  Feature GB7. When the second specifying means specifies that the second specifying condition is satisfied in a situation where the first specifying means specifies that the first specifying condition is satisfied, or the second specifying condition by the second specifying means When it is specified that the first specific condition is satisfied by the first specifying means in a situation where it is specified that the first specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to grasp which of the first specific condition and the second specific condition is satisfied first Characteristic GB1 thru | or characterized by the above-mentioned specific grasping | ascertainment means (function which performs the process which grasps | ascertains the difference between the upper limit game number and the game number exceeding the upper limit increase number by the main control apparatus 101) The gaming machine according to any one of GB6.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the establishment of the first specific condition and the establishment of the second specific condition can be specified in advance, when both specific conditions are specified, which specific condition is satisfied first. It is grasped by the specific grasping means. Since any specific condition ends the highly advantageous state, unless one of the two specific conditions is satisfied in the same game, if one of the specific conditions is satisfied, the other specific condition is not satisfied. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by grasping which specific condition is satisfied first, it becomes possible to grasp the specific condition that is highly unlikely to be satisfied, and is adapted to the specific condition on the side that is not satisfied Processing (such as following it) can also be performed.

  Feature GB8. The game according to Feature GB7, wherein the specific grasping means can grasp a difference between a game specified when the first specific condition is satisfied and a game specified when the second specific condition is satisfied. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the establishment of the first specific condition and the establishment of the second specific condition can be specified in advance, when it is specified that both the specific conditions are satisfied, the game of which the specific condition is satisfied The difference can be grasped. Thereby, for example, the first specific condition is satisfied relatively early, but the second specific condition is not satisfied, or vice versa, and is not satisfied when there is a difference between the two satisfied games. The high advantageous state is terminated without sufficiently obtaining the benefits of the high advantageous state defined by the specific condition on the side, and there are a game in which the first specific condition is satisfied and a game in which the second specific condition is satisfied. In the case of almost the same game, the high advantage state ends after the benefits of the high advantage state specified by both specific conditions are fully obtained. While predicting the benefit (profit) that has been made, it is possible to perform processing according to the prediction.

  In the configuration where “the first specific condition is satisfied based on the number of games executed in a highly advantageous state reaching a predetermined upper limit number of games”, “the game specified when the first specific condition is satisfied” "" Is a game in which the number of games played in a highly advantageous state is a predetermined upper limit number of games ".

  Feature GB9. Even if it is specified in advance that the second specifying condition is satisfied by the second specifying means, the highly advantageous state is terminated without the second specifying condition being satisfied depending on the game situation thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of features GB1 to GB8, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, even if it is specified that the second specific condition is satisfied, that is, in the future, the high advantage state will be ended by the second specific ending means, Since the high specific advantage state may end without the second specific condition being satisfied when the specific high advantageous state ends, if the establishment of the second specific condition is preferable for the player, the subsequent gaming situation If the second specific condition is not satisfied by the player, it is not preferable for the player. Conversely, if the second specific condition is not preferable for the player, the second specific condition may be changed depending on the subsequent game situation. It is preferable for the player not to be established. In other words, while leaving the room where the identification result by the second identification means can change depending on the subsequent game situation, while creating gameability using the identification result by the second identification means, attention of the subsequent game It is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in the degree.

  Feature GB10. It is a case where it is specified in advance that the second specifying condition is satisfied by the second specifying means, and the high advantageous state is terminated without the second specifying condition being satisfied due to a subsequent gaming situation. In this case, a third specific event execution means for generating a third specific event that can be beneficial to the player (a function of executing processing for performing various special notifications based on the redistribution processing in the main control device 101 or the display control device 81) ). A gaming machine according to the feature GB9.

  According to the above configuration, on the premise that the establishment of the second specific condition is preferable for the player, when the high advantageous state ends without the second specific condition being satisfied depending on the subsequent game situation, A third specific event occurs that can be beneficial to the player. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to follow the loss feeling of the player who expected that the 2nd specific condition is materialized by the 3rd specific event.

Feature GB11. In a specific situation in which the second specifying condition is specified in advance by the second specifying means, a specific notification means (main control) capable of executing a specific notification including the specified information by a predetermined notification means. A function for performing a special notification by the device 101 that the second excess flag is set)
When the specific notification is executed in the specific situation, the second specific condition is not satisfied depending on the subsequent game situation, compared with the case where the specific notification is not executed in the specific situation. The gaming machine according to feature GB10, wherein the advantage of the third specific event when the advantageous state is ended is set so as to be advantageous to the player.

  Based on the premise that the establishment of the second specific condition is a favorable event for the player, when the specific notification that the second specific condition has been established is executed, the player 2 Assuming that the specific condition will be established in the future, the game will be fully enjoyed until the second specific condition is satisfied, such as advancing the game while immersing in a sense of superiority, or using the profit from the establishment of the second specific condition. It is considered to be enjoyable. On the other hand, even if it is specified that the second specific condition is satisfied, there is no reason for the player to know it, and such a calculation is not used, and the second specific condition is not satisfied. Even if this happens, the degree of discouragement of the player is considered low. The above-described configuration is for eliminating the inconvenience (notifying the player who is disappointed if the second specific condition is not satisfied) caused by the notification that the second specific condition is satisfied. By adjusting the advantage of a specific event, even if the above-mentioned inconvenience occurs, it is possible to suitably follow it. In addition, even if it is specified that the second specific condition is satisfied, if the specific notification is not performed, it is possible to reduce the advantage of the third specific event, and for the player It is possible to achieve a sound game by not setting the advantage of the game too high.

Feature GB12. When it is specified that the second specific condition is satisfied by the second specifying means, it is possible to cause a second specific event that may be beneficial to the player before the second specific condition is satisfied. Second specific event execution means (function to execute various special notifications based on the setting of the second excess flag by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81),
The advantage of the third specific event is when the second specific event is not generated by the second specific event executing means than when the second specific event is generated by the second specific event executing means. The gaming machine according to the feature GB10 or the feature GB11, characterized in that is set so as to be advantageous to the player.

  According to the above configuration, even when the second specific condition is not satisfied and the high advantageous state ends, even if the second specific condition is given an expectation that the second specific condition is satisfied before the end, Assuming that the player has enjoyed the profit of the minute, the advantage of the third specific event is lowered. In this way, it is possible not to unduly increase the player's advantage, and to maintain the balance of the game.

Feature GB13. The remaining number grasping means grasps the number of remaining games as the remaining number in the specific high advantageous state,
The first specifying condition means that the first specifying condition is that, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the number of games played in the highly advantageous state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games. As the establishment of, to end the high advantageous state and shift to the low advantageous state,
Regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the second specific ending means determines the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each highly advantageous game and each game. When the increase / decrease number, which is the difference from the number of used game media, has reached a predetermined upper limit increase number, the second specific condition is satisfied, and the high advantageous state is terminated and the low advantageous state is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of features GB1 to GB12, wherein the gaming machine is one to be transferred.

  According to the above configuration, a plurality of forced termination conditions are set such that the first specific condition that the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games and the second specific condition that the increase / decrease number of game media reaches the upper limit increase number. In the above, whether or not the upper limit number of games is reached is specified by the first specifying means before reaching the upper limit number of games, and whether or not the increase / decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number before the upper limit increase number is reached It is specified by the second specifying means. The number of game media increases or decreases based on the game results of each game. Basically, the number of games in a highly advantageous state is linked to the number of games, but the number of games depends on the game results. In some cases, the relationship between the number and the increase / decrease number does not become a fixed relationship. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the number of games and the number of increase / decrease are predicted separately, it is possible to accurately predict that the highly advantageous state will be forcibly terminated in the future.

  Feature GB14. The second specifying means obtains the remaining number of games from the remaining number of games grasped by the remaining number grasping means and an average value of expected increase / decrease numbers that can be expected per game in the specific high advantageous state. Is provided with a first prediction means for predicting a first expected increase / decrease number that can be expected (a function of executing a prediction process based on the expected increase / decrease number KM in the remaining payout number management process by the main controller 101). The gaming machine according to feature GB13, wherein it is possible to specify in advance that the second specific condition is satisfied based on a prediction result.

  According to the above configuration, the future increase / decrease number is predicted using the remaining number of games and the average value of the expected increase / decrease number that can be expected per game in the specific high advantageous state (that is, the average net increase). Based on the result, it is specified that the increase / decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number. In this way, it is possible to predict / specify that the upper limit increase number is reached only by storing the average value in advance without using complicated calculation processing.

  Feature GB15. The second specifying means obtains the remaining number of games from the remaining number of games grasped by the remaining number grasping means and the maximum expected increase / decrease number that can be expected per game in the specific high advantageous state. Is provided with a second prediction means for predicting a second expected increase / decrease number that can be expected (a function for executing a prediction process based on the maximum increase / decrease number MM in the first adjustment process or the second adjustment process by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to feature GB13 or feature GB14, wherein it is possible to specify in advance that the second specific condition is satisfied based on a prediction result of the two prediction means.

  According to the above configuration, the future increase / decrease number is predicted using the remaining number of games and the maximum expected increase / decrease number (that is, the maximum net increase) that can be expected per game in the specific high advantageous state. Based on the result, it is specified that the increase / decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to predict / specify that the upper limit increase number is reached only by storing the maximum value in advance without using complicated calculation processing.

  In particular, with this configuration, it is possible to suitably avoid unexpectedly reaching the upper limit increase number. In other words, if the expected increase / decrease in each game is the maximum value, the increase will not be greater than that, so the upper limit increase will be reached even though it was predicted that the upper limit increase will not be reached. The event of reaching does not occur.

Feature GB16. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (ordinary section) and a high advantageous state (such as an attack mode in the advantageous section) where the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set,
In the high advantageous state, a predetermined end condition of the high advantageous state (for example, the remaining number of games in the attack mode is 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, Remaining number grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining payout number or increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or increase number reaches the set number);
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, normal termination means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second section display second process by the main controller 101, forced termination condition) The function of executing the process of ending the advantageous section without being established),
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the high advantageous state is terminated based on the fact that a predetermined first specific condition (reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section) is satisfied. First specific ending means for shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second section display processing by the main controller 101, a process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on the fact that the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit number of games) Function to execute)
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, a second specific condition that is a predetermined condition and different from the first specific condition (reaching the upper limit increase number of advantageous sections) has been established. Based on the second specific ending means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second zone display processing by the main control device 101, the advantageous zone increase / decrease number ZM has reached the upper limit increase number A function to forcibly terminate the advantageous section based on the
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means in the highly advantageous state, first specifying means (remaining game management processing by the main control device 101) capable of specifying in advance that the first specifying condition is satisfied Function to execute)
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means in the highly advantageous state, second specifying means (a remaining number management process by the main control device 101) capable of specifying in advance that the second specifying condition is satisfied Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, there are a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state ends based on the remaining number of the high advantageous state; Since the process may end based on the establishment of the first specific condition or the second specific condition, it is possible to suppress the advantage in the highly advantageous state from being extremely increased. A player who wants to continue the high advantageous state for a long time is considered to want to grasp how long the first specific condition and the second specific condition will be satisfied, as well as grasping the remaining number of the high advantageous state. Therefore, in the above configuration, the first specific condition and the second specific condition are configured so that they can be specified before the condition is established, for example, the player knows, for example, that the specific result is notified in accordance with the progress of the game. It is also possible to use the content that you want to play. In particular, since the high advantageous state can be ended by different conditions such as the first specific condition and the second specific condition, and each of them can be specified separately, the end forms of the high advantageous state are diversified, The throbbing feeling in a highly advantageous state can be enhanced, and the throbbing feeling, the mutual relationship between the two specific conditions, and the playability utilized can be suitably realized. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that “can be specified in advance that the first specific condition is satisfied” or “can be specified in advance that the second specific condition is satisfied” is, for example, that “the first specific condition is satisfied” ”Can be specified in a game before the first specific condition is satisfied” or “can be specified in a game before the second specific condition is satisfied that the second specific condition is satisfied” It is also possible to express.

  In addition, the “first specific condition” and the “second specific condition” include “the first specific condition set as the end condition of the predetermined state (advantageous section) including the highly advantageous state” and “the highly advantageous state”. It may be expressed as “a second specific condition that is set as an end condition for a predetermined state and is different from the first specific condition”.

  Furthermore, the configurations shown in the features GB1 to GB15 may be applied individually or in combination to the feature GB16.

In this case, for example, in the feature GB6, “the remaining number grasping means grasps the number of remaining games as the remaining number in the highly advantageous state,
The first specific ending means reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games executed in a predetermined state (advantageous section) including the highly advantageous state, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. The establishment of the first specific condition is to terminate the high advantageous state and shift to the low advantageous state,
The second specific ending means pays out according to the game result of each game in a predetermined state (advantageous section) including the highly advantageous state, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. The high advantage state is terminated when the second specific condition is satisfied that the increase / decrease number, which is the difference between the number of medium payouts and the number of game media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number. Then, it may be applied after correcting the expression, such as “to shift to the low advantageous state”, and this correction is the same when other corresponding configuration is applied to the feature GB16.

<Feature GC group>
Feature GC1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set,
As the state included in the high advantageous state, a specific high advantageous state (for example, attack mode) having a higher advantage for the player than other states in the high advantageous state (for example, challenge mode) is set.
In the specific high advantageous state, a predetermined termination condition of the specific high advantageous state (for example, the remaining number of games in the attack mode becomes zero, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, the number management configuration A remaining number grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining payout number or increase number becomes 0, or the payout number or increase number reaches the set number),
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, normal termination means for terminating the specific high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (forced termination in the second section display processing by the main controller 101) Function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section without the condition)
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state is terminated and the low advantageous state based on the fact that the predetermined first specific condition is satisfied. The first specific ending means for shifting to (in the second section display processing by the main controller 101, a function for executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the fact that the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit number of games) When,
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the specific high advantageous state is included based on the fact that a second specific condition that is a predetermined condition and different from the first specific condition is satisfied. A second specific ending means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (based on the fact that the advantageous zone increase / decrease number ZM has reached the upper limit increase number in the section display second process by the main controller 101) A function to forcibly terminate the advantageous section), and
When the high advantage state is terminated by the first specific ending means, first specific event execution means (for example, an upper limit game by the main control device 101) capable of generating a first specific event that may be beneficial to the player. A function for executing the sixth special notification process when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated based on the number), and
When the high advantage state is terminated by the second specific ending means, second specific event executing means capable of generating a second specific event that can be beneficial to the player (for example, an upper limit increase by the main control device 101) A function for executing the sixth special notification process when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated based on the number), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above-described configuration, there are a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state includes a specific high advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is further higher. In the included configuration, the specific high advantageous state is terminated based on the case where the specific high advantageous state is terminated based on the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state and the fact that the first specific condition and the second specific condition in the high advantageous state are satisfied. Since it may end together with the state, it is suppressed that the advantage of the highly advantageous state including the specific highly advantageous state is extremely increased. Since the player will want to continue the high advantageous state, in particular, the specific high advantageous state for a long time, the high advantageous state is determined by the first specific condition and the second specific condition regardless of the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state. When the game is over, the player may get an impression that the remaining specific high-advantage state has been exploited, and the willingness to continue or replay the game may be lost. Therefore, when the high advantageous state is terminated based on the establishment of the first specific condition or the second specific condition, such a high advantageous state is forcibly made possible by causing a specific event that may be beneficial to the player. The inconvenience in the case of being able to end can be solved.

  Moreover, in the configuration described above, the specific event that occurs depends on whether the process is forcibly terminated by the first specific condition or the second specific condition. By doing this, it is possible to draw attention to which specific condition is to be forcibly terminated, and even an event in which the high advantageous state is forcibly terminated can be used for a game. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  The “first specific ending means” and the “second specific ending means” are, for example, that “a predetermined first specific condition is satisfied regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Based on the first specific ending means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state by ending the specific high advantageous state, or “the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means” Regardless, based on the fact that a second specific condition that is a predetermined condition and different from the first specific condition is satisfied, the specific high advantageous state is terminated by ending the specific high advantageous state, and the It may be expressed as “second specific ending means for shifting to a low advantageous state”.

  Furthermore, “the first specific condition” and “the second specific condition” include “the first specific condition set as the end condition of the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state” and “the specific high advantageous state”. It may be expressed as “a second specific condition that is set as an end condition for the high advantageous state and is different from the first specific condition”.

Feature GC2. When the highly advantageous state is ended by the first specific ending means, first specifying means (for example, by the main controller 101) that specifies the remaining number of the specific highly advantageous state until the second specifying condition is satisfied. The function of executing the process of step S13810),
When the highly advantageous state is terminated by the second specific ending means, second identifying means (for example, by the main controller 101) that identifies the remaining number of the specific highly advantageous state until the first identifying condition is satisfied. The function of executing the process of step S13803),
With
The first specific event execution means can cause the first specific event based on a specific result by the first specific means,
The gaming machine according to the feature GC1, wherein the second specific event executing means is capable of causing the second specific event based on a specific result by the second specific means.

  In a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions such as the first specific condition and the second specific condition are set, the first specific condition is satisfied and is highly advantageous unless the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied at the same time. When the state ends, the second specific condition is not satisfied, and when the second specific condition is satisfied and the highly advantageous state ends, the first specific condition is not satisfied, and any of the specific conditions The high-advantage state is terminated without maximally enjoying the benefits of the high-advantage state specified by the conditions. The above configuration is a configuration for supplementing such benefits that cannot be enjoyed as the first specific event or the second specific event, and in this way, in the configuration having a plurality of forced termination conditions, any forced termination condition This makes it possible to draw out the fun of the game, such as whether to end the highly advantageous state.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the specific high advantageous state is included in the high advantageous state, the first specific event and the second specific event are associated with the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state, so the specific condition on the side that is not satisfied is satisfied. If possible, it can be configured to generate the first specific event and the second specific event in consideration of the benefits that would have been enjoyed to the maximum, and the player's interest in each specific event is further increased It becomes possible.

  The “first specifying means” and the “second specifying means” are, for example, “the remaining number until the second specifying condition is satisfied when the highly advantageous state is ended by the first specifying end means”. “First identifying means for identifying remaining number grasped by grasping means” or “when the highly advantageous state is terminated by the second identifying end means, grasping the remaining number until the first identifying condition is satisfied” It may be expressed as “second specifying means for specifying the remaining number grasped by the means”.

Feature GC3. The remaining number grasping means grasps the number of remaining games as the remaining number in the specific high advantageous state,
The first specifying condition means that the first specifying condition is that, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the number of games played in the highly advantageous state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games. As the establishment of, to end the high advantageous state and shift to the low advantageous state,
Regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the second specific ending means determines the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each highly advantageous game and each game. When the increase / decrease number, which is the difference from the number of used game media, has reached a predetermined upper limit increase number, the second specific condition is satisfied, and the high advantageous state is terminated and the low advantageous state is reached. Is to be migrated,
The gaming machine according to Feature GC2, wherein the first specific event has a higher degree of advantage for the player or can be more beneficial than the second specific event.

  According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, the first specific condition that the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games and the second specific condition that the increase / decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number. The first specific event that occurs when the first specific condition that reaches the upper limit number of games is satisfied before reaching the increase number and the second specific condition that reaches the upper limit increase number before reaching the upper limit number of games is satisfied In comparison with the second specific event that occurs when it is forcibly terminated, the first specific event is more advantageous or more beneficial to the player than the second specific event. Yes. In other words, on the premise of a game such as receiving a payout of game media as a result of each game and aiming for an increase in game media, there is a further increase in game media on the side that has reached the upper limit number of games and is forcibly terminated. Although there is a sense of disappearance that can be expected, there is also an idea that for the side that has reached the upper limit increase number and is forcibly terminated, it may be sufficient to have reached the upper limit as the increase number of game media. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the compensation on the side that has reached the upper limit number of games is increased, and the compensation on the side that has reached the upper limit increase number is reduced, thereby maintaining the balance of both compensations (privileges) and optimizing the game Can be achieved.

Feature GC4. The remaining number grasping means grasps the number of remaining games as the remaining number in the specific high advantageous state,
The first specifying condition means that the first specifying condition is that, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the number of games played in the highly advantageous state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games. As the establishment of, to end the high advantageous state and shift to the low advantageous state,
Regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the second specific ending means determines the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each highly advantageous game and each game. When the increase / decrease number, which is the difference from the number of used game media, has reached a predetermined upper limit increase number, the second specific condition is satisfied, and the high advantageous state is terminated and the low advantageous state is reached. Is to be migrated,
When the high advantageous state is terminated by the first specific ending means or the second specific ending means, a special state (special section) advantageous to the player in the low advantageous state after the high advantageous state ends. Special state setting means that can be set (function to execute special section setting processing by the main control device 101),
The first specific event execution means corresponds to the number of games corresponding to the increase number up to the upper limit increase number specified by the second specification means, as the special condition end condition set by the special state setting means. It can be set as the first specific event to set the end condition as being established when the medium is paid out in the special state,
The second specific event executing means executes the special condition end condition set by the special state setting means by the number of games corresponding to the number of games up to the upper limit game number specified by the first specifying means. The gaming machine according to the feature GC2 or the feature GC3, wherein setting the end condition as being satisfied when it is done can be set as the second specific event.

  According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, the first specific condition that the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games and the second specific condition that the increase or decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number. When the high advantageous state is terminated under the forced termination condition, a special state advantageous to the player is set in the low advantageous state, and the number of games up to the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase number are set as the special condition termination condition. The number of increases up to is used. More specifically, when the upper limit number of games is reached and the game is forcibly terminated, the increase number up to the upper limit increase number is used as the special condition end condition, and when the upper limit increase number is reached and the game is terminated forcibly The number of games up to the upper limit number of games is used as the special condition end condition. In this way, in a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions in a highly advantageous state are set, when ending with one forced termination condition, there is a feeling of loss that the other forced termination condition could not be satisfied. It can be compensated by special conditions.

Feature GC5. In the specific high advantageous state, first information notification means (number of remaining games by the display control device 81) that can notify the first information corresponding to the number of games up to the upper limit number of games in the high advantageous state by a predetermined notification means. Display execution function), and
In the specific high advantageous state, second information notification means (number of remaining increase by the display control device 81) that can notify the second information corresponding to the increase number up to the upper limit increase number of the high advantageous state by a predetermined notification means. Display execution function), and
When the corresponding number corresponding to the increase number up to the upper limit increase number is set as the termination condition for the special state in the first specific event execution means, the second information that has been notified in the specific high advantageous state Means capable of continuing the notification of the second information by the notification means in the special state (function of executing the process of step S14209 by the display control device 81);
When the number of games corresponding to the number of games up to the upper limit number of games is set as the termination condition for the special state by the second specific event executing means, the first information that has been notified in the specific high advantageous state Means capable of continuing the notification of the first information by the notification means in the special state (function of executing the process of step S14206 by the display control device 81);
A gaming machine according to the feature GC4, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when reaching the upper limit number of games and forcibly ending, the increase number up to the upper limit increase number is used for the special state, and when reaching the upper limit increase number and forcibly ending, In a configuration in which the number of games up to the upper limit number of games is used in a special state, notification of information corresponding to the increase number up to the upper limit increase number that was notified in the specific high advantageous state until then, the upper limit number of games The notification of information corresponding to the number of games up to is taken over to the special state and notified. In this way, it is possible to make it seem as if the high advantageous state (especially the specific high advantageous state) continues until the forced termination condition on the side that could not be actually satisfied is satisfied. Even if it is recognized that the state has shifted to the special state, it is easy to understand that the difference up to the forced termination condition on the side that could not be satisfied in the high advantageous state has been carried over to the special state. It is possible to clearly grasp that the difference up to the forced termination condition is compensated in the state.

Feature GC6. When transitioning from the specific high-advantage state to the low-advantage state, an end notification execution unit (in step S14203 by the display control device 81) capable of executing an end notification of the end of the specific high-advantage state by a predetermined notification unit. Processing function), and
In the case where the specific high advantageous state does not shift from the specific high advantageous state to the low advantageous state, a pseudo end notification execution unit (display control device) capable of executing a pseudo end notification indicating that the specific high advantageous state is ended by a predetermined notification unit. 81, a function of executing a process for performing an end effect when a post-loading notification is generated),
With
The pseudo end notification by the pseudo end notification executing means is configured to execute continuous notification for allowing the player to recognize that the specific high advantage state continues after executing the end notification by a predetermined notification means. And
When the special state is set by the special state setting means, a pseudo continuation notification execution means (a continuation notification can be executed by a predetermined notification means after the end notification is executed by the end notification execution means) The gaming machine according to feature GC5, further comprising a function of executing the processing of step S14205 by the display control device 81).

  According to the above configuration, the pseudo end notification can be performed by the pseudo end notification execution means that the specific high advantage state is continued by the continuous notification while the specific high advantage state is supposed to end by the end notification. Assuming that the specific high advantage state (high advantage state) is forcibly terminated and the transition to the special state is performed, the same flow as the pseudo end notification is performed so that the special high advantage state continues as if the special state It is possible to give the impression of being in a state. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to further enhance the effect that information up to the upper limit number of games and information up to the upper limit increase number are handed over in a special state.

Feature GC7. In the specific high advantageous state, an increase processing means capable of executing an increase process in the specific high advantageous state based on the fact that a predetermined increase condition is satisfied (game number addition processing such as an attack mode by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
When the increase condition is satisfied in a specific situation where it is specified that the first specific condition or the second specific condition is subsequently established based on the current remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means Or an excess information storage means for storing excess information of the specific high advantage state corresponding to the increase processing based on the establishment of the increase condition when the specific situation is obtained by performing the increase processing by the increase processing means ( Total number of disappeared games TEG)
With
When the first specific condition is satisfied, the first specific end means ends the high advantageous state regardless of the excess information stored in the excess information storage means,
When the second specific condition is satisfied, the second specific end means ends the high advantageous state regardless of the excess information stored in the excess information storage means,
When the highly advantageous state is ended by the first specifying end means, third specifying means for specifying the excess information stored in the excess information storage means (for example, the process of step S13708 by the main controller 101). Function to execute)
When the highly advantageous state is terminated by the second identification ending unit, fourth identification unit that identifies the excess information stored in the excess information storage unit (for example, the process of step S13702 by the main controller 101). Function to execute)
With
The first specific event executing means can set the first specific event based on a specific result by the third specifying means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features GC1 to GC6, wherein the second specific event executing means is capable of setting the second specific event based on a result specified by the fourth specifying means.

  In the above configuration, when it is specified in advance that the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, the excess of the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state is stored as the excess information, and then the first When the specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, the highly advantageous state ends regardless of the excess information. Then, until the specific situation specified when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, it is desired that the increase process in which the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state is increased as much as possible. Even if the increase processing is performed, the person has to feel that it is meaningless, and there is a concern that the game motivation will be greatly reduced. Therefore, by using the excess amount in the specific high advantage state, it is possible to create a significance for increasing the excess amount by making a configuration in which a specific event can occur at the end of the high advantage state. Decrease in motivation can be suppressed.

  When the above configuration is applied to the features GC2 to GC6, the “first specific event executing means” and the “first specific event” in the above configuration and the “first specific event executing means” of the features GC2 to GC6 and “ The “first specific event” may be the same or different. If they are different, in order to clearly distinguish them, the “first specific event execution means” and “first specific event” in the above configuration are referred to as “third specific event execution means” and “third specific event”, respectively. It may be expressed as Also, the “second specific event execution means” and “second specific event” in the above configuration may be the same as the “second specific event execution means” and “second specific event” of the features GC2 to GC6. It may be different or different. If they are different, the “second specific event execution means” and the “second specific event” in the above configuration are referred to as “fourth specific event execution means” and “fourth specific event”, respectively. It may be expressed as

Feature GC8. The remaining number grasping means grasps the number of remaining games as the remaining number in the specific high advantageous state,
The first specifying condition means that the first specifying condition is that, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the number of games played in the highly advantageous state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games. As the establishment of, to end the high advantageous state and shift to the low advantageous state,
Regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the second specific ending means determines the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each highly advantageous game and each game. When the increase / decrease number, which is the difference from the number of used game media, has reached a predetermined upper limit increase number, the second specific condition is satisfied, and the high advantageous state is terminated and the low advantageous state is reached. Is to be migrated,
The excess information storage means includes
First storage means for storing information on the number of games corresponding to the increase process as the excess information (adding the number of games added to the total number of extinct games TEG when the first excess flag by the main control device 101 is set) Processing function), and
Second storage means for storing information on an increase in the number of game media that can be expected in the number of games corresponding to the increase process as the excess information (total disappearance game when the second excess flag is set by the main control device 101) A function of executing a process of adding the number of games to the number TEG),
With
The third specifying means specifies excess information of the number of games stored in the first storage means;
The gaming machine according to feature GC7, wherein the fourth specifying means specifies excess information of the increase number stored in the second storage means.

  According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, the first specific condition that the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games and the second specific condition that the increase / decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number. If the establishment of the forced termination condition is specified in advance, and an increase process is performed as a so-called extra process after the specification, the excess corresponding to the increase process is respectively the excess information of the number of games. It is stored as excess information for the increased number. And when it is forcibly terminated, a specific event occurs based on the excess information, and when it is forcibly terminated with the upper limit number of games, the specific event is generated based on the excess information of the number of games. If it occurs and is forcibly terminated with the upper limit increase number, a specific event occurs based on the excess information of the increase number. By doing in this way, the benefits that would have been received unless forced termination is linked to the reason for forced termination, and it becomes possible to suitably follow the player's feeling of loss due to forced termination.

Feature GC9. In the specific high advantageous state, an increase processing means capable of executing an increase process in the specific high advantageous state based on the fact that a predetermined increase condition is satisfied (game number addition processing such as an attack mode by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
When the increase condition is satisfied in a specific situation where it is specified that the first specific condition or the second specific condition is subsequently established based on the current remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means Or the excess information storage that stores the excess information of the specific high-advantage state corresponding to the increase process based on the increase condition being satisfied when the increase state is performed by the increase process means. Means (total number of extinguished games TEG);
With
When the first specific condition is satisfied, the first specific end means ends the high advantageous state regardless of the excess information stored in the excess information storage means,
When the second specific condition is satisfied, the second specific end means ends the high advantageous state regardless of the excess information stored in the excess information storage means,
When the highly specific state is terminated by the first specific ending unit, first specifying unit (step S13810 by the main controller 101) that specifies the remaining number of the specific highly advantageous state until the second specific condition is satisfied. )
When the highly advantageous state is ended by the second specific ending means, second specifying means for specifying the remaining number of the specific highly advantageous state until the first specifying condition is satisfied (step S13803 by the main controller 101). Function to execute processing)
When the highly advantageous state is ended by the first specifying end means, third specifying means for specifying the excess information stored in the excess information storage means (executes the process of step S13809 by the main controller 101). Function)
When the highly advantageous state is ended by the second specifying end unit, fourth specifying unit for specifying the excess information stored in the excess information storage unit (executes the process of step S13802 by the main controller 101). Function)
With
The first specific event executing means can set the first specific event based on the specific result by the first specific means and the specific result by the third specific means,
Any one of the features GC1 to GC8, wherein the second specific event executing means can set the second specific event based on a specific result by the second specific means and a specific result by the fourth specific means. The gaming machine according to 1.

  In the above configuration, when it is specified in advance that the first specific condition or the second specific condition is established, the excess of the remaining number is stored as excess information, and then the first specific condition or the second When the specific condition is satisfied, the highly advantageous state ends regardless of the excess information. Then, until the specific situation specified when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, it is desired that the increase process in which the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state is increased as much as possible. Even if the increase processing is performed, the person has to feel that it is meaningless, and there is a concern that the game motivation will be greatly reduced. Therefore, by using the excess amount to create a specific event at the end of the specific high advantage state (high advantage state), it becomes possible to create significance for increasing the excess amount, A decrease in game willingness can be suppressed.

  However, in a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions such as the first specific condition and the second specific condition such as the first specific condition and the second specific condition are set, the first specific condition and the second specific condition are simultaneously established. Unless the first specific condition is satisfied and the high advantageous state ends, the second specific condition is not satisfied, and when the second specific condition is satisfied and the high advantageous state ends, the first specific condition is satisfied. The specific condition is not satisfied, and the high advantageous state is terminated without maximally enjoying the benefits of the high advantageous state defined by any specific condition. In other words, for example, if it is forcibly terminated under the first specific condition, and if it is configured to cause a specific event based on the excess on the first specific condition side, it can alleviate the player's feeling of loss, For a player who was expecting the benefit on the second specific condition side, if the compulsory termination was performed on the first specific condition, it would be unsatisfactory that the benefit could not be fully received.

  Therefore, in the above-described configuration, a specific event is generated in consideration of the benefits of the side that has not been forcibly terminated in addition to the excess of the side that has been forcibly terminated at the time of forced termination. By doing in this way, in the gaming machine in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, it becomes possible to more suitably follow the feeling of loss at the forced termination.

Feature GC10. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (for example, attack mode in the advantageous section) where the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set,
In the high advantageous state, a predetermined end condition of the high advantageous state (for example, the remaining number of games in the attack mode is 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, Remaining number grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining payout number or increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or increase number reaches the set number);
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, normal termination means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second section display second process by the main controller 101, forced termination condition) The function of executing the process of ending the advantageous section without being established),
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the high advantageous state is terminated based on the fact that a predetermined first specific condition (reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section) is satisfied. First specific ending means for shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second section display processing by the main controller 101, a process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on the fact that the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit number of games) Function to execute)
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, a second specific condition that is a predetermined condition and different from the first specific condition (reaching the upper limit increase number of advantageous sections) has been established. Based on the second specific ending means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second zone display processing by the main control device 101, the advantageous zone increase / decrease number ZM has reached the upper limit increase number A function to forcibly terminate the advantageous section based on the
When the high advantage state is terminated by the first specific ending means, first specific event execution means (for example, an upper limit game by the main control device 101) capable of generating a first specific event that may be beneficial to the player. A function for executing the sixth special notification process when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated based on the number), and
When the high advantage state is terminated by the second specific ending means, second specific event executing means capable of generating a second specific event that can be beneficial to the player (for example, an upper limit increase by the main control device 101) A function for executing the sixth special notification process when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated based on the number), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, there are a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state ends based on the remaining number of the high advantageous state; Since the process may end based on the establishment of the first specific condition and the second specific condition in the highly advantageous state, it is suppressed that the advantage in the highly advantageous state is extremely increased. Given that the player would like to continue the high advantage state for a long time, if the high advantage state is terminated by the first specific condition or the second specific condition regardless of the remaining number of the high advantage state, The player may receive the impression that the remaining high advantage state has been exploited, and the willingness to continue or replay the game may be lost. Therefore, when the high advantageous state is terminated based on the establishment of the first specific condition or the second specific condition, such a high advantageous state is forcibly made possible by causing a specific event that may be beneficial to the player. The inconvenience in the case of being able to end can be solved.

  Moreover, in the configuration described above, the specific event that occurs depends on whether the process is forcibly terminated by the first specific condition or the second specific condition. By doing this, it is possible to draw attention to which specific condition is to be forcibly terminated, and even an event in which the high advantageous state is forcibly terminated can be used for a game. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  It should be noted that “first specific condition” and “second specific condition” include “first specific condition set as an end condition for a predetermined state (advantageous section) including the highly advantageous state” and “highly advantageous state”. It may be expressed as “a second specific condition that is set as an end condition for a predetermined state (advantageous section) and is different from the first specific condition”.

  In addition, the components indicated by the features GC1 to GC9 may be applied to the feature GC10 individually or in combination.

In this case, for example, in the feature GC3, “The remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number of games as the remaining number in the highly advantageous state,
The first specific ending means reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games executed in a predetermined state (advantageous section) including the highly advantageous state, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. The establishment of the first specific condition is to terminate the high advantageous state and shift to the low advantageous state,
The second specific ending means pays out according to the game result of each game in a predetermined state (advantageous section) including the highly advantageous state, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. The high advantageous state is terminated when the second specific condition is satisfied that the increase / decrease number, which is the difference between the number of medium payouts and the number of game media used in each game, has reached a predetermined upper limit increase number. To shift to the low advantageous state,
It may be applied after correcting the expression, such as “the first specific event has a higher degree of advantage for the player or is more likely to be beneficial than the second specific event”. The same applies to the case where the above configuration is applied to the feature GC10.

<Feature GD group>
Features GD1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set,
As the state included in the high advantageous state, a specific high advantageous state (for example, attack mode) having a higher advantage for the player than other states in the high advantageous state (for example, challenge mode) is set.
A payout means (payout device 53) for paying out game media in accordance with the result of each game;
In the specific high advantageous state, a predetermined termination condition of the specific high advantageous state (for example, the remaining number of games in the attack mode becomes zero, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, the number management configuration The remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number until the remaining payout number or increase number reaches 0, or the payout number or increase number reaches the set number) is stored in a predetermined remaining number area. Remaining number information storage means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
A remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number corresponding to the remaining number information stored in the remaining number information storage means (for example, a function for executing the section display second process by the main control device 101);
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, normal termination means for terminating the specific high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (forced termination in the second section display processing by the main controller 101) Function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section without the condition)
The increase / decrease number that is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the highly advantageous state and the number of game media used in each game reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number. The high specific state including the specific high advantageous state is terminated regardless of the remaining number information stored by the remaining number information storage means based on the fact that the first specific condition including First specific ending means for shifting to a low advantageous state (in the second section display processing by the main controller 101, a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the fact that the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM has reached the upper limit increase number is executed Function)
Based on the fact that a predetermined increase condition has been established, an increase processing means (a function for executing the game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increase process in the specific high advantageous state;
An expected increase / decrease number grasping means (function for executing the remaining number management process by the main control device 101) for grasping an expected increase / decrease number of game media that can be expected when the game of the increase due to the increase process is digested;
When the sum of the expected increase / decrease number and the previous increase / decrease number exceeds the upper limit increase number, the excess information of the remaining number corresponding to the excess is indicated as an excess area (disappearing preparation game) different from the remaining number area. The excess storage means (function to execute the process of step S14407 by the main control device 101),
When the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area becomes specific information corresponding to a specific number that triggers the termination process by the normal ending means, the excess information is stored in the excess area. If there is, the specific storage means (function to execute the redistribution processing by the main control device 101) for storing the remaining number corresponding to the excess information as remaining number information in the remaining number area,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above-described configuration, there are a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state includes a specific high advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is further higher. In the included configuration, the specific high-advantage state ends when the number of game media paid out in the high-advantage state including the specific high-advantage state ends when the specific high-advantage state ends. Since the process may end based on reaching the increased number, it is suppressed that the advantage of the highly advantageous state, particularly the specific highly advantageous state, is extremely increased. In the specific high advantageous state, there is a case where a so-called extra process such as an increase process occurs when the increase condition is established, and when the increase process is performed, a game medium that can be expected when the game corresponding to the increase process is digested If the expected increase / decrease number and the previous increase / decrease number exceed the upper limit increase number, the excess information of the remaining number corresponding to the excess is the remaining number area in which the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number is stored. Are stored in different excess areas. As described above, the excess information is stored in a different area from the area where the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number is stored, thereby making it possible to use the excess (information stored in the excess area). This can be used to simplify the processing configuration in order to improve the interest of the highly advantageous state in which the upper limit increase number is set.

  In addition, in the case where excess information is stored in such an excess area, depending on the progress of each game, even if the specific high advantage state stored in the remaining number area is digested, the high advantage state There may be a case where the increase / decrease number does not reach the upper limit increase number. Therefore, in such a case, the excess information stored in the excess area is re-stored as remaining number information in the remaining number area. In this way, while suppressing the occurrence of the player's loss due to processing errors as described above, the specific high advantageous state can be implemented in spite of the fact that the increasing processing has been performed. An event that is restricted can be preferably avoided.

  “Remaining number information” and “excess information” can also be expressed as “first information” and “second information”, for example. In this case, “remaining number information storage means”, “excess information storage means”, “remaining number area” and “excess area” are also “first information storage means”, “second information storage means”, “first area”. Or “second region”, and other configurations may be modified as appropriate. Such correction can also be applied to corresponding portions in other features or other feature groups.

  For the “specific storage unit”, when “the remaining number corresponding to the excess information is stored as remaining number information in the remaining number area”, “the excess of the amount stored as remaining number information in the remaining number area” With the configuration of “erasing information from the excess information storage means”, it is more clearly understood that the “excess information” is temporarily stored in the “excess area”. Note that, regarding the “specific storage means”, “when the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area becomes specific information corresponding to a specific number that triggers an end process by the normal end means, When the excess information is stored in the excess area, it may be expressed as “means capable of executing a movement process for moving the remaining number corresponding to the excess information to the remaining number area as remaining number information”. Such correction can also be applied to corresponding portions in other features or other feature groups.

  Feature GD2. The gaming machine according to feature GD1, wherein the excess information stored in the excess area is deleted when the high advantage state is terminated by the first specific termination means.

  According to the above configuration, the excess information stored in the excess area is deleted when the upper limit increase number is reached, and the excess area to be erased is always used during the specific high advantageous state. Since the remaining number of areas to be processed is a separate area, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing errors such as erasing when the upper limit increase number has not been reached, and to reduce the risk of the player suffering from such errors Is possible.

Feature GD3. The remaining number stored by the remaining number information storage means based on the fact that the second specific condition including that the number of games executed in the highly advantageous state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games is satisfied. Regardless of the information, second specific ending means for ending the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second zone display processing by the main control device 101, the number of advantageous zone games A function of executing a process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on the fact that the AG has reached the upper limit number of games),
In the specific high advantageous state, it can be specified in advance that the second specific condition of the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state is satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Second specifying means (function for executing the remaining game number management process by the main control device 101);
With
Even when the high advantage state is terminated by the second specific ending means, the excess information stored in the excess area is erased,
Based on the fact that the second specifying condition is specified by the second specifying means, it is specified that the upper limit game number is exceeded among the remaining numbers corresponding to the excess information stored in the excess area. Confirmation information storage means for storing the remaining number corresponding to the excess number of games as confirmation information in a determination area different from the remaining number area and the excess area (function for executing the disappearance game number movement process by the main control device 101) The gaming machine according to feature GD1 or feature GD2, characterized by comprising:

  The increase / decrease number varies depending on the result of the game. Even if excess information is stored so as to reach the upper limit increase number, the upper limit increase number may not be reached. In such a case, the excess information is re-stored as remaining number information. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games and is forcibly terminated, when it is specified in advance that the upper limit number of games is reached, the upper limit number of games is reached rather than reaching the upper limit number of games. Even if the high advantage state ends before, it is unlikely that the high advantage state will continue beyond the upper limit number of games. That is, it is considered that the event that the number exceeding the upper limit game number is stored again in the remaining number area does not occur depending on the subsequent game situation. Therefore, in the above configuration, the amount exceeding the upper limit number of games is stored in the determination region as disappearance information, which exceeds the remaining number region for storing the remaining number information that is always used in the highly advantageous state. The excess area that temporarily stores excess information and the fixed area that stores fixed information that is determined to be exceeded are used. In this way, by storing the information related to the remaining number in the specific highly advantageous state separately in different areas, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration in the highly advantageous state, prevent errors, etc. It becomes possible.

  The “determined information” can be expressed as, for example, “third information”. In this case, the “determined information storage unit” and the “determined area” are also “third information storage unit” and “third information”. It is expressed as “region”, and the expression may be modified as appropriate for other configurations.

  Further, regarding the “determined information storage unit”, “the remaining number corresponding to the excess number of games specified to exceed the upper limit number of games is stored as the determined information in a determined area different from the remaining number area and the excess area. ”, The“ excess information stored in the defined area as the confirmed information is deleted from the excess information storage unit ”, the“ excess information ”is temporarily stored in the“ excess area ” Is more clearly understood. For the “determined information storage unit”, “the number of remaining numbers corresponding to the excess information stored in the excess area based on the fact that the second specification unit specifies that the second specification condition is satisfied. Among them, means capable of executing a movement process for moving the remaining number corresponding to the excess number of games specified to exceed the upper limit number of games as confirmation information to a determination area different from the remaining number area and the excess area. It may be expressed.

Feature GD4. When the high advantageous state is terminated, initialization means capable of executing an initialization process for initializing various information used in the high advantageous state (the initialization process is executed in the second section display process by the main controller 101) Function)
The remaining number area and the excess area are targets of the initialization process by the initialization unit, while the fixed area is not a target of the initialization process by the initialization unit. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area and the excess information stored in the excess area are initialized at the end of the highly advantageous state, while the confirmed information stored in the confirmed area is initialized. Since it is not a target, it is possible to take over the confirmed information until after the end of the highly advantageous state. In other words, as described in the feature GD2, since the definite information is the remaining number of information that cannot be used during the high-advantage state, the initial information can be obtained even if it is not subject to initialization processing at the end of the high-advantage state. It is thought that it does not contradict the significance of the provision of the conversion process. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to carry out the game progress in the high advantageous state and the low advantageous state, such as taking over the confirmed information from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state and using it for the game effect in the low advantageous state. Can be achieved.

  Feature GD5. The confirmed information storage means is stored in the remaining number area when it is specified by the second specifying means that the second specifying condition is satisfied, and the excess information is not stored in the excess area. The remaining number corresponding to the excess number of games specified to exceed the upper limit number of games among the remaining number is stored as confirmation information in a determination area different from the remaining number area and the excess area, The gaming machine according to feature GD3 or feature GD4.

  According to the above configuration, when the excess information is not stored at the time when it is predicted that the upper limit number of games will be reached, the remaining number corresponding to the excess number of games from the remaining number information of the first information is determined as confirmed information. Remembered. In other words, when it is predicted that the upper limit number of games will be reached, there may be a prediction that the increase / decrease number will reach the upper limit increase number before that, or it may not be predicted, The above configuration provides for the storage of deterministic information in situations where no prediction has been made. With such a configuration, the existence area of the definite area is further clarified, so that the excess area for storing the excess information is a temporary storage area before the definite information is stored in the definite area. Clarified and it becomes possible to make the merit of temporarily storing the excess area described in the feature GD1 more prominent.

  Feature GD6. The confirmed information stored in the confirmed area by the confirmed information storage means is based on the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area or based on the excess information stored in the excess area. The gaming machine according to feature GD5, further comprising a discriminating means capable of discriminating whether or not the main control device 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the second excess flag is present.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which a plurality of roots such as the remaining number information of the remaining number region and the excess information of the excess region exist as roots of the confirmed information stored in the confirmed region, the root of the confirmed information is determined by the determination unit. Since it becomes possible to discriminate afterwards, for example, different information is handled for the fixed information with the remaining number information as the root and the fixed information with the excess information as the root (for example, a different privilege is given or the advantage is different) For example, an event may be generated), and it is possible to realize a game using the difference in roots.

Feature GD7. The determination unit executes the first process based on the determination that the determination information stored in the determination area is based on the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area. First processing execution means (function for executing processing for sixth special notification based on the total number of annihilated games TEG when the second excess flag is not set by the main control device 101);
The determination means determines that the determination information stored in the determination area is based on the excess information stored in the excess area, and is different from the first process. A second process execution means for executing two processes (a function for executing a process for sixth special notification based on the total number of extinguished games TEG when the second excess flag is set by the main control device 101);
The gaming machine according to feature GD6, comprising:

  The above configuration is a specific configuration for clarifying the function of the feature GD6.

  Feature GD8. The case where the first process is performed by the first process execution unit is set to be more advantageous for the player than the case where the second process is performed by the second process execution unit. The gaming machine according to feature GD7, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, when the excess information is temporarily stored and then stored as confirmed information, it is predicted that the increase / decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number, and then the upper limit game number is predicted. Is the case where the upper limit number of games is reached prior to the prediction that the upper limit increase number will be reached. This is the case when a prediction is made. In other words, in a highly advantageous state, particularly in a specific highly advantageous state, it is easy to predict that the upper limit increase will be reached even if the number of remaining games is the same as in a situation where a large number of payouts are received with a small number of games. The smaller the payout in the high advantageous state), the easier it is to predict that the upper limit number of games will be reached than the prediction that the upper limit increase number will be reached. Moreover, when it is predicted that the upper limit number of games will be reached before the prediction that the upper limit increase number will be reached, there is a high possibility that the upper limit number of games will be reached without reaching the upper limit increase number. Therefore, when the prediction that the upper limit number of games will be reached before the prediction that the upper limit increase number will be reached as in the above configuration (first process) will reach the upper limit increase number. The game paid out during the highly advantageous state is made easier for the player than the process (second process) in which it is predicted that the upper limit number of games will be reached after the prediction of It may be possible to compensate for the difference in the number of media by the difference in the degree of advantage.

Feature GD9. Increase means capable of executing an increase process in the specific high advantageous state based on the fact that a predetermined increase condition has been established in the specific high advantageous state (function of executing the game number addition process by the main control device 101) When,
First increase notification means capable of executing increase notification corresponding to the increase processing being performed by a predetermined notification means (function of executing an additional notification process by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81) When,
When the specific storage unit stores the remaining number information in the remaining number area based on the excess information stored in the excess area, the increase notification can be executed by a predetermined notification unit. Second increase notification means (function of executing the process of step S14317 by main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features GD1 to GD8, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the increase condition is satisfied, the increase process is performed, and the increase notification is generated. In the configuration in which the so-called additional notification is set, the upper limit increase number is temporarily exceeded. Although stored as information, if the remaining number information becomes specific information before reaching the upper limit increase number, the remaining number information is re-stored in the remaining number area, and an increase notification is generated. By doing in this way, for example, when notification corresponding to the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area (for example, notification of the number of remaining games) is performed, it accompanies re-storing of the remaining number information. It is possible to eliminate the contradiction in the notification with a configuration that is relatively difficult to give a sense of incongruity.

Feature GD10. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (ordinary section) and a high advantageous state (for example, attack mode among advantageous sections) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set,
A payout means (payout device 53) for paying out game media in accordance with the result of each game;
In the high advantageous state, a predetermined end condition of the high advantageous state (for example, the remaining number of games in the attack mode is 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, The remaining number stored in a predetermined remaining number area corresponding to the remaining number until the remaining payout number or increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or increase number reaches the set number) Information storage means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
A remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number corresponding to the remaining number information stored in the remaining number information storage means (for example, a function for executing the section display second process by the main control device 101);
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, normal termination means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second section display second process by the main control device 101, forced termination condition) The function of executing the process of ending the advantageous section without being established),
An increase / decrease number that is a difference between the number of game media paid out in accordance with the game result of each game in a predetermined state (advantageous section) including the high advantage state and the number of game media used in each game is previously set. Regardless of the remaining number information stored by the remaining number information storage means, the high advantageous state is terminated based on the fact that the first specific condition including the reaching of the predetermined upper limit increase number is satisfied. The first specific ending means for shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second section display processing by the main control device 101, a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on the fact that the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM has reached the upper limit increase number. Function to execute)
An increase processing means (a function for executing the game number addition processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increase processing in the highly advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined increase condition;
An expected increase / decrease number grasping means (function for executing the remaining number management process by the main control device 101) for grasping an expected increase / decrease number of game media that can be expected when the game of the increase due to the increase process is digested;
When the sum of the expected increase / decrease number and the previous increase / decrease number exceeds the upper limit increase number, the excess information of the remaining number corresponding to the excess is indicated as an excess area (disappearing preparation game) different from the remaining number area. The excess storage means (function to execute the process of step S14407 by the main control device 101),
With
When the high advantage state is terminated by the first specific ending means, the excess information stored in the excess area is erased,
When the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area becomes specific information corresponding to a specific number that triggers the termination process by the normal ending means, the excess information is stored in the excess area. If there is, the specific storage means (function to execute the redistribution processing by the main control device 101) for storing the remaining number corresponding to the excess information as remaining number information in the remaining number area,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, there are a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state ends based on the remaining number of the high advantageous state; Since the increase / decrease number of game media paid out in a predetermined state including the high advantageous state may end based on reaching the upper limit increase number, the advantage of the high advantageous state may be extremely increased. It is suppressed. In a highly advantageous state, there is a case where a so-called extra process such as an increase process occurs when the increase condition is established. When the increase process is performed, a game medium that can be expected when the game corresponding to the increase of the increase process is digested If the expected increase / decrease number and the previous increase / decrease number exceed the upper limit increase number, the remaining number excess information corresponding to the excess is the remaining number area in which the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number is stored. Stored in different excess areas. As described above, the excess information is stored in a different area from the area where the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number is stored, thereby making it possible to use the excess (information stored in the excess area). This can be used to simplify the processing configuration in order to improve the interest of the highly advantageous state in which the upper limit increase number is set. Moreover, the excess information stored in the excess area is erased when it reaches the upper limit increase number and ends, and by using the above configuration, the excess area to be erased and the highly advantageous state Since the remaining number area that is always used is a separate area, it prevents the occurrence of processing errors such as erasing when the upper limit increase is not reached, and reduces the risk to the player due to the error It becomes possible to do.

  In addition, in the case where excess information is stored in such an excess area, depending on the progress of each game, even if the high advantageous state stored in the remaining number area is digested, the increase / decrease in game media The number may not reach the upper limit increase number. Therefore, in such a case, the excess information stored in the excess area is re-stored as remaining number information in the remaining number area. In this way, while suppressing the occurrence of a player's loss due to processing errors as described above, the implementation of the highly advantageous state for that amount is limited despite the fact that the increase processing has been carried out. It is possible to favorably avoid the event of being done.

  In addition, you may apply each structure shown by the characteristics GD1 thru | or GD9 individually or in combination to the said characteristic GD10.

<Feature GE group>
Features GE1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set,
As the state included in the high advantageous state, a specific high advantageous state (for example, attack mode) having a higher advantage for the player than other states in the high advantageous state (for example, challenge mode) is set.
Predetermined termination conditions for the specific high advantageous state (for example, the remaining number of games in the attack mode is 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, the number of remaining payouts and increase in the number management configuration) A remaining number grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the number of sheets reaches 0, or the number of payouts or increase reaches the set number);
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, normal termination means for terminating the specific high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (forced termination in the second section display processing by the main controller 101) Function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section without the condition)
The remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means can be notified by a predetermined notifying means (the number of remaining games corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81). Function to execute processing for notification), and
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the high advantageous state including the specific highly advantageous state is terminated based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition (upper limit increase number of 2400 sheets) is satisfied. Specific ending means for shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second section display processing by the main controller 101, a process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on the fact that the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM has reached the upper limit increase number) Function to execute)
When the high advantageous state is terminated by the specific ending unit, the remaining number grasping unit for grasping the remaining number information reported by the remaining number notifying unit (for example, executing the processing of step S14803 by the main control device 101) Function)
Specific event execution means (for example, a function for executing the seventh special notification processing by the main control device 101) capable of generating a specific event that can be beneficial to the player based on the grasp result by the notice remaining number grasping means. )When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above-described configuration, there are a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state includes a specific high advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is further higher. In the included configuration, the specific high advantageous state may be terminated based on the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state, or may be terminated based on the specific condition being satisfied. It is suppressed that the advantage of a highly advantageous state is raised extremely. When the specific condition is satisfied, the high advantageous state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state, and when the remaining number is notified before the specific condition is satisfied and ended. The player may receive the impression that the remaining number that has been informed is intentionally extinguished and that it has been exploited, and there is a concern that the game motivation will decrease. However, if it is configured to end the highly advantageous state after waiting for the remaining number to be informed, the significance of providing a forced termination condition such as a specific condition is not guaranteed at all, and the remaining number is reported. Even if not, it will not meet the needs of players who will be highly interested in the continuity of the highly advantageous state. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the high advantageous state is terminated when the specific condition is satisfied regardless of the presence or absence of notification, and a specific event is generated according to the remaining number of notifications. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that avoids a decrease in player's willingness to play and meets the diverse needs of the player.

  The “specific condition” may be expressed as “a specific condition set as an end condition for the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state”.

Feature GE2. With payout means (payout device 53) for paying out game media according to the result of each game,
The specific condition has a predetermined increase / decrease number which is a difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the highly advantageous state and the number of game media used in each game. It is established on the basis that the upper limit has been reached,
The gaming machine according to the feature GE1, wherein the specific event execution means is capable of presenting information that may be beneficial to the player as the specific event.

  According to the above configuration, if a gaming machine is assumed to receive a payout of game media as a result of playing a game and expect an increase in game media, the increase / decrease number of game media will reach the upper limit increase number. It can be said that it is the ultimate goal in a highly advantageous state. In other words, even when the specific ending means is terminated regardless of the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state in the high advantageous state, if the increase / decrease number of the game medium reaches the upper limit increase number, the target of the high advantageous state There is also an idea that the player will be sufficiently satisfied even if the high advantage state is terminated without digesting the remaining number that has been notified. Therefore, as shown in the above configuration, the specific event that occurs based on the number of remaining notifications is limited to the presentation of information that can be useful to the player, and the advantage increases too much by causing such a specific event. It becomes possible not to be.

Feature GE3. The remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means corresponds to the number of games that can be executed in the specific high advantageous state,
The gaming machine according to the feature GE2, wherein the remaining number information notified by the remaining number notification means corresponds to the number of games.

  According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature GE2 is further clarified. That is, the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means corresponds to the number of remaining games in the specific highly advantageous state, and when the increase / decrease number of game media in the highly advantageous state reaches the upper limit increase number, Regardless of the number of remaining games in the specific high advantageous state, the high advantageous state is forcibly terminated. Then, the specific event executing means executes, as a specific event, presentation of information that can be beneficial to the player based on information corresponding to the number of remaining games that has been notified at the time of the forced termination. By clarifying in this way, the configuration of the feature GE1 that compensates for the inconsistency in the notification of the game and the notification of the game with a specific event, in which an increase in game media is expected as the game result of each game, Is more clearly understood.

Feature GE4. Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, specific situation grasping means capable of grasping that the specific condition is established afterwards (execution of remaining number management processing by the main controller 101) Function)
Specific situation notification means that can execute specific situation notification corresponding to the fact that the specific situation is grasped by the specific situation grasping means by the predetermined notification means (eight special notification by the main control device 101 is performed) Function to execute processing for)
The gaming machine according to any one of features GE1 to GE3, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when a specific situation in which a forced termination condition such as a specific condition is established afterwards, the specific situation notification is performed by the predetermined notification means, so that the player is in the specific situation. Can be grasped, and it can be grasped that a specific event occurs when a specific condition is established based on the remaining number information informed by the remaining number informing means. Then, for example, if the specific situation notification is performed if the specific event is more advantageous as the remaining number corresponding to the notified remaining number information is larger, the player is notified of the remaining information. It is considered that the user wants to satisfy the specific condition without digesting the remaining number corresponding to the number information as much as possible. In this way, after the specific situation is reached, the remaining number is not digested until the specific condition is satisfied, but the fun of the game until the specific condition is satisfied is added, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature GE5. With payout means (payout device 53) for paying out game media according to the result of each game,
The specific condition has a predetermined increase / decrease number which is a difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the highly advantageous state and the number of game media used in each game. It is established on the basis that the upper limit has been reached,
As a result of each game in the highly advantageous state, a first result that can be paid out of the first number of game media (for example, a strong cherry role where three medals are paid out) and more than the first number The gaming machine according to feature GE4, characterized in that a second result (for example, a bell role in which nine medals are paid out) can be paid out, wherein a second number of gaming media can be paid out.

  According to the above configuration, since the specific condition is established when the increase / decrease number of the gaming media in the highly advantageous state has reached the upper limit increase number, the specific condition is as early as possible after the specific situation notification is performed. If the game is aimed to be established, it is considered that the game is played while expecting the game result to be the second result with a large number of payouts. By doing in this way, the interest improvement of the game after becoming a specific situation is aimed at.

  Feature GE6. The specific event execution means is more advantageous to the player as it corresponds to the remaining number that the remaining number information is notified by the remaining number notification means when the high advantageous state is ended by the specific end means. The gaming machine according to Feature GE4 or Feature GE5, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration capable of causing a specific event.

  According to the above configuration, it is advantageous to establish the specific condition as soon as possible after the specific situation is reached and the specific situation notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to switch the player's feeling that he does not want to end the highly advantageous state to a completely opposite goal, such as wanting to end the highly advantageous state quickly. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the gameability in a highly advantageous state in which a forced termination condition such as a specific condition is set.

  Feature GE7. The specific event execution means is more advantageous for the player as it corresponds to the remaining number for which the remaining number information is notified by the remaining number notification means when the high advantageous state is ended by the specific ending means. The gaming machine according to Feature GE4 or Feature GE5, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration capable of causing a specific event.

  According to the above configuration, it is advantageous to delay the establishment of the specific condition as much as possible after the specific situation is notified and the specific situation is notified. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the highly advantageous state to the end, and it is possible to suitably improve the gameability in the highly advantageous state in which a forced termination condition such as a specific condition is set.

  Feature GE8. The specific event execution means, when the high advantage state is ended by the specific end means, the notification of the remaining number information by the remaining number notification means is a notification corresponding to a predetermined special number The gaming machine according to any one of the features GE4 to GE7, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration capable of causing a specific event that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where it is not.

  According to the above configuration, after the specific situation is notified and the specific situation is notified, if the specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the remaining number corresponding to the remaining number notification is a special number, it is more advantageous than the case where it is not. That is, for example, when the special number is a good number, it is an advantageous configuration if the special number is forcibly terminated in a situation where the good number is informed. In this way, in a game until the specific condition is satisfied after the specific situation is reached, the player adjusts the game operation so that the specific condition is satisfied with a special number as much as possible, or hopes for it. It is considered that the game progresses, and the gameability under the specific situation can be greatly improved.

Feature GE9. Increase means capable of executing an increase process in the specific high advantageous state based on the fact that a predetermined increase condition has been established in the specific high advantageous state (function of executing the game number addition process by the main control device 101) When,
Increase notification means (function for executing processing for addition notification by the main control device 101 and the display control device 81) capable of executing increase notification corresponding to the increase processing being performed by a predetermined notification means;
Based on the fact that the increasing process by the increasing unit has been performed, a specifying unit (for example, capable of specifying whether or not the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping unit corresponds to the establishment of the specific condition) , The function of executing the process of step S13301 by the main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features GE1 to GE8, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when an increase process as a so-called extra process for increasing the remaining number of specific high-advantage states is performed, whether or not a specific condition as a compulsory termination condition for the high-advantage state is satisfied by the increase process. Identified. In this way, if the high advantageous state is forcibly terminated, the notification based on the increase process is not performed, or the increase process is not reflected in the notification of the remaining number information by the remaining number notification means. For example, it is possible to prevent the player from delighting and so on, and it is possible to reduce the chance of occurrence of a specific event as much as possible at the time of forced termination by the specific termination means. Also, if it is assumed that a specific event will occur at the time of forced termination by the specific termination means, a specific event will occur due to the forced termination when it is specified that the specific condition is satisfied by the increase process as described above. Can also be used to create a new gameability by escaping from the gameability of simply increasing the remaining number.

  Feature GE10. The gaming machine according to the feature GE9, wherein the increase notification means is capable of adjusting an increase in the remaining number to be notified based on the increase processing in accordance with a specification result of the specification means.

  According to the above configuration, since it is possible to adjust the increase to be notified based on the increase process according to the success or failure of the forced termination condition such as the specific condition, for example, the increase until the specific condition is satisfied is notified while the specific The player will be delighted not to be informed of the increase exceeding the remaining number of conditions, or to determine the information of the increase to be notified in relation to the increase number that will cause a specific condition. It is possible to devise a way to entertain the player by making use of the increase in the remaining number that cannot be digested.

Feature GE11. The increase notification means includes
First means for executing the increase notification based on the fact that the increase process has been performed (a function of executing a process for performing an immediate notification as an additional notification by the display control device 81);
Second means for executing the increase notification based on the fact that the remaining number information notified by the remaining number notification means has become predetermined information (a process of performing an additional notification as an additional notification by the display control device 81) Function)
With
The feature GE9 is characterized in that it is possible to select which of the first means and the second means is to perform the increase notification corresponding to the current increase process based on the specification result by the specifying means. Or the gaming machine described in the feature GE10.

  According to the above configuration, so-called immediate notification that performs increase notification based on the fact that the increase processing has been performed, and performs increase notification based on the fact that the remaining number information by the remaining number notification means has become predetermined information. In a configuration with so-called post-notification, when it is specified that the specific condition is established afterwards, the immediate post-notification and post-notification are selected as the current extra notification (increase notification). By doing in this way, in a configuration where the success or failure of a specific condition may be later covered by the subsequent game situation, etc., the increase notification is postponed, so that the player is not delighted or delighted By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game using the relationship with the remaining number information.

  Feature GE12. Even if it is specified in advance that the specific condition is satisfied by the specifying means, depending on the subsequent game situation, the high advantageous state may be terminated without the specific condition being satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features GE9 to GE11.

  According to the above configuration, even if it is specified that the specific condition is satisfied in the future, the high advantageous state may end without the specific condition being satisfied depending on the game situation thereafter. Therefore, if it is set as the structure which does not perform an increase process at the time of an increase process, when a specific condition is not satisfied, a player will receive a big disadvantage. On the other hand, as described in the above-described feature GE9 and the like, the configuration is such that the increase process itself is executed only by specifying whether or not the specific condition is satisfied in the future, and the notification side adjusts the configuration. (If you have caused a specific event by the amount that you have reported, or if you did not notify, etc.), while avoiding the inconvenience that the increased processing amount disappears, the specific conditions are later Even if the game is not established, it is possible to prevent the game from being uncomfortable.

Feature GE13. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (ordinary section) and a high advantageous state (such as an attack mode in the advantageous section) where the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set,
In the high advantageous state, a predetermined end condition of the high advantageous state (for example, the remaining number of games in the attack mode is 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, Remaining number grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining payout number or increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or increase number reaches the set number);
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, normal termination means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second section display second process by the main controller 101, forced termination condition) The function of executing the process of ending the advantageous section without being established),
The remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means can be notified by a predetermined notifying means (the number of remaining games corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81). Function to execute processing for notification), and
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, when the predetermined specific condition (upper limit increase number of 2400 sheets) is satisfied, the high advantageous state is terminated and the low advantageous state is reached. And a specific ending means for shifting (a function of executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the fact that the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM has reached the upper limit increase number in the section display second process by the main control device 101),
When the high advantageous state is terminated by the specific ending unit, the remaining number grasping unit for grasping the remaining number information reported by the remaining number notifying unit (for example, executing the processing of step S14803 by the main control device 101) Function)
Specific event execution means (for example, a function for executing the seventh special notification processing by the main control device 101) capable of generating a specific event that can be beneficial to the player based on the grasp result by the notice remaining number grasping means. )When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, there are a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state ends based on the remaining number of the high advantageous state; Since the process may be terminated based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to suppress the advantage in the highly advantageous state from being extremely increased. If the specific condition is satisfied, the game is terminated regardless of the remaining number of high advantageous states. If the remaining number is notified before the specific condition is satisfied and ended, the player The remaining number that has been notified may be intentionally extinguished, and there may be an impression that it has been exploited. However, if it is configured to end the highly advantageous state after waiting for the remaining number to be informed, the significance of providing a forced termination condition such as a specific condition is not guaranteed at all, and the remaining number is reported. Even if not, it will not meet the needs of players who will be highly interested in the continuity of the highly advantageous state. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the high advantageous state is terminated when the specific condition is satisfied regardless of the presence or absence of notification, and a specific event is generated according to the remaining number of notifications. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that avoids a decrease in player's willingness to play and meets the diverse needs of the player.

  The “specific condition” may be expressed as “a specific condition set as an end condition of a predetermined state (advantageous section) including the highly advantageous state”.

  In addition, each configuration shown in the features GE1 to GE12 may be applied to the feature GE13 individually or in combination.

In this case, for example, in the feature GE2, “with payout means (payout device 53) for paying out game media in accordance with the result of each game,
The specific condition is a difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in a predetermined state (advantageous section) including the high advantage state and the number of game media used in each game. It is established based on the fact that a certain increase / decrease number reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number,
The specific event execution means may be applied after correcting the expression such as “the information that can be useful to the player as the specific event”, and the correction may be applied to the feature GE13 with another corresponding configuration. The same applies to application.

<Feature GF group>
Features GF1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing payout of the number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a first specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state (for example, an attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than other states (for example, a challenge mode) in the first specific gaming state is set. And
First transition lottery for executing the first transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state in the normal gaming state (execution of lottery for transition to the challenge mode in the first specific combination process by the main control device 101 Function)
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the first transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first specific gaming state, the first specific transition means (main control device 101) for transitioning to the first specific gaming state. Function to execute the process to shift to the challenge mode in the winning result handling process by)
A second transition lottery for executing a second transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the second specific gaming state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific combination process by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state, the second specific transition means (main control device 101) for transitioning to the second specific gaming state. A function to execute a process for shifting to the attack mode in the winning result handling process by
In the second specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the second specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes zero, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, the number management In the configuration, the first grasping means for grasping the remaining number information corresponding to the number of remaining games until the remaining payout number or the increase number reaches 0 (the payout number or the increase number reaches the set number) is established ( The number of remaining games ZG)
Second grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping execution information corresponding to the number of executed games in the first specific gaming state;
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, normal termination means for shifting the second specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (normal termination condition in the section display second process by the main control device 101) The function of executing the end processing of the advantageous section based on the fact that
Regardless of the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means based on the fact that the execution information grasped by the second grasping means has become information corresponding to a predetermined upper limit number of games, First specific ending means for shifting the first specific game state including the second specific game state to the normal game state (a function for executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101) )When,
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, the predicted increase / decrease number of the game medium that increases / decreases in the second specific gaming state before the game corresponding to the remaining number information is executed. Predictable predicting means (function for executing the remaining number management process, the first adjustment process, the second adjustment process, etc. by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a first specific game state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state is provided. Since the second specific game state that is more advantageous as the state included in the first specific game state is provided, the stage is shifted from the normal game state to the first specific game state and aimed at the second specific game state. The playability premised on the state transition which is advantageous to the game is realized, and it can be greatly used for improving the interest.

  The first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state are terminated based on the number of remaining games (remaining number information) up to the end condition of the second specific gaming state, and the number of executions of the first specific gaming state is When the maximum number of times is reached, it is set to end regardless of the remaining number of the second specific gaming state, so the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state continue to endlessly. Inconveniences such as an increase in game media exceeding the player's expectation and the difficulty of the player in ending the game are avoided.

  In addition, in the above configuration, the number of game media to be increased or decreased during the second specific game state is predicted based on the number of remaining games in the second specific game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to play a game while grasping the point of how much payout will be made in relation to the number of remaining games in the second specific gaming state, etc. It helps to improve the gameability during the state, and it is possible to suitably improve the gameability.

Feature GF2. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing payout of the number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a first specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state (for example, an attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than other states (for example, a challenge mode) in the first specific gaming state is set. And
First transition lottery for executing the first transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state in the normal gaming state (execution of lottery for transition to the challenge mode in the first specific combination process by the main control device 101 Function)
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the first transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first specific gaming state, the first specific transition means (main control device 101) for transitioning to the first specific gaming state. Function to execute the process to shift to the challenge mode in the winning result handling process by)
A second transition lottery for executing a second transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the second specific gaming state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific combination process by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state, the second specific transition means (main control device 101) for transitioning to the second specific gaming state. A function to execute a process for shifting to the attack mode in the winning result handling process by
In the second specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the second specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes zero, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, the number management In the configuration, the first grasping means for grasping the remaining number information corresponding to the number of remaining games until the remaining payout number or the increase number reaches 0 (the payout number or the increase number reaches the set number) is established ( The number of remaining games ZG)
Second grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping execution information corresponding to the number of executed games in the first specific gaming state;
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, normal termination means for shifting the second specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (normal termination condition in the section display second process by the main control device 101) The function of executing the end processing of the advantageous section based on the fact that
Regardless of the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means based on the fact that the execution information grasped by the second grasping means has become information corresponding to a predetermined upper limit number of games, First specific ending means for shifting the first specific game state including the second specific game state to the normal game state (a function for executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101) )When,
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, the predicted increase / decrease number of the game medium that increases / decreases in the second specific gaming state before the game corresponding to the remaining number information is executed. Predictable predicting means (function for executing the remaining number management process, the first adjustment process, the second adjustment process, etc. by the main control device 101);
Correction means (first adjustment process to third adjustment process by the main control device 101 and correction conditions are satisfied, based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, which can execute the correction process of the predicted increase / decrease number A function for executing the remaining number management process based on the remaining number management process and the prediction condition changing process based on the
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a first specific game state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state is provided. Since the second specific game state that is more advantageous as the state included in the first specific game state is provided, the stage is shifted from the normal game state to the first specific game state and aimed at the second specific game state. The playability premised on the state transition which is advantageous to the game is realized, and it can be greatly used for improving the interest.

  The first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state are terminated based on the number of remaining games (remaining number information) up to the end condition of the second specific gaming state, and the number of executions of the first specific gaming state is When the maximum number of times is reached, it is set to end regardless of the remaining number of the second specific gaming state, so the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state continue to endlessly. Inconveniences such as an increase in game media exceeding the player's expectation and the difficulty of the player in ending the game are avoided.

  In addition, in the above configuration, the number of game media to be increased or decreased during the second specific game state is predicted based on the number of remaining games in the second specific game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to play a game while grasping the point of how much payout will be made in relation to the number of remaining games in the second specific gaming state, etc. Helps improve gameplay during the state. However, the predicted increase / decrease number may differ greatly from the actual increase / decrease number depending on the lottery result of each game and the stop mode of each game. Therefore, by making it possible to correct the predicted increase / decrease number, it is possible to reduce the possibility of inconsistency due to a prediction error in a game using the predicted increase / decrease number, and to improve the gameability suitably. Become.

  Feature GF3. The predicting means is means that can predict the maximum value of the predicted increase / decrease number using the maximum value of the expected payout number that can be expected per game (the maximum corresponding to the maximum number in the first adjustment processing by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to Feature GF1 or Feature GF2, further comprising a function of executing a process of performing prediction using the increase / decrease number MM.

  According to the above configuration, the predicted increase / decrease number becomes the maximum value, and an event in which the actual increase / decrease number exceeds that does not occur. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to avoid the inconvenience based on the exceeding.

Feature GF4. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a predetermined payout result (for example, a bell) that is a game medium payout target by the payout means is provided,
The payout means is a specific payout result having the highest winning probability in a state where the lottery result by the lottery means stays among the predetermined payout results, and a specific position corresponding to the specific payout result at the effective position. A specific number of game media are paid out based on the fact that the pattern combination has stopped.
The predicting means can execute prediction of the predicted increase / decrease with the expected increase / decrease number of each game as the specific number (the maximum increase / decrease number MM corresponding to the number of main roles in the first adjustment process by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features GF1 to GF3, wherein the gaming machine has a function of executing a process of performing the prediction used.

  According to the above configuration, the so-called main combination is used as the specific payout result with the highest winning probability, and the prediction increase / decrease is predicted as if the main combination was won for each game. In predicting the predicted increase / decrease, for example, a configuration may be considered in which the prediction is made assuming that each game wins the payout result with the maximum increase / decrease number as in the feature GF3. While the number of increase / decrease cannot be greater than the prediction, the winning probability of the payout result, which is the maximum number, is often set relatively low, and the prediction that each game will win such a payout result is It may not be realistic. Therefore, by using the above configuration, it is possible to predict the largest increase / decrease number within a range that can actually occur, thereby increasing the usefulness of the prediction result and reducing the need for correction. It becomes possible.

Feature GF5. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a predetermined payout result (for example, a bell) to be paid out of the game medium by the payout means and a probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined payout result is higher than that in the normal gaming state. The transition result (for example, the first BB) that enables the transition to the special state that becomes higher is set,
The second expected increase / decrease number that can be expected per game during the special state is greater than the first expected increase / decrease number that can be expected per game during the second specific gaming state,
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result during the second specific gaming state, the state before transition until the transition to the special state occurs and the transition to the specific gaming state after the special state ends The gaming machine according to any one of features GF1 to GF4, wherein a third expected increase / decrease number that can be expected per game in the post-transition state until occurrence of the occurrence is smaller than the first expected increase / decrease number.

  According to the above configuration, in predicting the predicted increase / decrease number in the second specific gaming state, a special state in which the expected increase / decrease number is set is set, and the transition to such a special state is the second specific gaming state. Depending on how many times it occurs, the difference between the predicted increase and decrease and the actual increase or decrease can be large. On the other hand, if the transition result that may cause the transition to the special state is won during the second specific gaming state, the state before the transition until the transition to the special state occurs and after the end of the special state, the second specified The expected increase / decrease number in the post-transition state until the transition to the gaming state occurs is smaller than the expected increase / decrease number in the second specific gaming state. In other words, taking into account the expected increase / decrease number for the pre-transition state and the post-transition state, the increase in the special state is offset by the decrease in the pre-transition state and the post-transition state, and the prediction during the second specific gaming state The difference between the increase / decrease number and the actual increase / decrease number can be reduced.

  Feature GF6. The first total increase / decrease number of the game media that increases / decreases in the special state calculated from the average value of the number of continued games in the special state and the second expected increase / decrease number, the continuous game in the pre-transition state and the post-transition state The total of the pre-transition state calculated from the average value of the numbers and the third expected increase / decrease number and the second total increase / decrease number of game media that increase / decrease in the post-transition state, the special state, and the pre-transition state And the fourth expected increase / decrease number that can be expected per game, which is calculated from the average value of the number of continuing games in the post-transition state, is set to be the same or similar to the first expected increase / decrease number. The gaming machine described in the feature GF5.

  The above configuration is a specific configuration for more suitably achieving the effect of the feature GF5.

Feature GF7. Correction means capable of executing the correction process of the predicted increase / decrease number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (function for executing the remaining number management process based on the establishment of the correction condition by the main control device 101) With
The prediction means is configured to predict the predicted increase / decrease using an average value of expected increase / decrease that can be expected per game in a staying state,
The correction means is capable of executing the correction process based on the transition from the staying state to a different state or the occurrence of a transition event that is permitted to shift to the different state. The gaming machine according to any one of features GF1 to GF6, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the predicted increase / decrease number is predicted using the average value of the expected increase / decrease number of the staying state, and the predicted increase / decrease number is corrected based on the transition to a different state. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the effect of the feature GF1 and the like without performing a complicated process such as predicting the state transition in advance and predicting the predicted increase / decrease number.

Feature GF8. The prediction means is configured to be able to predict the predicted increase / decrease number including the first specific gaming state,
Correction means (prediction condition correction processing by the main control device 101: function for executing step S16109) capable of executing the correction processing of the predicted increase / decrease number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
Based on the transition of the gaming state to the first specific gaming state or the transition of the gaming state to the first specific gaming state, the state notification regarding the operation mode by the stop operation means can be executed. The notification by the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is started based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and the notification by the specific notification means is ended when the first specific gaming state ends. Specific gaming state notifying means (function for executing the section display first process and the section display second process by the main control device 101);
With
Any one of the features GF1 to GF7, wherein the correction unit is capable of executing the correction process based on the start of notification of the specific notification unit by the specific gaming state notification unit. Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, by providing the specific notification means, it is possible to clearly understand the presence or absence of the transition to the first specific gaming state, and at least after the start condition is satisfied, the transition to the first specific gaming state is made. It is possible to make it difficult to cause an event that the game is terminated without knowing it. Such a start condition of the specific notification means includes a state in which a mode notification related to the operation mode by the stop operation unit can be executed, and a result of winning depending on the mode notification may be different. The increase / decrease number of game media in the state can vary greatly before and after the start condition is satisfied. Therefore, if the above-described correction processing is to start notification of the specific notification means, it is only necessary to determine whether or not there is notification, so it is relatively easy to determine whether the correction processing should be performed or not. Is possible.

Feature GF9. Correction means capable of executing the correction process of the predicted increase / decrease number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (function for executing the remaining number management process based on the establishment of the correction condition by the main control device 101) With
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a predetermined payout result (for example, a bell) to be paid out of the game medium by the payout means and a probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined payout result is higher than that in the normal gaming state. The transition result (for example, the first BB) that enables the transition to the special state that becomes higher is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics GF1 to GF8, wherein the specific condition can be satisfied based on a lottery result obtained by the lottery means being the transition result.

  According to the above configuration, when the transition result winning that enables the transition to the special state where the probability of the predetermined payout result is high is achieved, the specific condition is satisfied and the process of correcting the predicted increase / decrease number is performed. In this way, when the actual increase / decrease number is greater than the predicted increase / decrease number, it is assumed that the correction process is performed. It is possible to reduce the difference between the predicted increase / decrease number and the actual increase / decrease number without using complicated processing such as performing the above.

Feature GF10. Correction means capable of executing the correction process of the predicted increase / decrease number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (function for executing the remaining number management process based on the establishment of the correction condition by the main control device 101) With
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a predetermined re-game result is set to which a re-game that can be executed without requiring a new game medium is given,
As a gaming state, a first re-gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a first RT state) and a second re-gaming state (for example, a second RT) having different probabilities that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined re-game result. State, 3rd RT state) is set,
One of the characteristics GF1 to GF9 is characterized in that the specific condition can be satisfied based on a transition from a predetermined game state to the first replay state or the second replay state. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first replaying state and the second replaying state having different probabilities of entering the predetermined replaying state are set, the first replaying state and the second replaying state are changed from the predetermined gaming state. When the transition to the gaming state occurs, that is, when the winning probability of the re-game result is different from the previous state, the specific condition is satisfied and the predicted increase / decrease number correction processing is performed. Since the re-game result allows the next game to be executed without requiring a new game medium, the probability of the re-game result greatly affects the total increase / decrease number of game media in the second specific game state. It can affect. In other words, if it is easy to win the re-game result, the total number of increase / decrease may naturally increase. Therefore, as in the above configuration, if a configuration in which correction processing is performed when an event that causes a different probability of replay results occurs, complicated processing such as taking into account fluctuations in replay results in advance is not used. However, it is possible to reduce the difference between the predicted increase / decrease number and the actual increase / decrease number.

Feature GF11. Correction means capable of executing the correction process of the predicted increase / decrease number based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the second specific game state (the remaining number of sheets based on the fact that the correction condition by the main control device 101 is satisfied Management function)
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a predetermined re-game result is set to which a re-game that can be executed without requiring a new game medium is given,
As a gaming state, a first re-gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a first RT state) and a second re-gaming state (for example, a second RT) having different probabilities that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined re-game result. State, 3rd RT state) is set,
Expected increase / decrease number that can be expected per game when the second specific game state is digested in the second replay state rather than the second specific game state is digested in the first replay state Can be many,
Any one of the characteristics GF1 to GF10, wherein the specific condition can be satisfied based on a transition from a predetermined game state to the second replay state in the second specific game state. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first replaying state and the second replaying state having different probabilities of entering the predetermined replaying state are set, the second specific gaming state is digested in the second replaying state. As a result, the expected increase / decrease number is increased, and during the second specific gaming state, games in the second re-gaming state are mainly assumed. In other words, when the second specific gaming state is shifted from the second re-gaming state to another gaming state for some reason, it is considered that a difference between the predicted increase / decrease number by the prediction means and the actual increase / decrease number may occur. . Therefore, when transitioning to these other gaming states, correction processing is performed when returning to the second re-gaming state, so that the difference between the predicted increase / decrease number and the actual increase / decrease number is reduced. It becomes possible to correct.

  In particular, in the above configuration, since the correction process is performed when returning to the second re-gaming state rather than when shifting to another gaming state, the predicted increase or decrease caused by shifting to another gaming state It is not necessary to reflect the difference between the number and the actual increase / decrease number in the correction process in advance. In other words, if the configuration is such that correction processing is performed when returning to the second replaying state, it is only necessary to make corrections for the difference that has actually occurred. With a simpler configuration, the predicted increase / decrease number and the actual increase / decrease number It is possible to reduce the difference between

Feature GF12. Correction means capable of executing the correction process of the predicted increase / decrease number based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the second specific game state (the remaining number of sheets based on the fact that the correction condition by the main control device 101 is satisfied Management function)
Any one of the characteristics GF1 to GF11, wherein the specific condition can be satisfied based on a difference between the predicted increase / decrease number by the prediction means and an actual increase / decrease number being a predetermined special number. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the above configuration, the correction process is performed when a difference between the predicted increase / decrease number and the actual increase / decrease number occurs, and it is not necessary to grasp the state transition or the like, and the difference is corrected more simply. Is possible.

Feature GF13. On the basis of the fact that a predetermined specific condition is established in the second specific gaming state, correction means capable of executing correction processing of the predicted increase / decrease number (first adjustment processing to third adjustment processing by the main control device 101). Function to be executed)
In the second specific gaming state, an increase means (main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means based on the establishment of a predetermined increase condition. With the function to execute the game number addition process)
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics GF1 to GF12, wherein the specific condition is satisfied based on the increase condition being satisfied.

  According to the above configuration, when a so-called extra game is generated in which the number of remaining games in the second specific gaming state is increased, the specific condition is satisfied and the process of correcting the predicted increase / decrease number is performed. If an increase in the second specific gaming state occurs, the increase / decrease number can be increased by that amount. By correcting the predicted increase / decrease with the addition as described above, more accurate correction processing can be performed. It is possible to implement.

  Note that, for example, in a configuration in which a lottery result is provided that allows a transition to a state in which a small role winning probability is high over a plurality of games can be digested, such as a so-called bonus state. Winning a lottery result that allows transition to the above state during a specific gaming state is a result leading to an increase in the remaining number of second specific gaming state, and winning the result is the above increase It can be included in the condition being met.

Feature GF14. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing payout of the number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a gaming state, a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (such as an attack mode in an advantageous section) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state in the normal gaming state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (the attack mode in the winning result handling process by the main control device 101) To execute the process to move to)
In the specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the specific game state (for example, the remaining number of games in the attack mode is 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, First grasping means (advantageous section remaining game) for grasping remaining number information corresponding to the number of remaining games until the remaining payout number or increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or increase number reaches the set number) Number ZG)
Second grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping execution information corresponding to the number of executed games in the predetermined gaming state (advantageous section) including the specific gaming state;
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, normal termination means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (a normal termination condition is established in the second section display processing by the main control device 101) A function for executing an advantageous section ending process based on
Regardless of the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means based on the fact that the execution information grasped by the second grasping means has become information corresponding to a predetermined upper limit number of games, First specific ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (function of executing a process for forcibly ending an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101);
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, the predicted increase / decrease number of the game medium that increases / decreases in the specific gaming state can be predicted before the game corresponding to the remaining number information is executed. Predictive means (function for executing the remaining number management process, the first adjustment process, the second adjustment process, etc. by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege grant means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is provided, and the specific game state In addition to the case of ending based on the number of remaining games (remaining number information) until the end condition of the specific gaming state is satisfied, when the number of executions of the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number of times, Because it is set to end regardless of the remaining number, the game state will continue to increase and the number of game media will exceed the designer's expectation, and it will be difficult for the player. Have been avoided disadvantage can not be the end of the technique.

  Moreover, in the above configuration, the number of game media to be increased or decreased during the specific game state is predicted based on the number of remaining games in the specific game state. With such a configuration, a game in a specific game state can be played while knowing how much is paid out in relation to the number of remaining games in the specific game state. It becomes possible to help improve the game performance, and to improve the game performance.

Feature GF15. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing payout of the number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a gaming state, a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (such as an attack mode in an advantageous section) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state in the normal gaming state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (the attack mode in the winning result handling process by the main control device 101) To execute the process to move to)
In the specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the specific game state (for example, the remaining number of games in the attack mode is 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, First grasping means (advantageous section remaining game) for grasping remaining number information corresponding to the number of remaining games until the remaining payout number or increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or increase number reaches the set number) Number ZG)
Second grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping execution information corresponding to the number of executed games in the predetermined gaming state (advantageous section) including the specific gaming state;
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, normal termination means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (a normal termination condition is established in the second section display processing by the main control device 101) A function for executing an advantageous section ending process based on
Regardless of the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means based on the fact that the execution information grasped by the second grasping means has become information corresponding to a predetermined upper limit number of games, First specific ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (function of executing a process for forcibly ending an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101);
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, the predicted increase / decrease number of the game medium that increases / decreases in the specific gaming state can be predicted before the game corresponding to the remaining number information is executed. Predictive means (function for executing the remaining number management process, the first adjustment process, the second adjustment process, etc. by the main control device 101);
Correction means (first adjustment process to third adjustment process by the main control device 101 and correction conditions are satisfied, based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, which can execute the correction process of the predicted increase / decrease number A function for executing the remaining number management process based on the remaining number management process and the prediction condition changing process based on the
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege grant means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is provided, and the specific game state In addition to the case of ending based on the number of remaining games (remaining number information) up to the ending condition of the specific gaming state, when the number of executions of the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit, the remaining number of the specific gaming state is Regardless of the end of the game, the specific game state will continue to end up, resulting in an increase in game media that surpasses the designer's expectations, or the player will soon finish the game. Inconvenience not come have been avoided.

  Moreover, in the above configuration, the number of game media to be increased or decreased during the specific game state is predicted based on the number of remaining games in the specific game state. With such a configuration, a game in a specific game state can be played while knowing how much is paid out in relation to the number of remaining games in the specific game state. It helps to improve sex. However, the predicted increase / decrease number may differ greatly from the actual increase / decrease number depending on the lottery result of each game and the stop mode of each game. Therefore, by making it possible to correct the predicted increase / decrease number, it is possible to reduce the possibility of inconsistency due to a prediction error in a game using the predicted increase / decrease number, and to improve the gameability suitably. Become.

  Note that each of the configurations indicated by the features GF1 to GF13 may be applied individually or in combination to the feature GF14 or the feature GF15.

<Feature GG group>
Features GG1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including a challenge mode) that is likely to be more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state are provided,
Transition lottery means (function for executing transition lottery to challenge mode in the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) for executing a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state in the normal gaming state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (the challenge mode in the winning result handling process by the main control device 101) To execute the process to move to)
Based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state or based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state and the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the specific notification means (eight display segment N8) Specific game state notification means for starting notification and ending notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific gaming state (execution of first section display processing and second section display processing by the main controller 101) Function)
In the above specific game state, in an advantageous determination means (omen setting processing of the CM in duplicate object officer when elected by the main control unit 101 that performs whether favorable determination causes favorable favorable event the player, step S15904 and step S16004 Function to execute processing)
With
The specific gaming state notifying unit is configured to continue the notification by the specific notifying unit at least until the advantageous event occurs when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determining unit is a response result that causes the advantageous event. And
When the result of the advantageous determination is a non-corresponding result that does not cause the advantageous event, an extension means for performing an extension process of the specific gaming state (a sign setting process at the time of winning the overlapping target in CM by the main control device 101) A gaming machine having a function of executing the processing of step S15908 and step S16008).

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege grant means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is provided, and the specific game state When the process proceeds to or after that, when the start condition is satisfied, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended, the notification by the specific notification means is also ended. In other words, if the presence / absence of the notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game state is the specific game state. For example, a game without being aware of the fact that the game has entered the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has been seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to enjoy the game in the specific game state equally.

  Moreover, in the specific gaming state, there may be an advantageous determination as to whether or not an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player is generated, and even if an advantageous event occurs, the notification by the specific notification means is continued. Thus, the effect of equalization of the game by the specific notification means is ensured while improving the gameability during the specific game state.

  However, for example, when an advantageous determination is made just before the end of a specific gaming state, if the advantageous determination is a response result that an advantageous event occurs, the notification by the specific notification means is continued, whereas the result of the advantageous determination If the result is a non-corresponding result indicating that no advantageous event occurs, the result of the player's interest such as the determination of the advantageous advantage is such that the notification by the specific notification means ends together with the end of the specific gaming state. There is a possibility that an event that becomes fully understood from the presence / absence of the notification will occur.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, when the result of the advantageous determination becomes a non-corresponding result, an advantageous event is not generated, but the extended processing of the specific gaming state is performed. As a result, even when the advantageous determination is made just before the end of the specific gaming state as described above and it becomes a non-corresponding result, the notification by the specific notification means is ended only by the extension process. Procrastination. By doing this, while obtaining the effect of equalization of the game by the specific notification means, it is possible to avoid the event that the result of the advantage determination becomes fully understood and to improve the gameability during the specific game state. It becomes possible to plan.

  In addition, after setting “a special game state (for example, attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than other states (for example, challenge mode) in the specific game state” as the state included in the specific game state. Then, the “specific gaming state notification means” is changed to “based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, or the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state, and the transition to the special gaming state is permitted. A specific gaming state notifying unit that starts notification by the specific notification unit based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition including an allowable condition and ends the notification by the specific notification unit when the specific gaming state ends. Or “based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state or the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state and the transition to the special gaming state. Notification by the specific notification means is started based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition including a notification condition for performing the winning notification of selection, and notification by the specific notification means is based on the end of the specific gaming state. May be expressed as "specific gaming state notifying means for ending".

Feature GG2. When the advantage determination is performed, the advantage notification means (a process for performing an effect in the precursor mode or a continuous effect by the display control device 81) that can execute an advantage notification corresponding to the result of the advantage determination by a predetermined notification means. Function to execute)
The extension unit, the advantageous notification based on the advantageous notification is performed by means, gaming machine according to the features GG1, wherein said is capable of executing extension processing.

  According to the above configuration, when the advantage determination is made, the advantage notification corresponding to the result is performed by the predetermined notification means, and the player who is interested in the result of the advantage determination is greatly interested in the advantage notification. It will be a thing. Then, as described in the feature GG1, even if the result of the advantageous determination is a non-corresponding result, the result of the advantageous determination is determined based on whether or not the notification of the specific notification means is continued by performing the extension process of the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the advantageous notification.

  In other words, in the configuration in which the result of the advantageous determination is performed as the advantageous notification in this way, if the result becomes fully understood from the presence / absence of the notification of the specific notification means, the degree of attention to the advantageous notification is increased. Not only is it not raised, but the advantage notification is made despite the fact that the result of the advantage determination is a non-correspondence result, and the humor of the advantage notification stands out, leading to game production There is concern about the indifference. In that regard, as described above, by applying the configuration of the feature GG1 to the configuration for performing such advantageous notification, it is possible to suitably increase the interest in game effects.

  Feature GG3. The gaming machine according to feature GG2, wherein the extension means is capable of executing the extension processing regardless of the result of the advantage determination based on the advantage notification by the advantage notification means.

  According to the above configuration, the notification by the specific notification unit is eventually continued regardless of the result of the advantageous determination. Therefore, the processing configuration of the extension process can be simplified by not referring to the determination result of the advantageous determination. Figured. On the other hand, in order to make the occurrence of advantageous notification the condition for executing the extension process, the advantage should not be unnecessarily increased as compared with the configuration in which the extension process is uniformly performed when the advantage determination is performed. Is also possible.

Feature GG4. The advantage notification means is capable of performing the advantage notification over a predetermined number of games,
The gaming machine according to Feature GG2 or Feature GG3, wherein the extension means is capable of executing the extension process according to the number of games for which the advantage notification is performed by the advantage notification means.

  According to the above configuration, since it is assumed that the advantage notification by the advantage notification means is performed over a plurality of games, the extension process is performed according to the number of games for which the advantage notification is performed. Thus, it is possible to keep the change in the advantage due to the extension process small, such as preventing the advantage of the specific gaming state from becoming excessively high. Therefore, the extended process of the specific gaming state is performed within a range in which the significance of non-winning (non-corresponding result) is ensured for the advantageous determination such as whether or not to cause an advantageous event (without increasing the advantage). It can be configured.

Feature GG5. The advantageous notification steps in the aura setting process at the time in duplicate object auditors winning CM by gripping means (main control unit 101 to know the number of remaining games of a particular game state if you started S15906, step S15907 and step S16006, step A function for executing the processing of S16007),
The extension unit, the gaming machine according to the features GG4, characterized in that is capable of executing extension processing corresponding to the number of games the number of remaining games subtracted from the predetermined number to be grasped by the grasping means.

  According to the above configuration, the extension process of the specific gaming state is performed by subtracting the remaining number of games in the specific gaming state when the advantageous notification is started from the predetermined number of games for which the advantageous notification is performed. In this way, it is possible to combine the end of the advantageous notification with the end of the specific gaming state, for example, the extended state of the specific gaming state despite the fact that the advantageous notification has ended. In addition, it is possible to eliminate an unnecessary extension process and eliminate the disadvantage that the advantage is too high when adjusting the production. In other words, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the degree of advantage becomes too high due to the demand for the effect.

Feature GG6. As the advantage notification, a first advantage notification executed over a first predetermined number of games and a second advantage notification executed over a second predetermined number of games different from the first predetermined number are set. Has been
The advantage notification means is a selection means for selecting one advantage notification from a plurality of types of advantage notifications including the first advantage notification and the second advantage notification (function of executing lottery processing of the number of precursor games by the main control device 101) ), And the advantageous notification selected by the selection means can be executed by the predetermined notification means,
One of the characteristics GG2 to GG5, wherein the extension means is capable of executing the extension process of the specific gaming state according to the number of games for which the advantageous notification selected by the selection means is performed. Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, a variety of effects can be achieved by adopting a configuration in which a plurality of types of advantageous notifications are set, and even if a plurality of types of such notifications are set, the extension process is performed with the number of games corresponding to that. Therefore, it is possible to accurately match the situation in which the advantageous notification is performed and the extension of the specific gaming state.

Feature GG7. A first control device (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means, the advantage determination means and the extension means, and a second control device (display control device 81) having the advantage notification means,
The first control device includes:
Notification execution lottery means (function to execute lottery processing of the number of precursor games by the main controller 101) as to whether or not to execute the advantageous notification;
Wherein the notification executing lottery means according possible output means outputs a drawing result to the second controller (ability to perform the main control unit 101 processes the output setting aura command by)
The gaming machine according to any one of features GG2 to GG6, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the first control device having a function directly linked to the player's profit, such as a lottery means, an advantage determination means, and an extension means, and the second control device having an effect function such as an advantage notification means are provided separately. By adopting a configuration, it is possible to share functions, prevent a local increase in processing load, and consolidate functions related to profits to the first control device side, making it easier to deal with fraudulent acts. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player or the game hall suffers a disadvantage due to the fraud. In addition, when the configuration for performing the extension process with the advantage notification as an opportunity is applied to a gaming machine having such a plurality of control devices, the first control device manages whether or not the advantage notification is executed as in the above configuration. If the information is output to the second control device, for example, the second control means does not need to be configured to output any information from the advantage notification means to the first control means. The independence between the control device and the second control device is ensured, and the extension process can be suitably realized while strengthening the anti-fraud measures.

Feature GG8. Based on the occurrence of a predetermined extension condition, a second extension means (function to execute an add-on process such as an attack mode by the main control device 101) capable of executing the extension process (add-on) of the specific gaming state. Prepared,
When the extension process by the second extension means is performed, while the notification of the said extension processing is performed (plus notification) is executed, if the extending process by the extension means is carried out, that the extension process is performed The gaming machine according to any one of the features GG1 to GG7, wherein the notification is not executed.

  According to the above configuration, when the extension process by the second extension unit is performed, a so-called additional notification is generated as a notification to that effect. On the premise of such a configuration, when extension processing by the extension means based on the above-described advantage determination is performed, no additional notification is generated. By doing in this way, it is possible to give a strong impression that the notification of the specific notification means is continued based on the fact that the result of the advantageous determination is a result of causing an advantageous event. It becomes.

Feature GG9. As the specific gaming state, a high advantageous specific gaming state (first challenge mode) and a low advantageous specific gaming state (second challenge mode) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set,
Based on the fact that the extension process is performed by the extension means, the means for setting the specific gaming state for the extension to the low advantageous specific gaming state (the process of step S16008 by the main control device 101 is executed) The gaming machine according to any one of features GG1 to GG8, characterized in that the game machine has a function).

  According to the above configuration, the advantage of the player is unnecessarily increased in order to eliminate the inconvenience in the performance such as the extension process by changing the extension of the specific game state based on the extension process to the low advantage specific game state. It is possible to avoid this.

  Feature GG10. The gaming machine according to Feature GG9, wherein an advantage of the low advantageous specific gaming state is equal to or similar to an advantage of the normal gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to postpone the notification end timing of the specific notification unit without substantially increasing the advantage.

Feature GG11. As the specific gaming state, a high advantageous specific gaming state (such as an attack mode) and a low advantageous specific gaming state (challenge mode) are set so that the advantage in the specific gaming state is relatively high or low,
The low Advantageously specific gaming state, the a state winning probability or the execution frequency of migration lottery to high advantageous specific gaming state is higher than the normal game state,
Examples lottery result by the lottery unit, Migrating winning probability of a predetermined payout result payout is performed a predetermined number of game media as the benefits of the different transition state and the normal game state is acceptable results (first 1BB, 2nd BB) is set,
Furthermore, as a lottery result by the lottery means, a predetermined result that overlaps with the transition result (for example, strong cherry duplication 1) and a specific result that overlaps with the transition result are duplicated with the transition result. Special results (special roles) including non-overlapping results (for example, strong cherries) that are not won are set,
Transition means (main control device) for transitioning the gaming state to the transition state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the transition picture combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. 101 for executing bonus state processing by 101),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the advantage determination unit is configured to perform the determination as to whether the transition result is included as the special result as the advantage determination.
The extension means is capable of executing the extension process based on the result of the determination by the advantage determination means in the low advantage specific gaming state that the determination result does not include the transition result. The gaming machine according to any one of features GG1 to GG10, characterized by:

  According to the above configuration, the high advantage specific game state having a relatively high advantage in the specific game state, and the low probability that the winning probability and execution frequency of the transition lottery to the high advantage specific game state are higher than those in the normal game state. In a configuration in which a specific gaming state (so-called chance zone) is provided, the transition from the normal gaming state to the low advantageous specific gaming state and the transition from the low advantageous specific gaming state to the high advantageous specific gaming state is performed as a game flow. It is assumed that a route occurs. In such a configuration, the player is interested in how to make the transition to the high advantageous specific gaming state during the low advantageous specific gaming state, the transition state in the low advantageous specific gaming state. The transition result may function as a priming to the high advantageous specific gaming state, and in the low advantageous specific gaming state, the transition result that the transition to the transition state occurs together with the transition to the high advantageous specific gaming state. That is, it is considered that there is a great expectation that an advantageous determination is made as a special result, and the degree of attention to the production when such an advantageous determination is made is increased. However, even in the low advantageous specific gaming state, even if an advantageous determination is made as a special result, there is a possibility that the result of the advantageous determination becomes completely understood depending on whether or not the notification by the specific notification means is continued. Therefore, when the advantage determination is performed during the low advantageous specific gaming state and the result is a result not including the transition result, the low advantageous specific gaming state is extended to extend the notification of the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to suitably avoid the result being completely understood by the notification.

Feature GG12. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As gaming state, a normal gaming state and a prone specific gaming state becomes advantageous for the player than the normal game state (advantageous section including Challenge mode, etc.) is provided,
Transition lottery means (function for executing transition lottery to challenge mode in the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) for executing a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state in the normal gaming state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (the challenge mode in the winning result handling process by the main control device 101) To execute the process to move to)
Based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state or based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state and the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the specific notification means (eight display segment N8) Specific game state notification means for starting notification and ending notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific gaming state (execution of first section display processing and second section display processing by the main controller 101) Function)
In the specific game state, the aura setting process advantageous determination means (CM in duplicate object officer when elected by the main control device 101 for whether the advantageous determination causes favorable favorable event the player, step S15904 or step The function of executing the processing of S16004),
With
The specific gaming state notifying unit is configured to continue the notification by the specific notifying unit at least until the advantageous event occurs when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determining unit is a response result that causes the advantageous event. And
When the result of the advantageous determination is a non-corresponding result that does not cause the advantageous event, the extension means (in the CM by the main control device 101) performs an extension process for extending the notification continuation game of the specific notification means by a predetermined number of games. in aura setting process at the time of overlapping target combination winning, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing in step S15908 and step S16008).

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege grant means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is provided, and the specific game state When the process proceeds to or after that, when the start condition is satisfied, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended, the notification by the specific notification means is also ended. In other words, if the presence / absence of the notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game state is the specific game state. For example, a game without being aware of the fact that the game has entered the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has been seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to enjoy the game in the specific game state equally.

  Moreover, in the specific gaming state, there may be an advantageous determination as to whether or not an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player is generated, and even if an advantageous event occurs, the notification by the specific notification means is continued. Thus, the effect of equalization of the game by the specific notification means is ensured while improving the gameability during the specific game state.

  However, for example, when an advantageous determination is made just before the end of a specific gaming state, if the advantageous determination is a response result that an advantageous event occurs, the notification by the specific notification means is continued, but the advantageous determination is advantageous. If the result is a non-corresponding result that an event does not occur, the result of the player's interest, such as the preferential judgment of the player, such as the notification by the specific notification means ends with the end of the specific gaming state, the notification of the specific notification means There may be an event that becomes fully understood from the presence or absence of continuation.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, when the result of the advantageous determination is a non-corresponding result, an advantageous event is not generated, but an extension process is performed to extend the notification continuation game of the specific notification means by a predetermined number of games. As a result, even when the advantageous determination is made just before the end of the specific gaming state as described above and it becomes a non-corresponding result, the notification by the specific notification means is ended only by the extension process. Procrastination. By doing this, while obtaining the effect of equalization of the game by the specific notification means, it is possible to avoid the event that the result of the advantage determination becomes fully understood and to improve the gameability during the specific game state. It becomes possible to plan.

  In addition, after setting “a special game state (for example, attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than other states (for example, challenge mode) in the specific game state” as the state included in the specific game state. Then, the “specific gaming state notification means” is changed to “based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, or the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state, and the transition to the special gaming state is permitted. A specific gaming state notifying unit that starts notification by the specific notification unit based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition including an allowable condition and ends the notification by the specific notification unit when the specific gaming state ends. Or “based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state or the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state and the transition to the special gaming state. Notification by the specific notification means is started based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition including a notification condition for performing the winning notification of selection, and notification by the specific notification means is based on the end of the specific gaming state. May be expressed as "specific gaming state notifying means for ending".

  In addition, you may apply each structure shown by the characteristics GG1 thru | or GG11 individually or in combination to the said characteristic GG12.

<Characteristic GH group>
Features GH1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) that is likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided.
In the normal game state, transition selecting means to perform the migration lottery whether to shift the to a particular game state (the ability to perform the migration lottery Challenge mode or the attack mode in the first particular combination processing by the main control unit 101) When,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (the challenge mode in the winning result handling process by the main control device 101) And a function to execute the process of shifting to attack mode),
Based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition for the specific gaming state, normal termination means for shifting from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (the normal termination condition is established in the second section display process by the main control device 101) A function to execute an advantageous section end process based on
Based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state or based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state and the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the specific notification means (eight display segment N8) Specific game state notification means for starting notification and ending notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific gaming state (execution of first section display processing and second section display processing by the main controller 101) Function)
With
As the specific game state, and advantageously degree is set to be relatively high and low and high advantageous specific gaming state (first challenge mode) and the low advantageous specific game state (second challenge mode) for the player ,
In the normal gaming state and the low advantageous specific gaming state, the advantage for the player is the same or similar,
Based on the establishment of a predetermined first extension condition (addition condition), first extension means (execution of challenge mode addition processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing extension processing of the high advantageous specific gaming state is executed. Function)
Based on the fact that a second extension condition (affirmed in step S16006 by the main controller 101) different from the first extension condition is satisfied, a second process capable of executing the extension process of the low advantageous specific gaming state is executed. Extension means (function to execute the process of step S16008 by the main control apparatus 101);
With
The specific gaming state notifying means is
In the high advantageous specific gaming state extended by the first extension means, it is possible to continue the notification by the specific notification means,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to continue notification by the specific notification means in the low advantageous specific game state extended by the second extension means.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege grant means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is provided, and the specific game state When the process proceeds to or after that, when the start condition is satisfied, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended, the notification by the specific notification means is also ended. In other words, if the presence / absence of the notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game state is the specific game state. For example, a game without being aware of the fact that the game has entered the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has been seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to enjoy the game in the specific game state equally.

  However, by prescribing the notification by the specific notification means as described above, there may be a problem in the game such as, for example, enjoying the presence or absence of the specific game state. Specifically, since the notification by the specific notification unit is terminated when the specific notification unit ends, even if an effect such as whether or not the specific gaming state is continued is eventually rounded by the notification of the specific notification unit. It becomes understandable. However, if the specific game state is continued as long as the performance is performed, there is a possibility that the advantage of the specific game state may become unnecessarily high.

  Therefore, after setting the high advantageous specific gaming state and the low advantageous specific gaming state so that the advantage for the player is relatively high and low as the specific gaming state, the advantage of the low advantageous specific gaming state is usually set By setting the same level as the gaming state and extending the high advantageous specific gaming state and extending the low advantageous specific gaming state, it is possible to notify the specific notification means regardless of which is extended. Without ending, it is possible to continue (extend) the specific game state while preventing the advantage of the specific game state from being excessively increased.

  Note that “the normal gaming state and the low advantageous specific gaming state have the same or similar advantage for the player” means that “the expected number of bonuses that can be expected per game in the normal gaming state” (The net increase number) and the expected number of bonuses that can be expected per game in the low advantageous specific gaming state may be the same or similar.

  Feature GH2. The gaming machine according to claim GH1, wherein the specific gaming state is the low advantageous specific gaming state in which the extension process by the second extending means is performed, and the other is the high advantageous specific gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, the game played in the low advantageous specific gaming state becomes more limited, and without impairing the impression that the specific gaming state is advantageous for the player (high advantageous specific gaming state) The effect of extending the game in which the notification by the specific notification means is performed while preventing the advantage from being excessively increased can be expected.

  Feature GH3. Based on the fact that the second extension condition is satisfied in the high advantageous specific gaming state, the second extending means executes the low advantageous specific gaming state from the high advantageous specific gaming state as the extension processing of the low advantageous specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature GH2, wherein the extension process is executed so as to shift to a state.

  The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature GH2.

Feature GH4. The second extension means determines whether or not the second extension condition is satisfied based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (duplication target combination) determined in advance. (The function of executing the process of step S16006 by the main controller 101),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in a situation where the remaining number of games in the highly advantageous specific gaming state is less than a predetermined number (predictor game number), When it is possible to determine that the extension condition is satisfied, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in a situation where the number of remaining games in the highly advantageous specific game state is equal to or greater than the specific number, the second extension condition The gaming machine according to the feature GH2 or the feature GH3, wherein it is determined that is not established.

  According to the above configuration, when a special result is won at the final stage when the number of remaining games in the high advantageous specific gaming state is less than the specific number, the extension processing of the low advantageous specific gaming state can be performed, while the number of remaining games is equal to or more than the specific number. In such a case, even if the special result is won, the extension process of the low advantageous specific game state is not performed. In this way, when a special result is won in a situation where there are still a number of remaining games in the highly advantageous specific gaming state, while having a relatively simple configuration such as performing an extension process according to the result of the game In addition, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the low advantageous specific gaming state is unintentionally set. In other words, in a configuration in which the extension process can be executed based on the special result winning, without using a complicated configuration such as making the winning probability of winning the special result different according to the number of remaining games, It becomes possible to perform the extension process accurately at the end stage.

Feature GH5. A continuous production execution means (a function for executing a continuous production setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a continuous production that can be continued over a plurality of games by a predetermined production means;
Said second extension unit, the continuous presentation by the continuous presentation execution means, wherein when executed across a high advantageous End Game particular game state, said low advantageously particular game as the second extension condition is satisfied 5. The gaming machine according to any one of features GH1 to GH4, characterized in that state extension processing can be executed.

  According to the above configuration, when the continuous production by the continuous production execution means is executed across the end game of the high advantageous specific gaming state, the low advantageous specific gaming state is extended. As a result, although the high advantageous specific gaming state shifts to the low advantageous specific gaming state, the continuous performance itself can be executed without straddling the end game of the specific gaming state. As a result, for example, in the case where the continuous effect is an effect related to the continuity of the specific game state, the notification of the specific notification means ends when the specific game state ends, and there is no continuous effect due to the end of the notification. It becomes possible to avoid being meaningful.

Feature GH6. Run the remaining number of games, the processes of steps S16007 by the difference number of games monitor which monitors the speed difference game with the number continuing game of the continuous effects by continuous demonstration execution unit (main controller 101 of the high advantageous specific gaming state Function)
Said second extension unit, the so said only the speed difference game to be grasped by the difference game number grasping unit low advantageous specific gaming state is carried out after the high advantageous specific gaming state, the extension of the lower advantageous specific gaming state The gaming machine according to Feature GH5, wherein the process is executable.

  According to the above configuration, the low advantageous specific gaming state is added by the amount of continuous performance executed after the high advantageous specific gaming state ends, and the specific gaming state is unduly extended for a long time, or vice versa. Even if the extension process is performed, it is possible to avoid an event in which the specific gaming state ends before the continuous performance.

Feature GH7. The extension processing of the specific game mode based on the fact to be performed at a predetermined notification means executable extension notifying execution means an extension notification corresponding to the extension processing (a display control unit 81 for performing plus notification effect by Processing function), and
When the extension process of the high advantage specific game state is performed by the first extension means, the extension notice execution means allows the extension notice to be executed, while the second extension means allows the low advantage specific game. When the state extension process is performed, the extension notification execution means includes a means for restricting the execution of the extension notification (a function for executing the additional notification non-generation processing by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features GH1 to GH6.

  According to the above configuration, it is assumed that a so-called additional notification effect is generated as an extension notification corresponding to the extension processing being performed, and when the highly advantageous specific gaming state extension processing is performed, the additional notification is performed. In the event that an effect is generated, but when an extension process for a low advantageous specific gaming state is performed, an additional notification effect is not generated, so that the player understands that an extension process for the low advantageous specific gaming state has been performed. Hateful. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to give the impression that the event that the notification of the specific notification means is continued is due to the fact that the number of remaining games in the high advantageous specific game state still exists, The effect of postponing the end of notification by the specific notification means can be more suitably exhibited.

<Feature GI group>
Features GI1. As gaming state, and acquisition expectations of game media is relatively high or low and low expected state (normal period) and a high expected state (advantageously interval) is set,
Grasping means for grasping the number of executions in the high expectation state (advantageous section game number AG);
Specific end means (main control device) for ending the high expectation state and shifting to the low expectation state based on the execution number grasped by the grasping means becoming a predetermined upper limit number (1500) 101 in the section display second process by 101, a function of executing the process of ending the advantageous section when the forced termination condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine comprising
As the high expectation state, the first high expectation state (ART such as attack mode) and the second high expectation state (bonus state) in which an increase in game media can be expected in each game, and a decrease in game media in each game can be expected. The third high expectation state (bonus carryover state, return state that occurs during the attack mode) is set,
When the transition from the first high expectation state to the second high expectation state occurs, the third high expectation state can be set between the first high expectation state and the second high expectation state Possible first setting means (function of executing processing for setting the bonus carryover state by the main control device 101);
When the transition from the second high expectation state to the first high expectation state occurs, the third high expectation state can be set between the second high expectation state and the first high expectation state. Possible second setting means (function of executing processing for setting the gaming state after the bonus state by the main control device 101 to the normal gaming state);
Whether the specific event in which the number of executions grasped by the grasping means becomes the upper limit number during the third high expectation state set by the second setting means is determined by the first setting means by the first setting means. 3 Specifying means (function to execute the process of step S15810 by the main control device 101) that can be specified when setting the high expectation state;
When it is specified that the specific event occurs by the specifying means, the second continuation number (E) of the third high expectation state set by the second setting means is set by the first setting means. 3 and the first continuation number of high expected state third setting means capable of executing an addition process for adding the (B) (a function of executing the processing in step S15812 by the main control unit 101),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, there are a high expectation state and a low expectation state where the game media acquisition expectation is relatively high, and the high expectation state may be forcibly terminated when the number of executions reaches the upper limit number. For this reason, it is suppressed that the advantage in the high expectation state is extremely increased. In the high expectation state, a first high expectation state and a second high expectation state in which game media can increase in each game, and a third high expectation state in which game media can decrease in each game are set. When transitioning from the first high expectation state to the second high expectation state, the third high expectation state is interposed between the first high expectation state and the second high expectation state, and further, the second high expectation state to the first high expectation state When the transition to the state occurs, the third highly advantageous state can be interposed between the second highly expected state and the first highly expected state. In such a configuration, when the number of executions reaches the upper limit during the third high expectation state and the high expectation state is terminated in a situation where the number of game media in the third high expectation state may decrease, the high expectation state Eventually, however, the number of game media will be reduced and the game will end at the bottom.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, in particular, assuming a configuration in which a transition such as the first high expectation state → the third high expectation state → the second high expectation state → the third high expectation state → the first high expectation state occurs, The configuration is such that the number of continuations in the third high expectation state is added to the number of continuations in the third high expectation state on the front side, and the position (timing) where the third high expectation state can exist is made different. By doing so, what was supposed to end the high expectation state by finally reducing the game media is changed so that the high expectation state ends without reducing the game media, and the increase in the number of game media The satisfaction with the high expectation state can be prevented from being impaired without making the difference. In this way, by performing the forced termination while using the impression received by the player at the time of forced termination, the effect of suppressing the rise in the advantage due to the forced termination of the high expectation state and the player's It is possible to achieve both an effect that satisfies satisfaction.

  In the above configuration, “remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number until the predetermined end condition of the high expectation state is satisfied (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) and remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means” Based on the number, normal end means for ending the high expectation state and shifting to the low expectation state (in the second section display processing by the main controller 101, the advantageous section is terminated without the forced termination condition being satisfied. And a function to execute the processing), and the “specific end means” is changed to “the remaining number based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number”. Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the number grasping means, it may be expressed as “specific end means for ending the high expectation state and shifting to the low expectation state”.

Feature GI2. When the addition processing by the third setting unit is not performed, the high expectation state is terminated by the specific termination unit in the third high expectation state between the second high expectation state and the first high expectation state. with the third second monitor which monitors the continuous number of the high expected state (function executing the processing in step S15811 by the main control unit 101) when the,
The gaming machine according to Feature GI1, wherein the third setting unit can execute the addition process using the continuation number grasped by the second grasping unit as the second continuation number.

  According to the above configuration, when the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state is digested with the first continuation number and the second continuation number, the high expectation state is forcibly terminated in the end game of the second high expectation state. . In this way, by setting the forced end to the end of the second high expectation state in which an increase in game media can be expected, the player's satisfaction is at its peak, and the player is forced to end. The impression will be better.

  Feature GI3. The third high expectation state set by the second setting means is a transition to the first high expectation state based on the fact that the game lottery result is a predetermined specific result (first promotion replay). The gaming machine according to the feature GI1 or the feature GI2, wherein the game machine is allowed.

  According to the above configuration, the third high expectation state existing after the second high expectation state is based on the premise that the continuation number changes depending on the lottery result on the gaming machine side, and the player The range that can be involved in the number is limited. Therefore, for example, even if the operation mode is devised, there is a high possibility that the high expectation state is forcibly terminated in a situation where game media is reduced. By applying the above-described feature GI1 to such a configuration, it is possible to more suitably resolve the dissatisfaction that cannot be resolved no matter how hard the player works.

Feature GI4. The first setting means sets the third high expectation state based on the fact that the game lottery result becomes a transition result (first BB, second BB) corresponding to the transition to the second high expectation state. Is possible,
Based on the fact that the game lottery result is the transition result and the player performs a transition operation corresponding to the transition result, the second transition means for transitioning to the second high expectation state (bonus by the main controller 101) State processing function),
If the game lottery result is the transition result and the transition to the second high expectation state does not occur by the second transition means in the game, the transition result transitions to the second high expectation state. Reservation means (function to execute processing to set the carry-over state by the main control device 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features GI1 to GI3, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the transition result that is the trigger for setting the third high expectation state on the front side is a result that is retained until the transition to the second high expectation state occurs, and the transition to the second high expectation state is a player Is caused by performing the transition operation, the number of games until the transition to the second high expectation state differs depending on whether or not the player performs the transition operation in the third high expectation state. . By ending the third high expectation state as early as possible and shifting to the second high expectation state, the number of game media decreases in the third high expectation state, so the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state In the expected state, the number of reductions changes depending on the player's operation, and as a result, the number of game media when the high expectation state is forcibly terminated can also change. In this way, on the gaming machine side, the number of game media may be increased or decreased depending on the player's skill, while not increasing or decreasing the number of game media at the time of forced termination when setting such that it is not forcibly terminated while decreasing. By adopting a configuration that can occur, it is possible to stimulate the player's willingness to play.

  In addition, the said structure can also be expressed as "The said 3rd highly anticipated state set by the said 1st setting means changes the number of continuations by a player's game operation." In this expression, the above-mentioned feature GI3 is expressed as “the third high expectation state set by the second setting means does not change or hardly changes depending on the player's game operation”.

Feature GI5. The third high expectation state set by the second setting means is a transition to the second high expectation state based on the fact that the game lottery result is a predetermined specific result (first promotion replay). Is an acceptable configuration,
Based on the fact that the game lottery result is the specific result and the player performs a specific operation corresponding to the specific result, the first transition means (RT by the main control device 101) for shifting to the first high expectation state. State processing function),
If the game lottery result is the specific result, and the game does not shift to the first high expectation state by the first transition means, the specific result can be erased (in the main control device 101). A function to execute a process of clearing the winning flag at the end of each game),
The gaming machine according to feature GI4, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, since the transition result winning is reserved in the third high expectation state on the front side, whether or not to perform the transition operation corresponding to the transition result greatly affects the number of continuations of the third high expectation state. On the other hand, in the third high expectation state on the back side of the second high expectation state, the specific result winning is not retained, so that the game that wins the specific result in the third high expectation state is largely related to the continuation number. Will do. With such a configuration, there is room for technical intervention by the player in the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state, and conversely by the player in the third high expectation state after the second high expectation state. It is clarified that there is little room for technical intervention. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property that further intensifies the player's willingness to play the game before the second high expectation state.

  Feature GI6. The high expectation state when the high expectation state is terminated by the specific termination means in the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state by performing the addition processing by the third setting means The total number of game media that can be expected at is after the first branch point where the first continuation number of games is executed, and the first continuation number and the second continuation number of games are executed. The gaming machine according to Feature GI4 or Feature GI5, which does not change or hardly changes up to two branch points.

  According to the above configuration, while leaving room for technical intervention such that the decrease in the number of game media can be reduced by reducing the number of continuations of the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state as much as possible. In the third high expectation state that is added by the third setting means until the game of the first continuation number and the second continuation number is executed after the game of one continuation number is executed, it is as early as possible Even if the transition to the second high expectation state is successful, the total number of acquisitions at the time of forced termination of the high expectation state is difficult to change. By doing so, it is possible to secure the significance of adding the second continuation number by the third setting means while stir up the game motivation in the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state.

Feature GI7. In the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state, specific effect execution means (by the main control device 101 and the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific effect (a precursor effect, a continuous effect) by a predetermined effect means. With the function to execute the processing for performing the sign mode)
The gaming machine according to the feature GI6, wherein the specific effect executing means can vary the effect mode of the specific effect before and after the first branch point.

  According to the said structure, the player can grasp | ascertain clearly that the 1st branch point was reached by the change of the production | presentation aspect of a specific production. In this way, the player can understand that it does not make much sense to make an early transition in subsequent games, and can switch feelings such as enjoying a specific performance. This facilitates an event that the game medium is forcibly terminated while the game medium is increasing, that is, the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state is set as the first continuation number and the second continuation number. It becomes possible to make it easy to digest until it becomes.

Feature GI8. In the third high expectation state until the transition from the first high expectation state to the second high expectation state occurs, the first setting means determines the number of effect continuations produced by the predetermined effect means. Set as the first continuation number,
The third setting means is adapted to allow the said effect continuation number to said first number of continuous second ongoing count is set as the number obtained by adding,
The gaming machine according to any one of features GI1 to GI7, wherein the transition to the second high expectation state in the third high expectation state can occur regardless of the number of performance continuations.

  According to the above configuration, the number of continuations set by the first setting means or the third setting means when the third high expectation state is present when the transition from the second high expectation state to the first high expectation state occurs. Is the number of continuations in production, and the transition to the second high expectation state can occur regardless of the set number of continuations. By doing so, an event that compells the digestion of the set number of continuations in the third high expectation state does not occur, and the continuation number of the production is made simple while ensuring the degree of freedom of the game. With this configuration, the image at the time of forcible termination can be greatly varied in relation to the actual increase / decrease in game media.

Feature GI9. As gaming state, and acquisition expectations of game media is relatively high or low and low expected state (normal period) and a high expected state (advantageously interval) is set,
Grasping means for grasping the number of executions in the high expectation state (advantageous section game number AG);
Specific end means (main control device) for ending the high expectation state and shifting to the low expectation state based on the execution number grasped by the grasping means becoming a predetermined upper limit number (1500) 101 in the section display second process by 101, a function of executing the process of ending the advantageous section when the forced termination condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine comprising
As the high expectation state, the first high expectation state (ART such as attack mode) and the second high expectation state (bonus state) in which an increase in game media can be expected in each game, and a decrease in game media in each game can be expected. The third high expectation state (bonus carryover state, return state that occurs during the attack mode) is set,
When the transition from the first high expectation state to the second high expectation state occurs, the third high expectation state can be set between the first high expectation state and the second high expectation state Possible first setting means (function of executing processing for setting the bonus carryover state by the main control device 101);
When the transition from the second high expectation state to the first high expectation state occurs, the third high expectation state can be set between the second high expectation state and the first high expectation state. Possible second setting means (function of executing processing for setting the gaming state after the bonus state by the main control device 101 to the normal gaming state);
Whether the specific event in which the number of executions grasped by the grasping means becomes the upper limit number during the third high expectation state set by the second setting means is determined by the first setting means by the first setting means. 3 Specifying means (function to execute the process of step S15810 by the main control device 101) that can be specified when setting the high expectation state;
A third setting unit (function of executing the process of step S15812 by the main control device 101) capable of executing a predetermined specific process when the specific unit specifies that the specific event occurs;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, there are a high expectation state and a low expectation state where the game media acquisition expectation is relatively high, and the high expectation state may be forcibly terminated when the number of executions reaches the upper limit number. For this reason, it is suppressed that the advantage in the high expectation state is extremely increased. In the high expectation state, a first high expectation state and a second high expectation state in which game media can increase in each game, and a third high expectation state in which game media can decrease in each game are set. When transitioning from the first high expectation state to the second high expectation state, the third high expectation state is interposed between the first high expectation state and the second high expectation state, and further, the second high expectation state to the first high expectation state When the transition to the state occurs, the third highly advantageous state can be interposed between the second highly expected state and the first highly expected state. In such a configuration, in a situation where the number of game media in the third high expectation state may decrease, if the number of executions reaches a specific number during the third high expectation state, Eventually, the number of game media will be reduced and the game will end in the bottom.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, a specific event that causes such a bottom sag is specified in advance, and a specific process based on the specified result can be executed, so that the above event that causes a bottom sag is preferably eliminated. It is possible to compensate for having become a butt sag.

<Feature GJ group>
Feature GJ1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Processing function), and
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing payout of the number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) that is likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided,
Transition lottery means (function for executing transition lottery to challenge mode in the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) for executing a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state in the normal gaming state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (the challenge mode in the winning result handling process by the main control device 101) And a function to execute the process of shifting to attack mode),
Based on the fact that the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state and a predetermined start condition is established, the notification during the state is started by turning on the specific notification means (eight display segment N8), and the specific Based on the completion of the gaming state, the specific notification means is turned off to turn off the specific gaming state notification means (from the first display section display to the fourth display section display by the main control device 101). Function to execute)
First grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions of the specific gaming state;
Based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number, specific ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (section by the main controller 101) A function of executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the display second process);
Second grasping means (number of pre-start games MG) for grasping the number of executions of the prior state (preliminary section) until the start condition is satisfied after the transition to the specific game state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege grant means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is provided, and the specific game state When the start condition is satisfied and the start condition is satisfied, the state notification is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended, the state notification is ended. Therefore, the player can clearly see from the state notification that the privilege is easily obtained by the state notification. For example, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a disadvantage that the game is terminated without knowing that the situation has occurred. Moreover, the specific game state is configured to be forcibly terminated when the number of executions reaches the upper limit number, and the advantage of the specific game state is not increased too much, and the balance of the game is optimized.

  However, as described above, after the transition to the specific gaming state, since the state notification is started after the start condition is established, in the prior state before the state notification is started, After the start of the state notification and the player who reaches the upper limit immediately after the state notification is started, without the player knowing how many games remain until the upper limit Inequalities may arise in the interests of players who can execute a considerable number of games as a specific gaming state.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, since the number of games in the previous state until the start condition is satisfied after the transition to the specific gaming state is established, the upper limit number is notified to the player by notifying the grasping result or the like. The number of games up to can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to ensure game equality.

  In the above configuration, “remaining number grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the predetermined end condition of the specific gaming state is satisfied, and remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means” Based on the number, normal termination means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (in the second section display second process by the main control device 101, a process of terminating the advantageous section without the forced termination condition being satisfied is executed. Function)), and the “specific end means” is determined based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number. Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the means, it may be expressed as “specific end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state”.

  In addition, “as a state included in the specific game state, a special game state (for example, attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than other states in the specific game state (for example, challenge mode) is set”. The “specific game state notification means” is identified based on the fact that a predetermined start condition is satisfied, including an allowable condition that the game state shifts to the specific game state and the transition to the special game state is allowed. The notification by the notification means is started, and the specific gaming state notification means for ending the notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific gaming state or the “game state is shifted to the specific gaming state, Notification by the specific notification means is started based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition including a notification condition in which a winning notification is made that the winning lottery for the game state is won. It may be expressed as a specific game state informing means "to end the notification by the specific notification means on the basis that the specific game state is completed.

  Feature GJ2. In the prior state, the number of game media used in each game is likely to be larger than the number of game media paid out in accordance with the game result of each game in the prior state. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, in the prior state until the start condition is satisfied even after the transition to the specific gaming state, if the used number is subtracted from the number of game media paid out in each game, a negative value is obtained. Becomes a negative state. Then, in the prior state, the notification of the specific notification means by the specific game state notification means is not started, and the net increase is also negative, so that the start condition is subsequently satisfied and the mode notification is generated. Even if it becomes, the player is likely to end the game without knowing it. In that respect, since the number of games in the prior state until the start condition is satisfied is grasped as in the feature GJ1, if the grasp result is displayed, the player can recognize the specific gaming state. It is also possible to grasp that the transition to That is, it is possible to grasp the pre-state as well as the advantage after the start condition is established, and it is possible to complement the relationship between the specific game state and the specific game state notification means well.

  Feature GJ3. The predetermined start condition includes an increasing condition that the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the specific game state is more likely to be greater than the number of game media used in each game. The gaming machine according to feature GJ1 or feature GJ2, which is included.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined start condition includes an increase condition in which the so-called net increase is positive when the use number is subtracted from the number of game media paid out in each game. Because of such a configuration, notification by the specific notification means is performed in a situation where substantial benefits can be obtained in the specific gaming state, and the relationship between the specific gaming state and the notification of the specific notification means is clarified. The

  On the other hand, there are many cases where the remaining number and the number of executions after the start condition is established are notified, such as notification of the remaining number of games in an advantageous state, and such notification includes a section where the net increase is negative. Therefore, since it is easy for the player to feel that the remaining number and the number of executions have been exploited by the minus section, the notice of the remaining number of games in the advantageous state includes the minus section. It is common not to do so, and if so, the starting condition is considered to include an increasing condition.

  However, with such a configuration, the relationship with the specific ending means that reaches the upper limit and is forcibly terminated cannot be grasped from the above notification, and even if it is notified, the notification Since it is considered that the start condition is satisfied, there is no reason to know them in the prior state. Therefore, by applying the invention of the feature GJ1 to such a gaming machine, it becomes possible to play a game while understanding information such as profits remaining in the prior state.

Feature GJ4. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
The predetermined start condition includes a notification condition that enables the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit to be executed,
The specific gaming state notifying means starts notification by the specific notifying means, assuming that the start condition is satisfied even when the notification condition and the increase condition are satisfied in a different game. A gaming machine described in the feature GJ3.

  According to the above-described configuration, the mode notification in which the winning results may be different is performed, the notification condition in which the mode notification may be executed is included in the notification start condition of the specific notification unit, and a plurality of conditions such as the notification condition and the start condition Is included in the start condition, the success or failure of the notification start condition is alleviated, and diversification of the game is expected. And because it is such a configuration, the number of executions in the prior state is likely to change, for example, because a situation in which an increase in gaming media cannot be expected despite the fact that mode notification has been started has continued for a long time Also, an event that the benefits obtained from establishment of the start condition to the upper limit is reduced is likely to occur.

  The above-described configuration is as follows: “The specific gaming state notification means starts notification by the specific notification means that the start condition is satisfied even if the increase condition is satisfied after the notification condition is satisfied. Then, after the increase condition is satisfied, even if the notification condition is satisfied, the notification by the specific notification means may be started as the start condition is satisfied ”.

Feature GJ5. In the specific game state, a remaining number monitor which monitors the number of remaining until a predetermined end condition of the specific game state is established (advantageously section remaining number of games ZG),
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, normal ending means for shifting from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (a normal ending condition is established in the second section display processing by the main control device 101) A function to execute an advantageous section end process based on
With
The specific termination means, on the basis that the number of execution grasped has reached the upper limit number of predetermined at the first detection means in a particular game state, the remaining grasped by the remaining number detection means Regardless of the number, the transition from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state,
The count of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means is started after the start condition is satisfied, whereas the count of the execution number grasped by the first grasping means is the start the gaming machine according to any one of the features GJ1 to GJ4, wherein the condition in which is started from the prior established.

  If the feature GJ1 is applied to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the significance of counting the prior state is further clarified.

  More specifically, “the counting of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means starts before the start condition is satisfied” is more specifically described as “obtained by the first grasping means. The execution number is counted before the start condition is satisfied and is started from the transition to the specific gaming state.

  Feature GJ6. Means capable of executing specific notification about correspondence information corresponding to the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means by a predetermined notifying means (processing for performing notification based on the pre-start game number command by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features GJ1 to GJ5, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a function of

  According to the said structure, a player can grasp | ascertain the execution number of a prior state by specific alerting | reporting. This makes it possible to predict the remaining benefit obtained in the specific gaming state in relation to the upper limit number, which can be used for selecting a gaming table or the like.

  Feature GJ7. It has a means (function to execute processing of Step S16106 by main controller 101) which can output correspondence information corresponding to the number of executions grasped by the 2nd grasping means to an external device. The gaming machine according to any one of features GJ1 to GJ6.

  As an external device, for example, a hall computer or a data device of a game hall is assumed, and if it is configured to output correspondence information corresponding to the number of executions in advance to these devices, the game hall manager, It is possible to clearly grasp the remaining degree of benefit of the specific gaming state that cannot be grasped only by the notification of the specific notification means. Therefore, for example, a game table with little remaining benefit of the specific game state when the store is closed can be used as information for eliminating the disadvantage of the player, such as performing a reset process.

  Feature GJ8. The increase / decrease number which is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the specific game state and the number of game media used in each game reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number. Based on this, the second specific ending means for shifting from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (forcibly ending the advantageous section when the upper limit increase number is reached in the section display second process by the main control device 101) The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics GJ1 to GJ7, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a function for executing processing.

  According to the above configuration, after the transition to the specific gaming state, when the increase / decrease number that is the subtraction of the number of paid out game media and the usage number reaches the upper limit increase number, it is forcibly terminated. It is possible to avoid an event in which the advantage exceeds the content intended by the designer. In such a configuration, when the number of game media decreases in the prior state and increases after the start condition is satisfied, the decrease in the prior state reaches the upper limit after the start condition is satisfied. As a result, the game state in the prior state greatly affects the benefits after the start condition is established. In that respect, since the number of executions in the prior state is grasped like the feature GJ1, it is possible to perform notification according to the benefit after the start condition is established based on the content.

  When the above configuration is applied to the feature GJ1, the “specific end means” of the feature GJ1 may be read as “first specific end means”.

<Feature GK group>
Features GK1. As gaming state, and acquisition expectations of game media is relatively high or low and low expected state (normal period) and a high expected state (advantageously interval) is set,
It reaches the maximum number increase speed change is predetermined which is the difference between the number of used payout and game media used in each game of each game of the game results game media paid out in accordance with the high expected state Based on this, specific end means for ending the high expectation state and shifting to the low expectation state (in the second section display processing by the main control device 101, the advantageous section is ended when the upper limit increase number is reached. A gaming machine having a function to execute processing)
The high expectation state is a real high expectation state (attack mode etc.) in which an increase in game media can be expected in each game after a prior high expectation state (previous section such as challenge mode) in which a decrease in game media can be expected in each game. Real increase section),
Grasping means (pre-start game number MG) for grasping the number of executions of the prior high expectation state;
Correspondence notification about the correspondence information corresponding to the number of executions grasped by the grasping means can be performed by correspondence notification executing means (first pre-start game number command or second start by the display control device 81). A function of performing a notification based on the previous game number command),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, there are a high expectation state and a low expectation state in which the expected degree of acquisition of game media is relatively high and low, and the high expectation state is the remaining number when the increase / decrease number of game media reaches the upper limit increase number. Regardless of the case, it may be forcibly terminated, so that the advantage of the high expectation state is suppressed from being extremely increased. The high expectation state is a configuration that shifts to a real high expectation state in which game media can increase in each game through a pre-high expectation state in which game media can decrease in each game. Therefore, the amount of increase from the transition to the real high expectation state until reaching the upper limit increase is added, and the gaming situation in the prior high expectation state greatly affects the benefits of the real high expectation state. In other words, the longer the period during which the game medium is decreasing, the greater the benefits that can be gained, and it is quite easy to configure the corresponding notification for the corresponding information corresponding to the period in which the phenomenon occurs. The frustration of the player not to shift to a substantially high expectation state can be eliminated. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  In the above configuration, “remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number until the predetermined end condition of the high expectation state is satisfied (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) and remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means” Based on the number, normal end means for ending the high expectation state and shifting to the low expectation state (in the second section display processing by the main controller 101, the advantageous section is terminated without the forced termination condition being satisfied. And a function to execute the process), and the “specific end means” as the game result of each game in the high expectation state regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Based on the fact that the number of increase / decrease, which is the difference between the number of game media paid out in response and the number of game media used in each game, has reached a predetermined upper limit increase number, Exit and above It may be expressed with a specific end means "to transition to the expected state.

  Feature GK2. The correspondence notification execution means is capable of executing, as the correspondence notification, an upper limit notification of information relating to an upper limit that can be increased in the subsequent substantially high expectation state (displaying expected number increasing!). The gaming machine described in feature GK1.

  According to the above configuration, the upper limit of the benefit that can be received in the subsequent real high expectation state is a response notification that is directly expressed, and the effect of eliminating irritation in the prior high expectation state can be suitably expected. For the purpose of a game, such as acquiring a game medium according to the result of each game and expecting an increase in the game medium, it is difficult to end the game in the pre-high expectation state. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to boost decision making for game continuation.

Feature GK3. Second grasping means for grasping the number of executions in the high expectation state (advantageous section game number AG);
Based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500), the second specific end to end the high expectation state and shift to the low expectation state and means (in a section view a second processing by the main control unit 101, a function of executing a process to end the advantageous section by forced termination condition is satisfied),
With
The gaming machine according to feature GK1 or feature GK2, wherein the second specific ending means ends the high expectation state even if the increase / decrease number does not reach the upper limit increase number.

  According to the above configuration, when the number of executions in the high expectation state reaches the upper limit number of games, the number of increase / decrease in game media is forcibly terminated even if the number of increase / decrease in games has not reached the upper limit increase number. The larger the number, the greater the number of increases that can be increased in the real high expectation state, and a trade-off with the number of executions in the high expectation state. In this way, in the pre-high expectation state, the number of increases that can be increased in the real high expectation state increases up to which stage, and from which stage the upper limit increases as the target of forced termination by the second specific termination means You can entertain the game while taking into account the fact that it will not reach the number. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the necessity of correspondence notification regarding the number of executions of the pre-high expectation state grasped by the grasping means and the interest in the aspect notification.

Feature GK4. The correspondence notification execution means includes, as the correspondence notification, upper limit notification means capable of performing an upper limit notification (displaying the expected number of sheets increasing!) Of information relating to an upper limit that can be increased in the substantially high expectation state thereafter.
Upper limit notifying means, the number of used game media to be used in each game from the expected payout of game media payout can be expected depending on the game result of the game in the case of performing the real high-expected state of the first number of game Each game from the substantial increase obtained by subtracting the number of games and the number of game media used in each game when the pre-high expectation state of the second game number obtained by subtracting the first game number from the upper limit game number is executed. total to the branch game to be the upper limit number increases, it can execute upper limit notification in the pre high expected state of the game of the real decrease of payout minus the expected payout of game media that can be expected according to the result The gaming machine according to Feature GK3, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the upper limit notification is performed in a range that does not lie in relation to the feature GK3. By doing so, it becomes possible to enhance the credibility of the upper limit notification and further enhance the effect of promoting the continuation of the game by the upper limit notification.

  Feature GK5. Substantial increase obtained by subtracting the number of game media used in each game from the expected number of game media to be paid out according to the game result of each game in the case of executing the substantial high expectation state of the first game number And according to the game result of each game from the number of game media used in each game when the pre-high expectation state of the second game number obtained by subtracting the first game number from the upper limit game number is executed. After the pre-high expectation state of the branch game in which the sum of the actual decrease amount obtained by subtracting the expected payout number of game media that can be paid out becomes the upper limit increase number is digested, the transition to the real high expectation state is completed. The gaming machine according to Feature GK3 or Feature GK4, wherein the degree of expectation is likely to be higher than before the branch game.

  According to the above configuration, the game can be boosted after the branch game in relation to the feature GK3. In other words, after the branch game, the number of increase that can be substantially increased will decrease, but the probability of transition to the real high expectation state will increase, so that the increase in game media can be expected relatively easily, The significance of playing games after the game is enhanced.

  Feature GK6. In the pre-high expectation state after the branch game, notification of information on the fact that the probability of transition to the real high expectation state is likely to be high (displaying the winning probability increasing!) Is displayed by a predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to Feature GK5, comprising executable means.

  According to the above configuration, since it is informed that it is in a state where it is easy to make a transition to the substantially high expectation state, the effect of eliminating the irritation in the prior high expectation state is suitable even when the branch game is exceeded. In the case of such a direct expression, it exceeds the branch game for the purpose of gaming, such as acquiring gaming media according to the outcome of each game and expecting an increase in gaming media. Even in such a situation, it is possible to make it difficult to end the game in a state of high expectations in advance. Therefore, it is possible to boost decision making for game continuation.

  Feature GK7. Any one of the characteristics GK1 to GK6 is provided with initialization means (function to execute reset processing by the main control device 101) capable of initializing at least the information of the increase / decrease number by a predetermined operation. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, a player can receive a sufficient benefit by playing a game, for example, when a game such as the feature GK1 is created, but there is almost no benefit of a substantially high expectation state. There are situations where it is not possible, and it is possible to eliminate the disadvantage of the player in such a situation.

  The “predetermined operation” preferably has a configuration that does not allow a player to perform a free operation. “An operation means (reset button) for performing the predetermined operation is provided, and the operation means can be operated by a player. It is good to set it as the structure provided in the impossible or difficult position, or "the predetermined operation according to the lottery result of each game."

  The technical ideas shown in the respective configurations of the other feature AA group to the feature GK group can be individually applied to the respective configurations of the feature AA group to the feature GK group detailed above. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

  A basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Slot machine as game machine, 32 ... Reel as circulating body, 41 ... Start lever as start operation means, 42-44 ... Stop switch as stop operation means, 64 ... Speaker which comprises auxiliary | assistant effect part, 65 ... an auxiliary display part constituting an auxiliary effect part, 68 ... an instruction monitor, N8 ... an eighth display segment as a section display, 81 ... a display control device as a sub-control board, 101 ... a main control device as a main control board , 102... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (7)

A plurality of circling bodies provided with a plurality of patterns in the circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the orbiting bodies;
Start operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
Based on the operation of the starting operation means, lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, Payout means capable of executing payout of a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is likely to be more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state are provided,
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state in the normal gaming state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state;
Based on the fact that the game state is shifted to the specific game state and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the specific notification means is turned on to start in-state notification, and the specific game state ends. Specific gaming state notifying means for terminating the notification during the state by setting the specific notifying means to an extinguished state,
First grasping means for grasping the number of executions of the specific gaming state;
Specific ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the fact that the execution number grasped by the first grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number;
Second grasping means for grasping the number of executions of the prior state until the start condition is satisfied after the transition to the specific gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:   The predetermined start condition includes an increasing condition that the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the specific game state is more likely to be greater than the number of game media used in each game. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is included. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, it is provided with a mode notification means capable of executing a mode notification related to the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode by a predetermined notification unit,
The predetermined start condition includes a notification condition that enables the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit to be executed,
The specific gaming state notifying means starts notification by the specific notifying means, assuming that the start condition is satisfied even when the notification condition and the increase condition are satisfied in a different game. The gaming machine according to claim 2. In the specific gaming state, remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number until a predetermined termination condition of the specific gaming state is satisfied;
Normal ending means for shifting from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means;
With
The specific termination means, on the basis that the number of execution grasped has reached the upper limit number of predetermined at the first detection means in a particular game state, the remaining grasped by the remaining number detection means Regardless of the number, the transition from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state,
The count of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means is started when the start condition is satisfied, while the count of the execution number grasped by the first grasping means is the start The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is started before the condition is satisfied.   5. The apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising: a unit capable of performing specific notification about correspondence information corresponding to the number of executions grasped by the second grasping unit by a predetermined notifying unit. The gaming machine described.   6. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising means capable of outputting correspondence information corresponding to the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means to an external device.   The increase / decrease number which is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the specific game state and the number of game media used in each game reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a second specific ending unit that shifts from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the fact.

Images